Samsung TV & AV 3D TV TV UN50ES6350F - Coréee du Sud - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM  - Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung

상세설명	등록일	언어	파일
User Manual	2012.09.10	ENGLISH	1.87 MB
User Manual	2012.09.10	한국어	6.42 MB
Skype Guide	2012.09.10	한국어	3.01 MB

http://www.samsung.com/sec/support/model/UN50ES6350F-downloads

Liste des manuels APPLEListe des produits Sony Liste des produits Dell Liste des Manuels Samsung Listes des Manuels Konica Minolta

Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-TC220W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9001-M8-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-Wi-Fi-GT-P5110-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels-Mode-d-emploi

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Galaxy-S-Advance-GT-I9070P-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-LE40C750-LE40C750R2W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32ES5500-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-UE32ES5500W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A676-LE40A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46B651-LE46B651T3W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE22D5010NW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Lecteur-MP3-MP4-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi%203.6-Noir-8GoYP-GS1CB-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE32EH5000-ZF-LED-32-FULL-HD-UE32EH5000W-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-blanc-SFR-GT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-7.0-Wi-FiGT-P3110-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P7300-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-Samsung-Galaxy-Note-noir-SFRGT-N7000-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE50ES6900S-ZF-Slim-LED-50-SMART-TV-3D-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55D6300SS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-46-UE46D6500WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE46D6500VS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32A676-LE32A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-PS63C7700-PS63C7700YS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-55-UE55D6200WXZF-serie-6-SMART-TV-3D-FULL-HD-LED-TVUE55D6200TS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE55ES6540S-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE40D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE32C450E1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40C530-LE40C530F1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-3D-UE46D6750WS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40B6000-UE40B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A556P1F-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE46C6710-UE46C6710US-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE40C5100QW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-PDP-PS50C530-PS50C530C1W-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-14-Serie-5-ULTRA-530U4B-NP530U4B-S01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Photo-Camescope-Compact-Samsung-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-Refrigerateur-DP-A306-L-Silver-RT37GBSS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-460DR-2-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT45JSTS-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME32B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Samsung-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT41MASW-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Tablette-GT-P6800-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-C24B550U-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-S5839I-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Lave-linge-frontal-Lave-linge-EcoBubble-12kg-1400tours-WF1124XBC-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Ampli-Tuner-AV-HW-E551-ZF-Barre-de-son-Format-46-Convertible-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Phone-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-NP300E5C-NP300E5C-AF2FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Climatiser-Une-Piece-AQV24PSBN-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE46C630K1W-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LED-UE37B6000VW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40A466-LE40A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE37A676-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Pompe-a-chaleur-Air-Eau-AVXDUH112EE-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-TV-LCD-LE40B651T3P-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Autres-Samsung-S5220GT-S5220-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-Serie-9-900X4C-NP900X4C-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59NBPN-Manuels

Samsung-Telephone-Mobile-Smartphones-GT-I9305-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Moniteur-LCD-S27B750V-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Refrigerateur-une-porte-RZ90HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME75B-Manuels

Samsung-Electromenager-Double-portes-RT59PMSW-Manuels

Samsung-Informatique-Ordinateur-Portable-13-3Serie-9-900X3A-NP900X3A-A01FR-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME40B-Manuels

Samsung-SGH-D500-Telephone-Mobile-GSM-Manuels

Samsung-Table-induction-3-foyers-7-2-KW-CTN463NC01-CTN463NC01-XEF-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Refrigerateur-une-porte-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-UE40D6510WS-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2160-Imprimante-Monochrome-Manuels

Samsung-TV-Audio-Video-Moniteur-Grande-taille-ME46B-Manuels

Samsung-LE37A466-LE37A466C2M-Manuels

Samsung-UE32EH4003W-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D460C9H-Manuels

Samsung-LE40B551A6W-Manuels

Samsung-Zephyr-AQV09YWAN-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels

SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels

Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels

Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels

Samsung-910MP-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels

Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels

Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels

Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels

Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels

Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels

Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels

Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels

Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel

Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels

Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels

Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels

Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels

Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels

Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels

Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels

Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels

Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels

Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels

17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels

40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels

CLX-3185FW Manuels

Galaxy Ace GT-S5830

Galaxy S II GT-I9100

Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16

Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16

Galaxy YGT-S5360

LE32C350 LE32C350D1W

LE40C630 LE40C630K1W

MM-C330D

MM-D330D

Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels

N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels

N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels

RSH5UEPN

SGH-F490

Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000

Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000

Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels

T23A550 T23A550

UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS

UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels

Wave 575 GT-S5750E

Wave II GT-S8530

16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung

16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung

samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels

Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels

Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir

Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U

Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B

SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste

Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu

Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD

Samsung B5722 Double SIM

Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles

Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310

Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB

Samsung batterie IA-BP420E

Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST

Samsung batterie SLB-10A

Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS

Samsung BD-E5300

Samsung BD-E5500 3D

Samsung BD-E8300 3D

Samsung C3050 Stratus

Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"

Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung

Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX

Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100

Samsung CB20A12

Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir

Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB

Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir

Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung CLP-C300A

Samsung CLP-K300A

Samsung CLP-M300A

Samsung CLP-Y300A

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S

Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series

Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi

Samsung E1150 - Silver

Samsung E2550

Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur

Samsung ES30 Noir

Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go

Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir

Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir

Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir

Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Flash SEF15A

Samsung Flash SEF20A

Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Note

Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G

Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67

Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung HT-D330

Samsung HT-D350

Samsung HT-D423

Samsung HT-D4500

Samsung HT-D5000 3D

Samsung HT-E4200 3D

Samsung HT-E4500 3D

Samsung HT-E5200 3D

Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi

Samsung HW-E450

Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)

Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220

Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm

Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm

Samsung LE40D550

Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir

Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB

SAMSUNG ME106V-SX

Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction

SAMSUNG ME82V-SX

SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002

Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500

Samsung ML-2010D3

Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi

Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung MLT-D1052S

Samsung MLT-D1082S

Samsung MLT-D1092S

Samsung MM-D430D

Samsung MV800 Noir

Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir

Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED

Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED

Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200

Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100

Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S

Samsung PL170 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go

Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge

Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal

Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir

Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante

Samsung PS43D450

Samsung PS43E450

Samsung PS43E490 3D

Samsung PS51E450

Samsung PS51E490 3D

Samsung PS59D530

Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go

Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED

Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED

Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes

Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT

Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED

Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D

Samsung S23B350H 23" LED

Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED

Samsung S27B350H 27" LED

Samsung SC4340 noir ébène

Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge

Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi

Samsung SCX-4200A

Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0

Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0

Samsung SLB07A pour ST50

Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000

Samsung ST65 Noir

Samsung ST65 Rouge

Samsung station d'accueil

Samsung station d'accueil HD2

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR

Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED

Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED

Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D

Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED

Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX

Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT

Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir

Samsung UE19D4010 LED

Samsung UE19ES4000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5410 LED

Samsung UE26EH4000 LED

Samsung UE26EH4500 LED

Samsung UE32D5000 LED

Samsung UE32EH4000 LED

Samsung UE32EH5000 LED

Samsung UE32ES5500 LED

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE40D5000 LED

Samsung UE40D5710 LED

Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D

Samsung UE40EH5000 LED

Samsung UE40ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D

Samsung UE46EH5000 LED

Samsung UE46ES5500 LED

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10

Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi

Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi

Samsung WB700 Noir

Samsung WB750 Noir

Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter

Samsung WMN250M accroche murale

Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose

Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go

http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000ZBESFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809172648710/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120716_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120611165201603/GT-P3110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120608_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-N7000RWASFR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201203/20120329200748757/GT-N7000_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.1_120126_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216180827802/GT-N7000_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.1_111104_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120809173956440/GT-P7510_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120809_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111205085630494/GT-P7510_UM_Orange_Honeycomb_Fre_Rev.1.0_111202_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201207/20120713085451049/GT-P7510_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P7510FKAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Orange_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120629_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201205/20120517111406195/GT-I9070P_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.0_120510_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120802111559199/GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201204/20120424154452484/GT-P3100_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120424_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201209/20120917105131603/GT-P3100_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120801_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-P5110TSAXEF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201208/20120810190309322/GT-P5110_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.0_120808_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201206/20120614144504602/GT-P5110_UM_EU_Icecream_Eng_Rev.1.0_120614_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I5800DKABOG-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201008/20100809184447671/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Fre_Rev.1.0_100722_cms.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201009/20100907222536765/GT-I5800_QSG_Open_Eng_Rev.1.1_100907a_cms.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525183942011/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_UK_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110525175249448/GT-I5800_QSG_EU_Froyo_Eng_Rev.1.1_110525_Screen.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201105/20110530173657729/GT-I5800_UM_Open_Froyo_Fre_Rev.1.1_110527_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9001HKDFTM-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111212155049797/GT-I9001_UM_EU_Gingerbread_Eng_Rev.1.3_111212_Screen.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/LF22TOWHBDN/EN-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201211/20121102145205481/BN68-03899A-04.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121108171138109/BN46-00315A-Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/NP550P5C-T04FR-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201211/20121113125618982/Win8_Manual_eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/UE32D5720RSXZF-downloads http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/EM/201105/20110517143435031/[UD5700-XN]BN68-03506F-03L04-0427.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Fre.pdf http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201112/20111216084511364/Web_W_X6DVBEUA_Eng.pdf http://www.samsung.com/fr/support/model/GT-I9000RWYSFR-downloads Skype™ Skype 시작하기 2 기존 계정으로 로그인하기 3 얼굴 인식으로 로그인하기 4 얼굴 등록하기 5 새로운 계정 생성하기 6 화면 표시 7 연락처 등록하기 8 전화 걸기 9 전화 받기 10 통화목록 11 Skype 옵션 12 음성 및 모션 인식 13 * 본 매뉴얼에 사용된 이미지 및 색상은 사전 예고 없이 변경될 수 있습니다.2 Skype 시작하기 Skype™를 이용하여 음성 및 영상 통화를 할 수 있습니다. O SMART HUB 기능을 통해 사용 가능합니다. ✎ 참고 x 삼성 웹 캠은 USB 허브를 이용하지 않고 TV에 바로 연결하시기 바랍니다. x 웹 캠이 정상적으로 작동하지 않을 경우에는 TV 전원을 껐다 다시 켠 후 Skype를 재실행 하시기 바랍니다. x TV 전원이 꺼진 상태에서는 Skype™ 사용이 불가능합니다. x 주변이 시끄러우면 통화 품질에 좋지 않은 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. x 무선 네트워크를 사용할 경우 통화 품질이 떨어질 수 있습니다. x Skype™ 소프트웨어를 사용하려면, Skype™ 사용자 라이선스 계약(Skypecom/legal/eula) 및 Skype™ 서비스 약관(Skypecom/legal/tos), Skype™ 개인정보 보호 정책(Skypecom/legal/privacy/general)에 명시된 제한사항을 준수해야 합니다. x Skype를 삭제하면 저장된 정보(통화목록 및 메뉴 설정 값)도 함께 삭제됩니다. x Skype™ 사용 관련 자세한 정보는 www.Skype.com 에서 확인하실 수 있습니다. x TV에서 Skype를 사용하려면 우선 네트워크 설정을 해야 합니다. 본 매뉴얼의 설정 방법을 참고하시기 바랍니다. x TV 시청 중이거나 Skype™ 어플리케이션 사용 중에 전화가 걸려오면 벨이 울립니다. x Skype를 사용하기 위해서는 카메라가 필요합니다. 카메라를 내장하지 않은 모델은 삼성 TV 카메라를 구입하여 사용하시기 바랍니다. x 2010년형 TV 카메라의 경우 2012년 출시된 삼성 TV와는 호환되지 않습니다. x 윈도우 기반 PC의 경우 Skype™ 버전 4.2 이상만 지원됩니다. x 매킨토시 PC의 경우 Skype™ 버전 5.0 이상만 지원됩니다. x Linux 기반 PC에서는 지원되지 않습니다.3 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! 로그인하기 계정 생성 R 복귀 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! Skypex이름 비밀번호 Skypex실행시x자동x로그인x하기 TV가x켜질x때x자동x로그인x하기 로그인하기 얼굴 인식 모드 [확인]키를x누르십시오 [확인]키를x누르십시오 기존 계정으로 로그인하기 2 Skype 이름과x비밀번호를x 입력하세요. Skype 이름과x비밀번호는x키패드를x이용하여x입력x합니다. 3 로그인하기를x누르세요. 1 로그인하기를x누르세요. TV에서 Skype를 처음 실행할 경우, Skype 이름과 비밀번호를 입력하여야 합니다. 또는 계정 생성 메뉴를 이용해 새로운 계정을 만들어 로그인 할 수도 있습니다. 로그인이 되지 않을 경우에는 네트워크 연결 상태를 확인하세요. Skypex이름을x입력하세요. Skype 이름 전체 삭제 삭제 한칸띄움 숫자자판 설정 확인 취소 17/324 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! Skype 이름 비밀번호 Skype 실행시 자동 로그인 하기 TV가 켜질 때 자동 로그인 하기 로그인하기 얼굴 인식 모드 [확인]키를 누르십시오 [확인]키를 누르십시오 R 복귀 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! 얼굴 인식으로 로그인을 진행합니다. 얼굴을 TV 화면 정면으로 향해주세요. 비밀번호 모드 중지 R 복귀 얼굴 인식으로 로그인하기 x SMART Interaction (음성 및 모션 인식)을 지원되는 TV에서는 얼굴 인식을 이용하여 Skype 로그인을 할 수 있습니다. [ 얼굴 인식 로그인 기능 작동을 위해 제품에 귀하의 얼굴 이미지가 썸네일 형태로 저장됩니다. [ 얼굴 인식을 이용한 로그인은 비밀번호를 사용하는 로그인보다 보안에 취약할 수 있습니다. 1 얼굴 인식 모드를 누르세요. 2 얼굴 인식을 시작합니다. • TV 화면 정면으로 얼굴을 맞춰주세요. TV가 자동으로 얼굴을 인식하여 로그인합니다.5 얼굴 등록하기 설정 Skypex옵션 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화x걸기 연락처 Skype 크레딧 : 0 계정 관리 비밀번호x변경 등록된x얼굴x초기화 얼굴 등록 R 복귀 1 설정 → 계정 관리 → 얼굴 등록을x 선택하세요. 얼굴 등록 화면 중앙에 얼굴이 들어오도록 설정해 주세요. 중앙에 있는 4각형이 녹색으로 바뀔 때까지 기다려 주세요. 중지 R 복귀 2 얼굴x인식x화면이x나타납니다. • 화면 중앙에 얼굴이 들어오도록 설정해 주세요. • 중앙에 있는 사각형이 녹색으로 바뀔 때까지 기다려 주세요.6 Skype에 오신것을 환영합니다! 로그인하기 계정 생성 R 복귀 새로운 계정 생성하기 1 계정 생성을x누르세요. 새로운xSkypex계정x생성 SkypexNamex생성 비밀번호 Skype에서x사용할x이름을x만들어x보세요. 친구에게xSkypex이름을x알려주면x친구가x자신의x연락처에 추가해서x온라인에서x대화를x나눌x수x있습니다. 로그인하거나x계정x관리에x사용합니다. 이전 다음 R 복귀 비밀번호x저장 2 새로x만들xSkype Name 생성과x비밀번호를x 입력하세요. 3 성명과x이메일을x입력하세요. 새로운xSkypex계정x생성 성명 이메일 여기에x입력한x이름이x친구의x연락처에x표시됩니다. 계정에x엑세스가x안되거나x비밀번호를x잊어버린x경우xEmail이x필요합니다. 이전 다음 R 복귀 새로운xSkypex계정x생성 이용약관 동의 약관 보기 개인정보 취급방침 보기 긴급전화로 사용 불가. Skype는 일반적인 전화를 대체할 수 없으며, 긴급 전화로 사용할 수 없습니다. 네. 아래 내용을 읽었으며, 이에 동의합니다. 이전 동의 R 복귀 4 동의를x선택하세요. 각 항목을 선택하면 자세한 약관 내용을 확인할 수 있습니다. 7 영상 통화 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화하기 a 로그아웃 { 연락처 추가 R 복귀 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 화면 표시 Skype™x사용자x이름, 온라인x상태,x기분을x나타내는x 메시지,x프로필x사진이x 표시됩니다. 연락처x목록이x표시됩니다. 영상 통화,x음성 통화,x대화 하기x중x 원하는x모드를x선택할x수x있습니다. Skypex크레딧 연락처, 대화, 통화목록, 일반전화로 전화 걸기, 설정 중 원하는 메뉴를 선택합니다. 메뉴를 선택한 상태에서 ENTERE 버튼을 누른 후 스크롤 해서 원하는 항목을 선택합니다. axx로그아웃:x로그아웃x합니다. {xx연락처 추가:xSkype™x연락처x또는x전화번호를x등록합니다. R 복귀 / 통화 종료:xx이전x메뉴로x이동합니다./ Skype™x어플리케이션을x종료합니다. 이x때x통화도x함께x종료됩니다.8 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 대화하기 연락처x종류를x선택하세요. 연락처 추가 Skype 연락처 추가 전화번호 추가 R 복귀 영상 통화 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화하기 a 로그아웃 { 연락처 추가 R 복귀 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 연락처 등록하기 1 { 연락처 추가를x누르세요. 2 원하는x항목을x선택하세요. • Skype 연락처 추가: 등록할 사람의 이름, Skype 사용자 이름 또는 이메일 주소를 입력하세요. • 전화번호 추가: 이름과 전화번호를 입력하세요.9 영상 통화 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화하기 a 로그아웃 { 연락처 추가 R 복귀 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 1/1 페이지 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echo / Sound Test Service 대화하기 전화 거는 중 취소 samsung_skype1 • 화면 표시 내용은 설명을 위해 그려진 것으로 실제의 모양과 부분적으로 다를 수 있습니다. 전화 걸기 1 영상 통화x또는 음성 통화를x선택하세요. 영상 통화 음성 통화 통화 시간 00:03:10 통화 종료 영상 통화 마이크 볼륨 대기 T 간편 메뉴 } 연락처 목록 R 복귀 통화x시간 00:00:42 통화 종료 카메라 끄기 마이크 볼륨 대기 T 간편 메뉴 b 전체 화면 } 연락처 목록 R 복귀10 통화 시간 00:00:42 통화 종료 카메라 끄기 마이크 볼륨 대기 T 간편 메뉴 b 전체 화면 } 연락처 목록 R 복귀 • 컨퍼런스콜 수신 중에는 비디오 메뉴를 사용할 수 없습니다. 통화 시간 00:03:10 통화 종료 영상 통화 마이크 볼륨 대기 T 간편 메뉴 } 연락처 목록 R 복귀 전화 받기 영상 통화 또는 음성 통화 중일 때  통화 종료 :x통화를x종료합니다.  카메라 끄기:x카메라를x끕니다.  마이크 볼륨:x마이크x음량을x조절합니다.  대기 / 재시작:x통화를x대기x/x재시작x합니다. ✎ 통화 대기 상태는 메시지를 통해 상대방에게 표시됩니다.  영상 통화:x영상x통화x모드로x전환합니다. x B (전체 화면):x전체x화면x모드로x전환합니다. x D (연락처 목록):x연락처x목록을x보여줍니다. samsung_skype1 님의 전화... 영상 통화 음성 통화 거절 영상 통화 음성 통화 통화를x거절합니다.11 프로필 보기 보이스메일x보내기 연락처x추가 차단 목록에서x삭제 로그아웃 R 복귀 영상 통화 페이지 통화목록 대화 연락처 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 통화목록 통화목록의 각 항목 옆에는 아이콘이 표시됩니다. 아이콘 내용 수신 전화 발신 전화 부재중 전화 수신 보이스메일 부재중 보이스메일 수신 컨퍼런스콜 부재중 컨퍼런스콜 • 프로필 보기: 선택한 연락처 사용자의 프로필을 확인할 수 있습니다. • 보이스메일 보내기: 선택한 연락처로 보이스메일을 보낼 수 있습니다. • 연락처 추가: 선택한 사람을 연락처 목록에 추가합니다. 이 메뉴는 연락처 목록에 저장되어 있지 않은 사람에 한해 사용 가능합니다. • 차단: 선택한 사람의 연락을 차단합니다. • 목록에서 삭제: 선택한 항목을 통화목록에서 삭제할 수 있습니다. • 로그아웃: 로그아웃 합니다. ✎ 통화목록 저장 개수는 메모리 용량에 따라 제한될 수 있습니다. ✎ TV에 설정된 시간이 통화목록에 적용됩니다. 최근 통화 날짜 순으로 전화 통화 이력을 확인할 수 있습니다. 간편 메뉴12 설정 Skype 옵션 a 로그아웃 R 복귀 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화x걸기 연락처 온라인x상태x표시 프로필x설정 사진x변경 계정x관리 Skype 크레딧 : 0 일반 설정 Skype 옵션 R 복귀 비디오x설정 사생활보호x설정 차단된x연락처 착신통화x전환 보이스x메일 Skypex소개 TV가x시작할x때xxSkypex실행: 친구가x로그인할x경우x알림x메시지x표시: 끄기 끄기 Skype 옵션 1 설정 → Skype 옵션을x 선택하세요. 2 각x해당x항목을x설정할x수x있습니다. • 일반 설정: TV 전원이 켜지면 자동으로 Skype를 실행할지 여부를 선택합니다. • 비디오 설정: 비디오 관련 개인정보 설정 값을 조정합니다. 영상 전화 수신 허용 범위를 설정합니다. 모두에게 허용, 내 연락처 목록에 있는 사람에게만 허용, 허용하지 않음 중에서 원하는 항목을 선택하세요. • 사생활보호 설정: 전화 수신 허용 범위를 설정합니다. 누구든지 또는 내 연락처 목록에 있는 사람에게만 허용 중에서 원하는 항목을 선택하세요. • 차단된 연락처: 통화를 원하지 않는 사람의 Skype™ 사용자 이름이나 전화 번호를 입력해 전화 수신을 차단할 수 있습니다. 차단 연락처 목록이 이 창에 표시됩니다. 연락처 목록이나 통화 목록에서 원하는 연락처를 선택한 후 간편메뉴T 버튼을 눌러 번호를 차단할 수도 있습니다. • 착신통화 전환: 착신 전환할 전화 번호를 등록하면 Skype에 로그인 되어 있지 않은 상태에서도 Skype™ 계정으로 걸려오는 전화를 등록한 번호로 전환해 받을 수 있습니다. 국가를 선택한 후 전화 번호(지역번호 포함)를 입력하세요. 전환 시간을 입력하여 착신통화 전환이 이루어질 때까지 소요되는 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다. 이 기능을 사용하려면 www.Skype.com에서 Skype 크레딧을 구입해야 합니다. • 보이스메일: 부재중일 때 발신자가 음성 메시지를 남길 수 있는 기능입니다. Skype에 로그인하면 어디서든 음성 메시지를 확인할 수 있습니다. www. Skype.com에 접속한 후 Account를 클릭하면 자세한 내용 및 보이스메일 확인이 가능합니다. • Skype 소개: Skype™ 저작권 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다.13 음성 및 모션 인식 1 "하이 티비 (시작 명령어)"를x말한x후,x전화걸x사용자x 이름을x말하세요. x SMART Interaction (음성 및 모션 인식)을 지원하는 TV에서는 Skype에서 음성 및 모션 인식을 이용하여 통화 및 조작이 가능합니다. x 통화 중에는 음성 인식 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. x 상대방 이름이 특수 문자를 포함한 경우나 단순 알파벳, 숫자 조합으로 되어있는 경우 등, 발음하기 어려운 이름은 인식이 안될 수 있습니다. 이름 변경 기능을 이용하여 발음하기 쉬운 새로운 이름으로 변경 후 사용할 수 있습니다. x 더 자세한 정보는 e-설명서 또는 사용자 설명서의 “Smart Interaction”을 참고하세요. 영상 통화 스마트 티비 하이x티비 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 Hello world! 대화하기 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echox/xSoundxTestxService 전화걸 사용자 이름을 말하세요. a 취소 영상 통화 영상 통화 Smart TV HIxTV 음성 통화 음성 통화 1/1 페이지 Hello world! 대화하기 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echox/xSoundxTestxService a 로그아웃 { 연락처 추가 T 간편 메뉴 R 취소 1/1 페이지 Hello world! 대화하기 연락처 대화 통화목록 일반전화로 전화 걸기 설정 Skype 크레딧 : 0 Echox/xSoundxTestxService 취소 전화 거는 중 취소 young470 3 영상통화x또는x음성통화를x말하면x 통화가x시작됩니다. 2 영상 통화, 음성 통화, 취소 중x 원하는x명령어를x말하세요. BN81-07665A-1015 본 제품은 대한민국에서만 사용하도록 만들어져 있으며, 해외에서는 품질을 보증하지 않습니다. (FOR KOREA UNIT STANDARD ONLY) "안전을 위한 주의사항" 사용자의 안전을 지키고 재산상의 손해 등을 막기 위한 내용입니다. 반드시 읽고 올바르게 사용해 주세요. 사용설명서 상의 그림은 설명을 위해 그려진 것으로 실제의 모양과 부분적으로 다를 수 있습니다. 고객지원 제품 사용 설명서 0_XTATSCE-cover.indd 1 2012-09-04 11:13:583 차례 1. 채널 메뉴 채널 메뉴 사용하기 .................... 5 채널 기억하기 .......................10 기타 기능 ...........................11 2. 기본 기능 화면 모드 변경하기 ...................12 화면 조정값 설정하기 .................12 화면 크기 변경하기 ...................13 부가 설정 변경하기 ...................14 TV를 모니터로 사용하기 ..............16 기본 음향 모드 변경하기...............17 음향 효과 변경하기 ...................17 3. 설정 기능 네트워크 연결하기....................19 유선 네트워크 설정하기 ...............22 무선 네트워크 설정하기 ...............23 네트워크 기기 관리하기 ...............26 시간 설정하기 .......................28 자녀 보호 기능 설정하기...............29 에코 절전 설정.......................30 키보드와 마우스로 TV 이용하기........31 TV와 Samsung Audio Device 연결하기............................32 기타 기능 ...........................33 고객지원 메뉴 .......................36 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 3 2012-09-04 9:23:364 차례 4. 고급 기능 입체영상 시청하기....................39 스마트 허브 .........................41 스마트 허브 화면 설정하기.............44 Samsung Apps 사용하기 ...........48 스마트 검색 .........................49 스마트 팁 NAVER...................50 패밀리 스토리 .......................52 피트니스............................53 키즈................................54 웹브라우저 ..........................56 Skype.............................59 TV 애플리케이션으로 에어컨 이용하기 ..59 AllShare Play .....................60 AllShare Play 이용하기 .............63 마이 리스트 (AllShare Play) .........63 동영상 (AllShare Play)..............64 사진 (AllShare Play) ...............66 음악 (AllShare Play) ...............68 녹화된 TV (AllShare Play) ..........70 타임시프트 ..........................72 DLNA 기능 사용하기.................73 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC).............75 5. 기타 기능 문제 해결 ...........................77 지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식 .....85 도난 방지용 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 ..........87 라이선스 정보 .......................88 화면 조정 메뉴 (OSD: On Screen Display) 구조 ...89 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 4 2012-09-04 9:23:375 채널 메뉴 사용하기 채널 ™ → 채널 채널을 등록하고 삭제할 수 있으며,선호채널을 설정하고 아날로그 채널의 이름을 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 전체: 수신되는 모든 채널을 보여줍니다. ● 등록된 채널: TV에 등록된 채널을 보여줍니다. 일반 리모컨의 채널목록 버튼을 눌렀을 때 나타납니다. ● 선호목록 1 ~ 선호목록 5: 설정할 수 있는 선호목록은 최대 5개입니다. 선호목록의 이름을 변경하려면, 리모컨을 이용해 각각의 선호목록에서 b를 선택하세요. ● 최근 시청: 가장 최근에 시청했던 채널을 보여줍니다. ● 최다 시청: 자주 시청한 채널을 보여줍니다. 채널에서 버튼 사용하기 ● b 삭제: 선택된 채널을 삭제합니다. ● ` 상세 정보: 선택된 채널의 상세 정보를 보여줍니다. ● k 페이지: 다음 페이지나 이전 페이지로 이동합니다. ● E 선택 / 선택 취소: 채널을 선택하거나 선택을 취소합니다. ● T 간편 메뉴: 설정 메뉴를 보여줍니다. ● R 복귀: 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. 채널에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ● 등록 / 삭제: 채널 목록에서 채널을 등록하거나 삭제합니다. 리모컨의 채널 버튼을 이용하여 채널 변경 시 등록된 채널만 시청할 수 있습니다. ▼ 채널 등록하기 1 채널 화면에서 전체를 선택합니다. 2 전체 목록에서 회색으로 표시된 채널을 선택합니다. 선택한 채널 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 하나 이상의 채널을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 선택을 취소하려면 선택한 채널을 다시 선택하세요. c 마크가 사라집니다. ■ 삭제된 채널은 회색으로 표시됩니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 4 등록을 선택하세요. “선택한 채널이 등록되었습니다.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 확인을 선택하세요. ■ 등록은 삭제된 채널에서만 나타납니다. ■ 등록하거나 삭제할 수 있는 모든 채널은 전체 목록에서 볼 수 있습니다. 1. 채널 메뉴 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 5 2012-09-04 9:23:386 ▼ 채널 목록에서 채널 삭제하기 1 채널을 지우려면 왼쪽의 채널 목록을 선택하세요. 2 선택한 채널 목록에서 오른쪽으로 이동해 지우려는 채널을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 하나 이상의 채널을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 선택을 취소하려면 선택한 채널을 다시 선택하세요. c 마크가 사라집니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 4 삭제를 선택하세요. “선택한 채널이 삭제되었습니다.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 확인을 선택하세요. ■ 채널을 바로 삭제하려면, 리모컨을 이용해 b를 선택하세요. ■ 최근 시청, 최다 시청, 선호목록의 채널을 삭제하면 해당 채널 목록에서 채널이 없어지지만 전체, 등록된 채널 목록에서는 삭제되지 않습니다. ● 선호목록 편집: 간편 메뉴를 실행해 즐겨보는 채널을 선호채널로 설정하거나, 선호채널 목록에서 채널을 삭제할 수 있습니다. ▼ 선호채널 설정하기 1 전체 또는 등록된 채널을 선택합니다. 2 선호목록에 등록하려는 채널을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 하나 이상의 채널을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 선택을 취소하려면 선택한 채널을 다시 선택하세요. c 마크가 사라집니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 4 선호목록 편집을 선택하세요. 선호목록 편집 화면이 나타납니다. 5 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하면 선택된 채널이 선호목록으로 이동합니다. ■ 선호목록 편집 화면에서도 채널을 등록할 수 있습니다. ■ 5개의 선호목록에 채널을 등록할 수 있습니다. 선호목록을 변경하려면 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택하세요. }를 선택할 때마다 선호목록이 변경됩니다. 6 확인을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널이 선호채널로 등록이 완료되며 선택한 선호목록에서 확인할 수 있습니다. 7 선호목록으로 설정된 채널은 “ ” 이 나타납니다. ▼ 선호목록 편집에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 ● 선호목록 편집 화면의 왼쪽 등록된 채널 항목에서 다음의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. – a 등록: 선호목록으로 이동합니다. – } 선호목록 변경: 선호목록을 변경합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택할 때마다 선호목록이 변경됩니다. – Ÿ이동: 리모컨을 이용해 번호를 입력하면, 입력한 채널로 이동합니다. – R 복귀: 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. ● 선호목록 편집 화면의 오른쪽 선호목록 항목에서 다음의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. – a 삭제: 선택된 채널을 삭제합니다. 하나 이상의 채널을 선택해 동시에 삭제할 수 있습니다. 선택한 채널에는 c 마크가 나타납니다. – b 순서변경: 선호목록 채널의 순서를 변경합니다.z – E 완료: 순서변경이 완료됩니다. 순서 변경 기능을 이용할 때 나타납니다. – { 복사: 원하는 채널을 다른 선호목록에도 넣을 수 있습니다. – } 선호목록 변경: 선호목록을 변경합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택할 때마다 선호목록이 변경됩니다. – Ÿ이동: 리모컨을 이용해 번호를 입력하면, 입력한 채널로 이동합니다. – R 복귀: 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 6 2012-09-04 9:23:387 1. 채널 메뉴 ▼ 선호목록에서 채널 삭제하기 1 선호목록 1 ~ 선호목록 5 중 하나의 선호목록을 선택합니다. 2 선호목록에서 지우려는 채널을 선택합니다. 선택한 채널 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 하나 이상의 채널을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 선택을 취소하려면 선택한 채널을 다시 선택하세요. c 마크가 사라집니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 4 삭제를 선택하세요. “선택한 항목을 삭제하겠습니까?”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 5 확인을 선택하세요. “선택한 항목이 삭제되었습니다.” 라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 선호목록의 채널을 바로 삭제하려면, 리모컨을 이용해 b 를 누르세요. ● 채널 잠금 설정: 자녀가 유해한 채널을 시청하지 못하도록 특정 채널의 시청을 제한할 수 있습니다. ■ 채널 잠금 기능을 켜기로 설정했을 때, 채널 잠금 설정을 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 셋톱박스 등 외부기기로 HDMI, 컴포넌트, 외부입력에 연결하여 시청 중인 경우에는 해당 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. ■ 초기 비밀번호는 “0-0-0-0”입니다. ● 채널 이름 변경: 채널의 이름은 5글자를 넘길 수 없습니다. 아날로그 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 전체 선택 / 선택 취소: 채널 목록에 있는 모든 채널을 선택합니다. / 선택한 모든 채널을 취소합니다. ▼ 채널 상태 표시 아이콘 ● : 아날로그 채널 ● : 선호목록으로 설정된 채널 ● : 채널 잠금이 설정된 채널 예약 관리 ™ → 예약 관리 원하는 날짜와 시간에 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약을 설정할 수 있습니다. 먼저 현재 시간을 설정해야 합니다. 메뉴 → 시스템 → 시간 설정 → 현재 시간에서 설정할 수 있습니다. 시청 예약하기 1 예약 관리 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하세요. 시청 예약을 선택하세요. 2 신호, 채널, 반복 및 시작 시간을 설정하세요 ● 신호: 원하는 방송 유형을 선택합니다. DTV 일반, DTV 유선, 일반, 유선을 선택할 수 있습니다. 방송 유형은 채널 메뉴(메뉴 → 채널 → DTV 채널 선택)에서 일반 방송, 유선 방송 선택에 따라 달라집니다. ● 채널: 원하는 채널을 설정합니다. 단, 등록된 채널에 등록된 채널만 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 반복: 한 번, 요일선택, 토~일, 월~금 또는 매일 중 원하는 주기를 설정할 수 있습니다. 선택한 요일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 날짜: 원하는 날짜를 설정합니다. 날짜 설정은 반복 설정에서 한 번이 선택되었을 때 가능합니다. ● 시작 시간: 원하는 시작 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다. 3 원하는 설정을 완료한 후 확인을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널이 시청 예약됩니다. 예약 관리 화면에서 시청 예약 목록을 확인할 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 7 2012-09-04 9:23:398 녹화 예약하기 디지털 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. 1 예약 관리 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하세요. 녹화 예약을 선택하세요. ■ 녹화된 TV는 5,400rpm 이상 USB HDD 장치 연결을 권장합니다. 단, RAID 타입 USB HDD 는 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 장치 성능 검사를 완료한 USB 장치만 녹화 예약이 가능합니다. 2 신호, 채널, 반복, 날짜, 시작 시간 및 종료 시간을 설정하세요. ● 신호: DTV 일반, DTV 유선을 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 채널: 원하는 디지털 채널을 설정합니다. ● 반복: 한 번, 요일선택, 토~일, 월~금 또는 매일 중 원하는 주기를 설정할 수 있습니다. 선택한 요일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 날짜: 원하는 날짜를 설정합니다. 날짜 설정은 반복 설정에서 한 번이 선택되었을 때 가능합니다. ● 시작 시간: 원하는 시작 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 종료 시간: 원하는 종료 시간으로 설정할 수 있습니다. 3 설정을 완료한 후 확인을 선택하세요. 선택한 채널과 시간에 녹화가 진행될 것입니다. ■ 예약 관리 화면에서 녹화 예약 목록을 확인할 수 있습니다 ■ 녹화할 수 있는 시간은 최대 360분입니다. ■ 녹화가 완료된 목록은 예약 관리 화면의 결과 목록 또는 ™ → AllShare Play → 녹화된 TV에서 확인할 수 있습니다. 시청 예약 및 녹화 예약 목록 삭제하기 1 예약 관리 화면에서 지우려는 항목을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 3 예약 취소를 선택하세요. “예약을 취소하겠습니까?” 라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 4 예를 선택하세요. 예약이 취소됩니다. 예약 목록에서 항목을 선택하고, 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 상세정보 창이 나타납니다. 상세 정보 창에서 예약을 변경하거나 취소할 수 있습니다. 예약된 항목에서 간편메뉴T 버튼 사용하기 ● 예약 편집: 시청 및 녹화 예약의 세부 사항을 변경합니다. ● 예약 취소: 시청 및 녹화 예약을 취소합니다. ● 상세 정보: 시청 및 녹화 예약한 프로그램에 대한 정보를 확인하고, 예약 취소와 예약 편집을 할 수 있습니다. ● 편집 모드: 예약된 목록 중 예약 취소할 목록을 선택합니다. 선택한 항목 왼쪽에 c 마크가 나타납니다. ● 복귀: 이전 화면으로 돌아갑니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 8 2012-09-04 9:23:409 1. 채널 메뉴 채널 목록 채널 목록, 프로그램 세부 정보, 선호채널, 시청 및 녹화 예약된 방송을 확인할 수 있습니다. 1 리모컨을 이용해 채널목록 버튼을 누르세요. 채널 목록 화면이 나타납니다. 2 채널 및 채널 목록을 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 등록된 채널: 등록된 채널을 보여줍니다. ● 선호 목록 1 ~ 선호목록 5: 5개의 선호목록을 보여줍니다. 각각의 선호목록은 개별적으로 구성되어 있습니다. 단, 선호목록 안의 채널은 선호채널이 등록되어 있을 때에만 보여줍니다. ▼ 채널 목록에서 버튼 사용하기 ● a 신호: 원하는 방송 유형을 선택합니다. ● { 프로그램 보기 / 채널 보기: 프로그램 보기는 디지털 채널에서만 가능합니다. 채널 보기에서 디지털 채널을 선택했다면, 프로그램 보기를 선택할 수 있습니다. 해당 디지털 채널의 시간대 별 프로그램 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. 다시 한번 { 를 선택하면 채널 보기로 전환됩니다. ● l r 채널 모드 / 채널: 선호 채널이 등록되었다면 채널 보기 화면에 등록된 채널 목록과 선호 채널 목록을 보여줍니다. / { 프로그램 보기 화면에서는 채널을 변경하지 않고, 다른 채널의 프로그램 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. ● E 시청: 선택한 채널을 시청합니다. 프로그램 보기에서 다음 프로그램을 선택하면 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약, 예약된 프로그램에 한하여 예약 취소 기능을 선택할 수 있습니다. 디지털 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● k 페이지: 이전 또는 다음 목록으로 이동합니다. ▼ 채널 상태 표시 아이콘 ● : 아날로그 채널 ● : 시청 예약된 채널 ● : 녹화 예약된 채널 ● : 채널 잠금이 설정된 채널 채널 목록에서 시청 예약, 녹화 예약 이용하기 디지털 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. 채널 목록에서 { 프로그램 보기를 이용해 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약을 할 수 있습니다. 1 리모컨의 채널목록 버튼을 누르세요. 채널 목록 화면이 나타납니다. 2 원하는 디지털 채널을 선택하세요. 3 리모컨을 이용해 {를 선택하세요. 선택한 채널의 프로그램 목록이 나타납니다. 4 프로그램 목록에서 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약할 프로그램을 선택하고 리모컨을 이용해 상세 정보를 선택하세요. 5 상세 정보 화면에서 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약을 선택하세요. 선택된 프로그램을 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약 설정을 합니다. 시청 예약 또는 녹화 예약을 취소하려면 1~4단계를 실행하여 예약 취소를 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 9 2012-09-04 9:23:4010 방송 프로그램 정보 디지털 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 현재 시청하는 방송 프로그램에 대한 정보 및 다음 프로그램 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 방송 프로그램 정보에서 버튼 사용하기 ● a 상세 정보: 현재 시청 중인 프로그램에 대해 시청 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. 다음 방송을 선택하면 시청 예약 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. 레코더 바로 녹화 기능과 녹화예약 기능에 대한 자세한 사항은 “고급 기능 → 녹화된 TV(AllShare Play)”를 참고하세요. ● l r: 현재 시청 중인 방송 프로그램 이후 프로그램에 대한 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. 현재 시간이 설정되어 있고 방송 정보가 존재하는 경우에만 다음 방송이 표시됩니다. ▼ 채널 상태 표시 아이콘 ● : 시청 예약된 채널 ● : 녹화 예약된 채널 채널 기억하기 DTV 채널 선택 메뉴 → 채널 → DTV 채널 선택 디지털 방송을 수신할 방송 유형을 설정한 후에 채널 메뉴에서 채널을 기억하고 등록할 수 있습니다. 일반 방송, 유선 방송 선택하기 1 DTV 채널 선택 메뉴를 선택하세요. 2 TV에 수신되는 방송 유형을 선택하세요. 자동 채널 설정 메뉴 → 채널 → 자동 채널 설정 수신되는 모든 채널을 자동으로 검색하여 저장합니다. 자동 채널 설정 시작하기 1 자동 채널 설정 메뉴로 이동하세요. 2 시작을 선택하면 자동 채널 설정을 시작합니다. 3 채널 설정이 완료되면 확인을 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 10 2012-09-04 9:23:4111 1. 채널 메뉴 3D 채널 보기 메뉴 → 채널 → 3D 채널 보기 (LED 5500 모델 미지원) 3D 전용 채널 시청 여부를 설정할 수 있습니다. 3D 채널이 보이지 않을 경우, 자동 채널 설정을 통해 3D 채널을 설정하세요. 현재 시청 중인 프로그램이 3D 방송을 지원할 경우, 화면 하단에 안내 메시지가 나옵니다. 안내 메시지에 따라 채널을 이동하여, 3D 방송을 시청하세요. 3D 채널 시청을 원하지 않는 경우에는 끄기를 선택하세요. 3D 채널 보기가 끄기 상태이면, 채널 목록, 방송 안내에서 3D 채널이 보이지 않습니다. 기타 기능 채널 미세 조정 메뉴 → 채널 → 채널 미세 조정 아날로그 채널에서만 설정할 수 있습니다. 화면 상태가 불안정할 때 화면을 깨끗하게 만들 수 있습니다. 화면이 깨끗해질 때까지 리모컨을 이용해 조정하세요. 조정이 완료되면 저장 또는 닫기를 선택합니다. ■ 채널 미세 조정으로 저장된 채널은 채널 숫자 오른쪽에 별표 “*” 모양이 나타납니다. ■ 미세 조정된 채널을 초기화하려면 채널 미세 조정 창에서 초기화를 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 11 2012-09-04 9:23:4212 화면 모드 변경하기 화면 모드 메뉴 → 화면 → 화면 모드 영상물의 종류나 시청 환경에 맞추어 화면 모드를 최적의 상태로 선택할 수 있습니다. HDMI/DVI 케이블로 컴퓨터와 연결하여 모니터로 사용할 경우, 화면 모드는 표준 화면 또는 동영상 모드만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 선명한 화면: TV를 시청할 때, 주변이 밝다면 이 모드를 선택하세요. 화면을 보다 선명하게 볼 수 있습니다. ● 표준 화면: 일반적으로 가정에서 시청하기에 적합한 표준 화면 모드입니다. ● 최적 화면 (LED TV에만 해당): 실물을 보는 듯 자연에 가깝고 눈에 편안한 화질로 볼 수 있습니다. ● 영화 화면: 영화를 볼 때 선택하세요. 주위가 어둡거나 눈이 피로할 때도 화면을 편안하게 볼 수 있습니다. ● 동영상 모드: 게임을 실행하거나, 동영상을 볼 때 선택하세요. 화면을 보다 생동감 있게 볼 수 있습니다. HDMI/DVI 케이블을 통해 TV와 컴퓨터가 연결되어 있을 때만 가능합니다. 화면 조정값 설정하기 백라이트 조정 (LED TV에만 해당) / 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV 에만 해당) 메뉴 → 화면 → 백라이트 조정 / 패널 밝기 조정 화소의 밝기를 조정합니다. 가장 큰 밝기는 20입니다. 명암 메뉴 → 화면 → 명암 명암을 조절합니다. 명암 대비가 100에 가까울 수록 차이가 커집니다. 밝기 메뉴 → 화면 → 밝기 화면 전체의 밝기를 조절합니다. 100에 가까울 수록 화면 전체가 밝아집니다. 백라이트 조정 / 패널 밝기 조정 만큼 효과적이지는 않습니다. 2. 기본 기능 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 12 2012-09-04 9:23:4313 2. 기본 기능 선명도 메뉴 → 화면 → 선명도 사물 윤곽의 선명도를 조절합니다. 100에 가까울수록 선명해집니다. 색농도 메뉴 → 화면 → 색농도 화면 전체의 색농도를 조절합니다. 100에 가까울수록 색이 짙어집니다. 색상 (녹/적) 메뉴 → 화면 → 색상(녹/적) 적 100에 가까울수록 빨간색이 짙어지고, 녹 100에 가까울수록 초록색이 짙어집니다. 화질 조정하기 1 조정하려는 설정 메뉴를 선택하면, 설정 값을 변경할 수 있는 슬라이드 바가 나타납니다. 2 리모컨을 이용해 설정 값을 변경하세요. ■ 설정 값을 변경하면 화면 메뉴도 변경됩니다. ■ 컴퓨터를 연결했을 때는 색농도와 색상 (녹/적)은 조정할 수 없습니다. ■ TV에 연결된 외부기기의 설정을 조정하고 저장할 수 있습니다. ■ 화면 밝기를 낮추면 전력 소모가 줄어듭니다. 화면 크기 변경하기 화면 조정 메뉴 → 화면 → 화면 조정 화면 크기, 비율 등 화면에 관한 설정을 할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 크기: 케이블 박스나 위성 수신기가 있다면 기기에 맞는 설정을 해주세요. 삼성전자는 TV화면 크기를 16:9로 사용할 것을 권장합니다. 16:9: DVD나 와이드 방송에 맞는 16:9 비율의 화면 크기입니다. 확대1: 상단과 측면을 잘라 적당히 확대합니다. 확대2: 확대 1 보다 더욱 확대한 화면을 보여줍니다. 와이드 맞춤: 화면의 비율을 확대하여 전체화면에 맞춰줍니다. 16:9 비율의 720p, 1080i에서 동작합니다. 4:3: 기본 4:3모드로 화면을 설정합니다. 4:3 화면 크기로 너무 오래 시청하지 마세요. 화면의 상, 하, 좌, 우에 표시되는 경계선 흔적 때문에 잔상 (화면 열화)이 발생할 수 있으며, 이러한 문제는 보증이 되지 않습니다. 원본 크기: 디지털 채널(1080i, 1080p) 또는 HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p), 컴포넌트 (1080i / 1080p)로 연결해서 보는 경우에 화면의 잘림 없이 원본 화면 상태로 보여주는 화면 크기입니다. 스마트뷰 1 (LED TV에만 해당): 16:9 화면을 50% 축소한 화면입니다. 스마트뷰 2 (LED TV에만 해당): 16:9 화면을 25% 축소한 화면입니다. ■ 스마트뷰 1은 HDMI 모드에서만 선택할 수 있으며, 스마트뷰 2는 디지털 채널 또는 HDMI 모드 시청 시 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ AllShare Play에서 동영상 콘텐츠를 재생할 때 화면 크기는 해상도에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 13 2012-09-04 9:23:4514 ● 위치 선택: 화면의 위치를 조정할 수 있습니다. 확대1, 확대2, 와이드 맞춤, 원본 크기에서만 설정 가능합니다. 디지털 채널에서 원본 크기를 선택할 경우, 위치를 선택할 수 없습니다. ▼ 확대1, 확대2, 와이드 맞춤, 원본 크기에서 위치 설정하기 1 위치 선택을 선택하세요. 2 위치 선택 화면에서 위치 선택을 선택한 다음 리모컨을 이용해 화면을 상, 하로 움직여 원하는 위치를 선택합니다. 3 화면 이동이 완료된 후, 위치 선택을 선택하고 닫기를 선택하세요. 화면 위치를 초기화하려면 초기화를 선택합니다. ▼ 외부 입력에 따라 선택 가능한 화면 크기 입력 모드 화면 크기 아날로그 채널, 외부입력 16:9, 확대1, 확대2, 4:3 컴포넌트 (480i, 480p) 16:9, 확대1, 확대2, 4:3 컴포넌트 (720p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3 컴포넌트 (1080i, 1080p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3, 원본 크기 디지털 채널 (720p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3, 스마트뷰 2 (LED TV에만 해당) 디지털 채널 (1080i, 1080p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3, 원본 크기, 스마트뷰 2 (LED TV에만 해당) HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p) 16:9, 와이드 맞춤, 4:3, 원본 크기, 스마트뷰 1 (LED TV에만 해당), 스마트뷰 2 (LED TV에만 해당) ■ 외부 입력에 따라 화면 크기는 달라질 수 있습니다. ■ 선택한 모드에 따라 사용 가능한 설정이 달라질 수 있습니다. ■ HD(고화질): 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080), 720p (1280x720) ■ TV 입력 단자에 연결한 외부기기 별로 설정을 조정하여 저장할 수 있습니다. 부가 설정 변경하기 고급 설정 메뉴 → 화면 → 고급 설정 색상, 명암 등을 세부 조정하여 원하는 화면을 만들 수 있습니다. ■ 고급 설정은 화면 모드가 표준 화면 또는 영화 화면으로 설정되어 있을 때 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ HDMI/DVI 케이블을 이용해 컴퓨터와 TV를 연결한 경우에는 화이트 밸런스와 감마 기능만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 자동 명암 조정: 화면의 명암을 자동으로 조정합니다. ● 블랙 톤 조정: 검은 색의 농도를 조정해 화면의 깊이감을 향상시킵니다. ● 피부색 조정: 피부색을 조정할 수 있습니다. ● 색상 보정 기능: 색상과 색 농도를 조정하기 위해 영상신호의 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색 중 한가지를 선택하여 조정합니다. ● 색 재현 범위: 표현할 수 있는 다양한 색의 범위를 선택합니다. 색 재현 범위를 조정하려면 사용자 조정으로 설정하세요. (LED 5500 모델 미지원) ● 화이트 밸런스 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원): 자연스러운 화면을 위해 색의 느낌을 조정합니다. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색 등 각 색상의 명도를 조정합니다. R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색 등 각 색상의 밝기를 조정합니다. 초기화: 화이트 밸런스를 기본 설정으로 초기화합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 14 2012-09-04 9:23:4515 2. 기본 기능 ● 10p 화이트 밸런스 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원): 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색의 밝기를 10 개 구간으로 나누어서 각 구간의 화이트 밸런스를 조정합니다. ■ 화면 모드가 영화 화면으로 설정되었을 때 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 일부 외부기기는 이 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. 구간: 화면 조정 구간을 선택합니다. 빨간색: 빨간색 비율을 조정합니다. 초록색: 초록색 비율을 조정합니다. 파란색: 파란색 비율을 조정합니다. 초기화: 10p 화이트 밸런스를 기본 설정으로 초기화합니다. ● 감마: 영상의 중간 밝기를 조절합니다. ● 전문가 패턴 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원): 표준 화질을 조정할 수 있는 전문가 패턴을 보여줍니다. 화면을 조정한 상태에서 메뉴 창이 사라지거나 화면 메뉴 외에 다른 메뉴 창이 활성화되면, 조정한 값이 저장된 후 전문가 패턴 창이 사라집니다. 끄기: 전문가 패턴 기능을 해제합니다. 패턴1: 밝은 부분과 어두운 부분을 조정하는 패턴입니다. 패턴2: 색 농도와 색상을 조정하는 패턴입니다. ■ 패턴1 또는 패턴2의 고급 설정으로 원하는 효과를 얻을 수 있습니다. ■ 전문가 패턴이 실행 중에는 소리가 나오지 않습니다. ■ 디지털 채널, 컴포넌트 또는 HDMI 모드일때만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● xvYCC (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원): HDMI 또는 컴포넌트 입력 단자에 연결한 DVD 플레이어와 같은 외부 기기로 영화를 볼 때 xvYCC 모드를 설정하여 세부묘사와 색 재현 범위를 개선합니다. ■ 화면 모드를 영화 화면으로 설정하고 외부 입력을 HDMI 또는 컴포넌트로 설정할 때 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 일부 외부 기기는 이 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ● 모션 라이팅: 화면의 움직임에 따라 밝기를 조정하여 소비 전력을 줄여줍니다. ■ 표준 화면 모드에서만 가능합니다. ■ 입체영상 모드에서는 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 백라이트 조정 (LED TV에만 해당) / 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV 에만 해당), 명암 또는 밝기를 변경하면 모션 라이팅 설정은 자동으로 꺼집니다. 부가 설정 메뉴 → 화면 → 부가 설정 부가적인 화면 설정 기능을 사용하여 가장 알맞은 화면을 만들 수 있습니다. HDMI/DVI를 이용해 TV와 컴퓨터를 연결할 경우, 바탕색 조정만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 바탕색 조정: 화면 바탕색의 느낌을 조절할 수 있습니다. ■ 화면 모드가 선명한 화면일 경우 따뜻하게1, 따뜻하게2는 선택할 수 없습니다. ■ TV 입력 단자에 연결된 각각의 외부 기기 설정을 조정하고 저장할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 잡음 제거: 수신 되는 방송 신호가 약할 때, 화면이 떨리거나 점선이 생기는 현상을 줄여 줍니다. 자동 시각화: 아날로그 채널로 바꿀 때 신호강도를 표시합니다. ■ 신호가 약할 때, 사용할 수 있는 설정을 최대한 선택하세요. ■ 아날로그 채널에서만 지원합니다. ■ 최상의 신호를 수신할 때 막대가 녹색이 됩니다. ● 동영상 잡음 제거: 동영상의 잡음을 제거하여 화질을 높여줍니다. ● HDMI 블랙 레벨: 블랙 레벨을 선택하여 화면의 깊이감을 조정합니다. HDMI 모드에서만 가능합니다. ● 필름모드: 영화 프로그램을 보기에 적합한 모드입니다. 필름 모드를 자동으로 설정하면 영화 프로그램을 시청하기 위한 최적의 화질 상태로 설정됩니다. TV, 외부입력, 컴포넌트(480i/1080i)와 HDMI(1080i)에서만 가능합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 15 2012-09-04 9:23:4616 ● Auto Motion Plus (LED 6350 모델 이상 지원): 움직임이 많은 영상에서 잔상과 화면 떨림을 제거합니다. 잔상 제거: 영상의 잔상 제거 레벨을 조절합니다. 화면 떨림 제거: 필름 영상의 화면 떨림 제거 레벨을 조정합니다. 초기화: 사용자 조정을 초기화합니다. ■ TV의 정보 화면에는 수신 비디오 신호 (60Hz) 의 해상도와 주파수가 표시됩니다.이 때 표시되는 주파수는 Auto Motion Plus 기능을 사용할 때 TV에 표시되는 주파수가 아닙니다. ■ Auto Motion Plus 설정이 사용자 조정으로 선택되었을 때만 잔상 제거, 화면 떨림 제거 기능을 사용할 수 있으며, 초기화를 사용하여 초기화할 수 있습니다. ■ Auto Motion Plus에서 기능 보기를 설정 하면 켰을 때와 껐을 때의 화면을 비교할 수 있습니다. ● 빠른 영상 모드(LED TV에만 해당): 움직임이 많은 장면에서 화면 밀림 현상을 없애 선명한 화면을 제공합니다. 선명한 화면, 표준 화면, 영화 화면 모드에서만 가능합니다. 화면 초기화 메뉴 → 화면 → 화면 초기화 화면 설정을 처음 상태로 초기화합니다. TV를 모니터로 사용하기 TV를 컴퓨터 모니터로 사용하기 컴퓨터 디스플레이 설정하기 (윈도우즈 7 기준) TV를 컴퓨터 모니터로 사용하려면 올바른 디스플레이 설정을 해야 합니다. ■ 윈도우즈의 버전과 비디오 카드에 따라 진행이 다를 수 있습니다. ■ 기본 정보는 대부분의 경우 공통으로 적용 됩니다. ( 만약 그렇지 않다면 컴퓨터 제조 업체 또는 삼성전자 매장에 문의하세요.) 1 윈도우즈 시작 메뉴에서 “제어판”을 클릭하세요. 2 “제어판” 창에서 “모양 및 테마”를 클릭하면 대화 창이 나타납니다. 3 “디스플레이”를 클릭하면 다른 대화 창이 나타납니다. 4 화면 대화 창의 "설정"을 클릭하세요. ● 설정 탭에서 정확한 해상도를 설정하세요. 최적 해상도는 1920 x 1080입니다. ● 디스플레이 설정 대화 상자에 수직 주파수 옵션이 있는 경우 그 정확한 값은 “60”, 즉 “60Hz”입니다. 수직 주파수 옵션이 없다면 “확인”을 클릭하고 대화 창을 종료합니다 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 16 2012-09-04 9:23:4717 2. 기본 기능 기본 음향 모드 변경하기 음향 모드 메뉴 → 음향 → 음향 모드 음악 감상, 영화 감상, 뉴스 시청 등의 상황에 맞게 음향 모드를 설정할 수 있습니다. 스피커 선택이 외부 스피커로 설정된 경우에는 음향 모드를 설정할 수 없습니다. ● 표준으로 들을 때: 일반적으로 어떤 영상물에나 잘 어울리는 음향 모드입니다. ● 음악을 들을 때: 살아있는 원음 그대로 감상할 수 있습니다. ● 영화를 볼 때: 영화를 볼 때 가장 적합한 음향을 제공합니다. (저음이 강조된 웅장한 음향을 즐기고자 할 때 선택하세요.) ● 뉴스를 들을 때: 또렷한 목소리를 듣고자 할 때 선택하세요. ● 실버: 난청자 및 고령자를 위한 청취모드 입니다. 음향 효과 변경하기 음향 효과 메뉴 → 음향 → 음향 효과 ■ 스피커 선택이 외부 스피커로 설정된 경우, 음향 효과를 설정할 수 없습니다. ■ 음향 모드가 표준으로 들을 때로 선택된 경우에만 설정할 수 있습니다. ● SRS TruSurround HD: 영화관이나 콘서트 홀에서처럼 생생한 입체음향을 즐길 수 있습니다. ● SRS TruDialog: 켜기를 선택하면, 배경음의 음량은 유지하면서 사람의 말소리를 강조합니다. ● 이퀄라이저: 좌우 스피커의 음량과 고음, 저음을 원하는 대로 조절할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 슬라이더 바의 설정 값을 변경할 수 있습니다. 이퀄라이저를 초기화하려면 초기화를 선택한 후, 예를 선택하세요.종료하려면 닫기를 선택하세요. 음균형 좌/우: 오른쪽 및 왼쪽 스피커의 음균형을 조정합니다. 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (대역폭 조정): 특정 대역폭 주파수의 레벨을 조정합니다. 초기화: 기본 설정으로 이퀄라이저를 초기화합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 17 2012-09-04 9:23:4718 방송 음성 설정 메뉴 → 음향 → 방송 음성 설정 ● 선호 언어 (디지털 채널에만 해당): 디지털 방송은 여러 개의 음성언어를 포함할 수 있으므로 자신이 듣고 싶은 방송 언어로 설정할 수 있습니다. 방송되는 언어에서만 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 스테레오 설정 (아날로그 채널에만 해당): 스테레오를 자동 또는 수동으로 설정합니다. ● 음성 다중 (아날로그 채널에만 해당): 방송은 하나 이상의 오디오 트랙을 전송할 수 있으며 방송 상황에 따라 음성 다중 기능을 선택합니다. 방송신호나 프로그램에 따라 달라질 수 있습니다. SPDIF 출력 메뉴 → 음향 → SPDIF 출력 SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital Interface)는 간섭과 왜곡을 줄일 수 있는 AV수신기와 홈시어터 같은 다양한 디지털 장치와 스피커에 디지털 오디오 출력을 제공합니다. ● 오디오 형식: 디지털 오디오 출력 (SPDIF) 형식을 선택할 수 있습니다. 디지털 오디오 출력 (SPDIF) 은 입력소스에 따라 달라질 수 있습니다. ● 지연시간 조정: TV에서 출력되는 소리를 AV 리시버와 같은 외부기기를 통해서 들을 때, TV 의 영상과 외부기기를 통해 나오는 소리 사이에 시간적 차이가 발생할 때 사용합니다. 지연시간 조정을 선택하면 설정 값을 조정할 수 있는 슬라이더 바가 나타납니다.리모컨을 이용해 조정하세요. (0~250ms) 스피커설정 메뉴 → 음향 → 스피커 설정 ● 스피커 선택: 방송이나 영화를 감상할 때, TV 에 내장된 스피커 대신 홈시어터의 스피커를 통해 소리를 들을 수 있습니다. 방송의 사운드 트랙을 들을 때 소리 반향이 생길 수 있습니다. 이런 현상이 나타나면 TV 스피커 설정을 외부 스피커로 선택하세요. ■ 스피커 선택이 외부 스피커로 선택된 경우, TV 스피커는 꺼집니다. 이런 경우 외부 스피커를 통해서만 들을 수 있습니다. 스피커 선택이 TV 스피커로 설정된 경우 TV 스피커와 외부 스피커 모두 들을 수 있습니다. ■ 스피커 선택을 외부 스피커로 설정하면 음량 버튼과 음소거 기능을 사용할 수 없으며 음향 설정 기능이 제한됩니다. ■ 비디오 신호가 없으면 TV 스피커와 외부 스피커는 음소거 됩니다. ● 자동 음량: 채널에 따라 음성 신호의 크기가 다르게 느껴지는 경우가 있습니다. 전 채널의 음량을 자동적으로 서로 비슷하게 맞춰줍니다. 보통: 다른 채널로 변경할 때 음량을 자동 조절합니다. 심야: 낮은 음량으로 자동 조절됩니다. 심야 모드는 음량을 낮춰 밤에 시청할 때 효과적입니다. 연결된 외부기기의 음량을 조정하려면 자동 음량 기능을 끄세요. 자동 음량이 보통이나 심야로 설정되어 있으면 외부기기의 음량을 조절할 수 없습니다. 음향 초기화 메뉴 → 음향 → 음향 초기화 모든 음향 설정을 기본값으로 초기화합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 18 2012-09-04 9:23:4819 네트워크 연결하기 유선 네트워크 연결하기 다음 세 가지 방식으로 TV와 인터넷을 연결할 수 있습니다. ▼ 외장형 모뎀을 사용하는 환경 벽면 단자 TV LAN 단자 모뎀 케이블 LAN 케이블 외장 모뎀 (ADSL/VDSL/케이블 TV) ▼ 외장형 모뎀과 IP 공유기를 사용하는 환경 벽면 단자 TV LAN 단자 모뎀 케이블 LAN 케이블 LAN 케이블 외장 모뎀 (ADSL/ VDSL/케이블 TV) IP 공유기 ▼ 벽면 LAN 단자에 직접 연결하여 사용하는 환경 벽면 단자 TV LAN 단자 LAN 케이블 ■ 동적 네트워크를 사용하는 경우에는 DHCP( 호스트 구성 프로토콜)를 지원하는 ADSL 모뎀이나 공유기를 사용해야 합니다. DHCP를 지원하는 모뎀 및 공유기는 인터넷을 접속하는 데 필요한 IP 주소, 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값을 자동으로 제공하므로, 수동으로 입력할 필요가 없습니다. 대부분의 가정용 네트워크는 동적 네트워크입니다. ■ 고정 IP 주소가 필요한 네트워크도 있습니다. 고정 IP 주소가 필요한 네트워크에서는 네트워크 연결을 설정할 때 TV의 네트워크 설정 화면에서 IP 주소,서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값을 수동으로 입력해야 합니다. IP 주소, 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값은 인터넷 통신사(ISP)에 문의해서 확인하세요. ■ 고정 IP 주소가 필요한 네트워크에서는 DHCP를 지원하는 ADSL 모뎀을 사용할 수 있습니다. DHCP 를 지원하는 ADSL 모뎀을 통해 고정 IP 주소를 사용할 수도 있습니다. 3. 설정 기능 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 19 2012-09-04 9:23:5020 무선 네트워크 연결하기 (LED 5500, 6350, PDP 550 모델에만 해당) 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터(WIS09ABGN, WIS12ABGNX)를 이용해 TV와 무선 인터넷 공유기와 연결해 인터넷에 연결할 수 있습니다. 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결하기 전에, TV가 켜져 있는지 확인하세요. USB 허브나, USB 외장케이블을 통해 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결했을 경우, 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터가 인식되지 않을 수 있습니다. 무선 공유기 (DHCP 서버를 지원하는 공유기) 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터 벽면 LAN 단자 TV 뒷면 USB 단자 LAN 케이블 이 제품은 IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n 방식의 통신 프로토콜을 지원합니다. 삼성전자는 IEEE 802.11n 사용을 권장합니다. 네트워크 연결을 통해 동영상을 재생하면, 원활하게 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 인터넷을 무선으로 연결하려면, 무선 IP 공유기 ( 라우터 또는 모뎀)에 TV를 연결해야 합니다. 무선 IP 공유기가 DHCP를 지원하면, DHCP나 고정 IP 주소를 사용하여 인터넷에 연결할 수 있습니다. ■ 무선 IP 공유기의 채널을 현재 사용하지 않는 채널로 선택하세요. 무선 IP 공유기에서 설정한 채널을 인근에 다른 장치가 사용하고 있는 경우, 간섭 통신 장애가 발생할 수 있습니다. ■ 다음의 무선 네트워크 보안 프로토콜만 지원합니다. - 인증모드: WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK - 암호화 유형: WEP, TKIP, AES ■ 공유기를 Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11n 모드로 설정하고, 보안 암호화 유형을 WEP 또는 TKIP로 설정한 경우, 삼성 TV는 새로운 Wi-Fi 인증 표준에 따라 연결을 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 무선 라우터에서 WPS를 지원하는 경우에는 PBC 또는 PIN을 통해 네트워크에 연결할 수 있습니다. WPS는 두 모드에서 SSID 및 WPA 키를 모두 자동으로 구성합니다. ■ 인증되지 않은 무선 IP 공유기의 경우, TV에 연결할 수 없습니다. ■ 연결방법: 다음의 4가지 방법으로 무선 네트워크 연결을 설정할 수 있습니다. - 자동 설정 (자동 네트워크 탐색 기능을 이용) - 수동 설정 - WPS (PBC) - Plug & Access 참조 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 TV에 연결하면, 화질이 저하되거나 일부 채널에 전파 장애가 나타날 수 있습니다. 이 경우에는 다음 중 한 가지 방법으로 연결을 설정하거나, USB 케이블을 사용해서 무선 간섭을 받지 않는 장소에 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결하세요. ▼ 방법 1: USB 직각 어댑터로 연결하기 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델에만 해당) USB 직각 어댑터를 사용해서 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 TV에 연결하세요. 1 USB 직각 어댑터를 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터에 연결하세요. 2 직각 어댑터의 다른쪽 끝을 USB (HDD 5V 1A) 단자에 연결하세요. 해당 이미지는 모델별로 다를 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 20 2012-09-04 9:23:5121 3. 설정 기능 ▼ 방법 2: 연장선으로 연결하기 (LED 5500, 6350, PDP 550 모델에만 해당) 연장 케이블을 이용해 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 TV 에 연결하세요. 1 연장선을 USB 1 (HDD 5V 1A) 단자에 연결하세요. 2 연장 케이블과 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결하세요. 3 양면 테이프를 사용해서 TV 뒷면 위쪽에 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 부착하세요. 해당 이미지는 모델별로 다를 수 있습니다. 무선 네트워크 연결하기 (LED 6400 모델 이상 해당) 표준 라우터나 모뎀으로 TV와 인터넷을 연결할 수 있습니다. 무선 공유기 (DHCP 서버를 지원하는 공유기) 벽면 LAN 단자 LAN 케이블 이 제품은 IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n 방식의 통신 프로토콜을 지원합니다. 삼성전자는 IEEE 802.11n 사용을 권장합니다. 네트워크 연결을 통해 동영상을 재생하면, 원활하게 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 인터넷을 무선으로 연결하려면, 무선 IP 공유기 ( 라우터 또는 모뎀)에 TV를 연결해야 합니다. 무선 IP 공유기가 DHCP를 지원하면, DHCP나 고정 IP 주소를 사용하여 인터넷에 연결할 수 있습니다. ■ 무선 IP 공유기의 채널을 현재 사용하지 않는 채널로 선택하세요. 무선 IP 공유기에서 설정한 채널을 인근에 다른 장치가 사용하고 있는 경우, 간섭 통신 장애가 발생할 수 있습니다. ■ 다음의 무선 네트워크 보안 프로토콜만 지원합니다. - 인증모드: WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK - 암호화 유형: WEP, TKIP, AES ■ 공유기를 Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11n 모드로 설정하고, 보안 암호화 유형을 WEP 또는 TKIP로 설정한 경우, 삼성 TV는 새로운 Wi-Fi 인증 표준에 따라 연결을 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 무선 라우터에서 WPS를 지원하는 경우에는 PBC 또는 PIN을 통해 네트워크에 연결할 수 있습니다. WPS는 두 모드에서 SSID 및 WPA 키를 모두 자동으로 구성합니다. ■ 인증되지 않은 무선 IP 공유기의 경우, TV에 연결할 수 없습니다. ■ 연결방법: 다음의 4가지 방법으로 무선 네트워크 연결을 설정할 수 있습니다. - 자동 설정 (자동 네트워크 탐색 기능을 이용) - 수동 설정 - WPS (PBC) - Plug & Access [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 21 2012-09-04 9:23:5222 유선 네트워크 설정하기 네트워크 설정 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정 TV에 네트워크를 연결하여 스마트 허브, AllShare Play 등 다양한 인터넷 서비스 및 소프트웨어 업데이트를 사용할 수 있습니다. 자동 유선 네트워크 설정 DHCP를 지원하는 네트워크에 TV가 연결된 경우 자동으로 유선 네트워크 연결을 설정할 수 있습니다. LAN 케이블이 연결된 경우 바로 유선 네트워크를 연결하는 팝업 창이 나타납니다. ▼ 자동으로 유선 네트워크 설정하기 1 네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 선택하세요. 네트워크 설정을 시작합니다. (메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정) 2 네트워크 테스트 화면이 나타나면 네트워크 연결을 확인하세요. 네트워크 연결이 확인되면 “인터넷에 정상적으로 연결되었습니다. 인터넷 서비스 이용에 문제가 있을 경우에는 인터넷 서비스 제공업체에 문의하세요.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. ■ 연결에 실패했을 경우, LAN 포트 연결을 확인하세요. ■ 자동으로 네트워크 정보를 가져오지 못하거나, 수동 IP를 설정하려면 “수동 네트워크 설정”으로 이동하세요. 수동 유선 네트워크 설정 고정 IP를 사용해야 하는 때에는 수동으로 유선 네트워크에 연결 할 수 있습니다. IP 주소, 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값은 인터넷 통신사(ISP)에 문의해서 확인하세요. ▼ 수동으로 유선 네트워크 설정하기 1 네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 누르세요. 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타납니다. (메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정) 2 중지를 선택하세요. 네트워크 검색이 중단됩니다. 네트워크 연결 화면에서 IP 설정을 선택하세요. IP 설정 화면이 나타납니다. 3 IP 설정 방법을 선택하고 IP 설정 방법을 수동 입력으로 설정하세요. 4 IP 주소 입력 창으로 이동한 후 IP 주소를 선택하세요. 5 리모컨을 이용해 첫 번째 항목에 IP 주소를 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 다음 항목으로 이동하세요. 6 다음 항목의 IP 주소를 입력이 완료되면 다음 항목으로 이동하세요. 7 각 IP 주소 입력 창에 리모컨을 이용해 IP 주소를 설정합니다. 숫자 입력을 잘못했을 때는 정확한 번호로 다시 입력하세요. 8 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 서버 모두 같은 방법으로 입력합니다. 9 입력을 완료하면, 확인을 선택하세요. 네트워크 테스트 화면이 나타납니다. 연결이 확인되면 “ 인터넷에 정상적으로 연결되었습니다. 인터넷 서비스 이용에 문제가 있을 경우에는 인터넷 서비스 제공업체에 문의하세요.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 22 2012-09-04 9:23:5323 3. 설정 기능 네트워크 상태 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 상태 현재 네트워크와 인터넷 상태를 확인합니다. 유선 네트워크 연결에 실패했을 경우 ● 네트워크 케이블을 찾을 수 없습니다. 네트워크 케이블 연결을 확인하세요. 네트워크 케이블이 이미 연결된 경우에는 공유기의 전원이 켜져 있는지 확인하고 전원을 껐다 켜세요. ● IP를 자동으로 설정하지 못하였습니다. 자동 설정을 위해 다음을 확인하거나 IP 설정에서 수동으로 설정하세요. 공유기의 DHCP 서버 동작이 켜져 있는지 확인하고, 전원을 리셋해 보세요. 자세한 사항은 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 네트워크에 연결할 수 없습니다. 다음 사항을 확인하세요. IP 설정에서 설정이 올바른지 확인하세요. DHCP 서버가 공유기에서 활성화 되어 있는지 확인하고 분리한 후 다시 꽂아주세요. 자세한 사항은 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 내부망에는 연결되었으나 인터넷에 연결할 수 없습니다. 공유기 외부망 LAN 단자에 인터넷 LAN 케이블 연결 여부를 확인하세요. IP 설정에서 DNS 설정 값을 확인하세요. 문제가 지속될 경우, 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 네트워크 설정에 성공하였으나 인터넷에 연결할 수 없습니다. 문제가 지속될 경우, 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. 무선 네트워크 설정하기 네트워크 설정 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정 TV에 네트워크를 연결하여 스마트 허브, AllShare Play 등 다양한 인터넷 서비스를 이용할 수 있으며, 소프트웨어 업그레이드를 할 수 있습니다. 자동 무선 네트워크 설정 대부분의 무선 네트워크에서 보안을 설정할 수 있습니다. 보안이 설정된 무선 네트워크에 연결할 때, 일반적인 문자 또는 특정 길이의 단어와 숫자의 조합으로 구성된 보안키를 만들 수 있습니다. 수동이나 자동으로 네트워크를 연결할 때 이 방법을 사용하려면 문자열로 구성된 비밀번호를 입력해야 합니다. ▼ 자동 무선 네트워크 연결하기 1 네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 선택하세요. 네트워크 설정을 시작합니다. (메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정) 2 연결할 수 있는 무선 네트워크를 탐색합니다. 탐색이 끝나면 연결할 수 있는 네트워크들이 나타납니다. 3 연결하려는 네트워크를 선택하고 다음을 선택하세요. 연결하려는 무선 IP 공유기가 나타나지 않으면 네트워크 추가를 선택하고 네트워크 명 (SSID)과 보안키를 입력하세요. 4 화면에 보안키 입력 창이 나타나면 5단계로 이동하세요. 보안키 입력이 필요 없는 무선 공유기를 선택하려면 7단계로 이동하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 23 2012-09-04 9:23:5424 5 무선 공유기에 설정된 보안키를 입력하세요. ■ 보안키 (비밀번호 또는 PIN)를 리모컨을 이용하여 입력하세요. ■ 무선 공유기나 모뎀의 연결을 설정하는 화면에서 비밀번호를 확인할 수 있습니다. 6 보안키 입력을 완료하고 다음을 선택하세요. 7 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타나면, 확인을 선택하세요. 연결이 확인되면 “인터넷에 정상적으로 연결되었습니다. 인터넷 서비스 이용에 문제가 있을 경우에는 인터넷 서비스 제공업체에 문의하세요.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. ■ 보안키가 정확하지 않을 경우 다시시도를 선택하거나 IP 설정을 선택하여 수동으로 네트워크를 설정합니다. ■ 수동으로 네트워크 연결을 설정하려면 IP 설정을 선택하여 수동으로 네트워크를 설정하세요. 수동 무선 네트워크 설정 고정 IP 주소를 요구하는 네트워크나 자동 네트워크 연결에 실패했을 때, 수동으로 무선 네트워크에 연결할 수 있습니다. IP 주소, 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 값은 인터넷 통신사(ISP)에 문의해서 확인하세요. ▼ 수동으로 무선 네트워크 설정하기 1 네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 선택하면, 네트워크 설정을 시작합니다.(메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정) 2 연결 가능한 무선 네트워크를 탐색합니다. 탐색이 완료되면 연결할 수 있는 네트워크 목록을 보여줍니다. 3 네트워크 목록에서 연결할 네트워크를 선택하고 다음을 선택하세요. 무선 IP 공유기가 등록되지 않았으면 네트워크 추가를 선택하여 네트워크 명 (SSID)과 보안키를 입력합니다. 4 보안키 입력 창이 나타나면 5단계로 이동하세요. 보안키 입력이 필요 없는 무선 IP 공유기를 선택했으면 7단계로 이동하세요. 5 무선 공유기에 설정된 보안키를 입력하세요. ■ 보안키 (비밀번호 또는 PIN)를 리모컨을 이용하여 입력하세요. ■ IP 공유기나 모뎀의 연결을 설정하는 화면에서 비밀번호를 확인할 수 있습니다. 6 보안키 입력을 완료하고 다음을 선택하세요. 7 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타나면, 중지를 선택하세요. 연결 확인 취소 화면이 나타납니다. IP 설정을 선택하세요. IP 설정 화면이 나타납니다. 8 IP 설정 방법을 선택하고 IP 설정 방법을 수동 입력으로 설정하세요. 9 IP 주소 입력 창으로 이동한 후 IP 주소를 선택하세요. 10 리모컨을 이용해 첫 번째 항목에 IP 주소를 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 다음 항목으로 이동하세요. 11 다음 항목의 IP 주소를 입력이 완료되면 다음 항목으로 이동하세요. 12 각 IP 주소 입력 창에 리모컨을 이용해 IP 주소를 설정합니다. 숫자 입력을 잘못했을 때는 정확한 번호로 다시 입력하세요. 13 서브넷 마스크, 게이트웨이, DNS 서버 모두 같은 방법으로 입력합니다. 14 입력을 완료하면, 확인을 선택하세요. 네트워크 테스트 화면이 나타납니다. 연결이 확인되면 “ 인터넷에 정상적으로 연결되었습니다. 인터넷 서비스 이용에 문제가 있을 경우에는 인터넷 서비스 제공업체에 문의하세요.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 24 2012-09-04 9:23:5425 3. 설정 기능 WPS(PBC) 네트워크 설정 WPS(PBC) 버튼이 있는 무선 공유기일 경우 WPS(PBC) 버튼을 이용하여 보다 쉽게 무선 네트워크에 연결할 수 있습니다. ▼ WPS(PBC)를 이용해 네트워크 연결하기 1 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 설정네트워크 설정 화면에서 시작을 선택하세요. 2 연결할 수 있는 무선 네트워크를 탐색하고 연결 가능한 네트워크 목록이 나타납니다. 3 WPS(PBC)를 선택하세요. 4 2분 이내로 IP 공유기의 WPS(PBC) 버튼을 누르세요. 자동으로 필요한 모든 네트워크 설정 정보를 확보하고 네트워크에 연결합니다. 5 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타나고 네트워크 설정은 완료됩니다. Plug & Access 네트워크 설정 Plug & Access 기능으로 USB 장치를 이용해 삼성 무선 공유기와 TV를 쉽게 연결할 수 있습니다. 타사 무선 공유기가 Plug & Access를 지원하지 않으면, 다른 방법으로 연결해야 합니다. Plug & Access을 지원하는 기기는 인터넷 홈페이지 “http://www.samsung.com/sec”에서 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ Plug & Access를 이용해 네트워크 연결하기 1 무선 공유기와 TV의 전원을 켜세요. 2 USB 장치를 삼성 무선 공유기에 연결하고 라우터의 LED 상태를 확인하세요. LED 부분이 깜박이면 켜진 상태입니다. 3 삼성 무선 공유기의 LED가 켜지면, USB 장치를 분리한 후, TV와 연결하세요. USB 장치에 연결 정보가 담겨 있습니다. 4 연결 설정이 자동으로 이루어 질 때까지 기다립니다. Plug & Access 연결이 실패하면 연결이 되지 않았음을 알리는 창이 나타납니다. 연결에 실패하면 무선 공유기를 초기화한 후, 1단계부터 다시 시도해보세요. 다른 연결 설정방법을 선택할 수 있습니다. 5 네트워크 연결 화면이 나타나면 네트워크 설정은 완료됩니다. 6 원하는 위치에 무선 공유기를 놓습니다. 무선 공유기의 설정 변경 또는 새로운 무선 공유기를 설치하려면 1단계에서 다시 시작하여 Plug & Access를 실행해야 합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 25 2012-09-04 9:23:5526 네트워크 상태 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 네트워크 상태 현재 네트워크와 인터넷 상태를 확인할 수 있습니다. 무선 네트워크에 실패했을 경우 ● 무선 네트워크 연결에 실패했습니다. 선택된 무선 공유기가 없습니다. 네트워크 설정에서 무선 공유기를 선택하세요. ● 무선 공유기에 연결할 수 없습니다. 다음 사항을 확인하세요. 무선 공유기의 전원이 켜져 있는지 확인하고 무선 공유기의 전원을 껐다가 다시 켜세요. 보안키가 설정된 경우 보안키를 정확히 입력했는지 확인하세요. ● IP를 자동으로 설정하지 못하였습니다. 자동 설정을 위해 다음을 확인하거나 IP 설정에서 수동으로 설정하세요. 무선 공유기의 DHCP 서버 기능이 켜져 있는지 확인하고 무선 공유기를 껐다가 다시 켜세요. 보안키가 설정된 경우 보안키를 정확히 입력했는지 확인하세요. 자세한 사항은 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 네트워크에 연결할 수 없습니다. 다음 사항을 확인하세요. IP 설정에서 설정이 올바른지 확인하세요. 보안키가 설정된 경우 보안키를 정확히 입력했는지 확인하세요. 자세한 사항은 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 내부망에는 연결되었으나 인터넷에 연결할 수 없습니다. IP 설정에서 DNS 설정 값을 확인하세요. 문제가 지속될 경우, 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. ● 네트워크 설정에 성공하였으나 인터넷에 연결할 수 없습니다. 인터넷 통신사에 문의하세요. 네트워크 기기 관리하기 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 메뉴 → 네트워크 → Wi-Fi 다이렉트 무선 공유기 없이 TV와 무선 모바일 기기를 직접 연결할 수 있습니다. ■ (LED 5500, 6350, PDP 550 모델에만 해당) 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터를 연결할 때 이 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 이 기능은 모바일 기기가 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능을 지원해야 가능합니다. ▼ Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능으로 모바일 기기와 연결하기 먼저 모바일 기기의 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능을 켜세요. 1 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 화면으로 이동하세요.(네트워크 → Wi-Fi 다이렉트) 2 먼저 모바일 기기의 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능을 켜세요. 원하는 Wi-Fi 기기를 선택하세요. - PBC (Push Button Configuration): 2 분 이내에 연결할 기기의 WPS(PBC) 버튼을 누르세요. 모든 네트워크 값이 자동으로 설정되고 네트워크에 연결됩니다. - PIN: Wi-Fi 기기에 표시된 PIN 번호를 입력하세요. 연결을 끊으려면 연결된 기기를 선택한 다음 해제를 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 26 2012-09-04 9:23:5527 3. 설정 기능 소프트 AP 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 소프트 AP Wi-Fi 다이렉트 기능을 지원하지 않는 모바일 기기와 TV를 연결합니다. Wi-Fi 기기의 연결 옵션을 설정하세요. ● 소프트 AP 소프트 AP 기능을 켜거나 끕니다. 소프트 AP 기능을 사용하면 일반 Wi-Fi 단말기에서도 본 기기를 검색하여 연결할 수 있습니다. ● 보안키 리모컨으로 보안키를 수동으로 설정합니다. - 보안키는 8개 이상의 숫자로 구성해야 합니다. - 연결하고자 하는 기기에 생성된 보안키를 입력하세요. - 네트워크에 정상적으로 연결되지 않으면 보안키를 확인하세요. 잘못된 보안키는 오작동의 원인이 됩니다. ▼ 보안키 입력에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 ● b 보안키 표시 보안키를 표시합니다. 보안키 표시 여부는 상단의 체크박스에 표시 됩니다. ● a 삭제 입력한 보안키를 한 글자씩 삭제합니다. ● { 한칸띄움 보안키 입력 시 글자와 글자 사이에 공백을 넣을 수 있습니다. ● R 복귀 보안키를 입력하기 전의 화면으로 돌아갑니다. AllShare 설정 메뉴 → 네트워크 → AllShare 설정 네트워크를 통한 미디어 기능을 사용할지 여부를 선택합니다. AllShare를 사용하려면 AllShare Play 부분의 "AllShare 설정하기"를 참조하세요. 장치명 메뉴 → 네트워크 → 장치명 수동으로 TV의 이름을 변경합니다. TV의 이름은 네트워크로 연결된 리모컨과 AllShare Play을 통해 이용하는 기기에서 확인할 수 있습니다. 화면에 키보드가 나타나면 리모컨을 이용해 수동으로 이름을 입력할 수 있습니다. 예를 들어 삼성 TV의 이름을 바꾸길 원하면 리모컨을 이용해 각각의 글자를 입력하고 완료를 선택합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 27 2012-09-04 9:23:5628 시간 설정하기 시간 설정 메뉴 → 시스템 → 시간 설정 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 현재 시간을 확인할 수 있습니다. ● 현재 시간 현재의 연월일과 시간을 지정합니다. 전원 선을 분리하면 현재 시간을 다시 설정해야 합니다. ▼ 현재 시간 설정하기 1 현재 시간 화면으로 이동하세요. (시스템 → 시간 설정 → 현재 시간) 2 자동 또는 수동을 선택하세요. - 자동: 디지털 방송 정보를 통하여 수신되는 시간으로 현재 시간이 자동 설정됩니다. ■ 자동으로 시간을 맞추기 위해서는 TV에 연결된 케이블이나 안테나가 있어야 합니다. ■ 디지털 방송 정보에 의해 자동으로 설정되는 시간은 방송사 별로 차이가 있을 수 있습니다. ■ 방송사와 신호에 따라 자동으로 설정된 시간은 정확하지 않을 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우에는, 수동으로 시간을 설정하세요. - 수동: 현재 시간 설정이 활성화됩니다. 리모컨을 이용해 현재의 날짜와 시간 설정을 지정할 수 있습니다. 현재 시간 설정은 시간 설정 모드가 수동으로 설정된 경우에만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 취침 예약 TV가 설정된 시간이 지나면 자동으로 꺼지도록 설정합니다. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150, 180분) 리모컨을 이용해 원하는 시간을 선택합니다. 취소하려면 끄기로 설정하세요. ● 켜짐 시간 예약 설정한 날짜와 시간 설정에 자동으로 TV가 켜집니다. 켜짐 시간 예약은 3개까지 설정할 수 있습니다. (켜짐 시간 예약1, 켜짐 시간 예약2, 켜짐 시간 예약3) 현재 시간을 설정한 후에 켜짐 시간 예약을 이용할 수 있습니다. 설정: 끄기, 한 번, 매일, 월~금, 월~토, 토~일 또는 요일선택 중 선택하세요. 요일선택을 선택하면 켜짐 시간 예약을 원하는 요일 별로 설정할 수 있습니다. 선택한 요일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 시간 설정: TV가 자동으로 켜질 시간을 설정합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 오전/오후, 시간과 분을 설정할 수 있습니다. 음량: 켜질 때의 음량을 설정하세요. 리모컨을 이용해 음량을 변경합니다. TV/외부입력: 정해진 시간에 TV가 켜질 때, 재생될 콘텐츠의 외부기기를 선택할 수 있습니다. 특정 채널이 나오도록 하거나 TV에 연결된 외부기기를 선택하여 콘텐츠(동영상, 음악 또는 사진 파일)를 재생하도록 설정할 수 있습니다. USB를 선택하기 전에, 먼저 TV에 USB 장치가 연결돼 있어야 합니다. 신호 (TV/외부입력을 TV로 설정했을 때): DTV 일반, DTV 유선, 일반, 유선을 선택할 수 있습니다. 채널 (TV/외부입력을 TV로 설정했을 때): 원하는 채널을 선택하세요. 음악 / 사진 (TV/외부입력을 USB로 설정했을 때): TV가 켜질 때 재생할 음악 또는 사진 파일이 있는 폴더를 USB 장치에서 선택합니다. 만약 둘 다 선택했다면, 선택한 음악을 재생하면서, 선택한 사진을 같이 보여줍니다. ■ USB 장치에 음악 파일이 없거나 음악 파일이 있는 폴더를 선택하지 않으면 켜짐 시간 예약 기능이 제대로 작동하지 않습니다. ■ USB에 사진 파일이 하나만 있으면 슬라이드 쇼를 재생할 수 없습니다. ■ 이름이 너무 긴 폴더는 선택할 수 없습니다. ■ USB마다 지정된 폴더가 다릅니다. 같은 종류의 USB를 하나 이상 사용할 경우, 각 USB에 지정된 폴더의 이름을 다르게 만들어 주세요. ■ 켜짐 시간 예약은 USB 메모리스틱과 멀티 카드 리더기의 사용을 권장합니다. MP3, PMP 또는 자체 배터리를 가지는 USB 장치는, 제조사별 사양에 따라 인식시간이 오래 걸리므로 켜짐 시간 예약 기능의 동작을 보장하지 않습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 28 2012-09-04 9:23:5729 3. 설정 기능 ● 꺼짐 시간 예약 원하는 날짜와 시간에 자동으로 TV가 꺼집니다. 꺼짐 시간 예약은 3개까지 설정할 수 있습니다. ( 꺼짐 시간 예약1, 켜짐 시간 예약2, 꺼짐 시간 예약 3) 현재 시간을 설정한 후에 꺼짐 시간 예약을 이용할 수 있습니다. 설정: 끄기, 한 번, 매일, 월~금, 월~토, 토~일 또는 요일선택 중 선택하세요. 요일선택을 선택하면 꺼짐 시간 예약을 원하는 요일 별로 설정할 수 있습니다. 선택한 요일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 시간 설정: TV가 자동으로 꺼질 시간을 설정합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 오전/오후, 시간, 분을 수동으로 설정하세요. 자녀 보호 기능 설정하기 보안 설정 메뉴 → 시스템 → 보안 설정 어린이가 유해한 채널을 시청하지 못하도록 특정 채널의 시청을 제한합니다. 보안을 설정하거나 변경하려면 비밀 번호를 입력해야 합니다. ■ HDMI 또는 컴포넌트 모드에서는 보안 설정을 사용할 수 없습니다. ■ 초기 비밀번호는 "0-0-0-0"입니다. ● 채널 잠금 기능 채널 잠금 기능을 켜거나 끕니다. ● 비밀번호 변경 비밀번호 변경을 선택합니다. 리모컨을 이용해 설정할 새로운 비밀번호 4자리를 입력하고 재입력합니다. "비밀번호가 변경되었습니다."라는 메시지가 나타나면 닫기를 선택하세요. 새로운 비밀번호가 설정되었습니다. 채널 잠금 설정 하기 1 스마트 허브의 채널을 선택합니다. (™ → 채널) 2 채널 목록에서 잠금 기능을 설정할 채널을 선택하고, 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 선택하세요. 3 채널 잠금 설정을 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 4 비밀번호 4자리를 입력하세요. 채널 잠금 기능이 설정됩니다. 잠금 설정된 채널을 시청할 경우, 검은 화면에 “잠금 설정된 채널입니다.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 29 2012-09-04 9:23:5730 채널 잠금 해제 하기 1 스마트 허브의 채널을 선택합니다. (™ → 채널) 2 잠금 설정된 채널에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 선택하세요. 3 채널 잠금 해제를 선택하세요. 4 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 설정된 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 5 비밀번호 입력을 완료하면, 채널 잠금 기능이 해제됩니다. 비밀번호가 생각나지 않을 경우, 리모컨을 이용해 비밀번호를 초기화 할 수 있습니다. 비밀번호를 "0-0- 0-0"으로 초기화하려면 TV의 전원을 끈 상태에서 다음 순서대로 실행하세요. 조용히M → 8 → 2 → 4 → P (전원 켜기) 에코 절전 설정 에코 절전 설정 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 ● 절전 모드 TV 밝기를 조정하여 TV의 전력 소모를 줄일 수 있습니다. 화면 끄기를 선택하면 화면이 꺼지지만 음향은 계속 켜져 있습니다. 화면을 다시 보려면 음량 버튼을 제외한 다른 버튼을 누르세요. ● 에코 센서 에너지 절약을 위해 주변 밝기에 따라 밝기를 자동으로 조절합니다. 백라이트 (LED TV에만 해당) / 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV에만 해당) 항목을 조정하면 에코 센서가 꺼집니다. 최소 백라이트 (LED TV에만 해당) / 최소 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV에만 해당): 에코 센서 설정이 켜져 있는 경우 수동으로 화면의 최소 밝기를 조정할 수 있습니다. 에코 센서 설정이 켜져 있으면, 주변 조명 강도에 따라 디스플레이 밝기가 변경될 수 있습니다. (살짝 어두워지거나 밝아집니다.) 최소 백라이트 / 최소 패널 밝기 조정으로 화면의 최소 밝기를 조정할 수 있습니다. ● 무신호 전원 끄기 에너지 절약을 위해 특정 시간 동안 입력 신호가 없는 경우 자동으로 전원을 꺼주는 기능입니다. ● 자동 전원 끄기 과열을 방지하기 위해 4시간 동안 TV를 작동하지 않으면 자동으로 TV가 꺼집니다. 자동 전원 끄기가 끄기로 설정되어 있을 경우, TV를 작동하지 않아도 TV 전원이 계속 켜져 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 30 2012-09-04 9:23:5831 3. 설정 기능 동시 화면 메뉴 → 시스템 → 동시 화면 외부기기 또는 컴퓨터의 화면을 시청하면서 동시에 작은 화면으로 TV 채널을 시청할 수 있습니다. 예를 들어 블루레이 플레이어로 영화를 보면서 동시 화면 기능을 이용해 유선 방송을 시청할 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 작동 중에는 동시 화면 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 동시 화면 설정 동시 화면기능을 켜거나 끕니다. ● 채널 부 화면의 채널을 선택합니다. ● 화면 크기 부 화면의 크기를 선택합니다. ● 위치 선택 부 화면의 위치를 선택합니다. ● 음향 선택 동시 화면 모드에서 듣기를 원하는 음향을 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 동시 화면 모드로 TV를 시청하는 동안 TV를 끄면 동시 화면 기능은 해제됩니다. TV를 다시 켤 때 동시 화면 모드로 다시 설정해야 합니다. ■ 주 화면으로 게임이나 노래방 기능 사용할 때 동시화면의 화질이 나쁠 수 있습니다. ■ 동시 화면은 입체영상 시청 시 사용할 수 없습니다. ■ 동시 화면 설정: 외부기기 화면이 주 화면, TV 화면이 부 화면이 됩니다. - 주 화면: 컴포넌트, HDMI - 부 화면: TV 키보드와 마우스로 TV 이용하기 장치 관리자 메뉴 → 시스템 → 장치 관리자 본 기기에 연결된 입력장치의 연결을 설정합니다. 본 기기에 연결된 장치 목록을 확인하고 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. USB HID 키보드와 마우스의 모델에 따라 호환되지 않을 수 있습니다. ● 키보드 설정 TV에 연결된 USB 또는 블루투스 키보드를 사용합니다. USB 키보드를 사용하려면, TV 뒷면의 USB 단자에 연결하세요. (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 블루투스 키보드를 사용하려면, 블루투스 기능을 이용해 연결하세요. 쿼티 키패드 화면이 웹 브라우저에 나타날 때만 사용 할 수 있습니다. 키보드 선택 연결된 키보드 중에서 사용할 키보드를 선택하세요. 한 개의 키보드만 사용할 수 있습니다. 블루투스 키보드 추가 (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 블루투스 키보드를 추가합니다. 키보드 옵션: 키보드 언어 및 타입 등 기본 옵션을 설정합니다. - 키보드 언어: 키보드 입력에 사용할 언어를 선택합니다. - 키보드 종류: 입력에 사용할 키보드 종류를 설정합니다. - 입력 언어 전환: 입력 언어를 전환하는 단축키를 선택합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 31 2012-09-04 9:23:5932 ● 마우스 설정 TV에 연결된 USB 또는 블루투스 마우스를 사용합니다. USB 마우스를 사용하려면, TV 뒷면의 USB 단자에 연결하세요. (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 블루투스 마우스를 사용하려면, 블루투스 기능을 이용해 연결하세요. 컴퓨터를 사용하듯이, 마우스를 이용해 TV의 메뉴를 선택할 수 있습니다. 마우스 선택 연결된 마우스 중에서 사용할 마우스를 선택하세요. 연결된 마우스 중에서 한 개의 마우스만 사용할 수 있습니다. 블루투스 마우스 추가 (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 블루투스 마우스를 추가합니다. 마우스 옵션 마우스 단추 및 휠의 기본 옵션을 설정합니다. - 기본 버튼: 마우스의 기본 기능(클릭, 선택)으로 사용할 버튼을 선택합니다. - 포인터 크기: 화면에 표시되는 마우스 포인터의 크기를 설정합니다. - 포인터 속도: 마우스 포인터의 이동 속도를 설정합니다. ▼ 마우스로 TV 메뉴 이용하기 1 TV에 USB 또는 블루투스 마우스를 연결하세요. 2 기본 버튼을 누르세요. 이동 화면이 나타납니다. 3 컴퓨터를 사용하듯이, 마우스를 이용해 TV의 메뉴를 선택할 수 있습니다. TV와 Samsung Audio Device 연결하기 SoundShare 설정 (LED 6350, PDP 550 모델 이상에만 해당) 메뉴 → 시스템 → 장치 관리자 → SoundShare 설정 TV와 Samsung Audio Device를 연결할 수 있습니다. Samsung Audio Device를 사용하려면 블루투스 기능을 이용하여 TV와 Audio 기기를 연결하세요. 이 기능을 이용하여 TV 사운드를 더 크고 명확하게 즐길 수 있습니다. ● 새 기기 추가 SoundShare 기능을 켜거나 끌 수 있습니다. 새 기기 추가 기능이 끄기로 설정되면, 새로운 기기의 연결 신호는 무시됩니다. ● 삼성 오디오 기기 목록 사용 / 사용 안함: 기기를 사용하거나 차단합니다. 목록에서 삭제: 목록에서 기기를 삭제합니다. 지원되는 삼성 오디오 기기 모델 - DA-E650 / E651 / E660 / E661 / E670 / E680 / E750 / E751 / E760 / E761 ■ 자세한 TV 페어링 사용방법은 홈페이지 "http:// www.samsung.com/sec"를 참조하세요. ■ 지역에 따라 해당 삼성 오디오 기기 모델이 판매되지 않을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 32 2012-09-04 9:23:5933 3. 설정 기능 기타 기능 메뉴 언어 메뉴 → 시스템 → 메뉴 언어 선택한 언어로 메뉴를 볼 수 있습니다. 1 메뉴 언어를 선택하세요. 2 한국어 또는 English를 선택할 수 있습니다. 자막 메뉴 → 시스템 → 자막 ● 자막 자막 기능을 작동하거나 해제합니다. 자막이 제공되지 않는 경우는 자막이 보이지 않습니다. 컴포넌트, HDMI 모드에서는 자막 기능이 작동하지 않습니다. ● 자막 모드 목록에서 자막 모드를 선택합니다. 방송 프로그램에 따라 자막구현이 다를 수 있습니다. 방송 기본 / 영문 / 한글: 아날로그 채널에서 아날로그 자막을 선택할 수 있습니다. 한글 자막 모드에서 영문 자막 방송을 시청할 경우, 글자가 깨져 보일 수 있습니다. 이럴 경우에는 자막 모드를 영문으로 설정하세요 방송 기본 / 자막1 ~ 자막6: 디지털 채널에서 디지털 자막을 선택할 수 있습니다. 자막1에서 자막6까지 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 자막 표기 설정 다음의 설정을 조정할 수 있습니다. 크기: 방송 기본, 작게, 보통, 크게를 선택할 수 있습니다. 기본 설정은 방송 기본입니다. 자막 색상: 자막의 색상을 변경합니다. 방송 기본, 흰색, 검은색, 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색, 노란색, 보라색, 하늘색을 선택할 수 있습니다. 기본 설정은 검은색입니다. 배경 색상: 자막의 배경색을 변경합니다. 방송 기본, 흰색, 검은색, 빨간색, 초록색, 파란색, 노란색, 보라색, 하늘색을 선택할 수 있습니다. 기본 설정은 흰색입니다. 자막 투명도: 자막의 투명도를 변경합니다. 방송 기본, 투명하게, 반투명하게, 불투명하게를 선택할 수 있습니다. 배경 투명도: 자막의 배경 투명도를 변경합니다. 방송 기본, 투명하게, 반투명하게, 불투명하게를 선택할 수 있습니다. 방송 기본 설정으로 돌아가기: 크기, 자막 색상, 배경 색상, 자막 투명도, 배경 투명도의 설정 값을 초기화합니다. ■ 방송 프로그램에 따라 자막구현이 다를 수 있습니다. ■ 방송 기본 기능은 방송국에서 지정한 설정을 제공합니다. ■ 자막과 배경은 동일한 색상으로 설정할 수 없습니다. ■ 자막과 배경을 모두 투명하게 설정할 수 없습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 33 2012-09-04 9:24:0034 화면 보호 (PDP TV에만 해당) 메뉴 → 시스템 → 화면 보호 플라즈마 디스플레이(PDP) 화면의 잔상을 예방할 수 있습니다. 화면 보호 기능을 설정해 놓으세요. 이 제품에는 화면 열화 방지 기술이 갖춰져 있습니다. 수평 또는 수직 방향으로 화소들을 미세하게 이동하여 화면 잔상을 최소화할 수 있습니다. 화면 열화 방지를 위해 다음의 추가적인 기능을 이용할 수 있습니다. - 화소 이동 - 화면 보호 시간 - 스크롤 - 여백 채움 ● 화소 이동 PDP 화면에서 수평 또는 수직 방향으로 화소들을 미세하게 이동하여 화면 잔상을 최소화할 수 있습니다. ▼ 화소 이동을 최적으로 설정하려면 수평 이동 간격 - 사용 가능한 설정 값: 0 – 4 (pixels) - TV/HDMI/외부입력/컴포넌트의 최적 설정 값: 4 수직 이동 간격 - 사용 가능한 설정 값: 0 – 4 (pixels) - TV/HDMI/외부입력/컴포넌트의 최적 설정 값: 4 시간 설정 (분) - 사용 가능한 설정 값: 1 – 4 분 - TV/HDMI/외부입력/컴포넌트의 최적 설정 값: 4 분 ■ 화소 이동 값은 TV 크기(인치) 및 모드에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. ■ 화면 크기가 원본 크기일 경우 화소 이동을 선택할 수 없습니다. ● 화면 보호 시간 설정된 시간 동안 정지 영상이 지속될 경우, 잔상으로 인한 화면 열화를 방지하기 위해 TV의 화면 보호 기능이 동작합니다. ● 스크롤 일정시간 동안 PDP의 모든 픽셀을 패턴 형태로 이동하여 화면의 잔상을 제거해 줍니다. 장시간 정지 화면 시청 후, 이전 화면 혹은 기호 등의 잔상이 남아 있을 경우 이 기능을 사용하세요. ■ 화면의 잔상을 효과적으로 제거하려면 약 1시간 정도, 잔상 제거 기능을 실행해야 합니다. 잔상이 제거되지 않으면 다시 반복하세요. ■ 취소하려면, 리모컨에서 아무 키나 누르세요. ● 여백 채움 화면 크기를 4:3으로 설정하여 시청할 경우 화면의 양쪽에 여백이 생깁니다. 이 여백으로 인하여 화면에 잔상이 발생할 수 있으므로 흰색의 밝기를 조정하여 화면을 보호하세요. 화면 보호 시간 (LED TV에만 해당) 설정된 시간 동안 정지 영상이 지속될 경우, 잔상으로 인한 화면 열화를 방지하기 위해 TV의 화면 보호 기능이 동작합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 34 2012-09-04 9:24:0035 3. 설정 기능 일반 설정 메뉴 → 시스템 → 일반 설정 ● 게임 모드 TV 화면을 게임 모드에 적합하도록 설정할 수 있습니다. PlayStation™이나 Xbox™ 같은 게임기를 연결했을 때 이 기능을 이용하세요. ▼ 게임 모드 주의사항 및 제한사항 - TV와 게임기의 연결을 해제하여 다른 외부 기기를 연결하기 전에, 게임 모드를 끄기로 설정하세요. - 게임 모드에서 TV 화면은 약간 흔들릴 수 있습니다. ■ TV 시청 중에는 게임 모드가 지원되지 않습니다. ■ 게임기를 연결시킨 후에 게임 모드를 켜세요. 게임기를 연결하기 전에 게임 모드를 켜면 화질이 약간 떨어질 수 있습니다. ■ 게임 모드가 설정된 경우 화면 모드는 표준 화면이 되고 음향 모드는 자동으로 영화를 볼 때 모드로 변경됩니다. ● BD Wise BD Wise 기능을 지원하는 삼성 DVD나 블루레이 플레이어, 홈시어터를 연결하면, 색감이 부족한 DVD 타이틀도 블루레이 디스크처럼 풍부한 색감과 화질로 즐길 수 있습니다. BD Wise 기능을 켜면 화면이 자동으로 최적의 해상도로 변경됩니다. HDMI 케이블을 통해 BD Wise 기능을 지원하는 삼성 제품을 연결할 때 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 메뉴 투명도 메뉴 화면의 투명도를 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 동작음 리모컨이나 TV 동작 시 소리로 피드백을 주는 기능입니다. 기본적으로 제공되는 기능이며, 음량을 조절하거나 끌 수 있습니다. ● 패널 키 잠금 패널 키를 잠금 기능을 통해 컨트롤 메뉴 사용을 제한할 수 있습니다. 패널 키 잠금 기능을 켜기로 설정하면, 패널 키로 컨트롤 메뉴를 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 부팅로고 TV가 켜질 때 로고가 보여지는 것을 설정합니다. ● 라이트 효과 (LED 7100 모델에만 해당) TV 전면 아래 쪽에 있는 불빛을 켜거나 끌 수 있습니다. ■ 라이트 효과를 끄기로 설정하면 전력 소모를 줄일 수 있습니다. ■ 불빛의 색깔은 모델마다 다를 수 있습니다. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 다양한 AV 기기들로 구성된 환경에서 Anynet+ 메뉴를 통해 AV 기기들을 자동으로 제어함으로써, 사용자가 간편하게 TV를 통해 AV 기기들을 사용할 수 있도록 하는 AV 네트워크 시스템입니다. 기능 설정에 대한 자세한 내용은 “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)” 내용을 참고하세요. DivX® 주문형 비디오 메뉴 → 시스템 → DivX® 주문형 비디오 Divx DRM이 적용된 동영상을 재생하기 위해서는 제품을 등록해야 합니다. TV에 등록 코드를 DivX 웹 사이트로 이동해서 등록을 완료하면 스마트 허브의 동영상 기능으로 VOD를 시청할 수 있습니다. DivX® VOD에 대한 자세한 내용은 "http://www. divx.com/vod"를 참고하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 35 2012-09-04 9:24:0136 고객지원 메뉴 e-설명서 메뉴 → 고객지원 → e-설명서 메뉴 → 고객지원 → e-설명서 TV에 저장되어 있는 사용자 설명서를 볼 수 있습니다. TV에 다양한 기능을 이용하는 방법을 숙지하려면 e- 설명서를 실행하세요. e-설명서 화면에 관한 자세한 내용은 제품 사용 설명서의 “e-설명서 사용 가이드”를 참조하세요. 자가진단 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 ● 화질 테스트 영상 테스트를 실행합니다. 화면 상의 결함을 테스트하기 위해 고해상도의 그림이 나타납니다. 예: 테스트 영상이 나타나지 않거나 테스트 영상에 잡티나 왜곡이 있으면 예를 선택하세요. TV에 문제가 있을 수도 있습니다. 삼성 전자 서비스 센터에 지원을 요청하세요. 아니요: 테스트 영상이 잘 나오면 아니요를 선택하세요. 외부기기에 문제가 있을 수도 있습니다. 연결을 확인하세요. 문제가 지속될 경우, 방송 신호를 점검 하거나 외부기기의 사용자 설명서를 참조하세요. ● 음질 테스트 사운드 테스트를 실행합니다. 사운드에 문제가 있을 때 실행하세요. ■ 음질 테스트를 하기 전에 TV 스피커에서 아무 소리가 나지 않는다면 음향 메뉴에서 스피커 선택을 TV 스피커로 설정한 후에 다시 음질 테스트를 실행하세요. ■ 스피커 설정을 외부 스피커로 선택했거나 음소거된 경우에도 음질 테스트의 멜로디는 들을 수 있습니다. 예: 음질 테스트에서도 문제 증상이 계속된다면 예를 선택하세요. TV에 문제가 있을 수 있습니다. 삼성전자 서비스 센터에 연락하세요. TV에 문제가 있을 수 있습니다. 삼성전자 서비스센터에 지원을 요청하세요. 아니요: 테스트 음향이 정상일 경우, 외부기기의 문제일 수 있습니다. 연결을 확인하세요. 문제가 지속될 경우 외부기기의 사용자 설명서를 참조하세요. ● 디지털 신호 정보 (디지털 방송에서만) 디지털 신호 정보는 HD 채널의 신호 강도를 보여줍니다. 안테나를 조정하여 신호 강도를 높이고 HD 채널을 수신할 수 있습니다. ● 초기화 네트워크 설정을 제외한 모든 설정을 초기값으로 재설정합니다. ▼ 초기화 하기 1 초기화 메뉴로 이동하세요. (메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 초기화) 2 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 3 비밀번호 입력을 마치면 “네트워크 설정을 제외한 모든 설정을 공장 초기값으로 설정합니다.”라는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 4 예를 선택하세요. 모든 설정이 초기화됩니다. TV는 자동으로 꺼졌다 켜지며 초기 설정 화면이 나타납니다. 초기 설정에 대한 자세한 정보는 제품 사용 설명서를 참조하세요. ● 문제 해결 도움이 필요할 때 문제해결 가이드를 참조하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 36 2012-09-04 9:24:0237 3. 설정 기능 소프트웨어 업데이트 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 소프트웨어 업데이트 최신 소프트웨어를 최신 버전으로 업그레이드합니다. 현재버전: 현재 TV에 설치된 소프트웨어 버전입니다. 최신 버전 업그레이드 5가지 방법으로 업그레이드 할 수 있습니다. - USB로 업그레이드 - 인터넷으로 업그레이드 - 방송 신호로 업그레이드 - 저장된 파일 사용 - 대기모드 업그레이드 ■ 업그레이드를 진행하는 동안 TV를 끄지 않도록 주의하세요. 소프트웨어 업데이트가 완료되면 TV는 자동으로 꺼졌다 켜집니다. 소프트웨어 업데이트를 하면 영상 및 음향 설정은 초기화 됩니다. 업데이트 후에 쉽게 재설정할 수 있도록 설정 값을 메모해 놓는 것이 좋습니다. ▼ USB로 업그레이드 ● USB로 업그레이드하기 1 삼성전자 홈페이지 “http://www.samsung. com/sec”를 방문하세요. 2 최신 USB 소프트웨어 exe 파일을 컴퓨터에 다운로드하세요. 3 exe 폴더를 추출하세요. exe 파일과 같은 이름의 단일 폴더가 생성됩니다. 4 USB 플래시 드라이브에 폴더를 복사하세요. 5 TV를 켜고 USB 플래시 드라이브를 TV 뒷면의 USB 단자에 삽입합니다. 6 TV 메뉴의 고객지원 → 소프트웨어 업데이트로 이동하세요. 7 USB로 업그레이드를 선택하세요. 업그레이드가 완료되기 전에 USB 드라이브를 제거하지 않도록 주의하세요. ▼ 인터넷으로 업그레이드 인터넷으로 소프트웨어를 다운로드하여 업그레이드 합니다. 먼저 네트워크를 구성하여 인터넷에 연결돼 있어야 합니다. 네트워크 설정에 대한 자세한 설명은 "유선 또는 무선 네트워크 설정하기" 부분을 참조하세요. ● 인터넷으로 업그레이드 하기 1 인터넷으로 업그레이드를 선택하세요. 서버에 연결하는 메시지가 나타납니다. 2 다운로드가 가능한 소프트웨어가 있으면 진행 막대 팝업 창이 나타나고 다운로드를 시작합니다. 3 다운로드가 완료되면 다음 3가지 선택 질문 화면이 나타납니다. 지금 설치, 나중 설치, 또는 설치 안함 - 지금 설치를 선택하면 소프트웨어 업데이트를 시작합니다 자동으로 TV가 꺼졌다 켜집니다. - 나중 설치를 선택하거나 1분 안에 선택을 하지 않으면, 새로운 업데이트 소프트웨어를 TV에 저장합니다. 저장된 파일 사용 기능을 이용해 다음 기회에 소프트웨어를 업데이트할 수 있습니다. - 설치 안함을 선택하면 업데이트를 취소합니다. ▼ 방송 신호로 업그레이드 방송 신호로 소프트웨어를 다운로드 받아 업그레이드 합니다. ● 방송신호로 업그레이드 하기 1 방송신호로 업그레이드를 선택하세요. 2 업그레이드할 소프트웨어를 탐색합니다. TV 모델이나 방송 신호 강도에 따라 탐색하는데 약간의 시간이 필요할 수 있습니다. 3 탐색 후 업그레이드를 진행합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 37 2012-09-04 9:24:0238 ▼ 저장된 파일 사용 이전에 다운로드 했던 파일을 이용하여 업그레이드합니다. 대기 모드에서 파일을 다운로드하거나 바로 설치하지 않기를 선택했을 때 이용합니다. (다음 부분의 대기 모드로 업그레이드를 참조하세요) ● 저장된 파일로 업그레이드 하기 1 업그레이드 소프트웨어가 다운로드 되어있다면 저장된 파일 사용 화면의 오른쪽에서 소프트웨어 버전 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. 2 저장된 파일 사용을 선택하세요. 3 업그레이드 진행 여부를 묻는 메시지가 나타납니다. 예를 선택하면 업그레이드를 시작합니다. 4 업그레이드가 완료되면 TV는 자동으로 꺼졌다 켜집니다. ▼ 대기모드 업그레이드 TV 전원이 대기모드 상태일 때, 새로운 소프트웨어를 다운로드 받을 수 있습니다. 대기모드에서 TV는 꺼지지만 인터넷 연결은 되어있습니다. 이 기능은 TV를 시청하지 않을 때 TV가 자동으로 소프트웨어를 업그레이드 할 수 있도록 해줍니다. TV가 내부적으로 켜져 있기 때문에 화면의 발광 현상이 있을 수 있습니다. 이러한 현상은 소프트웨어가 다운로드 되는 동안 1 시간 이상 지속할 수 있습니다. ● 대기모드 업그레이드 하기 소프트웨어 업데이트 메뉴에서 대기모드 업그레이드를 선택합니다. - 끄기: 끄기를 선택하면 새로운 소프트웨어 업그레이드가 가능할 때, 팝업 창을 통해 알려줍니다. - 45분 후 / 오전 06:00 / 오전 10:00 / 오후 02:00 / 오후 06:00: 원하는 시간에 방송 신호를 이용해 새로운 소프트웨어를 다운로드합니다. 반드시 인터넷에 연결돼야 대기모드 업그레이드를 할 수 있습니다. 고객지원 정보 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 고객지원 정보 TV가 제대로 작동하지 않거나 소프트웨어를 업그레이드하고 싶을 때 이 정보를 확인하세요. 제품에 대한 정보, 소프트웨어를 다운로드하는 방법을 알아볼 수 있습니다. 원격 진단 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 원격 진단 제품 정보를 확인하기 위해 삼성전자 콜 센터는 삼성제품을 원격으로 확인합니다. 원격 진단은 사용자 설정을 제어하고 문제를 해결할 수 있습니다. 본 기능은 서비스 이용 약관에 동의 후 이용할 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 스마트 허브 스마트 허브를 통해 인터넷에 연결하여 인터넷과 멀티미디어 콘텐츠를 다양하게 즐길 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 사용에 대한 자세한 정보는 e-설명서의 " 스마트 허브"를 참조하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 38 2012-09-04 9:24:0339 4. 고급 기능 입체영상 시청하기 입체영상 (LED 5500 모델 미지원) 메뉴 → 화면 → 입체영상 입체영상 콘텐츠를 시청할 수 있는 새롭고 흥미진진한 기능입니다. 이 기능을 제대로 즐기려면 삼성 입체영상 액티브 안경을 착용하여 3D 콘텐츠를 시청하셔야 합니다. 3D 방송 채널을 시청하려면 채널 → 3D 채널 보기가 켜기로 되어 있어야 합니다. FULL HD 3D의 구현 여부는 콘텐츠의 화질에 따라 달라질 수 있습니다. 입체영상 시청에 관한 중요한 건강 및 안전 정보 다음 안전 정보를 잘 읽고 숙지한 다음 입체영상 기능을 사용하세요. 경고 ■ 입체영상 시청 중 눈의 피로, 두통, 어지러움, 울렁거림과 같은 불편을 느낄 수 있습니다. 이와 같은 증상이 있을 경우 시청을 중단하고 안경을 벗은 후 휴식을 취해주세요. ■ 입체영상을 장시간 볼 경우 눈이 피로할 수 있습니다. 이 경우 시청을 중지하고, 3D 안경을 벗은 후 휴식을 취해주세요. ■ 특히 어린이가 입체영상을 시청하는 경우, 보호자는 어린이의 상태를 빈번히 점검해야 합니다. 불편한 증상을 보이면 즉시 시청을 중단시키고 휴식을 취하게 해주세요. ■ 3D 안경을 다른 용도(일반 안경, 선글라스, 보호용 고글 등)로 사용하지 마세요. ■ 걷거나 움직이면서 시청하지 마세요. 부딪히거나 넘어져서 다칠 수 있습니다. ● 입체영상 모드 입력되는 영상의 모드를 선택하여 입체영상을 감상합니다. 완벽한 입체영상 효과를 원하는 분은 3D 안경을 먼저 착용한 후, 아래와 같이 목록에서 최상의 입체영상 시청 체험을 지원하는 입체영상 모드를 선택하세요. 입체영상 모드 작동 Off 끄기 입체영상 모드를 해제합니다. 일반 일반 영상을 입체영상으로 변환합니다. 좌/우 좌/우 두 영상이 겹쳐 보이게 함으로써 입체감을 느낄 수 있습니다. 위/아래 위/아래 두 영상이 겹쳐 보이게 함으로써 입체감을 느낄 수 있습니다. ■ 입체영상은 입력 신호에 따라 달라질 수 있습니다. ■ 일부 파일 포맷은 “일반”을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 39 2012-09-04 9:24:0540 ● 3D 시점: 입체영상의 멀고 가까운 정도를 설정합니다. ● 입체감: 입체영상의 입체감을 설정합니다. ● 좌/우 영상 변경: 좌, 우 영상을 변환합니다. ● 일반영상으로 보기: 입체영상을 일반영상으로 변환하여 감상합니다. 이 기능은 입체영상 모드가 “일반” 또는 “끄기” 일 때 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 3D 화면 최적화 (LED TV에만 해당): 최적의 입체감을 조정할 수 있습니다. 지원 해상도 (16:9 모드에서만) ▼ HDMI 3D 형식 해상도 주파수 (Hz) / 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 Hz 프레임 패킹 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 Hz ▼ 컴포넌트 해상도 주파수 (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 Hz ▼ 디지털 채널 해상도 주파수 (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz ▼ 동영상 / 사진 (AllShare Play) 기타 기능 부분의 "지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식" 을 참고하세요. 입체영상 시청하기 입력되는 영상의 형식에 따라 입체영상 모드를 사용하지 못할 수도 있습니다. 3D 안경의 전원을 켜고, 입체영상을 시청하세요. 1 입체영상 메뉴로 이동하세요. (메뉴 → 화면 → 입체영상) 2 입체영상 모드를 선택하세요. 입체영상 모드 화면이 나타납니다. 3 보고 싶은 입체영상 모드 설정을 선택하세요. 화면이 잠시 사라졌다가 선택한 입체영상 모드가 다시 나타납니다. 리모컨의 X 버튼을 눌러 입체영상 모드에 진입할 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 40 2012-09-04 9:24:0541 4. 고급 기능 입체영상 기능을 사용하기 전에... ● 스마트 허브에 진입할 경우, 입체영상 모드는 자동으로 해제됩니다. ● 입력 소스 전환 시, 해당 외부기기 연결할 경우, 설정된 입체영상 모드는 자동으로 저장됩니다. ● 화면 메뉴 기능 중 일부는 입체영상 모드에서 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 동시 화면은 입체영상 시청 시 사용할 수 없습니다. ● IR 타입의 삼성 3D 액티브 안경이나 타사의 3D 안경은 지원하지 않습니다. ● 전원을 켠 후 TV 초기 구동 시는 3D 화면의 좌/우 겹침 현상이 나타날 수 있습니다. 최적화되기 위해서는 약간의 시간이 필요할 수 있습니다. ● 근처에 다른 3D 제품이 켜져 있거나 다른 전자 기기가 가까이 있으면 3D 영상이 제대로 동작하지 않을 수 있습니다. 시청에 문제가 있으면 다른 전자 기기를 3D 안경과 최대한 멀리 두세요. ● 3D 화면과 눈높이를 맞추어 정면에서 시청하는 것을 권장합니다. 시야각이나 거리를 벗어나면 3D 영상으로 보이지 않을 수 있습니다. ● TV 화면 세로 길이의 3배 이상 떨어져서 시청할 것을 권장합니다. 스마트 허브 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 스마트 허브 스마트 허브를 이용하면, 인터넷을 통해 영화와 동영상을 감상할 수 있으며, TV를 통해 유료 또는 무료의 다양한 애플리케이션을 즐길 수 있습니다. 뉴스와 스포츠, 날씨, 증권, 지도, 사진, 게임 애플리케이션이 있습니다. 리모컨의 ™ 버튼을 이용하여 시작할 수 있습니다. 참고 ● 삼성전자는 서비스 제공자에 의해 발생한 스마트 허브 서비스의 중단에 대해 어떠한 법적 책임도 지지 않습니다. ● 일부 애플리케이션의 경우 영어로 제공될 수 있으며 사용자의 지역에 따라 내용이 달라질 수 있습니다. ● 스마트 허브의 더 많은 정보를 얻으려면 서비스 제공자의 웹 사이트를 방문하세요. ● 스마트 허브는 TV 화면에서 인터넷 콘텐츠를 즐길 수 있도록, 인터넷을 통해 데이터를 다운로드하고 처리합니다. 인터넷 연결이 불안정한 경우, 서비스가 지연되거나 중단될 수 있습니다. 또한 콘텐츠는 인터넷 환경에 따라 자동으로 종료될 수 있습니다. 이런 현상이 생기면 인터넷 연결을 확인하고 다시 실행하세요. ● 서비스 제공자의 사정에 따라 업데이트나 서비스가 중단될 수 있습니다. ● 스마트 허브의 콘텐츠는 서비스 제공자에 의해 사전예고 없이 변경될 수 있습니다. ● 스마트 허브의 서비스 내용은 사용자의 펌웨어 버전에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 41 2012-09-04 9:24:0642 스마트 허브 시작하기 1 ™ 버튼을 누릅니다. 2 스마트 허브 화면이 나타납니다. 3 개인정보 보호 정책 화면이 나타납니다. 약관에 동의함을 선택하세요. 4 서비스 업데이트 화면이 나타나며 서비스와 애플리케이션 설치 화면이 나타납니다. 설치가 완료되면 종료합니다. 스마트 허브 화면에 애플리케이션과 다운로드된 서비스가 표시됩니다. 다운로드하는 데 시간이 걸릴 수 있습니다. ■ 설치하는 동안 스마트 허브를 잠시 종료할 수 있습니다. ■ 설치 후에 몇 개의 창이 나타날 수 있습니다. 창을 닫거나 없어질 때까지 기다립니다. 5 애플리케이션을 사용하려면 리모컨을 이용해 선택하세요. 숫자 키패드 사용하기 리모컨을 이용해 _를 선택하면 입력 항목을 한글, 영어 소문자, 영어 대문자, 숫자, 기호/아이콘 순으로 변경할 수 있습니다. 특정 스마트 허브 애플리케이션에서는 키패드 화면을 지원하지 않을 수도 있습니다. 1 “105Chang”을 입력하는 경우를 예로 들어 보겠습니다. 2 _를 세 번 선택해 한글에서 숫자로 입력 모드를 변경하세요. 3 1, 0, 5 를 차례대로 선택하세요. 4 _를 네 번 선택해 숫자에서 영어 대문자로 입력 모드를 변경하세요. 5 2 를 세 번 선택해 C를 입력하세요. 6 _를 네 번 선택해 영어 대문자에서 영어 소문자로 입력 모드를 변경하세요. 7 “Chang”의 나머지 글자를 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 확인을 선택하세요. 쿼티 키패드 사용하기 일부 스마트 허브 애플리케이션에서 키보드를 사용하는 것과 같은 방식으로 쿼티 키패드를 사용할 수 있습니다. ▼ 쿼티 키패드에서 컬러버튼 이용하기 ● a 전체 삭제 입력된 모든 글자를 삭제합니다. ● b 숫자자판 / 쿼티자판 숫자자판 또는 쿼티자판으로 전환합니다. 쿼티자판 모드로 설정이 되어있으면, USB 또는 블루투스 키보드를 TV에 연결하여 글자를 입력할 수 있습니다. ● { 한칸띄움 글자 입력 중 한 칸을 띄웁니다. ● T 설정 옵션 메뉴를 보여줍니다. 입력 언어: 한국어와 English 중에서 입력 언어를 선택하세요. XT9 문자 입력: 추천 단어 기능을 켜거나 끕니다. ● E 선택 선택한 글자를 입력합니다. ● R 복귀 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. ● π이전 페이지 이전 기호/아이콘 모음을 보여줍니다. 키패드 화면이 기호/아이콘 모드일 때만 가능합니다. ● µ 다음 페이지 다음 기호/아이콘 모음을 보여줍니다. 키패드 화면이 기호/아이콘 모드일 때만 가능합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 42 2012-09-04 9:24:0643 4. 고급 기능 계정 생성하기 삼성 계정이 있으면, 더욱 편리하게 스마트 허브를 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 이메일을 아이디로 사용해야 합니다. ■ 사용자 계정을 10개까지 등록할 수 있습니다. ▼ 삼성 계정 만들기 1 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하세요. 로그인 화면이 나타납니다. 2 계정 생성을 선택하세요. 계정 생성 화면이 나타납니다. 3 삼성 계정을 선택하세요. 입력 화면과 키패드가 나타납니다. 4 키패드를 이용하여 메일 주소를 입력합니다. 입력한 이메일 주소는 아이디가 됩니다. TV에 연결된 키보드가 있다면, 키보드를 이용해 이메일 주소를 입력하세요. 입력을 마치면 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 이메일 주소와 비밀번호를 입력한 후에 리모컨을 이용해 다음 단계를 실행하세요. 5 계정 입력을 완료하면 확인을 선택하세요. 다시 로그인 화면이 나타납니다. 6 비밀번호를 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 화면과 키패드가 나타납니다. 7 키패드를 이용해 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 비밀번호는 문자, 숫자, 기호를 조합하여 생성할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 a를 선택하세요. 입력하는 비밀번호가 보이거나 숨겨집니다. 8 비밀번호 입력을 완료하면, 확인을 선택하세요. 9 비밀번호 확인을 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 화면과 키패드가 다시 나타납니다. 10 7, 8단계를 반복해서 실행하세요. 11 계정 생성을 선택하세요. 계정 생성을 확인하는 창이 나타납니다. 12 확인을 선택하세요. 서비스 사이트 아이디를 등록할 것인지를 묻는 창이 나타납니다. 13 확인을 선택하세요. 14 서비스 계정 연결 창이 나타납니다. 연결하려는 서비스를 선택하세요. 아이디와 비밀번호를 입력한 후 확인을 선택하세요. ■ 서비스 계정 연결을 하면 애플리케이션 이용을 보다 쉽게 할 수 있습니다. 자세한 사항은 스마트 허브 설정하기의 "설정" 부분을 참고하세요. ■ 기존 계정이 없거나 계정 연결을 원치 않으면 미등록을 선택하세요. 15 확인을 선택하세요. 스마트 TV 계정 창이 나타나면 로그인을 선택하세요. 로그인이 완료됩니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 43 2012-09-04 9:24:0744 스마트 허브 화면 설정하기 ● a 로그인 / 로그아웃 ▼ 스마트 허브 로그인 하기 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 리모컨을 이용하여 a를 선택하면 로그인 화면이 나타납니다. 2 삼성 계정에서 ^을 선택하세요. 계정 목록이 펼쳐집니다. 삼성 계정을 수동으로 입력하려면, 삼성 계정 입력란을 선택하세요. 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 삼성 계정을 수동으로 입력할 수 있습니다. 입력을 완료했으면 4단계부터 실행하세요. 3 목록에서 로그인하려는 아이디를 선택하세요. 로그인 창이 다시 나타납니다. 4 비밀번호를 선택하세요. 비밀번호를 입력하는 창과 키패드가 나타납니다. 5 리모컨을 이용해 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 확인을 선택하세요. ■ 자동으로 비밀번호를 기억하려면 계정 비밀번호 저장을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 아이디를 선택하거나 입력하면 비밀번호는 자동으로 입력됩니다. ■ 스마트 허브를 시작할 때 자동으로 로그인하려면 자동 로그인을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. ■ 비밀번호를 잊어버렸다면 비밀번호를 초기화할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 b를 선택하세요. 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 확인을 선택하면 비밀번호를 초기화하는 방법이 이메일로 전송됩니다. ● b 배경 설정 스마트 허브 화면에서 배경화면 이미지를 변경할 수 있습니다. ● { 계정 관리 서비스 계정 연결, 스마트허브 계정 삭제 및 탈퇴를 할 수 있습니다. 계정 관리에 대한 자세한 사항은 " 스마트 허브 설정하기"를 참고하세요 스마트 허브에 로그인되어 있을 때만 사용 가능합니다. 스마트 허브에서 간편 메뉴 이용하기 스마트 허브 화면에 나타난 아이콘과 폴더에 따라 아래의 일부 기능들은 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 로그인 / 로그아웃 스마트 허브에 로그인하거나 로그아웃합니다. ● 배경 설정 스마트 허브 화면의 배경화면을 바꿀 수 있습니다. ● 이동 화면의 애플리케이션이나 폴더의 위치를 바꿀 수 있습니다. ▼ 이동하기 1 애플리케이션이나 폴더를 선택한 후 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 이동을 선택하세요. 변경될 위치가 나타납니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 아이콘을 원하는 위치로 이동시킬 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 44 2012-09-04 9:24:0745 4. 고급 기능 ● 폴더로 이동 애플리케이션을 폴더로 이동시킵니다. 스마트 허브에 폴더가 생성되었을 때에만 가능합니다. ▼ 폴더로 이동하기 1 이동시킬 애플리케이션을 선택하고 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 폴더로 이동을 선택하세요. 폴더로 이동 창이 열립니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 폴더를 선택하세요. 이동되었다는 메시지가 나타나면 종료합니다. 애플리케이션이 폴더로 이동하였습니다. 폴더 안의 애플리케이션을 선택하여 스마트 허브 화면으로 이동시킬 수도 있습니다. ▼ 폴더 안의 애플리케이션 이용하기 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 폴더를 선택하면 폴더가 열립니다. 2 애플리케이션을 선택하세요. 애플리케이션 서비스가 시작됩니다. ● 삭제 스마트 허브에서 애플리케이션을 삭제합니다. ▼ 삭제하기 1 애플리케이션을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 3 삭제를 선택하세요. "선택한 항목을 삭제하겠습니까?"라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 4 확인을 선택하세요. 애플리케이션이 삭제됩니다. ● 잠금 설정 애플리케이션을 잠그면 비밀번호 없이 애플리케이션을 실행할 수 없습니다. 일부 애플리케이션에는 잠금 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ▼ 잠금 설정하기 1 애플리케이션을 선택하고 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 잠금 설정을 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 3 비밀번호를 입력하세요. 초기 비밀번호는 "0-0- 0-0"입니다. 4 서비스 잠금기능이 설정되었다는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 잠금기능이 설정된 애플리케이션 아이콘에 잠금 표시가 나타납니다. ● 잠금 해제 일부 애플리케이션에는 잠금 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ▼ 잠금 해제하기 1 잠금 설정된 애플리케이션을 선택한 뒤 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 잠금 해제를 선택하세요. 비밀번호 입력 창이 나타납니다. 3 비밀번호를 입력합니다. 초기 비밀번호는 "0-0- 0-0" 입니다. 4 서비스 잠금 기능이 해제되었다는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 잠금 설정된 애플리케이션 아이콘에 잠금 표시가 사라집니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 45 2012-09-04 9:24:0846 ● 새 폴더 새 폴더를 만들 수 있습니다. 새 폴더가 생기면 애플리케이션을 폴더 안으로 이동시킬 수 있습니다. ▼ 새 폴더 만들기 1 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 새 폴더를 선택하세요. 새 폴더 창과 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 폴더 이름을 입력합니다. 4 쿼티 키패드 하단의 확인을 선택하세요. 새로운 폴더가 스마트 허브 화면에 만들어집니다. ● 폴더 이름 변경 폴더의 이름을 변경합니다. ▼ 폴더 이름 변경하기 1 폴더를 선택하고 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 폴더 이름 변경을 선택하세요. 폴더 이름을 변경하는 화면과 키패드 창이 나타납니다. 3 리모컨을 이용해 새로운 이름을 입력하세요. 4 확인을 선택하세요. 폴더 이름 변경 창이 닫히고 폴더의 이름이 변경됩니다. ● 정보 선택한 애플리케이션에 관한 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. 정보 화면에서 애플리케이션을 잠그거나 잠금을 해제할 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 설정하기 설정 메뉴에서 계정 관리, 서비스 관리, 초기화 및 스마트 허브 정보 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. 이 기능들을 이용하려면 스마트 허브에 삼성 계정으로 로그인되어 있어야 합니다. ▼ 설정 메뉴를 이용하기 1 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 설정을 선택하세요. 설정 창이 나타납니다. 3 원하는 항목을 선택하세요. ● 계정 관리 계정 관리 메뉴에서는 애플리케이션 계정을 등록할 수 있으며, 삼성 계정의 비밀번호를 변경하거나 계정을 삭제 또는 탈퇴할 수 있습니다. 서비스 계정 연결: 다운로드한 애플리케이션의 계정이 이미 있을 경우, 서비스 계정 연결에서 해당 애플리케이션의 사용자 계정을 연결합니다. 스마트 허브에 로그인하여 애플리케이션을 실행할 경우, 자동으로 로그인 되도록 설정할 수 있습니다. 계정 등록을 하기 전 해당 애플리케이션이 스마트 허브에 설치되어 있어야 합니다. ▼ 서비스 계정 연결 1 계정 관리 메뉴에서 서비스 계정 연결을 선택하세요. 서비스 계정 연결 창이 나타납니다. 2 삼성 계정과 연동하려는 애플리케이션을 선택하세요. 3 팝업 창이 나타나면 등록을 선택하세요. 4 리모컨을 이용해 아이디와 비밀번호를 입력한 후 확인을 선택하세요. 아이디와 비밀번호는 선택한 애플리케이션의 계정을 사용합니다. 5 아이디와 비밀번호를 올바르게 입력하면 “등록되었습니다.”라는 메시지가 나타납니다. 6 다른 서비스 계정을 추가하려면 2~4단계를 실행하세요. 7 계정 등록이 완료되면 확인을 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 46 2012-09-04 9:24:0847 4. 고급 기능 계정 목록에서 삭제: 서비스 계정 연결에 등록된 모든 계정을 삭제합니다. 탈퇴: 스마트 허브에 등록된 삼성 계정을 탈퇴하고 스마트 허브의 설정된 모든 계정을 삭제합니다. ● 서비스 관리 티커 자동 실행: 티커 자동 실행 기능을 켜기로 설정하면, TV가 켜지면 자동으로 티커가 실행됩니다. 티커 서비스란 증권, 뉴스, 날씨 등 실시간으로 변경 되는 정보를 TV 화면에 띄워주는 기능입니다. 서비스를 실행하면 TV를 시청하면서 관심 있는 항목을 동시에 볼 수 있습니다. 티커 자동 실행을 설정하기 전에 스마트 허브에서 티커 애플리케이션을 다운로드 받아야 합니다. 푸시 알림 설정: 스마트 허브에 설치된 애플리케이션에서 새로운 정보가 있을 때, 해당 정보를 보여주는 기능입니다. TV를 시청하는 동안 알림 사항을 띄어주고, 세부 사항을 확인할 수 있도록 합니다. ● 초기화 다운로드한 모든 애플리케이션을 초기화하고 모든 사용자 계정과 설정을 삭제합니다. 스마트 허브의 설정을 초기화합니다. 처음 시작하는 것처럼 스마트 허브를 재시작합니다. 단, 스마트 허브 계정은 초기화되지 않습니다. 계정으로 로그인하려면 아이디와 비밀번호를 로그인 화면에서 입력하세요. ▼ 초기화하기 1 설정 메뉴에서 초기화를 선택하세요. 초기화 화면이 나타납니다. 2 비밀번호를 입력하세요. ■ 기본 비밀번호 설정은 “0-0-0-0” 입니다. ■ 직접 만든 비밀번호가 생각나지 않을 때 TV 의 전원을 끈 상태에서 다음 순서대로 리모컨 버튼을 누르면 “0-0-0-0”으로 비밀번호가 초기화됩니다. 조용히M → 8 → 2 → 4 → P (전원 켜기) 3 잠시 후 스마트 허브는 자동으로 초기화됩니다. 화면이 검은색으로 되었다가 스마트 허브 화면이 다시 나타납니다. 잠시 후 초기화가 시작됩니다. 4 초기화가 완료되면 "스마트 허브 시작하기"의 2 단계로 돌아가세요. ● 스마트 허브 정보 스마트 허브에 대한 정보를 보여줍니다. 상세정보: 스마트 허브의 버전, 메모리사용, 고유번호를 표시합니다. 삼성 서비스 이용약관: 삼성 서비스 이용약관을 표시합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 47 2012-09-04 9:24:0848 Samsung Apps 사용하기 ™ → Samsung Apps Samsung Apps는 삼성 TV/AV 기기에서 사용할 수 있는 부가 기능을 다운로드할 수 있는 온라인 매장입니다. 다운로드한 부가 기능으로 동영상, 음악, 사진, 게임, 유용한 정보 등 다양한 콘텐츠를 즐길 수 있습니다. 정기적으로 새로운 애플리케이션이 추가됩니다. ■ Samsung Apps를 이용하려면 인터넷TV 서비스 이용약관을 확인하고 동의해야 합니다. ■ 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. Samsung Apps에서 버튼 사용하기 화면에 따라 사용할 수 있는 버튼은 달라질 수 있습니다. ● a 로그인 / 로그아웃 스마트 허브 계정을 로그인하거나 로그아웃 합니다. ● b 가격 필터 유료, 무료로 이용할 수 있는 애플리케이션과 전체 애플리케이션을 보여줍니다. ● { 정렬 애플리케이션을 추천, 이름, 날짜, 다운로드 순으로 정렬합니다. 인기 앱을 제외한 모든 카테고리에서 정렬 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● } 보기 모드 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택할 때마다 기본 모드와 미리 보기 모드를 전환하여 볼 수 있습니다. ● πµ 스크롤 이전 또는 다음 페이지로 이동합니다. ● T 간편 메뉴 부가 설정 메뉴를 보여줍니다. ● R 복귀 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. 카테고리 별로 Samsung Apps 사용하기 사용할 수 있는 카테고리는 다음과 같습니다. ● 인기 앱 가장 인기 있는 애플리케이션을 보여줍니다. ● 동영상 영화, TV 쇼와 짧은 동영상을 제공합니다. ● 게임 다양한 게임을 제공합니다. ● 스포츠 경기 정보, 이미지, 짧은 동영상 등 다양한 스포츠 미디어를 보여줍니다. ● 라이프스타일 음악, 사진 관리 도구, SNS(Social Network Service) 등 다양한 생활 미디어 서비스를 제공합니다. ● 정보 뉴스, 주식, 날씨 등 다양한 정보 서비스를 제공합니다. ● 교육 어린이들에게 교육적인 애플리케이션이 제공됩니다. ● 나의 Apps 세부정보와 다운로드한 콘텐츠처럼 구입한 애플리케이션 목록이나 이미 설치한 애플리케이션, 사용 가능한 App 캐시 쿠폰에 대한 정보를 제공합니다. http://tv.samsungapps.com에서 캐시를 구매하여 애플리케이션을 구입할 수 있습니다. ● 도움말 Samsung Apps에 관한 궁금증이 있으면 이 부분을 확인하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 48 2012-09-04 9:24:0949 4. 고급 기능 Samsung Apps에서 애플리케이션 검색하기 TV에서 이용할 수 있는 다양한 콘텐츠를 검색합니다. 1 Samsung Apps 화면에서 Samsung Apps 검색을 선택하세요. 애플리케이션을 검색하는 창과 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 2 리모컨을 이용해 키워드를 입력하세요. 3 입력을 완료하면, 쿼티 키패드 하단의 확인을 선택하세요. 4 검색 결과 화면이 나타날 때까지 기다리세요. 검색된 애플리케이션 화면에서 원하는 애플리케이션을 선택하세요. ■ 검색기록에서 이전 검색어를 찾을 수 있습니다. ■ TV에 연결된 마우스나 키보드가 있다면, 마우스를 이용해 Samsung Apps 검색 입력란을 선택할 수 있으며, 키보드를 이용해 키워드를 입력할 수 있습니다. 스마트 검색 ™ → 스마트 검색 다양한 소스(예 : Apps, AllShare)의 콘텐츠를 보다 쉽게 검색하고 이용할 수 있습니다. 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 검색을 하려면 스마트 검색을 선택하세요. 2 직접 용어를 검색하려면 "검색어를 입력하세요." 선택하세요. 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 검색하려는 단어를 입력하세요. 리모컨을 이용해 원하는 카테고리를 선택하여 검색할 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 카테고리 별 검색 기능 사용하기 ● 인기 검색어 검색 목록에 있는 검색어를 선택하여 탐색할 수 있습니다. 검색 목록은 자주 탐색된 단어들을 보여줍니다. ● 인기 애플리케이션 애플리케이션 목록에서 애플리케이션을 검색할 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션 목록은 사용자들이 자주 다운받은 애플리케이션을 보여줍니다. ● 검색 내역 이전에 탐색한 검색 내역을 보여줍니다. 기능 버튼을 이용하여 검색하기 ● b 새로고침 검색 기능을 새로 고침 할 수 있습니다. ● T 간편 메뉴 스마트 검색 기능이나 검색 내역을 삭제하기 위한 일반적인 항목을 설정합니다. ● R 복귀 이전 메뉴로 돌아갑니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 49 2012-09-04 9:24:0950 검색에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ● 일반 설정 검색 추천: 검색어 추천기능을 켜거나 끕니다. 검색 범위: 검색 범위를 설정합니다. 초기설정은 모든 애플리케이션의 검색을 허용합니다. ▼ 검색 범위 설정하기 1 찾기 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 일반 설정을 선택하세요. 3 검색 범위에서 애플리케이션을 선택하면 c 마크가 없어집니다. c 마크를 해제하면, 검색 범위에서 애플리케이션을 제외됩니다. 체크된 애플리케이션만이 검색 범위에 포함됩니다. 4 검색 범위 설정이 완료되면, 복귀R 버튼을 누릅니다. ● 검색 내역 검색 내역에서 검색어를 삭제할 수 있으며 전체 삭제를 선택하면 모든 검색 내역이 삭제됩니다. ▼ 검색 내역에서 키워드 삭제하기 1 스마트 검색 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 2 검색 내역을 선택하세요. 3 키워드 목록에서 하나의 키워드를 선택합니다. 4 리모컨의 E 버튼을 누르세요. 키워드가 목록에서 삭제됩니다. 스마트 팁 NAVER ™ → 스마트 팁 NAVER 스마트 팁 NAVER를 이용하면 다양한 방법으로 현재 방송과 장면에 대한 연관 정보 및 실시간 핫 이슈를 확인할 수 있으며, 원하는 검색어를 TV를 시청하면서 바로 검색할 수 있습니다. ■ 현재 방송의 연관정보는 디지털 채널에서만 가능합니다. ■ 장면에 따라 키워드가 제공되지 않을 수 있습니다. 제공되는 키워드를 리모컨을 이용해 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 이 기능을 이용하려면 인터넷에 연결되어 있어야 합니다. ■ 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 스마트 팁에서 컬러 버튼 이용하기 ● a 창 숨기기 하단의 스마트 팁 메뉴 바를 최소화합니다. 메뉴 바를 최소화하면 a 스마트 팁만 화면에 나타납니다. 일정 시간이 지나면 자동으로 메뉴 바가 최소화됩니다. ● b NAVER 검색 NAVER 검색 창과 숫자 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 검색하려는 단어를 입력하세요. 단어를 입력하면 연관 검색어가 아래 목록에 나타납니다. 실시간 급상승 검색어, TV 인기검색어, 일간 급상승 검색어: 리모컨을 이용해 원하는 항목을 선택하세요. 검색 목록이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 b 검색하기를 선택하면 이전 검색 화면으로 돌아갑니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 50 2012-09-04 9:24:1051 4. 고급 기능 ● { 방송 글감 미투데이 창이 나타나며 이 기능을 통해 방송과 관련된 실시간 핫 이슈를 볼 수 있습니다. ▼ 방송 글감에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 ● a 핫 이슈 더 보기 미투데이 창이 확장됩니다. 리모컨을 이용해 실시간 방송 글 목록을 확인할 수 있습니다. ● E 글 상세보기 미투데이 위젯이 실행됩니다. 미투데이 위젯이 설치되어 있지 않다면 설치할 것인지를 묻는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 미투데이에 대한 자세한 사항은 Samsung Apps에서 확인하세요. ● R 복귀 이전 화면으로 돌아갑니다. ● T 부가 기능 북마크 관리: 주간 인기 북마크와 나의 북마크를 관리할 수 있습니다. 연관정보 카테고리 설정: 리모컨을 이용해 원하는 카테고리를 선택할 수 있습니다. 선택된 카테고리에는 c 표시가 나타납니다. 자동 실행 설정: TV가 켜질 때, 스마트 팁이 자동 실행되도록 설정하거나 해제합니다. ● E 상세보기 제공되는 키워드에 대한 정보를 자세히 확인할 수 있습니다. 상세보기를 한 번 더 선택하면 네이버 검색 목록이 나타납니다. 키워드가 제공될 때만 메뉴 바에 나타납니다. 제공되는 다수의 키워드를 리모컨을 이용해 선택할 수 있습니다. - } 북마크: 제공되는 키워드를 나의 북마크에 저장합니다. 북마크는 상세보기를 선택했을 때에만, 메뉴 바에 나타납니다. ● R 복귀 스마트 팁 메뉴 바를 최소화합니다. 복귀를 한 번 더 선택하면, 스마트팁을 종료할 것인지를 묻는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 예 또는 아니오를 선택하세요. 네이버 검색 목록에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 리모컨을 이용해 카테고리 별 검색 목록을 확인할 수 있습니다. ● b 검색하기 검색어 입력 창으로 이동합니다. 숫자 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 다른 검색어를 입력할 수 있습니다. ● } 동시화면 동시화면을 설정하거나 해제합니다. 현재 시청 중인 방송이 나오며, 리모컨을 이용해 채널을 변경할 수 있습니다. ● R 복귀 네이버 검색 목록을 종료하고 네이버 검색 화면이 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 51 2012-09-04 9:24:1152 패밀리 스토리 ™ → 패밀리 스토리 패밀리 스토리 기능을 통해 가족과 함께 사진과 메시지, 이벤트 등을 함께 공유할 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. ● 그룹 생성 가족 구성원 중 패밀리 스토리를 가장 처음 시작하는 사용자는 그룹을 생성하고 구성원을 초대할 수 있습니다. ● 멤버 초대 그룹을 생성한 후에, 가족의 사진과 이벤트를 함께 공유하기 위해, 가족 구성원을 초대할 수 있습니다. ● 그룹 가입 가족 구성원으로부터 패밀리 스토리 서비스에 초대를 받았다면, 그룹 가입을 선택하여 참여할 수 있습니다. 패밀리 그룹 생성하기 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 패밀리 스토리를 선택하세요. 2 그룹 생성을 선택하세요. 그룹생성과 초대 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 3 확인을 선택하세요. 패밀리 스토리 이용 약관이 나타납니다. 약관을 읽어보고 동의를 선택하세요. 패밀리 스토리를 이용하려면 이용 약관에 동의해야 합니다. 4 그룹 이름, 본인 이름, 본인 전화번호(-없이)를 리모컨으로 입력하세요. ■ 그룹 이미지나 사진을 등록하려면 이미지 박스를 선택하세요. TV와 연결된 기기 (예 : USB)에 저장된 사진 파일을 등록할 수 있습니다. ■ "*" 표시 항목은 필수 입력 항목입니다. 5 완료를 선택하세요. 그룹 생성이 완료됩니다. 다른 멤버를 그룹에 초대하려면 멤버 초대를 선택하세요. 패밀리 스토리로 이동하려면, 패밀리 스토리로 이동을 선택하세요. 멤버 초대를 선택했다면, 아래의 "구성원 초대하기" 4단계 과정부터 시작하세요. 구성원 초대하기 1 패밀리 스토리 그룹 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후 멤버 리스트를 선택하세요. 멤버 리스트가 화면에 나타납니다. 2 멤버 초대를 선택하세요. 초대 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 3 확인을 선택하세요. 멤버 초대 화면이 나타납니다. 4 “멤버에게 남길 메시지를 입력하세요.”를 선택하세요. 키패드 화면이 나타납니다. 5 리모컨을 이용해 멤버의 이름을 입력한 뒤에 완료를 선택하세요. 6 전화번호 혹은 삼성 계정 ID를 선택하세요. 7 리모컨을 이용해 멤버의 전화번호 혹은 삼성 계정 ID를 입력한 뒤에 완료를 선택하세요. 구성원을 더 추가하려면 멤버 추가를 선택하고 4~7 단계를 반복해서 실행하세요. 8 새로운 구성원 초대가 완료되었으면, 완료를 선택하세요. 멤버 초대 완료 화면이 나타납니다. 9 전화 번호를 이용해 구성원을 초대하려면, 4자리의 인증 번호를 생성해서 구성원에게 보내줍니다. 삼성 계정을 이용해 구성원을 초대하면, 이메일을 통해 초대장을 발송합니다. 완료하려면 확인을 선택하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 52 2012-09-04 9:24:1153 4. 고급 기능 초대 받은 코드를 이용해서 그룹에 참여하기 1 패밀리 스토리를 시작하고, 이용 약관에 동의합니다. 2 초대 유형에 대해 묻는 메시지가 나타납니다. 휴대폰을 통해 초대 받았다면, 인증번호를 선택하고, 삼성 계정을 통해 초대 받았다면 삼성 계정을 선택하세요. 3 삼성 계정을 선택했다면, 사용자의 패밀리 그룹으로부터 온 초대 목록이 나타납니다. 수락을 선택하세요. 초대된 그룹에 참여를 원치 않으면 차단을 선택하세요. 4 인증번호를 선택했다면, 리모컨을 통해 휴대 전화번호를 입력하세요. 완료를 선택하세요. 사용자의 패밀리 그룹으로부터 온 초대 목록이 나타납니다. 수락을 선택하세요. 초대된 그룹에 참여를 원치 않으면 차단을 선택하세요. 4자리의 인증 번호를 입력하고 완료를 선택하세요. 5 확인을 선택하세요. 패밀리 그룹에 참여가 완료됩니다. 피트니스 ™ → 피트니스 스마트 허브에서 제공되는 피트니스는 운동에 관련된 애플리케이션으로 당신의 건강을 관리해줍니다. ■ 피트니스를 사용하기 위해서는 스마트 허브에 로그인해야 합니다. ■ 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 운동을 시작하기 전에... ■ 운동을 시작하기 전에 워밍업을 하거나 스트레칭을 해 주세요. ■ 피곤, 통증, 현기증, 숨이 차는 등의 증상이 생기면 운동을 즉시 중지하세요. 프로필 생성하기 피트니스를 처음 시작하면 프로필을 생성해야 합니다. 피트니스 화면에서 프로필을 생성하세요. 피트니스 화면에서 프로필 만들기를 선택하세요. 팝업 메시지가 나타나면 프로필 만들기를 시작하세요. 1 이름: 이름과 성을 선택하세요. 키패드 화면이 나타나면 리모컨을 이용해 이름과 성을 입력하세요. 2 성별: 성별을 선택하세요. 3 생년월일: 생년월일을 입력합니다. 이 정보는 사용자에게 맞춤 서비스를 제공하는 데 이용됩니다. 4 단위: 원하는 단위를 선택하세요. 선택된 단위는 피트니스 전체에 적용됩니다. 5 키: 키를 입력하세요. 사용자의 체질량지수 (BMI - Body Mass Index)를 계산하는데 이용됩니다. 6 몸무게: 체중을 입력합니다. 사용자의 체질량지수 (BMI - Body Mass Index)를 계산하는 데 이용됩니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 53 2012-09-04 9:24:1254 7 완료: 프로필 생성이 완료됩니다. 화면에 프로필정보와 체질량지수가 표시됩니다. 피트니스를 시작하려면 피트니스 즐기기를 선택하세요. 카테고리 별로 피트니스 이용하기 ● 운동 운동 목표, 현재 상태와 권장 내용에 대한 정보를 제공합니다. ● 나의 기록 기본 신체 프로필과 이전에 했던 운동에 대한 정보를 제공합니다. 키즈 ™ → 키즈 스마트 허브에서 제공되며, 쉽고 빠르게 자녀 또는 교육에 관련된 애플리케이션이나 콘텐츠를 이용할 수 있습니다. 또한 사용자(부모)가 자녀를 지도하는 데 도움을 줍니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 카테고리 별 키즈 이용하기 ● 키즈홈 추천 콘텐츠 및 애플리케이션을 보여줍니다. 애플리케이션이나 콘텐츠를 선택하면 바로 실행됩니다. ■ 콘텐츠 목록은 최대 40개까지입니다. ■ 콘텐츠 목록을 편집할 수 있습니다. 자세한 내용은 “내 콘텐츠”을 참조하세요. ■ 대부분의 콘텐츠는 Samsung Apps에서 다운로드 받을 수 있습니다. 화면의 지침을 따라주세요. 다운로드가 완료되면 키즈 애플리케이션이 다시 나타날 때까지 복귀R 버튼을 반복해서 누르세요. 콘텐츠나 애플리케이션을 선택하여 시작하세요. ● 스티커 북 자녀가 받은 스티커를 수집한 스티커 북을 보여줍니다. 또한 패밀리 스토리에서 공유할 수 있습니다. ▼ 아래의 방법을 통해 자녀에게 스티커를 줄 수 있습니다. - 부모님을 통해: 부모방 메뉴에서 스티커 선물하기를 이용해서 스티커를 선물합니다. - 자동으로: 콘텐츠를 시청하면 스티커를 줍니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 54 2012-09-04 9:24:1255 4. 고급 기능 ▼ 스티커 북 생성하기 1 새 스티커북 만들기를 선택하세요. 새 스티커북 만들기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 스티커 북의 이름을 리모컨으로 입력하세요. 입력이 완료되면 다음을 선택하세요. 3 스티커 북의 색을 선택하세요. 완료되면 다음을 선택하세요. 4 스티커 북 생성하기를 확인하세요. 이름을 변경하려면 편집을 선택하세요. 색을 바꾸려면 뒤로를 선택하세요. 5 완료를 선택하세요. 새로운 스티커 북이 생성됩니다. ■ 새로운 스티커 북을 최대 10개까지 만들 수 있습니다. ■ 새 스티커에서 새로운 스티커를 확인할 수 있습니다. 최근에 받은 스티커는 10개까지만 저장할 수 있습니다. ● 골라보기 자녀, 교육에 관한 애플리케이션 목록과 모든 콘텐츠 목록을 보여줍니다. 선택한 애플리케이션이나 콘텐츠가 설치되지 않았으면 해당 애플리케이션 또는 콘텐츠를 Samsung Apps에서 다운로드할 수 있는 화면으로 이동합니다. ▼ 골라보기 이용하기 1 골라보기 화면에서 원하는 문자를 선택하세요. 선택된 문자가 화면에 나타납니다. 2 재생하려는 콘텐츠를 선택하세요. - 동영상: 해당 문자의 동영상을 표시합니다. - 게임: 해당 문자의 게임을 표시합니다. - 이야기: 해당 문자의 책을 표시합니다. 3 선택된 콘텐츠의 세부정보 화면이 나타납니다. 콘텐츠를 재생할 수 있으며, 패밀리 스토리에서 공유하고 내 콘텐츠에 추가할 수 있으며, 내용에 등급을 제공합니다. 구입한 콘텐츠를 재생할 수 있습니다. 구매하지 않은 콘텐츠는 Samsung Apps을 통해 구매할 수 있습니다. ● 부모방 키즈홈을 편집하여 자녀에게 스티커를 주고, 사용 시간을 확인합니다. 또한, 알람을 설정할 수 있습니다. 내 콘텐츠 키즈홈에서 콘텐츠를 추가하거나 삭제할 수 있습니다. 추가된 콘텐츠만 키즈홈에 표시됩니다. ▼ 키즈홈에서 콘텐츠 추가, 삭제하기 1 부모방 화면에서 내 콘텐츠를 선택하세요. 내 콘텐츠 화면이 나타납니다. 내 콘텐츠는 골라보기를 통해서 추가한 콘텐츠를 포함합니다. 2 추가 또는 삭제하려는 콘텐츠를 선택하세요. 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 3 예를 선택하세요. 4 선택된 콘텐츠가 추가되거나 삭제됩니다. 스티커 선물하기 자녀가 착한 일을 했을 때 스티커를 줄 수 있습니다. ▼ 스티커 선물하기 1 부모방 화면에서 스티커 선물하기를 선택하세요. 스티커 선물하기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 스티커를 선택하세요. 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 3 예를 선택하세요. 4 스티커 북을 선택하고, 선물하기를 선택하세요. 스티커 북을 확인하려면 지금 확인을 선택하세요. 선택된 스티커 북에서 스티커를 확인할 수 있습니다. 5 자녀에게 선택한 스티커를 줍니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 55 2012-09-04 9:24:1356 시청기록 그래프를 통해 자녀의 애플리케이션 사용 시간을 확인할 수 있습니다. 또한 자녀의 콘텐츠 별 사용 시간을 확인할 수 있습니다. 날짜 또는 콘텐츠의 제목을 변경하세요. 알람 설정 자녀의 시청 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다. 시간이 종료되면 알람 창이 나타납니다. ▼ 시청 시간 설정하기 1 부모방 화면에서 알람 설정을 선택하세요.알람 설정 화면이 나타납니다. 2 타이머를 선택하세요. 3 원하는 시간을 선택하면, 알람이 설정됩니다. 웹브라우저 ™ → 웹브라우저 스마트 허브에서 제공되는 기능으로 TV에서 인터넷을 검색할 수 있습니다. 1 스마트 허브 화면에서 웹브라우저를 선택하세요. 웹브라우저 화면이 나타납니다. 2 컴퓨터에서와 같은 방법으로 인터넷을 검색합니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 웹브라우저에서 컬러 버튼 사용하기 ● b 메뉴 바 화면 위의 제어판을 보이거나 숨깁니다. ● { 링크 컨트롤 / 포인터 컨트롤 링크 컨트롤 모드 또는 포인터 컨트롤 모드로 전환합니다. 포인터 컨트롤 모드에서는 컴퓨터를 사용하는 방식으로 포인터를 움직여 항목을 선택할 수 있습니다. 링크 컨트롤 모드에서는 링크와 링크 사이를 화면에 나타난 파란색 사각형을 리모컨의 방향키를 눌러서 움직일 수 있습니다. TV에 연결된 마우스가 있다면 포인터 컨트롤 모드를 사용하세요. 리모컨을 이용한다면, 링크 컨트롤 모드를 사용하세요. ■ 포인터 컨트롤 모드를 선택했다면, 간편 메뉴에서 리모컨을 이용해 항목을 선택할 수 없습니다. ■ 포인터 컨트롤 모드에서 리모컨의 방향키를 이용해 포인터를 움직일 수 있습니다. ● } 동시 화면 동시 화면을 켜거나 끕니다. 동시 화면 모드를 켜면 TV를 시청하면서 웹브라우저를 사용할 수 있습니다. ● π / µ 위 / 아래로 이동 페이지를 위, 아래로 스크롤 합니다. 커서가 링크 컨트롤로 설정되었을 때, 가능합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 56 2012-09-04 9:24:1357 4. 고급 기능 ● T 간편 메뉴 간편 메뉴를 표시합니다. 메뉴 바: 화면 위의 제어판을 보이거나 숨깁니다. 링크 컨트롤 / 포인터 컨트롤: 커서를 링크 컨트롤 모드 또는 포인터 컨트롤 모드로 전환합니다. 동시 화면: 동시 화면을 켜거나 끕니다. PIP 설정: 동시 화면의 위치를 설정하고 주 화면( 웹브라우저) 또는 부 화면(동시 화면 창)의 음향을 선택합니다. 즐겨찾기에 추가: 현재 페이지를 즐겨찾기에 추가합니다. ● R 복귀 웹브라우저를 종료합니다. 웹브라우저에서 메뉴 바 이용하기 웹브라우저 화면 상단에 여러 가지 아이콘이 있습니다. 이 아이콘으로 웹브라우저를 더 쉽게 사용할 수 있습니다. 화면 가장 왼쪽에 위치한 아이콘을 실행하려면 아래의 설명을 참고하세요. ● 뒤로 이전 페이지로 이동합니다. 저장된 이전 웹 페이지가 없으면 이동할 수 없습니다. ● 앞으로 URL이 저장되어 있을 때 다음 웹 페이지로 이동합니다. 저장된 페이지가 없으면 이동할 수 없습니다. ● 새로 고침 / 중지 현재 페이지를 새로 고침 하거나 현재 페이지 로딩을 정지합니다. ● 홈페이지 홈페이지로 지정한 인터넷 사이트로 이동합니다. ● 줌 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 200%, 300%, 화면에 맞추기 중, 원하는 화면의 크기를 선택할 수 있습니다. ● 즐겨찾기 즐겨찾기 화면을 표시합니다. 현재 페이지나 즐겨 찾는 페이지를 즐겨찾기 목록에 설정할 수 있습니다. 날짜, 이름 또는 방문 빈도 순 별로 분류할 수 있습니다. 분류를 설정하려면 오른쪽 상단의 정렬을 선택하세요. 주소 입력을 선택하면, 리모컨을 이용해 새로운 URL 주소를 입력할 수 있습니다. 페이지를 선택하면 옵션 팝업 창이 오른쪽에 나타납니다. 옵션 팝업 창에서 선택된 페이지를 편집하거나 즐겨찾기 목록에서 선택된 페이지를 삭제할 수 있습니다. ▼ 즐겨찾기에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ● 전체 삭제 즐겨찾기의 모든 목록을 삭제합니다. 즐겨찾기가 있을 때만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 즐겨찾기에 추가 현재 페이지를 즐겨찾기로 설정합니다. ● 즐겨찾기 불러오기 TV에 연결된 USB 기기에서 즐겨찾기 파일을 가져올 수 있습니다. ● 즐겨찾기 내보내기 즐겨찾기 파일을 TV에 연결된 USB 기기에 내보낼 수 있습니다. ● 방문기록 방문기록 화면을 표시합니다. 이전에 방문했던 웹 페이지를 선택할 수 있습니다. 이름, 날짜, 방문 빈도 순 별로 분류할 수 있습니다. 분류하려면 오른쪽 상단에 있는 정렬을 선택하세요. 주소 입력을 선택하면, 리모컨을 이용해 새로운 URL 주소를 입력할 수 있습니다. 페이지를 선택하면 옵션 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 옵션 팝업 창에서 선택된 페이지를 방문기록에서 지우거나 즐겨찾기에 추가할 수 있습니다. 모든 방문기록을 지우려면, 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하고, 전체 삭제를 선택하세요. ● URL 입력 현재 페이지의 URL을 보여줍니다. URL 항목을 선택하면 URL 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 리모컨을 이용해 새로운 URL을 직접 입력할 수 있습니다. ● 창 목록 열려있는 창의 목록이나 이미지를 보여줍니다.( 창 목록) 목록에 새로운 페이지를 열 수 있고(새창 열기), 목록에 있는 페이지를 선택하여 열어볼 수 있으며, 한 페이지 또는 모든 페이지를 종료시킬 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 57 2012-09-04 9:24:1458 창 목록에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ● 새창 열기 새 웹브라우저를 엽니다. 설정된 홈페이지가 나타납니다. ● 전체 창 닫기 현재 열려있는 창 목록을 닫습니다. 창 목록을 모두 닫으면 자동적으로 새로운 브라우저를 엽니다. 설정된 홈페이지가 열립니다. 웹브라우저 설정하기 커서를 화면의 상단으로 이동시키고, 옵션 아이콘을 선택하세요. ● 읽기도구 웹 페이지를 읽기 쉽게 하기 위해 기본 문장을 확대합니다. ● 승인 사이트 자녀들이 부적절한 웹 페이지에 접속하는 것을 제한합니다. 등록된 웹 사이트에만 접속할 수 있도록 하는 기능입니다. 승인 사이트에 접속할 때마다 비밀번호 입력 화면이 나타나게 됩니다. 승인 사이트 기능: 승인 사이트 기능을 켜거나 끕니다. 승인 사이트 비밀번호 변경: 비밀번호를 변경합니다. 현재 페이지 추가: 현재 보고 있는 웹 페이지를 승인 사이트 목록에 추가할 수 있습니다. 승인 사이트 관리: 승인 사이트 목록을 추가하기 위해 URL을 입력할 수 있고, 승인 사이트 목록 중 일부를 삭제할 수도 있습니다. 승인 사이트 목록에 아무것도 없는 상태에서 승인 사이트 기능을 켜면, 어떤 인터넷 사이트도 접속할 수 없습니다. ● 사생활 보호 기능 켜기 / 끄기 사생활 보호 기능을 설정하거나 해제합니다. 사생활 보호 기능이 설정됐다면, 방문한 사이트의 URL 기록을 저장하지 않습니다. 사생활 보호 설정을 하려면, 사생활 보호 기능 켜기를 선택하세요. 사생활 보호 기능이 실행 중인 경우, 화면 상단의 URL 주소 앞 부분에 "중지" 아이콘이 나타납니다. 사생활 보호 기능을 해제하려면, 사생활 보호 기능 끄기를 선택하세요. ● 동시 화면 설정 동시 화면 기능을 구성할 수 있습니다. 동시 화면 위치: 보조 화면의 위치를 선택합니다. 음향 선택: 동시화면이 실행 중인 경우, 주 화면이나 부 화면의 소리를 선택합니다. ● 웹브라우저 설정 웹브라우저의 설정을 구성할 수 있습니다. 홈 설정: 홈 페이지를 지정할 수 있습니다. - 즐겨찾는 사이트: 가장 많이 방문한 URL 주소를 홈 페이지로 지정합니다. - 현재 페이지: 현재 페이지를 홈 페이지로 지정합니다. - 즐겨찾기: 즐겨 찾기 된 URL 주소를 홈페이지로 지정합니다. - 주소 입력: 사용자가 홈페이지로 지정하길 원하는 URL 주소를 입력합니다. 팝업 차단: 팝업 차단 기능을 설정하거나 해제합니다. 광고 차단: 광고와 특정 URL 주소의 광고를 차단할 수 있습니다. - 광고 차단: 광고 차단 기능을 설정하거나 해제합니다. - 현재 페이지 차단: 현재 페이지를 차단 목록에 추가합니다. - 차단 리스트 관리: 광고를 차단할 특정 웹 사이트의 URL 주소를 직접 입력하여 추가하거나 삭제할 수 있습니다. 일반 설정: 사용자의 개인 정보를 삭제할 수 있습니다. - 방문 기록 삭제: 웹 사이트 히스토리를 삭제합니다. - 인터넷 사용 정보 삭제: 쿠키 파일 같은 인터넷 접속 정보를 삭제합니다. - 설정 초기화: 웹브라우저를 초기화합니다. - 메뉴 바 자동 숨기기: 메뉴 바의 자동 숨김 기능을 설정하거나 해제합니다. 인코딩: 웹 페이지의 인코딩 설정을 자동 또는 수동으로 설정할 수 있습니다. - 자동선택: 웹 페이지에 대한 인코딩을 자동으로 설정하거나 해제합니다. - 설정: 웹 페이지에 대한 인코딩 설정을 수동으로 설정합니다. 인코딩 형식을 목록에서 선택합니다. 포인터: 커서가 포인터 모드로 설정될 경우, 커서의 움직임 속도를 설정할 수 있습니다. - 포인터 속도: 포인터 속도를 선택합니다. 웹브라우저 정보: 웹브라우저의 버전 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 58 2012-09-04 9:24:1459 4. 고급 기능 Skype ™ → Skype Skype는 전세계 사람들과 쉽고 재미있게 연락을 주고 받을 수 있도록 개발된 소프트웨어입니다. Skype를 통해 언제 어디서나 안부를 전하고 즐거움을 공유할 수 있습니다. Skype를 양쪽 사용자 모두 무료로 이용할 수 있습니다. 전 세계 사람들과 연락을 나누세요! Skype 애플리케이션을 설치한 후에 MoIP를 연결하여 사용하세요. 삼성 Skype 카메라를 별도 구매해야 Skype 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 자세한 내용은 인터넷 홈페이지 "http://www. samsung.com/sec"에서 Skype 사용설명서를 다운로드하여 확인하세요. ■ 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. [법적 고지사항] 삼성 스마트 허브 콘텐츠 서비스를 지원하는 제품의 다양한 기능과 가용 콘텐츠의 제약 때문에, 특정 기능, 부가 기능, 서비스를 이용할 수 없는 기기나 지역이 있을 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브의 일부 기능을 이용하려면 별도로 판매되는 추가 주변 기기나 회원 가입비가 필요할 수 있습니다. 특정 기기 정보와 가용 콘텐츠에 관한 자세한 내용은 "http://www.samsung.com/sec"에서 확인하세요. 스마트 허브를 통한 서비스 및 콘텐츠 가용성은 예고 없이 수시로 변경될 수 있습니다. TV 애플리케이션으로 에어컨 이용하기 ™ → 삼성 스마트 에어컨 삼성 스마트 에어컨 애플리케이션을 통해 TV를 보면서 음성인식 기능으로 가정에 있는 에어컨을 조정할 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션의 버전에 따라, 사용 방법은 달라질 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, 화면에 나타나는 지침을 따르세요. 에어컨 등록 네트워크를 통해 TV와 연결된 에어컨을 선택할 수 있습니다. 1 TV와 에어컨이 같은 공유기에 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. 2 TV에 연결된 에어컨을 검색합니다. 3 새로운 가전기기 확인 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 예를 선택하여 에어컨을 등록합니다. 4 검색된 에어컨 목록에서 예를 선택하여 애플리케이션을 실행합니다. 5 삼성 스마트 에어컨 화면에서 사용 중인 제품을 선택하세요. 사용 중인 에어컨이 화면에 없으면 b 다시 검색을 선택하세요. 6 사용 중인 제품을 선택하면, 인증요청을 시작합니다. 에어컨의 전원을 끈 후, 확인을 선택하세요. 인증을 시작합니다. 7 인증 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 인증을 위해 에어컨의 전원을 켜세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 59 2012-09-04 9:24:1560 8 “인증이 완료되면 음성(스마트톡)으로 에어컨을 운전 하실 수 있습니다.”라는 메시지가 화면에 나타납니다. 화면에서 사용 중인 에어컨을 선택하세요. ■ 사용 중인 제품이 화면에 없으면 b 다시 검색을 선택하세요. ■ 에어컨의 연결을 해제하여 사용하지 않으려면, { 에어컨 연결해제를 선택하세요. ■ 이전 단계로 가려면 R 뒤로를 선택하세요. 에어컨 사용하기 TV 화면에서 음성 인식 기능으로 에어컨을 사용할 수 있습니다. 1 음성 인식 기능이 켜기로 설정되어 있는 상태에서 시작 명령어 (하이 티비 / 스마트 티비)로 음성 인식을 시작합니다. 2 "에어컨"이라고 명령하세요. 명령어가 나타납니다. 3 원하는 명령어를 말하세요. 에어컨이 작동합니다. 에어컨 등록 해제하기 에어컨 사용을 중지하려면, { 에어컨 연결해제를 선택하세요. AllShare Play ™ → AllShare Play USB 대용량 저장 장치(MSC) 또는 컴퓨터에 저장된 사진, 음악 또는 동영상 파일을 감상할 수 있습니다. AllShare Play을 처음 실행하면 AllShare를 통해 이용할 수 있는 기능 목록 창이 나타납니다. 기능을 확인한 후, 다시 표시 안 함 또는 닫기를 선택하세요. ■ USB의 콘텐츠를 보려면 USB 장치를 TV의 USB 단자에 연결해야 합니다. ■ USB HDD를 사용하려면 파워 어댑터가 있는 USB HDD를 권장합니다. USB 장치 연결하기 1 TV를 켜세요. 2 TV의 USB 단자에 사진, 음악 및 동영상 파일이 있는 USB를 연결하세요. 3 USB가 TV에 연결되면 "새 장치 연결됨" 이라는 메시지 창이 나타납니다. 동영상, 사진, 음악 중 재생하려는 콘텐츠를 선택하세요. 연결된 장치가 하나일 경우 자동으로 USB의 파일을 표시합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 60 2012-09-04 9:24:1561 4. 고급 기능 USB 장치 제거하기 ▼ 방법 1: TV/외부입력s 버튼 이용하기 1 리모컨의 TV/외부입력s 버튼을 누르세요. 2 원하는 USB 장치를 선택한 뒤에 리모컨의 간편메뉴T 버튼을 누르세요. 간편 메뉴가 화면에 나타납니다. 3 USB안전제거를 선택한 뒤에 USB 장치 연결이 해제될 때까지 기다리세요. USB 장치 연결이 해제됩니다. ▼ 방법 2: AllShare Play 화면에서 제거하기 1 AllShare Play 화면으로 이동하세요(™ → AllShare Play) 2 마이 리스트를 제외한 다른 항목을 선택하고 리모컨의 E 버튼을 누르세요. 3 제거하려는 USB 장치를 선택하고 리모컨의 간편메뉴T 버튼을 누르세요. 간편 메뉴가 화면에 나타납니다. 4 USB안전제거를 선택한 뒤에 USB 장치 연결이 해제될 때까지 기다리세요. USB 장치 연결이 해제됩니다. USB안전제거 기능을 사용하여USB를 제거하는 것을 권장합니다. USB를 이용하여 AllShare Play 기능을 사용하기 전 확인 사항 주의 사항 ● 장치를 TV에 연결하기 전에, 데이터가 손상되거나 손실되지 않도록 파일을 백업하세요. 삼성전자는 데이터 파일의 손상, 손실에 대해 절대 책임을 지지 않습니다. ● 전용 USB (HDD 5V 1A) 단자에 USB HDD 장치를 연결하세요. ● 로딩 중에는 USB 장치를 분리하지 마세요. ● USB 확장 케이블을 사용하면, USB 장치를 인식할 수 없거나 장치에 담긴 파일을 읽지 못할 수 있습니다. ● TV에 연결한 USB 장치를 인식할 수 없으면, 장치의 파일 목록이 손상되었거나 파일 목록의 파일을 재생할 수 없는 상태입니다. 이러한 경우, USB 장치를 컴퓨터에 연결해서 장치를 포맷하고 연결 상태를 확인하세요. ● 스마트 허브를 실행할 때 컴퓨터에서 삭제한 파일이 여전히 나타나면 컴퓨터의 “휴지통 비우기” 기능으로 파일을 완전히 삭제해 주세요. ● 2TB 보다 큰 USB HDD는 지원하지 않습니다. ▼ AllShare Play을 이용할 수 있는 장치 ● 유형에 따라 TV와 호환되지 않는 USB 디지털 카메라 및 오디오 장치가 있을 수 있습니다. ● AllShare Play 기능은 USB MSC (Mass Storage Class) 장치만 지원합니다. MSC 는 대용량 저장장치 클래스 대량 전용 전송 장치입니다. MSC 장치의 종류에는 썸 드라이브, 플래시 카드 리더기, USB HDD 등이 있습니다. (USB 허브는 지원하지 않습니다.) 이러한 장치는 TV의 USB 단자에 직접 연결해야 합니다. ● PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol) 장치를 두 개 이상 연결한 경우에는 한 번에 하나만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● MSC 장치를 두 개 이상 연결한 경우, 일부 장치를 인식하지 못할 수 있습니다. 높은 전력(500mA 또는 5V)이 필요한 USB 장치는 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ● USB 장치를 연결하거나 사용할 때, 과열 경고 메시지가 표시되면, 장치를 인식하지 못하거나 장치가 제대로 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. ● 화면 보호 시간에서 설정한 시간 동안 TV에 입력되는 신호가 없으면 화면 보호기가 실행됩니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 61 2012-09-04 9:24:1662 ● 일부 외장 하드 디스크 드라이브의 절전 모드는 TV 에 연결하면 자동으로 해제될 수 있습니다. ▼ 파일 시스템 및 형식 ● USB 기능이 불량 멀티미디어 파일로 인해 제대로 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. ● MTP(Media Transfer Protocol)는 지원하지 않습니다. ● 파일 시스템은 FAT16, FAT32, NTFS를 지원합니다. ● AllShare Play 기능은 순차적 JPEG 형식 (Sequential JPEG format)을 지원합니다. 점진적 JPEG 형식(Progressive jpeg format) 은 지원하지 않습니다. ● 이미지 해상도가 높을수록 화면에 표시될 때까지 걸리는 시간이 길어집니다. ● 최대 JPEG 지원 해상도는 15360x8640 화소입니다. ● 지원하지 않거나 손상된 파일에는 "지원되지 않는 파일형식입니다."라는 메시지가 표시됩니다. ● 폴더 보기로 파일을 정렬하면 폴더마다 1000개까지 파일을 표시할 수 있습니다. ● USB 장치에 파일과 폴더가 8000여개 이상 있다면, 일부 파일 및 폴더는 열리지 않을 수 있습니다. ● 유료 사이트에서 다운로드한 DRM 적용 MP3 파일은 재생할 수 없습니다. DRM(Digital Rights Management: 디지털 저작권 관리)이란 콘텐츠 제공업체의 권한 및 이익 보호, 불법 콘텐츠 복제 방지, 청구 및 정산 관리 등을 포함하여, 통합적이며 종합적인 방식으로 콘텐츠의 생성, 배포, 관리를 지원하는 기술입니다. 네트워크 통해 컴퓨터와 연결하기 AllShare Play 모드에서 네트워크 연결을 통해 PC 에 저장된 사진, 음악, 동영상을 재생할 수 있습니다. ■ 네트워크 구성 방법에 대한 자세한 내용은 “유, 무선 네트워크 연결하기”를 참고하세요. ■ 컴퓨터에 있는 콘텐츠를 보려면 TV와 컴퓨터를 동일한 무선 공유기에 연결하고 “http://www. samsung.com/sec”를 방문하여 AllShare PC 소프트웨어를 다운로드 하세요. ■ TV와 컴퓨터가 동일한 네트워크 서브넷에 접속되어 있어야 합니다. IP 주소는 점으로 구분된 4개의 부분으로 구성됩니다. (IP 주소 111.222.333.444) 같은 서브넷에 접속된 TV와 컴퓨터의 IP 주소는 앞의 세 부분이 동일하며 마지막 부분만 다릅니다. (111.222.333.***) 네트워크를 통해 컴퓨터와 연결할 때 AllShare Play 에서 지원하지 않는 기능은 다음과 같습니다. ■ 배경 음악 켜기 및 배경 음악 설정 기능 ■ 사진, 음악 또는 동영상 폴더에 기본 설정으로 파일 정렬 - 동영상 재생 중 † 또는 … 기능 ■ DivX DRM은 지원하지 않습니다. ■ AllShare PC 소프트웨어는 윈도우즈 방화벽 프로그램의 허가를 받아야 합니다. ■ 네트워크 연결을 통해 AllShare Play 모드를 사용할 때에는 제공된 서버에 따라 다음과 같은 기능이 다릅니다. - 정렬 방법이 다를 수 있습니다. - 장면 탐색 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. - 재시작 기능은 여러 사람이 사용할 수 없습니다. ( 재시작 기능은 최근 사용자가 마지막으로 재생을 중지한 지점만을 기억합니다.) - 탐색 기능은 콘텐츠 정보에 따라 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 네트워크 연결을 통해 동영상 콘텐츠를 재생하면, 파일이 원활하게 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 62 2012-09-04 9:24:1663 4. 고급 기능 AllShare Play 이용하기 AllShare Play에서는 다음과 같은 서비스를 사용할 수 있습니다. 웹 스토리지 (Web storage), 소셜 서비스는 삼성 계정으로 로그인 후 사용할 수 있습니다. AllShare Play에서 다음과 같은 3가지 방법으로 다양한 콘텐츠를 재생할 수 있습니다. - USB 장치 이용하기: USB 장치에 있는 동영상, 음악, 사진 등을 재생할 수 있습니다. - DLNA 또는 웹 스토리지 이용하기: 홈 네트워크에 연결된 장치와 웹 스토리지 등에 있는 콘텐츠를 재생할 수 있습니다. - 소셜 서비스 이용하기: 패밀리 스토리, 페이스북 또는 피카사와 같은 소셜 서비스의 일부 콘텐츠를 즐길 수 있습니다. ■ 페이스북이나 피카사를 사용하려면, 먼저 스마트 허브에 해당 애플리케이션이 설치되어 있어야 합니다. ■ SugarSync, 페이스북 또는 피카사를 이용하려면, 먼저 해당 애플리케이션에 로그인해야합니다. 스마트 허브에서 해당 애플리케이션의 계정을 삼성 계정에 등록할 수 있습니다. 삼성 계정에 해당 애플리케이션 계정을 등록하려면 스마트 허브의 “스마트 허브 설정하기 (고급 설정 → 스마트 허브 화면 설정하기 → 스마트 허브 설정하기)”를 참조하세요. ■ 패밀리 스토리를 이용하려면 삼성 계정에 로그인해야 합니다. 최소 하나 이상의 그룹에 가입이 되어 있어야만 패밀리 스토리를 이용할 수 있습니다. ■ TV에 연결된 다른 장치에 원하는 콘텐츠를 전송할 수 있습니다. 콘텐츠 형식 지원 가능한 전송 장치 USB DLNA, SugarSync, 패밀리 스토리, 피카사, 페이스 북 DLNA USB SugarSync USB 패밀리 스토리 USB 피카사 USB 페이스북 USB 모바일 장치 USB 마이 리스트 (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 마이 리스트 사용하고자 하는 콘텐츠를 쉽고 빠르게 이용할 수 있습니다. ● 최근 재생목록 최근에 재생했던 동영상, 사진 또는 음악파일을 표시합니다. 다시 재생하고 싶은 파일이 있을 때 이용하세요. ● 최근 신규목록 컴퓨터 또는 USB 장치에 저장된 파일 중 새롭게 업데이트 된 동영상, 사진이나 음악파일을 보여줍니다. 재생하려는 업데이트 파일이 있을 때 이용하세요. ● 재생 목록 USB 장치나 컴퓨터에 저장된 재생 목록 파일을 보여줍니다. 재생 목록을 재생하려면 재생 목록을 선택하세요. 선택된 재생목록이 바로 재생됩니다. 재생 목록 만들기 1 동영상, 사진, 음악 파일 목록에서 원하는 파일을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 재생 목록에 추가를 선택하세요. 3 추가하려는 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 4 파일을 더 추가하려면 3단계를 실행하세요. ■ 목록에서 모든 파일을 선택하려면 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 5 선택을 완료하면, 추가를 선택하세요. 재생 목록에 추가 화면이 나타납니다. 6 새로 만들기를 선택하세요. 새로운 재생 목록 생성 화면이 나타납니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 63 2012-09-04 9:24:1764 7 리모컨을 이용해 재생목록의 이름을 입력하세요. 8 입력한 후 완료를 선택하면 새로운 재생목록이 만들어집니다. ▼ 재생 목록에 파일 추가하기 1 “재생 목록 만들기”의 1~4단계를 실행하세요. 2 추가할 파일을 선택하세요. 선택된 파일이 추가됩니다. ▼ 재생 목록에서 하나 이상의 파일 삭제하기 1 수정하려는 재생 목록을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 재생목록 수정을 선택하세요. 재생목록 수정 화면이 나타납니다. 3 삭제하려는 파일을 선택하세요. 선택한 파일에 c 마크가 나타납니다. 4 파일을 더 삭제하려면 3단계를 다시 실행하세요. 목록의 모든 파일을 선택하려면 전체 선택을 선택하세요. 선택을 취소하려면 파일을 다시 선택하세요. 5 제거를 선택하면 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 6 예를 선택하면 선택된 파일이 재생목록에서 삭제됩니다. 동영상 (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 동영상 USB 장치 그리고(또는) 컴퓨터에 저장된 동영상 파일을 재생합니다. 자막과 코덱 형식에 대한 더 자세한 정보는 기타 정보 설명의 “지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식”을 참조하세요. ▼ 동영상 재생하기 1 AllShare Play 화면에서 동영상을 선택하세요. 2 재생하려는 기기를 선택하세요. 3 목록에서 재생하려는 동영상을 선택하세요. ■ 재생을 멈추면 다음 재생 시 멈춘 지점부터 재생됩니다. ■ 파일 이름이 재생시간과 함께 상단에 나타납니다. ■ 동영상 시간 정보를 알 수 없는 경우, 재생 시간 및 진행 표시줄이 표시되지 않습니다. ■ 재생 중에 되감기 및 빨리 감기 버튼을 3초 이상 누르면, 다음 동영상으로 이동할 수 있습니다. ▼ 동영상 재생 조정 버튼 ● † / … 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 …를 선택하세요. 재생속도가 변경됩니다. († 1 / † 2 / † 3 / … 1 / … 2 / … 3) ● l r 현재 위치에서 이전 또는 이후로 이동합니다. ● ∑ 장면을 잠시 멈춥니다. - 일시 정지 모드에서 …를 선택하세요. …를 선택할 때마다 재생 속도가 „ 1/8 / „ 1/4 / „ 1/2 로 감소합니다. - 일시 정지 모드에서 ∑를 선택하세요. ∑를 선택할 때마다 새로운 프레임이 나타납니다. ■ 재생 속도를 보통으로 설정하려면 r를 선택하세요. ■ 일시 정지 모드에서는 음향이 재생되지 않습니다. ■ 일시 정지 모드에서는 재생 방향으로만 작동합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 64 2012-09-04 9:24:1765 4. 고급 기능 동영상에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ▼ 파일 목록 화면에서 다음의 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 보기 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하여 목록을 정렬할 수 있습니다. ● 선택 재생 파일 목록에서 원하는 동영상 파일을 선택하여 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 보내기 동영상 파일을 웹 스토리지(Web storage) 또는 다른 장치로 보낼 수 있습니다. 보내기 기능을 이용하려면, 스마트 허브에 로그인이 되어 있어야 합니다. ● 로그인 / 로그아웃 사용자의 스마트 허브 계정에 로그인 또는 로그아웃 할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록에 추가 재생 목록을 만듭니다. 재생목록을 이용하면 듣고 싶은 동영상을 빠르고 간단하게 들을 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록으로 이동 재생 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 상세 정보 선택된 파일에 대한 세부정보를 보여줍니다. ▼ 재생 중 다음의 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 동영상 목록으로 이동 동영상 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 처음부터 재생 동영상을 처음부터 다시 재생합니다. 동영상을 처음부터 재생하는 경우 메뉴가 활성화되지 않습니다. ● 장면 탐색 동영상이 재생되는 동안 사용자가 선택한 장면에서 시작하거나 감상하기 위해 장면 탐색 기능을 이용할 수 있습니다. 인덱스 정보가 손상되거나 지원되지 않는 경우 장면 탐색 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. ● 타이틀 검색 다른 제목의 동영상으로 이동합니다. ● 시간 검색 리모컨을 이용해 재생 시간을 입력하거나 원하는 동영상을 검색합니다. ● 반복 모드 동영상 파일을 반복하여 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 크기 화면 크기를 원하는 만큼 조정할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 모드 화면 모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 음향 모드 음향 모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 음성 언어 원하는 언어로 동영상을 감상할 수 있습니다. 여러 오디오 포맷을 지원하는 스트림형식의 파일을 재생할 때만 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 자막 자막을 끄거나 켤 수 있습니다. 자막 파일이 여러 언어를 지원할 경우, 자막 언어를 선택할 수 있습니다. ■ 동영상에 개별 자막 파일이 있는 경우에만 자막을 설정 할 수 있습니다. ■ 지원되는 자막 형식은 “기타 기능의 지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식” 부분을 참조하세요. ● 자막 설정 자막의 옵션을 설정합니다. ■ 동영상에 개별 자막 파일이 있는 경우에만 자막을 설정 할 수 있습니다. ■ 지원되는 자막 형식은 “기타 기능의 지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식” 부분을 참조하세요. ● 상세 정보 선택한 파일의 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 65 2012-09-04 9:24:1866 파일 목록 정렬하기 USB 기기가 아닌 웹 스토리지(Web storage)로 AllShare Play 기능을 사용할 때 보기 기능은 지원되지 않습니다. 1 파일 목록에서 파일을 정렬하려면 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택하세요. 보기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하세요. ● 폴더 보기 전체 폴더를 보여줍니다. 폴더를 선택하면 파일 이름과 썸네일을 보여줍니다. ● 타이틀 기호 / 숫자 / 알파벳 순서로 파일의 타이틀을 분류하고 표시합니다. ● 최근 순 최근 순으로 파일을 정렬하여 보여줍니다. ● 오래된 순 오래된 순으로 파일을 정렬하여 보여줍니다. 동영상 파일 보내기 동영상 파일을 웹 스토리지(Web storage) 또는 다른 기기에 보낼 수 있습니다. 보내기 기능을 이용하려면, 스마트 허브에 로그인이 되어 있어야 합니다. 1 파일 목록에서 동영상 파일을 보내려면 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후에 보내기를 선택하세요. 2 보내고자 하는 동영상 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 3 동영상 파일을 추가로 선택하려면 2단계를 다시 실행하세요. ■ 목록에 있는 모든 파일을 선택하려면, 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 4 선택이 완료되면, 보내기를 선택하세요. 보내기 화면이 나타납니다. 5 보내려는 기기를 선택한 후, 보내기를 선택하세요. 6 화면의 지시에 따르세요. 사진 (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 사진 사진 보기 (또는 슬라이드 쇼) 지원되는 이미지 해상도 및 파일 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 기타 기능 부분의 "지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식"을 참고하세요. 1 AllShare Play 화면에서 사진을 선택하세요. 2 재생하려는 기기를 선택하세요. 3 파일 목록에서 원하는 사진 파일을 선택하세요. 4 리모컨으로 ∂를 선택하세요. ■ 수동으로 사진을 바꾸려면 l 또는 r 버튼을 누르세요. ■ 슬라이드 쇼를 하는 동안 목록에 있는 모든 파일들이 순서대로 보여지며 선택한 파일부터 슬라이드 쇼를 시작합니다. ■ 슬라이드 쇼 또는 사진 파일을 보는 동안 같은 기기에 음악 파일이 있으면 배경 음악을 넣을 수 있습니다. ■ 배경 음악 로딩이 끝날 때까지 배경 음악을 바꿀 수 없습니다. ▼ 사진에서 재생 조정 버튼 이용하기 ● † / … 슬라이드 쇼의 속도를 설정합니다. (보통, 느리게, 빠르게) ● l / r 이전 또는 다음 사진으로 이동합니다. ● ∫ 파일 목록화면으로 돌아갑니다. ● ∂ 슬라이드 쇼를 시작합니다. ● ∑ 슬라이드 쇼를 일시 정지 합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 66 2012-09-04 9:24:1867 4. 고급 기능 사진에서 간편 메뉴 이용하기 ▼ 파일 목록 화면에서 다음의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 보기 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하여 목록을 정렬할 수 있습니다. ● 선택 재생 파일 목록에서 원하는 사진 파일을 선택하여 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 보내기 원하는 사진을 패밀리 스토리나 사진과 관련된 애플리케이션에 보낼 수 있습니다. 이 기능을 사용하려면 먼저 스마트 허브에 로그인해야 합니다. ● 로그인 / 로그아웃 사용자의 스마트 허브 계정에 로그인 또는 로그아웃 할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록에 추가 재생 목록을 만들 수 있습니다. 듣고 싶은 음악을 재생 목록에 추가하여 쉽고 빠르게 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록으로 이동 재생 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 상세 정보 선택된 파일에 대한 세부정보를 보여줍니다. ▼ 사진 파일을 재생할 때 아래의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 사진 목록으로 이동 사진 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 슬라이드 쇼 실행 / 슬라이드 쇼 중지 슬라이드 쇼를 시작하거나 정지합니다. 리모컨의 ∂ 또는 ∑ 버튼을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 슬라이드 쇼 속도 슬라이드 쇼가 재생되는 동안 슬라이드 쇼의 속도를 선택할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 … 를 선택하세요. ● 배경 음악 켜기 / 배경 음악 끄기 배경 음악을 켜거나 끌 수 있습니다. ● 배경 음악 설정 슬라이드 쇼를 재생하거나 사진 파일을 볼 때 원하는 배경 음악을 선택하고 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 화면 모드 화면 모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. ● 음향 모드 음향 모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. 배경 음악이 설정되어 있을 때, 사용 가능한 기능입니다. ● 확대 이미지를 최대 4배까지 확대할 수 있습니다. ● 회전 이미지를 회전합니다. ● 상세 정보 선택한 사진 파일의 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. 파일 목록 보기 1 파일 목록에서 리모컨을 이용해 } 를 선택하세요. 보기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하세요. ● 폴더 보기 전체 폴더를 보여줍니다. 폴더를 선택하여 파일 이름과 썸네일 이미지를 볼 수 있습니다. ● 타이틀 기호 / 숫자 / 알파벳 순서로 파일을 정렬하고 보여줍니다. ● 최근 순 최근 날짜부터 파일을 정렬하여 표시합니다. ● 오래된 순 오래된 날짜부터 파일을 정렬하여 표시합니다. ● 월 별 월별로 사진 파일을 정렬하여 표시합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 67 2012-09-04 9:24:1968 사진 보내기 사진을 패밀리 스토리나 다른 기기에 보낼 수 있습니다. 보내기 기능을 사용하려면, 스마트 허브에 로그인 되어 있어야 합니다. 1 예를 들어, 패밀리 스토리에 사진을 보낸다고 가정해 보겠습니다. 2 사진 파일을 보내려면, 파일 목록에서 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후에 보내기를 선택하세요. 3 보내려는 사진 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 4 추가로 파일을 선택하려면, 3단계를 실행하세요. ■ 목록에서 모든 파일을 선택하려면 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 5 선택이 완료되면, 보내기를 선택하세요. 보내기 화면이 나타납니다. 6 보내려고 하는 장치를 선택하세요. 7 공유를 위해 패밀리 그룹을 선택하세요. 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 8 선택한 패밀리 그룹에게 보낼 메시지를 입력하세요. 쿼티 키패드 화면에서 TV에 연결된 키보드를 사용해 메시지를 입력할 수 있습니다. 9 메시지 입력이 완료되면, 보내기를 선택하세요. 음악 (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 음악 음악 재생하기 지원되는 음악 파일 형식에 대한 자세한 내용은 기타 기능 부분의 "지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식"을 참조하세요. 1 AllShare Play 화면에서 음악을 선택하세요. 2 재생하려는 장치를 선택하세요. 3 파일 목록에서 원하는 파일을 선택하거나, 리모컨을 이용해 ∂를 선택하세요. ■ 이전 페이지 또는 다음 페이지로 이동하려면 리모컨을 이용해 b 또는 {를 선택하세요. ■ 음악을 재생할 때 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 … 를 선택하세요. 재생시간을 검색할 수 있습니다. ■ MP3 파일을 재생할 때 소리가 비정상적으로 들리면, 음향 메뉴의 이퀄라이저를 조정하세요. 이상 변조된 MP3 파일은 음향 문제를 일으킬 수 있습니다. ■ 재생 중에 되감기 및 빨리 감기 버튼을 3초 이상 누르면, 다음 곡으로 이동할 수 있습니다. ▼ 음악에서 재생 조정 버튼 사용하기 음악이 재생되는 동안 화면의 오른쪽 하단의 부가기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 / 일시 정지 음악을 재생하거나 일시 정지 할 수 있습니다. 리모컨을 이용해 ∂ 또는 ∑ 을 선택하세요. ● 반복 모드 음악 파일을 반복하여 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 셔플 모드 음악을 순차적으로 또는 무작위로 음악을 재생할 수 있습니다. ● 음향 모드 음향모드를 변경할 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 68 2012-09-04 9:24:2069 4. 고급 기능 음악에서 간편 메뉴 이용하기 ▼ 다음의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 보기 원하는 정렬 기준을 선택하여 목록을 정렬할 수 있습니다. ● 선택 재생 파일 목록에서 재생하려는 음악 파일을 재생합니다. ● 보내기 원하는 음악 파일을 웹 스토리지(Web storage) 또는 다른 기기에 보낼 수 있습니다. 이 기능을 사용하려면 먼저 스마트 허브에 로그인해야 합니다. ● 로그인 / 로그아웃 사용자의 스마트 허브 계정에 로그인 또는 로그아웃 할 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록에 추가 나만의 재생 목록을 만들 수 있습니다. 재생 목록을 이용하여 듣고자 하는 음악을 쉽고 빠르게 들을 수 있습니다. ● 재생 목록으로 이동 재생 목록 화면으로 이동합니다. ● 인코딩 원하는 언어로 인코딩 할 수 있습니다. ● 상세 정보 선택한 파일에 대한 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. 음악에서 선택한 음악 파일 재생하기 1 파일 목록에서 원하는 음악 파일을 선택하세요. 2 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후, 선택 재생을 선택하세요. 3 추가하려는 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 4 추가로 파일을 선택하려면, 3단계를 실행하세요. ■ 목록에서 모든 파일을 선택하려면 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 5 재생을 선택하세요. 선택된 음악 파일이 재생됩니다. 파일 목록 보기 USB 기기가 아닌 웹 스토리지(Web storage)로 AllShare Play 기능을 사용할 때 보기 기능은 지원되지 않습니다. 1 리모컨을 이용해 }를 선택하세요. 파일 목록에서 파일을 정렬합니다. 보기 화면이 나타납니다. 2 원하는 정렬기준을 선택하세요. ● 폴더 보기 전체 폴더를 보여줍니다. 폴더를 선택하면 파일 이름과 썸네일을 볼 수 있습니다. ● 타이틀 기호 / 숫자 / 알파벳 순서로 파일을 정렬하고 보여줍니다. ● 가수 가수의 이름을 알파벳, 가나다 순으로 음악 파일을 정렬합니다. ● 앨범 알파벳순의 앨범 별로 음악 파일을 정렬합니다. ● 장르 장르별로 음악 파일을 정렬합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 69 2012-09-04 9:24:2070 음악 파일 보내기 음악 파일을 웹 스토리지(Web storage) 또는 다른 기기에 보낼 수 있습니다. 보내기 기능을 이용하려면, 스마트 허브에 로그인이 되어 있어야 합니다. 1 파일 목록에서 동영상 파일을 보내려면 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행한 후에 보내기를 선택하세요. 2 보내고자 하는 음악 파일을 선택하세요. c 마크가 나타납니다. 3 음악 파일을 추가로 선택하려면 2단계를 다시 실행하세요. ■ 목록에 있는 모든 파일을 선택하려면, 전체 선택을 선택하세요. ■ 선택을 취소하려면, 선택한 파일을 한번 더 선택하세요. 4 선택이 완료되면, 보내기를 선택하세요. 보내기 화면이 나타납니다. 5 보내려는 기기를 선택한 후, 보내기를 선택하세요. 6 화면의 지시에 따르세요. 녹화된 TV (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → 녹화된 TV 녹화된 TV를 재생하기 전에 먼저 원하는 프로그램을 녹화해야 합니다. - 현재 방송중인 프로그램 녹화 - 녹화 예약 ■ 녹화된 TV를 사용하려면 5,400rpm 이상 USB HDD 장치 연결을 권장합니다. 단, RAID 타입 USB HDD는 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 장치 성능 검사를 완료한 USB 장치만 녹화 예약이 가능합니다. ▼ 녹화된 TV 장치 목록 화면에서 간편 메뉴 이용하기 (디지털 채널에서만) 녹화된 TV 장치 목록 화면에서 콘텐츠가 저장된 기기를 선택한 후 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. 아래의 기능을 사용할 수 있습니다. 로그인 / 로그아웃: 스마트 허브에 로그인하거나 로그아웃 합니다. 장치 관리: 장치 포맷, 장치 검사, 장치 성능 검사를 할 수 있고, 녹화 기본 장치를 확인할 수 있습니다. - 장치 포맷: TV와 연결된 USB 저장 장치를 녹화된 TV 형식에 맞게 포맷합니다. - 장치 검사: 녹화된 TV 형식에 맞는 USB 저장 장치를 검사합니다. - 장치 성능 검사: TV와 연결된 USB 저장 장치로 녹화 및 타임시프트 기능을 이용할 수 있는지 장치의 성능을 검사합니다. - 녹화 기본 장치: TV와 연결된 USB 저장 장치가 여러 개인 경우, 녹화된 TV 프로그램을 저장할 장치를 설정할 수 있습니다. 상세 정보: 연결된 기기에 대한 세부 정보를 확인할 수 있습니다. USB안전제거: USB를 안전하게 제거합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 70 2012-09-04 9:24:2171 4. 고급 기능 현재 시청 중인 프로그램 녹화하기 (디지털 채널에서만) ▼ 현재 시청 중인 프로그램을 바로 녹화할 수 있습니다. 1 방송 시청 중, 녹화를 원하시면 ∏를 선택하세요. 2 화면 오른 쪽 상단에서 원하는 녹화 길이를 선택하고 확인을 선택하세요. 최대 녹화 길이는 360분입니다. 3 녹화를 마치면 ™ → AllShare Play → 녹화된 TV에서 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 방송 프로그램 정보에서 현재 시청 중인 프로그램을 바로 녹화하기 1 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 2 a 상세 정보를 선택하세요. 3 현재 시청 중인 프로그램을 녹화하려면 레코더 바로 녹화를 선택하세요. ▼ 방송 프로그램 정보에서 다음 프로그램을 바로 녹화 예약하기 1 리모컨의 정보표시` 버튼을 누르세요. 2 리모컨의 l 또는 r 버튼을 눌러 다음 프로그램을 선택하세요. 3 a 상세 정보를 선택하세요. 4 녹화 예약을 선택하세요. 5 녹화 예약된 프로그램의 이름 앞에 아이콘이 나타납니다. 녹화된 TV 재생하기 ™ → AllShare Play → 녹화된 TV 녹화된 TV를 선택하고 녹화된 TV가 저장된 외부기기를 선택하세요. 화면에 저장된 콘텐츠가 최근 순으로 나타납니다. ▼ 녹화된 TV 목록 화면에서 버튼 이용하기 ● π µ 페이지 이동: 페이지를 이동할 수 있습니다. ● b 장치 관리: 장치 포맷, 장치 검사, 장치 성능 검사를 할 수 있고, 녹화 기본 장치를 확인할 수 있습니다. ● } 보기: 원하는 기준으로 정렬할 수 있습니다. ● E 재생: 선택한 콘텐츠를 재생합니다. ● T 간편 메뉴: 부가 설정 메뉴를 보여줍니다. ● R 복귀: 이전 화면으로 돌아갑니다. 녹화된 TV에서 간편 메뉴 사용하기 ▼ 파일 목록 화면에서 다음의 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 현재 그룹 재생: 선택된 그룹의 콘텐츠를 재생합니다. ● 보기: 원하는 기준으로 정렬합니다. ● 선택 재생: 원하는 콘텐츠를 선택하여 재생할 수 있습니다. 하나 이상 선택할 수 있으며 선택한 콘텐츠를 재생하거나 삭제할 수 있습니다. ● 삭제: 선택한 콘텐츠를 삭제합니다. ● 재생 목록에 추가: 선택한 콘텐츠를 재생목록에 추가합니다. ● 재생 목록으로 이동: 재생 목록으로 이동합니다. ● 잠금 설정/해제: 잠금을 설정하고 해제합니다. ● 장치 관리: 장치 포맷, 장치 검사, 장치 성능 검사를 할 수 있고, 녹화 기본 장치를 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 콘텐츠를 선택했을 때 추가로 설정할 수 있는 항목입니다. ● 이름 변경: 콘텐츠의 이름을 변경합니다. ● 상세 정보: 콘텐츠의 세부 정보를 보여줍니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 71 2012-09-04 9:24:2172 ▼ 재생 중 다음의 기능을 설정할 수 있습니다. ● 녹화 리스트로 이동: 녹화된 TV 목록으로 이동합니다. ● 처음부터 재생: 다시 처음부터 재생합니다. ● 장면 탐색: 원하는 장면을 선택합니다. ● 타이틀 검색: 콘텐츠의 제목을 선택하여 재생합니다. ● 시간 검색: 숫자를 입력하면 초, 분, 시간으로 재생위치를 선택할 수 있습니다. 리모컨의 l 또는 r 버튼을 누르세요. 되감기 및 빨리 감기를 할 수 있습니다. ● 반복 모드: 반복을 원하는 구간을 설정하거나 해제합니다. - 끄기: 반복을 설정하지 않습니다. - 타이틀: 지금 재생 중인 콘텐츠를 한번 재생하고 한 번 반복 합니다. - 전체: 모든 콘텐츠를 반복합니다. - 구간 반복: 원하는 구간을 설정하여 반복합니다. 재생 중에 구간 반복을 원하는 부분에서 기능을 실행한 후, 되돌릴 부분에서 한번 더 실행하세요. ● 화면 크기: 화면의 크기를 조정합니다. ● 화면 모드: 원하는 화면 모드를 선택합니다. ● 음향 모드: 음향 모드를 변경합니다. ● 상세 정보: 녹화된 콘텐츠의 제목 및 녹화 시간, 길이, 내용 등 세부정보를 보여줍니다. 타임시프트 현재 방송 중인 TV 프로그램을 마치 DVD처럼, 필요한 시점에서 일시 정지 시키고, 다시 보고 싶은 장면을 되돌려 볼 수 있습니다. 디지털 채널에서만 가능합니다. 타임시프트 기능 ▼ 일시 정지 기능으로 타임시프트 기능 시작하기 1 방송 시청 중 리모컨을 이용해 ∑을 선택하세요. 2 타임시프트 기능이 시작되면, 화면이 정지되며 타임시프트 진행막대가 나타납니다. 타임시프트 진행 막대 좌측에서 현재 타임시프트 상태를 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 타임시프트 및 녹화 기능을 사용하기 전에... 녹화한 영상은 콘텐츠 보호기술(DRM)이 적용되어 PC나 다른 TV에서 재생되지 않습니다. 또한 TV의 영상회로를 교체한 경우에도 재생되지 않습니다. 참고 ■ 5,400rpm 이상 USB HDD를 사용하시는 게 좋습니다. 단, RAID 타입 USB HDD는 지원하지 않습니다. ■ USB 저장 장치의 여유 공간 및 영상의 화질에 따라 녹화 및 타임시프트의 가용 시간이 다를 수 있습니다. ■ 타임시프트 기능을 최대로 사용할 때 영상을 일시 정지해도, 자동으로 재생될 수 있습니다. ■ 녹화 중, USB 장치의 여유 공간이 50MB 이하로 될 경우에는 녹화가 종료됩니다. ■ 재생 또는 타임시프트 실행 중 영상은 TV의 설정 값에 영향을 받습니다. ■ 녹화 중 입력 신호를 전환하면 전환이 일어날 때까지 화면이 검게 나옵니다. ■ 방송 안내 또는 채널에서 녹화 수행 시, 장치 성능 검사를 실패한 USB 장치인 경우 장치 포맷 및 장치 성능 검사를 다시 수행합니다. ■ 타임시프트 기능은 장치 성능 검사를 완료한 USB 장치가 연결된 경우에만 사용할 수 있습니다. ■ 현재 방송 중인 프로그램을 녹화하거나 녹화 예약으로 녹화를 할 경우, 녹화 시작 시간은 명령 수행 시간에 따라서 1~2초 차이가 날 수 있습니다. ■ TV 녹화용 USB 장치를 연결하면, 기존에 저장되어 있던 타임시프트 또는 녹화 파일 중 비정상적으로 저장된 파일은 자동으로 삭제됩니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 72 2012-09-04 9:24:2273 4. 고급 기능 ■ 녹화 중에 입력 신호를 전환하면 녹화는 계속 되지만 ∏를 선택할 수 없습니다. ■ 꺼짐 시간 예약, 자동 전원 끄기와 같은 기능이 설정되어 있을 때, 녹화가 진행 중이라면 녹화가 완료된 후에 TV가 꺼집니다. ▼ 재생 기능으로 타임시프트 기능 시작하기 1 방송 시청 중 리모컨을 이용해 ∂을 선택하세요. 2 타임시프트 기능이 시작되면, 타임시프트 진행막대가 나타납니다. 타임시프트 진행 막대 좌측에서 현재 타임시프트 상태를 확인할 수 있습니다. ▼ 타임시프트 기능 수행 중, 버튼 이용하기 ● † / … 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 …를 선택할 때마다, 재생 속도가 다음과 같이 변경됩니다. († 1 † 2 → … † 6 † 7 / … 1 … 2 → … … 6 … 7) ● l r 20초 이전 또는 이후의 화면으로 이동합니다. ● ∑ 리모컨을 이용해 ∑를 선택하세요. 재생중인 화면을 일시 정지합니다. - 일시 정지된 화면에서 리모컨을 이용해 † 또는 …를 선택하세요. 재생속도가 다음과 같이 변경됩니다. (ƒ)1/8, (ƒ)1/4, (ƒ)1/2 / („)1/8, („)1/4, („)1/2 ● ∫ 과거 영상을 시청 중, 리모컨을 이용해 ∫를 선택하세요. 현재 방송 화면으로 이동합니다. 현재 방송 화면을 시청 중, 리모컨을 이용해 ∫ 를 선택하면, "타임시프트를 종료하겠습니까?" 라는 메시지 창이 나타나고, 확인을 선택하면 타임시프트를 종료합니다. ● 재생 속도를 정상 속도로 변경하려면, 리모컨을 이용해 ∂을 선택하세요. ■ 정지된 영상 탐색 중에는 소리가 재생되지 않습니다. ■ 정지된 영상은 재생 방향으로만 동작합니다. DLNA 기능 사용하기 ™ → AllShare Play TV와 휴대폰 또는 다른 기기가 동일한 네트워크에 연결되어 있을 경우, 휴대폰 또는 다른 기기에 저장된 미디어 콘텐츠(동영상, 사진, 음악 등)를 TV를 통해 재생할 수 있습니다. 더 자세한 설명은 홈페이지 “http://www. samsung.com/sec”를 방문하거나 삼성전자 서비스 센터에 문의하세요. 모바일 기기에 소프트웨어를 추가로 설치해야 할 수 있습니다. 자세한 내용은 각 기기의 사용설명서를 참조하세요. ■ 삼성 TV와 타사 DLNA 서버의 연결 중 동영상 재생할 경우, 호환성 문제가 발생할 수 있습니다. ■ AllShare Play은 삼성 TV와 연결되면 다음과 같은 삼성만의 차별화된 기능을 제공합니다. - 다양한 동영상 재생 (DivX, MP4, 3GPP, AVI, ASF, MKV, 등) - Video thumbnail 제공 - Bookmark 기능 (동영상 이어보기) - Auto-chaptering (장면 탐색) - Digital Content Management - 다양한 형식의 외부 자막 지원 (SRT, SMI, SUB, TXT, TTXT) - 파일명을 통한 검색 기능 - 기타 등등 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 73 2012-09-04 9:24:2274 AllShare 설정 메뉴 → 네트워크 → AllShare 설정 네트워크를 통해 TV와 연결된 스마트 폰 또는 태블릿과 같은 장치의 허용 여부를 설정합니다. 허용된 장치의 콘텐츠를 공유하거나 모바일 장치에 다운로드된 앱을 이용하여 본 기기를 제어할 수 있습니다. AllShare 설정 기능은 DLNA DMC를 지원하는 모든 장치에서 사용할 수 있습니다. ● 허용됨 / 차단됨: 기기를 허용하거나 차단합니다. ● 삭제: 목록에서 기기를 삭제합니다. 이 기능은 목록에서 모바일 기기의 이름만 삭제합니다. 삭제된 기기를 켜거나 TV에 연결하면, 목록에 다시 나타날 수 있습니다. DLNA 기능에 연결된 장치의 미디어 콘텐츠 재생하기 1 AllShare Play 화면에서 메뉴(동영상, 사진, 음악)를 선택하세요. 2 DLNA를 선택하세요. DLNA 기능을 통해 연결된 기기의 파일 목록이 나타납니다. 3 파일 목록에서 원하는 파일을 선택하면, 선택된 파일이 재생됩니다. 기기에 저장된 미디어 콘텐츠 재생하기 1 휴대폰이나 AllShare Play 기능을 지원하는 다른 장치를 연결한 후 장치의 미디어 콘텐츠를 재생합니다. TV화면 하단에 팝업 창이 나타납니다. 2 허용을 선택하면 장치와 연결됩니다. 장치의 미디어 콘텐츠를 TV에서 재생할 수 있습니다. AllShare 설정에서 연결할 수 있는 장치를 찾을 수 있습니다. ■ 휴대폰에서 전송된 미디어 콘텐츠 (동영상, 사진, 음악)가 TV에서 재생될 것이라는 알림 창이 나타납니다. 콘텐츠는 알림 창이 나타난 후 3초 후에 재생됩니다. - 알림 창이 나타났을 때, 알림 창을 닫으면 콘텐츠는 재생되지 않습니다. ■ 미디어 기능을 통해서 기기가 TV와 처음 연결되면, 경고 창이 나타납니다. 허용을 선택하세요. 허용을 선택하면 휴대폰과 TV를 자유롭게 접속하도록 하며, 콘텐츠를 재생하는 미디어 기능을 이용할 수 있습니다. ■ 휴대폰에서 미디어 콘텐츠 전송 기능을 끄려면, AllShare 설정에서 차단됨을 설정합니다. ■ 콘텐츠의 해상도와 파일 형식에 따라 TV에서 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 일부 기능은 미디어 콘텐츠의 유형에 따라 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 모바일 장치를 사용하여, 미디어를 제어할 수 있습니다. 더 자세한 사항은 각 모바일 장치의 사용 설명서를 참조하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 74 2012-09-04 9:24:2375 4. 고급 기능 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 다양한 AV 기기들로 구성된 환경에서 Anynet+ 메뉴를 통해 AV 기기들을 자동으로 제어함으로써, 사용자가 간편하게 TV를 통해 AV 기기들을 사용할 수 있도록 하는 AV 네트워크 시스템입니다. ■ TV 리모컨으로만 Anynet+ 기기를 제어할 수 있으며 TV의 패널 키로는 제어할 수 없습니다. ■ 특정 상황에서는 TV 리모컨이 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. 이러한 경우, Anynet+ 기기를 다시 선택하세요. ■ 다른 제조업체의 제품은 Anynet+ 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. ■ Anynet+의 외부기기 연결방법에 대한 설명은 기기의 사용 설명서를 참조하세요. HDMI케이블을 이용하여 Anynet+를 연결하세요. 일부 HDMI 케이블은 Anynet+ 기능을 지원하지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ Anynet+ 동작은 Anynet+ 를 지원하는 AV 기기가 전원 대기 또는 전원이 들어온 상태에서만 동작 합니다. ■ Anynet+를 지원하는 AV 기기들은 총 12대까지 연결됩니다. 단, 같은 종류의 기기는 3대까지만 연결할 수 있습니다. ■ 홈씨어터는 한 대만 연결할 수 있습니다. 홈씨어터를 연결하려면, 홈씨어터와 TV를 HDMI 케이블로 연결한 다음, - 옵티칼 케이블을 사용하여 TV의 디지털 음성 출력(옵티칼) 단자와 홈시어터의 디지털 오디오 입력 단자를 연결하세요. 홈 시어터의 전면 왼쪽 및 오른쪽 스피커와 서브우퍼에서만 소리가 들릴 것입니다. - 5.1채널 오디오를 들으려면 HDMI 케이블을 DVD, 위성박스에 연결하세요. 연결한 다음 DVD / 위성박스 (즉 Anynet 기기 1 또는 2)의 디지털 음성 출력 (옵티칼) 단자를 TV가 아닌 앰프 또는 홈시어터에 직접 연결하세요. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 메뉴 Anynet+ 메뉴는 TV에 연결된 Anynet+ 기기의 유형과 상태에 따라 다릅니다. ● TV 방송 보기 Anynet+ 모드가 TV 방송 모드로 변경됩니다. ● 기기 선택 Anynet+ 기기 목록을 표시합니다. ● (장치 이름) 메뉴 연결된 기기의 메뉴를 표시합니다. 예를 들어, DVD를 연결하면 DVD의 디스크 메뉴가 표시됩니다. ● (장치 이름) 간편 메뉴 연결된 기기의 도구 메뉴를 표시합니다. 예를 들어, DVD를 연결하면 DVD의 재생 메뉴가 표시됩니다. 일부 장치는 이 메뉴를 사용하지 못할 수 있습니다. ● (장치 이름) 타이틀 메뉴 연결된 기기의 타이틀 메뉴를 표시합니다. 예를 들어, DVD를 연결하면 DVD의 타이틀 메뉴가 표시됩니다. 일부 장치는 이 메뉴를 사용하지 못할 수 있습니다. ● 리시버 듣기 리시버를 통해 음향을 재생합니다. Anynet+ 기기 설정하기 ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+ 기능을 사용하려면 Anynet+ (HDMICEC)가 켜기로 설정되어 있어야 합니다. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 기능이 비활성화되면 Anynet+와 관련된 모든 기능을 이용할 수 없습니다. ● 자동 꺼짐 TV를 끌 때 Anynet+ 기기의 전원이 자동으로 꺼지도록 설정합니다. ■ 자동 꺼짐을 예로 설정하면, TV가 꺼질 때 동작 중이던 외부 기기도 같이 꺼집니다. ■ 기기에 따라 이 기능을 사용할 수 없는 기기도 있습니다. ● 리시버 듣기 TV 스피커 대신 홈 시어터와 같은 리시버를 통해 음향을 들을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 75 2012-09-04 9:24:2376 Anynet+ 기기 전환하기 1 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)를 선택하세요. 2 기기 선택을 선택하세요. 원하는 기기를 찾을 수 없으면 기기 찾기를 선택하여 목록을 새로 고침하세요. 3 기기를 선택하고, 선택한 기기로 전환될 때까지 기다리세요. 선택한 기기로 전환할 수 있습니다. ■ 시스템 메뉴에서 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 를 켜기로 설정한 경우에만 기기 선택 메뉴가 나타납니다. ■ 선택한 기기로 전환하려면 최대 2분이 걸릴 수 있습니다. 전환 작동 중에는 작동을 취소할 수 없습니다. ■ TV/외부입력으로 외부 입력 모드를 선택한 경우에는 Anynet+ 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. 반드시 기기 선택을 사용하여 Anynet+ 장치로 전환하세요. 리시버를 통해 듣기 TV 스피커 대신 홈시어터와 같은 리시버를 통해 음향을 들을 수 있습니다. 리시버로 음향을 들으려면 리시버 화면으로 이동하세요. 메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → 리시버 듣기 리시버 듣기에서 켜기를 선택하세요. ■ 오디오만 지원하는 리시버는 기기 선택에 나타나지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 리시버의 옵티칼 입력 단자를 TV의 디지털 음성 출력(옵티칼) 단자에 제대로 연결해야만 리시버가 작동합니다. ■ 리시버(홈시어터)의 전원이 켜져 있으면, TV의 옵티칼 단자와 연결된 리시버로 소리를 들을 수 있습니다. TV에서 DTV(일반 방송) 신호를 방송하는 경우, TV에서 5.1채널 음향이 리시버로 송출됩니다. DVD와 같은 디지털 구성요소가 소스이고 HDMI를 통해 이 소스를 TV에 연결하면, 리시버에서 2채널 음향만 들립니다. ARC 기능 사용하기 (LED 6350 모델 이상, PDP TV에만 해당) 별도의 옵티칼 케이블 없이 HDMI 케이블로 연결한 리시버를 통해 사운드를 들으실 수 있습니다. ARC 기능을 이용하려면 리시버 듣기 화면으로 이동하세요. 메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → 리시버 듣기 리시버 듣기에서 켜기를 선택하세요. ■ ARC 기능을 사용하려면, HDMI-CEC 및 ARC 기능을 지원하는 리시버를 HDMI 입력 2 (ARC) 단자에 연결해야 합니다. ■ ARC 기능을 끄려면 리시버 듣기를 끄기로 설정하세요. TV에서는 ARC 신호를 계속 전송하지만 리시버는 신호 수신을 차단합니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 76 2012-09-04 9:24:2477 5. 기타 기능 문제 해결 메뉴 → 고객지원 → e-설명서 → 기타 기능 문제 해결의 상세한 설명을 보려면 리모컨의 고객지원 버튼 또는 메뉴 → 고객지원 → e-설명서 → 기타 기능으로 진입하세요. 각각의 항목을 확인하고 문제를 해결하세요. 기타 문의 사항은 서비스 센터 또는 "http://www.samsung.com/sec"으로 문의하세요. 화면 먼저 화질 테스트를 실행하여 TV가 테스트 이미지를 제대로 표시하는지 확인합니다. (메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 화질 테스트) 테스트 이미지가 제대로 보여지면 외부입력이나 신호로 인해 화질이 안 좋을 수 있습니다. TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 화면의 깜박거림과 흐림 본 제품의 화면이 간헐적으로 깜박거리고 밝지 않다면, 에코 센서나 에너지 절약 기능과 같은 자사의 효율적인 기능 중 일부를 해제해야 할 수도 있습니다. 리모컨으로 아래의 과정을 진행한다면, 이러한 기능들을 설정하거나 해제할 수 있습니다. ● 절전 모드: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 절전 모드 ● 에코 센서: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 에코 센서 컴포넌트 연결 / 화면 색상 본 제품의 화면 색상이나 흑백이 정확하지 않다면, 먼저 자가진단을 실행하세요. ● 자가진단: 메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 화질 테스트 테스트 결과 이상이 없다면, 다음의 사항을 확인하세요. ● TV의 영상 입력 단자와 비디오의 영상 출력 단자가 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. ● 그 외의 연결을 확인해봅니다. TV와 비디오를 컴포넌트 케이블로 연결했다면, 컴포넌트 케이블의 연결 단자 Pb, Pr, Y가 각각 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인해야 합니다. 화면 밝기 본 제품의 화면 색상은 정확하지만 밝기가 너무 어둡거나 밝다면, 수리를 요청하기 전에 몇 가지 설정들을 확인하세요. ● 메뉴의 화면으로 이동하여 백라이트 조정 LED TV에만 해당 / 패널 밝기 조정 PDP TV에만 해당 , 명암, 밝기, 선명도, 색농도, 색상 (녹/적) 등의 설정들을 조정해 보세요. Auto Motion Plus / 잔상 (LED 6350 모델 이상만 해당) TV 화면에 잔상이나 흐릿한 형체를 발견한다면, Auto Motion Plus 기능을 이용하여 해결할 수 있습니다. ● Auto Motion Plus: 화면 → 부가 설정 → Auto Motion Plus [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 77 2012-09-04 9:24:2578 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 전원 꺼짐 TV의 전원이 갑자기 꺼진다면, 시간 설정이나 에코 절전 설정의 무신호 전원 끄기를 확인하세요. 먼저 시간 설정이 설정되었는지 확인해보세요. 취침 예약은 사용자가 잠들었을 때, 에너지를 절약하기 위해 일정한 시간에 자동으로 꺼지도록 하는 기능입니다. ● 취침 예약: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 시간 설정 → 취침 예약 취침 예약이 설정되어 있지 않다면, 무신호 전원 끄기나 자동 전원 끄기 기능을 확인하세요. ● 무신호 전원 끄기: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 무신호 전원 끄기 ● 자동 전원 끄기: 메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 자동 전원 끄기 전원이 켜지지 않아요. TV가 켜지면, 화면이 나타나기 전에 리모컨 수신부의 불빛이 5차례 정도 깜박입니다. 본 제품에 전원을 켜는데 문제가 생겼다면, 서비스 요청을 하기 전에 몇 가지 사항을 확인하세요. 전원 코드, 리모컨 등의 기능에 문제가 없다면, 안테나 케이블 연결이 제대로 되어있지 않거나, 케이블 컨버터 또는 위성수신기가 꺼져 있을 것입니다. 안테나 케이블의 연결을 확인하거나 케이블 컨버터 또는 위성 수신기의 전원을 켜세요. 채널이 나오지 않아요. 초기 설정(메뉴 → 시스템 → 초기 설정)을 실행하거나 자동 채널 설정을 실행하세요. (메뉴 → 채널 → 자동 채널 설정) 매장에서만큼 TV 화질이 좋지 않아 보여요. 매장에서는 디지털 HD 채널을 보여줍니다. 아날로그 케이블이나 셋톱박스를 이용한다면, 디지털 셋톱박스로 업그레이드하세요. HDMI 또는 HD(High Definition) 화질을 제공하는 컴포넌트 케이블을 사용하십시오. 방송국 로고에 HD 표시가 있는 경우는 아날로그로 제작된 화면을 디지털로 전환한 화면이며 화질은 일반 화질입니다. True HD방송의 채널을 탐색하세요. ● 케이블/위성 가입자: 채널 라인업에서 HD 채널을 실행하세요. ● 일반/유선 안테나 연결: 자동 프로그램을 실행한 후 HD 채널을 시청하세요. 케이블/셋톱박스 비디오 출력 해상도를1080i로 또는 720p 로 조정하세요. 화면 왜곡 현상이 생겨요. 특히 스포츠나 액션영화 같은 빠르게 움직이는 화면에서 동영상 콘텐츠의 압축으로 인한 화면 왜곡 현상이 나타날 수 있습니다. 신호가 약하거나 좋지 않은 신호는 화면 왜곡을 유발할 수 있는데 이것은 이상증세가 아닙니다. TV 근처(1m 이내)의 휴대폰이 있다면, 아날로그와 디지털 채널의 화면에 노이즈가 발생할 수 있습니다. 제대로 된 색상으로 보이지 않아요. 컴포넌트 연결을 사용하고 있다면, 컴포넌트 케이블이 연결 단자와 제대로 연결되었는지 확인합니다. 잘못된 연결은 색상 및 화면이 나오지 않는 문제의 원인이 될 수 있습니다. 색감이 풍부하지 못하거나 화면이 충분히 밝지 않아요. TV 메뉴의 화면 설정을 조정하세요. (화면 모드 / 밝기 / 선명도 / 색농도) TV 메뉴의 절전 모드 설정을 조정하세요. (메뉴 → 시스템 → 에코 절전 설정 → 절전 모드) 현재 화면 설정을 초기화하세요.(메뉴 → 화면 → 화면 초기화) 화면 가장자리에 점선이 보여요. 만약 화면 크기가 원본 크기로 설정되어 있다면, 16:9로 변경하세요. 유선 방송/위성방송 수신기의 해상도를 변경하세요. 화면이 흑백으로 보여요. 컴포넌트 입력(외부입력 1)을 사용하고 있다면, 영상 케이블(노란색)을 TV의 컴포넌트 녹색 단자에 연결하세요. 채널을 변경할 경우, 화면이 멈추거나 왜곡, 지연돼요. TV가 유선 방송 수신기에 연결되었다면, 수신기를 초기화하세요. (전원 코드의 연결을 해제했다가 다시 연결하고 유선 방송 수신기가 다시 켜질 때까지 기다리세요. 20분 정도 소요됩니다.) 유선 방송 수신기의 출력 해상도를 1080i나 720p로 설정하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 78 2012-09-04 9:24:2579 5. 기타 기능 음향 먼저, TV의 오디오가 정상 작동하는지 확인하려면, 음질 테스트를 실행합니다. (메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 음질 테스트) 오디오가 정상 작동한다면, 음향 문제는 외부기기나 신호의 문제일 수 있습니다. TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 소리가 나지 않거나 최대 음량이 잘 안 들려요. TV와 연결된 장치(유선/위성 수신기, DVD, Blu-ray 등)의 음량을 확인하세요. 화면은 잘 나오는데, 소리가 안 나와요. 음향 메뉴의 스피커 선택을 TV 스피커로 설정하세요. 외부기기를 사용하고 있다면, 외부 기기의 오디오 출력 설정을 확인하세요. (예를 들어, TV와 연결된 유선 방송 수신기가 HDMI 케이블로 연결된다면, 유선 방송 수신기의 오디오 설정을 HDMI로 변경해야 합니다.) HDMI/DVI 케이블을 사용한다면, 별도로 오디오 케이블이 필요합니다. TV에 헤드폰 단자가 있다면, 헤드폰 단자에 연결된 것이 없는지 확인합니다. 외부 기기의 연결을 해제하고 재부팅 후, 장치의 전원 케이블을 다시 연결하세요. 스피커에서 잡음이 생겨요. 케이블 연결을 확인해야 합니다. 영상 케이블이 오디오 입력과 제대로 연결 됐는지 확인하세요. 안테나나 유선 방송 연결의 경우, 신호 정보를 확인해야 합니다. 잡음의 원인은 낮은 신호 레벨 때문일 수 있습니다. 음질 테스트 기능을 실행하세요. (메뉴 → 고객지원 → 자가진단 → 음질 테스트) 입체영상 (LED 5500 모델 미지원) TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 입체영상 안경이 제대로 작동하지 않아요. 입체안경의 전원이 켜져 있는지 확인하세요. 입체영상 안경이나 TV 주위에 다른 입체영상 제품이나 전자기기가 켜져 있을 경우, 입체영상 안경이 제대로 작동하지 않을 수 있습니다. 문제가 발생한다면, 전자기기를 입체안경으로부터 가능한 멀리 두세요. 입체영상이 제대로 보이지 않아요. 입체영상을 감상하는 최적의 거리는 화면 높이의 세 배 이상입니다. 화면과 같은 수준의 눈높이에서 시청할 것을 권장합니다. 입체안경의 배터리가 방전됐어요. 입체영상 안경을 사용하지 않는 동안은 전원을 꺼두세요. 입체영상 안경을 켜놓으면, 배터리의 수명은 짧아집니다. 안테나 (일반 / 유선) 연결 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 모든 채널이 수신되지 않아요. 동축케이블이 안전하게 연결되었는지 확인하세요. 채널 목록에 수신 가능한 채널을 추가하기 위해 자동 채널 설정을 실행하세요. 메뉴 → 채널 → 자동 채널 설정에서 시작을 선택하세요. 안테나의 위치가 정확한지 확인하세요. 디지털 채널에 자막이 안 나와요. 자막 설정 메뉴에서 확인하세요. 자막 모드를 변경해보세요. 일부 채널은 자막을 지원하지 않을 수도 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 79 2012-09-04 9:24:2580 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 화면이 왜곡됐어요. 화면 왜곡의 원인은 동영상 콘텐츠의 압축률 때문입니다. 스포츠나 액션 영화 같이 빠른 움직임의 영상에서 특히 잘 발생합니다. 신호가 약할 경우 화면 왜곡이 발생합니다. 이것은 제품의 결함은 아닙니다. 컴퓨터 연결 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! "지원하지 않는 모드입니다."라는 메시지가 나타나요. 컴퓨터의 출력 해상도를 TV에서 지원하는 해상도로 맞춰주세요. 동영상은 재생되는데, 소리가 안 나와요. 컴퓨터를 HDMI로 연결했다면, 컴퓨터의 오디오 출력 설정을 확인하세요. 네트워크 연결 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 무선 네트워크 연결에 실패했어요. (LED 5500, 6350, PDP 550 모델만 해당) 무선 네트워크를 연결하려면 삼성 무선 LAN 어댑터가 필요합니다. TV가 무선 IP 공유기에 연결되었는지 확인하세요. 네트워크를 통한 소프트웨어 업그레이드에 실패했어요. 연결을 확인하려면, 네트워크의 네트워크 상태를 실행합니다. 소프트웨어가 최신 버전이면 소프트웨어 업그레이드는 진행되지 않습니다. 기타 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 제품이 뜨거워요. 제품 특성상 장시간 시청 시 패널에서 열이 발생합니다. 패널의 열이 제품 상부의 통풍구로 방출되므로 장시간 사용시 제품 상단을 만졌을 때 사용자에 따라 뜨겁게 느낄 수 있으므로 주의하세요. 특히 어린이와 함께 시청 중에는 제품 상단을 만지지 않도록 보호자의 주의가 필요하며, 열이 발생하는 것은 제품의 결함이나 동작 사용상의 문제가 되는 것이 아니므로 안심하고 사용하세요. 자주색/녹색의 수평 막대가 흘러내리고 컴포넌트로 연결된 TV 스피커에서 잡음이 나요. 셋톱박스의 왼쪽과 오른쪽 오디오 연결을 해제합니다. 윙윙거리는 소리가 멈추지 않으면, 셋톱박스의 접지 문제입니다. 컴포넌트 케이블을 HDMI 케이블로 교체하세요. 화면이 전체화면으로 표시되지 않아요. HD 채널에서 일반 화질(4:3)의 콘텐츠가 재생되면 화면의 양쪽에 검은색 여백이 나타납니다. TV와 화면 비율의 다른 영화를 시청할 때, 위와 아래에 검은색 여백이 생겨납니다. 외부기기의 화면 크기 설정을 조정하거나 TV를 전체 화면으로 설정합니다. "지원하지 않는 모드입니다."라는 메시지가 나타났어요. TV에서 지원하는 해상도인지 확인하고, 이에 따라 외부기기의 출력 해상도를 조정하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 80 2012-09-04 9:24:2681 5. 기타 기능 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! TV 메뉴에서 자막이 회색으로 표시돼요. TV와 연결된 외부기기가 HDMI나 컴포넌트로 연결되었다면, 자막 메뉴를 사용할 수 없습니다. 외부기기의 자막 기능은 활성화되어 있어야 합니다. TV에서 플라스틱 냄새가 나요. 제품의 결함이 아니며, 시간이 지나면서 사라집니다. TV의 디지털 신호 정보가 자가 진단 메뉴에서 활성화되지 않아요. 디지털 신호 정보 기능은 디지털 채널에서만 가능합니다. TV가 옆으로 기울었어요. TV의 기본 스탠드를 분리하고 재조립하세요. 채널 메뉴가 비활성화되었어요. 채널 메뉴는 외부입력이 TV일 때만 사용 가능합니다. 30분이 지난 후나 TV가 꺼질 때마다 설정된 값이 사라져요. TV가 매장모드로 설정돼 있다면, 30분마다 음향 및 화면 설정은 초기화됩니다. 초기 설정을 실행시켜 매장모드에서 가정모드로 설정을 변경하세요. 리모컨을 이용해 TV/외부입력을 선택하세요. TV를 선택한 다음, 메뉴 → 시스템 → 초기 설정을 실행하세요. 오디오나 비디오가 손실됐어요. 케이블 연결을 확인하고 다시 연결하세요. 지나치게 뻣뻣하거나 두꺼운 케이블은 비디오나 오디오의 손실을 가져올 수 있습니다. 케이블이 오랫동안 사용 가능한지, 신축성 있는지를 확인해 보세요. TV를 벽에 장착할 경우, 90도 커넥터로 이용해 케이블을 연결할 것을 권장합니다. TV의 가장자리를 가까이에서 바라보면, 작은 입자가 보여요. 제품 디자인의 일부이며, 결함이 아닙니다. 동시화면 메뉴가 비활성화되었어요. 동시화면 기능은 외부입력(HDMI, 컴포넌트)을 이용할 때 사용 가능합니다. POP (TV 내부 배너 광고)가 화면에 나타나요. 초기 설정 모드에서 가정모드를 선택하세요. 더 자세한 사항은 초기 설정 기능을 참조하세요. 제품에서 뚝뚝 소리가 나요. TV 외관의 기구적 수축, 팽창에 의해서 나타날 수 있는 현상입니다. 제품의 고장이 아니므로 안심하고 사용하세요. 제품에서 계속 소리가 나요. TV는 고속 스위칭 회로와 큰 전류를 사용하였으므로 화면 밝기의 변화에 따라 소음의 변화가 있어 기존의 TV와 비교해 일정 수준의 소음이 발생할 수 있습니다. 당사의 엄격한 관리 기준으로 관리되고 있으며, 제품의 성능 및 신뢰성과는 무관합니다. 일정 수준의 소음은 TV 자체의 특성이며 교환 및 환불의 대상이 아님을 양해하여 주시기 바랍니다. 화면 열화 문제 (PDP TV에만) 해당 플라즈마 디스플레이(PDP) 화면의 잔상을 예방할 수 있습니다. 화면 보호 기능을 설정해 놓으세요. 이 제품에는 화면 열화 방지 기술이 갖춰져 있습니다. PDP 화면에서 수평 또는 수직 방향으로 화소들을 미세하게 이동하여 화면 잔상을 최소화할 수 있습니다. 녹화 예약 / 타임시프트 (문제해결) TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! USB 저장 장치가 인식되지 않거나 장치포맷, 장치 테스트, 장치 성능 검사가 실패됩니다. USB 저장 장치의 사용설명서를 참조하여 저장이 가능한지 확인하세요. USB 저장 장치가 잠금으로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. 컴퓨터에 연결했을 때 USB 저장 장치가 포맷되었는지 확인하세요. USB 저장장치를 TV에 연결한 후 포맷하세요. (포맷은 실패할 수 있습니다.) 만약 장치 성능 검사나 포맷이 실패한다면 USB 저장 장치에 문제가 있거나 성능이 너무 낮기 때문입니다. 새로운 USB 저장 장치를 사용하세요. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 81 2012-09-04 9:24:2682 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! USB 저장 장치를 포맷하여 사용하라는 메시지가 나타납니다. USB 저장 장치가 잠금으로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. USB 복구 기능을 사용하여 USB 저장 장치를 복구 해 보세요. 녹화 예약 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. USB 저장 장치가 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. 방송 채널이 녹화 가능한 디지털 방송인지 확인하세요. 만약 방송신호가 약하거나 잡히지 않을 때에는 녹화기능은 자동으로 멈춥니다. 만약 USB 저장 장치의 남은 공간이 적을 경우 타임시프트 모드가 작동하지 않습니다. 성능 테스트가 실패하였다는 메시지가 나타나며, 녹화 예약 및 타임시프트 기능이 동작하지 않습니다. 녹화 기능을 지원하지 않는 낮은 성능의 USB 저장 장치를 사용할 경우 이러한 문제가 발생할 수 있습니다. USB HDD 저장장치의 사용을 권장합니다. USB HDD 저장 장치는 적어도 5,400 rpm 이상의 속도를 권장하지만, RAID 타입은 지원하지 않습니다. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (문제해결) TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! Anynet+가 작동하지 않아요. 기기가 Anynet+ 기기인지 확인하세요. Anynet+ 시스템은 Anynet+ 기기만 지원합니다. 리시버(홈 시어터)는 하나만 연결할 수 있습니다. Anynet+ 기기의 전원 코드가 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. Anynet+ 기기의 비디오/오디오/HDMI 케이블 연결 상태를 확인하세요. 시스템 메뉴에서 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)가 켜기로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. TV 리모컨이 TV 모드로 되어 있는지 확인하세요. 리모컨과 Anynet+가 호환되는지 확인하세요. 특정 상황에서는 Anynet+가 작동하지 않습니다. (채널 검색 중, 스마트 허브 또는 초기 설정 작동 중) HDMI 케이블을 연결하거나 제거할 때에는 반드시 기기를 다시 검색하거나 TV를 껐다가 다시 켜세요. Anynet+를 시작하고 싶어요. Anynet+ 장치가 TV에 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인하고 시스템 메뉴에서 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)가 켜기로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. (메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)) 확인을 마친 후, 리모컨을 이용해 간편 메뉴를 실행하세요. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)를 선택하고 원하는 기기를 선택하세요. Anynet+를 종료하고 싶어요. Anynet+ 메뉴에서 TV 방송 보기를 선택하세요. 리모컨을 이용해 TV/외부입력을 선택하여, Anynet+ 기기가 아닌 다른 기기를 선택하세요. "Anynet+ 연결 설정 중…" 또는 "Anynet+ 기기 연결을 해제합니다." 라고 나와요. Anynet+를 구성 중이거나 시청 모드로 전환 중일 때에는 리모컨을 사용할 수 없습니다. Anynet+ 설정 또는 시청 모드로의 전환이 완료되면 리모컨을 사용하세요. Anynet+ 기기가 재생되지 않아요. 초기 설정이 진행 중이면 재생 기능을 사용할 수 없습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 82 2012-09-04 9:24:2683 5. 기타 기능 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 연결된 기기가 표시되지 않아요. Anynet+ 기능을 지원하는 기기인지 확인하세요. HDMI 케이블이 제대로 연결되어 있는지 확인하세요. 시스템 메뉴에서 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)가 켜기로 설정되어 있는지 확인하세요. (메뉴 → 시스템 → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)) Anynet+ 기기를 다시 검색하세요. HDMI 케이블로만 Anynet+ 기기를 연결할 수 있습니다. HDMI 케이블로 TV와 연결되었는지 확인하세요. Anynet+ 기능을 지원하지 않는 HDMI 케이블도 있을 수 있습니다. 전원이 차단되거나 HDMI 케이블 연결이 끊겨 연결이 종료되면, 기기 검색을 다시 실행하세요. TV 음향이 리시버를 통해 출력되지 않아요. 옵티칼 케이블을 사용하여 TV와 리시버를 연결하세요. ARC 기능을 사용하면 HDMI 입력 2 (ARC) 단자를 통해 디지털 음향을 출력할 수 있으며, ARC 기능을 지원하는 오디오 리시버에 TV를 연결한 경우에만 작동 할 수 있습니다. AllShare Play TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 파일이 재생되지 않아요. 이런 현상은 콘텐츠의 비트레이트가 높아서 생기는 현상입니다. 일반적인 콘텐츠는 재생되지만, 일부는 재생이 원활하지 않을 수 있습니다. 스마트 허브 TV가 이상해요 이렇게 해보세요! 애플리케이션 콘텐츠가 영어로만 나와요. 설정된 언어를 바꿀 수 없나요? 애플리케이션 콘텐츠 언어는 사용자 인터페이스 언어와 다를 수 있습니다. 서비스 제공자에 따라 언어를 바꿀 수 있습니다. 애플리케이션이 작동하지 않아요. 서비스 제공자에게 확인하세요. 애플리케이션 서비스 제공 업체의 홈페이지에서 도움말을 참고하세요. 네트워크 오류가 발생했을 때, 설정 메뉴만 사용 가능해요. 네트워크 연결에 문제가 발생했다면, 인터넷 연결에 필요한 설정 메뉴를 제외한 다른 기능은 사용에 제한이 있을 수 있습니다. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 83 2012-09-04 9:24:2684 웹브라우저 1 웹브라우저를 선택하세요. 웹브라우저는 컴퓨터와는 다르게 표시될 수 있습니다. 2 웹브라우저는 자바 응용프로그램과 호환되지 않습니다. 3 파일은 다운로드할 수 없습니다. 저장되지 않으며, 오류 메시지가 나타납니다. 4 특정 웹 사이트나 특정 기업에 의해 운영되는 웹브라우저는 접속이 차단될 수 있습니다. 5 플래시 동영상의 재생은 제한될 수 있습니다. 6 온라인 결재를 위한 전자상거래는 지원되지 않습니다. 7 페이지 일부분만을 스크롤 할 수 있는 웹 페이지에서 스크롤하게 되면, 문자의 손상을 가져올 수 있습니다. 8 ActiveX는 지원하지 않습니다. 9 일부 옵션은 링크 컨트롤 모드에서 접근할 수 없습니다. (포인터 컨트롤 모드로 전환하면 접근할 수 있습니다.) 10지원되는 폰트의 수가 제한되기 때문에 특정 문자는 보이지 않을 수 있습니다. 11 웹 페이지가 열리고 있는 중에는 원격 명령에 대한 응답이나 화면 표시가 지연될 수 있습니다. 12웹 페이지의 로딩은 일부 운영체제에서 지연되거나 중지될 수 있습니다. 13복사 및 붙여 넣기는 지원하지 않습니다. 14이메일이나 간단한 메시지를 작성할 경우, 일부 기능(폰트의 크기나 색상 변경)은 지원되지 않을 수 있습니다. 15저장할 수 있는 즐겨 찾기와 접속 기록의 수는 제한됩니다. 16동시에 열 수 있는 창의 최대 개수는 검색 조건이나 TV 모델에 따라 다릅니다. 17웹을 탐색하는 속도는 네트워크 환경에 따라 다릅니다. 18웹브라우저에서 동영상이 재생되면, 동시화면 기능은 자동으로 꺼집니다. 동시화면 기능의 중지 후에 동영상은 재생을 시작하지 않을 수 있으며, 웹 페이지를 새로 고침 해야 가능합니다. 19웹브라우저는 MP3 음악 파일만 재생 가능합니다. 20즐겨 찾기를 가져오거나 내보내는 기능은 특정 형식의 즐겨 찾기 파일과 호환됩니다. (호환되는 형식: Netscape-bookmarkfile- 1) 21즐겨 찾기를 가져오거나 내보내기 할 때, 폴더 구조는 포함하지 않습니다. 22 TV에 연결된 USB 기기에 즐겨찾기 파일을 내보낼 경우, 즐겨찾기 파일은 "Samsung SmartTV Bookmark” 폴더에 저장됩니다. 23현재 시간이 설정되어 있지 않으면, 히스토리 정보는 저장되지 않습니다. (메뉴 → 시스템 → 시간 설정 → 현재 시간) 24웹 사이트를 방문한 기록은 최근 순으로 저장되며, 가장 오래된 순서에 따라 삭제됩니다. 25특정 동영상이나 음악 콘텐츠는 지원되는 동영상/ 오디오 코덱 형식에 따라 플래시가 재생되는 동안 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. 26동영상 창 안에서 화면 밝기의 갑작스런 변화는 정지된 화면의 주변 밝기에 영향을 줄 수 있습니다. (PDP TV에만 해당) 27쿼티 키패드 화면을 사용하면 동시화면은 자동으로 꺼집니다. (URL 입력 제외) [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 84 2012-09-04 9:24:2685 5. 기타 기능 지원 자막 및 AllShare Play 형식 자막 외부 - MPEG-4 timed text (.ttxt) - SAMI (.smi) - SubRip (.srt) - SubViewer (.sub) - Micro (.sub or .txt) - SubStation Alpha (.ssa) - Advanced SubStation Alpha (.ass) - Powerdivx (.psb) 내부 ● Xsub 컨테이너: AVI ● SubStation Alpha 컨테이너: MKV ● Advanced SubStation Alpha 컨테이너: MKV ● SubRip 컨테이너: MKV ● MPEG-4 timed text 컨테이너: MP4 지원되는 이미지 해상도 파일 확장자 형식 해상도 *.jpg *.jpeg JPEG 15360 x 8640 *.png PNG 1920 x 1080 *.bmp BMP 1920 x 1080 *.mpo MPO 15360 x 8640 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 85 2012-09-04 9:24:2686 지원되는 음악 파일 형식 파일 확장자 형식 코덱 참고 .mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC 탐색 (점프) 기능은 지원하지 않습니다. 2채널까지 지원합니다. *.ogg OGG Vorbis 2채널까지 지원합니다. *.wma WMA WMA WMA 9, 10 Pro는 5.1 채널과 M2 프로필까지 지원합니다. (M0의 LBR 모드 제외) 동영상 코덱 파일 확장자 컨테이너 비디오 해상도 프레임 속도 (fps) 비트레이트 (Mbps) 오디오 코덱 *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.mov *.flv *.vob *.svi *.m2ts *.mts *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP VRO VOB PS TS DIVX 3.11/4.x/5.x/6.x 1920 x 1080 6 - 30 30 AC3 LPCM ADMPCM(IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA DD+ MPEG(MP3) DTS Core G.711(A-Law, μ-Law) MPEG4 SP/ASP H.264 BP/MP/HP Motion JPEG 640 x 480 8 Window Media Video v9 MPEG2 1920 x 1080 30 MPEG1 VP6 640 x 480 4 *.webm WebM VP8 1920 x 1080 6 - 30 8 Vorvis [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 86 2012-09-04 9:24:2787 5. 기타 기능 기타 제한사항 ■ 위 지원 코덱 중 일부 콘텐츠에 문제가 있는 경우 지원하지 않습니다. ■ 표준 비트 전송률/프레임 속도가 표에 나온 초당 프레임 속도보다 높으면 콘텐츠의 음향 또는 동영상이 작동하지 않습니다. ■ 색인 표에 오류가 있으면 찾기(건너뛰기) 기능이 지원되지 않습니다. ■ 네트워크 연결을 통해 비디오를 재생하면, 파일이 원활하게 재생되지 않을 수 있습니다. ■ 동영상의 비트레이트가 10Mbps를 초과하면 메뉴가 나타나는 데 시간이 오래 걸립니다. ■ 일부 USB/디지털 카메라 기기는 플레이어와 호환되지 않을 수 있습니다. 비디오 디코더 ● H.264, Level 4.1까지 지원합니다. ● H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4는 지원하지 않습니다. ● VP8, VP6를 제외한 모든 비디오 코덱의 경우: - 1280 x 720 이하: 최대 60 프레임 - 1280 x 720 이상: 최대 30 프레임 ● GMC는 지원하지 않습니다. ● SVAF 위/아래와 좌/우만을 지원합니다. 오디오 디코더 ● WMA 9, 10 Pro는 5.1 채널과 M2 프로필까지 지원합니다. (M0의 LBR 모드 제외) ● WMA 무손실 오디오는 지원하지 않습니다. ● Vorbis가 Webm 컨테이너에 있는 경우, 2 채널까지 지원합니다. 도난 방지용 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 켄싱턴 잠금 장치는 공공 장소에서 사용할 때 시스템을 물리적으로 고정하는 장치입니다 무게가 무거워 옮길 수 없는 물건에 케이블을 감은 후에 TV뒤의 캔싱턴 슬롯에 잠금 장치를 끼우세요. 켄싱턴 잠금 장치의 모양과 잠금 방법은 TV모델에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. 정확한 지침을 확인하려면 잠금 장치에 동봉된 사용설명서를 참조하세요. TV 뒤면에서 “K” 아이콘을 찾으세요. 켄싱턴 슬롯은 “K” 아이콘 옆에 있습니다. 제품을 잠그려면 다음 단계를 따르세요. 1 책상이나 의자같이 무겁고 고정된 물건에 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 케이블을 감으세요. 2 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 케이블의 고리쪽 끝 부분으로 잠금 장치쪽 끝 부분을 밀어 넣으세요. 3 제품의 켄싱턴 슬롯에 잠금 장치를 끼우세요. 4 잠금 장치를 잠그세요. ■ 이 내용은 일반적인 지침입니다. 정확한 지침을 확인하려면 잠금 장치에 동봉된 사용설명서를 참조하세요. ■ 잠금 장치는 별도로 구매해야 합니다. ■ 켄싱턴 잠금 장치 슬롯의 위치는 TV 모델에 따라 다를 수 있습니다. 1 2 <옵션> [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 87 2012-09-04 9:24:2788 라이선스 정보 DivX® 인증 제품으로 프리미엄 콘텐츠를 포함한 최대 HD 1080p DivX® 비디오 재생을 보증합니다. DivX®, DivX Certified® 및 관련 로고는 Rovi Coporation 또는 자회사의 상표이며 라이센스 계약 하에 사용됩니다. DivX 비디오에 관하여 DivX®는 Rovi Coporation의 자회사인 Dvix, LLC.에서 개발한 디지털 비디오 포맷입니다. 본 제품은 DivX에서 공식 인증한 제품으로 DivX 비디오를 재생할 수 있습니다. 자세한 정보 및 DviX 영상 변환 소프트웨어를 원하면 홈페이지(www.divx.com)에 방문하길 바랍니다. DivX Video-On-Demand에 관하여 DivX Video-On-Demand(VOD) 영화를 재생하기 위하여, 반드시 본 DivX Certified® 제품을 등록하십시오. 먼저 제품 설정 메뉴의 DivX VOD 섹션에서 등록 코드를 확인한 후, 제품 등록 절차 진행 시에 위와 동일한 코드 값을 입력하세요. DivX VOD와 제품 등록 절차에 대한 상세한 정보를 원하시면 웹 사이트 www.divx.com/vod에 방문하시기 바랍니다. TheaterSound HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. 돌비 래버러토리스의 허가를 얻어 제조한 제품입니다. 돌비 및 더블 D 심볼은 돌비 래버러토리스의 상표입니다. Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. ⓒ DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 오픈 소스 라이선스 사용고지 오픈소스를 사용한 제품의 경우, 오픈소스 라이선스는 제품 메뉴에서 확인하실 수 있습니다. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 88 2012-09-04 9:24:2889 5. 기타 기능 화면 조정 메뉴 (OSD: On Screen Display) 구조 화면 화면 모드 ● 선명한 화면 ● 표준 화면 ● 최적 화면 (LED TV에만 해당) / 편안한 화면 (PDP TV에만 해당) ● 영화 화면 ● 동영상 모드 백라이트 조정 (LED TV) 패널 밝기 조정 (PDP TV) 명암 밝기 선명도 색농도 색상(녹/적) 화면 조정 ● 화면 크기 ● 위치 선택 입체영상 ● 입체 영상 모드 ● 3D 시점 ● 입체감 ● 좌/우 영상 변경 ● 3D 화면 최적화 (LED TV에만 해당) 고급 설정 ● 자동 명암 조정 ● 블랙 톤 조정 ● 피부색 조정 ● 색상 보정 기능 ● 색 재현 범위 (LED 5500 모델 미지원) ● 화이트 밸런스 ● 10p 화이트 밸런스 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원) ● 감마 ● 전문가 패턴 (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원) ● xvYCC (LED 5500, PDP 550 모델 미지원) ● 모션 라이팅 부가 설정 ● 바탕색 조정 ● 화면 잡음 제거 ● 동영상 잡음 제거 ● HDMI 블랙 레벨 ● 필름 모드 ● Auto Motion Plus (LED 6350 모델 이상 지원) ● 빠른 영상 모드 (LED TV에만 해당) 화면 초기화 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 89 2012-09-04 9:24:2990 음향 채널 네트워크 DTV 채널 선택 ● 일반 방송 ● 유선 방송 자동 채널 선택 3D 채널 보기 채널 미세 조정 네트워크 설정 네트워크 상태 Wi-Fi 다이렉트 소프트 AP ● 소프트 AP ● 보안키 AllShare 설정 장치명 음향 모드 ● 표준으로 들을 때 ● 음악을 들을 때 ● 영화를 볼 때 ● 뉴스를 들을 때 ● 실버 음향 효과 ● SRS TruSurround HD ● SRS TruDialog ● 이퀄라이저 방송 음성 설정 ● 선호 언어 ● 스테레오 설정 ● 음성 다중 SPDIF 출력 ● 오디오 형식 ● 지연시간 조정 스피커 설정 ● 스피커 선택 ● 자동 음량 음향 초기화 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 90 2012-09-04 9:24:3091 5. 기타 기능 시스템 초기 설정 시간 설정 ● 현재 시간 ● 취침 예약 ● 켜짐 시간 예약 ● 꺼짐 시간 예약 메뉴 언어 ● 한국어 ● English 장치 관리자 ● 키보드 설정 ● 마우스 설정 ● SoundShare 설정 에코 절전 설정 ● 절전 모드 ● 에코 센서 ● 무신호 전원 끄기 ● 자동 전원 끄기 자막 ● 자막 ● 자막 모드 ● 자막 표기 설정 데이터 서비스 자동 실행 ● 끄기 ● 켜기 보안 설정 ● 채널 잠금 기능 ● 비밀번호 변경 동시 화면 ● 동시 화면 설정 ● 채널 ● 화면 크기 ● 위치 선택 ● 음향 선택 화면 보호 (PDP TV에만 해당) ● 화소이동 ● 스크롤 ● 여백 채움 화면 보호 시간 (LED TV에만 해당) 일반 설정 ● 게임 모드 ● BD Wise ● 메뉴 투명도 ● 동작음 ● 패널 키 잠금 ● 부팅 로고 Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ● Anynet+(HDMI-CEC) ● 자동 꺼짐 ● 리시버 듣기 DivX® 주문형 비디오 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 91 2012-09-04 9:24:3092 고객지원 스마트 허브 e-설명서 자가 진단 ● 화질 테스트 ● 음질 테스트 ● 디지털 신호 정보 ● 초기화 ● 문제 해결 소프트웨어 업데이트 ● USB로 업그레이드 ● 인터넷으로 업그레이드 ● 방송 신호로 업그레이드 ● 저장된 파일 사용 ● 대기모드 업그레이드 고객지원 정보 원격 진단 스마트 허브 채널 Samsung Apps 웹브라우저 TV/외부입력 패밀리 스토리 AllShare Play 방송 안내 피트니스 SKype 예약 관리 키즈 [Kor]BN81-07665A.indb 92 2012-09-04 9:24:30 E-MANUALPreference Feature • Connecting to the Network 106 • Setting up the Wired Network 121 • Setting up the Wireless Network 133 • Managing the Network Connected Devices 159 • Setting the Time 168 • Setting the Parental Controls 179 • Economical Solutions 184 • Picture In Picture (PIP) 188 • Using the TV with a Keyboard and a Mouse 193 • Connecting to the TV with a Samsung Audio Device 200 • Other Features 203 • Support Menu 224 Contents • Using the Channel Menu 1 • Memorizing Channels 44 • Other Features 49 Basic Feature • Changing the Preset Picture Mode 51 • Adjusting Picture Settings 55 • Changing the Picture Size 60 • Changing the Picture Options 69 • Using the TV with Your PC 88 • Changing the Preset Sound Mode 92 • Adjusting Sound Settings 94 ContentsAdvanced Features • Using the 3D function 248 • Smart Hub 263 • Customizing the Home Screen 282 • Using Samsung Apps 314 • Search 324 • Smart Tip NAVER 332 • Family Story 343 • Fitness 354 • Kids 360 • Web Browser 375 • Skype 403 • Using the Air Conditioner by the TV application 406 • AllShare Play 413 • Using the AllShare Play 433 • My List (In AllShare Play) 437 • Videos (In AllShare Play) 445 • Photos (In AllShare Play) 462 • Music (In AllShare Play) 477 • Recorded TV (AllShare Play) 490 • Timeshift 504 • Using the DLNA Function 517 • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) 527Other Information • Troubleshooting 544 • Picture (Troubleshooting) 546 • Sound (Troubleshooting) 564 • 3D (Troubleshooting) 568 • Antenna (Air / Cable) Connection (Troubleshooting) 571 • PC Connection (Troubleshooting) 574 • Network Connection (Troubleshooting) 575 • Others (Troubleshooting) 577 • Timer Recording / Timeshift Mode (Troubleshooting) 590 • Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Troubleshooting) 596 • AllShare Play (Troubleshooting) 604 • Smart Hub (Troubleshooting) 605 • Web Browser (Troubleshooting) 607 • Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats 615 • Anti-theft Kensington Lock 624 • License 628Using the Channel Menu Channel ™ → Channel Using this function, you can add or delete channels, set favorite channels, edit the channel name for analog broadcasts. ● All Shows all channels. ● Added Ch. ChannelShows all added channels. These are the channels that appear when you press the 채널목록 button on your remote. ● Favorites 1 – Favorites 5 Shows all favorite channels, in up to five groups. Each group has separate channels. If the Highlight located in the Favorites 1 – Favorites 5 category, you can change the name of category by selecting b using your remote.● Recently Viewed Shows the most recently viewed channels. ● Mostly Viewed Shows the most frequently viewed channels. Using the colored and function buttons with the Channel – b Delete Delete the selected channel(s).– ` Information Displays details of the selected channel. – k Page Scrolls the channel list to the next or previous page. – E Select / Deselect Select or deselect a channel. – T Tools Displays the option menu. – R ReturnReturn to the previous menu. Using the Tools menu with Channel ● Add / Delete Delete a channel from or add a channel to the Channel list. To add a channel in Channel, follow these steps: 1. On the Channel screen, select the All category.2. Select a grayed out channel in the All category. A c mark appears to the left of the channel. N You can select more than one channel. N If you select the selected channel again, a c mark disappears. N A gray colored channel indicates the channel has been deleted. 3. Open the Tools menu using your remote.4. Select the Add. The message Added the selected channel(s). appears, and then select OK. N The Add menu option only appears for deleted channel. N All deleted channels will be shown on the All category. You add channels back to the Added Ch. category on the All category. To delete a channel in Channel, follow these steps: 1. If you want to delete a channel, select a category of the channel. 2. Select a channel in the category. A c mark appears to the left of the channel. N You can select more than one channel. N If you select the selected channel again, a c mark disappears. 3. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 4. Select the Delete. The message Deleted the selected channel(s). appears, and then select OK. N You can delete the selected channel immediately by selecting b using your remote. N When you delete a channel in the Recently Viewed, Mostly Viewed or Favorites category, the channel will disappear from the category list. But, the channel is not deleted. ● Edit Favorites Sets channels you watch frequently as favorites, or removes a channel from list of favorites using the Tools menu. To set channels as favorites, follow these steps: 1. Select the All or Added Ch. category. 2. Select a channel in the category. A c mark appears to the left of the channel. N You can select more than one channel. N If you select the selected channel again, a c mark disappears. 3. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 4. Select the Edit Favorites. The Edit Favorites screen appears. 5. Select a using your remote. The selected channel will be moved to the favorite group. N Also, you can select a channel in the Edit Favorites screen. N You can add a favorite channel to any one of the groups. To change favorites group, select } using your remote. Each time you select }, a favorites group will be changed. 6. When done, select OK. The channel is made as a favorite and is assigned to the favorite group you selected.N The TV displays the “ ” symbol next to the channel, indicating it is a favorite. Using the colored and function buttons with the Edit Favorites ● When the Highlight located in the Added Ch., you can use these options: – a Add Add selected channels to the favorites group. – } Change Fav. Change the favorites group. Each time you select } using your remote, a favorites group will be changed. – Ÿ Go to You can enter a channel number immediately using your remote. – R Return Return to the previous menu.● When the Highlight located in the favorites group, you can use these options: – a Delete Delete the selected channel. N You can select more than one channel and delete them at the same time. A selected channel is displayed with the c mark. – b Change order Change the favorites group list order. – E Done: Change order is completed. N Available only when select the Change order. – { Copy Copy a selected channel to other favorites groups. – } Change Fav. Change the favorites group. Each time you select } using your remote, a favorites group will be changed. – Ÿ Go to You can enter a channel number immediately using your remote. – R Return Return to the previous menu. To remove a channel from the list of favorites, follow these steps: 1. Select the favorites group category.2. Select a channel in the selected favorites group. A c mark appears to the left of the channel. N You can select more than one channel. N If you select the selected channel again, a c mark disappears. 3. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 4. Select Delete. The message Do you want to delete the selected item(s)?appears. 5. Select OK. The message Deleted the selected item(s). appears. N You can delete the selected channel from the list of favorites group immediately by selecting b using your remote. ● Lock Lock enables you to restrict your children from viewing a specific channel N If you select On for the Channel Lockoption, you can use the Lock option. N This function is not supported when you watch tv through an external device (e.g. Set-top box) connected with your TV via HDMI, Component, or AV port. N The default PIN number for a new TV set is “0-0-0-0”. ● Rename Channel (Appears only if you have selected an analog channel.) Lets you assign a name of up to five characters to an analog channel. ● Select All / Deselect All Select all channels in the list. / Deselect all channels you selected. Display Icons Used in the Channel screens : An analog channel. : A favorite channel. : A locked channel.Schedule Manager ™→ Schedule Manager You can set the Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording on a day and at a time of your choice. N You must set the current time first using the Time → Clock function in System menu to use this function. To use the Schedule Viewing, follow these steps:1. On the Schedule Manager screen, select a using your remote. 2. Set Antenna, Channel, Repeat, and Start Time. ● Antenna Select the desired broadcasting signal. You can select DTV Air, DTV Cable, Air and Cable. ● Channel Select the desired channel. N You can only select memorized channels. ● Repeat Select Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or Everyday. If you select Manual, you can set the day you want. N The c mark indicates a day you’ ve selected. Date: You can set a desired date. N The Date is available only when you select Once in Repeat.● Start Time You can set the start time you want. 3. When done, select OK. The selected channel is scheduled for viewing. N On the Schedule Manager screen, you can check a list of Schedule Viewing. Schedule Recording (digital channels only) 1. Select a using the remote control in the Schedule Manager screen. Select Schedule Recording. N It is recommended connecting a USB HDD (min. 5,400rpm) for recording TV programs. However, RAID type USB HDDs are not supported. N Only USB devices that have completed the device performance test can be used for recording. 2. Set the Antenna, Channel, Repeat, Date, Start Time and the End Time. ● Antenna You can only select DTV Air, DTV Cable ● Channel Select a digital channel. ● Repeat You can select a period from among Once, Manual, Sat~Sun, Mon~Fri or Everyday. The selected weekday is displayed with the c mark. Date: You can set a date. N The Date is only available when you select Once in the Repeat option. ● Start Time You can set the Start Time. ● End Time You can set the End Time. 3. When you’ve completed all the settings, select OK. The recording of the selected channel will start at the selected time. N In the Schedule Manager screen, you can check the list of Schedule Recording items. N You can record up to 360 minutes. N You can check the recorded list in the Result List in the Schedule Manager screen or by selecting ™ → AllShare Play → Recorded TV.To delete an item in a list of scheduled viewing and Schedule Recording, follow these steps: 1. On the Schedule Manager screen, highlight an item you want to delete. 2. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 3. Select Cancel Schedules. The Cancel selected list(s)? message appears. 4. Select Yes. The selected schedule will be canceled.N Select an item in the scheduled recording list, and then press the 정보표시` button to display detailed information. You can modify or cancels the scheduled viewing and recording schedule in the detailed information window. Using the Tools menu with scheduled item ● Edit Schedule: Changes the details about the scheduled viewing and recording schedules. ● Information: You can check details about the program is scheduled viewing and recording schedules. And you can cancel and change the scheduled viewing and recording schedules. ● Edit mode: Select the items you want to cancel in the Scheduled lists. The c mark appears in the check box. ● Cancel Schedules: Cancels the scheduled viewing and recording schedules. ● Return: Return to the previous screen. Channel List Using this function, you can view channel list, program information, favorite channel, and manage schedules of timer viewing. 1. Press the 채널목록 button on your remote. The Channel List screen is displayed immediately. 2. Change a channel or channel list mode. ● Added Ch. Shows all added channels. ● Favorites 1 ~ Favorites 5 Shows all favorite channels, in up to five groups. Each group has a separate screen. N The TV displays favorite groups only if you have added favorites using Edit Favorites. Using the colored and function buttons with the Channel List ● a Antenna Switches the mode and display between Air and Cable. ● { Program View / Channel View For digital channels, switches the display between Program View and Channel View.When you select a digital channel in Channel List, select once to display a list of programs on that channel. select again to re-display the Channel View. ● l r CH Mode / Channel On Channel View screen, Toggles between the Favorites list (if you have added favorites using Edit Favorites) and the Added Ch. channel list. / On { Program View screen, you can view the program information of other channel without changing channel. ● E Watch Displays the channel you selected. If you select the following program in the Program View, you can select the Timer Viewing or Schedule Recording function, and you can also select the Cancel Schedules function in the case of a scheduled program. (for digital channels only). ● k Page Scrolls the Channel List to the next or previous page. Display Icons Used in the Channel List screens : An analog channel. : A reserved program. : A scheduled to be recorded Program. : A locked channel. Using the Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording in Channel List (digital channels only) You can use the { Program View in Channel List to schedule a digital channel program for viewing. 1. Press the 채널목록 button on your remote. The Channel List screen appears. 2. Select a desired digital channel. 3. Select { using your remote. The TV displays program list of the selected channel. 4. Select a desired program in the program list, and then select Information using your remote. 5. On the Information screen, select the Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording. The selected program is set to Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording. N If you want to cancel the Schedule Viewing or Schedule Recording, follow Steps 1 through 4, and then select the Cancel Schedules. Program Information N This is only possible for digital channels. Press the 정보표시` button on your remote. You can check the information about the current program or the next program.Using buttons in the Program Information ● a Information You can use the Watching functions for programs you are currently viewing. If you select the next program, you can use the Schedule Viewing functions. N For more detailed information about Record and Schedule Recording, refer to "Recorded TV (AllShare Play)". ● l r You can check the information about the next program which will be broadcast after the current program. N The next program is only displayed if the current time is set and the relevant program information exists. Channel status icon : A reserved program. : A scheduled to be recorded Program.Memorizing Channels Antenna Menu → Channel → Antenna Before your television can memorize the available channels, you must select your TV's signal source, Air (using an antenna) or Cable. Select Air or Cable. Selecting Air or Cable 1. Select the Antenna menu.2. Select the program type received by the TV. Auto Program Menu → Channel → Auto Program The Auto Program function memorizes all channels that are available over the air or through your cable system and adds them to the Channel list. Starting the Auto Program operation1. Go to the Auto Program menu. 2. Select the Start button to start the Auto Program function. 3. Select OK when the Auto Program operation is completed. View 3D Channels Menu → Channel → View 3D Channels for LED 5500 Series : This function is not supported. Set whether to watch 3D channels or not. If you cannot find the 3D channels, set the 3D channels using the Auto Program function. If the current program supports 3D channels, an announcement appears at the bottom of the screen. Switch the channel according to the announcement to watch 3D channels. Select Off if you do not want to watch 3D channels. N If the View 3D Channels is in the Offstate, 3D channels are not displayed in the Channel List and Guide.Other Features Fine Tune Menu → Channel → Fine Tune (analog channels only) If the signal is weak or distorted, fine tune the channel manually. Scroll to the left or right until the image is clear. N Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked with an asterisk “*” on the right-hand side of the channel number in the channel banner. N To reset fine-tuning, select the channel, select Fine Tune, and then select Reset on the Fine Tune screen.Changing the Preset Picture Mode Picture Mode Menu → Picture → Picture Mode Picture modes apply preset adjustments to the picture. N When your TV is connected to a PC via the HDMI to DVI cable, you can only select Entertain and Standard. ● Dynamic Brightens the screen. Suitable for a Basic Featurebright room. You can see the picture more sharply. ● Standard Suitable for a normal environment. ● Natural for LED TV Select this mode to view pictures in a natural mode as you actually see them and in a quality comfortable for your eyes. ● Movie Select this mode when you are watching a movie. You can view the picture comfortably even when the ambient illumination is dark or your eyes are strained. ● Entertain Select this mode when you are playing a game or you are watching a video. You can view pictures with lots of movement. N Only available when the TV is connected to a PC via the HDMI to DVI cable.Adjusting Picture Settings Backlight for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV Menu → Picture → Backlight / Cell Light Adjust backlight brightness to suit your preference. 20 is the brightest setting. Contrast Menu → Picture → Contrast Adjust contrast level. Values closer to 100 mean bigger light/dark contrast.Brightness Menu → Picture → Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the screen. Values closer to 100 mean brighter screen. Not as effective as Backlight / Cell Light. Sharpness Menu → Picture → Sharpness Adjust sharpness of picture. Values closer to 100 mean a sharper image. Color Menu → Picture → Color Adjust color saturation. Values closer to 100 mean more intense colors. Tint (G/R) Menu → Picture → Tint (G/R) Adjust tint levels for green and red. Values closer to 100 mean greater intensity for that color. To adjust picture quality, follow these steps: 1. Select an option you want to adjust. When you select an option, a slider screen appears. 2. Adjust the option value using your remote. N When you make change to option value, the OSD will be adjusted accordingly.N When your TV is connected to a PC via the HDMI to DVI cable, Color and Tint (G/R) is not available. N You can adjust and store Settings for each external device connected to the TV. N Lowering picture brightness reduces power consumption.Changing the Picture Size Screen Adjustment Menu → Picture → Screen Adjustment Using this function, you can make change to various picture size and aspect ratio options. ● Picture Size If you have a cable box or satellite receiver, it may have its own set of screen sizes as well. However, we highly recommend you use your TV's 16:9 mode most of the time. 16:9: Sets the picture to the 16:9 wide screen format. Zoom1: Provides moderate magnification of the picture. Sides, top, and bottom are cut off. Zoom2: Provides larger magnification of the picture. Sides, top, and bottom are cut off. Wide Fit: Enlarges the aspect ratio of the picture so it fits the entire screen. N Available with HD 1080i / 720p signals in 16:9 mode. 4:3: Sets the picture to basic (4:3) mode. N Do not set your TV to 4:3 format for a long time. The borders displayed on the left and right, or top and bottom of the screen may cause image retention (screen burn) which is not covered by the warranty.Screen Fit: When your TV inputs Digital channel(1080i, 1080p) or HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) signals, displays the full image without any cut-off. Smart View 1: Reduces the 16:9 picture by 50%. for LED TV Smart View 2: Reduces the 16:9 picture by 25%. for LED TV N Smart View 1 is enabled only in HDMI mode.N Smart View 2 is enabled only in HDMI or DTV mode. N The picture size can vary depending on the input resolution when you play content from Videos in AllShare. ● Position Adjusts the picture position. Position is only available if Picture Size is set to Zoom1, Zoom2, Wide Fit or Screen Fit. N In DTV mode, Position is not available when Picture Size is set to Screen Fit.To use the Position function after selecting Zoom1, Zoom2, Wide Fit, Screen Fit follow these steps: 1. Select the Position. 2. On the Position screen, select Position, and then move the picture to position you want using your remote. 3. When done, select Position again, and then select Close. N To reset the picture position, select Reset.Picture Sizes available by Input Source: – ATV, AV: 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3 – Component (480i, 480p): 16:9, Zoom1, Zoom2, 4:3 – Component (720p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3 – Component (1080i, 1080p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit – DTV (720p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Smart View 2 for LED TV – DTV (1080i, 1080p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit, Smart View 2 for LED TV – HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p): 16:9, Wide Fit, 4:3, Screen Fit, Smart View 1 for LED TV , Smart View 2 for LED TV N Depending on the input source, the picture size options may vary. N The available items may differ depending on the selected mode. N HD (High Definition): 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080), 720p (1280x720) N You can adjust and store settings for each external device you have connected to an input on the TV.Changing the Picture Options Advanced Settings Menu → Picture → Advanced Settings Using this function, you can configure advanced picture settings to create your preferred picture. N Advanced Settings is available only when the Picture Mode is set to Standard or Movie mode. N When connecting a PC using the HDMI-DVI cable, you can only make changes to White Balance and Gamma. ● Dynamic Contrast Adjusts the screen contrast. ● Black Tone Darker settings make blacks look darker. ● Flesh Tone Adjusts the amount of red in skin tones. ● RGB Only Mode Displays the Red, Green and Blue colors so you can make fine adjustments to hue and saturation. ● Color Space Adjusts the range and variety of colors (the color space) available to create images. N To adjust Color, Red, Green, Blue and Reset, set the Color Space to Custom. for LED 5500 Series : This function is not supported ● White BalanceAdjusts the color temperature of the picture so that white objects look white and the overall color of the picture looks natural. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjusts each color’s (red, green, blue) darkness. R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjusts each color’s (red, green, blue) brightness. Reset: Resets the White Balance to it’s default settings. ● 10p White Balance for LED 5500 Series and PDP 550 Series : This function is not supported Controls the white balance in 10 point intervals by adjusting the red, green, and blue brightness. N Available when the Picture Mode is set to Movie and when the external input is set to all input. N Some external devices may not support this function. Interval: Select interval to adjust.Red: Adjust the red level. Green: Adjust the green level. Blue: Adjust the blue level. Reset: Resets the 10p White Balance to its default settings. ● Gamma Adjusts the primary color intensity. ● Expert Pattern for LED 5500, PDP 550 Series : This function is not supported. Use the Expert Pattern function to calibrate the picture. If the OSD menu disappears or a menu other than the Picture menu is opened, the TV saves the calibration and the Expert Pattern screen disappears. Off: Turns the Expert Pattern function off. Pattern1: This test screen demonstrates the effect of the display settings on shades of grey and black. Pattern2: This test screen demonstrates the effect of the display settings on colors. N After selecting Pattern1 or Pattern2, you can adjust any of the advanced settings for desired effect. N While the Expert Pattern is running, the TV does not output sound. N Only enabled in DTV, Component, and HDMI modes. ● xvYCC for LED 5500, PDP 550 Series : Thisi function is not supported. Setting xvYCC on increases picture detail and enlarges the color space when you are watching movies input from an external device (e.g. BD/DVD player) connected to the TV’s HDMI or Component IN jacks. N Available only when you set the Picture Mode to Movie and the external input to HDMI or Component. N Some external devices may not support this function. ● Motion LightingWhen on, the TV automatically adjusts the brightness of the screen in response to the brightness of the room. In bright light, the screen brightens. In dim light, the screen dims. N Only available in Standard mode. N This feature is not supported in 3D mode. N When you change the Backlight for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV , Contrast or Brightness, the TV sets the Motion Lighting to Off. Picture Options Menu → Picture → Picture Options Using this function, you can configure additional picture settings to suit your preference. N When your TV is connected to a PC via the HDMI to DVI cable, you can only make changes to Color Tone. ● Color ToneYou can control the color temperature. N Warm1 and Warm2 are deactivated when the Picture Mode is set to Dynamic. N You can adjust and store settings for each external device connected to an input on the TV. ● Digital Noise Filter If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise Filter feature to reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen. Auto Visualization: When changing analog channels, displays signal strength. N When the signal is weak, try all the options until the TV displays the best picture. N Only available for analog channels. N When the bar is green, you are receiving the best possible signal.● MPEG Noise Filter Reduces MPEG noise to provide improved picture quality. ● HDMI Black Level Lets you adjust the screen depth by selecting a black level. N Available only in HDMI mode. ● Film Mode Sets the TV so that it senses and then processes film signals from all sources automatically and adjusts the picture for optimum quality. N Available in TV, AV, Component (480i / 1080i) and HDMI (1080i). ● Auto Motion Plus for LED 6350 Series and above Removes blur and judder from scenes with larger amounts of rapid movement to provide a clearer picture. Blur Reduction: Adjusts the blur reduction level for signals input from all video sources.Judder Reduction: Adjusts the Judder reduction level for signals input from a video source through which you are playing a movie. Reset: Reset the custom settings. N The info screen on your TV displays the resolution and frequency of the incoming video signal (60 Hz). This displayed frequency is not the frequency of the picture the TV is displaying when you have Auto Motion Plus on. N If noise occurs on the screen, please set the Auto Motion Plus to Off. If the Auto Motion Plus is set to Custom, you can control Blur Reduction and Judder Reduction manually and use Reset to reset both to their default settings. N If the Auto Motion Plus is set to Demo, you can compare the difference between a picture with Auto Motion Plus On and Auto Motion Plus Off modes. ● LED Motion Plus for LED TV Removes blur and judder from scenes with large amounts of rapid movement to provide a clearer picture. N Available only when Picture Mode is set to Dynamic, Standard, and Movie. Reset Picture Menu → Picture → Reset PictureResets your current picture mode to its default settings.Using the TV with Your PC Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display Entering the Video Settings (Based on Windows 7) For your TV to work properly as a computer display, you must enter the correct video settings. N Depending on your version of Windows and your video card, the procedure on your PC will probably differ slightly from the procedure presented here. N However, the same basic information will apply in most cases. (If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer.) 1. Click “Control Panel” on the Windows start menu. 2. Click “Appearance and Themes” in the “Control Panel” window. A display dialog box appears. 3. Click “Display”. Another display dialog box appears. 4. Click the “Settings” tab on the display dialog box. – On the Settings tab, set the correct resolution (screen size). The optimal resolution for this TV is 1920 x 1080. – If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box, select “60” or “60 Hz”. Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit the dialog box.Changing the Preset Sound Mode Sound Mode Menu → Sound → Sound Mode Sound modes apply preset adjustments to the sound. N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the Sound Mode is disabled. ● Standard Selects the normal sound mode. ● MusicEmphasizes music over voices. ● Movie Provides the best sound for movies. ● Clear Voice Emphasizes voices over other sounds. ● Amplify Increase the intensity of high-frequency sound to allow a better listening experience for the hearing impaired.Adjusting Sound Settings Sound Effect Menu → Sound → Sound Effect N If Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the Sound Effect is disabled. N Available only when the Sound Mode is set to Standard. ● SRS TruSurround HD This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound experience through a pair of speakers using HRTF (Head Related Transfer Function) technology. ● SRS TruDialog This function allows you to increase the intensity of a voice over background music or sound effects so that dialog can be heard more clearly. ● Equalizer The Equalizer displays a series of sliders. Use the arrow buttons to select a slider, and change the slider’s value. To Reset the Equalizer, select the Reset. A popup appears asking if you want to reset, select Yes. To exit, select Close. Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker. 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth Adjustment): Adjusts the loudness of specific bandwidth frequencies. Reset: Resets the equalizer to its default settings. Broadcast Audio Options Menu → Sound → Broadcast Audio Options ● Preferred Language (digital channels only) Digital-TV broadcasts can simultaneously transmit many audio tracks (for example, simultaneous translations of the program into foreign languages). You can only select a language from among the ones being broadcasted. ● Auto Stereo Sets the Stereo setting to Auto or Manual. ● Multi-Track Sound The broadcasts can transmit one or more audio tracks. You can select a sound you want to listen from among the ones being broadcasted. N Multi-Track Sound may differ depending on the program being broadcast or broadcast signal. SPDIF Output Menu → Sound → SPDIF Output SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital Interface) provides digital audio output to speakers and various digital devices such as A/V Receivers and Home Theaters which reduces interference and distortion. ● Audio FormatYou can select the Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format. The available Digital Audio output (SPDIF) format may differ depending on the input source. ● Audio Delay Lets you correct timing mismatches between the audio track and the video when you are watching the TV and listening to digital audio output from the TV through an external device such as an AV receiver. When you select the Audio Delay, a slider screen appears. Adjust the option value using your remote (0ms ~ 250ms). Speaker Settings Menu → Sound → Speaker Settings ● Speaker Select If you are listening to the sound track of a broadcast or movie through an external receiver, you may hear a sound echo caused by the difference in decoding speed between the TV’s speakers and the speakers attached to your audio receiver. If this occurs, set the TV to External Speaker. N When the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the TV’s speakers are turned off. You will hear sound through the external speakers only. When the Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker, both the TV’s speakers and the external speakers are on. You will hear sound through both. N When the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the volume buttons and mute function will not operate and the sound settings will be limited. N If there is no video signal, both the TV’s speakers and the external speakers will be mute. ● Auto Volume You may experience the volume fluctuating each time you change the channel. This function automatically adjusts the volume of all channels to a similar level. Normal: Automatically adjusts the volume when changing to another channel. Night: Automatically decreases the volume. Night mode is useful when watching a program at low volume at night. N To use the volume control of a connected source device, set Auto Volume to Off. A change to the volume control of the connected source device may not be applied if Auto Volume is set to Normal or Night. Reset Sound Menu → Sound → Reset Sound Reset all sound settings to the factory defaults.Connecting to the Network Wired Network Connection There are three ways to attach your TV to your LAN using cable: N For illustrations of the three kinds of wired network connections, see your paper user's manual. – You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an external Preference Featuremodem using a LAN cable. – You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an IP Sharer which is connected to an external modem. Use LAN cable for the connection. – Depending on how your network is configured, you may be able to attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV directly to a network wall outlet using a LAN cable. Note that the wall outlet is attached to a modem or router elsewhere in your house. N If your network requires a Dynamic IP address, you should use an ADSL modem or router that supports the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values your TV needs to access the Internet so you do not have to enter them manually. Most home networks use a Dynamic IP address. N Some networks require a Static IP address. If your network requires a Static IP address, you must enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually when you set up the network connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). N You can use ADSL modems that support DHCP if your network requires a Static IP address. ADSL modems that support DHCP also let you use Static IP addresses. Wireless Network Connection N For illustrations of the three kinds of wired network connections, see your paper user's manual. N for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series To connect your TV to your network wireless, you need a wireless router or modem and a Samsung Wireless LAN adapter (WIS09ABGNX, WIS12ABGNX), which you connect to your TV’s USB port. Samsung Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately and is offered by selected retailers, Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts.com. You can connect your TV to your LAN through a standard wireless router or modem. This TV supports the IEEE 802.11a/b/g and n communication protocols. Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11n. When you play video over a network connection, the video may not play smoothly. N To use a wireless network, your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer (either a router or a modem). If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network. N Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communication failure. N Your TV supports only the following wireless network security protocols: – Authentication Mode : WEP, WPAPSK, WPA2PSK – Encryption Type : WEP, TKIP, AES N If you select the Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11n mode and the Encryption type is set to WEP, TKIP or TKIP AES (WPS2Mixed) on your AP or wireless router, Samsung TVs will not support a connection in compliance with new Wi-Fi certification specifications. N If your wireless router supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button Configuration) or PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode.N If your router, modem, or device is not certified, it may not connect to the TV. N Connection Methods: You can set up the wireless network connection in four ways: – Auto Setup (Using the Auto Network Search function) – Manual Setup – WPS(PBC) – Plug & AccessNotice for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series The picture may appear corrupted or have static for some channels when the TV is connected to the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter. If this occurs, establish a connection using one of the following methods or connect the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using a USB cable in a place that is not affected by radio interference.● Method 1 for LED 5500 Series and PDP 550 Series : Connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using the USB right angle adapter. To connect the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using the USB right angle adapter, follow these steps: 1. Connect the USB right angle adapter to the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter. 2. Connect the other end of the right angle adapter to the USB port.● Method 2 for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series : Connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter via an extension cable. To connect the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter using the extension cable, follow these steps: 1. Connect the extension cable to the USB port. 2. Connect the extension cable and Samsung Wireless LAN adapter.3. Attach the Samsung Wireless LAN adapter to the back of the TV near the top, using double-sided adhesive tape.Setting up the Wired Network Network Settings Menu → Network → Network Settings Set the wired or wireless network connection to use various Internet services such as Smart Hub, AllShare and perform software upgrades. Automatic Wired Network Setup You can configure your TV's wired network connection automatically when connecting your TV to a network that supports DHCP. N When connecting LAN cable, the screen pop-up appears directly to set wired network. To set up your TV’s wired network connection automatically, follow these steps: 1. Go to the Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network test screen appears and verifies the network connection. 3. When the connection has been verified, the You are connected to the Internet. If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet Service Provider. message appears.N If the connection process fails, check the LAN port connection. N If the automatic process cannot find the network connection values or if you want to set the connection manually, go to the next section, "Manual Network Setup." Manual Wired Network Setup You can configure your TV's wired network connection manually when connecting your TV to a network that requires a Static IP address. N To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). To set up your TV's wired network connection manually, follow these steps: 1. Go to the Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network connection screen appears and the verification process starts. 3. Select Stop. The verification process stops. Select IP Settings on network connection screen. The IP Settings screen appears. 4. Select the IP Setting, and then set the IP Setting to Enter manually. 5. Go to the IP Address entry field, and then select the IP Address using remote. 6. Enter the first portion of the IP Address (for example, 105) into the first entry field using your remote. When done, go to the next field. 7. Enter the next portion of the IP Address. When done, go to the next field. 8. Repeat the entry process for each field in the IP Address.N If you make a mistake when entering a number, re-enter the number to correct it. 9. When done, go to the Subnet Mask fields. 10. Repeat the same entry process for Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server. 11.When done, select OK. The network test screen appears and the verification process starts. When the connection has been verified, the You are connected to the Internet. If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet Service Provider. message appears. Network Status Menu → Network → Network Status You can check the current network and Internet status.When the wired network connection failed... ● No network cable found. – Check that your network cable is plugged in. If it is connected, make sure that the router is turned on; if it is on, try turning if off and on again. ● IP auto setting failed. Try the following to set your IP address automatically. Or set your IP address manually by selecting IP Settings. – Ensure DHCP server is enabled on router and unplug and re-plug-in the router. – Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. ● Unable to connect to the network. – Try the following: check if your IP address is set correctly in IP Settings. – Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. ● Connected to your local network, but cannot connect to the Internet.– Check the DNS settings in IP Settings, or contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet. ● Network setup complete, but cannot connect to the Internet. – Contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet.Setting up the Wireless Network Network Settings Menu → Network → Network Settings Set the wired or wireless network connection to use various Internet services such as Smart Hub, AllShare and perform software upgrades. N for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series You can use this function when connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. Automatic Wireless Network Setup Most wireless networks have an optional security system that requires devices that access the network to transmit an encrypted security code called an Access or Security Key. The Security Key is based on a Pass Phrase, typically a word or a series of letters and numbers of a specified length you were asked to enter when you set up wireless security for your wireless network. If you use this method of setting up the network connection, and have a Security Key for your wireless network, you will have to enter the Pass Phrase during the automatic or manual setup process. To set up your TV’s wireless network connection automatically, follow these steps:1. Go to the Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it displays a list of the available networks. 3. In the list of networks, select a network you want to connect, and then select Next. N If the wireless router is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have to select Add Network and enter the correct Network Name (SSID) and Security Key to establish the connection. 4. If the Enter security key screen appears, go to step 5. If you select a wireless router that does not have wireless security, go to step 7. 5. To set wireless security for the router, enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN). N You can enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN) using a keyboard screen. Enter the Security Key using your remote. N You should be able to find the Pass Phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set up your router or modem. 6. When done, select Next. The network connection screen appears and the verification process starts. 7. When the connection has been verified, the You are connected to the Internet. If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet Service Provider. message appears. N If the network does not accept the Security Key (Security key or PIN), select Retry or select IP Settings to enter the settings manually.N If you want to set up the connection manually, select IP Settings. Then, go to the next section, “Manual Network Setup”. Manual Wireless Network Setup You can configure your TV's wireless network connection manually when connecting your TV to a network that requires a Static IP address or if the automatic connection process has failed.N To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). To set up your TV's wireless network connection manually, follow these steps: 1. Go to the Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it displays a list of the available networks. 3. In the list of networks, select a network you want to connect, and then select Next. N If the wireless router is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have to select Add Network and enter the correct Network Name (SSID) and Security Key to establish the connection. 4. If the Enter security key screen appears, go to step 5. If you select a wireless router that does not have wireless security, go to step 7. 5. To set wireless security for the router, enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN). N You can enter the Security Key (Security key or PIN) using a keyboard screen. Enter the Security Key using your remote. N You should be able to find the Pass Phrase on one of the set up screens you used to set up your router or modem. 6. When done, select Next. The network connection screen appears and the verification process starts. 7. Select Stop. The verification process stops. Select IP Settings on the network connection screen. The IP Settings screen appears. 8. Select the IP Setting, and then set the IP Setting to Enter manually. 9. Go to the IP Address entry field, and then select the IP Address using remote. 10. Enter the first portion of the IP Address (for example, 105) into the first entry field using your remote. When done, go to the next field. 11. Enter the next portion of the IP Address. When done, go to the next field. 12. Repeat the entry process for each field in the IP Address. N If you make a mistake when entering a number, re-enter the number to correct it. 13.When done, go to the Subnet Mask fields. 14. Repeat the same entry process for Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server. 15.When done, select OK. The network connection screen appears and the verification process starts. When the connection has been verified, the You are connected to the Internet. If you have any problems using online services, please contact your Internet Service Provider. message appears. WPS(PBC) Network SetupIf your router has a WPS(PBC) button, you can configure your TV's wireless network connection using the WPS(PBC) button more easily. To set up your TV's wireless network connection using WPS(PBC), follow these steps: 1. Go to Network Settings screen. (Menu → Network → Network Settings) 2. Select Start. The network function searches for available wireless networks. When done, it displays a list of the available networks. 3. Select the WPS(PBC). 4. Press the WPS(PBC) button on your router within 2 minutes. Your TV automatically acquires all the network setting values it needs and connects to your network. 5. The network connection screen appears, and network setup is done.Plug & Access Network Setup The Plug & Access function lets you easily connect your Samsung TV to your Samsung wireless router by using a USB memory stick to transfer the setup information from the router to the TV. If your non-Samsung wireless router does not support Plug & Access, you must connect using one of the other methods. N You can check for equipment that supports Plug & Access on http:// www.samsung.com/sec. To set up your TV's wireless network connection using Plug & Access, follow these steps: 1. Turn on the Samsung wireless router and your TV. 2. Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port in your Samsung wireless router. Check the router’s LED’s to make sure it is on (Blinking → on). 3. Take the USB memory stick out of the router, and then insert it into a USB port on your Samsung TV. The memory stick downloads the connection information. 4. Wait until the connection is automatically established. N If Plug & Access does not connect your TV to your wireless router, a popup screen appears on the screen notifying you of the failure. If you want to try using Plug & Access again, disconnect the USB memory stick, reset the AP, and then try again from Step 1. You can also choose one of the other connection setup methods. 5. The network connection screen appears, and the network setup is done. 6. Place the wireless router in a desired location. N If the wireless router’s settings change or you install a new wireless router, you must perform the Plug & Access procedure again, beginning from Step 1. Network Status Menu → Network → Network Status You can check the current network and Internet status.When the wireless network connection failed... ● Wireless network connection failed. – No wireless router selected. Go to Network Settings to select your router. ● Unable to connect to wireless router. – Try the following: check that the router is turned on, and if it is try turning it off and on again. – Check if you need to enter a security key to use the router. ● IP auto setting failed. Try the following to set your IP address automatically. Or set your IP address manually by selecting IP Settings. – Ensure DHCP server is enabled on router and unplug and re-plug-in the router. – Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. ● Unable to connect to the network.– Try the following: check if your IP address is set correctly in IP Settings. – Contact your Internet Service Provider for more information. ● Connected to your local network, but cannot connect to the Internet. – Check the DNS settings in IP Settings, or contact your Internet Service – Provider to access the Internet. ● Network setup complete, but cannot connect to the Internet.– Contact your Internet Service Provider to access the Internet.Managing the Network Connected Devices Wi-Fi Direct Menu → Network → Wi-Fi Direct Set to connect the TV to wireless mobile devices. Using this function, you can connect wireless mobile devices to your TV directly without a router. N for LED 5500, 6350 Series and PDP 550 Series You can use this function when connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter. N To use this function, your mobile device should be supported by the Wi-Fi Direct. To connect your mobile device with your TV using Wi-Fi Direct, follow these steps: N Turn on the Wi-Fi Direct device and activate its Wi-Fi Direct function. 1. Go to Wi-Fi Direct screen (Menu → Network → Wi-Fi Direct). The TV starts to search devices. 2. Turn on the Wi-Fi Direct function on your device. Select the desired Wi-Fi device. – PBC: Press the WPS(PBC) button on your Wi-Fi device within 2 minutes. Your TV automatically acquires all the network setting values it needs and connects to your network. – PIN: Input the displayed PIN on your device. N If you want to disconnect the device, select the connected Wi-Fi device, and then select Disconnect. Soft AP Menu → Network → Soft AP Using this function, you can connect the TV on your mobile devices if your mobile devices do not support Wi-Fi Direct. Set the options for connection of Wi-Fi device. ● Soft AP Turns on or off the Soft AP. When Soft AP is set to On, your mobile devices can find the TV name in Wi-Fi connection list. ● Security key Set the Security key manually using the remote control. – The security key should consist of more than 8 digits.– Input the generated security key into the device you want to connect. – If network does not operate normally, check the security key again. An incorrect security key may cause a malfunction. Using color buttons when entering the security key ● b Show security key Shows the security key. Whether to show the security key is represented by a checkbox at the top. ● a Del. Deletes the entered security key one digit at a time. ● { Space Inserts a blank space between characters when entering the security key. ● R Return Returns to the screen before entering the security key. AllShare Settings Menu → Network → AllShare Settings Selects whether to use media functions on the network. For details on set up options, refer to the “AllShare Settings” in the AllShare Play section. Device Name Menu → Network → Device NameEnter a name for this TV. This name will be shown on network remote controls and devices using AllShare Play. N A keyboard appears on the screen and you can key in a name for your TV manually using your remote control. For example, if you want to change the name to Samsung TV, select each character using your remote. When done, select Done.Setting the Time Time Menu → System → Time N The time you set will appear when you press the 정보표시` button on your remote. ● Clock Set the clock to use the various timer features of the TV. N If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set the clock again. To set the clock, follow these steps: 1. Go to Clock screen (System → Time → Clock). 2. Select Auto or Manual. – Auto: The TV will automatically download the correct time from a digital channel. N To set the clock automatically, the cable or antenna must be connected to the TV. N Since the time is automatically set by the information of each digital program, the time may differ depending on each station. N The time, which is automatically set by each station and its signal may not be precise. In this case, set the time manually. – Manual: The Clock Set screen appears. Set the Date and Timemanually. You can set the current date and time using your remote. N Available only when Clock Mode is set to Manual. ● Sleep Timer Automatically shuts off the TV after a preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and 180 minutes). N Select a period of time using your remote. To cancel the Sleep Timer, select Off.● On Timer Set On Timer so that your TV turns on automatically at a time and on a day of your choosing. You can set up three separate On Timer configurations. (On Timer 1, On Timer 2, On Timer 3) N You must set the clock before you can use the On Timer. Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual. If you select Manual, you can select the days you want to activate the timer. N The c mark indicates days you’ve selected. Time: Set the time that the TV turns on automatically. Volume: Set the desired loudness. Source: To select what will be turned on when the timer setting is activated. You can set the TV to turn on a specific channel or play back contents such as video, photo or audio files located in an external device connected to the TV. N The USB device must be connected to your TV before you can select USB. Antenna (when the Source is set to TV): Select Air, DTV Air, DTV Cable, Cable. Channel (when the Source is set to TV): Select the desired channel. Music / Photo (when the Source is set to USB): Select a folder in the USB device containing music or photo files you want played when the TV turns on automatically. N If there is no music file on the USB device or you don’t select a folder containing a music file, the Timer function does not operate correctly. N If there is only one photo file in the USB, the slide show will not play. N If a folder name is too long, the folder cannot be selected. N Each USB you use is assigned its own folder. When using more than one of the same type of USB, make sure the folders assigned to each USB have different names. N We recommend that you use a USB memory stick and a multi card reader when using the On Timer. The On Timer function may not work with USB devices with a built-in battery, MP3 players, or PMPs made by some manufacturers because the TV can take too long to recognize these devices. ● Off Timer Set Off Timer so that your TV turns off automatically at a time and on a day of your choosing. You can set up three separate Off Timer configurations. (Off Timer 1, Off Timer 2, Off Timer 3) N You must set the clock before you can use the Off Timer. Setup: Select Off, Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Sat~Sun or Manual. If you select Manual, you can choose the days you want Off Timer to turn off your TV. N The c mark indicates days you’ve selected. Time: Set the time that the TV turns off automatically.Setting the Parental Controls Security Menu → System → Security Restricts displaying specific channels to prevent children from watching adult content. You must enter the password to set or change the Security settings. N The Security settings are not allowed in HDMI or Component mode. N The password is "0-0-0-0" by default.● Channel Lock Turn the Channel Lock setting on or off. ● Change PIN Select Change PIN. Enter a 4 digit password and reenter it to confirm the password using the remote control. When the message. "PIN is changed successfully." appears, select Close. The new password is now set. Locking channels1. Select Channel in the Smart Hub. (™ → Channel) 2. Select the channel to lock in the channel list, and then select Tools by using the remote control. 3. Select Child Lock Setting. A dialog box appears where you can enter the password. 4. Enter the 4 digit password. The selected channel is locked. N If you select the locked channel, the message "Channel Locked" appears on the black screen. Unlocking channels 1. Select Channel in the Smart Hub. (™ → Channel) 2. Select Tools in the locked channel using the remote control. Select Unlock. 3. A dialog box appears where you can enter the password. Enter the specified password. 4. When you have completed entering the password, the Lock function is released. N If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence in Standby mode, which resets the PIN to “0-0-0-0”: 조용히M → 8 → 2 → 4 → P (Power On)Economical Solutions Eco Solution Menu → System → Eco Solution ● Energy Saving Lets you adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption. If you select Picture Off, the screen is turned off, but the sound remains on. Press any button except the volume button to turn on the screen.● Eco Sensor To enhance power savings, the picture settings will automatically adapt to the light in the room. N If you adjust Backlight for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV in the Picture menu, the Eco Sensor will be set to Off automatically. Min. Backlight for LED TV / Min Cell Light for PDP TV : When the Eco Sensor is set to On, you can manually adjust the minimum screen brightness. N If the Eco Sensor is set to On, the display brightness may change (become slightly darker or brighter) depending on the light intensity in your room. You can control the screen’s minimum brightness with the Min. Backlight / Min Cell Light function. ● No Signal Power Off To avoid unnecessary energy consumption, you can set how long you want the TV to remain on if it’s not receiving a signal. ● Auto Power Off The TV will automatically turned off when no user operation is detected for 4 hours.Picture In Picture (PIP) PIP Menu → System → PIP You can watch a program whose signal has passed through the TV’s tuner and video from one external video source simultaneously. For example, if you have a cable box connected to the Cable In jack, you can use PIP to watch programs from the cable box and a movie from a Blu-ray player attached to the HDMI In jack. N While Smart Hub is on, you cannot use the PIP. ● PIP Activate or deactivate the PIP function. ● Channel Select the channel for the sub-picture screen. ● Size Select a size for the sub-picture screen.● Position Select a position for the sub-picture screen. ● Sound Select You can choose to listen to the sound from the main picture or the sub picture. N If you turn the TV off while watching in the PIP mode, the PIP function is reset to Off. When you turn your TV on, you must turn PIP on again to watch in the PIP mode.N You may notice that the picture in the PIP screen becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke. N The PIP is not supported in 3D function. N PIP Settings: The picture from the external video source will be in the main screen and the picture from the TV’s tuner will be in the PIP subpicture screen.– Main picture: Component, HDMI – Sub picture: TVUsing the TV with a Keyboard and a Mouse Device Manager Menu → System → Device Manager Using this function, you can set up input devices to use with the TV. You can check your device list and adjust the settings in this menu. N Depending on the model of the USB HID keyboard and mouse may not be compatible with your TV.● Keyboard Settings Lets you use a USB or Bluetooth keyboard with your TV. If you want to use a USB keyboard, connect it on the USB port. for LED 6350 Series above and PDP TV If you want to use a Bluetooth keyboard, connect it using the Bluetooth function. N Available only when the QWERTY keypad screen appears in the Web Browser.Select Keyboard Select which keyboard to use from your keyboard list. you can only use one keyboard, even if several are connected. Add Bluetooth Keyboard for LED 6350 Series above and PDP TV You can add the Bluetooth keyboard. Keyboard Options Sets the default options for the keyboard language and type. – Keyboard Language: Set a language for your keyboard. – Keyboard Type: Set what a type a keyboard you're using to enter text. – Switch Input Language: Select a key sequence to change switching input language ● Mouse Settings Lets you use a USB or Bluetooth mouse with your TV. If you want to use a USB mouse, connect it on the USB port. for LED 6350 Series above and PDP TV If you want to use a Bluetooth mouse, connect it using the Bluetooth function. Using your TV to use a mouse, you can use the TV's menu in the same way as on a PC. Select Mouse Select which mouse to use from your mouse list. you can only use one mouse, even if several are connected. Add Bluetooth Mouse for LED 6350 Series above and PDP TV You can add the Bluetooth mouse. Mouse Options Sets the default options for the mouse buttons. – Primary Button: Select the main button you want to use click and select on screen. – Pointer Size: Set the size of the onscreen mouse pointer. – Pointer Speed: Select the speed of the mouse pointer.Using the TV's menu with a mouse 1. Connect a USB or Bluetooth mouse on your TV. 2. Click a primary button you selected. The Simple Menu appears. 3. Click a menu you wish, and then you can use the menu to same way as on a PC.Connecting to the TV with a Samsung Audio Device for LED 6350, PDP 550 Series and above SoundShare Settings Menu → System → Device Manager → SoundShare Settings Lets you use a Samsung Audio Device with your TV. If you want to use a a Samsung Audio Device, connect it using the Bluetooth function. Using your TV with a Samsung Audio Device, you can experience TV sound more loudly and clearly. ● Add New Device Turns the SoundShare function on or off. When the Add New Device is set to Off, the connection signals from new devices are ignored. ● Samsung Audio Device list Allowed / Denied: Allows/Blocks the devices. Delete: Deletes the devices from the list. Supported Samsung Audio Device models – DA-E650 / E651 / E660 / E661 / E670 / E680 / E750 / E751 / E760 / E761 N For more detailed information about the Pairing instructions with your TV, visit Samsung homepage (http://www. samsung.com/sec). N Depending on the region, the Samsung Audio Device may not be sold.Other Features Menu Language Menu → System → Menu Language Set the menu language. 1. Select the Menu Language. 2. Choose a language you want to use among 한국어 and English. Caption (On-Screen Text Dialogue)Menu → System → Caption ● Caption You can switch the caption function on or off. If captions are not available, they will not be displayed on the screen. N The Caption feature does not work with devices connected to the TV through the Component, HDMI jacks. ● Caption Mode You can select the desired caption mode.N The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast. Default / English / Korean: Analog subtitles are supported for analog channels. N When you are watching a program with English subtitles in Korean subtitle mode, the characters may be broken. In this case, set the Caption Mode to English. Default / Service1 ~ Service6: Digital subtitles are supported for digital channels N You can select Service1 to Service6. ● Digital Caption Options Adjusts the each option. Size: (Digital channels only)Options include Default, Small, Standard and Large. The default is Standard. Font Color: You can change the color of the letters. Options include Default, White, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. The default is Black. Background Color: You can change the background color of the captions. Options include Default, White, Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. The default is White. Font Opacity: This adjusts the opacity of text. Options include Default, Transparent, Translucent, Solid. Background Opacity: This adjusts the opacity of the caption background. Options include Default, Transparent, Translucent, Solid. Return to Default: This option sets each Size, Foreground Color, Background Color, Foreground Opacity and Background Opacity to their default. N The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast. N The Default setting follows the standards set by the broadcaster. N You cannot set both the Foreground Color and the Background Color to the same color. N You cannot set both the Foreground Opacity and the Background Opacity to the same color. Screen Burn Protection for PDP TV Menu → System → Screen Burn Protection To reduce the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with Pixel Shift screen burn prevention technology. Pixel Shift moves the picture slightly on the screen. The Pixel Shift Time setting allows you to program the time between movements of the picture in minutes. Your TV also has the following additional screen burn protection functions: – Pixel Shift – Auto Protection Time – Scrolling– Side Gray ● Pixel Shift Using this function, you can set the TV to move pixels minutely on the PDP screen in a horizontal or vertical direction to minimize after images on the screen. Available Pixel Shift settings and optimum settings: Horizontal– Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels) – Optimum settings for TV/AV/ Component/HDMI: 4 Vertical – Available Settings: 0 – 4 (pixels) – Optimum settings for TV/AV/ Component/HDMI: 4 Time (minute) – Available Settings: 1 – 4 min – Optimum settings for TV/AV/ Component/HDMI: 4 minN The Pixel Shift value may differ depending on the monitor size (inches) and mode. N This function is not available in the Screen Fit mode. ● Auto Protection Time If the screen displays a still image for a certain period of time you define, the TV activates the screen saver to prevent the formation of burnt in ghost images on the screen.● Scrolling This function removes after-images on the screen by illuminating all the pixels on the PDP according to a pattern. Use this function when there are after images or symbols on the screen, especially when you displayed a still image on the screen for a long time. N The after-image removal function has to be executed for a long time (approximately 1 hour) to effectively remove after-images on the screen. If the after-image is not removed after you apply the function, repeat the function again. N Press any button to cancel this feature. ● Side Gray Lets you select the color of the sidebars your TV displays when you set the screen size to 4:3.Auto Protection Time for LED TV If the screen displays a still image for a certain period of time you define, the TV activates the screen saver to prevent the formation of burnt in ghost images on the screen. General Menu → System → General ● Game Mode When you have connected a game console such as a PlayStation™ or Xbox™ to the TV, you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by turning on the Game Mode function. Precautions and limitations for Game Mode – Before you disconnect the game console and connecting another external device, set Game Mode to Off.– If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the screen shakes slightly. N Game Mode is not available when the input source is set to TV. N Set Game Mode to On only after connecting a game console. If you turn Game Mode on before you have attached the game console, you may notice slightly reduced picture quality. N If the Game Mode is set to On, the Picture Mode is set to Standard and the Sound Mode is set to Movie automatically. ● BD Wise Provides the optimal picture quality for Samsung DVD, Blu-ray and Home Theater products which support BD Wise. When the BD Wise is set to On, the picture mode is automatically changed to the optimal resolution. N Available when you connect Samsung products that support BD Wisethrough an HDMI cable to the TV. ● Menu Transparency Adjust transparency of menu box. ● Sound Feedback Your TV gives sound feedback when you use TV. Sound Feedback is enabled by default. Turn off Sound Feedback or adjust its volume. ● Panel Lock Lock or unlock all the keys on the TV Controller at once. When Panel Lock is on, The TV Controller is not operate. ● Boot Logo Displays the Samsung logo when the TV is turned on. ● Light Effect for LED 7100 Series You can turn the LED on the TV’s front panel on or off. Turn it off to save power or if the LED is too bright for you. N Set the Light Effect to Off to reduce the power consumption. N The color of light may vary depending on the model. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Allows you to control all connected Samsung devices that support anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote. For details on set up options, refer to the “Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)” instructions. DivX® Video On DemandMenu → System → DivX® Video On Demand Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web site and register with 10-digit registration code, you can download the VOD activation file. Once you play it using Media Play, the registration is completed. N For more information on DivX® VOD, visit http://vod.divx.com.Support Menu e-Manual Menu → Support → e-Manual The e-Manual is built into your TV. Open the e-Manual to learn how to use your TV’s many features. N For the detailed information about the e-Manual Screen, refer to “How to view the e-Manual” in the User's Manual.Self Diagnosis Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis ● Picture Test Use to check for picture problems. Picture Test displays a high definition picture that you can examine for flaws or faults. Yes: Select Yes if the test picture does not appear or there is noise or distortion in the test picture. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance. No: Select No if the test picture displays properly. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. ● Sound Test Use the built-in melody to check for sound problems.N If you hear no sound from the TV’ s speakers, before performing the sound test, make sure Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker in the Sound menu, and then try the speakers again. N You will hear the melody during the test even if you have set Speaker Select to External Speaker or have muted the sound. Yes: Select Yes if you can hear sound from only one speaker or from neither speaker during the sound test. There may be a problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for assistance. No: Select No if you can hear sound from the speakers. There may be a problem with your external equipment. Please check your connections. If the problem persists, refer to the external device’s user manual. ● Signal Information(digital channels only) Signal Information displays HD channel signal strength so you can adjust your antenna to increase signal strength and receive HD channels. ● Reset Reset all setting to factory defaults except for your network settings. To reset your TV to default setting, follow these steps:1. Go to the Reset menu. (Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis → Reset) 2. The PIN input screen appears. Enter the PIN using your remote. 3. When done, the PIN screen disappear automatically. The message All the settings will return to factory defaults except network settings. appears. 4. Select Yes. All settings have been reset. The TV will turn off and on again automatically. The Setup screen appears. For more information about Setup, see user manual. ● Troubleshooting If your TV seems to be having a problem, access the troubleshooting guide for a solution. Software Update Menu → Support → Software Update The Software Update menu lets you upgrade your TV’s software to the latest version. Current Version: This is the software version already installed in the TV. Upgrading to the Latest Version You can upgrade in five ways: – By USB – By Online – By Channel – Alternative Software – Standby Mode UpgradeN Be careful not to turn off the power until the upgrade is complete. The TV will turn off and on automatically after completing the software upgrade. When you upgrade software, all video and audio settings you have made will return to their default settings. We advise you to write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade.● By USB To upgrade the By USB, follow these steps: 1. Visit http://www.samsung.com/sec. 2. Download the latest USB software upgrade exe archive to your computer. 3. Extracts the exe archive to your computer. You should have a single folder with the same name as the exe file.4. Copy the folder to a USB flash drive. 5. Turn on the TV, and then insert the USB flash drive into the USB port of the TV. 6. In the TV’s menu, go to Support → Software Update. 7. Select By USB. N Please be careful not to remove the USB drive until the upgrade is complete.● By Online The By Online function lets you download the upgrade software directly from the Internet into your TV and then upgrade the software in one operation. To use By Online, you must have configured your TV to connect to your network and the TV must be connected to the Internet. See the "Setting up the Wired or Wireless Network" instructions.To upgrade using the By Online, follow these steps: 1. Select the By Online. The Connecting to Server message appears. 2. If there is a download available, the Download pop-up appears with a progress bar and the download starts. 3. When the download is complete, the Upgrade Query screen appears with three choices: Upgrade Now, Upgrade Later, or Don't Upgrade.– If you select the Upgrade Now, the TV upgrades the software, turns off, and then turns on automatically. – If you do not make a selection in one minute or select the Upgrade Later, the TV stores the new upgrade software. You can upgrade the software later using the Alternative Software function. – If you select the Don't Upgrade, the TV cancels the upgrade.● By Channel Downloads and upgrades the software through the channel. Upgrading by channel 1. Select By Channel. 2. Browse to the software to upgrade. N It may take some time to browse the software depending on the TV model or signal strength.3. Upgrading after browsing. ● Alternative Software The Alternative Software option lets you upgrade using a file the TV downloaded earlier, but you decided not to install immediately, or a file downloaded by the TV in Standby Mode (See Standby Mode Upgrade on the next section). To upgrade using Alternative Software, follow these steps: 1. If upgrade software has been downloaded, you will see the software version number to the right of Alternative Software. 2. Select Alternative Software. 3. The TV displays a message asking if you want to upgrade. Select Yes. The TV begins the upgrade. 4. When the upgrade is complete, the TV turns off automatically, and then turns on. ● Standby Mode Upgrade You can set the Standby Mode Upgrade function so that the TV downloads new upgrade software when it is in Standby mode. In Standby mode, the TV is off, but its Internet connection is active. This allows the TV to download upgrade software automatically, when you are not using it. Because the TV is turned on internally, the screen may glow slightly. This phenomenon may continue for more than 1 hour until the software download is complete. To set Standby Mode Upgrade, follow these steps: Select Standby Mode Upgrade in the Software Update menu. – Off: If you select Off, a pop-up message appears when a new software upgrade is possible. – 45 min. / 06:00 am / 10:00 am / 02:00 pm / 06:00 pm: Downloads new software for the channel at a selected time. N To use the Standby Mode Upgrade function, your TV must be connected to the Internet. Contact SamsungMenu → Support → Contact Samsung View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software. You can find information regarding our call centers and how to download products and software. Remote Management Menu → Support → Remote Management The Call Center will access your Samsung Product remotely to check internal information. Remote Management can control user settings and troubleshoot a problem. Smart Hub Menu → Support → Smart Hub Smart Hub lets you connect to the Internet and enjoy variety of Internet and multimedia contents. For more information on how to use the Smart Hub, see “Smart Hub”.Using the 3D function 3D Menu → Picture → 3D for LED 5500 Series : This function is not supported. This exciting new feature enables you to view 3D content. To fully enjoy this feature, you must need a pair of Samsung 3D Active Glasses to view 3D video. Advanced FeaturesTo watch a 3D channel, the Channel → View 3D Channels setting must be set to On. N FULL HD 3D support is determined by the quality of the content. IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR 3D PICTURES. Read and understand the following safety information before using the TV’s 3D function. [ WarningŒ Some viewers may experience discomfort while viewing 3D TV such as dizziness, nausea and headaches. If you experience any such symptom, stop viewing 3D TV, remove the 3D Active Glasses and rest. Œ Watching 3D images for an extended period of time may cause eye strain. If you feel eye strain, stop viewing 3D TV, remove your 3D Active Glasses and rest.Œ A responsible adult should frequently check on children who are using the 3D function. If there are any reports of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness, or nausea, have the child stop viewing 3D TV and rest. Œ Do not use the 3D Active Glasses for other purposes (such as general eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective goggles, etc.) Œ Do not use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while walking or moving around. If you use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses while walking or moving around you can injure yourself by running into objects, tripping, or falling. ● 3D Mode Select the 3D input format. N If you want to experience the 3D effect fully, put the 3D Active Glasses on first, and then select the 3D Modefrom the list below that provides the best 3D viewing experience. Off : Turns the 3D function off. : Changes a 2D image to 3D. : Displays two images next to each other. : Displays one image above another. N The 3D Mode may differ depending on the input signal. N Some file formats may not support the .● 3D Perspective Adjust the overall 3D perspective of the on-screen image. ● Depth Adjust the overall depth. ● L/R Change Swap the left and right pictures. ● 3D → 2D Displays the image for the left eye only. N This function is deactivated when 3D Mode set to " " or " Off ".● 3D Optimize for LED TV Automatically adjusts the picture overall to provide an optimal 3D effect. Support resolution (16:9 only) HDMI 3D Format Resolution Frequency (Hz) / 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 Hz Frame Packing 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 HzComponent Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080p 23.98 / 24 / 29.97 / 30 / 59.94 / 60 Hz DTV Resolution Frequency (Hz) 1280 x 720p 59.94 / 60 Hz 1920 x 1080i 59.94 / 60 Hz Videos / Photos (In AllShare Play)N Refer to "Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats" in the Other Information section. How to watch the 3D images Some 3D modes may not be available depending on the format of the image source. To watch in 3D, you must wear 3D Active Glasses and turn the glasses on by pressing the power button.1. Go to the 3D screen. (Picture → 3D) 2. Select the 3D Mode. The 3D Mode screen appears. 3. Select the 3D Mode option for the image you want to view. The screen goes blank for a moment, and then reappears in the 3D mode you selected. N You can also access the 3D mode by pressing the X button on your remote.Read These Notes Before Using the 3D Function... Œ The 3D Mode is set to Off automatically when you access Smart Hub functions. Œ The 3D Mode is set to its memorized configuration value automatically when you change the input source. Œ Some Picture functions are disabled in 3D mode.Œ PIP is not supported in 3D mode. Œ 3D Active Glasses from Samsung’ s previous product (IR type) or other manufacturers are not be supported. Œ When the TV is initially powered on, it may take some time until the 3D display is optimized. Œ The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is any other 3D product or electronic devices turned on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active Glasses. Œ Be sure to stay within the viewing angle and optimum TV viewing distance when watching 3D pictures. Otherwise, you may not be able to see 3D effects properly. Œ The ideal 3D viewing distance is three times or more the height of the screen.Smart Hub Menu → Support → Smart Hub Using Smart Hub, you can stream movies, videos, and music from the Internet, access various for pay or freeof-charge applications and view them on your TV. Application content includes news, sports, weather forecasts, stock market quotes, maps, photos, and games. N You can also start this function by pressing the ™ button on the remote control. Notice Œ Samsung Electronics takes no legal responsibility for any interruption of the Smart Hub service caused by the service provider for any reason. Œ Application services may be provided in English only and the contents available may vary, depending on your area. Œ For more information about a Smart Hub service, visit the web site of the applicable service provider. Œ The Smart Hub service downloads and processes data via the Internet so that you can enjoy the Internet contents on your TV screen. If the Internet connection is unstable, the service may be delayed or interrupted. Furthermore, the player may turn off automatically in response to conditions on the Internet. If this occurs, check the Internet connection and try again. Œ The services provided are subject to change by the Smart Hub service provider without notice. Œ The Smart Hub service contents may differ depending on the player’s firmware version. Œ For pay DivX contents with copy protection can only be played through a composite, component or HDMI cable. To start Smart Hub for the first time, follow these steps: 1. Press the ™ button. 2. The Smart Hub screen appears. 3. The Privacy Policy screen appears. Select Agree. 4. The Service Update screen appears and installs a number of services and applications. When done, it closes. The applications and services downloaded are displayed on the Smart Hub screen. This may take some time. N Smart Hub may close momentarily during the installation process. N A number of screens may appear after installation. You can close them or let them close on their own. 5. To start an application, select an application using your remote. Using the Numeric Keypad Selecting – using your remote while you are using the Screen Keypad enables you to change the text fields to Korean, lower case, capitalized case, upper case, numbers and icons. You can use this Screen Keypad in a several Smart Hub applications. 1. For example, suppose that you want to input “105Chang”. 2. Select – 3 times using your remote to change the input mode from Korean to numbers. 3. Select 1, 0 and 5 in numerical order. 4. Select – 4 times using your remote to change the input mode from numbers to upper case. 5. Select 2 3 times using your remote to input C. 6. Select – 4 times using your remote to change the input mode from upper case to lower case. 7. Input the rest of “Chang” using your remote in the same way. When done, select OK. Using the QWERTY Keypad You can use this Screen Keypad in a several Smart Hub applications in same way as a keyboard. Using the colored and function buttons with the QWERTY Keypad ● a Delete All Delete all inputted character. ● b Numeric / QWERTY Toggles the keypad mode between Numeric keypad mode and QWERTY mode. N When the keypad is set to QWERTYmode, you can input characters using a USB or Bluetooth keyboard connected on the TV. ● { Space Leave a space while entering characters. ● T Settings Displays the options menu. Input Language: select an input language between Korean and English. XT9 Text Input: Turns on or off the recommended word function. ● E Enter Enter the selected character. ● R Return Return to the previous menu. ● π Prev Page Display the previous set of symbols/ icons. N Available only when the keypad screen is in symbol/icon mode (F). ● µ Next PageDisplay the next set of symbols/icons. N Available only when the keypad screen is in symbol/icon mode (F). Creating an Account To establish your own, exclusive, configuration of Smart Hub, create your own Samsung account. N You must use an e-mail address as an ID. N You can register up to 10 User Accounts. To create an account, follow these steps: 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select a using your remote. The Login screen appears. 2. Select Create Account using your remote. The Create Account screen appears. 3. Select Samsung Account. An entry screen and keypad appear. 4. Use the keypad to enter your e-mail address. This will serve as your ID. N If you have a Bluetooth or USB keyboard attached to the TV, use the keyboard to enter the e-mail address. Then, in Steps 6 through 10, use the keyboard to enter the required password. Note that after you type in the e-mail address and password, you will need to use your remote to continue. 5. When done, select OK. The Login screen reappears. 6. Select Password. The Password screen and a keypad appear. 7. Use the keypad to enter a password. The password can be any combination of letters, numbers, and symbols. N Select a using your remote to display or hide the password as you enter it.8. When done, select OK. 9. Select Confirm password. The Password screen and a keypad reappear. 10. Repeat Steps 7 and 8. 11.When done, select Create Account. The Confirmation window appears. 12. Select OK. The Continue to register service ID window appears. 13. Select OK. 14. The Link to other accounts window appears. Select the service to register. Provide your ID and password and select OK. N If you perform the Link to other accounts operation, you can use the application more easily. For more information on registering, refer to the “Settings” when configuring Smart Hub. N If you don’t have your own account and you want to create your own account, select Unregistered. 15. Select OK. Select Login when the Smart TV account window appears. The login is completed.Customizing the Home Screen ● a Login / Logout To log in to your Samsung account, follow these steps: 1. With the Smart Hub main screen displayed on your TV, select a using your remote. The Login screen appears. 2. Select the ^ next to the Samsung Account entry filed. A drop down list appears. N If you want to input your Samsung Account name manually, select the Samsung Account entry field. A keypad screen appears. Input your Samsung Account manually. When done, go to Step 4. 3. Select your ID from the list that appears. The Login screen re-appears. 4. Select Password. The Password window and a keypad appears.5. Enter your password using your remote. When done, select OK. N If you want Smart Hub to enter your password automatically, select Remember my password after you have entered your password. A c mark appears. Smart Hub will now enter your password automatically when you select or enter your ID. N If you want to log in Smart Hub automatically when Smart Hubfunction starts, select Sign me in automatically. A c mark appears. N If you forget your Samsung Account password, you can reset it. Select b using your remote. A pop-up message appears. Select OK. Smart Hub will send a guide to your e-mail address that explains how to reset your password. ● b Wallpaper You can change the background image on the Smart Hub home screen. ● { Account Manager Lets you register your service provider accounts, delete or deactivate your Samsung account. For more information about Account Manager, see "Configuring Smart Hub with the Settings Menu" in this section. N Available only when you have logged in to Smart Hub.Using the Tools menu with Smart Hub N Depending on the icons and folders displayed on the Smart Hub screen, some of the functions listed below may not appear. ● Login / Logout Log in or log out of your Samsung account. ● Wallpaper You can change the background image on the Smart Hub home screen. ● Move The Move function lets you change the screen position of an application or a folder. To use the Move function, follow these steps: 1. Select an application icon or a folder, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Move. A position change screen appears. 3. Move the icon using your remote. When the icon is in the position of your choice, select the icon. The application icon moves to its new location. ● Move to Folder The Move to Folder function lets you move an application to a folder. N This is only available when a folder is created in the Smart Hub. To use the Move to Folder function, follow these steps: 1. Select an application icon, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select the Move to Folder. The Move to Folder window opens.3. Select a folder using your remote. A move finished message appears, Select OK. The message window closes. The application has been moved to the folder. N If you select an application in a folder, you can use Move to Folder to move application to the Smart Hub screen. To access an application in a Folder 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select a folder. The folder opens. 2. Select an application you want to execute. The application service starts. ● Delete The Delete function lets you delete application from Smart Hub. To use the Delete function, follow these steps:1. Select an application, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Delete. The message Do you want to delete selected item(s)? appears. 3. Select OK. The application is deleted. ● Lock The Lock function lets you lock some applications in Smart Hub so they cannot be opened without entering the password. N Depending on the application, this function may not be supported. To use the Lock function, follow these steps: 1. Select an application, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Lock. The Security window appears. 3. Enter your security PIN using the remote. If you have not created a PIN, enter “0-0-0-0”. 4. A confirmation message screen appears. Select OK. The message screen closes and a lock symbol appears to left of the application ● Unlock N Depending on the application, this function may not be supported.To use the Unlock function, follow these steps: 1. Select a locked application, and then open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Unlock. The Security window appears. 3. Enter your security PIN using the remote. If you have not created a PIN, enter “0-0-0-0”. 4. A confirmation message screen appears. Select OK. The message screen closes and the lock symbol to left of the application disappears. ● New Folder The New Folder function lets you create and name new folders. You can move applications into the folders you have created. To use the New Folder function, follow these steps: 1. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select New Folder in the menu. The New Folder pop-up and a keypad screen appear. 3. Using the keypad and your remote, enter a name for the folder. 4. When done, select OK at the bottom of the QWERTY keypad screen. The New Folder screen closes and the New Folder appears on the Smart Hub screen. ● Rename Folder The Rename Folder function lets you rename folders. To use the Rename Folder function, follow these steps: 1. Select a folder, and then open the Tools menu using your remote.2. Select Rename Folder. The Rename Folder window and a keypad screen appears. 3. Enter a new name using your remote or edit the old name. 4. When done, select OK. The Rename Folder window closes and the new or revised name appears below the folder. ● InformationYou can view detailed information about the selected application. N Depending on the application, you can also lock or unlock the application on the Information screen. Configuring Smart Hub with Settings The Settings menu gives you access to Account Management, Service Manager, Reset, and About Smart Hub functions. To use these three functions, you must be logged into your Samsung Smart Hub account. To access the Settings menu, and then select a menu item, follow these steps: 1. Open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select Settings. The Settings window appears. 3. Select a menu item using your remote.● Account Manager The Account Manager menu contains functions that let you register your service provider accounts, change your Smart Hub password, delete or deactivate your Samsung account. Link to other accounts: If you have existing accounts with any of the providers listed by the Link to other accounts function, you can associate the provider account and the provider account password with your Samsung account. If you associate the account, you will be able to log onto the account through Smart Hub easily, without entering your account name or password. N Before register your site account, corresponding application should be installed in the Smart Hub.To use the Link to other accounts function, follow these steps: 1. In the Account Manager menu, select the Link to other accounts. The Link to other accounts window appears. 2. Select an application you want to associate with your Samsung account. 3. In the pop-up that appears, select Register. 4. In the Link to other accounts entry screen, enter your site ID and password using your remote. When done, select OK. N This is the ID and password you normally use to access your account on this application. 4. If you have entered the ID and password correctly, the Registered successfully. message appears. 5. If want to add another service application, and then repeat Steps 2 through 4 to associate another service application. 6. When done, select OK. Remove from TV Account List: Cancels all the currently registered Service Accounts that appear on the Link to other accounts screen. Deactivate Account: Deactivates your Samsung Account and deletes it and all your account settings entirely from the Smart Hub. ● Service Manager Auto Ticker: You can set Auto Ticker to come on when the TV powers. N The Ticker application provides useful News, Weather, and Stock Market information. Before you can set the Auto Ticker on, you must download the Ticker application into Smart Hub. Push Notification Settings: When on, Push Notification displays a notification message when an event takes place in an application installed on Smart Hub. The TV will display the notification message and allow you to view details of the event even while you are viewing TV. ● Reset The Reset function initializes all downloaded applications, erases all user accounts and settings from the TV, and resets all Smart Hub settings to the factory default settings. It then restarts Smart Hub as if it were starting for the first time. Your account, however, remains on the Smart Hub server. To log into your account, enter your ID and password on the Login screen. To use the Reset function, follow these steps:1. In the Settings menu, select Reset. The Reset screen appears. 2. Enter your security PIN using your remote. N The default password set is “0-0- 0-0.” N If you forget the PIN code, press the remote control buttons in the following sequence in Standby mode, which resets the PIN to “0- 0-0-0”: 조용히M → 8 → 2 → 4 →P (Power on). 3. After a few moments, Smart Hub automatically resets. The screen may go black, then Smart Hub reappears. In a few moments, it starts the reinitialization procedure. 4. To complete the re-initialization, go to Step 2 in "To start Smart Hub for the first time, follow these steps:" section of this manual. ● About Smart HubThe About Smart Hub menu contains functions that display information about Smart Hub. Detail: Lists information about Smart Hub including version number, memory usage, and the unique product ID. Terms of Service Agreement: Display the Terms of Service Agreement.Using Samsung Apps Samsung Apps ™ → Samsung Apps Samsung Apps is a store from which you can download applications to use on Samsung TV/AV equipment. You can enjoy a variety of contents such as videos, music, photos, games, useful information etc. using the downloaded applications.New applications are added regularly. N To use Samsung Apps, you should read and accept the Terms of Service Agreement. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using the colored and function buttons with Samsung AppsN Depending on the screen, the available buttons may differ. ● a Login / Logout Log to or log out of your Samsung account. ● b Filter by Price To toggle the view between All, Paid and Free. ● { Sort To sort the applications by Recommended, Name, Date, or Downloaded. N You can sort all categories except Most Popular. ● } View Mode Each time you select } using your remote, the View Mode toggles between basic mode and thumbnail mode. ● π / µ Scroll Move to previous or next page. ● T Tools Displays the option menu.● R Return Moves to previous menu. Using the Samsung Apps by category The following categories are available: ● Most Popular Displays the most popular applications for users. ● Videos Includes apps that provide video media such as movies, TV shows, and short length videos. ● Games Includes various game apps ● Sports Includes apps that provide sports content such as game results, images and short length video. ● Lifestyle Includes apps that provide lifestyle media services such as music, personal photo management tools, and SNS(Social Network Service). ● Information Includes apps that provide information content such as news, financial information, stock quotes, weather, etc. ● Education Includes apps that provide education contents. ● My Apps My Apps provides information about your available App cash coupon and information about the apps you have already purchased or installed on your TV. N You can purchase App cash that you can use to buy applications through http://tv.samsungapps.com. ● Help If you have questions about Samsung Apps, check this section first. To search for an application in Samsung Apps, follow these steps: 1. On the Samsung Apps screen, select Search Samsung Apps. The Search window and keypad screen appears. 2. Enter a keyword using your remote. 3. When done, select OK at the bottom of the QWERTY keypad. 4. Wait until the search result screen displays. After Samsung Apps displays the results, you can select an application you want in the search result screen. N You can find a keyword in the search history If you have searched using that keyword before. N If you have a keyboard and/or a mouse connected to your TV, you can use the mouse to select the Search Samsung Apps field and the keyboard to type in the keyword.Search ™ → Search Easily search for and access content from diverse sources (e.g. applications, Your Video, AllShare) 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select Search at the top of the screen. 2. If you want to input a search term directly, select Enter search keyword entry field. A keypad screen appears. Enter the search term using your remote. N If you want to search by category, select a category below the field using your remote. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using the Search function by category ● Most SearchedYou can search by selecting a key word in the key word list. The key word list displays words you frequently use for searches. ● Top Application You can search applications and services in the application list. The application list displays apps that users download frequently. ● Search History You can find the keyword in the search history list if you searched a keyword before. Using the colored and function buttons with Search ● b Refresh Refresh the Search function. ● T Tools You can set general parameters for the Search function or delete the search history.● R Return Return to the previous menu. Using the Tools menu with Search ● General Settings Keyword Recommendation: Turns the Keyword Recommendation function on or off. Search Scope: Sets a search scope. The default is allowed all application.To customize a search scope, follow these steps: 1. On the Search screen, open the Tools menu using your remote. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select an application in the Search Scope. A c mark disappears from the check box. N When you remove the c mark, you remove that application from the search scope. Only checked applications are included. 4. When done, Press the 복귀R button. ● Search History Lets you delete previously used keywords from the search history list. Also, If you select Delete All, you can delete all your search history. To delete a search history keyword, follow these steps: 1. On the Search screen, open the Toolsmenu using your remote. 2. Select Search History. 3. Select a keyword in the Keyword list. 4. Press E button on your remote. The keyword disappears from the list.Smart Tip NAVER ™ → Smart Tip NAVER Using Smart Tip NAVER, you can view related information and real-time hot issues about the current broadcast and screen and you can perform searches using keywords while watching TV. N The related information about the current broadcast is only available for digital channels. N Keywords may not be provided depending on the current screen. You can choose one of the provided keywords with the remote control. N To use this function, the product must be connected to the Internet. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using Color Buttons in the Smart Tips● a Hiding the Window Minimizes the Smart Tip menu bar at the bottom. If the menu bar is minimized, only the a Smart Tips are displayed on the screen. N If a pre-determined period of time has passed, the menu bar is automatically minimized. ● b NAVER Search The NAVER search window and numeric keypad appears on the screen. Enter a keyword to search with using the remote control. N If you enter a keyword, related keywords are displayed in the list at the bottom. Real-time rising keywords, Popular TV keywords, Daily rising keywords: Select an item using the remote control. The search results are listed. N If you select b Search using the remote control, the screen returns to the previous search screen. ● { Broadcast Issues The me2day window appears where you can view the real-time hot issues related to the broadcast. Using the Color Buttons in Broadcast Issues ● a View More Hot Issues The me2day window is expanded. You can view the real-time issue list using the remote control. ● E Issue Details The me2day widget is launched. N If the me2day widget is not installed, a message window appears asking you whether you want to install the widget. For more information about me2day, please visit Samsung Apps. ● R ReturnReturns to the previous screen. ● T Utility Functions Bookmark Management: You can manage weekly popular bookmarks and My Bookmarks. Related Information Category Setting: You can select a category using the remote control. The selected categories are marked with c. Auto Run Setting: You can determine whether to automatically launch the Smart Tips when the TV is turned on or not. ● E Details You can view detailed information about the provided keywords. If you select the Details button again, the Naver search results are listed. N Only when a keyword is provided, does appear in the menu bar. N You can choose one of the provided keywords with the remote control.– } Bookmarks: Saves a provided keyword in My Bookmarks. N The Bookmarks only appear in the menu bar when the Details button has been selected. ● R Return Minimizes the Smart Tips menu bar. If you select the Return button again, a message window appears asking whether you want to exit the Smart Tips. Select Yes or No.Using the Color Buttons in the Naver Search Result List N You can view the search result of each category using the remote control. ● b Search Moves to the keyword input window. The numeric keypad screen appears. You can enter another keyword. ● } PIP Sets or cancels PIP mode.N The broadcast that is currently being watched is displayed. You can change the channels using the remote control. ● R Return The Naver search result list is closed and the Naver search screen appears.Family Story ™ → Family Story Family Story feature allows you to share photos, messages, and events with your family. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. ● Create Group If you are starting Family Story for the first time, you can create a family group and invite members to join. ● Invite Members After creating a group, you can invite the family members who you want to share your family's photos and events with to join. ● Join Group If you were invited to join a family group by a family member, you can select Join Group to enjoy Family Story services.To create a family group, follow these steps: 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select Family Story. The Family Story screen appears. 2. Select Create Group. The Create and Invite pop-up appears. 3. Select OK. The Family Story agreement appears. Read the agreement, and then select I agree. N You must agree with the terms prior to using Family Story. 4. Enter a Group Name, Your Name and Your Phone Number without dashes using your remote. N If you want to add a group image, select an image box. (An external device containing photos must be connected to your TV via USB.) N * Fields marked with an asterisk are required. 5. When done, select Done. The group creation is completed. N If you want to invite members to your group, select Invite Members. If you want to go your Family Story, select Go to Family Story If you selected Invite Members, go to Step 4 in the procedure below. To invite members to your Family Story, follow these steps: 1. From the starting menu in Family Story, open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Group Members. The Group Members screen appears. 2. Select Invite Member. The Invite popup appears. 3. Select OK. The Invite Members screen appears. 4. Select Select to enter Name.. The keypad screen appears. 5. Enter member's name using your remote. When finished, select Done. 6. Select Phone number or Samsung account ID. The keypad screen reappears. 7. Enter the prospective member's phone number or Samsung account ID using your remote. When finished, select Done. N If you want to add more prospective members, select Add Member, and repeat Steps 4 through 7. 8. When finished adding members, select Done. The Member Invitation Completed screen appears. 9. If invited by phone number, 4-digit invite code will be generated and the code need to be shared with the member. If invited by Samsung Account, the member will be notified about the invitation via e-mail. Select OK to finish.To join a group using the received invite code, follow these steps: 1. Start Family Story and accept the terms. 2. You will see a pop-up message asking about invitation type. If you were invited by phone number, please select Invite. If you were invited by Samsung account, please select Samsung Account.3. If joining by Samsung Account, a list of invitations, from your family groups will be displayed. Select Accept to join. You can select Deny if you don't want to join the inviting group. 4. If joining by Invite Code, first enter your phone number using your remote. When done, select Done. Then you will see a list of invitations from your family groups. Select Accept to join. You can select Deny if you don't want to join the inviting group. Enter the 4-digit invite code shared by your family member, and then select Done to finish. 5. Select OK. Joining your family group has been completed.Fitness ™ → Fitness The Fitness application provided by Smart Hub lets you track and manage a fitness and exercise program you create. N To use Fitness, you should be logged in Smart Hub. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen.Read these notes before exercising... N Please warm-up or stretch before exercising. N Stop exercising immediately if you feel pain, or dizzy, exhausted, or short of breath. Create Your Profile When you start Fitness for the first time, you should create your own profile. On the Fitness screen, select Do you want to exit the widget?. A pop-up message appears. Select Create Profile. 1. Name: Select Password mode and Last Name to put in a new user name. The keypad screen appears. Enter your name using the remote. When done, Select OK. 2. Gender: Select your gender. 3. Search Model: Enter your birthdate using your remote. It will be used to personalize some things for you. 4. Units: Select your preferred units. The selected units will be applied all over Fitness. 5. Height: Enter your height. This will be used to calculate your body max index (BMI). 6. Weight: Enter your weight. This will be used to calculate your body max index (BMI). 7. Complete: Creation of your profile is finished. The TV displays the information of your profile and BMI. To start the Fitness, Select Enjoy Fitness. Using Fitness with categories ● Exercise Provides information on your exercise goal, current status and recommended contents. ● ProgressProvide information on your basic body profile, exercise progress, achievement your goals.Kids ™ → Kids Using this function provided by Smart Hub, lets you provides a quick launcher and the recommended list to access the kids or education-related application or contents easily and quickly. Also, it helps user (parents) to manage your kids. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using Kids with categories ● Playground Displays recommended contents and applications. When you select an application or content, the TV executes the application or contents immediately. N The maximum number of contents list is 40.N You can edit the contents list. For more detailed information, refer to "My Choice" in this section. N Most of the content must be downloaded from Samsung apps. To download, follow the directions on the screen. When the download is complete, press 복귀R repeatedly until the Kids app reappears. Start the contents or app by highlighting and then selecting it.● Sticker Book Displays the Sticker Books with the stickers your kids received. Also, it can be share with your Family Story. Your kids can receive the sticker through these methods: – By User (parent): You can present a sticker using the Present Stickers function in the Parents menu. – Automatically: Kids presents a sticker while the child is watching content. Creating a Sticker Book 1. If you want to create a new Sticker Book, select Filter by Price. The Create New Book screen appears. 2. Enter the Sticker Book's name using your remote. When done, select Next. 3. Select a color for the Sticker Book. When done, select Next. 4. Check the created sticker book. If you want to change a name, select Edit. If you want to change a color, select Previous. 5. When done, select Done. A new Sticker Book is created. N You can create a new sticker book. Maximum number of books is 10. N You can check arrived stickers by highlighting and selecting New Sticker. Only ten new sticker types are displayed in New Sticker at one time.● Browse All Displays the kids or education-related applications list and all contents list. N When you select an application or contents, if the application or contents has not been installed on the TV, the TV displays the corresponding download screen from the Samsung Apps screen. To use Browser All, follow these steps:1. On the Browser All screen, select a character you wish. The selected character screen appears. 2. Select the kind of contents you want. Videos: Displays the video contents of the corresponding character. Games: Displays the game contents of the corresponding character. Enjoy your TV.: Displays the e-book contents of the corresponding character.3. The detailed information screen for the selected contents appears. You can play the contents, share the contents with your Family Story, add the contents to My Choice, and give the contents a rating. N If you were purchased already, you can play the contents. If you are not purchased, you can download the contents in the Samsung Apps. ● ParentsLets you edit the Playground, give stickers to your kids, check usage time, and set the watching limit alarm. My Choice You can add or delete contents in the Playground. The Playground displays the added contents only. To add or delete contents in the Playground, follow these steps: 1. On the Parents screen, select My Choice. The My Choice screen appears. N My Choice contains content you added through the Browse All screen. 2. Select contents you want to add or delete in the list. A pop-up message appears. 3. Select Yes. 4. The selected contents is added or deleted.Present Stickers When your kids do a good job today, you can present a sticker to them. To present a sticker to your kids, follow these steps: 1. On the Parents screen, select Present Stickers. The Present Stickers screen appears. 2. Select a sticker you want to present. A pop-up message appears. 3. Select Yes. 4. Select a sticker book you want to put the sticker into, and then select Parents. N If you want to check a sticker book, select Check Now. You can check the stickers in the selected sticker book. 5. The sticker is placed in the sticker book you selected.Viewing History Lets you check how long your kids have used the app through a graph. Also, lets you check how long your kids have used each video or content item. Change a date or content title using your remote. Set Alarm Lets you set how long your kids can watch. When the time is up, the alarm window appears.To set the time your kids can watch, follow these steps: 1. On the Parents screen, select Set Alarm. The Set Alarm screen appears. 2. Select Timer. 3. Select amount of time. The alarm is set.Web Browser ™ → Web Browser Using this function provided by the Smart Hub, you can surf the Internet on your TV. 1. On the Smart Hub screen, select Web Browser. The Web Browser screen appears. 2. Surf the Internet in the same way as on a PC. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Using the colored and function buttons with the Web Browser ● b Control Panel Shows or hides the control panel at the top of the screen. ● { Link Browsing / Pointer Browsing You can change the cursor to Link Browsing mode or Pointer Browsing mode. In Pointer Browsing mode, you use a pointer to select items on the screen in the same way you use a pointer on a computer. In Link Browsing mode, you move a blue rectangle from link to link on the screen by pressing the directional keys on your remote. Pointer Browsing is best if you have a mouse attached to the TV. Link Browsing only works if you are browsing using your remote. N When you select Pointer Browsing, you cannot use the remote to select items in the Tools Menu. N In Pointer Browsing Mode, you can use the arrow keys on your remote to move the pointer. ● } PIP Turns PIP on or off. With PIP on, you can watch TV while using the Web Browser. ● π / µ Scroll up/downYou can scroll the page up or down. N Available only when cursor is set to Link Browsing. ● T Tools Displays the Tools menu. Control Panel: Shows or hides the control panel in the top of the screen. Link Browsing / Pointer Browsing: You can change the cursor to Link Browsing mode or Pointer Browsing mode. PIP: Turns PIP on or off.PIP Settings: Lets you select where the PIP window is displayed on the screen and which sound source the TV plays, sound from the main screen (the browser) or sound from the sub screen (the PIP window). Add to Bookmark: Add the current page to your Bookmarks. Enable Grabbing / Disable Grabbing: You can move a current web page in the direction you choose. To move a web page, select a page, and then move it in the direction you wish using your remote. N Available only when the cursor is set to Pointer Browsing. ● R Return Close the Web Browser. Using the Control Panel with Web Browser The Web Browser has a series of icons across the top of the screen which provide a number of useful functions. With these icons, you can easily use the Web Browser. The icons are described below, starting with the icon on the far left of the screen. ● Back Moves to the previous web page. N If there is no previous web page, this icon will not work. ● Forward Moves to the next web page. N If there is no next web page, this icon will not work. ● Refresh / Stop Refreshes the current page or stops the current connection from loading. ● Home Page Goes to the URL you specified as your the home page. ● Zoom You can select a zoom level of 50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, 150%, 200%, 300%and Fit to screen. ● Bookmarks Displays the Bookmarks screen. You can bookmark the current page or select a favorite page to visit from the bookmark list. You can also sort by Date, Name, or Frequency. To sort, select the Sort. When you select Enter URL, you can enter in a new URL address directly using your remote. When you highlight a bookmark, the Options button appears on the right. In the Options pop-up, you can edit the selected page or delete the selected page from bookmark list. Using the Tools menu with Account Manager ● Delete All Delete all bookmark lists. ● Add to BookMarks Sets the current page as a bookmark.● Bookmark Import You can import a bookmark file saved in the other device like a PC. ● Bookmark Export You can export a bookmark file from your TV to another device connected your TV. ● History Displays the History screen. You can select a web page to visit in the History list. You can also sort by Name, Date, or Frequency. To sort, select Sort. When you select Create a New Sticker Book, you can enter in a new URL address directly using your remote or mouse. When you highlight a page, the Options button appears on the right. In the Options pop-up, you can delete the selected page from the history list or add the selected page to bookmark. N If you want to delete all entries in the history list, open the Tools menu and then select Delete All. ● URL Field Shows the URL of the current page. If you select the URL field, the URL popup appears. Using your remote, you can enter a new URL directly. ● Windows List Displays list or images of open windows (the Windows List). You can open a new page to the list (using Open new window), select and access a page in the list, select and close a page in the list, or close all pages. When you select Enter URL, you can enter in a new URL address directly using your remote. Using the Tools menu with Windows List ● Open new window Open the new web browser. A new web browser automatically displays the home page.● Close all windows Close the currently opened all Windows List. After closing all Windows List, TV opens a new web browser automatically. A new web browser automatically displays the home page. ● Search Lets you search the web. When you select the Search entry field, the Search screen appears.To search the web by word input, follow these steps: 1. On the Search screen, select the search engine. Also, you can select a different search engine. 2. Select Browse All. The keypad screen appears. 3. Enter the word you want to search using your remote. The TV searches the word by search engine.● Share Share the current web page to your Family Story. ● Options You can configure the Web Browser settings. Setting up the Web Browser Move the cursor to the top of the screen, and then select the Options icon.● Read Tool Provides an easy-to-read page by enlarging the main text. ● Approved Sites Allows to restrict your children’s access to inappropriate web pages. Therefore, this function allows access of only the registered web sites. N Every time you access the Approved Sites, the PIN screen appears and you should enter the PIN.Approved Sites feature: Turns on or off the Approved Sites. Reset password for Approved Sites.: Change the Approved Sites password. Add current site: Lets you add the currently displayed web site to the Approved Sites list. Manage Approved Sites: Lets you key in URLs to add to the Approved Sites List and delete sites from the Approved Sites list.N If you turn Approved Sites on and have not added any sites to the Clean site list, you will not be able to access any Internet sites. ● Private Browsing Enable or disable the Privacy mode. When the Privacy mode is enabled, the browser does not retain the URLs of sites you visit. If you want to enable Private Browsing, select Yes. If the Private Browsing function is running, the “Stop” icon appears in front of the URL at the top of the screen. To disable Private Browsing, select it again when Private Browsing is enabled. ● PIP Settings Lets you configure the PIP function. Position: Select a position for the PIP sub-picture. Sound Select: Select the audio source you will hear - Main or Sub - when PIP is on.● Web Browser Setting You can configure Web Browser options. Set as homepage: You can set the home page. – Most visited: Set the most frequently visited URL as the home page. – Current Page: Sets the current page as the home page. – Bookmarks: Sets the bookmarks URL as the home page. – Enter URL: Lets you key in the URL of the page you want for your home page. The keyboard works like a cell phone texting keyboard. Pop-up Block: Turns the Pop-up Block on or off. Ad Block: You can determine whether to block advertisements and select the URLs for which advertisements are blocked. – Ad Blocker: Turns the Ad Blocker on or off.– Block current page: Adds the current page to the blocked list. – Manage blocked sites: You can add a website for which advertisements should be blocked by directly keying in the URL, or you can delete a website from the list. General: You can delete your personal information. – Delete history: Deletes the website history.– Delete browsing data: Deletes Internet access information such as cookies. – Reset Settings: Reset all web browser settings to the factory defaults. – Hide Menu: Turns on or off the control panel auto-hide. Encoding: You can set the Encoding setting for web pages to Automatic or Manual. – Auto select: Turns on or off the Encoding setting for web pages automatically. – Setting: Select the Encoding settings for web pages manually. Select an encoding format from the encoding format list. Pointer: You can set the speed of the cursor when the cursor is set to Pointer Mode. – Pointer Speed: Select a pointer speed. Web Browser information: You can check the version information about the Web Browser.Skype ™ → Skype Skype created a little piece of software that makes communicating with people around the world easy and fun. With Skype you can say hello or share a laugh with anyone, anywhere. And if both of you are on Skype, it’s free. Communicate with people around the world! To use Skype, you need the Samsung TV Camera (sold separately). Other company’s TV Cameras are not compatible with Skype on your TV. N For more information, download the Skype user’s manual from “http://www.samsung.com/sec.” N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen.[Legal Statement] Due to the various capabilities of products featuring the Samsung Smart Hub - Content Service, as well as limitations in the available content, certain features, applications, and services may not be available on all devices or in all territories. Some features on Smart Hub may also require additional peripheral devices or membership fees that are sold separately. Please visit http:// www.samsung.com for more information on specific device information and content availability. The services and availability of content through Smart Hub are subject to change from time to time without prior notice.Using the Air Conditioner by the TV application ™ → Samsung Smart Air Conditioner Using the Samsung Smart Air Conditioner application, you can control the air conditioner in your home using the voice control function while watching TV. N Depending on the version of the application, the usage may differ. In this case, please follow the instructions on the screen. Registering the air conditioner You can select an air conditioner to be connected to the TV over the network. 1. Check if the TV and the air conditioner are connected to the same AP. 2. Search for air conditioners connected to the TV. 3. The Confirm new appliance popup window appears. Select Yes to register the air conditioner. 4. Select Yes from the found air conditioner list to run the application. 5. In the Samsung Smart Air Conditioner screen, select the air conditioner in use. N If the air conditioner that is in use is not on the screen, select b Scan again. 6. If you select the air conditioner in use, the authentication request begins. Turn the air conditioner off and select OK. The authentication process begins. 7. The authentication popup window appears. For the authentication process, turn the air conditioner on. 8. The "If the authentication is complete, you can control the air conditioner with your voice (Smart Talk)" message is displayed on the screen. Select the air conditioner that is in use from the screen. N If the air conditioner that is in use is not on the screen, select b Scan again. N To disconnect and not use the air conditioner, select { Disconnect air conditioner. N To go back to the previous step, select R Return.Controlling the air conditioner On the TV screen, you can control the air conditioner using the Voice Control function. 1. When the Voice Control function is On, start the Voice Control function with the Trigger Words ("Hi TV" or "Smart TV"). 2. Say "Air Conditioner". The available commands are listed. 3. Say a command. The air conditioner will perform that operation. Deregistering the air conditioner To stop using the air conditioner, Select { Disconnect air conditioner.AllShare Play ™ → AllShare Play Enjoy photos, music and/or movie files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device and/or your PC. If you activate AllShare Play, a window appears to display the available function list. After checking the functions, select Don't Show Again or Close. N To view content on a USB device, you should plug the device into a USB port on the TV. N If you want to use a USB HDD, we recommend to use a USB HDD that has a power adapter. Connecting a USB Device 1. Turn on your TV. 2. Connect a USB device containing photo, music and/or movie files to the USB port on the TV. 3. When a USB device is connected to the TV, the New device connected. window appears. Select a category you want to play among Videos, Photos and Music. N The TV may display the files on the USB device automatically if it is the only device connected. Disconnecting a USB Device Method 1: Using the TV/외부입력s button.1. Press the TV/외부입력s button. 2. Select a desired USB device, and then press the 간간간간T button. The Tools menu appears. 3. Select Safely Remove USB, and then wait until the selected USB device is disconnected. You can remove a USB device from the TV. Method 2: Using the AllShare Play home screen.1. Go to AllShare Play home screen. (™ → AllShare Play) 2. Select any category except My List, and then press the E button. 3. Select a desired USB device, and then press the 간편메뉴T button. The Tools menu appears. 4. Select Safely Remove USB, and then wait until the selected USB device is disconnected. You can remove a USB device from the TV.N To remove a USB device from the TV, we recommend use Safely Remove USB function. Read this information before using AllShare with a USB device. Restriction and Caution Œ Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data. SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss. Œ Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated USB (HDD 5V 1.0A) port. Œ Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading. Œ If you connect a USB device with a USB extension cable, the TV may not recognize the USB device or read the files on the device. Œ If a USB device you connect to the TV is not recognized, the files on the device are corrupted, or a file in the list is not played, connect the USB device to a PC, format the device and check the connection. Œ If a file you deleted from the PC is still found when you run Smart Hub, use the “Empty the Recycle Bin” function on the PC to permanently delete the file.Supported Devices Œ Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV. Œ AllShare Play supports only USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices. MSC is a Mass Storage Class BulkOnly Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not supported). Devices should be connected directly to the TV’s USB port. Œ If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time. Œ If more than two MSC devices are connected, some of them may not be recognized. A USB device that requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V) may not be supported. Œ If the TV has no input during the time set in Auto Protection Time, the Screensaver will run. Œ The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released automatically when you connect them to the TV. Œ More than 2TB USB HDD is not supported. File system and formats Œ The USB function might not work properly with unlicensed multimedia files. Œ MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported. Œ The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS. Œ AllShare Play supports only the Sequential jpeg format. It does not support the Progressive jpeg format. Œ The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen. Œ The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360 X 8640 pixels. Œ If a file is corrupted or the TV does not support the file type, the Not Supported File Format. message appears. Œ If the files are sorted by Folder view, the TV can display the names of up to 1000 files in each folder. Œ If the number of files and folders saved on a USB storage device is approximately over 8000, the files and folders may not appear and some folders may not be opened. Œ The TV cannot play MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a for pay site. Digital Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports the creation, distribution, and management of digital content in an integrated and comprehensive way, including protecting the rights and interests of content providers, preventing illegal copying of contents, and managing billings and settlements. Connecting to a PC through a network You can play pictures, music, and videos saved in your PC through a network connection in the AllShare Play mode. N For more information on how to configure your TV and connect it to your network, refer to “Setting up the Network” in this manual. N To view content located on your PC, you must have connected your TV and your PC to your LAN and downloaded and installed AllShare PC Software on your PC. N We recommend you locate both your TV and PC in the same network subnet. IP addresses have four parts, separated by periods (111.222.333.444). If your TV and PC are in the same subnet, the first 3 parts of the TV IP address and the PC IP address (111.222.333) will be the same and only the last part (the host address) will be different. The following AllShare Play functions are not supported when you are playing media from a PC connected through a network:N The Background Music On and Background Music Setting functions. N Sorting files by preference in the Photos, Music, and Videos folders. – The † or … function while a movie is playing. N DivX DRM are not supported. N Set your PC firewall program so that AllShare PC Software is a permitted program. N Depending on the Internet server, when you use AllShare Play through a network connection: – The sorting method may vary. – The Scene Search function may not be supported. – The Resume function, which resumes playing of a video, may not be supported. – The Resume function does not support multiple users. (It memorizes only the point where the most recent user stopped playing a video.) – The search function may not work depending on the content information. N You may experience file stuttering while playing a video in AllShare Play through a network connection.Using the AllShare Play AllShare Play enables you to enjoy the following services. You need to log in to your Samsung account to use web storage or social services. AllShare Play can play various contents in three ways: – Using USB Device: You can play videos, photos, or music from a connected USB device. – Using DLNA or Web storage: You can play various contents from devices connected to your home network or web storage. – Using Social Services: You can play some content from social services such as Family Story, Facebook or Picasa. N Before using Facebook or Picasa, it should be installed in the Smart Hub. N To use SugarSync, Facebook, or Picasa, you should log in to corresponding application. Alternatively, you can register your application account in to your Samsung account. To register your application account, refer to "Configuring the Smart Hub with Settings" in the Smart Hub section. N To use Family Story, you should log in to your Samsung account. Before using Family Story, you should join a group at least one more.N You can transfer a desired content to other device connected to the TV. Contents Type Supported transfer device USB DLNA, SugarSync, Family Story, Picasa, Facebook Camera DLNA DLNA USB SugarSync USB Family Story USB Picasa USB FaceBook USB Mobile device USBMy List (In AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → My List Using this function, you can access the content easily and quickly. ● Recently Played Displays the videos, photos or music file list of recently played. If you have a file you want to play again, use this category. N When you play a file from the Recently Played list, and the USB device is not connected or the file is not found, the "Cannot find the file you're looking for." message appears. N Up to 48 files are listed in descending order of playing time on the basis of the time configured on the TV so that the last played file comes first. N When you try to play a file on a mobile phone, the file may not be played. ● What's NewDisplays the newly updated videos, photos or music file saved on the USB device or your PC. If you have a newly updated file you want to play, use this category. ● Playlist Displays the Playlist files saved on the USB device or your PC. If you want to play a playlist, select the playlist. The selected playlist will play immediately. N You can create up to 12 playlists.N You can add up to 100 files to a single playlist. N You can only add one type of content to a single playlist. For example, you can only add music files to a playlist that includes music files. Creating the Playlist 1. Select the desired file in the Videos, Photos, or Music file list. 2. Open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Add to Playlist. 3. Select a file you want to add. The c mark appears in the check box. 4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional files. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 5. When done, select Add to Playlist. The Add to Playlist screen appears.6. Select Create New. The Create a new playlist. screen appears. 7. Enter playlist name using your remote. 8. When done, Select Done. The newly playlist is created. To add files to playlist, follow these steps: 1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 in the “Creating the Playlist” procedure. 2. Select a playlist to add files. The files will be added to playlist you selected. To delete one or more files in the Playlist, follow these steps: 1. Select a playlist you want to edit. 2. Open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Edit Playlist. The Edit Playlist screen appears. 3. Select a file you want to delete. The c mark appears in the check box. 4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional files. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 5. When done, select Remove. A pop-up message appears. 6. Select Yes. The selected file(s) be removed in the Playlist.Videos (In AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → Videos You can play video files saved on USB device and/or your PC. N For more information about the subtitle formats and codec formats, refer to "Supported Subtitle and Codec formats" in the Other Information section. Playing a Video1. On the AllShare Play screen, Select Videos. 2. Select the device you want to play. 3. Select the desired video in the file list. N If you stop the playing, you can play the video later from the point where you stopped it. N The file name appears on the top with its playing time. N If video time information is unknown, the playing time and progress bar are not displayed. N Press and hold the rewind or fastforward button for 3 seconds while a video is playing to move to the next video. Playback control button with Videos ● † / … Each time you select † or … using your remote, the playback speed change as follows. († 1 / † 2 / † 3 / … 1 / … 2 / … 3) ● l, r Jump to backward or forward from current position. ● ∑ Pause the scene. – In pause mode, select …. Each time you select … using your remote, the playback speed is reduced to „ 1/8 / „1/4 / „1/2. – In pause mode, select ∑. Each time you select ∑ using your remote, a new frame will be appear. N To return to normal speed playback, select ∂ using your remote. N The product does not play sound in stop mode. N Stop motion operates only in the forward direction. Using the Tools menu with Videos● On the file list screen, you can use the following these options: – View You can sort the file list by selecting a sort criteria you want. – Selection Play You can play by selecting the desired music file in the file list. – Send Lets you send your video files with your Web storage or other devices.N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. – Login / Logout You can login or logout your Smart Hub account. – Add to Playlist Lets you make your own playlist. When you use the playlist, you can play music you want to listen easily and quickly. – Go to the playlistMoves to Playlist screen. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. ● During playback, you can use the following these options: – Ad Block Settings Moves to the file list screen. – Play from the Beginning You can restart a video file from the beginning.– Scene Search You can use the Scene Search function during playback to view or start a movie from the scene of your choice. N If the index information is damaged or unsupported, you will not be able to use the Scene Search function. – Title Search You can move directly to another title.– Time Search Search the video or input the play time directly using your remote. – Repeat Mode You can play movie files repeatedly. – Picture Size You can adjust the picture size to your preference. – Picture Mode You can change the Picture Mode. – Sound ModeYou can change the Sound Mode. – Audio Language You can enjoy video in one of supported languages. The function is enabled only when you play streamtype files which support multiple audio formats. – Subtitle You can view a subtitle. You can select a specific language if the subtitle file contains multiple languages. N You can only select subtitles when there is a subtitle file for the video. N For supported subtitile formats, refer to the "Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats" section in Other Information. – Subtitle Settings Displays the Subtitle Settings. You can set up a subtitle option. N You can only select subtitles when there is a subtitle file for the video. N For supported subtitile formats, refer to the "Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats" section in Other Information. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. Viewing the file lists N When you use the AllShare Playfunction with your Web storage rather than a USB device, View is not supported. 1. To sort files in the file lists, select } using your remote. The View screen appears. 2. Select a sort criteria you want. ● Folder view Displays the whole folder. You can view the file name and thumbnail by selecting the folder.● Title Sorts and displays the file title in Symbol / Number / Alphabet / Special order. ● Latest Date Sorts and shows files by the latest date. ● Earliest Date Sorts and shows files by the earliest date.Send your video files Lets you send your video files with your Web storage or other devices. N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. 1. To send video files in the file list, open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Send. 2. Select a video file you want to send. The c mark appears in the check box.3. Repeat Step 2 to select additional tracks. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 4. When done, select Send. The Send screen appears. 5. Choose the destination device to send, and then select Send. 6. From these steps, please follow the instructions on the screen.Photos (In AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → Photos Viewing a photo (or slide show) N For more information about the supported image file formats, refer to "Supported Subtitle and Codec formats" in the Other Information section. 1. On the AllShare screen, select Photos. 2. Select the device you want to play.3. Select the desired photo file in the file list. The TV displays the selected photo file. 4. To start the slide show, select ∂ using your remote. N To change a photo manually, press the l or r button on your remote. N During the slide show, all files in the file list are displayed in order, starting from the file you selected. N When watching a photo file or slide show, you can add background music if you have music files on same device. N The background music cannot be changed until the BGM has finished loading. Playback control button with Photos ● † / … The slide show speed change as follow (Slow, Normal, Fast).● l, r Change a previous or next photo. ● ∫ Return to the file list screen. ● ∂ Start the slide show. ● ∑ Pause the slide show. Using the Tools menu with Photos ● On the file list screen, you can use the following these options: – View You can sort the file list by selecting a sort criteria you want. – Selection Play You can play by selecting the desired music file in the file list. – Send Lets you send your photos with your Family Story or photo-related application.N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. – Login / Logout You can login or logout your Smart Hub account. – Add to Playlist Lets you make your own playlist. When you use the playlist, you can play music you want to listen easily and quickly. – Go to the playlistMoves to Playlist screen. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. ● When playing a photo file, you can use the following these options: – Ad Blocker Moves to the file list screen. – Start Slide Show / Stop Slide Show You can start or stop a slide show. Alternatively, select ∂ or ∑ using your remote. – Slide Show Speed You can select the slide show speed during the slide show. Alternatively, select † or … using your remote. – Background Music On / Background Music Off You can start or stop background music. – Background Music Setting You can set and select background music when watching a photo file or slide show. – Picture Mode You can change the Picture Mode. – Sound Mode You can change the Sound Mode. N Available only when the background music is set to on. – Zoom You can zoom into images in full screen mode.– Rotate you can rotate images. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. Viewing the file lists 1. To sort files in the file lists, select } using your remote. The View screen appears. 2. Select a sort criteria you want.● Folder view Displays the whole folder. You can view the file name and thumbnail by selecting the folder. ● Title Sorts and displays the file title in Symbol / Number / Alphabet / Special order. ● Latest Date Sorts and shows files by the latest date.● Earliest Date Sorts and shows files by the earliest date. ● Monthly Sorts and shows photo files by month. Send your photos Lets you send your photos with your Family Story or other devices. N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. 1. For example, suppose that you want to send with your Family Story. 2. To send photo files in the file list, open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Send. 3. Select a photo file you want to send. The c mark appears in the check box. 4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional tracks.N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 5. When done, select Send. The Send screen appears. 6. Choose the destination device to send. 7. Choose the family group to share. A pop-up window appears. 8. Enter a message to send to family group you selected.N If the QWERTY keyboard screen is displayed, you can use a keyboard connected to the TV to enter the message. 9. When done, select Send.Music (In AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → Music Playing Music N For more information about the supported music file formats, refer to "Supported Subtitle and Codec formats" in the Other Information section. 1. On the AllShare Play screen, select Music.2. Select the device you want to play. 3. Select the desired music file in the file list or select ∂ using your remote. N To move a previous page, select b using your remote. To move a next page, select { using your remote. N When the music is playing, you can search the music file by selecting † or … using your remote. N If the sound is abnormal when you play MP3 files, adjust the Equalizer in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem.) N Press and hold the rewind or fastforward button for 3 seconds while a music file is playing to move to the next music file. Playback control button with Music During playback, you can use additional functions at the bottom right of the screen.● Play / Pause You can start or pause a music file. Alternatively, you can select ∂ or ∑ using your remote. ● Repeat Mode You can play movie files repeatedly. ● Shuffle You can play the music sequentially or randomly. ● Sound Mode You can change the Sound Mode.Using the Tools menu with Music ● You can use the following these options: – View You can sort the file list by selecting a sort criteria you want. – Selection Play You can play by selecting the desired music file in the file list. – Send Lets you send your music files with your Web storage, or other device. N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. – Login / Logout You can login or logout your Smart Hub account. – Add to Playlist Lets you make your own playlist. When you use the playlist, you can play music you want to listen easily and quickly.– Go to the playlist Moves to Playlist screen. – Encoding You can select an encoding format from the encoding format list. – Information Displays detailed information about the selected file. Playing selected music files using Music 1. Select the desired music file in the file list. 2. Open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Selection Play. 3. Select the tracks you want to add. The c mark appears in the check box. 4. Repeat Step 3 to select additional tracks. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 5. When done, select Play. The selected music files will play. Viewing the file lists N When you use the AllShare Play function with your Web storage rather than a USB device, View is not supported. 1. To sort files in the file lists, select } using your remote. The View screen appears. 2. Select a sort criteria you want. ● Folder view Displays the whole folder. You can view the file name and thumbnail by selecting the folder. ● Title Sorts and displays the file title in Symbol / Number / Alphabet / Special order. ● ArtistSorts the music file by artist in alphabetical order. ● Album Sorts the music file by album in alphabetical order. ● Genre Sorts music files by the genre. Send your music files Lets you send your music files with your Web storage or other devices.N If you want to use this function, you should log in the Smart Hub. 1. To send music files in the file list, open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Send. 2. Select a music file you want to send. The c mark appears in the check box. 3. Repeat Step 2 to select additional tracks. N To select all the files in the list, select Select All. To cancel a selection, select the file again. 4. When done, select Send. The Send screen appears. 5. Choose the destination device to send, and then Send. 6. From these steps, please follow the instructions on the screen.Recorded TV (AllShare Play) ™ → AllShare Play → Recorded TV You need to record programs before you can play recorded TV programs. – Recording a currently broadcast program – Schedule Recording N It is recommended connecting a USB HDD (min. 5,400rpm) to enjoy recorded TV programs. However, RAID type USB HDDs are not supported.N Only USB devices that have completed the device performance test can be used for recording. To use the Tools in device list on the Recorded TV screen (digital channels only) Select the device with the contents in device list on the Recorded TV screen and run Tools using the remote control. You can use the following functions.Login / Logout: Logs in or out of the Smart Hub. Device Management: Allows you to use the Device Format, Checking Device, and Device Performance operations and displays the Default Recording Device. Information: Allows you to check the detailed information about the connected device. Safely Remove USB: Removes the USB device safely.To record a currently broadcast program (digital channels only) You can record the currently broadcast program immediately. 1. Select ∏ to record a program you are watching. 2. Select the recording duration in the top right screen and select OK. You can record up to 360 minutes. 3. When completing the recording, you can check the recording by going to ™ → AllShare Play → Recorded TV. Immediately recording the program that is currently being viewed in the EPG 1. Press the 정보표시` remote control button. 2. Select a Details. 3. To record the program you are currently watching, select Record Now. ● Making a recording reserving for an upcoming program in the EPG 1. Press the 정보표시` remote control button. 2. Press the l or r remote control button to select the next program. 3. Select a Details. 4. Select Schedule Recording. 5. The icon appears in front of the program for which a recording is reserved.Playing recorded TV programs ™ → AllShare Play → Recorded TV Select Recorded TV and the external device containing the recorded TV. The saved contents are displayed on the screen in the most recent order. To use the buttons in the recorded TV list screen ● π µ Move Page: Moves between pages.● b Device Management: Allows you to use the Device Format, Checking Device, and Device Performance operations and displays the Default Recording Device. ● } View: Sorts the list by your own criteria. ● E Play: Plays the selected contents. ● T Tools: Displays the option menu. ● R Return: Moves to previous menu.Using the Tools in the recorded TV screen ● You can set the following functions in the file list screen. – Play Current Group: Plays the contents in the selected group. – View: Sorts the list by your own criteria. – Selection Play: Selects and plays the selected contents. N You can select more than one item to play or delete.– Delete: Deletes the selected contents. – Add to Playlist: Adds the selected contents to the playlist. – Go to the playlist: Moves to the playlist. – Lock/Unlock: Locks/Unlocks the selected contents. – Device Management: Allows you to use the Device Format, Checking Device, and Device Performance operations and displays the Default Recording Device. – Device Management: Views the device information and checks & formats the device. ● You can set the following additionally when selecting content. – Rename: Renames an item. – Information: Displays the detailed information about the item. ● You can set the following functions while playing content.– Go to Recorded List: Moves to the recorded TV program list. – Play from the Beginning: Plays again from the beginning. – Scene Search: Selects a scene. – Title Search: Plays an item by selecting its title. – Time Search: If you select “Time Search”, the designated date format such as SS/MM/HH or HH/MM/SS is displayed, and you should press the lor r button on your remote. – Repeat Mode: Sets or releases the section you want to repeat. ● Off: Does not set the Repeat mode. ● Title: Plays the currently playing item twice. ● All: Repeats all content. ● Repeat A-B: Repeats the selected section. Activates the loop function from where you want to start the looping section while playing content and from where you want to end the looping section. – Picture Size: Adjusts the picture size. – Picture Mode: Selects a picture mode. – Sound Mode: Changes the sound mode – Information: Displays the detailed information about the recorded item such as the title, recording time, duration, etc.Timeshift You can pause and replay a currently broadcast TV program whenever you want just like a DVD program. N This function is only available in digital channels. Timeshift function To start the Timeshift function with the Pause function1. Select ∑ while watching a program using the remote control. 2. When the Timeshift function is activated, the screen is paused and the Timeshift progress bar is displayed. N You can check the current status of the Timeshift operation on the left side of the progress bar. Connect a USB device before using the Timeshift and Recorded TV functions. [ Recorded videos are DRM (digital rights management) protected and cannot be played on a PC or other TVs. Note that files saved on the TV cannot be used after the main board is changed. N NOTE ● We recommend using a USB HDD with at least 5,400 rpm, but a USB HDD of RAID type is not supported.● The availability of both recording and the Timeshift function may differ depending on picture quality and the free space on the hard disk drive. ● Note that if you have paused the recording the TV will automatically resume playback ● If the 50MB free memory space limit of the USB storage device is reached, the current recording process will be closed. ● During a playback or the Timeshift, the picture will be displayed according to the display settings of the TV. ● If you change the input source during recording, the screen will go blank until the change is completed. ● If the USB device has failed the Device Performance Test, the USB device must go through the Device Format and Device Performance Test again before you record with the Guide or Channel. ● The Timeshift functions can only be used with a USB storage device that completed the Device Performance Test. ● If you attempt the recording or Timeshift function with a device that did not have the Device Performance Test, the function will not start. ● If you select ∏ by the remote control while the Channel screen is being displayed or record with Schedule Recording, the TV may start or stop recording 1 or 2 seconds later than you intended due to the time needed to process the command. ● If a USB device dedicated to recording is connected, existing Timeshift or recording files that were saved abnormally will automatically be deleted. ● If you switch to external input mode during recording, the recording will continue but the ∏ function will be disabled. ● If any function that turns off the TV (Sleep Timer, Auto Power Off, etc.) is set for a time that conflicts with recording, the TV will be turned off once the recording is complete. To start the Timeshift function with the Play function 1. Select ∂ while watching a program using the remote control. 2. When the Timeshift function is activated, the Timeshift progress bar is displayed. N You can check the current status of the Timeshift operation on the left side of the progress bar. To use buttons while performing the Timeshift function ● † / … Whenever you select † or … using the remote control, the playing speed is changed as follows: († 1 † 2 → … † 6 † 7 / … 1 … 2 → … … 6 … 7) ● l rMoves to the screen 20 seconds forwards or backwards. ● ∑ Select ∑ using the remote control. This pauses the currently playing screen. – Select † or … on the paused screen using the remote control. The playing speed is changed as following. (ƒ)1/8, (ƒ)1/4, (ƒ)1/2 / („)1/8, („)1/4, („)1/2● ∫ While watching scenes that occurred in the past, select ∫ using the remote control. This moves to the currently broadcast program screen. If you select ∫ using the remote control while watching the currently broadcast program, a message window appears with the "Do you want to stop Timeshift?" message. If you select OK, the Timeshift window is closed. ● If you change the playing speed to normal, select ∂ using the remote control. N The product does not play sound in stop mode. N Stop motion operates only in the forward direction.Using the DLNA Function ™ → AllShare Play You can play media contents including videos, photos, and music saved on your mobile phones or the other devices (such as your PC) by controlling them on the TV via the network. For more information, visit “http:// www.samsung.com/sec” or contact the Samsung call center. Mobile devices may need additional software installation. For details, refer to each device’s user’s guide. N If your Samsung TV connects to a non-Samsung DLNA server, a compatibility issue may occur during video playback. N By connecting your Samsung TV to a network via AllShare Play, you can use Samsung’s original functions as follows: – Playback of various video formats (DivX, MP4, 3GPP, AVI, ASF, MKV, etc.) – Video thumbnail feature – Bookmark function (to resume video playback) – Auto-chaptering (scene navigation) – Digital content management – Compatibility with various subtitle formats (SRT, SMI, SUB, TXT, TTXT) – Search with file names– And many others AllShare Settings Menu → Network → AllShare Settings Shows a list of mobile phones or connected devices which have been set up to use AllShare Settings with this TV. N The AllShare Settings function is available in all devices which support DLNA DMC. ● Allowed / Denied: Allows/Blocks the devices. ● Delete: Deletes the devices from the list. N This function only deletes the name of the device from the list. If the deleted device is turned on or tries to connect to the TV, it may appear on the list again. To play the media contents of the devices connected to DLNA function, follow these steps:1. On the AllShare Play screen, select desired menu (Videos, Photos, Music). 2. Select DLNA. The TV displays the file list of the connected device using the DLNA function. 3. Select the desired file in the file list. The selected file will play. Playing the media contents saved on the devices 1. Connect the mobile phone or other devices which support AllShare Play function, and then play the media contents of each device. The popup screen appears on the bottom of your TV. 2. Select the Allow to accept the connected devices. The media contents of the devices can be playing on your TV. N You can find the allowed devices on the AllShare Settings.N An alarm window appears informing you that media contents (videos, photos, music) sent from a mobile phone will be displayed on your TV. The contents are played automatically 3 seconds after the alarm window appears. – If you close the alarm window using your remote when the alarm window appears, the media contents are not played.N The first time a device accesses your TV through the media function, a warning pop up window appears. Select Allow. This permits the phone to access the TV freely and use the Media function to play content. N To turn off media contents transmissions from a mobile phone, set a device to Denied in the AllShare Settings. N Contents may not play on your TV depending on their resolution and format. N The some buttons may not work depending on the type of media content. N Using the mobile device, you can control the media play. For details, refer to each mobile’s user’s guide.Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung TV’s remote. The Anynet+ system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your Samsung device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it.N You can only control Anynet+ devices using the TV’s remote control, not the buttons on the TV. N The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. If this occurs, reselect the Anynet+ device. N The Anynet+ functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products. N For instructions explaining how to connect Anynet+ external devices, refer to the device’s user manual. You must connect an Anynet+ device using an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. N Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the standby or on status. N Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type. N However, you can connect only one Anynet+ Home Theater. To connect an Anynet+ Home Theater, connect the Home Theater to the TV using an HDMI cable then: – To hear sound from the Home Theater’s front, left and right speakers and the subwoofer only, connect a digital optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) port on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home Theater. – To hear 5.1 channel audio, connect HDMI cables to your Anynet+ DVD player, satellite box, etc. Then, connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) port on your DVD player, Satellite Box, etc. (i.e. Anynet + Device 1 or 2) directly to the Home Theater, not the TV. Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) MenuThe Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices connected to the TV. ● View TV Changes Anynet+ mode to TV broadcast mode. ● Device List Shows the Anynet+ device list. ● (device_name) Menu Shows the menu of the connected device menus. E.g. if a DVD player is connected, the disc menu of the DVD player will appear. ● (device_name) Tools Shows the tools menu of the connected device. E.g. if a DVD player is connected, the tools menu of the DVD player will appear. N Depending on the device, this menu may not be available. ● (device_name) Title Menu Shows the title menu of the disc in the connected device. E.g. If a DVD player is connected, the title menu of the movie in the DVD player will appear. N Depending on the device, this menu may not be available. ● Receiver Sound is played through the receiver. Setting up Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ● Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)To use the Anynet+ Function, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) must be set to On. N When the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related operations are deactivated ● Auto Turn Off Set an Anynet+ Device to turn off automatically when the TV is turned off. N If the Auto Turn Off is set to Yes, running external devices will turn off at the same time as the TV powers off. N May not be enabled depending on the device. ● Receiver You can listen to sound through a receiver (i.e. Home Theater) instead of the TV Speaker. Switching between Anynet+ Devices 1. Open the Tools menu using your remote, and then select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). 2. Select Device List. The Device List screen appears. N If you cannot find a device you want, select Refresh to refresh the list. 3. Select a device, and then wait until switch to the selected device. N The Device List menu appears only when you set Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) to On in the System menu.N Switching to the selected device may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the switching operation while switching is in progress. N If you have selected an Anynet+ device using Source function and then selecting its input source, you cannot use the Anynet+ function. Make sure to switch to an Anynet+ device by using the Device List.Listening through a Receiver You can listen to sound through a receiver (i.e. Home Theater) instead of the TV Speaker. To listen to sound through a receiver, go to Receiver screen (Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMICEC) → Receiver). Then select Receiver and set to On. N If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list.N The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack of the receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) port of the TV. N When the receiver (i.e. Home Theater) is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TV’s Optical jack. When the TV is displaying a DTV (air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the receiver. When the source is a digital component such as a DVD player and it is connected to the TV via HDMI, you will hear only 2 channel sound from the receiver. Using the ARC function for LED 6350 Series above, PDP TV You can listen to sound through a receiver connected using an HDMI cable without connecting a separate optical cable. To listen to sound through a receiver using the ARC function, go to Receiver screen (Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) → Receiver). Then select Receiver and set to On. N To use the ARC function, a receiver which supports the HDMI-CEC and ARC features must be connected to the HDMI IN 2 (ARC) port. N To disable the ARC function, set the Receiver to Off. Even if the TV transmits the ARC signal continuously, the receiver will be blocked from receiving the signal.Troubleshooting Menu → Support → e-Manual → Other Information To view a list of all troubleshooting items, go to e-Manual home screen (Menu → Support → e-Manual → Other Information) or press the 고객지원 button, and then search a desired item by selecting a chapter. N If you have other questions, call Samsung customer Service or visit Other Information"http://www.samsung.com/sec".Picture (Troubleshooting) First, perform the Picture Test and to see if your TV is properly displaying the test image (go to Support → Self Diagnosis → Picture Test). If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may be caused by the source or signal. Flickering and Dimming If your Samsung Television is flickering or dimming sporadically, you may need to disable some of its energy efficient features like the Eco Sensor or the Energy Saving feature. If you follow below step with your remote, you can turn these features off or on. Œ Energy Saving: System → Eco Solution → Energy Saving Œ Eco Sensor: System → Eco Solution → Eco Sensor Component Connections / Screen ColorIf you find that the color on your Samsung television’s screen is not correct or black and White, first run a Self Diagnosis on the TV to make sure there are no device issues. Œ Self Diagnosis : Support → Self Diagnosis → Picture Test If the problem does not appear in the Picture test, try making sure : Œ Your connections are all consistent. For example, if you’ve used the AV In jack on your TV, make sure you have used the AV Out jack on your video source. Œ You have connected to your devices to the correct jacks. For example, if you use the Component jacks, labeled Pb, Pr, and Y, to connect your TV and video source, make sure you have connected the blue Pb jack on the video source to the blue Pb jack on the TV, the red Pr jack on the source to the red Pr jack on the TV. Screen Brightness If you find that the colors on your Samsung TV are correct but just a little too dark or bright, try adjusting the follow settings in the Picture option of the Main menu: Œ Backlight for LED TV / Cell Light for PDP TV , Contrast, Brightness, Sharpness, Color, Tint (G/R) and so on. Go in to Picture on user Menu then try adjusting options mentioned above. Auto Motion Plus / Blur for LED 6350 Series above If you find that there is a blur or “ghostlike” appearance to the images on your television’s screen, you might be able to correct it by taking advantage of Auto Motion Plus.● Auto Motion Plus: Picture → Picture Options → Auto Motion Plus Unwanted Powering Off If your Samsung TV appears to turn off by itself, there may be an issue with either your Timer settings or your Eco friendly No Signal Power Off feature. First make sure you Sleep Timer is not accidentally set. The sleep timer turns the TV off after a certain period of time. Œ Sleep Timer: System → Time → Sleep Timer If the Sleep Timer is not activated, you may have engaged the No Signal Power Off or Auto Power Off feature. Œ No Signal Power Off : System → Eco Solution → No Signal Power Off Œ Auto Power Off: System → Eco Solution → Auto Power Off Trouble Powering OnPress the power on button on the TV or remote and the light should blink about 5 times before the TV turns on. If you find that you are having trouble powering on your Samsung television, there are a number of things to check before making a call to the service department. Œ If you happen to be using the TV as a monitor and the stand-by light only blinks for a few seconds when you press the power button, your PC is in sleep mode. To take your PC out of sleep mode, press a key on your keyboard or move the mouse. Then try turning your TV on. If you’re sure your power cord, remote control, and PC are functioning properly, you may be having a cable issue. If you have a cable or satellite box, your TV may appear to be off because the cable or satellite box is not outputting a signal. To test the signal output of your cable or satellite box, press the guide or info button on the cable or satellite box remote control. If the screen displays the guide or info data, the problem is caused by the box. Cannot Find a Channel Re-run Setup (Go to Menu → System → Setup) or run Auto Program. (Go to Menu → Channel →Auto Program). The TV image does not look as good as it did in the store. Store displays are all tuned to digital, HD (high definition) channels. If you have an analog cable/set top box, upgrade to a digital set top box. Use HDMI or Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality. N Many HD channels are up scaled from SD (Standard Definition) contents. Look for a channel that is broadcasting true HD content. Œ Cable/Satellite subscribers: Try HD channels from the channel line up. Œ Air/Cable Antenna connection: Try HD channels after performing an Auto Program. Adjust the Cable/Sat box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p.The picture is distorted The compression of video contents may cause picture distortion especially in fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. A weak or bad quality signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV issue. Mobile phones used close to the TV (within 3.3 ft) may cause noise in the picture on analog and digital channels.Color is wrong or missing. If you’re using a Component connection, make sure the component cables are connected to the correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause color problems or a blank screen. The color is poor or the picture is not bright enough. Adjust the Picture options in the TV menu (go to Picture Mode / Color / Brightness / Sharpness) Adjust the Energy Saving option in the TV menu (go to System → Eco Solution → Energy Saving) Try resetting the picture to view the default picture settings (go to Picture → Reset Picture). There is a dotted line on the edge of the screen. If the Picture Size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9. Change the cable/satellite box resolution. The picture is black and white. If you are using an AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the Green jack of Component on the TV. When changing channels, the picture freezes or is distorted or delayed. If the TV is connected to a cable box, try to reset the box. (Disconnect and then reconnect the AC cord and wait until the cable box reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes.) Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p.Sound (Troubleshooting) First, perform the Sound Test to determine if your TV audio is operating properly. (Go to Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis → Sound Test). If the audio is OK, the sound problem may be caused by the source or signal. There is no sound or the sound is too low at maximum volume. Please check the volume of the device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc.) connected to your TV. The picture is good but there is no sound. Set the Speaker Select option to TV Speaker in the Sound menu. If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option. (Ex. You may need to change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI if you have the box connected to your TV using an HDMI cable.) If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required. If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it. Reboot the connected device by disconnecting, and then reconnecting device’s power cable. The speakers are making an inappropriate noise.Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input. For antenna or cable connections, check the signal information. A low signal level may cause sound distortion. Perform the Sound Test feature. (Menu → Support → Self Diagnosis → Sound Test)3D (Troubleshooting) for LED 5500 Series : This function is not supported. The 3D Active Glasses are not working correctly Make sure the glasses are turned on. The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there is any other 3D product or electronic devices turned on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active Glasses. The 3D images don’t look quite right. The ideal viewing distance is three times or more the height of the screen. We also recommend sitting with viewer’s eyes on a level with the screen. The batteries in the 3D glasses don’t last Turn off 3D glasses while not using them. If you leave 3D glasses on, battery lifespan is shortened.Antenna (Air / Cable) Connection (Troubleshooting) The TV is not receiving all channels. Make sure the coaxial cable is connected securely. Run Auto Program to add available channels to the channel list. Go to Menu → Channel → Auto Program then select Start. Verify the antenna is positioned correctly. No caption on digital channels. Check the Caption Setup menu. Try changing Caption Mode. Some channels may not have caption data. The picture is distorted. The compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially with fast moving pictures such as sports and action movies. A weak signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV problem.PC Connection (Troubleshooting) A Mode Not Supported message appears. Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches a resolution supported by the TV. The video is OK but there is no audio. If you are using an HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on your PC.Network Connection (Troubleshooting) The wireless network connection failed. for LED 5500, 6350 Series, and PDP 550 Series You must attach the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the TV to use a wireless network. Make sure the TV is connected to a wireless IP sharer (router). Software Upgrade over the network fails.Run Network Status in Network menu to confirm the connection. If you have latest Software (SW) version, SW upgrade will not proceed.Others (Troubleshooting) The product is hot. Keeping the product turned on for an extended period of time causes the panel to generate heat. Because the heat from the panel is released via the vent located in the upper part of the product, some users may find that the upper part of the product is hot to the touch after the product has been in use for an extended period of time. Care should be taken. Adults must pay special attention to children to prevent them from touching the upper part of the product when the product is turned on. Heat generation does not mean that the product is defective or has a functional problem. The product can be used as normal. Purple/green rolling horizontal bars and buzzing noise from the TV speakers with a Component cable connection. Remove the left and right audio connections from the set-top-box. If the buzzing stops, this indicates that the set-top-box has a grounding issue. Replace the Component video cables with an HDMI connection. The picture won’t display in full screen. HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying up scaled SD (4:3) contents. Black bars will appear on the top and bottom of the screen when you watch movies that have aspect ratios different from your TV. Adjust the picture size options on your external device or the TV to full screen. A Mode Not Supported message appears. Check the supported resolution of the TV, and adjust the external device’s output resolution accordingly. Refer to the resolution settings on User manual. Caption on TV menu is grayed out. You cannot select the Caption menu if you have selected a source connected to the TV via HDMI or Component. The external device’s Caption function must also be activated.There is a plastic smell from the TV. This smell is normal and will dissipate over time. The TV Signal Information is unavailable in the Self Diagnosis menu. This function is only available for digital channels the TV receives from an Antenna / RF /Coax connection. The TV is tilted to the side.Remove the base stand from the TV and reassemble it. The channel menu is grayed out (unavailable). The Channel menu is only available when you select the TV source. Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or every time the TV is turned off. If the TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes. Change the settings from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode using the Setup procedure. Select TV in the Source using your remote, and go to Menu → System → Setup. You have intermittent loss of audio or video. Check the cable connections and reconnect them. Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are flexible enough for long term use. If mounting the TV to a wall, we recommend using cables with 90 degree connectors. You see small particles when you look closely at the edge of the frame of the TV. This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect. The PIP menu is not available.PIP functionality is only available when you are using an HDMI, or Component source. POP (TV’s internal banner ad) appears on the screen. Select Home Use under Setup mode. For details, refer to the Setup Feature. A cracking noise is heard from the product. The noise can be caused by the mechanical contraction or expansion of the TV exterior. It does not mean the product is damaged. Noise is continuously generated by the product. Since a TV uses a high-speed switching circuit and a lot of current, the noise from the product is not a problem. The noise level changes according to the screen brightness and the noise may be louder than a conventional CRT TV. The noise is managed on the basis of the company's strict management standards and this does not affect the performance or reliability of the product. Please note that some degree of noise is due to the inherent characteristics of a product and this will not be accepted as a reason for an exchange or refund of the product.Image Retention (Burn In) Issue. for PDP TV To minimize the possibility of screen burn, this unit is equipped with Pixel Shift screen burn reduction technology. Pixel Shift lets you set the picture so it moves slightly up and down (Vertical Line) and side to side (Horizontal Dot). The regular, slight movement of the picture reduces screen burn in.Timer Recording / Timeshift Mode (Troubleshooting) A USB storage device is not recognized, or Device Format, Checking Device or Device Performance Test failed. Check that the USB storage device is compatible, referring to the user guide for the USB device. Check that the USB storage device is not locked.Check that the USB storage device was not formatted when it was connected to the PC. Format the USB storage device after connecting it to the TV. (The formatting may fail.) If Device Performance Test or formatting fails, the USB storage device is defective or the performance may be too low to be compatible. Replace the USB storage device.A message is displayed stating that the USB storage device should be formatted. Check that the USB storage device is not locked. Recover the USB storage device using the USB recovery function The Timer Recording function is not available. Check that the USB storage device is connected.Check that the channel of the program you want to record is a recordable digital channel. The recording function will automatically stop if the broadcast signal is weak or is not detected. The Timeshift mode will not activate if the remaining space on the USB storage device is insufficient. A message is displayed stating that the performance test failed, and the Timer Recording or Timeshift function is not available. This problem occurs when a lowperformance USB storage device that does not support the recording function is used. It is recommended that you use a USB HDD storage device. It is best to use a USB HDD storage device with a speed of at least 5,400 rpm or higher. However, RAID-type USB HDD storage devices are not compatible.Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Troubleshooting) Anynet+ does not work. Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only. You can connect only one receiver (home theater). Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected. Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI cable connections. Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu. Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode. Check whether the remote control is Anynet+ compatible. Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels, operating Smart Hub or Setup, etc.) If you have removed and then reconnected the HDMI cable, please make sure to search devices again or turn your TV off and on again. I want to start Anynet+. Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. (Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)) Open the Tools menu using your remote and then select Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC). Then select a menu you want. I want to exit Anynet+. Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu. Go to Source screen using your remote and select a non-Anynet+ device. The message Connecting to Anynet+ device ... appears on the screen. You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view mode. Use the remote control after the TV has completed Anynet+ configuration or has finished switching to Anynet+. The Anynet+ device does not play. You cannot use the play function when Setup is in progress. The connected device is not displayed. Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions. Check whether or not the HDMI cable is properly connected. Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On. (Menu → System → Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)) Search Anynet+ devices again. Anynet+ requires an HDMI connection. Make sure the device is connected to your TV with an HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions. If the connection is terminated because there has been a power failure or the HDMI cable has been disconnected, please repeat the device scan. The TV sound is not output through the receiver. Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver. The ARC function enables digital output of sound using the HDMI IN 2(ARC) port and can only be operated when the TV is connected to an audio receiver that supports the ARC function.AllShare Play (Troubleshooting) This file may not be playable properly. This may appear because of high bit rate of content. Content generally will play but could experience some playability issue.Smart Hub (Troubleshooting) Some application contents only appear in English. How can I change the language? The Application content language may be different from the application user interface language. The ability to change the language depends on the service provider. Some application services do not work.Check with the service provider. Refer to the help website for application service provider information. When a network error occurs, I can only use the setting menu. If network connection doesn’t work, your service might be limited, as all functions except the setting menu are needed to connect to the internet.Web Browser (Troubleshooting) 1. To open Web Browser, select Web Browser in the Smart Hub. The Web Browser may be displayed differently with PC. 2. The Web Browser is not compatible with a Java application. 3. When attempted to download a file, but the file could not be saved and an error message appeared. 4. Access may be blocked to some websites or to web browsers operated by certain businesses. 5. Playback of Flash video may be restricted. 6. E-commerce, for purchasing products online, is not supported. 7. Scrolling a web page that allows only part (and not the whole) of the page to be scrolled may cause corrupted characters. 8. ActiveX is not supported.9. Some options cannot be accessed in Tab mode. (To access such options, switch to Pointer mode.) 10. Some text may appear corrupted because the number of supported fonts is limited. 11. The response to a command on the remote or the screen display may be delayed temporarily if a web page is currently loading. 12. The loading of a web page may delay or stop with some operating systems. 13. Copy and Paste are not supported. 14.When writing emails or posting messages, some functions (Such as changing the size or colors.) may not be supported. 15. The number of bookmarks and logs that can be saved is limited. 16. The maximum number of windows that can open at the same time may vary depending on the browsing condition or TV model. 17. The web browsing speed depends on the network conditions. 18. PIP will automatically be deactivated if a video is played in the browser. Videos may not commence playback after PIP interruption and a possible refresh for the page may be required. 19. The Web Browser can play MP3 audio files only. 20. The function for importing or exporting bookmarks is compatible with bookmark files in a particular file format only. (Compatible format: Netscape-bookmarkfile- 1) 21.When you import or export the bookmark, the folder tree is not included. 22. If you export the bookmark file to an USB device connected to the TV, the bookmark file will be saved in "Samsung SmartTV Bookmark" folder.23. If the time is not set in the menu (Menu → System → Time → Clock), the history information may not be saved. 24. Visited web site history is saved in chronological order and It will be removed from the list according to oldest page accessed. 25. Some video or audio content may not play during Flash playback depending on the video/audio codec supported.26. A sudden change in the picture brightness inside the video window may affect the brightness of the surrounding stationary picture. for PDP TV 27. If you use QWERTY keyboard screen when you use Web Browser with PIP function, the PIP function turns off automatically except inputting a URL address.Supported Subtitle and AllShare Play file formats Subtitle External – MPEG-4 timed text (.ttxt) – SAMI (.smi) – SubRip (.srt) – SubViewer (.sub) – Micro DVD (.sub or .txt) – SubStation Alpha (.ssa)– Advanced SubStation Alpha (.ass) – Powerdivx (.psb) Internal – Xsub Container: AVI – SubStation Alpha Container: MKV – Advanced SubStation Alpha Container: MKV – SubRip Container: MKV– MPEG-4 timed text Container: MP4 Supported image resolutions File Extension Type Resolution *.jpg *.jpeg JPEG 15360 x 8640 *.png PNG 1920 x 1080 *.bmp BMP 1920 x 1080 *.mpo MPO 15360 x 8640Supported music file formats File Extension Type Codec Comments *.mp3 MPEG MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 *.m4a *.mpa *.aac MPEG4 AAC *.flac FLAC FLAC The Seek (jump) function is not supported. Supports up to 2 channel *.ogg OGG Vorbis Supports up to 2 channel *.wma WMA WMA WMA 9, 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channel and M2 profile (except LBR mode of M0).Video Codec File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution Frame rate (fps) Bit rate (Mbps) Bit rate (Mbps) *.avi *.mkv *.asf *.wmv *.mp4 *.3gp *.vro *.mpg *.mpeg *.ts *.tp *.trp *.mov *.flv *.vob *.svi *.m2ts *.mts *.divx AVI MKV ASF MP4 3GP VRO VOB PS TS DIVX 3.11/4.x/5.x/6.x 1920 x 1080 6 – 30 30 AC3 LPCM ADMPCM(IMA, MS) AAC HE-AAC WMA DD+ MPEG(MP3) DTS Core G.711(A-Law, μ-Law) MPEG4 SP/ASP H.264 BP/MP/HP Motion JPEG 640 x 480 8 Window Media Video v9 1920 x 1080 MPEG2 30 MPEG1 VP6 640 x 480 4 *.webm WebM VP8 1920 x 1080 6 - 30 8 Vorbis Other Restriction N Video content will not play, or not play correctly, if there is an error in the content or the container. N Sound or video may not work if the contents have a standard bit rate/ frame rate above the compatible Frame/sec listed in the table above. N If the Index Table is in error, the Seek (Jump) function is not supported. N When you play video over a network connection, the video may not be played smoothly. N The menu may take longer to appear if the video’s bit rate exceeds 10Mbps. N Some USB/digital camera devices may not be compatible with the player. Video decoder ● Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 ● H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 are not supported. ● For all Video codecs except VP8, VP6:– Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max – Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max ● GMC is not supported. ● Supports only SVAF Top/Bottom and Side by Side. Audio decoder ● WMA 9, 10 Pro supports up to 5.1 channel and M2 profile (except LBR mode of M0). ● WMA lossless audio is not supported.● If Vorbis is only in Webm container, supports up to 2 channel.Anti-theft Kensington Lock A Kensington Lock is a device you can use to physically fix your TV in place when using it in a public place. You wrap the Kensington Lock’s cable around a large, immobile object and 1 2 then attach the lock to the Kensington slot on the back of the TV. The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration below depending on the manufacturer. Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for additional information on proper use. The Kensington Lock is not supplied by Samsung. N Please find a “K” icon on the rear of the TV. The Kensington slot is beside the “K” icon. To lock the product, follow these steps: 1. Wrap the Kensington Lock cable around a large, stationary object such as desk or chair. 2. Slide the end of the cable with the lock attached through the looped end of the Kensington Lock cable. 3. Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the product.4. Lock the lock. N These are general instructions. For exact instructions, see the User manual supplied with the locking device. N The locking device has to be purchased separately. N The location of the Kensington slot may be different depending on the TV model.License DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. TheaterSound HD, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS 2.0+Digital Out is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. ⓒ DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Open Source License Notice In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licenses are available on the product menu. Open Source License Notice is written only English. The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. Samsung Universal Print Driver Mode d’emploi imaginez les possibilitésCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés. Le présent guide administrateur n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation de ce guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver est une marque commerciale de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer et Windows Vista sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. • L’ensemble des autres marques, produits et noms d’entreprises peuvent être la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. REV. 1.00Table des matières_ 3 Table des matières COPYRIGHT/2 TABLE DES MATIÈRES/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle . . . . . 4 Configuration requise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLATION ET DÉSINSTALLATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 5 Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 6 UTILISATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . 7 Aperçu de la mise en page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Recherche des périphériques d’impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par adresse TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par le menu Rechercher maintenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Création d’un dossier de favoris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 INDEX/15Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est un pilote unique pouvant être utilisé avec différents modèles d’imprimantes. Cela permet aux utilisateurs d’accéder directement non seulement aux périphériques d’impression Samsung, mais également à une gamme de périphériques d’autres fournisseurs sans avoir à télécharger de pilotes séparés. • PDL signifie PCL et PS. • Samsung ne garantit pas la qualité des périphériques d’impression d’autres fournisseurs et des modèles Samsung non pris en charge (Cliquez sur pour consulter la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge). Pour les modèles Samsung non pris en charge, le pilote est automatiquement défini sur PDL par défaut utilisable. Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle Le tableau suivant montre les différences entre le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver et les pilotes de produits spécifiques : Configuration requise La configuration minimale requise pour le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est la suivante : SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER PILOTES SPÉCIFIQUES À UN MODÈLE Interface utilisateur Interface utilisateur cohérente. Interface utilisateur incohérente. Installation • Téléchargez et installez le ficher d’installation fourni avec le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Installez en exécutant le fichier d’installation. • Localisez, téléchargez et installez manuellement le pilote pour chaque périphérique. • Installez via l’exécution automatique du CD ou via l’assistant Installation d’imprimante. Découverte de périphériques Localisez facilement et accédez aux périphériques suggérés parmi l’ensemble des produits d’impression Samsung. Découvrez manuellement les périphériques. Disponibilité Disponible sur le site Web Samsung. Disponible sur le CD fourni avec le produit, ou avec le pilote spécifique du produit. SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATION CONFIGURATION REQUISE PROCESSEUR RAM ESPACE LIBRE SUR LE DISQUE DUR Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 Go 40 Go Windows XP 300 MHz ou supérieur 128 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 1,5 Go ou supérieur (1,8 Go supplémentaires pour SP2 et 900 Mo pour SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 Mo 2 Go Windows Server 2003 550 MHz ou supérieur 256 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 2,9 Go ou supérieur Windows Server 2008 2 GHz ou plus rapide 2 Go de RAM ou supérieur 40 Go ou supérieurInstallation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Ce chapitre vous guide pas à pas dans la procédure d’installation et de désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Les fenêtres suivantes s’appliquent à un pilote PCL dans Windows XP. Les fenêtres peuvent varier pour un pilote PS, mais les étapes sont les mêmes. Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Avant d’installer le pilote, vérifiez la configuration minimale requise pour votre système (Voir « Configuration requise » à la page 4). 1. Ouvrez un navigateur Web et visitez www.samsung.com. 2. Recherchez le fichier d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Lancez le fichier d’installation. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Suivant. Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante. Une fois la fenêtre d’installation ouverte, attendez que l’installation se termine.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 5. Quand la fenêtre Installation terminée s’ouvre, cliquez sur Terminer. Pour vous inscrire en tant qu’utilisateur de périphériques Samsung et recevoir des informations du fabricant, cochez cette case et cliquez sur Terminer. Si le pilote est installé correctement, vous pouvez trouver le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans le dossier Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Si vous voulez désinstaller le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez > Tous les programmes > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 2. Sélectionnez Supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Sélectionnez les composants à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Lorsqu’un message de confirmation s’affiche, cliquez sur Oui. 5. Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Terminer. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Le principal objectif du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est d’installer un pilote (Samsung Universal Print Driver) et de l’utiliser avec différents périphériques d’impression. Toutefois, le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dispose d’autres fonctions, comme la recherche de périphériques d’impression, la création d’un dossier de favoris et la vérification de l’état d’un périphérique. Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. Si aucune imprimante n’a été utilisée récemment, une fenêtre indépendante vous demandant de rechercher des imprimantes s’ouvre. Cliquez sur OK pour rechercher les imprimantes connectées. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Aperçu de la mise en page 1 Barre de mise en page Inclut les options d’affichage. • : Sélectionne la mise en page de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . Si vous choisissez Mise en page2 et que le programme Samsung Smart Panel est installé, vous pouvez voir la fenêtre d’état (numéro 4). • : Actualise toutes les informations relatives à l’imprimante dans la liste. • : Sélectionne le type de vue pour la liste des imprimantes. Vue détaillée affiche les informations relatives à l’imprimante, comme son Adresse, son Emplacement, son État et son Nom système. Vue image affiche également les informations relatives à l’imprimante, sauf dans le cas d’une image d’imprimante plus grande. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Affiche la liste des imprimantes par groupes. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Recherche une imprimante dans la liste en fonction d’un mot clé, comme un nom de modèle. • : Ouvre la fenêtre d’aide. • : Affiche des informations relatives au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 2 Menus principaux • Récent - Imprimantes récemment utilisées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment utilisées. L’imprimante utilisée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. - Imprimantes récemment recherchées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment trouvées. L’imprimante trouvée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. • Recherche - Rechercher maintenant : Recherche les imprimantes connectées via USB ou via le réseau. - Rechercher par adresse : Recherche une imprimante en fonction de son adresse IP. • Mon imprimante - Créer un dossier favori : Crée un dossier d’imprimantes favorites. • Paramètres : Affiche les options pour les fenêtres indépendantes et les recherches. 3 Liste des imprimantes Affiche la liste des imprimantes. 4 Fenêtre d’état Affiche l’état de l’imprimante sélectionnée dans la liste. Vous devez sélectionner Mise en page2 et installer le programme Samsung Smart Panel pour voir cette fenêtre. • Mettre à jour maintenant : Met à jour les informations de l’imprimante sélectionnée. • Achat de fournitures : Ouvre le site Web d’achat de fournitures. • Guide de dépannage : Ouvre le chapitre de dépannage du mode d’emploi. Vous devez installer le programme Smart Panel du modèle que vous utilisez pour voir le guide de dépannage. • Paramètres de l’imprimante : Ouvre le Service Web SyncThru, qui propose des options de configuration et de gestion de votre imprimante. Vous ne pouvez utiliser cette option qu’avec des imprimantes réseau. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante Vous pouvez configurer la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver pour qu’elle s’affiche lorsque vous réalisez une impression. Il existe quatre options pour l’affichage de cette fenêtre indépendante : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. La figure suivante montre un exemple d’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. • Lorsque l'interface du pilote apparaît: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche lorsque vous ouvrez une fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés). • A chaque impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche chaque fois que vous réalisez une impression. • Seulement lors de la première impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche uniquement la première fois que le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est sélectionné comme imprimante depuis une application. • Seulement lorsque la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver ne s’affiche que si la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante Pour configurer les options de recherche du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Rechercher et sélectionnez une des options suivantes. • Rechercher uniquement les imprimantes prises en charge: Recherche uniquement les imprimantes connectées prises en charge. Cliquez sur pour voir la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge. • Rechercher toutes les imprimantes: Recherche toutes les imprimantes connectées. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 Recherche des périphériques d’impression Par adresse TCP/IP Si vous connaissez l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous souhaitez utiliser, vous pouvez le rechercher en tapant son adresse TCP/IP. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher par adresse. Une fenêtre s’ouvre. 5. Tapez l’adresse TCP/IP de votre imprimante et cliquez sur OK. Par le menu Rechercher maintenant Si vous ne connaissez pas l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous voulez utiliser, vous pouvez utiliser l’option Rechercher maintenant pour rechercher le périphérique. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher maintenant. Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver recherche les périphériques d’impression connectés. Le résultat de la recherche peut varier en fonction de l’option de recherche que vous avez sélectionnée (Voir « Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante » à la page 11.)Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Création d’un dossier de favoris Pour des raisons pratiques, vous pouvez créer un dossier contenant les imprimantes que vous utilisez le plus souvent. Par exemple, si vous naviguez entre votre domicile et plusieurs sites de travail, vous pouvez créer deux dossiers d’imprimantes différents ; Domicile et Travail, puis gérer les imprimantes selon vos préférences. Pour créer un dossier de favoris, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur Créer un dossier favori. La fenêtre Ajouter un nouveau dossier de favoris s’ouvre. 2. Tapez un nom de dossier. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Un nouveau dossier est ajouté dans Mon imprimante. Pour ajouter des imprimantes à un dossier dans Mon imprimante, vous pouvez glisser-déposer le dossier ou cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris dans la liste et sélectionner Déplacer ou Copier. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 14 Aide Cliquez sur le bouton Aide ( ) en haut à droite de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Une fenêtre d’aide s’ouvre. Utilisez cette aide pour trouver les réponses à vos questions au sujet du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Impression de base Pour imprimer un document en utilisant le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : Les étapes suivantes montrent une impression à partir de Notepad. Les noms des menus peuvent varier en fonction de l’application que vous utilisez. 1. Ouvrez le fichier que vous souhaitez imprimer dans une application. 2. Dans la barre de menu, sélectionnez Fichier > Imprimer. 3. Sélectionnez le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans la liste des imprimantes. 4. Cliquez sur OK. L’impression démarre. Ou, en fonction de l’option de fenêtre indépendante (voir « Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante » à la page 10) que vous avez sélectionnée, la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver peut s’ouvrir avant l’impression. Sélectionnez l’imprimante que vous souhaitez utiliser et imprimez. Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés) s’ouvre. 4. Sélectionnez une autre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes ou en effectuant une recherche (Voir « Recherche des périphériques d’impression » à la page 12). 5. Cliquez sur OK. Toutes les impressions suivantes sont alors dirigées vers la nouvelle imprimante.Index_ 15 Index A accès 7 C configuration requise 4 copyright 2 D définition 10 fenêtre indépendante 10 option de recherche 11 désinstallation 6 différence 4 dossier 13 I impression 14 installation 5 introduction 4 M mise en page 8 R recherche bouton de recherche 12 TCPIP 12 U utilisation 7 Samsung Universal Print Driver User’s Guide imagine the possibilitiesCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This admin guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without any notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver is a trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd • Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. • All other brand, product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. REV. 1.00Contents_ 3 Contents COPYRIGHT/2 CONTENTS/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 USING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Layout overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the pop-up option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the printer search option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Searching print devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By TCP/IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By Search Now menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Creating a favorite folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Basic printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Changing the selected printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 INDEX/14Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction The Samsung Universal Print Driver is a single driver that can be used with different printer models. This gives users instant access to not only Samsung print devices but also a range of other vendor's PDL based devices without the need to download separate drivers. • PDL means both PCL and PS. • Samsung does not guarantee the quality of other vendors’ printer devices and Samsung models that are not supported (Click to see the supported Samsung device list). For unsupported Samsung models, driver is automatically set to usable default PDL. Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers The following table shows the differences between the Samsung Universal Print Driver and the product based drivers: System requirements Minimum system requirements for the Samsung Universal Print Driver are as follows: SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER MODEL SPECIFIC DRIVERS User interface Consistent user interface. Inconsistent user interface. Installation • Download and install with the installer file provided with the Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Install via executing the installer file. • Manually locate, download, and install driver for each device. • Install via CD autorun or Add printer wizard. Device discovery Easily locate and access suggested devices from the whole Samsung printer products. Manually discover devices. Availability Available on the Samsung web site. Available on the CD provided with the device, or the product based driver. OPERATING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS CPU RAM FREE HDD SPACE Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 GB 40 GB Windows XP 300 MHz or higher 128 MB RAM or higher 1.5 GB or higher (additional 1.8 GB in SP2 and additional 900 MB in SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 MB 2GB Windows Server 2003 550 MHz or higher 256 MB RAM or higher 2.9 GB or higher Windows Server 2008 2 GHz or faster 2 GB RAM or higher 40 GB or higherInstalling and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for installing and uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver. The following windows are for a PCL driver in Windows XP. Windows may differ for a PS driver, but the steps are the same. Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver Before installing the driver, check the recommended minimum requirements for your system (See "System requirements" on page 4). 1. Start a web browser and go to www.samsung.com. 2. Search for the Samsung Universal Print Driver setup file. 3. Start the setup file. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 4. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. After the installation window opens, wait for installation to be completed. 5. After the Setup Completed window opens, click Finish. If you want to register yourself as a user of Samsung devices in order to receive information from Samsung, select the Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 checkbox and click Finish. If the driver is installed properly, you can find the Samsung Universal Print Driver in the Printers and Faxes folder. Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver If you want to uninstall the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select > All Programs > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 2. Select Remove and click Next. 3. Select the components you want to remove and click Next. 4. A confirmation window appears, click Yes. 5. When unistallation is completed, click Finish. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver The main purpose of the Samsung Universal Print Driver is to install one driver (Samsung Universal Print Driver) and use it with different print devices. However, the Samsung Universal Print Driver has other features like searching print devices, creating a favorites folder, and checking a device’s status. Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. If there’s no recently used printer, a pop-up window asking you to search printers appears. Click OK to search connected printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Layout overview 1 Layout bar Includes displaying options. • : Selects the layout for the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. If you choose Layout2 and installed the Samsung Smart Panel program, you can see the status window(number 4). • : Refreshes all the printer information in the list. • : Selects the view type for the printer list. Detail View shows printer information such as Address, Location, Status and System name. Image View also shows printer information except with a larger printer image. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Displays the printer list in groups. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Searches for a printer in the list by a keyword like a model name. • : Opens the help window. • : Shows information about the Samsung Universal Print Driver.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings Setting the pop-up option You can set the Samsung Universal Print Driver window to appear when you print. There are four options for this window to pop-up: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. 2 Main menus • Recent - Recently Used Printers : Shows the list of recently used printers. The most recently used printer is at the top of the list. - Recently Searched Printers : Shows the list of recently found printers. The most recently found printer is at the top of the list. • Search - Search Now : Searches printers that are connected either by USB or network. - Search by Address : Searches for a printer by the printer’s IP address. • My Printer - Create a Favorite Folder : Creates a folder for favorite printers. • Settings : Displays options for pop-ups and searches. 3 Printer list Shows printer list. 4 Status window Shows status of the selected printer in the list. You need to select Layout2 and install the Samsung Smart Panel program to see this window. • Update Now : Updates the selected printer’s information. • Buy Supplies : Opens the website for buying supplies. • TroubleShooting Guide : Opens the troubleshooting chapter of the user’s guide. You need to install the Smart Panel of the model you are using to see the troubleshooting guide. • Printer Settings : Opens SyncThur Web Service, which provides options for configuring and managing your printer. You can only use this option with network printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 2. Click the Pop-up tab. A sample of Pop-up tab is shown in the following figure. • When driver UI appears: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears when you open a Printing Preferences (Properties) window. • Every time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears every time you print. • Only the first time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only for the first time when Samsung Universal Print Driver is selected as the printer from an application. • Only when the last printer used is not available: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only if the printer that was last used is not available. 3. Click OK. Setting the printer search option To set the search options for the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 2. Click the Search tab and select one of the following options. • Search only supported printer: Searches only supported printers connected. Click to see the supported Samsung device list • Search all the printers: Searches all connected printers. 3. Click OK. Searching print devices By TCP/IP address If you know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can search the device by typing the TCP/IP address. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. The Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search by Address. A window appears. 5. Type in the TCP/IP address of your printer and click OK. By Search Now menu If you don’t know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can use the Search Now option to search for the device. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search Now. Samsung Universal Print Driver searches the connected print devices. The search result might differ depending on the search option you have selected (See "Setting the printer search option" on page 10.) Creating a favorite folder You can create a folder with the printers you use the most for your convenience. For example, if you travel between home and work sites, you can create two different printer folders; Home and Work, and manage the printers as needed. To create a favorite folder, follow the steps below: Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 1. Click Create a Favorite Folder. Add new favorite folder window appears. 2. Type in a folder name. 3. Click OK. A new folder is added under My Printer. To add printers to a folder under My Printer, you can drag-and-drop the print from the list to the folder or right-click the printer in the list and select Move or Copy. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Help Click the Help button ( )in the upper right of the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. A help window appears. Use this help to answer your questions about using the Samsung Universal Print Driver. Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver Basic printing To print a document using Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: The following steps show printing from Notepad. Menu names might differ depending on the application you are using. 1. Open the file that you want to print in an application. 2. From the menu bar select File > Print. 3. Select the Samsung Universal Print Driver from the printer list. 4. Click OK. Printing begins. Or, depending on the pop-up option (see "Setting the pop-up option" on page9) you selected, the Samsung Universal Print Driver window might appear before printing. Choose the printer you want to use and print. Changing the selected printer 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Printing Preferences (Properties) window opens. 4. Select another printer either from the printer list or by searching (See "Searching print devices" on page 11). 5. Click OK. All subsequent printing will now be directed to the new printer.Index_ 14 Index A accessing 7 C copyright 2 D difference 4 F folder 11 I installing 5 introduction 4 L layout 8 P printing 13 S search search button 11 TCP/IP 11 setting 9 pop-up window 9 search option 10 system requirements 4 U uninstalling 6 using 7 Samsung Universal Print Driver User’s Guide imagine the possibilitiesCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This admin guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without any notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver is a trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd • Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. • All other brand, product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. REV. 1.00Contents_ 3 Contents COPYRIGHT/2 CONTENTS/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 USING THE SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Layout overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the pop-up option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Setting the printer search option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Searching print devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By TCP/IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 By Search Now menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Creating a favorite folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Basic printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Changing the selected printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 INDEX/14Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction The Samsung Universal Print Driver is a single driver that can be used with different printer models. This gives users instant access to not only Samsung print devices but also a range of other vendor's PDL based devices without the need to download separate drivers. • PDL means both PCL and PS. • Samsung does not guarantee the quality of other vendors’ printer devices and Samsung models that are not supported (Click to see the supported Samsung device list). For unsupported Samsung models, driver is automatically set to usable default PDL. Samsung Universal Print Driver vs. Model specific drivers The following table shows the differences between the Samsung Universal Print Driver and the product based drivers: System requirements Minimum system requirements for the Samsung Universal Print Driver are as follows: SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER MODEL SPECIFIC DRIVERS User interface Consistent user interface. Inconsistent user interface. Installation • Download and install with the installer file provided with the Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Install via executing the installer file. • Manually locate, download, and install driver for each device. • Install via CD autorun or Add printer wizard. Device discovery Easily locate and access suggested devices from the whole Samsung printer products. Manually discover devices. Availability Available on the Samsung web site. Available on the CD provided with the device, or the product based driver. OPERATING SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS CPU RAM FREE HDD SPACE Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 GB 40 GB Windows XP 300 MHz or higher 128 MB RAM or higher 1.5 GB or higher (additional 1.8 GB in SP2 and additional 900 MB in SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 MB 2GB Windows Server 2003 550 MHz or higher 256 MB RAM or higher 2.9 GB or higher Windows Server 2008 2 GHz or faster 2 GB RAM or higher 40 GB or higherInstalling and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for installing and uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver. The following windows are for a PCL driver in Windows XP. Windows may differ for a PS driver, but the steps are the same. Installing Samsung Universal Print Driver Before installing the driver, check the recommended minimum requirements for your system (See "System requirements" on page 4). 1. Start a web browser and go to www.samsung.com. 2. Search for the Samsung Universal Print Driver setup file. 3. Start the setup file. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 4. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. After the installation window opens, wait for installation to be completed. 5. After the Setup Completed window opens, click Finish. If you want to register yourself as a user of Samsung devices in order to receive information from Samsung, select the Installing and Uninstalling the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 checkbox and click Finish. If the driver is installed properly, you can find the Samsung Universal Print Driver in the Printers and Faxes folder. Uninstalling Samsung Universal Print Driver If you want to uninstall the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select > All Programs > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. The Samsung Universal Print Driver Installer Wizard opens. 2. Select Remove and click Next. 3. Select the components you want to remove and click Next. 4. A confirmation window appears, click Yes. 5. When unistallation is completed, click Finish. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver The main purpose of the Samsung Universal Print Driver is to install one driver (Samsung Universal Print Driver) and use it with different print devices. However, the Samsung Universal Print Driver has other features like searching print devices, creating a favorites folder, and checking a device’s status. Accessing the Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. If there’s no recently used printer, a pop-up window asking you to search printers appears. Click OK to search connected printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Layout overview 1 Layout bar Includes displaying options. • : Selects the layout for the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. If you choose Layout2 and installed the Samsung Smart Panel program, you can see the status window(number 4). • : Refreshes all the printer information in the list. • : Selects the view type for the printer list. Detail View shows printer information such as Address, Location, Status and System name. Image View also shows printer information except with a larger printer image. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Displays the printer list in groups. This option is only supported on Windows XP(and later). • : Searches for a printer in the list by a keyword like a model name. • : Opens the help window. • : Shows information about the Samsung Universal Print Driver.Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 Changing Samsung Universal Print Driver settings Setting the pop-up option You can set the Samsung Universal Print Driver window to appear when you print. There are four options for this window to pop-up: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. 2 Main menus • Recent - Recently Used Printers : Shows the list of recently used printers. The most recently used printer is at the top of the list. - Recently Searched Printers : Shows the list of recently found printers. The most recently found printer is at the top of the list. • Search - Search Now : Searches printers that are connected either by USB or network. - Search by Address : Searches for a printer by the printer’s IP address. • My Printer - Create a Favorite Folder : Creates a folder for favorite printers. • Settings : Displays options for pop-ups and searches. 3 Printer list Shows printer list. 4 Status window Shows status of the selected printer in the list. You need to select Layout2 and install the Samsung Smart Panel program to see this window. • Update Now : Updates the selected printer’s information. • Buy Supplies : Opens the website for buying supplies. • TroubleShooting Guide : Opens the troubleshooting chapter of the user’s guide. You need to install the Smart Panel of the model you are using to see the troubleshooting guide. • Printer Settings : Opens SyncThur Web Service, which provides options for configuring and managing your printer. You can only use this option with network printers. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 2. Click the Pop-up tab. A sample of Pop-up tab is shown in the following figure. • When driver UI appears: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears when you open a Printing Preferences (Properties) window. • Every time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears every time you print. • Only the first time you print: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only for the first time when Samsung Universal Print Driver is selected as the printer from an application. • Only when the last printer used is not available: The Samsung Universal Print Driver window appears only if the printer that was last used is not available. 3. Click OK. Setting the printer search option To set the search options for the Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: 1. Click the Settings button on the bottom left corner. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 2. Click the Search tab and select one of the following options. • Search only supported printer: Searches only supported printers connected. Click to see the supported Samsung device list • Search all the printers: Searches all connected printers. 3. Click OK. Searching print devices By TCP/IP address If you know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can search the device by typing the TCP/IP address. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. The Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search by Address. A window appears. 5. Type in the TCP/IP address of your printer and click OK. By Search Now menu If you don’t know the TCP/IP address of the print device you want to use, you can use the Search Now option to search for the device. Follow the steps below: 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Samsung Universal Print Driver window opens. 4. Click Search Now. Samsung Universal Print Driver searches the connected print devices. The search result might differ depending on the search option you have selected (See "Setting the printer search option" on page 10.) Creating a favorite folder You can create a folder with the printers you use the most for your convenience. For example, if you travel between home and work sites, you can create two different printer folders; Home and Work, and manage the printers as needed. To create a favorite folder, follow the steps below: Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 1. Click Create a Favorite Folder. Add new favorite folder window appears. 2. Type in a folder name. 3. Click OK. A new folder is added under My Printer. To add printers to a folder under My Printer, you can drag-and-drop the print from the list to the folder or right-click the printer in the list and select Move or Copy. Using the Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Help Click the Help button ( )in the upper right of the Samsung Universal Print Driver window. A help window appears. Use this help to answer your questions about using the Samsung Universal Print Driver. Printing with Samsung Universal Print Driver Basic printing To print a document using Samsung Universal Print Driver, follow the steps below: The following steps show printing from Notepad. Menu names might differ depending on the application you are using. 1. Open the file that you want to print in an application. 2. From the menu bar select File > Print. 3. Select the Samsung Universal Print Driver from the printer list. 4. Click OK. Printing begins. Or, depending on the pop-up option (see "Setting the pop-up option" on page9) you selected, the Samsung Universal Print Driver window might appear before printing. Choose the printer you want to use and print. Changing the selected printer 1. From the Windows Start menu, select Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Click Printing Preferences or Properties. Printing Preferences (Properties) window opens. 4. Select another printer either from the printer list or by searching (See "Searching print devices" on page 11). 5. Click OK. All subsequent printing will now be directed to the new printer.Index_ 14 Index A accessing 7 C copyright 2 D difference 4 F folder 11 I installing 5 introduction 4 L layout 8 P printing 13 S search search button 11 TCP/IP 11 setting 9 pop-up window 9 search option 10 system requirements 4 U uninstalling 6 using 7 Samsung Universal Print Driver Mode d’emploi imaginez les possibilitésCopyright_ 2 Copyright © 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés. Le présent guide administrateur n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation de ce guide. • Samsung Universal Print Driver est une marque commerciale de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Internet Explorer et Windows Vista sont des marques déposées ou des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d’autres pays. • L’ensemble des autres marques, produits et noms d’entreprises peuvent être la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. REV. 1.00Table des matières_ 3 Table des matières COPYRIGHT/2 TABLE DES MATIÈRES/3 INTRODUCTION Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle . . . . . 4 Configuration requise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 INSTALLATION ET DÉSINSTALLATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 5 Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 6 UTILISATION DU PILOTE D’IMPRESSION UNIVERSEL SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . 7 Aperçu de la mise en page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Recherche des périphériques d’impression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par adresse TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Par le menu Rechercher maintenant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Création d’un dossier de favoris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Impression de base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 INDEX/15Introduction_ 4 1.Introduction Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est un pilote unique pouvant être utilisé avec différents modèles d’imprimantes. Cela permet aux utilisateurs d’accéder directement non seulement aux périphériques d’impression Samsung, mais également à une gamme de périphériques d’autres fournisseurs sans avoir à télécharger de pilotes séparés. • PDL signifie PCL et PS. • Samsung ne garantit pas la qualité des périphériques d’impression d’autres fournisseurs et des modèles Samsung non pris en charge (Cliquez sur pour consulter la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge). Pour les modèles Samsung non pris en charge, le pilote est automatiquement défini sur PDL par défaut utilisable. Samsung Universal Print Driver contre pilotes spécifiques à un modèle Le tableau suivant montre les différences entre le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver et les pilotes de produits spécifiques : Configuration requise La configuration minimale requise pour le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est la suivante : SAMSUNG UNIVERSAL PRINT DRIVER PILOTES SPÉCIFIQUES À UN MODÈLE Interface utilisateur Interface utilisateur cohérente. Interface utilisateur incohérente. Installation • Téléchargez et installez le ficher d’installation fourni avec le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. • Installez en exécutant le fichier d’installation. • Localisez, téléchargez et installez manuellement le pilote pour chaque périphérique. • Installez via l’exécution automatique du CD ou via l’assistant Installation d’imprimante. Découverte de périphériques Localisez facilement et accédez aux périphériques suggérés parmi l’ensemble des produits d’impression Samsung. Découvrez manuellement les périphériques. Disponibilité Disponible sur le site Web Samsung. Disponible sur le CD fourni avec le produit, ou avec le pilote spécifique du produit. SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATION CONFIGURATION REQUISE PROCESSEUR RAM ESPACE LIBRE SUR LE DISQUE DUR Windows Vista 1 GHz 1 Go 40 Go Windows XP 300 MHz ou supérieur 128 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 1,5 Go ou supérieur (1,8 Go supplémentaires pour SP2 et 900 Mo pour SP3 Windows 2000 133 Mhz 64 Mo 2 Go Windows Server 2003 550 MHz ou supérieur 256 Mo de RAM ou supérieur 2,9 Go ou supérieur Windows Server 2008 2 GHz ou plus rapide 2 Go de RAM ou supérieur 40 Go ou supérieurInstallation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 5 2.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Ce chapitre vous guide pas à pas dans la procédure d’installation et de désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Les fenêtres suivantes s’appliquent à un pilote PCL dans Windows XP. Les fenêtres peuvent varier pour un pilote PS, mais les étapes sont les mêmes. Installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Avant d’installer le pilote, vérifiez la configuration minimale requise pour votre système (Voir « Configuration requise » à la page 4). 1. Ouvrez un navigateur Web et visitez www.samsung.com. 2. Recherchez le fichier d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Lancez le fichier d’installation. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Suivant. Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante. Une fois la fenêtre d’installation ouverte, attendez que l’installation se termine.Installation et désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 6 5. Quand la fenêtre Installation terminée s’ouvre, cliquez sur Terminer. Pour vous inscrire en tant qu’utilisateur de périphériques Samsung et recevoir des informations du fabricant, cochez cette case et cliquez sur Terminer. Si le pilote est installé correctement, vous pouvez trouver le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans le dossier Imprimantes et télécopieurs. Désinstallation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Si vous voulez désinstaller le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez > Tous les programmes > Samsung Universal Print Driver > Maintenance. L’assistant d’installation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 2. Sélectionnez Supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Sélectionnez les composants à supprimer, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 4. Lorsqu’un message de confirmation s’affiche, cliquez sur Oui. 5. Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Terminer. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 7 3.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Le principal objectif du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est d’installer un pilote (Samsung Universal Print Driver) et de l’utiliser avec différents périphériques d’impression. Toutefois, le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dispose d’autres fonctions, comme la recherche de périphériques d’impression, la création d’un dossier de favoris et la vérification de l’état d’un périphérique. Accès au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. Si aucune imprimante n’a été utilisée récemment, une fenêtre indépendante vous demandant de rechercher des imprimantes s’ouvre. Cliquez sur OK pour rechercher les imprimantes connectées. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 8 Aperçu de la mise en page 1 Barre de mise en page Inclut les options d’affichage. • : Sélectionne la mise en page de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver . Si vous choisissez Mise en page2 et que le programme Samsung Smart Panel est installé, vous pouvez voir la fenêtre d’état (numéro 4). • : Actualise toutes les informations relatives à l’imprimante dans la liste. • : Sélectionne le type de vue pour la liste des imprimantes. Vue détaillée affiche les informations relatives à l’imprimante, comme son Adresse, son Emplacement, son État et son Nom système. Vue image affiche également les informations relatives à l’imprimante, sauf dans le cas d’une image d’imprimante plus grande. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Affiche la liste des imprimantes par groupes. Cette option n’est prise en charge que sous Windows XP (et ultérieur). • : Recherche une imprimante dans la liste en fonction d’un mot clé, comme un nom de modèle. • : Ouvre la fenêtre d’aide. • : Affiche des informations relatives au pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver.Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 9 2 Menus principaux • Récent - Imprimantes récemment utilisées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment utilisées. L’imprimante utilisée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. - Imprimantes récemment recherchées : Affiche la liste des imprimantes récemment trouvées. L’imprimante trouvée le plus récemment est en haut de la liste. • Recherche - Rechercher maintenant : Recherche les imprimantes connectées via USB ou via le réseau. - Rechercher par adresse : Recherche une imprimante en fonction de son adresse IP. • Mon imprimante - Créer un dossier favori : Crée un dossier d’imprimantes favorites. • Paramètres : Affiche les options pour les fenêtres indépendantes et les recherches. 3 Liste des imprimantes Affiche la liste des imprimantes. 4 Fenêtre d’état Affiche l’état de l’imprimante sélectionnée dans la liste. Vous devez sélectionner Mise en page2 et installer le programme Samsung Smart Panel pour voir cette fenêtre. • Mettre à jour maintenant : Met à jour les informations de l’imprimante sélectionnée. • Achat de fournitures : Ouvre le site Web d’achat de fournitures. • Guide de dépannage : Ouvre le chapitre de dépannage du mode d’emploi. Vous devez installer le programme Smart Panel du modèle que vous utilisez pour voir le guide de dépannage. • Paramètres de l’imprimante : Ouvre le Service Web SyncThru, qui propose des options de configuration et de gestion de votre imprimante. Vous ne pouvez utiliser cette option qu’avec des imprimantes réseau. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 10 Modification des paramètres du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante Vous pouvez configurer la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver pour qu’elle s’affiche lorsque vous réalisez une impression. Il existe quatre options pour l’affichage de cette fenêtre indépendante : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. La figure suivante montre un exemple d’onglet Fenêtre contextuelle. • Lorsque l'interface du pilote apparaît: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche lorsque vous ouvrez une fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés). • A chaque impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche chaque fois que vous réalisez une impression. • Seulement lors de la première impression: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’affiche uniquement la première fois que le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver est sélectionné comme imprimante depuis une application. • Seulement lorsque la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible: La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver ne s’affiche que si la dernière imprimante utilisée n’est pas disponible. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 11 Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante Pour configurer les options de recherche du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Paramètres dans le coin inférieur gauche. 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Rechercher et sélectionnez une des options suivantes. • Rechercher uniquement les imprimantes prises en charge: Recherche uniquement les imprimantes connectées prises en charge. Cliquez sur pour voir la liste des périphériques Samsung pris en charge. • Rechercher toutes les imprimantes: Recherche toutes les imprimantes connectées. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 12 Recherche des périphériques d’impression Par adresse TCP/IP Si vous connaissez l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous souhaitez utiliser, vous pouvez le rechercher en tapant son adresse TCP/IP. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher par adresse. Une fenêtre s’ouvre. 5. Tapez l’adresse TCP/IP de votre imprimante et cliquez sur OK. Par le menu Rechercher maintenant Si vous ne connaissez pas l’adresse TCP/IP du périphérique d’impression que vous voulez utiliser, vous pouvez utiliser l’option Rechercher maintenant pour rechercher le périphérique. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous : 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver s’ouvre. 4. Cliquez sur Rechercher maintenant. Le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver recherche les périphériques d’impression connectés. Le résultat de la recherche peut varier en fonction de l’option de recherche que vous avez sélectionnée (Voir « Configuration de l’option de recherche de l’imprimante » à la page 11.)Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 13 Création d’un dossier de favoris Pour des raisons pratiques, vous pouvez créer un dossier contenant les imprimantes que vous utilisez le plus souvent. Par exemple, si vous naviguez entre votre domicile et plusieurs sites de travail, vous pouvez créer deux dossiers d’imprimantes différents ; Domicile et Travail, puis gérer les imprimantes selon vos préférences. Pour créer un dossier de favoris, suivez les étapes suivantes : 1. Cliquez sur Créer un dossier favori. La fenêtre Ajouter un nouveau dossier de favoris s’ouvre. 2. Tapez un nom de dossier. 3. Cliquez sur OK. Un nouveau dossier est ajouté dans Mon imprimante. Pour ajouter des imprimantes à un dossier dans Mon imprimante, vous pouvez glisser-déposer le dossier ou cliquer avec le bouton droit de la souris dans la liste et sélectionner Déplacer ou Copier. Utilisation du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver_ 14 Aide Cliquez sur le bouton Aide ( ) en haut à droite de la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Une fenêtre d’aide s’ouvre. Utilisez cette aide pour trouver les réponses à vos questions au sujet du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. Impression à l’aide du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver Impression de base Pour imprimer un document en utilisant le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver, suivez les étapes suivantes : Les étapes suivantes montrent une impression à partir de Notepad. Les noms des menus peuvent varier en fonction de l’application que vous utilisez. 1. Ouvrez le fichier que vous souhaitez imprimer dans une application. 2. Dans la barre de menu, sélectionnez Fichier > Imprimer. 3. Sélectionnez le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver dans la liste des imprimantes. 4. Cliquez sur OK. L’impression démarre. Ou, en fonction de l’option de fenêtre indépendante (voir « Configuration de l’option de fenêtre indépendante » à la page 10) que vous avez sélectionnée, la fenêtre du pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver peut s’ouvrir avant l’impression. Sélectionnez l’imprimante que vous souhaitez utiliser et imprimez. Changement de l’imprimante sélectionnée 1. Dans le menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 2. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le pilote d’impression universel Samsung Universal Print Driver. 3. Cliquez sur Options d’impression ou sur Propriétés. La fenêtre Options d’impression (Propriétés) s’ouvre. 4. Sélectionnez une autre imprimante dans la liste des imprimantes ou en effectuant une recherche (Voir « Recherche des périphériques d’impression » à la page 12). 5. Cliquez sur OK. Toutes les impressions suivantes sont alors dirigées vers la nouvelle imprimante.Index_ 15 Index A accès 7 C configuration requise 4 copyright 2 D définition 10 fenêtre indépendante 10 option de recherche 11 désinstallation 6 différence 4 dossier 13 I impression 14 installation 5 introduction 4 M mise en page 8 R recherche bouton de recherche 12 TCPIP 12 U utilisation 7 CLP-320 Series Color Laser Printer User’s Guide imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product. Copyright_ 2 copyright © 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice. Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide. • Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. • TrueType, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. • All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information. REV. 4.00Contents_ 3 contents 19 About this user’s guide 21 Features of your new product INTRODUCTION 23 23 Machine overview 23 Front view 24 Rear view 25 Control panel overview 26 Understanding the control panel 26 Status/ Toner LEDs 26 Wireless LED 26 Introducing the useful buttons 26 Print screen button 27 Demo print button 27 Cancel button 27 WPS button 27 Power button GETTING STARTED 28 28 Setting up the hardware 28 Location 28 Printing a demo page 28 Supplied software 29 System requirements 29 Microsoft® Windows® 29 Macintosh 30 Linux 30 Installing USB connected machine’s driver 30 Windows 31 Macintosh 32 Linux 33 Sharing your machine locally 33 Windows 33 Macintosh NETWORK SETUP (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W ONLY) 34 34 Network environment 34 Introducing useful network programs 34 SyncThru™ Web Service 34 SyncThru™ Web Admin Service 34 SetIP 34 Using a wired network 35 Printing network configuration report 35 Setting IP address 35 IPv4 configuration 36 IPv6 configuration 36 Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™ Web Service 37 Installing network connected machine’s driver 37 Windows 38 Macintosh 39 Linux WIRELESS NETWORK SETUP (CLP-325W(K)/326W ONLY) 40 40 Getting started 40 Choosing your network connection 40 Wireless network name and network key 40 Choosing the wireless network installation type 40 From the control panelcontents Contents_ 4 40 From the computer 40 Setting a wireless network with the WPS button 41 Setting a wireless network with the WPS button 41 Setting a wireless network from the computer 41 Setting a wireless network with USB cable 46 Setting a wireless network with network cable 48 Completing the installation 48 Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off 48 Troubleshooting 48 Solving problems that might occur during setting up the wireless setting and installing the machine driver 49 Solving other problems BASIC SETUP 50 50 Altitude adjustment 50 Setting the default tray and paper 50 From your computer 51 Using the power saving feature 51 Changing font setting (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ /CLP- 326W only) 51 Setting the humidity mode MEDIA AND TRAY 52 52 Selecting print media 52 Guidelines for selecting the print media 52 Media sizes supported in each mode 53 Changing the tray size 54 Loading paper in the tray 54 In the tray 55 Manual feeding in the tray 56 Printing on special media 57 Envelopes 57 Transparencies 57 Labels 58 Card stock/Custom-sized paper 58 Letterhead/Preprinted paper 58 Recycled paper 58 Glossy photo 58 Matte photo 58 Setting the paper size and type 58 Using the output support PRINTING 59 59 Introducing useful software program 59 Samsung AnyWeb Print 59 Samsung Easy Color Manager 59 Printer driver features 59 Printer driver 59 Basic printing 60 Canceling a print job 60 Opening printing preferences 60 Using a favorite setting 61 Using help 61 Using special print features 61 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper 61 Printing posters 61 Printing booklets (Manual)contents Contents_ 5 62 Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual) 62 Change percentage of your document 62 Fitting your document to a selected paper size 62 Using watermarks 63 Using overlay 63 Graphics tab options 64 Changing the default print settings 64 Setting your machine as a default machine 65 Printing to a file (PRN) 65 Macintosh printing 65 Printing a document 65 Changing printer settings 66 Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper 66 Linux printing 66 Printing from applications 67 Printing files 67 Configuring printer properties MANAGEMENT TOOLS 68 68 Introducing useful management tools 68 Using SyncThru™ Web Service 68 To access SyncThru™ Web Service 68 SyncThru™ Web Service overview 69 E-mail notification setup 69 Setting the system administrator information 69 Using the Smart Panel program 69 Understanding Smart Panel 70 Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings 70 Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator 70 Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 70 Printers configuration window 71 Ports configuration MAINTENANCE 72 72 Printing a machine report 72 Cleaning a machine 72 Cleaning the outside 72 Cleaning the inside 73 Storing the toner cartridge 73 Toner cartridge storage 74 Handling instructions 74 Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge 74 Estimated cartridge life 74 Tips for moving & storing your machine TROUBLESHOOTING 75 75 Redistributing toner 75 Tips for avoiding paper jams 76 Clearing paper jams 76 In the tray 76 Inside the machine 76 In the paper exit area 78 Solving other problems 78 System problems 78 Power problems 79 Paper feeding problems 80 Printing problems 81 Printing quality problemscontents Contents_ 6 84 Common Windows problems 84 Common Linux problems 85 Common Macintosh problems SUPPLIES 86 86 How to purchase 86 Available supplies 86 Maintenance parts 86 Replacing the toner cartridge 87 Replacing the imaging unit 89 Replacing the waste toner container SPECIFICATIONS 90 90 Hardware specifications 90 Environmental specifications 90 Electrical specifications 92 Print media specifications CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE 94 GLOSSARY 96 INDEX 102Safety information_ 7 safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others, and to prevent any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference. Important safety symbols This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of danger. Explanation of all icons and signs used in the User’s Guide: Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death. Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Do not attempt. Do not disassemble. Do not touch. Unplug the power cord from the wall socket. Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock. Call the service center for help. Follow directions explicitly. Operating environment Warning Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord. ► Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire. Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.). ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the plug with wet hands. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 8 Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not attempt to force it in. ► Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could result in electric shock. Be careful, the paper output area is hot. ► Burns could occur. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords. ► This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet. If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. Operating method Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing. ► It can cause damage to the machine. When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch. ► Burns can occur. Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray. ► You may get injured. When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects. ► It can damage the machine. Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening. ► This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire. Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray. ► It can damage the machine. Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper. ► New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts. This machine's power interception device is the power cord. ► To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet. If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Safety information_ 9 Installation / Moving Warning Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity or water leaks. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution Before moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all cords. Then lift the machine: • If the machine weighs under 20 kg (44.09lb), lift with 1 person. • If the machine weighs 20 kg (44.09lb) - 40kg (88.18lb), lift with 2 people. • If the machine weighs more than 40 kg (88.18lb), lift with 4 or more people. ► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location, such as a closet. ► If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire. Do not place the machine on an unstable surface. ► The machine could fall, causing injury or machine damage. Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label. ► If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using, contact the electrical utility company. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. ► This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or fire. Use only No.26 AWG a a. AWG: American Wire Gauge or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary. ► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (6 feet) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger. ► Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in electric shock or fire. Maintenance / Checking Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the machine. ► This could result in electric shock or fire. Keep cleaning supplies away from children. ► Children could get hurt.Safety information_ 10 Supply usage Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. ► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away from children. ► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit. ► This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire. Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the machine. ► In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service fee will be charged. When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper, be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes. ► Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested. When toner gets on your clothing, do not use hot water to wash it. ► Hot water sets toner into fabric. Use cold water. When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine. ► You could get injured. Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself. ► It can damage the machine. Call a certified technician when the machine needs repair. Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water. ► Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide provided with the machine. ► Otherwise, you could damage the machine. Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws. ► The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician.Regulatory information_ 11 regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements. Laser Safety Statement The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition. • Wavelenght: 800 nm • Beam divergence - Paraller: 12 degrees - Perpendicular: 30 degrees • Maximum power or energy output: 5 mW WARNING Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons: Ozone Safety During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area. If you need additional information about ozone, contact your local Samsung dealer.Regulatory information_ 12 Power Saver This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use. When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks. For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov. Recycling Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner. China only Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking shown on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. Radio Frequency Emissions FCC Information to the User This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • This device may not cause harmful interference, and • This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:Regulatory information_ 13 • Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. • Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help. Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Canadian Radio Interference Regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada. Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada. United states of america Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label. The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm (8 inches) separation between the device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities). This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on. The power output of the wireless device (or devices), which may be embedded in your printer, is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the FCC. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service. FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use: While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W/cm2 may be exceeded at distances close to the antenna installed. Therefore, the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times. This device cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna. Turkey only Russia onlyRegulatory information_ 14 Germany only Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only) Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover. Contact the people from you purchased the machine. The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug. If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away. You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket. Important warning: You must earth this machine. The wires in the mains lead have the following color code: • Green and Yellow: Earth • Blue: Neutral • Brown: Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following: You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green. You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black. You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red. You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board. Declaration of Conformity (European Countries) Approvals and Certifications The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated: CLP-320 Series: Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC), EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) CLP-325W(K): R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer (MFP) name to browse the EuDoC. January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment. January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility. March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.Regulatory information_ 15 European Radio Approval Information (for products fitted with EU-approved radio devices) Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system which is intended for home or office use. This section is only applicable if these devices are present. Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices. Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R&TTE directive. European States qualified under wireless approvals: EU Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France (with frequency restrictions), Germany, Greece, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, The Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden and the U.K. EEA/EFTA countries Iceland, Liechtenstein, Norway and Switzerland European States with restrictions on use: EU In France, the frequency range is restricted to 2446.5-2483.5 MHz for devices above 10 mW transmitting power such as wireless EEA/EFTA countries No limitations at this time Regulatory Compliance Statements Wireless Guidance Low power, Radio LAN type devices (radio frequency (RF) wireless communication devices), operating in the 2.4 GHz/5 GHz Band, may be present (embedded) in your printer system. The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device. Additional limitations, cautions, and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections (or country group sections). The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label. If the country you will be using the wireless device in, is not listed, contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements. Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed. The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time. Because the wireless devices (which may be embedded into your printer) emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use. Regardless of the power levels, care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation. As a general guideline, a separation of 20 cm (8 inches) between the wireless device and the body, for use of a wireless device near the body (this does not include extremities) is typical. This device should be used more than 20 cm (8 inches) from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting. This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices. Examples of common restrictions are listed below: Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft. Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane. IEEE 802.11 (also known as wireless Ethernet) and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication. In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful, the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated. Airports, Hospitals, and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated. When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices, ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device. Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices. Since your system is equipped with a wireless device, when traveling between countries with your system, check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country. If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device, do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled. Wireless devices are not user serviceable. Do not modify them in any way. Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it. Contact manufacturer for service.Regulatory information_ 16 OpenSSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)". 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without Prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)". THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related. 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)". THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used. See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit, or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information.Regulatory information_ 17 LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The licence and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence. China onlyRegulatory information_ 18About this user’s guide_ 19 about this user’s guide This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during actual usage. It is a valuable resource for both novice and professional users for the proper installation and use of the machine. •Read the safety information before using the machine. •If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter (See "Troubleshooting" on page 75). •Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter (See "Glossary" on page 96). •Illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. •The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP. Convention Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below. • Document is synonymous with original. • Paper is synonymous with media or print media. • Machine refers to printer or MFP. The following table offers the conventions of this guide. Convention Description Example Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Cancel Note Provides additional information or details for the machine function and feature. The date format may differ from country to country. Caution Contains information you can use to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction. Do not touch the surface of the drum located in the toner cartridge or imaging unit. Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute (“Cross-reference”) Refers you to additional detailed information. (See "Finding more information" on page 20)About this user’s guide_ 20 Finding more information You can find information about setting up and using your machine in the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen. Material name Description Quick Installation Guide This guide provides information on setting up your machine. This guide is provided in the box with the printer. User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, maintaining your machine, troubleshooting, and replacing supplies. Machine Driver Help This help provides you with help information about the printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing (See "Using help" on page 61). Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, machine drivers, manuals and order information from the Samsung website, www.samsung.com/printer. Downloadable software You can download useful software programs from the Samsung website. • SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: convenient for network administrators who need to manage many machines simultaneously. This program is for network model only. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com) • Samsung AnyWeb Print: helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer easily. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint) • Samsung Easy Color Manager: helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager)Features of your new product_ 21 features of your new product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print. Special Features Print with excellent quality and speed • You can print in a full range of colors using cyan, magenta, yellow and black. • You can print with a resolution of up to 2400 x 600 dpi effective output. • Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 16 ppm and Letter-sized paper at up to 17 ppm in black and white mode and 4 ppm in color mode. Handle many different types of printable material • The tray holds up to 150 sheet of plain paper in various sizes. • You can load different custom-size print media in the tray. Create professional documents (Windows only) • Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with words such as “Confidential” (See "Using watermarks" on page 62). • Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster (See "Printing posters" on page 61). • You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper (See "Using overlay" on page 63). Save time and money • To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 61). • This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use. • To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (Manual) (See "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)" on page 62). Print in various environments • You can print with Windows as well as Linux and Macintosh OS systems. • Your machine is equipped with a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. • Your machine comes with a built-in network interface, Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) • Your machine comes with a built-in network Interface 802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN. (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) IPv6 (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) The machine supports IPv6 (See "IPv6 configuration" on page 36).Features of your new product_ 22 Features by models The machines are designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions for your business. Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on models or countries. Features by models include: FEATURES CLP-320(K) CLP-321 CLP-325(K) CLP-326 CLP-320N(K) CLP-321N CLP-325W(K) CLP-326W Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ● ● ● Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX wired LAN ● ● Network Interface 802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN a a.Depending on your country, wireless LAN cards may not be available. Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your printer. ● Duplex (2-sided) printing (Manual) ● ● ● ( ●: Included, Blank: Not available) Introduction_ 23 1.introduction This chapter gives you an overview of your machine. This chapter includes: • Machine overview • Control panel overview • Understanding the control panel Machine overview Front view 1 2 31 5 7 6 8 9 10 4 This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Output tray (face down) 6 Front cover 2 Output support 7 Front cover release button 3 Top cover 8 Toner cartridges 4 Control panel 9 Waster toner container 5 Tray 10 Imaging unitIntroduction_ 24 Rear view 1 3 5 4 2 This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Rear cover release button 4 USB port 2 Rear cover 5 Network port a a.CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N only. 3 Power receptacleIntroduction_ 25 Control panel overview This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 [1] CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/ CLP-326/CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N 1 Toner LEDs Shows the status of each toner cartridge (See "Status/ Toner LEDs" on page 26). 2 Power button You can turn the power on and off with this button (See "Power button" on page 27). 3 Cancel button Stops an operation at any time and there are more functions (See "Cancel button" on page 27). 4 Status LED Shows the status of your machine (See "Status/ Toner LEDs" on page 26). 5 Print Screen a a.CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/ CLP-326 only. Prints the displayed screen of your monitor (See "Print screen button" on page 26). Demo Print b b.CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N only. Prints a demo page (See "Demo print button" on page 27). [2] CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W 1 Toner LEDs Shows the status of each toner cartridge (See "Status/ Toner LEDs" on page 26). 2 Power button You can turn the power on and off with this button (See "Power button" on page 27). 3 Cancel button Stops an operation at any time and there are more functions (See "Cancel button" on page 27). 4 Status LED Shows the status of your machine (See "Status/ Toner LEDs" on page 26). 5 Wireless LED Shows the status of wireless network. When the LED on, the machine is connected wirelessly (See "Wireless LED" on page 26). 6 WPS button If your wireless access point supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™), you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer (See "Setting a wireless network with the WPS button" on page 41).Introduction_ 26 Understanding the control panel Status/ Toner LEDs The color of the LEDs indicates the machine's current status. LED Status Toner LEDs Description Online/E rror ( ) Off All LEDs off The machine is off-line. Solid green All LEDs off The machine is online and can receive data from a computer. Slowly blinking green All LEDs off When the Status LED blinks green slowly, the machine is receiving data from a computer. Quickly blinking green All LEDs off When the Status LED blinks green quickly, the machine is printing data. Solid green Correspondi ng LED blinks red Each toner cartridge is near the end of its life. Correspondi ng LED blinks red successively The machine is warming up. Solid red All LEDs off • The cover is open. Close the cover. • There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray. • The machine has stopped due to a major error. • The machine is experiencing system problems requiring service, such as LSU error, fuser error, or ITB error. Contact the service representative. Correspondi ng LED is solid red • A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life a a.Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19798. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, graphics, media type and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops printing. . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). • The machine cannot recognize the status of toner cartriges and the supplies information. Open and close the cover and check if the machie can operate properly. If the problem persists, turn the power off and on. Blinks red Correspondi ng LED is solid red • A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. • A small amount of toner is left in the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life a of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner in the cartridge (See "Redistributing toner" on page 75). Jam ( ) Lights orange All LEDs off A paper jam has occurred (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 76). Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as one that is refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee a non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. All printing errors will be appear in the Smart Panel program window. If the problem persists, call for service (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). Wireless LED Wireless LED status Description Blue Off ( ) Wireless network is disconnected. On ( ) Wireless network is connected. Slowly blinks ( ) The machine starts connecting to a wireless network. Quickly blinks ( ) • The machine is connecting to access point (or wireless router). • Wireless network connection is being disconnected. Introducing the useful buttons Print screen button (CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/ CLP-326 only) By pressing the Print screen ( ) button, you can do the following functions. LED Status Toner LEDs DescriptionFunction Description Printing the active window Press this button and the green LED will start blinking. When the green LED stops blinking, release the button. Printing the whole monitor screen Press this button and the green LED will start blinking. Release the button while it’s blinking. Introduction_ 27 •The page will be printed on the default page like A4 or Letter. •You can only use this function with a USB-connected machine. •Print screen can only be used with Windows and Macintosh operating systems. •You can use this function only when the Smart Panel program is installed. Demo print button (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N only) It prints a demo page by pressing this button only. The printed page shows the color print quality potential and overall print characteristics of the machine. Cancel button By pressing the Cancel ( ) button, you can do the following functions. Function Description Printing demo page (CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W only) In ready mode, press and hold this button for about 2 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly, and release (See "Printing a demo page" on page 28). Printing configuration sheets In ready mode, press and hold this button for about 5 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly, and release (See "Printing a machine report" on page 72). Canceling print job Press Cancel ( ) button during printing. The red LED blinks while the print job is cleared from both the machine and the computer and then the machine returns to ready mode. This may take some time depending on the size of the print job. WPS button (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) This feature automatically detects which WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) mode your access point uses. By pushing a button on the wireless LAN router / access point and the machine, you can setup the wireless network and security settings (See "Setting a wireless network with the WPS button" on page 41). Power button This button must be used to turn the machine on/off. Turning on the machine 1.Plug in the power cord. 2.Press Power ( ) button on the control panel. If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for about 3 seconds.Getting started_ 28 2.getting started This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software. This chapter includes: • Setting up the hardware • Printing a demo page • Supplied software • System requirements • Installing USB connected machine’s driver • Sharing your machine locally Setting up the hardware This section shows the steps to set up the hardware as is explained in the Quick Installation Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Installation Guide first and follow the steps below. Location 1. Select a stable location. Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to open cover(s) and tray(s). The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table. Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing (See "Altitude adjustment" on page 50). Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected. 2mm (0.08 in) 2mm (0.08 in) 2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items. 3. Remove tape holding the machine securely. 4. Load paper (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 54). 5. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine. 6. Turn the machine on (See "Turning on the machine" on page 27). This machine will not operate when the power main fails. Printing a demo page Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly. To print a demo page In ready mode, press and hold the Cancel ( ) button for 2 seconds, then release. (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Also, you can use the Demo page ( ) button for printing a demo page. This button is supported on CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N only. Supplied software After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS user, install the software from the supplied CD. If you are a Linux OS user, download the software from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/printer) and install. Machine software is occasionally updated for reasons like the release of new operating system and etc. If needed, download the latest version from the Samsung website. (www.samsung.com/printer)OS Contents Windows • Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. • Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing. • Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer. • SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Macintosh • Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. • Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing. • Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer. • SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Linux • Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. • Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing. • Printer Settings Utility: This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer. • SetIP: Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Getting started_ 29 System requirements Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements: Microsoft® Windows® Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems. OPERATING SYSTEM Requirement (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Windows® 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 600 MB Windows® XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server® 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2048 MB) 10 GB Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1024 MB) 15 GB Windows® 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB • Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme). • DVD-R/W Drive Windows Server® 2008 R2 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2 GHz or faster) 512 MB (2048 MB) 10 GB •Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems. •Administrator rights are required to install the software. •Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine. Macintosh OPERATING SYSTEM Requirements (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.4 • Intel® Processors • PowerPC G4/ G5 • 128 MB for a PowerPC based Mac (512 MB) • 512 MB for a Intel-based Mac (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.5 • Intel® Processors • 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/ G5 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.6 • Intel® Processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB OPERATING SYSTEM Requirement (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD spaceGetting started_ 30 Linux Item Requirement (recommended) Operating system RedHat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit) Fedora Core 2~10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bit) OpenSuSE® 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1 (32/64 bit) Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit) Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bit) Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit) Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit) CPU Pentium® IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2) RAM 512 MB (1024 MB) Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB) Installing USB connected machine’s driver A locally connected machine is a machine directly connected to your computer by a USB cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected machine’s driver (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 m (10 ft.). Windows You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method. The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered on. If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel in close the window. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. •The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear. •If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive. Click OK. •If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. •If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control window. 3. Select Install now. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. • For CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W, you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). •The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. The Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software such as Smart Panel. Follow the guide in the window. 4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. The program searches for the machine. If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the following Getting started_ 31 window will appear. •Check if you want to install the software without connection of the printer. -Check this option to install this program without a machine connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be skipped, and completes the installation. •Search again When you press this button, the firewall notice window appears. -Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Window operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and inactivate this option. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide. -Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by individual programs. •Direct Input The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on the network. -Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host name. Then click Next. To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network configuration report (See "Printing a machine report" on page 72). -Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next. •Help If your machine is not connected to the computer or network, This help button gives you the detailed information about how to connect the machine. 5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you wish to use and click Next. If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window appears. 6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8. 7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung website, click On-line Registration. If your machine is not connected yet to the computer, click How to connect?. How to connect? gives detailed information about how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in the window. 9. Click Finish. If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. b)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. c)Select the option you wish to execute, then follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the Driver files that allow you to use the CUPS driver or PostScript driver (only available when you use a machine, which supports the PostScript driver) for printing on a Macintosh computer. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Read the license agreement and click Continue. 9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 11.When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue. 12. Select the installation type you want and click OK. •Typical installation for a local printer: Installs default components for a device that is directly connected to user’s computer. •Typical installation for a network printer: Installs software for a device that is on the network. The SetIP program automatically runs. If the machine has already configured network information, close the SetIP program. Go to the next step. •Wireless Setting and Installation : For CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W, you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). 13. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart. 14. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. •For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 15. Click Add on the Printer List. •For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop-up. 16. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab. •For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB Getting started_ 32 connection. •For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, click Default and find the USB connection. 17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. •For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model. •For Mac OS X 10.5 ~ 10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 18. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. b)Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. c)Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. d)Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. e)Double-click the Installer OS X icon. f)Enter the password and click OK. g)The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. h)Read the license agreement and click Continue. i)Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. j)Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. k)When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. l)When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software. Follow the steps below to install the software. Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3.From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer. 4.Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package. 5.Double click cdroot > autorun. 6.When the welcome screen appears, click Next. 7.When the installation is complete, click Finish. The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator. Installing the Smart Panel 1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3.From the Samsung website, download the Smart Panel package to your computer. 4.Right-click the Smart Panel package and extract the package. 5.Double click cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh. Installing the Printer Settings Utility 1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2.When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3.From the Samsung website, download the Printer Settings Utility package to your computer. 4.Right-click the Printer Settings Utility package and extract the package. 5.Double click cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow the steps below to uninstall the driver for Linux. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. b)When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.Getting started_ 33 c)Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in: [root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/ [root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh d)Click Uninstall. e)Click Next. f)Click Finish. Sharing your machine locally Follow the steps below to set up computers to share your machine locally. If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with a USB cable and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host computer to print. 2 1 1 Host computer A computer which is directly connected to the machine by USB cable. 2 Client computers Computers which use the machine shared through the host computer. Windows Setting up a host computer 1.Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on page 30, "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). 2.Click the Windows Start menu. 3.For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 4.Right-click the printer icon. 5.For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Properties. For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. If Printer properties item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. 6.Select the Sharing tab. 7.Check Change Sharing Options. 8.Check the Share this printer checkbox. 9.Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK. Setting up a client computer 1.Install your printer driver (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on page 30, "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). 2.Click the Windows Start menu. 3.Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer. 4.Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and press Enter in your keyboard. In case host computer requires a User name and Password, fill in User ID and password of the host computer account. 5.Right-click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect. 6.If a set up complete message appears, click OK. 7.Open the file you want to print and start printing. Macintosh The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help for other OS versions. Setting up a host computer 1.Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 31). 2.Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3.Select the printer to share in the Printers list. 4.Select Share this printer. Setting up a client computer 1.Install your printer driver (See "Macintosh" on page 31). 2.Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3.Click the “+” icon. A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears. 4.Select your machine and click Add.Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 34 3.network setup (clp-320n(k)/clp-321n/clp-325w(k)/clp-326w only) This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software. This chapter includes: • Network environment • Introducing useful network programs • Using a wired network • Installing network connected machine’s driver Network environment You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. You can set up the basic network settings through the machine's control panel or network setting programs. The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine: Item Requirements Network interface • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX • 802.11 b/g/n wireless LAN (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only) Network operating system • Windows 2000/Server 2003 /Server 2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2 • Various Linux OS • Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6 Network protocols • TCP/IPv4 • DHCP, BOOTP • DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP • Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP • SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec • TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec) See "IPv6 configuration" on page 36. Wireless security • Authentication: Open System, Shared Key, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK) • Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES Introducing useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in network environment. For the network administrator especially, managing several machines on the network is possible. Before using the programs below, set the IP address first. SyncThru™ Web Service Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to: • Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments. • Customize machine settings. See "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 68. SyncThru™ Web Admin Service A web-based machine management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™ Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access. Download this program from http://solution.samsungprinter.com. SetIP This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. • See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows)" on page 35. • See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on page 35. • See "IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux)" on page 36. TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. Using a wired network You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network. This chapter will show you how this is easily accomplished. You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine.Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 35 Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshoot problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: • MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78 • IP Address: 192.0.0.192 Setting IP address Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons. • DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report. • Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer. In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you. IPv4 configuration IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Windows) This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: 1.Open Start > Control Panel. 2.Double click Security Center. 3.Click Firewall. 4.Disable the firewall. Installing the program 1.Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window. 2.Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD-ROM drive.) 3.Double-click Application > SetIP. 4.Double-click Setup.exe to install this program. 5.Select a language, then click Next. 6.Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation. Starting the program 1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2.Turned on the machine. 3.From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. •MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. •IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) •Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. •Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6.Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. 7.Click Exit to close the SetIP program. 8.If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh) For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: The path and UIs may differ by Mac OS version. Refer to the Mac OS manual. 1.Open System Preferences. 2.Click Security. 3.Click the Firewall menu. 4.Turn firewall off. The following instructions may vary for your model. 1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2.Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html. 3.Double click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select Trust. The browser will open the SetIPApplet.html page that shows the printer’s name and IP address information. 4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. •MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 36 example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. •IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) •Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. •Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6.Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. IPv4 setting using SetIP Program (Linux) SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver installation. The path and UIs may differ by Linux OS version. Refer to the Linux OS manual to turn firewall off. 1.Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s MAC address. 2.Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/. 3.Double click the SetIPApplet.html file. 4.Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the network card’s MAC address, IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, and then click Apply. When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:). 6.The machine prints the network configuration report. Confirm all the settings are correct. 7.Close the SetIP program. IPv6 configuration TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher. If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again (See "Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 36). To use the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address. The machine is provided with IPv6 feature on. 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turn on the machine. 3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses. 4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers > Add Printer. 5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows. 6. Follow the instruction on the window. If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by. Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: •MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78 •IP Address: 192.0.0.192 Setting IPv6 addresses Machine supports following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements. •Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address. (Address starts with FE80.) •Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router. •Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server. •Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user. Manual address configuration 1.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL (See "SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 34). For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2.When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 3.Click TCP/IPv6. 4.Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section. 5.Select the Address/Prefix and click the Add button, then the router prefix will automatically be entered into the address field. Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.) 6.Click the Apply button. Installing printer driver Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same as TCP/IPv4 (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines are displayed, simply select your machine's IPv6 address. Using SyncThru™ Web Service 1.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. 2.Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network Configuration Report. 3.Enter the IPv6 addresses. (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]) Address must be enclosed in '[]' brackets. Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 2. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service. 3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website.Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 37 A log-in page appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click Settings > Network Settings > Restore Default. 6. Click Clear for network. 7. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings. Installing network connected machine’s driver You must install the printer driver software for printing. The software includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs. Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation. Windows This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. Follow the steps below: 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. •The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. •If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive. Click OK. •If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. •If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control window. 3. Select Install now. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. • For CLP-325W(K)/, you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). •The Advanced Installation has two options, Custom Installation and Install Software Only. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. The Install Software Only allows you to install the supplied software such as Smart Panel. Follow the guide in the window. 4. Read License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click Next. The program searches the machine. If your machine is not found in the network or locally, the following window will appear. •Check if you want to install the software without connection of the printer. -Check this option to install this program without a machine connected. In this case, the print a test page window will be skipped, and completes the installation. •Search again When you press this button, the firewall notice window appears;Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 38 -Turn off the firewall and Search again. For Window operating system, click Start > Control Panel > Windows Firewall, and inactivate this option. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide. -Turn off the firewall from the third party's program beside the operating system. Refer to the manual provided by individual programs. •Direct Input The Direct Input allows you to search a specific machine on the network. -Search by IP address: Enter the IP address or the host name. Then click Next. To verify your machine’s IP address, print a network configuration report (See "Printing a machine report" on page 72). -Search by network path: To find a shared machine (UNC Path), enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button. Then click Next. •Help If your machine is not connected to the computer or network, This help button gives you the detailed information about how to connect the machine. 5. The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you wish to use and click Next. If the driver searched only one machine, the confirmation window appears. 6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click Print a test page. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8. 7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 8. If you want to register your machine on Samsung website, click On-line Registration. If your machine is not connected yet to the computer, click How to connect?. How to connect? gives detailed information about how to connect the machine. Follow the instructions in the window. 9. Click Finish. •After the driver setup, you may enable firewall. •If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. b)From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. c)Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Read the license agreement and click Continue. 9. Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. 10. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. •If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 11. The message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears. Click Continue. 12. Select the installation type you want and click OK. •Typical installation for a local printer: Installs default components for a device that is directly connected to user’s computer. •Typical installation for a network printer: Installs software for a device that is on the network. The SetIP program automatically runs. If the machine has already configured network information, close the SetIP program. Go to the next step. •Wireless Setting and Installation : For CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W, you can access Wireless Setting and Installation menu. The Wireless Setting and Installation allows you to install a wireless network to connect to the machine with USB cable (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). 13. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After the installation is finished, click Quit or Restart. 14. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. •For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 15. Click Add on the Printer List. •For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop-up. 16. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab. •For Mac OS X 10.4, click IP Printer. •For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP. 17. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type. When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option. 18. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field. 19. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue first. 20. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. •For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model. •For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 21. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. a)Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. b)Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.Network setup (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 39 c)Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. d)Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. e)Double-click the Installer OS X icon. f)Enter the password and click OK. g)The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. h)Read the license agreement and click Continue. i)Click Agree to agree to the license agreement. j)Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. k)When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. l)When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software. To install other software: •See "Installing the Smart Panel" on page 32. •See "Installing the Printer Settings Utility" on page 32. Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1.Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2.From the Samsung website, download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer. 3.Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package. 4.Double click cdroot > autorun. 5.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue. 6.The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 7.Select Network printer and click Search button. 8.The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 9.Select your machine and click Next. 10.Input the printer description and Next 11.When the add printer is done, click Finish. 12.When the install is done, click Finish. Add network Printer 1.Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator. 2.Click Add Printer… 3.The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 4.Select Network printer and click the Search button. 5.The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 6.Select your machine and click Next. 7.Input the printer description and Next 8.When the add printer is done, click Finish.Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 40 4.wireless network setup (clp-325w(k)/clp-326w only) This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the wireless network connected machine and software. This chapter includes: • Getting started • Choosing the wireless network installation type • Setting a wireless network with the WPS button • Setting a wireless network from the computer • Setting a wireless network from the computer • Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off • Troubleshooting For more information about the network environment, network programs, and installing a network connected machine’s driver, refer to the following chapters: •See "Network environment" on page 34. •See "Introducing useful network programs" on page 34. •See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37. Getting started Choosing your network connection Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a time. There are two types of network connections to consider: • Wireless network without access Point (Ad-Hoc mode) • Wireless network with an access Point (Infrastructure mode) Infrastructure mode This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs (Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to communicate with the wireless machine. • See "Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Windows)" on page 42. • See "Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Macintosh)" on page 44. Ad-Hoc mode This mode does not use an access point. The wireless computer and wireless machine communicates directly. • See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Windows)" on page 43. • See "Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Macintosh)" on page 45. After choosing your configuration, follow the simple directions for your computer’s operating system, but first locate the software CD supplied with the machine before proceeding. Wireless network name and network key Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up, a network name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Key are created for the network. Locate this information before proceeding with the machine installation. Choosing the wireless network installation type There are various ways to install the wireless network to connect to the machine. You can install a wireless network from the machine’s control panel or the computer. For most users, we recommend using the WPS ( ) button to configure the wireless network settings. From the control panel • WPS ( ) : If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. (See "Setting a wireless network with the WPS button" on page 41). From the computer From the compurter, we recommend using a USB cable with the program provided in the supplied software CD. • With a USB cable: You can simply set up a wireless network using the program on the supplied software CD. Only Windows and Macintosh operating system are supported (See "Setting a wireless network with USB cable" on page 41). You can also install a wireless network in Printer Settings Utility with a USB cable after installing the driver (Windows and Macintosh operating systems are supported). • With a network cable: You can set up a wireless network using the SyncThru™ Web Service program (See "Setting a wireless network with network cable" on page 46). Setting a wireless network with the WPS button You can install a wireless network with the WPS ( ) button. After compleleting the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37).Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 41 Setting a wireless network with the WPS button If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode, make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine. Using the WPS (PBC) button or entering the PIN number from the computer to connect to the Access Point varies depending on the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Refer to the user's guide of the access point (or wireless router) you are using. Items to prepare You need to ensure you have the following items ready to use: •Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS). •Check if your machine supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS). •Networked computer (PIN mode only) Choosing your network connection There are two methods to connect your machine to a wireless network using the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the WPS ( ) button on the control panel of your machine and the WPS (PBC) button on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router) respectively. The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™(WPS)-enabled access point (or wireless router). Factory default in your machine is PBC mode, which is recommended for a typical wireless network environment. Connecting to a wireless network in PBC mode To connect your machine to the wireless network in PBC mode, follow the following steps: You need to check the status of the wireless LED. 1.Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for about 2 - 4 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly. • : The light blinks slowly on wireless LED. The machine starts connecting to the wireless network. The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on access point (or wireless router). 2. : Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router). The wireless LED blinks in the order below: a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on. Connecting to the wireless network in PIN mode To connect your machine to the wireless network, follow the following steps: You need to check the status of the wireless LED. 1.The network configuration report including PIN number must be printed. In ready mode, press and hold the Cancel ( ) button on the control panel for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s PIN number. 2.Press and hold the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for more than 4 seconds until the status LED on. • : The light blinks slowly on the wireless LED. The machine starts connecting to access point (or wireless router). 3.You need to enter eight-digit PIN number within two minutes to the computer which is connected to the access point (or wireless router). The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-digit PIN number The wireless LED blinks in the order below: a) : The light blinks fast on the wireless LED. The machine is connecting to the access point (or wireless router). b) : When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the wireless LED light stays on. Re-connecting to the wireless network When the wireless function is off, the machine automatically tries to re-connect to the access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless connection settings and address. In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the wireless network: •The machine is turned off and on again. •The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again. Canceling a wireless network connection process To cancel the wireless network connection function when the machine is connecting to the wireless network, press and release the Cancel ( ) button on the control panel. You need to wait 2 minuites to re-connect the wireless network. Disconnecting a wireless network connection To disconnect the wireless network connection, press the WPS ( ) button on the control panel for more than two seconds. •When the Wi-Fi Network is in idle mode: The machine is immediately disconnected from the wireless network, and the wireless LED is off. •When the Wi-Fi Network is being used: While the machine waits until the current job is finished, the light blinks fast on the wireless LED. Then, the wireless network connection is automatically disconnected. The wireless LED is off. When the Wi-Fi Network is disconnected, press the WPS ( ) button on the control panel. The Wi-Fi network is on and the setting a wireless network begins. Setting a wireless network from the computer You can install a wireless network a USB cable or a network cable from the computer. Setting a wireless network with USB cable See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless network, for information about your network configuration.Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 42 Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Windows) Items to prepare Ensure you have the following items ready. • Access point • Network-connected computer • Software CD that was provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the infrastructure network in Windows When the items are ready, follow the steps below: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2.Turn on your computer, access point, and machine. 3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. •The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. •If the installation window does not appear, click on Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive. Click on OK. •If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 R2 click on Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter that represents your drive and click on OK. •If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 R2, click on Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click on Continue or Yes in the User Account Control window. 4.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. •Install Now: If you have already set up the wireless network, click on this button to install the machine driver to use the wireless network machine. If you have not set up the wireless network, click on the Wireless Setting and Installation button to set up the wireless network before you click on this button. •Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless network settings of your machine with a USB cable then install the machine driver. Only for the users who have not set up the wireless connection before. 5.Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click on Next. 6.The software searches the wireless network. If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is properly connected between the computer and machine, and follow the instructions on the window. 7.After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you are using and click on Next. If you cannot find out the network name you want to choose, or if you want to set the wireless configuration manually, click on Advanced Setting. •Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive). •Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. •Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre- Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. •Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES). •Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. •Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. •WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ according to its security mode, WEP, or WPA. •In case of WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter WEP security key. Click on Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. •In case of WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click on Next. WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption. 8.The window shows the wireless network settings and check if the settings are right. Click on Next. •For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click on Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP. •For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click on Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 43 must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 9.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click on Next. 10.The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup procedure. Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen. Then, click on Next. 11.Click on Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears. 12.Select the components to be installed. Click on Next. After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click on Next. 13.After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click on Print a test page. Otherwise, just click on Next and go to step 15. 14.If the test page prints out correctly, click on Yes. If not, click on No to reprint it. 15.To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung, click on On-line Registration. 16.Click on Finish. Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Windows) If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by following the simple steps below. Items to prepare Ensure you have the following items ready: • Network-connected computer • Software CD that was provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Windows When the items are ready, follow the steps below: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2.Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine. 3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. •The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. •If the installation window does not appear, click on Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive. Click on OK. •If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 R2 click on Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter that represents your drive and click on OK. •If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows Server 2008 R2, click on Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click on Continue or Yes in the User Account Control window. 4.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. •Install Now: If you have set the wireless network, click on this button to install the machine driver to use the wireless network machine. If you have not set the wireless network, click on Wireless Setting and Installation button to set the wireless network before you click on this button. •Wireless Setting and Installation: Configure the wireless network settings of your machine with a USB cable then install the machine driver. Only for users who have not set up the wireless connection before. 5.Read the License Agreement, and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement. Then, click on Next. 6.The software searches the wireless network. If the software has failed to search the network, check if the USB cable is connected properly between the computer and machine, and follow the instruction on the window. 7.After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears. If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last wireless network on the list, Network Name(SSID) is portthru and Signal is Printer Self Network. Then, click on Next. If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select another wireless network from the list. If you want to change ad-hoc settings click on the Advanced Setting button. •Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID is case-sensitive). •Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc. •Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz). •Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 44 proper WEP key can access the network. •Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128). •Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. •Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. •WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad-hoc network has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click on Next. •WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. 8.The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and click on Next. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. •For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows Static, click on Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). •For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows DHCP, click on Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 9.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. Click on Next. If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow the steps on the window. Click on Next if you are finished the computer’s wireless network settings. If you set the computer’s wireless network on DHCP, it will take several minutes to receive the IP address. 10.The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. Select Yes if you accept the current settings and continue the setup procedure. Select No if you want to return to the beginning screen. Then, click on Next. 11.Click on Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears. 12.Select the components to be installed. Click on Next. After selecting the components, you can also change the machine name, set the machine to be shared on the network, set the machine as the default machine, and change the port name of each machine. Click on Next. 13.After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you want to print a test page, click on Print a test page. Otherwise, just click on Next and go to step 15. 14.If the test page prints out correctly, click on Yes. If not, click on No to reprint it. 15.To register as a user of the machine in order to receive information from Samsung, click on On-line Registration. 16.Click on Finish. Installing the machine on a wireless network with an access point (Macintosh) Items to prepare Ensure you have the following items ready: • Access point • Network-connected computer • Software CD that was provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the infrastructure network in Macintosh When the items are ready, follow the steps below: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2.Turn on your computer, access point, and machine. 3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 4.Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 5.Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 6.Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 7.Enter the password and click on OK. 8.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click on Continue. 9.Read the license agreement and click on Continue. 10.Click on Agree to agree to the license agreement. 11.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click on Continue. 12.Select Easy Install and click on Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All compoenets necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be installed. 13.Select the Wireless Setting and Installation option. 14.The software searches the wireless network. If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly, and Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 45 follow the instructions in the window. 15.After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name (SSID) of the access point you are using and click on Next. When you set the wireless configuration manually, click on Advanced Setting. •Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID is case-sensitive). •Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure. •Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally called Pre- Shared Key pass phrase) that is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients. •Encryption: Select the encryption. (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES) •Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. •Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. •WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ according to its security mode: WEP or WPA. •In case of WEP Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter WEP security key. Click on Next. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. •In case of WPA Enter the WPA shared key and click on Next. WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption. 16.The window shows the wireless network setting and check if settings are right. Click on Next. •For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the window. However, if it shows Static, click on Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to DHCP. •For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the window. However, if it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 17.The wireless network connects according to the network configuration. 18.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. 19.Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After the installation is finished, click on Quit or Restart. Installing the machine on an Ad-Hoc wireless network (Macintosh) If you do not have a access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an Ad-Hoc wireless network by following these simple directions. Items to prepare Ensure you have following items ready: • Network-connected computer • Software CD that provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • USB cable Creating the Ad-Hoc network in Macintosh When the items are ready, follow these steps: 1. Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine. 2.Turn on your computer and machine. 3.Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. 4.Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 5.Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 6.Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 7.Enter the password and click on OK. 8.The Samsung Installer window opens. Click on Continue. 9.Read the license agreement and click on Continue. 10.Click on Agree to agree to the license agreement. 11.Select Easy Install and click on Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual operations will be installed. 12.Click on Wireless Setting and Installation. 13.The software searches the wireless network devices. If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is connected between the computer and machine properly, and follow the instruction on the window. 14.After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears. If you want to use the Samsung default ad-hoc setting, select the last wireless network on the list, which Network Name(SSID) is portthruWireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 46 and Signal is Printer Self Network. Then, click on Next. If you want to use other ad-hoc settings, select another wireless network from the list. If you want to change ad-hoc settings click the Advanced Setting button. •Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID name you want (SSID is case-sensitive). •Operation Mode: Select Ad-hoc. •Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz). •Authentication: Select an authentication type. Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be used, depending on the need for data security. Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network. •Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128). •Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value. •Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value. •WEP Key Index: If you are using the WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key Index. The wireless network security window appears when the ad-hoc network has security setting. The wireless network security window appears. Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click on Next. •WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key. 15.The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and click on Next. Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the wireless network setting should also be Static. If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address. •For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows Static, click on Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically (DHCP). •For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. However, if it shows DHCP, click on Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 16.The wireless network connects according to the network configuration. 17.When the wireless network setting is completed, disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine. 18.Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation. After the installation is finished, click on Quit or Restart. Setting a wireless network with network cable Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to work with your network you will need to perform some configuration procedures. •After compleleting the wireless network connection, you need to install a machine driver to print from an application (See "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). •See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless network, for information about your network configuration. Preparing items Ensure you have following items ready: • Access point • Network-connected computer • Software CD that was provided with your machine • The machine installed with a wireless network interface • Network cable Setting IP address Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate intranets for security reasons. •DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report. •Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer. In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you. Printing a network configuration report You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration report. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the Cancel ( ) button for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address.Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 47 For example: •MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78 •IP Address: 192.0.0.192 IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows) This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. For using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: 1.Open Start > All programs > Control Panel. 2.Double click on Security Center. 3.Click on Windows Firewall. 4.Disable the firewall. Installing the program 1.Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window. 2.Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD-ROM drive.) 3.Double-click Application > SetIP. 4.Double-click Setup.exe to install this program. 5.Select a language, then click on Next. 6.Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation. Starting the program 1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2.Turn on the machine. 3.From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. •MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. •IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) •Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask. •Default Gateway: Enter the default gateway. 6.Click on Apply, and then click on OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. 7.Click on Exit to close the SetIP program. 8.If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh) For using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: The path and UIs may differ by Mac OS version. Refer to the Mac OS manual. 1.Open System Preferences. 2.Click on Security. 3.Click on the Firewall menu. 4.Turn the firewall off. The following instructions may vary for your model. 1.Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2.Insert the Installation CD-ROM, and open the disk window, select MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html. 3.Double click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select Trust. The browser will open the SetIPApplet.html page that shows the printer’s name and IP address information. 4.Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5.Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding. •MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. •IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) •Subnet Mask: Enter the subnet mask. •Default Gateway: Enter the default gateway. 6.Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway. Configuring the machine’s wireless network Before starting you will need to know the network name(SSID) of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point (or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please ask the person who has set up your network. To configure wireless parameters, you can use SyncThru™ Web Service. Using SyncThru™ Web Service Before starting wireless parameter configuration, check the cable connection status. Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 48 1.Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. 2.Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3.Click on Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 4.Type in the ID and Password then click on Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5.When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click on Network Settings. 6.Click on Wireless > Wizard. Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration. However, if you want to set the wireless network directly, select Custom. 7.Select the one Network Name(SSID) in the list. •SSID: SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a wireless network, access points, and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive. •Operation Mode: Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless connections (See "Wireless network name and network key" on page 40). -Ad-hoc: Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer-to-peer environment. -Infrastructure: Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point. If your network’s Operation Mode is Infrastructure, select the SSID of the access point. If the Operation Mode is Ad-hoc, select the machine’s SSID. Note that “portthru” is the default SSID of your machine. 8.Click on Next. If the wireless security setting window appears, enter the registered password (network key) and click on Next. 9.The confirmation window appears, please check your wireless setup. If the setup is right, click on Apply. Disconnect the network cable (standard or network). Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network. In case of Ad-hoc mode, you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously. Completing the installation After you have installed your Samsung wireless network printer, print another copy of the Network Configuration Report and keep it for future reference. You are now ready to use your new Samsung wireless printer on your network. If the wireless network seems to not be working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again (See "Restoring factory default settings using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 36). Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off You can turn the Wi-Fi network on/off with SyncThru™ Web Service. The factory default is on. To turn default mode, follow the following steps: 1. Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine. If not, connect the machine with a standard network cable. 2. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari or Firefox and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 3. Click on Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password then click on Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5. When the SyncThru™ Web Service window opens, click on Network Settings. 6. Click on Wireless > Custom. You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off. Troubleshooting Solving problems that might occur during setting up the wireless setting and installing the machine driver Printers Not Found •Your machine may not be turned on. Turn on your computer and the machine. •USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine. Connect machine to your computer using the USB cable. •The machine does not support a wireless network. Check the machine's user's guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and prepare a wireless network machine. Connecting Failure - Not Found SSID •The machine is unable to search the network name (SSID) you have selected or entered. Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try connecting again. •Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point. Connecting Failure - Invalid Security •You configured security incorrectly. Check the configured security on your access point and machine. Connecting Failure - General Connection Error •Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB cable and your machine’s power. Connecting Failure - Connected Wired Network •Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired network cable from your machine.Wireless network setup (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only)_ 49 PC Connection Error •The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and machine. -For a DHCP network environment The print receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when computer is configured to DHCP. -For a Static network environment The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured to static address. For example: If computer’s network information is as shown below: -IP address: 169.254.133.42 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 Then, the machine’s network information should be as below: -IP address: 169.254.133. 43 -Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.) -Gateway: 169.254.133.1 Solving other problems If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following: For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own user's guide. • Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be turned on. • Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the reception is far from the machine or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the signal. • Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and computer. Sometimes cycling the power can recover network communication. • Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the communication. If the computer and the machine is connected on the same network and it cannot be searched, firewall software might be blocking the communication. Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and try searching for the machine again. • Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can check the IP address by printing the network configuration report. • Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured security (password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless router) administrator. • Check whether the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the characteristics of DHCP, the allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset. • Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user's information before connecting to access point (or wireless router). • This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless communication (Bluetooth) is not supported. • When using the Ad-hoc mode, for operating systems such as Windows Vista, you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine. • You cannot use infrastructure mode and Ad-hoc mode at the same time for Samsung wireless network machines. • The machine is within the range of the wireless network. • The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal. Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless router) and the machine. Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not separated by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete. • The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the wireless signal. Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave oven and some Bluetooth devices.Basic setup_ 50 5.basic setup After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine. This chapter includes: • Altitude adjustment • Setting the default tray and paper • Using the power saving feature • Changing font setting (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ /CLP-326W only) Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print. Before you set the altitude value, determine the altitude where you are. 0 4,000 m (13,123 ft) 3,000 m (9,842 ft) 2,000 m (6,561 ft) 1,000 m (3,280 ft) 4 3 2 1 1 High 1 2 High 2 3 High 3 4 Normal You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility. 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list. 4. Click the Apply button. If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru™ Web Service screen appears automatically. This can also be adjusted via SyncThru™ Web Service. Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job. From your computer Windows 1.Click the Windows Start menu. 2.For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3.Right-click on your machine. 4.For Windows Server 2003/Server 2008/XP/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7/Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing Preferences. If Printing Preferences item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. 5.Click Paper tab. 6.Select options such as number of copies, paper size or paper type. 7.Press OK. If you want to use special-sized paper such as a billing paper, select Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). Macintosh Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time they want to print using other settings. 1.Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print. 2.Open the File menu and click Print. 3.Go to Paper Feed pane. 4.Set appropriate tray from which you want to print. 5.Go to Paper pane. 6.Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. 7.Click Print to print. Linux 1.Open Terminal Program 2.When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following: [root@localhost root]# lpr Basic setup_ 51 3.Select Printer and click Properties… 4.Click Advanced tab. 5.Select tray (source) and its options, such as paper size and type. 6.Press OK. Using the power saving feature When you will not be using the machine for a while, you can use this feature to save power. You change power save in Printer Settings Utility. 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Setting > Power Save. Select the appropriate value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply. Changing font setting (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ /CLP-326W only) Your machine has preset font setting depending on your region or country. If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows: 1. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. 2. Click Printer Setting. 3. Click Emulation. 4. Confirm if PCL is selected in Emulation Setting. 5. Click Setting. 6. Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list. 7. Click Apply. Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages. •Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic •Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek •Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic Setting the humidity mode Print quality is affected by humidity levels. Paper may be damp if your location is a humid area: set the humidity mode. 1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided Printer Software CD. 2. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the status bar in Mac OS X. 3. Click Printer Setting. If your machine is connected to the network, you can set the humidity mode via SyncThru™ Web Service. 4. Click Setting > Humidity. Select the appropriate value from the drop-down list, and then click Apply.Media and tray_ 52 6.media and tray This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into your machine. This chapter includes: • Selecting print media • Changing the tray size • Loading paper in the tray • Printing on special media • Setting the paper size and type • Using the output support Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meets the guidelines for use with your machine and from the appropriate tray. Guidelines for selecting the print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems: • Poor print quality • Increased paper jams • Premature wear on the machine. • Permanent fuser damage, not covered under warranty. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following: • The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described later in this section. • Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project. • Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images. • Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper. •Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of the sheets characteristics, improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which cannot be controlled. •Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the required specifications in this user’s guide and meets your output requirements. •Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems or require repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s warranty or service agreements. •Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine. •Using inflammable print media can cause a fire. •Use designated print media (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and, in rare cases may cause a fire. Media sizes supported in each mode Mode Size Type Source Simplex printing For details about paper size, see "Print media specifications" on page 92. For details about paper type, see "Print media specifications" on page 92. Tray Duplex printing (Manual) a a.75 to 90 g/m² (20-24 lbs bond) only Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Folio, A4, ISO B5, JIS B5, Executive, A5, A6 Plain, Thick, Cotton, Color, Preprinted, Recycled, CardStock, Archive TrayMedia and tray_ 53 Changing the tray size To load different sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray. To change the tray size to other size, you must adjust the paper length/width guides properly. 3 2 1 4 1 Paper extend lever 2 Paper cover 3 Paper length guide 4 Paper width guide 1. Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary. 2. Pressing and unlatching the guide lock in the tray, pull the tray out manually. 1 3. Place paper with the side you want to print facing up. 4. Slide the paper length guide until it lightly touches the end of the paper stack. Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the paper stack without causing it to bend. For paper smaller than Letter-sized, return the paper guides to their original positions and adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide. If the paper that you need to print is shorter than length 222 mm (8.74 inches), press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray, push the tray in manually. Adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide. 1 2 •Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp. •If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams.Media and tray_ 54 •Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm (0.24 inch.) curl. 5. Close the paper cover. 6. Slide the tray back into the machine until it clicks. 7. Set the paper type and size for the tray ("Setting the paper size and type" on page 58). If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specifications. Then, try placing one sheet at a time in tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 92 or see "Printing on special media" on page 56). The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size to A4 or Letter, you must adjust the lever and paper width guide properly. 1. Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary. 2. If you want to change the size to Letter, hold the lever at the back of the tray, and rotate the lever clockwise. LTR A4 3. Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the lever. LTR A4 If you want to change the size to A4, first move the paper width guide to left and rotate the lever counterclockwise. If you force the lever, it could damage the tray. Loading paper in the tray In the tray 1. Pull out the paper tray. Adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading (See "Changing the tray size" on page 53). 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading the paper. 3. Place the paper with the side you want to print facing up. 4. Squeeze the tray paper guides and adjust them to the width and length of the paper. Do not force them too much or the paper will be bent result in a paper jam or skew. 5. Close the paper cover.Media and tray_ 55 6. Insert the tray back into the machine. 7. To print in application, open an application and start the print menu. 8. Open Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 9. Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type, size and source. 10. Press OK. 11. Start printing in application. If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specification. Then, try placing one sheet at a time in the tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size to A4 or Letter, you must adjust the lever and paper width guide properly. 1. Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary. 2. If you want to change the size to Letter, hold the lever at the back of the tray, and rotate the lever clockwise. LTR A4 3. Squeeze the paper width guide and slide it to the edge of the lever. LTR A4 If you want to change the size to A4, first move the paper width guide to left and rotate the lever counterclockwise. If you force the lever, it could damage the tray. Manual feeding in the tray To load different sizes of paper such as envelope, transparency, labels or custom-sized paper, you need to adjust the paper guides for manual feeding in the tray. To use manual feeding in the tray, you must adjust the paper length/width guide properly. Tips on using the manual feeding method Tips on manual feeding in the tray •If you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application, you need to press Cancel ( ) button each time you print a page. Load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the tray. •To prevent paper jams, do not add media while printing. This also applies to other types of print media. •Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the tray first and be placed in the center of the tray. •Always load the use recommended print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). •Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes and labels before loading them into the tray. 1.Pull the tray out of the machine. Open the paper cover and remove paper from the tray if necessary. 2.Place paper with the side you want to print facing up. 3.Squeeze the tray paper width guided and adjust them to the width of the paper until it lightly touches the end of the paper stack. Do not force too much, or the paper will bend resulting in a paper jam or skew. For paper smaller than Letter-sized, return the paper guides to their original positions and adjust the paper length guide and paper width Media and tray_ 56 guide. If the paper that you need to print is shorter than length 222 mm (8.74 inches), press and unlatch the guide lock in the tray, push the tray in manually. Adjust the paper length guide and paper width guide. 1 2 •Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials to warp. •If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams. •Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm (0.24 inch.) curl. 4.Close the paper cover. 5.Slide the tray back into the machine until it clicks. 6.To print in application, open an application and start the print menu. 7.Open Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 8.Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type. For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label. 9.Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK. 10.Start printing in application. If you are printing multiple pages, load the next sheet after the first page prints out, and press the Cancel ( ) button. Repeat this step for every page to be printed. Printing on special media The table below shows the available special media for each tray. When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). Types Tray Manual feeding in the tray Plain ● ● Thick ● ● Thin ● ● Cotton ● ● Color ● ● Preprinted ● ● Recycled ● ● Envelope ● Transparency ● Labels ● CardStock ● Bond ● Archive ● Glossy Photo ● Matte Photo ● ( ●: Supported, Blank: Not supported) The following media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. Selecting the appropriate media will let you get the best printout quality. Selecting inappropriate media can result in poor print quality. • Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your printing on 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond). • Thick: 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond) thick paper. • Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) thin paper. • Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) cotton paper. • Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) color-backgrounded paper. • Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) preprinted/letterhead paper. • Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) recycled paper. When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled and/or jamming may occur due to excessive curl. • Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) envelope. • Transparency: 0.104 to 0.124 mm (0.004094 to 0.004882 inches) transparency paper. • Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) label.Media and tray_ 57 • CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lbs bond) cardstock. • Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lbs bond) bond. • Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond). If you need to keep the print-out for a long time, such as for archives. • Glossy Photo: 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond) glossy photo paper. • Matte Photo: 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond) matte photo paper. Envelopes Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. To print an envelope, place it flap side down with the stamp area on the top left side. • When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors: -Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise, jams may occur. -Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.24 inch.) curl, and should not contain air. -Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, either damaged. -Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation. • Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds. • Do not use stamped envelopes. • Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials. • Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes. • Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope. 1 2 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable • Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams and may even damage the fuser. • For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.59 inch.) from the edges of the envelope. • Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet. Transparencies To avoid damaging the machine, use only transparencies designed for laser printers. In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would be lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead projector. • Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand machine’s fusing temperature. • Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine. • Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing. • To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle transparencies carefully. • To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight. • Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges. • Do not use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet. • To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out. • Recommended media: Xerox 3R91331 (A4), Xerox 3R2780 (Letter) Base type transparency (ex. Xerox 3R91331) results in better image and paper handling quality than paper backed (ex. Xerox 3R3028) or removable stripe (3R3108) ones. •Transparency with static electricity can cause image quality problems. •Depending on the selection or storage conditions of the transparency, jam or image scratch might occur. Labels To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser machines. • When selecting labels, consider the following factors: -Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature (about 170°C (338 °F)). -Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. -Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.51 inch.) of curl in any direction. -Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. • Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components.Media and tray_ 58 • Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine. • Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged. Card stock/Custom-sized paper • Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3.00 inches) wide or 152.4 mm (6.00 inches) long. • In software applications, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material. Letterhead/Preprinted paper Single-sided double-sided Face up AAAAA Face down AAAAA • Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s specification to view the fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F). • Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. • Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage. • Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality. Recycled paper When loading recycled paper, printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print quality is not guaranteed. • Recycled paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s specification to view the fusing temperature about 170°C(338 °F). • Recycled paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. • Before you load recycled paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off recycled paper, reducing print quality. Glossy photo Load one paper in the tray at a time, glossy side facing up. • Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A). • Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A). Matte photo Load one paper in the tray at a time, side to be printed facing up. Setting the paper size and type After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and type using the printer driver. Follow these steps to make your changes permanent. The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help. 1. Click the Start button on the computer screen. 2. Select Printers and Faxes. 3. Right-click on the printer icon and select Printing Preferences. 4. Click the Paper tab and change the setting on Paper Options. 5. Click OK. Using the output support The printed pages stack on the output tray, and the output support will help the printed pages align. 1 Output support If you continuously print many pages, the surface of the output tray may become hot. Be careful not to touch the surface, and especially keep children away from the surface.Printing_ 59 7.printing This chapter explains common printing tasks. This chapter includes: • Introducing useful software program • Printer driver features • Basic printing • Opening printing preferences • Using help • Using special print features • Changing the default print settings • Setting your machine as a default machine • Printing to a file (PRN) • Macintosh printing • Linux printing The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP. Introducing useful software program Samsung AnyWeb Print This tool helps you to screen-capture, preview, scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily, when you use the ordinary program. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print > Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download. This tool is available only for Windows operating systems. Samsung Easy Color Manager This program helps users to adjust color as they like. You can adjust the printout color as they see them on the monitor. The adjusted color can be stored on the printer driver and applied to printouts. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Color Manager > Download the latest version to link the website where the tool is available for the download. This tool is available only for Windows and Macintosh operating systems. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager) Printer driver features Your printer drivers support the following standard features: • Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection • Number of copies In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers: Some models or operating systems may not support some of the feature(s) in the following table. Printer driver Feature Windows Print quality option ● Poster printing ● Multiple pages per sheet ● Booklet printing (manual) ● Fit to page printing ● Reduce and enlarge printing ● Watermark ● Overlay ● Double-sided printing (manual) ● ( ●: Supported, Blank: Not supported) Basic printing Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use. •Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine. Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications (See "System requirements" on page 29). •When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning mark, , or . An exclamation mark ( ) means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s settings or environment. The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications. Macintosh basic printing, see "Macintosh printing" on page 65. Linux basic printing, see "Linux printing" on page 66. The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP. Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. Printing_ 60 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list. You can select the basic print settings including the number of copies and the print range from the Print window. To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print setting (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window. If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the Samsung AnyWeb Print too will save your time for screen-captured images or printing the image. Click Start > All programs > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print to link the website where the tool is available for the download. Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows. 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. For Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista and Server 2008, double-click your machine. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right-click your printer icon > context menus > See what’s printing. If See what’s printing item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 4. From the Document menu, select Cancel. You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar. You can also cancel the current job by pressing Cancel ( ) button on the control panel. Opening printing preferences You can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer. 4. Click Properties or Preferences. Using a favorite setting The Presets option, which is visible on each of the preferences tab except for the Samsung tab, allows you to save the current preferences for future use. To save a Presets item: 1. Change the settings as needed on each tab. 2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box.Printing_ 61 3. Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved. If you click Add, the Add button changes to the Update button. Select more options and click Update, settings will be added to the Presets you made. To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop-down list. The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected. To delete saved settings, select it from the Presets drop-down list and click Delete. You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop-down list. Using help Click the question mark on the upper-right corner of the window and click on the topic you want to know about. Then a pop-up window appears with information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver. If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Samsung tab in the Printing Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update or registration and so on, click appropriate buttons. Using special print features Special print features include: • "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 61. • "Printing posters" on page 61. • "Printing booklets (Manual)" on page 61. • "Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual)" on page 62. • "Change percentage of your document" on page 62. • "Fitting your document to a selected paper size" on page 62. • "Using watermarks" on page 62. • "Using overlay" on page 63. • "Graphics tab options" on page 63. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list. 4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary. 5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet. 6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source and Type. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Printing posters This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9 or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the page layout you want. Available layouts: •Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages. •Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages. •Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages. 4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together. 5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together. Printing booklets (Manual) This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet. If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized print media. 8 9 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down list. 3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab. If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without or mark). 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 5. After printing, fold and staple the pages.Printing_ 62 Printing on both sides of the paper (Manual) You can print on both sides of a paper (duplex). Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio or Oficio sized paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). We recommend not to print on both sides of special media, such as labels, envelopes, or thick paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding option you want. •None •Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding. •Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars. 4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job. Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box. You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Fitting your document to a selected paper size This feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document. A 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page. 4. Select the Size, Source and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using watermarks The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list. Using an existing watermark 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in the preview image. 3.Click OK or Print until you exit the print window. Creating a watermark 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3.Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window. When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only. 4.Select watermark options. You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section. 5.Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list.Printing_ 63 6.When you have finished, click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down list. Editing a watermark 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3.Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options. 4.Click Update to save the changes. 5.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Deleting a watermark 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Advanced tab, select Edit... from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3.Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. 4.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using overlay An overlay is content you store on your hard disk drive that can be superimposed over any document you print. An overlay is often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine, instead you can just print the letterhead overlay on your document. Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay file containing your content. 1.Create or open a document containing the content you want to use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly where you want them to appear when they are added to the original. 2.To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 3.Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit... from the Text drop-down list. The Edit Overlay window appears. 4.In the Edit Overlay window, click Create. 5.In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\FormOver.) 6.Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List. 7.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 8.The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive. The overlay document size must match same as the document you print. Do not create an overlay with a watermark. Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay with a document: 1.Create or open the document you want to print. 2.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 3.Click the Advanced tab. 4.Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list. 5.If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit... from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window. After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box. 6.If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm that you wish to print an overlay on your document. If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document. 7.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. The selected overlay prints over your document. The resolution of the overlay document must match the resolution of the original print job. Deleting a overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use. 1.In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab. 2.Select Edit... in the Overlay drop-down list. 3.Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box. 4.Click Delete. 5.When the confirming message window appears, click Yes. 6.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Graphics tab options Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs. •The options you can select may vary depending on your printer model. •If the option is grayed out or not shown, that option is not applicable with the printer language you are using. To change the printer language: 1.Click the Windows Start menu. 2.For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. -For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. -For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. -For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Printing_ 64 Sound > Devices and Printers. -For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3.Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties. 4.In printer driver properties, select Device Options. 5.Select necessary options in the Printer Language drop-down list. Adjusting color If you feel the color difference between the printout and monitor, you may change the color setting such as color contrast or color level. The printer driver provides graphic options to adjust the print quality for specific printing needs. 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Graphics tab. Refer to the online help for each option’s information provided from the Printing Preferences. •Color Mode: You can choose color options between Color or Grayscale. Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color document. If you want to print a color document in gray scale, select Grayscale. Black Optimization allows you to print in high quality black. If you use this option, it might take longer to print. To adjust color manually, select Advanced in Color Mode. Simply slide the color balance slider in the Levels tab to adjust color, or select Matching tab for driver provided color correction for general image processing. •Advanced: You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button. (PCL driver only) •Font/ Text: Select Darken Text to print text darker than on a normal document. Use All Text Black to prints solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen. •Raster Compression: This option determines the compression level of images for transferring data from computer to a printer. If you set this option to Maximum, the printing speed will be high, but the printing quality will be low. (PCL driver only) •Graphic Controller: It allows you to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode. -Grayscale Enhancement: It allows users to preserve the details of nature photos, and improve contrast and readability among gray scaled colors, when printing color documents in grayscale. (PCL driver only) -Fine Edge: It allows you to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability. •Toner Save: Adjusting this option extends the life of your toner cartridges and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. -You can move the slider from No Saving to Maximum Saving to reduce toner consumption. 3.Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Adjusting the sharpness and smoothness Screen options This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. The three screen options are Normal, Enhanced and Detailed. 1.To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). 2.Click the Graphics tab then select Advanced in Color Mode. 3.Select the Matching tab. 4.Select necessary options in the Screen. •Printer default: Follows the set value of Screen mode from the printer. •Normal: This mode will generate printouts with smooth tone over the entire page. •Enhanced: This mode will generate printouts with sharp texts and smooth graphic/photo objects in the page. •Detailed: This mode will generate printouts with sharp details over the entire page. 5.Select OK. Changing the default print settings Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver. 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing preferences. If Printing preferences item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. 5. Change the settings on each tab. 6. Click OK. If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences. Setting your machine as a default machine 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. •For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. •For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. •For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Devices and Printers. •For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select your machine. 4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer. For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2, if Set as default Printing_ 65 printer item has a ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with the selected printer. Printing to a file (PRN) You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. You can print the document to a file instead of routing it directly to a printer. The document is saved with the printer formating, such as font selection and color specifications, in a .prn file that can be printed on another printer. To save a print job as a file: 1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window. 2. Click Print. 3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For example c:\Temp\file name. If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in Documents and Settings or Users. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. Macintosh printing This section explains how to print using a Macintosh. You need to set the print environment before printing. • USB connected, see "Macintosh" on page 31. • Network connected, see "Macintosh" on page 38. Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh: 1. Open an application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications). 3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click OK. 4. Open the File menu and click Print. 5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print. 6. Click Print. Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features when using your machine. Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following. •The setting options may differ depending on models and Macintosh OS versions. •The following panes may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. Layout The Layout dialog provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features. •Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page (See "Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper" on page 66). •Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on UI. •Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet. •Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees. Printing_ 66 Graphics The Graphics dialog provides options for selecting Quality and Color Mode. Select Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the graphic features. •Quality: This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. A higher setting will also increase the time it takes to print a document. •Color Mode: You can set the color options. Setting to Color typically produces the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale. Printer Features Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type. Printer Settings Set Toner Save option to extend the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. • Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine. • On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page. • Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option. To access above feature: 1. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 2. Select your printer, and click on Show info button. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, select your printer and click on Options & Supplies button. 3. Click on Installable Options menu from the drop-down list in Printer info window. • For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, move to Driver tab. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. 3. Select the other options you want to use. 4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. Linux printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options. It means that the features are not supported. Printing from applications There are several Linux applications that allow you to print using the Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print using any of these applications. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Print directly using LPR. 3. From the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties.Printing_ 67 4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window. •General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the documents. It adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet. •Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options such as spacing or columns. •Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files such as color options, image size or image position. •Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper source and special print features. If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not supported by your machine. Automatic/manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models. You can alternatively use the lpr printing system or other applications for odd-even printing. 5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window. 6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing. 7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job. To abort the current job, click Cancel. Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS LPR utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard LPR tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program. To print any document file: 1. Type lpr from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears. When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click Open. 2. From the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change the print job properties. 3. Click OK to start printing. Configuring printer properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various properties for your printer. 1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator. If necessary, switch to Printers configuration. 2. Select your machine from the available printers list and click Properties. 3. The Printer Properties window opens. The following five tabs display at the top of the window: •General: This option allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration. •Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab. •Driver: Allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options. •Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list. •Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class. 4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.Management tools_ 68 8.management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine. This chapter includes: • Introducing useful management tools • Using SyncThru™ Web Service • Using the Smart Panel program • Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator Introducing useful management tools The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently. • "Using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 68. • "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69. • "Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator" on page 70. Using SyncThru™ Web Service Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for SyncThru™ Web Service. If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™ Web Service to: • View the machine’s device information and check its current status. • Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters. • Change printer preference. • Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status. • Get support for using the machine. To access SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. Logging into SyncThru™ Web Service Before configuring options in SyncThru™ Web Service, you need to log-in as an administrator. You can still use SyncThru™ Web Service without logging in but you won’t have access to Settings tab and Security tab. 1.Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 2.Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 SyncThru™ Web Service overview Some tabs may not appear depending on your model. Information tab This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports such as an error report and so on. •Active Alerts: This item allows you to check the alerts occurred in the machine and their severity. •Supplies: This item allows you to check how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge. •Usage Counters: This item allows you to check the usage count by print types: simplex, duplex. •Current Settings: This item allows you to check the machine and network information. •Print information: This item allows you to print reports such as system related reports, e-mail address and font reports. Settings tab This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and network. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. •Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine. -System: You can set settings related to your machine. -Printer: You can set settings related to printing jobs. -E-mail Notification: You can set e-mail notification feature and e-mail address of recipients who will receive the notification. •Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, network protocols and so on. -SNMP: You can exchange of management information between network devices using SNMP. -Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP): You can set the outgoing e-mail server. -Restore Default: You can restore default network settings. Security tab This tab allows you to set system and network security information. You need to log-in as an administrator to view this tab. •System Security: You can set the system administrator’s information and also enable or disable machine features. •Network Security: You can set settings for HTTPs, IPSec, IPv4/IPv6 filtering, 802.1x, Authentication servers. Maintenance tab This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu. •Firmware Upgrade: You can upgrade your machine’s firmware.Management tools_ 69 •Contact Information: You can view the contact information. •Link: You can view the links to useful sites where you can download or check information. E-mail notification setup You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain person's e-mail automatically. This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator. 1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5. From the Settings tab, select Machine Settings > E-mail Notification. If you haven’t configured outgoing server environment, go to Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP) to configure network environment before setting e-mail notification. 6. Click Add button to add e-mail notification user. Set the recipient name and e-mail address(es) with notification items you want to receive an alert for. 7. Click Apply. If the firewall is activated, the e-mail may not be sent successfully. In that case, contact the a network administrator. Setting the system administrator information Set the system administrator information. This setting is necessary for using the e-mail notification option. 1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru™ Web Service website. A log-in page appears. 4. Type in the ID and Password then click Login. If it’s your first time logging into SyncThru™ Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. •ID: admin •Password: sec00000 5. From the Security tab, select System Security > System Administrator 6. Enter the name of the administrator, phone number, location and E-mail address. 7. Click Apply. Using the Smart Panel program Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status, and allows you to customize the machine’s settings. For Windows and Macintosh, Smart Panel is installed automatically when you install the machine software. For Linux, you can download Smart Panel from the Samsung website (See "Installing the Smart Panel" on page 32). To use this program, your computer has to meet the following system requirements: •Windows. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 29). •Mac OS X 10.3 or higher. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 29). •Linux. Check that your computer’s CPU, RAM and HDD meet or exceed specification (See "System requirements" on page 29). •Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML Help. If you need to know the exact model number of your machine, you can check the supplied software CD. Understanding Smart Panel If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Smart Panel. You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area (in Linux). Windows Double-click this icon in Windows. Linux Click this icon in Linux. Or, if you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Samsung Printers > your printer driver name > Smart Panel. •If you have already installed more than one Samsung machine, first select the correct machine model you want in order to access the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows or Linux) the Smart Panel icon and select your machine. •The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use. In case of Mac OS 10.3 1. Click Print & Fax in System Preferences. 2. Click Set up Printers.... 3. Select printer in list and double click it. 4. Click Utility. In case of Mac OS 10.4 1. Click Print & Fax in System Preferences. 2. Select printer in list and click Printer Queue…. 3. Click Utility. In case of Mac OS 10.5 1. Click Print & Fax in System Preferences. 2. Select printer in list and click Open Printer Queue…. 3. Click Utility. In case of Mac OS 10.6Management tools_ 70 1. Click Print & Fax in System Preferences. 2. Select printer in list and click Open Printer Queue…. 3. Click Printer Setup. 4. Click Utility tab. 5. Click Open Printer Utility. The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the machine, the estimated level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various other types of information. You can also change settings. 1 Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s). The machine and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use. Some machines do not have this feature. 2 Buy Now Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online. 3 User’s Guide View the User’s Guide. This button changes to Troubleshooting Guide when error occurs. You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user’s guide. 4 Printer Setting Configure various machine settings in the Printer Settings Utility window. Some machines do not have this feature. If you connect your machine to a network, the SyncThru™ Web Service window appears instead of the Printer Settings Utility window. 5 Driver Setting Set all of the machine options you need in the Printer Preferences window. This feature is available only for Windows (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings Right-click (in Windows or Linux) the Smart Panel icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options window. Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices. You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator (See "Installing the Unified Linux Driver" on page 32). After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop. Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop. You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window. 1 Printers Configuration 2 Ports Configuration To use the on screen help, click Help. 3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator. Printers configuration window Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes. Printers tab View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window. 1 Switches to Printers configuration. 2 Shows all of the installed machine. 3 Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine.Management tools_ 71 The printer control buttons are, as follows: •Refresh: Renews the available machines list. •Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines. •Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine. •Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine. •Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine. •Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly. •Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties. Classes tab The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes. 1 Shows all of the machine classes. 2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class. •Refresh: Renews the classes list. •Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class. •Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class. Ports configuration In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port, and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason. 1 Switches to Ports configuration. 2 Shows all of the available ports. 3 Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status. • Refresh: Renews the available ports list. • Release port: Releases the selected port.Maintenance_ 72 9.maintenance This chapter provides information about maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge. This chapter includes: • Printing a machine report • Cleaning a machine • Storing the toner cartridge • Tips for moving & storing your machine Printing a machine report You can print a configuration page to view current printer settings, or to help troubleshoot printer problems. In ready mode, press and hold the Cancel ( ) button for about 5 seconds, then release. A configuration page prints out. Cleaning a machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the most optimum printing quality. •Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet. •If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend that you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful if inhaled. Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine. Cleaning the inside During the printing process, paper, toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears or reduces these problems. 1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. 2. Press the release button, completely open the front cover. 3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine. 4. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle. 5. Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit. •Do not touch the green surface of the drum located in the imaging unit. Use the handle on the imaging unit to avoid touching this Maintenance_ 73 area. •Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit. •If you leave the front cover open for more than a few minutes, the imaging unit can be exposed to light. This will cause damage to the imaging unit. Close the front cover should the installation need to be halted for any reason. 6. With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridges area and their cavities. After cleaning, let the machine to dry completely. •If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. •If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we recommend you to use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows into the air then might be harmful to you. 7. Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit, push imaging unit into the machine. 8. Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place. 9. Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine. 10. Reinstall all the compartments into the machine and close the front cover. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. 11. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on. Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridge storage Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge. Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet. Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge according to the following guidelines: • Inside the protective bag from the original package. • Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if was installed in the machine. • Do not store consumable in any of the following conditions: -Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F). -Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.Maintenance_ 74 -An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature. -Direct sunlight or room light. -Dusty places. -A car for a long period of time. -An environment where corrosive gases are present. -An environment with salty air. Handling instructions • Do not touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge. • Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock. • Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage. Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges. Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung brand toner cartridge. Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print yield may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often. Tips for moving & storing your machine • When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality. • When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.Troubleshooting_ 75 10.troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. This chapter includes: • Redistributing toner • Tips for avoiding paper jams • Clearing paper jams • Solving other problems Redistributing toner It is possible that colored images may be printed with incorrect colors due to flawed mixing of toner colors when one of the colored toner cartridges is low on toner. You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner. The Smart Panel program window appears on the computer telling you which cartridge is low on toner (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). 1. Press the release button, completely open the front cover. 2. Grasp the handle on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine. 3. Holding both handles on the toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side to side to evenly distribute the toner. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 4. Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine. 5. Close the front cover. Make sure the cover is securely latched. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam occurs, refer to the guidelines below (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 76. • Follow the procedures on "Changing the tray size" on page 53. Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. • Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray. • Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing. • Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading. • Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.Troubleshooting_ 76 • Do not mix paper types in a tray. • Use only recommended print media ("Setting the paper size and type" on page 58). • Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray. Clearing paper jams To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and carefully. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam. If a paper jam occurs, the status LED on the control panel lights orange. Find and remove the jammed paper. If paper is jammed in the paper feed area, follow the next steps to release the jammed paper. In the tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If the paper does not eject, go to the next step. 2. Pull out the tray. 3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. If the paper does not eject when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check the fuser area around the toner cartridge (See "Inside the machine" on page 76). 4. Insert the tray back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing automatically resumes. Inside the machine Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Be careful when removing paper form this area to prevent getting your fingers burnt. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If the paper does not eject, go to the next step. 2. To remove the jammed paper, open the rear cover. 3. Carefully remove the jammed paper by pulling in the direction as shown below. Most of the jammed paper can be removed in this step. Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover. It is hot and could cause burns. Be careful when removing paper from this area to prevent getting your fingers burnt. If the paper does not eject when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check the paper exit area (See "In the paper exit area" on page 76). 4. Close the rear cover. Make sure that it is securely closed. Printing automatically resumes. In the paper exit area Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Be careful when removing paper form this area to prevent getting your fingers burnt.Troubleshooting_ 77 1. Gently pull the paper out the output tray. If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull, stop and go to the next step. 2. To remove the jammed paper, open the rear cover. 3. Carefully remove the paper by pulling in the direction as shown below. Most of the jammed paper can be removed in this step. If you cannot find the jammed paper, of if there is any resistance removing the paper, go to the next step. If the paper tears, make sure that all of the paper fragments are removed from the machine. 4. Push the fuser levers upwards. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper form the machine. 5. Open the top cover and inner cover. 2 1 6. Holding the inner cover open, carefully take the jammed paper out the machine. The inner cover will then close automatically. Do not touch the fuser inside the inner cover. It is hot and could cause burns. Be careful when removing paper from this area to prevent getting your fingers burnt.Troubleshooting_ 78 7. Close the top cover. Make sure that it is securely closed. 8. Push the fuser levers downwards. 9. Open and then close the rear cover or front cover to resume printing. Solving other problems The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, contact a service representative. Other problems include: • See "System problems" on page 78. • See "Power problems" on page 78. • See "Paper feeding problems" on page 79. • See "Printing problems" on page 80. • See "Printing quality problems" on page 81. • See "Common Windows problems" on page 84. • See "Common Linux problems" on page 84. • See "Common Macintosh problems" on page 85. System problems Condition Suggested solutions The red error light is on. Turn the machine on/off. If the problem persists, contact a service representative (See "Contact SAMSUNG worldwide" on page 94”). The machine is experiencing problems that require service such as LSU error or fuser error. Power problems Click this link to open an animation about power problems.Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power, or the connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. • Plug in the power cord and press Power ( ) button on the control panel. • Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. -For Local Printing - For Network (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W only) Troubleshooting_ 79 Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 76). Paper sticks together. • Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper. • Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together, replace with a new stack. Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size and weight. Paper does not feed into the machine. • Remove any obstructions from inside the machine. • Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly. • There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. • The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). The paper keeps jamming. • There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. • An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris. Transparencies stick together in the paper exit. Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine. Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes. Condition Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 80 Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print. The machine is not receiving power. Check the power cord connections. The machine is not selected as the default machine. Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows. Check the machine for the following: • The front cover is not closed. Close the front cover. • Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam (See "Clearing paper jams" on page 76). • No paper is loaded. Load paper (See "Loading paper in the tray" on page 54). • The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge. If a system error occurs, contact a service representative. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective. If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different machine cable. The port setting is incorrect. Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one. The machine may be configured incorrectly. Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). The printer driver may be incorrectly installed. Repair the machine software (See "Installing USB connected machine’s driver" on page 30, "Installing network connected machine’s driver" on page 37). The machine is malfunctioning. • Check the LEDs on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. If the error cannot be cleared, contact a service representative. • Checking an error message is also possible from the Smart Panel on your computer (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job. Allocate more hard disk space on your computer for spooling, and try printing. The output tray is full. It can hold up to 80 (80 g/m2 ) sheets of plain paper. Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing. If the machine is used for a long time continuously, the printing speed could be slowed down, or the machine could pause to cool down. Wait for the machine to cool down. Printing automatically resumes after the machine is cooled down. The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source. The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect. For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences. Select the correct paper source. (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). A print job is extremely slow. The job may be very complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings. Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be incorrect. Change the page orientation in your application. See the printer driver help screen. The paper size and the paper size settings do not match. Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray. Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use. Condition Possible cause Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 81 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem. The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete. The machine cable is loose or defective. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable. The wrong printer driver was selected. Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected. The software application is malfunctioning. Try printing a job from another application. The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again. If you are in a DOS environment, the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly. See "Changing font setting (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-32 5W(K)/ /CLP-326W only)" on page 51. Pages print, but they are blank. The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner. Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the toner cartridge. The file may have blank pages. Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages. Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective. Contact a service representative. The machine does not print PDF file correctly. Some graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The print quality of photos is not good. Images are not clear. The resolution of the photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced. Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray. Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing. This is not a problem. Just keep printing. The machine does not print special- sized paper, such as billing paper. The Paper size and paper size setting do not match. Set the correct paper size in the Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). The printed billing paper is curled. The paper type setting does not match. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thick (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). The printed paper is curled. Paper curl occurs dut to many different factors such as temperature humidity, paper type, high coverage printing, etc. Use the Paper Curl Reduction option. Go to Printing Preferences (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60), click Advanced tab, and click the Paper Curl Reduction check box. This option will optimize environmental factors to reduce the paper curl level. Condition Suggested solutions Light or faded print • If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life (See "Redistributing toner" on page 75). If this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner cartridge. • The paper may not meet paper specification; for example, the paper is too moist or too rough (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low. Adjust the print resolution. See the help screen of the printer driver. • A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72). • The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU by opening and closing the front cover several times and if the problem still occurs call the contact a service representative. Condition Possible cause Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 82 The top half of the paper is printed lighter than the rest of the paper The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to the Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled. Toner specks • The paper may not meet specification; for example, the paper is too moist or too rough (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • The paper path may need cleaning (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72). Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page. • A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job. • The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to printer properties, click the Paper tab and set type to Thick Paper (See "Opening printing preferences" on page 60). • If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. White Spots White spots appear on the page. • The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from the paper falls to the inner devices within the machine, which means the transfer belt may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a service representative. • The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative. Condition Suggested solutions Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page: • The imaging unit has probably been scratched. Remove the imaging unit and install a new one (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on page 87). If white vertical streaks appear on the page: • The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU by opening and closing the front cover several times and if the problem still occurs call the contact a service representative. Color or Black background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable: • Change to a lighter weight paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Check the machine’s environment: very dry (low humidity) or high humidity (higher than 80% RH) conditions can increase the amount of background shading. • Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). Toner smear • Clean the inside of the machine. See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72. • Check the paper type and quality. See "Print media specifications" on page 92. • Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86. Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals: • The toner cartridge may be damaged. If a repetitive mark occurs on the page, print a cleaning sheet several times to clean the cartridge. After the printout, if you still have the same problems, remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). • Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages. • The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative. Condition Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 83 Background scatter A Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page. • The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a fresh ream of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture. • If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems. • If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application or the printer properties. Toner particles are around bold characters or pictures The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to the Printing Preferences, click the Paper tab, and set the paper type to Recycled. Misformed characters • If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try a different paper (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). Page skew • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. Condition Suggested solutions Curl or wave • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. • Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl ( See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Wrinkles or creases • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Back of printouts are dirty • Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72). Solid Color or Black pages A • The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. • The toner cartridge may be defective and need replacing. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). • The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Loose toner • Clean the inside of the machine (See "Cleaning the inside" on page 72). • Check the paper type and quality (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86). • If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Condition Suggested solutionsTroubleshooting_ 84 Common Windows problems Condition Suggested solutions “File in Use” message appears during installation. Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver. “General Protection Fault”, “Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or “Illegal Operation” messages appear. Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again. “Fail To Print”, “A printer timeout error occurred” messages appear. These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred. Refer to the Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages. Common Linux problems Character Voids A Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black: • If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal. • You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it over. • The paper may not meet paper specifications (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear: • The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. • The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one (See "Print media specifications" on page 92). • If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine: • Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. • Change the printer option and try again. Go to printer properties, click Paper tab and set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the "Opening printing preferences" on page 60 for details. An unknown image repetitively appears on a next few sheets or loose toner, light print, or contamination occurs. Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft.) or above. The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging. You can set this option through Printer Setting Utility (See "Altitude adjustment" on page 50). Condition Suggested solutions condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print. • Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device. • Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped string, press the Start button. After that normal operation of the machine should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occur. For instance, this could be an attempt to print a document when the port is claimed by a scanning application. • Ensure the port is not busy. Since functional components of machine (printer and scanner) share the same I/O interface (port), the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device. The other user will encounter “device busy” response. You should open ports configuration and select the port assigned to your machine. In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by some other application. If this is the case, you should either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button, if you are sure that the present application is not functioning properly. • Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item. • The CUPS (Common UNIXPrinting System) version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket printing instead of ipp or install a later version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).Troubleshooting_ 85 Refer to the Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages. Common Macintosh problems condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The document has printed, but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X 10.3.2. Update your Mac OS to OS Mac OS X 10.3.3. or higher. Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing. Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the Cover page. When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly. Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader. Refer to the Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages. Some color images come out all black. This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color space of the document is indexed color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com. Some color images come out in unexpected color. This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB color space and it is converted through CIE color space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System, you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www.ghostscript.com. The machine does not print whole pages, and output is printed on half the page. It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252. The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem. I encounter the “Cannot open port device file” error when printing a document. Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the mfp port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the mfp port by selecting Release port in Port configuration window. condition Suggested solutions condition Suggested solutionsSupplies_ 86 11.supplies This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies and maintenance parts available for your machine. This chapter includes: • How to purchase • Available supplies • Maintenance parts • Replacing the toner cartridge • Replacing the imaging unit • Replacing the waste toner container Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories. How to purchase To order Genuine Samsung supplies, accessories and, maintenance parts, contact your local Samsung dealer or the authorized retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.samsung.com/supplies, select your country/region, and obtain information on calling for service. Available supplies When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of supplies for your machine: Type Average yield a a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Standard yield toner cartridge • Average continuous black cartridge yield: 1,500 standard pages (Black) • Average continuous color cartridge yield: 1,000 standard pages (Yellow/Magenta/Cy an) K407(CLT-K407S): Black C407(CLT-C407S): Cyan M407(CLT-M407S): Magenta Y407(CLT-Y407S): Yellow Region A b b.Region A: Albania, Austria, Belgium, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland and UK K4072(CLT-K4072S): Black C4072(CLT-C4072S): Cyan M4072(CLT-M4072S): Magenta Y4072(CLT-Y4072S): Yellow Region B c c. Region B: Bangladesh, China, India, and Nepal K4073(CLT-K4073S): Black C4073(CLT-C4073S): Cyan M4073(CLT-M4073S): Magenta Y4073(CLT-Y4073S): Yellow Imaging Unit Approx. 24,000 images d d.Image counts based on one color on each page. If you print documents in full color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black), the life of this item will be reduced by 25%. CLT-R407 Waste toner container Approx. 10,000 images d CLT-W409 To replace a toner cartridge, see "Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 86. Depending on the options and percentage of image area, job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ. You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, supplies will be incompatible with your machine since the system configurations vary from country to country. Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. Maintenance parts To purchase maintenance parts, contact the source where you bought the machine. Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider, dealer, or the retailer where you bought the machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its “Average Yield”. Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts, see table below. The purpose of which is to maintain your machine in top working condition. The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met. Parts Average yield a a.It will be affected by operating system used, computing performance, application software, connecting method, media type, media size and job complexity. Fuser unit Approx. 50,000 pages (B&W)/ 12,500 pages (Color) Transfer roller Approx. 50,000 pages (B&W)/ 12,500 pages (Color) Transfer belt (ITB) Approx. 50,000 pages (B&W)/ 12,500 pages (Color) Paper feed roller Approx. 50,000 pages Replacing the toner cartridge Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge. The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C) and black (K). Part nameSupplies_ 87 A toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life. The printer stops printing. Also, the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer telling you to replace the cartridge (See "Using the Smart Panel program" on page 69). At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the model number for the toner cartridge used in your machine (See "Available supplies" on page 86). Samsung does not recommend using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Samsung cannot guarantee non-genuine Samsung toner cartridge's quality or damages it can cause to the machine. Also service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. 1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool. 2. Press the release button, completely open the front cover. 3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine. 4. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package. 5. Pull out the hopper sheet from a new toner cartridge. 6. Holding both handles a new toner cartridge, thoroughly rock it from side to side to evenly distribute the toner. 7. Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface as shown below and remove the protecting cover. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash it in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. 8. Make sure that the color of the toner cartridge matches the color slot and then grasp the handles on the toner cartridge. Insert the cartridge until it clicks into place. 9. Close the front cover. Make sure the cover is securely latched and then turn the machine on. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. Replacing the imaging unit When the life span of the imaging unit has expired, the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer, indicating the imaging unit needs to be placed. Otherwise, your machine stops printing.Supplies_ 88 1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool. 2. Press the release button, completely open the front cover. 3. Grasp the handles on the toner cartridge and pull to remove the cartridge from the machine. 4. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle. 5. Pull the imaging unit out of the machine using the groove on the front of the imaging unit. 6. Take a new imaging unit out of its package. •Don’t use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the imaging unit package. You could damage the surface of the imaging unit. •Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit. •To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary. 7. Holding the groove on the front of the imaging unit, push imaging unit into the machine. 8. Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place. 9. Slide the toner cartridge back into the machine. 10. Close the front cover firmly. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. Please make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly. If any toner cartridge is installed improperly, the front cover do not close. 11. Turn the machine on.Supplies_ 89 Each LED blinks red in a repeated order. Wait for about 1.5 minutes for your machine to get ready. Replacing the waste toner container When the life span of the waster toner container has expired, the Smart Panel program window appears on the computer, indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced. Otherwise, your machine stops printing. 1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to cool. 2. Open the front cover. 3. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle. Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner dose not spill. 4. Remove the container’s cap from the container as shown below and use it to close the waste toner container opening. 2 1 Do not tilt or turn over the container. 5. Take a new waste toner container out of its package. 6. Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in place. 7. Close the front cover firmly. If the front cover is not completely closed, the machine will not operate. Please, make sure all toner cartridges are installed properly. If any toner cartridge is installed improperly, the front cover do not close. 8. Turn the machine on.Specifications_ 90 12.specifications This chapter covers the machine’s primary specifications. This chapter includes: • Hardware specifications • Environmental specifications • Electrical specifications • Print media specifications The specification values are listed below: specification are subject to change without notice: See www.samsung.com/printer for possible changes in information. Hardware specifications Item Description Dimension Height 243 mm (9.57 inches) Depth 313 mm (12.32 inches) Width 388 mm (15.28 inches) Weight Machine with consumables 11 Kg (24.25 lbs) Package weight Paper 1.50 Kg (3.31 lbs) Plastic 0.45 Kg (0.99 lbs) Wireless a a.CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W only. Module CLX-NWA20L Environmental specifications Item Description Noise Level a a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing. Ready mode Background noise level Printing mode Less than 45 dBA (Color printing) Less than 47 dBA (Black and White printing) Temperature Operation 10 to 32 °C (50 to 89.6 °F) Storage (Packed) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH Storage (Packed) 10 to 90% RH Electrical specifications Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty.Item Description Power rating a a.See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine. 110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V 220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 350 W Ready mode Less than 60 W Power save mode • CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/ CLP-326: Less than 5 W • CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N: Less than 6 W • CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W: Less than 7 W Power off mode Less than 0.45 W Specifications_ 91Specifications_ 92 Print media specifications Type Size Dimensions Weight a a.If media weight is over 120 g/m2 (32 lbs bond), load a paper into the tray one by one. Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.50 x 11.00 inches) 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lbs bond). 130 sheets of 80 g/m2 (21 lbs bond) paper for the tray. Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.00 inches) US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.50 x 13.00 inches) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches) Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.50 x 13.50 inches) JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches) A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.50 inches) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. 5 sheets for manual feeding in the tray. No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.50 inches) DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches) C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches) No.9 98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches) 6 3/4 92 x 165 mm (3.62 x 6.50 inches) Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. 5 sheets for manual feeding in the tray. Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. Labels c c. Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield). This means the numeric level of smoothness. Letter, A4 Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. Card stock PostCard 101.60 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 inches) 105 to 163 g/m2 (28 to 43 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. e f Transparency d d.Recommended media: Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox 3R91331 (A4), Xerox 3R2780 (Letter). e.Recommended media: 0.104 to 0.124 mm (0.004094 to 0.004882 inches) transparency paper. f. In case of color printing using transparencies, the picture quality would be lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead projector. Letter, A4, Refer to the Plain paper section - 1 sheet for manual feeding in the tray Glossy Photo g Letter, A4 Refer to the Pain paper section 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. Matte Photo Letter, A4, PostCard 4 x 6 Refer to the Pain paper section 111 to 220 g/m2 (30 to 58 lbs bond) for manual feeding in the tray. Minimum size (custom) 76 x 152.4 mm (3.00 x 6.00 inches) 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs bond) Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.02 inches) Capacity b b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness and environmental conditions. Specifications_ 93 g.Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A). Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A).Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 94 contact samsung worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center. Country/Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 BAHRAIN 8000-4726 BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) www.samsung.com/be_fr (French) BRAZIL 0800-124-421 4004-0000 www.samsung.com CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com CHINA 400-810-5858 010-6475 1880 www.samsung.com COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com CZECH REPUBLIC 800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com EGYPT 0800-726786 EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 FINLAND 030-6227 515 www.samsung.com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/min) www.samsung.com GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com HONDURAS 800-7919267 www.samsung.com HONG KONG (852) 3698-4698 www.samsung.com/hk www.samsung.com/hk_en/ HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com INDIA 3030 8282 1800 110011 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 www.samsung.com INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 021-5699-7777 www.samsung.com ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com JORDAN 800-22273 KSA 9200-21230 www.samsung.com BAHRAIN 8000-4726 LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/min) www.samsung.com NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com NORWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com Country/Regio n Customer Care Center Web SiteContact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 95 PHILIPPINES 1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 02-5805777 www.samsung.com POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678) 022-607-93-33 www.samsung.com PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com QATAR 800-2255 REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SPAIN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678) www.samsung.com SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com SYRIA 1825-22-73 TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 TAIWAN 0800-329-999 www.samsung.com THAILAND 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 www.samsung.com TRINIDAD & TOBAGO 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com UKRAINE 8-800-502-000 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru Country/Regio n Customer Care Center Web Site UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com Country/Regio n Customer Care Center Web SiteGlossary_ 96 glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide. 802.11 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). 802.11b/g/n 802.11b/g/n can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps, 802.11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps. 802.11b/g/n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices. Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals. ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once. AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white. BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform. BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system. CCD Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine. Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies. Control Panel A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine. Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage. CSV Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a de facto standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms. DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper. Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized. DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.Glossary_ 97 DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data. DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network. DMPr The Digital Media Printer (DMPr) is a device that allows printing in DLNA home network. The DMPr prints a page by combining images with an Extensible HyperText Markup Language (XHTML) template. DNS The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet. Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter. DPI Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size. DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle. Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day. ECM Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise. Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state. Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present. EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. FDI Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine. FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet). Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media. It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer. Gateway A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network. Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray. Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.Glossary_ 98 HDD Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces. IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity. IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer). Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website. IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard. IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute. IPP The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones. IPX/SPX IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN). ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards. ITU-T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication. ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions. JBIG Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web. LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP. LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine. MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks. MFP Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc. MH Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes. Glossary_ 99 MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6. Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information. MR Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted. NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX. OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape. An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush, cleaning mechanism, and paper. Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else. OSI Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical. PABX A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise. PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, dot matrix printer, and laser printers. PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format. PostScript PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image. Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer. Print Media The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used in a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier. PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute. PRN file An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks. Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints. PS See PostScript. PSTN The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access. Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution. SMB Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications Glossary_ 100 between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server. SSID Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters. Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address. TCP/IP The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run. TCR Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions. TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications. Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat/pressure from the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper. TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program. It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\\\ URL Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals. Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting. WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. WIA Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP. WPA-PSK WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security. WPS The Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is a standard for establishing a wireless home network. If your wireless access point supports WPS, you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer.Glossary_ 101 XPS XML Paper Specification (XPS) is a specification for a Page Description Language (PDL) and a new document format, which has benefits for portable document and electronic document, developed by Microsoft. It is an XML-based specification, based on a new print path and a vector-based device-independent document format.Index_ 102 index A adjusting tray size 50 B booklet printing 61 booklets 61 buttons cancel 27 demo print 27 power 27 print screen 26 wps 27 C change percentage of your document 62 cleaning inside 72 outside 72 cleaning a machine 72 control panel 25 convention 19 curled 84 D duplex printing (manual) printer driver 62 F favorites settings, for printing 60 features 21 machine features 90 power saving feature 51 supplied software 28 font setting 51 front view 23 G glossary 96 J jam tips for avoiding paper jams 75 L LED status/toner 26 wireless 26 Linux common Linux problems 84 driver installation for network connected 39 printer properties 67 printing 66 supplied software 29 system requirements 30 unified driver configurator 70 loading special media 56 M Macintosh common Macintosh problems 85 driver installation for network connected 38 printing 65 sharing a machine locally 33 system requirements 29 using SetIP 35, 47 manual tray using special media 56 N network driver installation Linux 39 Macintosh 38 Windows 37 installing environment 34 introducing network programs 34 IPv4 configuration 35 IPv6 configuration 36 SetIP program 35, 47 using a wired network 34 N-up printing Macintosh 66 Windows 61 O overlay printing create 63 delete 63 print 63 P paper changing the size 53 paper type setting 58 placing a machine adjusting the altitude 50 spacing 28 poster 61 power saver using power save mode 51 print media card stock 58 envelope 57 glossy paper 58 labels 57 output support 92 special media 56 transparency 57 print quality problems, solve 81 print resolution set Linux 67 print resolution, set Macintosh 66 printer driver features 59 printer properties Linux 67 printing changing the default print settings 64 fitting your document to a selected paper size 62 Linux 66 Macintosh 65 multiple pages on one sheet of paper Macintosh 66 Windows 61 poster 61Index_ 103 printing a document Windows 59 printing to a file 65 Printing a demo page 28 printing a document Linux 66 Macintosh 65 printing a machine report 72 problem, solve printing quality 81 problems paper feeding problems 79 R regulatory information 11 S safety information 7 symbols 7 service contact numbers 94 SetIP program 35, 47 Smart Panel font setting 51 general information 69 specifications general 90 print media 92 supplies available supplies 86 estimated toner cartridge life 74 ordering 86 replacing toner cartridge 86 SyncThru Web Service general information 68 T toner distributing 75 toner cartridge estimated life 74 handling instructions 74 non-Samsung and refilled 74 replacing the cartridge 86 storing 73 tray adjusting the width and length 53 turning on the machine 27 U understanding the control panel 26 cancel button 27 USB cable driver installation 30 using help 61 using overlay in windows 63 using watermarks in windows 62 W watermark create 62 delete 63 edit 63 print 62 Windows common Windows problems 84 driver installation for network connected 37 printing 59 sharing a machine locally 33 system requiremnets 29 using SetIP 35, 47 wireless WPS button 41 wireless network network cable 46 USB cable 41 wps PIN 41 CLP-320 Series Imprimante laser couleur Mode d'emploi imaginez les possibilités Merci d’avoir fait l’acquisition d’un produit Samsung. Copyright_ 2 Copyright © 2010 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Tous droits réservés. Le présent mode d’emploi n’est fourni qu’à titre informatif. Toutes les informations communiquées ci-après sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis. Samsung Electronics ne saurait être tenu pour responsable des dommages, directs ou indirects, consécutifs à l’utilisation de ce mode d’emploi. • Samsung et le logo Samsung sont des marques commerciales de Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. • Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 2008 Server R2 sont soit des marques déposées soit des marques commerciales de Microsoft Corporation. • TrueType, LaserWriter et Macintosh sont des marques commerciales d’Apple Computer, Inc. • Les autres noms de produit et de marque sont des marques commerciales de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Reportez-vous au fichier « LICENSE.txt » du CD-ROM fourni pour consulter les informations de licence Open Source. REV. 4.00Table des matières_ 3 Table des matières COPYRIGHT 2 TABLE DES MATIÈRES 3 7 Informations en matière de sécurité 12 Informations légales 21 A propos de ce mode d’emploi 23 Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil INTRODUCTION 25 25 Description de l’appareil 25 Vue avant 26 Vue arrière 27 Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande 28 Le panneau de commande 28 Voyants d’état/de toner 28 Voyant sans fil 29 Présentation des touches utiles 29 Bouton Impr. écran 29 Bouton d’impression de page de démonstration 29 Touche Annuler 29 Bouton WPS 29 Bouton Alimentation PRISE EN MAIN 30 30 Configuration du matériel 30 Emplacement 30 Impression d’une page de démonstration 30 Logiciel fourni 31 Configuration requise 31 Microsoft ® Windows ® 31 Macintosh 32 Linux 32 Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB 32 Windows 33 Macintosh 34 Linux 35 Partage local de l’appareil 35 Windows 36 Macintosh CONFIGURATION DU RÉSEAU (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/ CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W UNIQUEMENT) 37 37 Environnement réseau 37 Présentation des programmes réseau utiles 37 SyncThru™ Web Service 37 SyncThru™ Web Admin Service 37 SetIP 37 Utilisation d’un réseau câblé 38 Impression d’un rapport de configuration réseau 38 Création d’une adresse IP 38 Configuration IPv4 39 Configuration IPv6 40 Restauration des paramètres par défaut définis en usine à l’aide du SyncThru™ Web Service 40 Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau 40 WindowsTable des matières Table des matières_ 4 41 Macintosh 42 Linux CONFIGURATION DU RÉSEAU SANS FIL (CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W UNIQUEMENT) 44 44 Instructions de démarrage 44 Choisir votre connexion réseau 44 Nom du réseau sans fil et clé réseau 44 Choix du type d’installation réseau sans fil 44 À partir du panneau de commande 44 Depuis l’ordinateur 45 Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS 45 Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS 46 Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil à partir de l’ordinateur 46 Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble USB 51 Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble réseau 53 Fin de l’installation 53 Activation/désactivation du réseau Wi-Fi 53 Dépannage 53 Résolution des problèmes pouvant survenir lors de la configuration des paramètres sans fil et de l’installation du pilote de l’appareil 54 Résolution d’autres problèmes CONFIGURATION DE BASE 55 55 Réglage de l’altitude 55 Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut 55 A partir de votre ordinateur 56 Utilisation de la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie 56 Modification des paramètres de police (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP- 325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) 56 Réglage du mode humidity SUPPORTS ET BACS 57 57 Sélection du support d’impression 57 Recommandations pour sélectionner le support d’impression 57 Formats de support pris en charge dans chaque mode 58 Modification du format du bac 59 Chargement de papier dans le bac 59 Dans le bac 60 Alimentation manuelle dans le bac 62 Impression sur supports spéciaux 62 Enveloppes 62 Transparents 63 Étiquettes 63 Papiers cartonnés ou de format personnalisé 63 Papier à en-tête/papier pré-imprimé 63 Papier recyclé 64 Photo brillante 64 Photo mate 64 Réglage du type et du format de papier 64 Utilisation du support de sortie papier IMPRESSION 65 65 Présentation d’un programme utile 65 Samsung AnyWeb Print 65 Samsung Easy Color Manager 65 Fonctions des pilotes d’impression 65 Pilote d’impression 65 Impression de baseTable des matières Table des matières_ 5 66 Annulation d’une impression 66 Ouverture des préférences d’impression 66 Utilisation d’un réglage favori 67 Utilisation de l’aide 67 Utilisation des fonctions d’impression spéciales 67 Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille 67 Impression d’affiches 68 Impression de brochures (manuelle) 68 Impression recto verso (manuelle) 68 Modification des proportions de votre document 68 Impression d’un document sur un format de papier donné 69 Impression de filigranes 69 Utilisation de la surimpression 70 Options de l’onglet Graphiques 71 Modification des réglages d’impression par défaut 71 Définition de votre appareil comme appareil par défaut 71 Impression dans un fichier (PRN) 72 Impression Macintosh 72 Impression d’un document 72 Modification des paramètres de l’imprimante 73 Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille 73 Impression Linux 73 Impression à partir d’applications 74 Impression de fichiers 74 Configuration des propriétés de l’imprimante OUTILS DE GESTION 75 75 Présentation des outils de gestion utiles 75 Utilisation de l’alerte SyncThru™ Web Service 75 Pour accéder à SyncThru™ Web Service 75 Présentation de SyncThru™ Web Service 76 Configuration des notifications par e-mail 76 Définition des informations pour l’administrateur système 76 Utilisation du programme Smart Panel 76 Présentation de Smart Panel 77 Modification des paramètres du programme Smart Panel 78 Utilisation du configurateur de pilote unifié Linux 78 Ouverture d’Unified Driver Configurator 78 Fenêtre Printers configuration 79 Ports configuration MAINTENANCE 80 80 Impression d’un journal de l’appareil 80 Nettoyage d’un appareil 80 Nettoyage de l’extérieur 80 Nettoyage de l’intérieur 82 Stockage de la cartouche de toner 82 Stockage de la cartouche de toner 82 Instructions de manipulation 82 Utilisation de cartouches de toner d’une autre marque que Samsung et rechargées 82 Durée de vie estimée d’une cartouche 82 Conseils pour déplacer et ranger l’appareilTable des matières Table des matières_ 6 DÉPANNAGE 83 83 Redistribution du toner 83 Astuces pour éviter les bourrages papier 84 Résolution des bourrages papier 84 Dans le bac 84 À l’intérieur de l’appareil 85 Dans la zone du bac de sortie 87 Résolution d’autres problèmes 87 Problèmes liés au système 87 Problèmes d’alimentation 88 Problèmes d’alimentation papier 88 Problèmes d’impression 90 Problèmes de qualité d’impression 93 Problèmes Windows courants 94 Problèmes Linux courants 95 Problèmes Macintosh courants FOURNITURES 96 96 Comment commander 96 Consommables disponibles 96 Pièces de rechange 97 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner 98 Remplacement de l’unité d’imagerie 99 Remplacement du récupérateur de toner usagé CARACTÉRISTIQUES TECHNIQUES 101 101 Caractéristiques techniques du matériel 101 Caractéristiques techniques environnementales 102 Caractéristiques techniques électriques 103 Spécifications des supports d’impression CONTACT SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE 104 GLOSSAIRE 106 INDEX 112Informations en matière de sécurité_ 7 Informations en matière de sécurité Ces avertissements et précautions sont inclus afin d’éviter des blessures pour vous et d’autres personnes, ainsi que pour éviter des dommages potentiels à votre appareil. Veillez à lire et à comprendre toutes ces instructions avant d’utiliser l’appareil. Faites preuve de bon sens lors de l’utilisation d’appareils électriques et chaque fois que vous utilisez votre appareil. Observez en outre toutes les mises en garde et instructions mentionnées sur le produit et dans la documentation qui l’accompagne. Une fois que vous avez lu cette section, conservez-la pour pouvoir vous y reporter par la suite. Importante symboles de sécurité Cette section explique la signification des icônes et des signes de ce guide de l’utilisateur. Ces symboles de sécurité sont dans l’ordre, suivant le degré de danger. Explication des icônes et des signes utilisés dans le guide de l’utilisateur : Avertissement Situations dangereuses ou à risques pouvant entraîner des blessures graves ou la mort. Mise en garde Situations dangereuses ou à risques pouvant entraîner des blessures légères ou des dommages matériels. Ne pas essayer. Ne pas démonter. Ne pas toucher. Débranchez la prise d’alimentation de la prise murale. Assurez-vous que votre appareil est branché sur une prise de courant reliée à la terre. Contactez le service de maintenance pour obtenir de l’aide. Suivez les instructions à la lettre.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 8 Environnement d’exploitation Avertissement Ne pas utiliser si le câble d’alimentation électrique est endommagé ou si la prise électrique n’est pas reliée à la terre. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Ne pliez pas le câble d’alimentation électrique et ne placez pas d’objets lourds dessus. ► Le fait de marcher sur le câble d’alimentation électrique ou de l’écraser avec un objet lourd peut occasionner une décharge électrique ou un incendie. Ne rien poser sur l’appareil (eau, objets métalliques, objets lourds, bougies, cigarettes allumées, etc.). ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Ne retirez pas la fiche en tirant sur le câble ; ne manipulez pas la prise avec des mains mouillées. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si l’appareil surchauffe, libère de la fumée, émet des bruits étranges, ou produit une odeur bizarre : coupez immédiatement l’interrupteur d’alimentation et débranchez l’appareil. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Mise en garde Pendant un orage ou pendant une période de non-fonctionnement, retirez la fiche d’alimentation de la prise de courant. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si la fiche n’entre pas facilement dans la prise, ne forcez pas pour l’insérer. ► Appelez un électricien pour changer la prise de courant, sous peine de décharge électrique possible. Faites attention, la zone de sortie papier est chaude. ► Vous pouvez vous brûler. Veillez à ce qu’aucun animal domestique ne ronge les cordons d’alimentation, de téléphone et d’interface PC. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie et/ou de blessure pour votre animal domestique. Si on a laissé tomber l’appareil, ou si le boîtier semble endommagé, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service qualifié. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement après avoir suivi ces instructions, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service qualifié. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Si l’appareil présente un changement visible et brusque du niveau de performance, débranchez toutes les connexions de l’appareil et demandez une assistance auprès du personnel de service qualifié. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 9 Méthode d’utilisation Mise en garde Ne tirez pas avec force sur la feuille durant l’impression. ► Vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil. Lors de l’impression de grandes quantités, la partie inférieure de la zone de sortie papier peut devenir chaude. Ne laissez pas des enfants y toucher. ► Vous pouvez vous brûler. Faites attention de ne pas mettre la main entre l’appareil et le bac d’alimentation papier. ► Vous pourriez vous blesser. Lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé, évitez d’utiliser des objets métalliques pointus. ► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. N’obstruez pas l’orifice de ventilation et n’y poussez pas d’objets. ► La température des composants risquerait d’augmenter et pourrait provoquer des dommages ou un incendie. Ne laissez pas le papier s’empiler sur le réceptacle de sortie. ► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. Faites attention lorsque vous remplacez du papier ou que vous retirez du papier coincé. ► Les bords d’une feuille neuve sont tranchants et peuvent provoquer des coupures douloureuses. Le dispositif d’interruption d’’alimentation de cet appareil est son câble d’alimentation électrique. ► Pour couper l’alimentation, retirez le câble d’alimentation électrique de la prise électrique. Informations en matière de sécurité_ 10 Installation/déplacement Avertissement Ne placez pas l’appareil dans un endroit poussiéreux, humide ou sujet à des fuites d’eau. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Mise en garde Avant de déplacer l’appareil, éteignez-le et débranchez tous les cordons. Puis levez l’appareil: •si le poids de l’appareil est inférieur à 20 kg, une seule personne suffit ; •si le poids de l’appareil est de 20 kg, deux personnes sont nécessaires ; •si le poids de l’appareil est supérieur à 40 kg, 4 personnes sont nécessaires. ► L’appareil pourrait tomber et être endommagé ou blesser quelqu’un. Ne couvrez pas l’appareil et ne le placez pas dans un endroit confiné comme un placard. ► Si l’appareil n’est pas bien ventilé, il y a un risque d’incendie. Ne placez pas l’appareil sur une surface instable. ► L’appareil pourrait tomber et être endommagé ou blesser quelqu’un. Branchez directement le câble d’alimentation électrique dans une prise de courant correctement reliée à la terre. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. L’appareil doit être connecté au niveau de puissance indiqué sur l’étiquette. ► En cas de doute et si vous voulez vérifier le niveau de puissance utilisé, contactez le service d’électricité. Ne branchez pas un trop grand nombre d’appareils électriques sur une même prise murale ou sur une même rallonge. ► Une prise surchargée réduit les performances et constitue une source potentielle d’incendie et de décharges électriques. Utilisez exclusivement du câble AWG N°26 a a.AWG : American Wire Gauge, calibrage américain normalisé des fils. ou un câble de téléphone plus grand, si nécessaire. ► Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez d’endommager l’appareil. Pour un fonctionnement sûr, utilisez le câble d’alimentation électrique fourni avec votre appareil. Si vous utilisez un câble de plus de 2 mètres avec un appareil 140 V, le calibre doit être 16 AWG ou plus grand. ► Dans le cas contraire, l’appareil peut être endommagé et il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie.Informations en matière de sécurité_ 11 Entretien/contrôle Mise en garde Débranchez l’appareil de la prise secteur avant de nettoyer l’intérieur. Ne nettoyez pas l’appareil avec du benzène, du diluant pour peinture ou de l’alcool ; ne pulvérisez pas de l’eau directement dans l’appareil. ► Risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Gardez les produits de nettoyage hors de portée des enfants. ► Ils peuvent se blesser. Lorsque vous effectuez une tâche dans l’appareil pour remplacer des consommables ou nettoyer l’intérieur, ne le faites pas fonctionner. ► Vous pourriez vous blesser. Ne démontez pas, ne réparez pas et ne remontez pas l’appareil vous-même. ► Cela pourrait endommager l’appareil. Appelez un technicien agréé lorsque l’appareil doit être réparé. Gardez le câble d’alimentation et la surface de contact de la fiche exempts de poussière ou d’eau. ► Dans le cas contraire, il y a un risque de décharge électrique ou d’incendie. Pour nettoyer et faire fonctionner l’appareil, respectez à la lettre le guide d’utilisateur fourni avec l’appareil. ► Dans le cas contraire, vous pourriez endommager l’appareil. Ne retirez jamais les couvercles ou protections fixés avec des vis. ► L’appareil doit exclusivement être réparé par un technicien de maintenance Samsung. Utilisation des consommables Mise en garde Ne démontez pas la cartouche de toner. ► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez. Lorsque vous rangez les consommables comme les cartouches de toner, gardez-les hors de portées de enfants. ► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez. Ne brûlez aucun consommable comme une cartouche de toner ou une unité de chauffe. ► Cela pourrait provoquer une explosion ou déclencher un incendie incontrôlable. L’utilisation de consommables recyclés, comme le toner, peut endommager l’appareil. ► En cas de dommage lié à l’utilisation de consommables recyclés, des frais seront imputés. Lorsque vous changez la cartouche de toner ou que vous retirez un papier bloqué, faites attention de ne pas vous salir ou salir vos vêtements avec le toner. ► Les particules de toner peuvent être dangereuses si vous les inhalez ou les ingérez. Si du toner se dépose sur vos vêtements, n’utilisez pas d’eau chaude pour les laver. ► L’eau chaude fixe le toner sur le tissu. Utilisez de l’eau froide. Informations légales_ 12 Informations légales Cet appareil est conçu pour un environnement de travail normal et certifié avec plusieurs déclarations légales. Avertissement relatif à la sécurité laser Cette imprimante est certifiée conforme aux spécifications DHHS 21 CFR, chapitre 1, sous-chapitre J pour les produits laser de classe I(1) aux États-Unis, et certifiée dans les autres pays comme un produit laser de classe I, conformément aux spécifications IEC 60825-1:1993 + A1:1997 + A2:2001. Les produits laser de classe I ne sont pas considérés comme dangereux. Le système laser et l’imprimante sont conçus de manière à interdire tout accès aux rayonnements laser au-dessus d’un niveau de classe I pendant l’exploitation normale, les interventions de maintenance utilisateur, dans les conditions d’utilisation spécifiées. • Longueur d’onde : 800 nm • Divergence de faisceau - Parallèle : 12 degrés - Perpendiculaire : 30 degrés • Puissance ou énergie maximale en sortie : 5 mW AVERTISSEMENT N’utilisez jamais l’imprimante après avoir retiré le capot protecteur du module laser/scanner. Le faisceau lumineux, bien qu’invisible, pourrait endommager vos yeux. Lors de l’utilisation de cet appareil, ayez toujours à l’esprit les recommandations de sécurité suivantes, afin de réduire les risques d’incendie, de décharge électrique et d’autres accidents corporels : Consignes de sécurité relatives à l’ozone En mode d’utilisation normal, cet appareil génère de l’ozone. Cette production ne présente aucun risque pour l’utilisateur. Toutefois, il est préférable d’utiliser l’appareil dans un local correctement aéré. Pour obtenir des informations complémentaires sur l’ozone, contactez votre revendeur Samsung local.Informations légales_ 13 Économiseur d’énergie Cette imprimante est dotée d’un dispositif perfectionné d’économie d’énergie réduisant la consommation électrique en période d’inactivité. Lorsque l’imprimante ne reçoit pas de données pendant un certain temps, la consommation électrique est réduite automatiquement. ENERGY STAR et la marque ENERGY STAR sont des marques déposées aux États-Unis. Pour plus d’informations sur le programme ENERGY STAR, reportez-vous au site http://www.energystar.gov. Recyclage Veuillez recycler ou jeter les emballages de ce produit dans le respect de l’environnement. Chine uniquement Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif) Le symbole sur le produit, les accessoires ou la documentation indique que le produit et ses accessoires électroniques (par ex. chargeur, écouteurs, câble USB) ne doivent pas être éliminés en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. Pour éviter toute atteinte à l’environnement ou à la santé des personnes due à une mise au rebut non contrôlée, séparez cet appareil des autres déchets et recyclez-le afin de promouvoir une réutilisation durable des ressources matérielles. Les particuliers doivent contacter le revendeur chez qui ils ont acheté le produit ou l’administration appropriée pour s’informer sur le lieu et le moyen de recycler cet appareil tout en préservant l’environnement. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Cet appareil ne doit pas être mélangé avec d’autres déchets commerciaux lors de sa mise au rebut.Informations légales_ 14 Émissions radioélectriques Réglementation FCC Cet appareil est conforme à l’alinéa 15 de la réglementation FCC. Son exploitation ou utilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes : • Cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences nuisibles. • Cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris les interférences pouvant provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable. Ce matériel a été testé et satisfait aux limites s’appliquant aux appareils numériques de classe B, en vertu des dispositions de l’alinéa 15 de la réglementation FCC. Ces limites visent à assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interférences en zone résidentielle. Cet appareil génère, utilise et peut émettre de hautes fréquences radio et, s’il n’est pas installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions, peut provoquer des perturbations dans les communications radio. Il est toutefois possible que son utilisation dans un environnement domestique génère de nombreuses interférences. Le cas échéant, l’utilisateur devra faire le nécessaire pour les éliminer et prendra toutes les dépenses afférentes à sa charge. Si cet appareil provoque des interférences sur la réception radio ou télévision lors de sa mise sous tension et hors tension, essayez de résoudre le problème en adoptant l’une des mesures suivantes : • Réorientez ou repositionnez l’antenne de réception. • Éloignez l’équipement du récepteur. • Branchez l’appareil sur une prise différente de celle du récepteur. • Consultez votre distributeur ou un technicien radio/télévision qualifié pour obtenir de l’aide. Tout changement ou modification effectué sans l’accord exprès du fabricant pourrait annuler la capacité de l’utilisateur à utiliser cet équipement. Réglementations canadiennes relatives aux interférences radio Cet appareil numérique ne dépasse pas les limites de Classe B pour les émissions de parasites radio par des appareils numériques, telles que définies dans la norme sur les équipements provoquant des interférences intitulée « Digital Apparatus », ICES-003 de l’Industry and Science Canada. Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur : « Appareils Numériques », ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada. États-Unis d’Amérique Commission Fédérale des Télécommunications (Federal Communications Commission, FCC) Réglementation FCC alinéa 15 sur les émetteurs intentionnels Votre imprimante est susceptible de comporter des équipements à radiofréquences basse puissance (pour les communications sans fil) fonctionnant dans la bande des 2,4 GHz/5 GHz et destinés aux réseaux locaux radioélectriques. Cette section est applicable uniquement en présence de ces appareils. Reportez-vous à l’étiquette des spécifications techniques pour vérifier la présence de tels équipements sans fil. Les périphériques sans fil de votre système sont homologués uniquement pour être utilisés aux États-Unis d’Amérique si un numéro d’ID FCC se trouve sur l’étiquette du système. La FCC conseille de conserver un écart minimal de 20 cm entre l’équipement sans fil et l’utilisateur (membres non inclus). Cette distance de 20 cm (8 pouces) doit être respectée lorsque l’équipement sans fil est sous tension. La puissance d’émission du (ou des) périphérique(s) sans fil éventuellement intégrés à votre imprimante est largement inférieure aux limites d’exposition aux champs RF définies par la FCC. Cet émetteur ne doit pas être installé ou utilisé conjointement avec tout autre type d’antenne ou d’émetteur. L’utilisation de cet équipement est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) il ne doit pas occasionner d’interférences susceptibles de présenter un danger, et (2) il doit pouvoir capter toutes les interférences reçues, même si celles-ci sont de nature à entraîner son dysfonctionnement. Les appareils sans fil ne peuvent pas être réparés par l’utilisateur. Ne leur apportez aucune sorte de modification. Toute modification apportée à un appareil sans fil annule l’autorisation de l’utiliser. Contactez le fabricant pour toute modification. Déclaration de la FCC pour l’utilisation du réseau sans fil : Lors de l’installation et de l’utilisation du transmetteur et de l’antenne, la limite d’exposition aux radiofréquences fixée à 1 mW/cm² peut être dépassée à proximité de l’antenne. Par conséquent, l’utilisateur doit en permanence garder une distance minimale de 20 cm entre lui et l’antenne. Cet équipement ne doit pas être installé à proximité d’un autre émetteur ou d’une autre antenne émettrice.Informations légales_ 15 Turquie uniquement Russie uniquement Allemagne uniquement Remplacement de la prise (Royaume-Uni uniquement) Important Les fils électriques de cet appareil sont équipés d’une fiche électrique standard de 13 A (BS 1363) et d’un fusible de 13 A. Lorsque vous changez ou examinez le fusible, vous devez replacer le fusible de 13 A approprié. Vous devez ensuite replacer le capuchon du fusible. Si vous avez perdu le capuchon du fusible, n’utilisez pas la prise avant d’avoir replacé un autre capuchon. Prenez contact avec le détaillant qui vous a vendu l’appareil. La fiche électrique la plus utilisée au Royaume-Uni est la prise de 13 A. Cependant, certains bâtiments (particulièrement les plus anciens) ne disposent pas de prises de courant de 13 A. Vous devez alors vous procurer un adaptateur approprié. Ne retirez pas la fiche moulée d’origine. Si la fiche monocoque est endommagée, débarrassez-vous en immédiatement. Il n’est pas possible de la réparer et vous risqueriez de recevoir une décharge électrique si vous la branchiez dans une prise. Avertissement important Cet appareil doit être relié à la terre. Le code de couleurs suivant est appliqué aux fils des branchements électriques : • Vert et jaune : terre • Bleu : neutre • Brun : phase Si les fils de votre système électrique ne correspondent pas aux couleurs indiquées sur la fiche, procédez comme suit : Connectez le fil vert et jaune à la broche portant la lettre « E », le symbole de mise à la terre, la couleur verte ou les couleurs jaune et verte. Connectez le fil bleu à la broche signalée par la lettre « N » (neutre) ou par la couleur noire. Connectez le fil marron à la broche signalée par la lettre « L » ou par la couleur rouge. Un fusible de 13 A doit être présent dans la fiche, dans l’adaptateur ou sur le tableau électrique.Informations légales_ 16 Déclaration de conformité CE Approbations et certifications Le marquage CE apposé sur cet appareil signifie que Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. a déclaré l’appareil conforme aux directives 93/68/EEC de l’Union Européenne respectives suivantes : CLP-320 Series: directive basse tension (2006/95/CE), Directive EMC (2004/108/CE). CLP-325W(K): la Directive R&TTE (1999/5/EC) Vous pouvez consulter cette déclaration de conformité sur www.samsung.com/printer. Accédez à Assistance > téléchargements et entrez le nom de votre imprimante (MFP) pour parcourir cette déclaration. 1er janvier 1995 : directive 2006/95/EC du Conseil de l’UE, harmonisation des lois des États membres relatives aux équipements basse tension. 1er janvier 1996 : directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/CEE) du Conseil de l’UE, harmonisation des lois des États membres relatives à la compatibilité électromagnétique. 9 mars 1999 : directive 1999/5/CE relative à la conformité des équipements radios et des terminaux de télécommunications. Vous pouvez vous procurer le texte complet de la déclaration, décrivant en détail ces différentes directives et les normes correspondantes, auprès de votre distributeur Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Approbation européenne relative aux équipements radioélectriques (pour les produits comportant des équipements radio homologués par l’UE) Cette imprimante est susceptible de comporter des équipements à radiofréquences basse puissance (pour les communications sans fil) fonctionnant dans la bande des 2,4/5 GHz et destinés à un usage personnel ou professionnel. Cette section est applicable uniquement en présence de ces appareils. Reportez-vous à l’étiquette des spécifications techniques pour vérifier la présence de tels équipements sans fil. Les équipements sans fil présents dans votre imprimante peuvent uniquement être utilisés dans l’Union Européenne et les pays associés si la marque CE accompagnée d’un numéro d’enregistrement délivré par l’organisme compétent et un symbole d’avertissement figurent sur l’étiquette des spécifications techniques. La puissance d’émission du ou des périphériques sans fil éventuellement intégrés à votre imprimante est largement inférieure aux limites d’exposition aux champs RF définies par la directive R&TTE de la Commission européenne. États européens ayant obtenu l’approbation pour la technologie sans fil : EU Allemagne, Autriche, Belgique, Chypre, Danemark, Espagne, Estonie, Finlande, France (avec limitations de fréquences), Grèce, Hongrie, Irlande, Italie, Lettonie, Lituanie, Luxembourg, Malte, Pays-Bas, Pologne, Portugal, Royaume-Uni, République tchèque, Slovaquie, Slovénie et Suède Pays de l’AELE et de l’EEE Islande, Liechtenstein, Norvège et Suisse Pays européens ayant émis des restrictions : EU En France, la plage de fréquences autorisée est fixée entre 2446,5 et 2483,5 MHz pour les équipements dont la puissance d’émission est supérieure à 10 mW, comme les équipements sans fil Pays de l’AELE et de l’EEE Pas de limitations à l’heure actuelleInformations légales_ 17 Déclarations légales de conformité Conseils relatifs à l’utilisation d’équipements sans fil Votre imprimante est susceptible de comporter des équipements à radiofréquences basse puissance (pour les communications sans fil) fonctionnant dans la bande des 2,4 GHz et destinés aux réseaux locaux radioélectriques. La section ci-dessous donne un aperçu général des éléments à prendre en considération lors de l’utilisation d’équipements sans fil. Les limitations supplémentaires, les avertissements et les mesures de précaution spécifiques à certains pays sont indiquées dans les sections de ces pays (ou les sections de leur groupe de pays). Les périphériques sans fil de votre système sont homologués uniquement pour être utilisés dans les pays identifiés par la marque d’homologation pour les fréquences radio sur l’étiquette d’évaluation du système. Si le pays dans lequel vous allez utiliser le périphérique sans fil n’est pas répertorié, contactez l’agence d’homologation des fréquences radio la plus proche pour satisfaire aux normes imposées. Les appareils sans fil font l’objet d’une réglementation stricte, et leur utilisation peut ne pas être autorisée. La puissance d’émission du ou des périphériques sans fil éventuellement intégrés à votre imprimante est largement inférieure aux limites actuelles d’exposition aux champs RF. Les équipements sans fil (susceptibles de figurer dans votre imprimante) émettant beaucoup moins d’énergie que ce que les normes et les recommandations en matière de sécurité n’exigent. Le fabricant estime que ces équipements ne présentent aucun danger pour l’utilisateur. Quel que soit le niveau de puissance, il convient d’éviter au maximum les contacts humains pendant l’utilisation normale de l’appareil. Il est conseillé de conserver un écart minimal de 20 cm (8 pouces) entre l’équipement sans fil et l’utilisateur (membres non inclus). Cette distance de 20 cm (8 pouces) doit être respectée lorsque l’équipement sans fil est sous tension et émet. Cet émetteur ne doit pas être installé ou utilisé conjointement avec tout autre type d’antenne ou d’émetteur. Dans certains cas, les équipements sans fil font l’objet de restrictions. Des exemples de restrictions fréquentes sont indiqués ci-dessous : Les communications sans fil par fréquence radio peuvent créer des interférences avec les équipements des avions commerciaux. Actuellement, les règlements en vigueur dans les compagnies aériennes imposent d’éteindre les équipements sans fil pendant les vols. Les périphériques de communication IEEE 802.11 (également connu sous le nom Ethernet sans fil) et Bluetooth sont des exemples de périphériques permettant la communication sans fil. Dans les environnements où le risque d’interférences avec d’autres équipements ou services est néfaste ou considéré comme néfaste, l’utilisation d’appareils sans fil peut être limitée ou interdite. Parmi ces environnements, on compte notamment les aéroports, les hôpitaux et les lieux dont l’atmosphère est chargée d’oxygène ou de gaz inflammable. Lorsque vous vous trouvez dans un environnement où vous n’êtes pas sûr de pouvoir utiliser un appareil sans fil, demandez aux autorités compétentes l’autorisation d’allumer ou d’utiliser votre appareil sans fil. Chaque pays a mis en place des restrictions différentes pour l’utilisation d’appareils sans fil. Étant donné que votre système est équipé d’un appareil sans fil, vérifiez avant votre départ auprès de l’autorité d’approbation des fréquences radio la plus proche s’il existe des restrictions d’utilisation pour les appareils sans fil dans le pays de destination. Si votre système vous a été fourni avec un appareil sans fil intégré, n’utilisez pas cet appareil sans fil tant que tous les capots et protections ne sont pas installés, et que l’appareil n’est pas complètement assemblé. Les appareils sans fil ne peuvent pas être réparés par l’utilisateur. Ne leur apportez aucune sorte de modification. Toute modification apportée à un appareil sans fil annule l’autorisation de l’utiliser. Contactez le fabricant pour toute modification. Utilisez uniquement les pilotes autorisés pour le pays dans lequel l’appareil sera utilisé. Pour plus d’informations, reportez-vous au kit de restauration système du fabricant ou contactez support technique du fabricant.Informations légales_ 18 Licence OpenSSL Copyright © 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. Tous droits réservés. La redistribution et l’emploi sous forme de code source et binaire, modifié ou non, sont autorisés si les conditions suivantes sont respectées : 1. La redistribution du code source implique d’inclure la déclaration de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la clause exonératoire suivante. 2. La redistribution sous forme binaire doit reprendre la déclaration de copyright précédente, cette liste de condition et la clause d’exonération de responsabilité suivante dans la documentation et/ou tout autre matériau fourni avec la distribution. 3. Tout support publicitaire mentionnant ou utilisant ce logiciel doit faire mention de la déclaration suivante : « Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project et inclus dans le OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/) ». 4. Toute utilisation des noms « OpenSSL Toolkit » et « OpenSSL Project » dans le but de promouvoir des produits dérivés de ce logiciel ou d’en faire de la publicité est formellement interdite sans autorisation écrite préalable. Pour obtenir une autorisation écrite, veuillez vous adresser à openssl-core@openssl.org. 5. Les produits dérivés de ce logiciel ne peuvent s’appeler « OpenSSL » ni comporter « OpenSSL » dans leur nom sans autorisation écrite préalable de OpenSSL Project. 6. La redistribution, sous quelque forme que ce soit, doit mentionner la déclaration suivante : « Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par OpenSSL Project et inclus dans le OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/) ». CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI PAR THE OpenSSL PROJECT EN L’ÉTAT ET N’OFFRE AUCUNE GARANTIE EXPRESSE OU TACITE, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES GARANTIES IMPLICITES RELATIVES À LA QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET À L’ADAPTATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER. THE OpenSSL PROJECT OU SES COLLABORATEURS NE POURRONT EN AUCUN CAS ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS, SPÉCIAUX, EXEMPLAIRES NI SECONDAIRES QUELS QU’ILS SOIENT (Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES DOMMAGES CAUSÉS PAR UNE PERTE D’USAGE, DE DONNÉES OU DE BÉNÉFICES, AU REMPLACEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES, OU À L’INTERRUPTION DE L’ACTIVITÉ), ET CE QUELLE QU’EN SOIT LA CAUSE OU LA RESPONSABILITÉ THÉORIQUE, QUE CETTE RESPONSABILITÉ SOIT DE NATURE CONTRACTUELLE, DÉLICTUELLE OU QUASI DÉLICTUELLE, OU QU’IL S’AGISSE D’UNE RESPONSABILITÉ SANS FAUTE OU RELEVANT D’UNE AUTRE CATÉGORIE (Y COMPRIS LA NÉGLIGENCE), SUITE À L’UTILISATION SOUS QUELQUE FORME QUE CE SOIT DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME SI LA POSSIBILITÉ D’UN TEL DOMMAGE AVAIT ÉTÉ MENTIONNÉE. Ce produit contient un logiciel cryptographique développé par Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). Ce produit inclut un logiciel développé par Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).Informations légales_ 19 Licence originale SSLeay Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). Tous droits réservés. Ce progiciel est une implémentation SSL écrite par Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). L’implémentation a été écrite de façon à être compatible Netscapes SSL. Cette bibliothèque est gratuite pour un usage commercial et non-commercial pour autant que les conditions suivantes soient respectées. Les conditions suivantes s’appliquent à tout le code présent dans cette distribution, à savoir le code RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc. ; pas seulement le code SSL. La documentation SSL incluse dans cette distribution est régie par les mêmes conditions de droits d’auteur, si ce n’est que le détenteur est Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Les droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété d’Eric Young. Aucune information de droits d’auteur ne peut donc être retirée du code. Si ce progiciel est utilisé dans un produit, Eric Young doit être nommé comme auteur des parties de la bibliothèque utilisée. Il peut s’agir d’un message textuel au démarrage du programme dans la documentation (en ligne ou papier) fournie avec l’ensemble. La redistribution et l’emploi sous forme de code source et binaire, modifié ou non, sont autorisés si les conditions suivantes sont respectées : 1. La redistribution du code source implique d’inclure la déclaration de copyright ci-dessus, cette liste de conditions et la clause exonératoire suivante. 2. La redistribution sous forme binaire doit reprendre la déclaration de copyright précédente, cette liste de condition et la clause d’exonération de responsabilité suivante dans la documentation et/ou tout autre matériau fourni avec la distribution. 3. Tout support publicitaire mentionnant ou utilisant ce logiciel doit faire mention de la déclaration suivante : « Ce produit inclut un logiciel cryptographique écrit par Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) ». Le terme « cryptographique » peut être omis si les routines de la bibliothèque utilisée n’ont pas un caractère cryptographique. 4. Si vous incluez un code spécifique à Windows (ou un de ses dérivés) provenant du répertoire apps (code d’application) vous devez inclure un accusé de réception : « Ce produit contient un logiciel développé par Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com) ». CE LOGICIEL EST FOURNI PAR ERIC YOUNG EN L’ÉTAT ET TOUTE GARANTIE EXPRESSE OU TACITE, Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE RELATIVE À LA QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET À L’ADAPTATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER EST REJETÉE. L’AUTEUR OU SES COLLABORATEURS NE POURRONT EN AUCUN CAS ÊTRE TENUS POUR RESPONSABLES DE DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCIDENTELS, SPÉCIAUX, EXEMPLAIRES NI SECONDAIRES QUELS QU’ILS SOIENT (Y COMPRIS MAIS SANS S’Y LIMITER, LES DOMMAGES CAUSÉS PAR UNE PERTE D’USAGE, DE DONNÉES OU DE BÉNÉFICES, AU REMPLACEMENT DE MARCHANDISES OU DE SERVICES, OU À L’INTERRUPTION DE L’ACTIVITÉ), ET CE QUELLE QU’EN SOIT LA CAUSE OU LA RESPONSABILITÉ THÉORIQUE, QUE CETTE RESPONSABILITÉ SOIT DE NATURE CONTRACTUELLE, DÉLICTUELLE OU QUASI DÉLICTUELLE, OU QU’IL S’AGISSE D’UNE RESPONSABILITÉ SANS FAUTE OU RELEVANT D’UNE AUTRE CATÉGORIE (Y COMPRIS LA NÉGLIGENCE), SUITE À L’UTILISATION SOUS QUELQUE FORME QUE CE SOIT DE CE LOGICIEL, MÊME SI LA POSSIBILITÉ D’UN TEL DOMMAGE AVAIT ÉTÉ MENTIONNÉE. La licence et les termes de distribution pour toute version disponible publiquement de ce code ne peuvent pas être changés, c’est-à-dire que ce code ne peut pas simplement être copié et placé dans une autre licence publique [y compris la licence publique GNU].Informations légales_ 20 Chine uniquementA propos de ce mode d’emploi_ 21 A propos de ce mode d’emploi Ce mode d’emploi offre une description succincte de l’appareil, ainsi que des explications détaillées sur chaque étape de son fonctionnement. Il constitue une aide précieuse pour les novices et les utilisateurs professionnels quant à l’installation et l’utilisation correctes de l’appareil. • Lisez les informations de sécurité avant d’utiliser l’appareil. • Si vous rencontrez un problème d’utilisation de l’appareil, reportez-vous au chapitre de dépannage (voir « Dépannage » à la page 83). • Les termes utilisés dans ce guide de l’utilisateur sont expliqués dans le chapitre du glossaire (voir « Glossaire » à la page 106). • Les illustrations de ce mode d’emploi peuvent être différentes de votre appareil en fonction de ses options ou du modèle. • Les procédures de ce mode d’emploi sont principalement basées sur Windows XP. Convention Certains termes sont utilisés de manière interchangeable dans ce guide. • « Document » est synonyme d’« original ». • « Papier » est synonyme de « support » ou de « support d’impression ». • « Appareil » se rapporte à une imprimante ou une imprimante multifonctions. Vous trouverez les conventions utilisées dans ce guide récapitulées dans le tableau ci-dessous. Convention Description Exemple Gras Pour les textes apparaissant à l’écran ou les noms des boutons sur l’appareil. Annuler Remarque Donne des informations supplémentaires ou des spécifications détaillées des fonctions et fonctionnalités de l’appareil. Le format de la date peut varier d’un pays à l’autre. Mise en garde Informe les utilisateurs des risques éventuels de dommages mécaniques ou de dysfonctionnements de l’imprimante. Ne touchez pas la surface du tambour situé dans la cartouche de toner ou l’unité d’imagerie. Note de bas de page Donne des informations complémentaires sur certains mots ou certaines expressions. a. pages par minute (« Référence ») Vous renvoie à des informations complémentaires détaillées. (Voir « Recherche d’autres informations » à la page 22.)A propos de ce mode d’emploi_ 22 Recherche d’autres informations Les ressources suivantes vous proposent, soit à l’écran, soit sous forme imprimée, des informations concernant la configuration et l’utilisation de l’appareil. Nom du document Description Guide d’installation rapide Ce guide fournit des informations sur la configuration de l’appareil. Ce guide est fourni avec l’imprimante dans l’emballage. Mode d’emploi Ce guide fournit des instructions pas à pas pour utiliser toutes les fonctions de l’appareil, pour l’entretien et le dépannage de votre appareil, ainsi que pour le remplacement des consommables. Aide du pilote de l’appareil Cette aide fournit une assistance sur le pilote d’imprimante et des instructions concernant la configuration des propriétés pour l’impression (voir « Utilisation de l’aide » à la page 67). Site Web de Samsung Si vous avez accès à Internet, vous pouvez obtenir l’aide, le support, les pilotes de l’appareil, les manuels ou les informations de commande nécessaires sur le site web Samsung, www.samsung.com/printer. Logiciels téléchargeables Vous pouvez télécharger des logiciels utiles à partir du site Web de Samsung. • SyncThru™ Web Admin Service : pratique pour les administrateurs réseau qui ont besoin de gérer de nombreux appareils simultanément. Ce programme ne concerne que le modèle réseau. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com) • Samsung AnyWeb Print : permet aux utilisateurs individuels de facilement capturer à l’écran la fenêtre du site Web dans Windows Internet Explorer. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/anywebprint) • Samsung Easy Color Manager : aide les utilisateurs d’imprimante laser couleur Samsung à régler les couleurs selon leurs préférences. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/personal/colormanager)Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil_ 23 Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil Votre nouvel appareil est doté de fonctionnalités améliorant la qualité des documents que vous imprimez. Fonctions spéciales Impression rapide et de haute qualité • Impression dans une gamme complète de couleurs à partir du cyan, du magenta, du jaune et du noir. • Vous pouvez imprimer jusqu’à une résolution effective de 2 400 x 600 points par pouce. • Votre imprimante imprime à la vitesse de 16 ppm (pages par minutes) au format A4 et de 17 ppm au format Lettre en mode noir et blanc et à la vitesse de 4 ppm en mode couleur. Prise en charge de plusieurs types de support d’impression • Le bac peut contenir jusqu’à 150 feuilles de papier ordinaire de différents formats. • Vous pouvez charger différents supports d’impression de format personnalisé dans le bac. Création de documents professionnels (Windows uniquement) • Impression de filigranes. Vous pouvez personnaliser vos documents avec des mots tels que « Confidentiel » (voir « Impression de filigranes » à la page 69). • Impression d’affiches. Le texte et les images de chaque page de votre document sont agrandis et imprimés sur plusieurs feuilles de papier qui peuvent être collées ensemble pour former une affiche (voir « Impression d’affiches » à la page 67). • Vous pouvez utiliser des formulaires préimprimés et du papier à en-tête avec du papier ordinaire (voir « Utilisation de la surimpression » à la page 69). Gain de temps et d’argent • Pour économiser du papier, vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille (voir « Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille » à la page 67). • Cet appareil économise l’électricité en réduisant considérablement la consommation électrique lorsqu’il n’est pas utilisé. • Pour économiser du papier, vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux faces de chaque feuille (impression manuelle) (voir « Impression recto verso (manuelle) » à la page 68). Impression sous différents environnements • Vous pouvez imprimer avec Windows, ainsi qu’avec des systèmes Linux et Mac OS. • Votre appareil est doté d’une interface USB 2.0 haut débit. • L’appareil dispose d’une interface réseau intégrée de type Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/ CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) • Votre appareil est fourni avec une interface réseau intégrée LAN sans fil 802.11 b/g/n. (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) IPv6 (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) Cette machine prend en charge IPv6 (voir « Configuration IPv6 » à la page 39).Caractéristiques de votre nouvel appareil_ 24 Fonctionnalités par modèle Ces appareils sont conçus pour répondre à tous vos besoins documentaires – allant de l’impression, jusqu’à des solutions réseau avancées destinées à votre activité commerciale. Certains composants et fonctions en option peuvent être indisponibles en fonction du modèle ou du pays. Les fonctionnalités par modèle incluent : FONCTIONS CLP-320(K) CLP-321 CLP-325(K) CLP-326 CLP-320N(K) CLP-321N CLP-325W(K) CLP-326W USB 2.0 haut débit ● ● ● Carte LAN filaire Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX ● ● Interface réseau LAN sans fil 802.11 b/g/n a a.Les cartes réseau sans fil ne sont pas disponibles dans tous les pays. Contactez votre revendeur Samsung ou le point de vente où vous avez fait l’acquisition de votre imprimante. ● Impression recto verso (manuelle) ● ● ● ( ●: inclus, espace vide : non disponible) Introduction_ 25 1.Introduction Ce chapitre vous présente brièvement l’appareil. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Description de l’appareil • Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande • Le panneau de commande • Présentation des touches utiles Description de l’appareil Vue avant 1 2 31 5 7 6 8 9 10 4 Selon le modèle, cette illustration peut différer de votre appareil. 1 Bac de sortie (face à imprimer vers le bas) 6 Capot avant 2 Support de sortie papier 7 Bouton de dégagement du capot avant 3 Capot supérieur 8 Cartouches de toner 4 Panneau de commande 9 Récupérateur de toner usagé 5 Bac 10 Unité d’imagerieIntroduction_ 26 Vue arrière 1 3 5 4 2 Selon le modèle, cette illustration peut différer de votre appareil. 1 Bouton de dégagement du capot arrière 4 Port USB 2 Capot arrière 5 Port réseau a a.CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N uniquement. 3 Prise d’alimentationIntroduction_ 27 Vue d’ensemble du panneau de commande Selon le modèle, cette illustration peut différer de votre appareil. 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 [1] CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/CLP-326/CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N 1 Voyants de toner Affichez l’état de chaque cartouche de toner (voir « Voyants d’état/de toner » à la page 28). 2 Bouton Alimentation Ce bouton permet de mettre l’appareil sous et hors tension (voir « Bouton Alimentation » à la page 29). 3 Bouton Annuler Permet d’arrêter une opération à n’importe quel moment et d’effectuer d’autres fonctions (voir « Touche Annuler » à la page 29). 4 Voyant d’état Permet d’afficher l’état de l’appareil (voir « Voyants d’état/de toner » à la page 28). 5 Impression écran a a.CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/CLP-326 uniquement. Imprime l’écran affiché sur le moniteur (voir « Bouton Impr. écran » à la page 29). Impression démo b b.CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N uniquement. Impression d’une page de démonstration (voir « Bouton d’impression de page de démonstration » à la page 29). [2] CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W 1 Voyants de toner Affichez l’état de chaque cartouche de toner (voir « Voyants d’état/de toner » à la page 28). 2 Bouton Alimentation Ce bouton permet de mettre l’appareil sous et hors tension (voir « Bouton Alimentation » à la page 29). 3 Bouton Annuler Permet d’arrêter une opération à n’importe quel moment et d’effectuer d’autres fonctions (voir « Touche Annuler » à la page 29). 4 Voyant d’état Indique l’état de l’appareil (voir « Voyants d’état/de toner » à la page 28). 5 Voyant du mode sans fil Indique l’état du réseau sans fil. Lorsque le voyant est allumé, l’appareil est connecté au réseau sans fil (voir « Voyant sans fil » à la page 28). 6 Bouton WPS Si votre point d’accès sans fil prend en charge le WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™), vous pouvez configurer la connexion du réseau sans fil facilement sans même utiliser un ordinateur (voir « Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS » à la page 45).Introduction_ 28 Le panneau de commande Voyants d’état/de toner La couleur du voyant indique l’état actuel de l’appareil. Voyant État Voyants de toner Description En ligne/ Erreur ( ) Désactivé Tous les voyants sont éteints L’appareil est déconnecté. Vert brillant Tous les voyants sont éteints L’appareil est en ligne et peut recevoir des données d’un ordinateur. Clignote lentement en vert Tous les voyants sont éteints Lorsque le voyant d’état clignote lentement en vert, cela signifie que l’appareil reçoit des données de l’ordinateur. Clignote rapidemen t en vert Tous les voyants sont éteints Lorsque le voyant d’état clignote rapidement en vert, l’appareil imprime des données. Vert brillant Le voyant corresponda nt clignote en rouge Chaque cartouche de toner approche de la fin de sa durée de vie. Le voyant corresponda nt clignote successive ment en rouge L’appareil préchauffe. Rouge brillant Tous les voyants sont éteints • Le capot est ouvert. Fermez le capot. • Le bac est vide. Insérez du papier dans le bac. • L’appareil s’est arrêté à la suite d’une erreur grave. • L’imprimante a constaté un problème requérant une opération de maintenance, comme une erreur LSU, une erreur de fusion ou une erreur ITB. Contactez un technicien de maintenance. Le voyant corresponda nt est rouge brillant • Une cartouche de toner a pratiquement atteint sa durée d’utilisation théorique. a a.L’autonomie estimée de la cartouche signifie l’autonomie attendue ou estimée de la cartouche de toner, ce qui indique la capacité moyenne d’impression. Elle est définie conformément à la norme ISO/IEC 19798. Le nombre de pages peut varier en fonction de l’environnement d’exploitation, du délai entre chaque impression, des graphiques ainsi que du type et du format des supports. Un peu de toner peut rester dans la cartouche, même lorsque le voyant rouge est allumé et que l’imprimante s’arrête d’imprimer. .Il est recommandé de remplacer la cartouche de toner (voir « Remplacement de la cartouche de toner » à la page 97). • L’imprimante reconnaît l’état des cartouches de toner et les informations sur les consommables. Ouvrez, puis refermez le capot et vérifiez si l’appareil fonctionne correctement. Si le problème persiste, éteignez l’appareil, puis rallumez-le. Clignote en rouge Le voyant corresponda nt est rouge brillant • Un léger dysfonctionnement est survenu et l’appareil est en attente jusqu’à ce qu’il soit corrigé. Dès que le problème est résolu, l’appareil reprend la tâche interrompue. • Il reste une petite quantité de toner dans la cartouche. L’autonomie estimée de la cartouche a est presque atteinte. Préparez une nouvelle cartouche en vue de son remplacement. Vous pouvez améliorer provisoirement la qualité d’impression en redistribuant le reste du toner dans la cartouche (voir « Redistribution du toner » à la page 83). Bourrage ( ) S’allume en orange Tous les voyants sont éteints Un bourrage papier s’est produit (voir « Résolution des bourrages papier » à la page 84). Samsung ne recommande pas l’utilisation de cartouches de toner non-Samsung, telles que les cartouches rechargées ou réusinées. Samsung ne peut garantir la qualité des cartouches de toner non-Samsung. Tout entretien ou réparation requis suite à l’utilisation de cartouches de toner non-Samsung ne sera pas couvert par la garantie de l’appareil. Toutes les erreurs d’impression doivent apparaître dans la fenêtre du programme Smart Panel. Si le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance (voir « Utilisation du programme Smart Panel » à la page 76). Voyant sans fil Etat du voyant sans fil Description Bleu Désactivé ( ) Le réseau sans fil est déconnecté. Activé ( ) Réseau sans fil connecté. Clignote lentement ( ) L’appareil essaie de se connecter au réseau sans fil. Clignote rapidement ( ) • L’appareil est en train de se connecter au point d’accès (ou au routeur sans fil). • La connexion au réseau sans fil est en cours de déconnexion. Voyant État Voyants de toner DescriptionIntroduction_ 29 Présentation des touches utiles Bouton Impr. écran (CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/CLP-326 uniquement.) En appuyant sur le bouton Impression écran ( ), vous pouvez utiliser les fonctions suivantes. Fonction Description Impression de la fenêtre active Appuyez sur ce bouton, et le voyant vert commence à clignoter. Quand le voyant vert arrête de clignoter, relâchez le bouton. Impression de l’écran entier affiché sur le moniteur Appuyez sur ce bouton, et le voyant vert commence à clignoter. Relâchez le bouton pendant qu’il clignote. • La page sera imprimée sur le format par défaut (A4, Letter, par exemple). • Vous ne pouvez utiliser cette fonction qu’avec un appareil connecté via un port USB. • Impression écran est utilisable uniquement avec les systèmes d’exploitation Windows et Macintosh. • Vous ne pouvez utiliser cette fonction que si le programme Smart Panel de l’appareil est installé. Bouton d’impression de page de démonstration (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N uniquement) Il imprime une page de démonstration simplement en appuyant sur ce bouton. La page imprimée indique la qualité d’impression potentielle des couleurs et les caractéristiques d’impression générales de l’appareil. Touche Annuler En appuyant sur le bouton Annuler ( ), vous pouvez exécuter les fonctions ci-dessous. Fonction Description Impression d’une page de démonstration (CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W uniquement) En mode prêt, appuyez pendant environ 2 secondes sur ce bouton jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état clignote lentement, puis relâchez-le (voir « Impression d’une page de démonstration » à la page 30). Impression de pages de configuration En mode prêt, appuyez pendant environ 5 secondes sur ce bouton jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état clignote rapidement, puis relâchez-le (voir « Impression d’un journal de l’appareil » à la page 80). Annulation d’une impression Appuyez sur le bouton Annuler ( ) pendant l’impression. Le voyant rouge clignote alors que la tâche d’impression est supprimée de l’imprimante et de l’ordinateur. Ensuite, l’imprimante repasse en mode prêt. Cela peut prendre un certain temps, selon la taille de l’impression. Bouton WPS (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) Cette fonctionnalité détecte automatiquement le mode WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) utilisé par votre point d’accès. En appuyant sur un bouton du routeur LAN sans fil/du point d’accès et un bouton de l’appareil, vous pouvez configurer le réseau sans fil ainsi que les paramètres de sécurité (voir « Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS » à la page 45). Bouton Alimentation Vous devez utiliser ce bouton pour mettre l’appareil sous/hors tension. Mise en marche de l’appareil 1. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation. 2. Appuyez sur le bouton Alimentation ( ) du panneau de commande. Si vous souhaitez mettre l’appareil hors tension, appuyez sur ce bouton pendant 3 secondes.Prise en main_ 30 2.Prise en main Ce chapitre vous guide pas à pas dans la procédure de paramétrage de l’appareil connecté à un réseau et du logiciel. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Configuration du matériel • Impression d’une page de démonstration • Logiciel fourni • Configuration requise • Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB • Partage local de l’appareil Configuration du matériel Cette section répertorie les étapes de configuration du matériel, décrites dans le Quick Installation Guide. En premier lieu, veillez à lire le Quick Installation Guide et effectuez les étapes suivantes. Emplacement 1. Choisissez un emplacement approprié. Installez votre copieur sur un support horizontal et stable en laissant suffisamment d’espace pour la circulation de l’air. Prévoyez de l’espace supplémentaire pour l’ouverture des capots et des bacs. Cet emplacement doit être bien aéré et à l’abri de toute exposition directe à la lumière du soleil, ou de toute source de chaleur, de froid et d’humidité. Évitez d’installer votre appareil près du bord de votre plan de travail. L’impression est adaptée pour des zones avec une altitude inférieure à 1 000 m. Reportez-vous au réglage d’altitude pour optimiser votre impression (voir « Réglage de l’altitude » à la page 55). Installez votre copieur sur un support horizontal et stable et ne le laissez pas s’incliner à plus de 2 mm. Sinon, la qualité d’impression peut être affectée. 2mm (0.08 in) 2mm (0.08 in) 2. Déballez l’appareil, puis contrôlez les éléments inclus. 3. Retirez la bande adhésive permettant de maintenir l’appareil en place. 4. Chargez du papier (voir « Chargement de papier dans le bac » à la page 59). 5. Vérifiez que les câbles sont correctement connectés à l’appareil. 6. Mettez l’appareil sous tension (voir « Mise en marche de l’appareil » à la page 29). Cet appareil ne fonctionnera pas en cas de coupure de courant. Impression d’une page de démonstration Imprimez une page de démonstration afin de vous assurer que l’appareil fonctionne correctement. Pour imprimer une page de démonstration En mode prêt, maintenez le bouton Annuler ( ) enfoncé pendant environ 2 secondes, puis relâchez-le. (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) Vous pouvez également utiliser le bouton Page démo ( ) pour imprimer une page de démonstration. Ce bouton est disponible avec le modèle CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N uniquement. Logiciel fourni Une fois votre appareil paramétré puis connecté à votre ordinateur, vous devez installer le logiciel de l’imprimante. Si vous êtes un utilisateur Windows ou Mac OS, installez le logiciel depuis le CD fourni. Si vous êtes un utilisateur Linux, téléchargez le logiciel du site Samsung (www.samsung.com/printer) et installez-le. Le logiciel de l’appareil est parfois mis à jour à cause de la sortie d’un nouveau système d’exploitation, etc. En cas de besoin, téléchargez la dernière version sur le site Samsung. (www.samsung.com/printer).Système d’exploit ation Contenu Windows • Pilote d’impression : ce pilote permet d’exploiter toutes les fonctions de votre appareil. • Smart Panel : ce programme vous permet de surveiller l’état de l’appareil et vous avertit lorsqu’un dysfonctionnement survient en cours d’impression. • Utilitaire de paramétrage d’imprimante : ce programme vous permet de configurer d’autres options d’imprimante depuis votre ordinateur. • SetIP: ce programme permet de configurer les adresses TCP/IP de l’appareil. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/ CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) Macintosh • Pilote d’impression : ce pilote permet d’exploiter toutes les fonctions de votre appareil. • Smart Panel : ce programme vous permet de surveiller l’état de l’appareil et vous avertit lorsqu’un dysfonctionnement survient en cours d’impression. • Utilitaire de paramétrage d’imprimante : ce programme vous permet de configurer d’autres options d’imprimante depuis votre ordinateur. • SetIP: ce programme permet de configurer les adresses TCP/IP de l’appareil. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/ CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) Linux • Unified Linux Driver : ce pilote permet d’exploiter toutes les fonctions de votre appareil. • Smart Panel : ce programme vous permet de surveiller l’état de l’appareil et vous avertit lorsqu’un dysfonctionnement survient en cours d’impression. • Utilitaire de paramétrage d’imprimante : ce programme vous permet de configurer d’autres options d’imprimante depuis votre ordinateur. • SetIP : ce programme permet de configurer les adresses TCP/IP de l’appareil. (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/ CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) Prise en main_ 31 Configuration requise Avant de commencer, assurez-vous que votre système répond aux conditions ci-dessous : Microsoft ® Windows ® Votre appareil prend en charge les systèmes d’exploitation Windows suivants. SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATI ON Configuration (recommandée) Processeur RAM Espace disque disponible Windows ® 2000 Intel ® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 Mo (128 Mo) 600 Mo Windows ® XP Intel ® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 Mo (256 Mo) 1,5 Go Windows Server ® 2003 Intel ® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 Mo (512 Mo) 1,25 Go à 2 Go Windows Server ® 2008 Intel ® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 Mo (2 048 Mo) 10 Go Windows Vista ® Intel ® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 Mo (1 024 Mo) 15 Go Windows ® 7 Processeur Intel ® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32 bits ou 64 bits ou supérieur 1 Go (2 Go) 16 Go • Prise en charge DirectX ® 9 avec 128 Mo de mémoire (pour activer le thème Aero). • Lecteur de DVD-R/W Windows Server ® 2008 R2 Processeurs Intel ® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) ou 1,4 GHz (x64) (2 GHz ou plus rapide) 512 Mo (2 048 Mo) 10 Go • Pour tous les systèmes d’exploitation Windows, Internet Explorer ® 5.0 ou supérieur doit être installé sur l’ordinateur. • Des droits d’administrateur sont requis pour installer le logiciel. • Windows Terminal Services est compatible avec cet appareil. Macintosh SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATI ON Configuration (recommandée) Processeur RAM Espace disque disponible Mac OS X 10.3 à 10.4 • Processeurs Intel ® • PowerPC G4/ G5 • 128 Mo pour un Mac équipé d’un processeur PowerPC (512 Mo) • 512 Mo pour un Mac équipé d’un processeur Intel (1 Go) 1 Go Mac OS X 10.5 • Processeurs Intel ® • Processeur PowerPC G4/ G5 à 867 MHz ou plus rapide 512 Mo (1 Go) 1 Go SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATI ON Configuration (recommandée) Processeur RAM Espace disque disponiblePrise en main_ 32 Linux Élément Configuration (recommandée) Système d’exploitation RedHat ® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bits) Fedora Core 2 à 10 (32/64 bits) SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bits) OpenSuSE ® 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1 (32/64 bits) Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bits) Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bits) Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bits) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bits) Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bits) Processeur Pentium® IV 2,4 GHz (Intel Core™2) RAM 512 Mo (1 024 Mo) Espace disque disponible 1 Go (2 Go) Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB Un appareil local est un appareil directement connecté à votre ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. Si votre appareil est relié à un réseau, ignorez les étapes suivantes et passez à l’installation du pilote de l’appareil connecté à un réseau (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau » à la page 40). Utilisez uniquement un câble USB ne dépassant pas 3 m. Windows Vous pouvez installer le logiciel d’impression à l’aide de la méthode standard ou personnalisée. Les étapes suivantes sont recommandées pour la plupart des utilisateurs qui utilisent un appareil directement raccordé à l’ordinateur. Tous les composants nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés. 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à l’ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. Si la fenêtre Assistant Matériel détecté apparaît durant la procédure d’installation, cliquez sur Annuler pour la fermer. 2. Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur. • Le CD du logiciel s’exécute automatiquement et la fenêtre d’accueil s’affiche à l’écran. • Si la fenêtre d’installation ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur Démarrer puis sur Exécuter. Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre qui représente votre lecteur de CD. Cliquez sur OK. • Si vous utilisez Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, cliquez sur Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Accessoires > Exécuter. Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre représentant le lecteur, puis cliquez sur OK. • Si la fenêtre Exécution automatique s’affiche sous Windows Vista, Windows 7 ou Windows 2008 Server R2, cliquez sur Exécuter Setup.exe dans le champ Installer or exécuter un programme et cliquez sur Continuer ou Oui dans la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur. 3. Sélectionnez Installer maintenant. Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante. • Vous pouvez accéder à la fenêtre d’installation du CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W via le menu Configuration et installation sans fil. Configuration et installation sans fil vous permet d’installer un réseau sans fil pour connecter l’appareil à l’aide d’un câble USB (voir « Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble USB » à la page 46). • L’Installation avancée dispose de deux options, Installation personnalisée et Installer uniquement les logiciels. L’option Installation personnalisée vous permet de sélectionner la connexion de l’appareil et de choisir les composants individuels à installer. Installer uniquement les logiciels vous permet d’installer les logiciels fournis, tels que Smart Panel. Suivez le mode d’emploi affiché dans la fenêtre. 4. Lisez le Contrat de licence et sélectionnez J’accepte les dispositions du contrat de licence. Ensuite, cliquez sur Suivant. Le programme recherche l’appareil. Si l’appareil n’est pas détecté dans le réseau ou localement, la fenêtre suivante s’affiche à l’écran. Mac OS X 10.6 • Processeurs Intel ® 1 Go (2 Go) 1 Go SYSTÈME D’EXPLOITATI ON Configuration (recommandée) Processeur RAM Espace disque disponiblePrise en main_ 33 • Vérifiez si vous voulez installer le logiciel sans connecter l’imprimante - Cochez cette option pour installer le programme sans qu’un appareil soit connecté. La fenêtre « Imprimer une page de test » est alors ignorée et l’installation terminée. • Chercher à nouveau Lorsque vous appuyez sur ce bouton, la fenêtre d’avertissement concernant le pare-feu s’affiche. - Désactivez le pare-feu et cliquez sur Chercher à nouveau. Pour le système d’exploitation Windows, cliquez sur Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Pare-feu Windows et désactivez cette option. Pour les autres systèmes d’exploitation, reportez-vous au guide en ligne correspondant. - Désactivez le pare-feu du programme tiers en plus du système d’exploitation. Reportez-vous au manuel fourni avec le programme correspondant. • Saisie directe La Saisie directe vous permet de rechercher un appareil spécifique sur le réseau. - Rechercher par adresse IP : saisissez l’adresse IP ou le nom d’hôte. Cliquez sur Suivant. Pour vérifier l’adresse IP de l’appareil, imprimez un rapport de configuration réseau (voir « Impression d’un journal de l’appareil » à la page 80). - Rechercher par chemin réseau : pour rechercher un appareil partagé (chemin d’accès UNC), saisissez le nom de partage manuellement ou recherchez une imprimante partagée en cliquant sur le bouton Parcourir. Cliquez sur Suivant. • Aide Si l’appareil n’est pas connecté à l’ordinateur ou au réseau, ce bouton d’aide vous fournira des procédures de connexion détaillées. 5. Les appareils détectés s’afficheront à l’écran. Sélectionnez celui que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si le pilote n’a trouvé qu’un seul appareil, la fenêtre de confirmation s’affiche. 6. Une fois l’installation terminée, une fenêtre vous demandant d’imprimer une page de test apparaît. Si vous souhaitez imprimer un page de test, cliquez sur Imprimer une page de test. Sinon, contentez-vous de cliquer sur Suivant et passez à l’étape 8. 7. Si la page s’imprime correctement, cliquez sur Oui. Sinon, cliquez sur Non pour relancer l’impression. 8. Si vous désirez enregistrer votre appareil sur le site de Samsung, cliquez sur Inscription en ligne. Si l’imprimante n’est pas déjà connectée à l’ordinateur, cliquez sur Comment procéder à la connexion ?. Comment procéder à la connexion ? donne des informations détaillées concernant le branchement de l’appareil. Suivez les instructions affichées dans la fenêtre. 9. Cliquez sur Terminer. Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement, procédez comme suit pour le réparer ou le réinstaller. a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. b) Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes ou Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > le nom de votre pilote d’impression > Maintenance. c) Sélectionnez l’option que vous souhaitez exécuter, puis suivez les instructions qui s’affichent dans la fenêtre. Macintosh Le CD de logiciels livré avec votre appareil contient les fichiers de pilote vous permettant d’utiliser le pilote CUPS ou le pilote PostScript (disponible uniquement si vous utilisez un appareil prenant en charge les pilotes PostScript) pour imprimer à partir d’un Macintosh. 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. 2. Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur. 3. Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh. 4. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer. 5. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X. 6. Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. 7. La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continuer. 8. Lisez le contrat de licence et cliquez sur Continuer. 9. Cliquez sur Accepter pour accepter les termes du contrat de licence. 10. Sélectionnez Installation standard et cliquez sur Programme d’installation => Installer (10.4). L’option Installation standard est recommandée pour la plupart des utilisateurs. Tous les composants nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés. Lorsque vous choisissez Installation personnalisée, vous pouvez installer les composants de votre choix. 11. Lorsqu’un message avertissant de la fermeture de toutes les applications en cours d’exécution sur votre ordinateur apparaît, cliquez sur Continuer. 12. Sélectionnez le type d’installation que vous souhaitez, puis cliquez sur OK. • Installation standard sur imprimante locale: installe les composants par défaut d’un périphérique directement connecté à l’appareil de l’utilisateur. • installation standard sur imprimante réseau: Installe le logiciel d’un périphérique situé sur le réseau. Le programme Set IP s’exécute automatiquement. Si l’appareil dispose déjà d’informations réseau configurées, fermez le programme Set IP. Passez à l’étape suivante.Prise en main_ 34 • Configuration et installation sans fil : Vous pouvez accéder à la fenêtre d’installation du CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W via le menu Configuration et installation sans fil. Le menu Configuration et installation sans fil vous permet d’installer un réseau sans fil pour connecter l’appareil à l’aide d’un câble USB (voir « Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble USB » à la page 46). 13. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter ou sur Redémarrer. 14. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Utilitaires > Configuration d’imprimante. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax. 15. Cliquez sur Ajouter dans la Liste des imprimantes. • Pour Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, cliquez sur l’icône « + » ; une fenêtre d’affichage apparaît. 16. Sous Mac OS X 10.3, sélectionnez l’onglet USB. • Sous Mac OS X 10.4, cliquez sur Navigateur par défaut et recherchez la connexion USB. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, cliquez sur Par défaut et recherchez la connexion USB. 17. Sous Mac OS X 10.3, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Samsung dans Modèle de l’imprimante et votre nom d’appareil dans Nom de modèle. • Sous Mac OS X 10.4, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Samsung dans Imprimer via et votre nom d’appareil dans Modèle. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Sélectionner un gestionnaire à utiliser..., puis le nom de votre imprimante dans Imprimer via. Votre appareil apparaît dans la Liste des imprimantes et est défini comme imprimante par défaut. 18. Cliquez sur Ajouter. Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement, désinstallez-le et réinstallez-le. Pour Mac OS, procédez comme suit pour désinstaller le pilote. a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. b) Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur. c) Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh. d) Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer. e) Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X. f) Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. g) La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continuer. h) Lisez le contrat de licence et cliquez sur Continuer. i) Cliquez sur Accepter pour accepter les termes du contrat de licence. j) Sélectionnez Désinstaller et cliquez sur Désinstaller. k) Lorsqu’un message avertissant de la fermeture de toutes les applications en cours d’exécution sur votre ordinateur apparaît, cliquez sur Continuer. l) Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter. Linux Vous devez télécharger les packages de logiciels Linux du site Web de Samsung pour installer le logiciel de l’imprimante. Suivez les étapes ci-dessous pour installer le logiciel. Installation du Unified Linux Driver 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. 2. Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, entrez root dans le champ Login et entrez le mot de passe du système. Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root) pour installer le pilote de l’appareil. Si vous ne disposez pas du statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre administrateur système. 3. Depuis le site Web de Samsung, téléchargez le package Unified Linux Driver sur votre ordinateur. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le package Unified Linux Driver et extrayez-le. 5. Double-cliquez sur cdroot > autorun. 6. Lorsque l’écran de bienvenue s’affiche, cliquez sur Next. 7. Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Finish. Pour des raisons pratiques, le programme d’installation a ajouté l’icône de bureau du configurateur de pilote unifié et le groupe de pilotes unifiés au menu système. Si vous rencontrez la moindre difficulté, consultez l’aide à l’écran, accessible via le menu système ou via les applications Windows du package du pilote, telles que Unified Driver Configurator. Installation de Smart Panel 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. 2. Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, entrez root dans le champ Login et entrez le mot de passe du système. Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root) pour installer le pilote de l’appareil. Si vous ne disposez pas du statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre administrateur système. 3. Depuis le site Web de Samsung, téléchargez le package Smart Panel sur votre ordinateur. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le package Smart Panel et extrayez-le. 5. Double-cliquez sur cdroot > Linux > smartpanel > install.sh.Prise en main_ 35 Installation de Printer Settings Utility 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. 2. Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, entrez root dans le champ Login et entrez le mot de passe du système. Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root) pour installer le pilote de l’appareil. Si vous ne disposez pas du statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre administrateur système. 3. Depuis le site Web de Samsung, téléchargez le package Printer Settings Utility sur votre ordinateur. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le package Printer Settings Utility et décompressez-le. 5. Double-cliquez sur cdroot > Linux > psu > install.sh. Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement, désinstallez-le et réinstallez-le. Procédez comme suit pour désinstaller le pilote sous Linux. a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. b) Lorsque la fenêtre Administrator Login apparaît, tapez « root » dans le champ Login et saisissez le mot de passe système. Vous devez vous connecter en tant que superutilisateur (root) pour désinstaller le pilote d’impression. Si vous ne disposez pas du statut de superutilisateur, contactez votre administrateur système. c) Cliquez sur l’icône située en bas du bureau. Lorsque l’écran Terminal apparaît, tapez : [root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/ [root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh d) Cliquez sur Uninstall. e) Cliquez sur Next. f) Cliquez sur Finish. Partage local de l’appareil Procédez comme suit pour configurer les ordinateurs pour partager l’appareil localement. Si l’ordinateur hôte est directement connecté à l’appareil avec un câble USB et est également connecté à l’environnement du réseau local, l’ordinateur client connecté au réseau local peut utiliser l’appareil partagé pour imprimer via l’ordinateur hôte. 2 1 1 Ordinateur hôte Ordinateur qui est directement connecté à l’appareil par un câble USB. 2 Ordinateurs clients Ordinateurs qui utilisent l’appareil partagé via l’ordinateur hôte. Windows Configuration d’un ordinateur hôte 1. Installez votre pilote d’impression (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB » à la page 32, « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau » à la page 40). 2. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 3. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. • Sous Windows 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Périphériques et imprimantes. • Sous Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’icône de l’imprimante. 5. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Propriétés. Sous Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez, dans les menus contextuels, les Propriétés de l’imprimante. Si la marque ► accompagne l’élément Propriétés de l’imprimante, vous pouvez sélectionner les autres pilotes d’impression reliés à l’imprimante sélectionnée. 6. Sélectionnez l’onglet Partage. 7. Cochez Modifier les options de partage. 8. Cochez la case Partager cette imprimante. 9. Renseignez le champ Nom de partage. Cliquez sur OK. Configuration d’un ordinateur client 1. Installez votre pilote d’impression (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB » à la page 32, « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau » à la page 40). 2. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 3. Sélectionnez Tous les programmes > Accessoires > Explorateur Windows. 4. Saisissez l’adresse IP de l’ordinateur hôte et appuyez sur Entrée sur votre clavier. Si l’ordinateur hôte exige un Nom d’utilisateur et un Mot de passe, indiquez l’ID d’utilisateur et le mot de passe du compte de l’ordinateur hôte. 5. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’icône de l’imprimante que vous souhaitez partager et sélectionnez Connecter. 6. Si un message de configuration terminée apparaît, cliquez sur OK. 7. Ouvrez le fichier que vous souhaitez imprimer et démarrez l’impression. Prise en main_ 36 Macintosh Les étapes suivantes concernent Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6. Reportez-vous à l’aide Mac pour les autres versions du système d’exploitation. Configuration d’un ordinateur hôte 1. Installez votre pilote d’impression (voir « Macintosh » à la page 33). 2. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax. 3. Sélectionnez l’imprimante à partager dans la Liste des imprimantes. 4. Sélectionnez Partager cette imprimante. Configuration d’un ordinateur client 1. Installez votre pilote d’impression (voir « Macintosh » à la page 33). 2. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax. 3. Cliquez sur l’icône « + ». Une fenêtre indiquant le nom de votre imprimante partagée apparaît. 4. Sélectionnez votre appareil et cliquez sur Ajouter.Configuration du réseau (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 37 3.Configuration du réseau (CLP-320N(K)/ CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) Ce chapitre vous guide pas-à-pas dans la procédure de paramétrage de l’appareil connecté à un réseau et du logiciel. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Environnement réseau • Présentation des programmes réseau utiles • Utilisation d’un réseau câblé • Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau Environnement réseau Vous devez configurer les protocoles réseau de l’appareil pour pouvoir l’utiliser comme appareil réseau. Vous pouvez définir les paramètres réseau de base à l’aide du panneau de commande de l’appareil ou des programmes de configuration réseau. Le tableau suivant indique les environnements réseau compatibles avec l’appareil : Élément Configuration requise Interface réseau • Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX • Interface réseau sans fil 802.11 b/g/n (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) Système d’exploitation réseau • Windows 2000/Server 2003/Server 2008/XP/Vista/7/Server 2008 R2 • Différents systèmes d’exploitation Linux • Mac OS X 10.3 à 10.6 Protocoles réseau • TCP/IPv4 • DHCP, BOOTP • DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP • Impression TCP/IP standard (RAW), LPR, IPP • SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec • TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec) Voir « Configuration IPv6 » à la page 39. Sécurité sans fil • Authentification : Système ouvert, clé partagée, WPA Personal, WPA2 Personal (PSK) • Cryptage : WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES Présentation des programmes réseau utiles Il existe plusieurs programmes disponibles pour configurer facilement les paramètres réseau dans un environnement réseau. Pour l’administrateur réseau particulièrement, il est possible de gérer plusieurs appareils sur le réseau. Avant d’utiliser les programmes ci-dessous, définissez d’abord l’adresse IP. SyncThru™ Web Service Serveur Web intégré à votre périphérique réseau, vous permettant de : • Définir les paramètres réseau nécessaires à la connexion de l’appareil à divers environnements réseau. • Personnaliser les paramètres de l’appareil. Voir « Utilisation de l’alerte SyncThru™ Web Service » à la page 75. SyncThru™ Web Admin Service solution Web de gestion de matériel destinée aux administrateurs réseau. SyncThru™ Web Admin Service permet de gérer efficacement les périphériques réseau, de les surveiller à distance et de les dépanner depuis n’importe quel site disposant d’un accès au réseau Intranet de l’entreprise. Téléchargez ce programme sur http://solution.samsungprinter.com. SetIP Cet utilitaire vous permet de sélectionner une interface réseau et de configurer manuellement les adresses IP à utiliser avec le protocole TCP/ IP. • Voir « Définition d’adresse IPv4 à l’aide du programme SetIP (Windows) » à la page 38. • Voir « Définition d’adresse IPv4 à l’aide du programme SetIP (Macintosh) » à la page 38. • Voir « Définition d’adresse IPv4 à l’aide du programme SetIP (Linux) » à la page 39. TCP/IPv6 n’est pas pris en charge par ce programme. Utilisation d’un réseau câblé Vous devez configurer les protocoles réseau sur votre appareil pour utiliser celui-ci dans votre réseau. Ce chapitre vous explique comment le faire facilement. Vous pouvez utiliser le réseau après avoir connecté le câble réseau à un port correspondant sur votre appareil.Configuration du réseau (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 38 Impression d’un rapport de configuration réseau Vous pouvez imprimer un Journal de configuration réseau avec les paramètres réseau actuels de l’appareil à partir du panneau de configuration. Cela vous aidera à configurer un réseau et à résoudre les problèmes. Pour imprimer le journal : En mode prêt, maintenez le (bouton Annuler) enfoncé pendant environ 5 secondes. Vous pouvez retrouver l’adresse MAC et l’adresse IP de votre appareil. Par exemple : • Adresse MAC : 00:15:99:41:A2:78 • Adresse IP : 192.0.0.192 Création d’une adresse IP Commencez par créer une adresse IP pour l’impression et la gestion réseau. Dans la plupart des cas, une nouvelle adresse IP est attribuée automatiquement par un serveur DHCP (serveur de protocole DHCP) situé sur le réseau. Dans quelques cas, l’adresse IP doit être créée manuellement. Cette adresse est appelée IP statique et elle est souvent requise dans les Intranets d’entreprise pour des raisons de sécurité. • Affectation d’adresse IP par DHCP : connectez votre appareil au réseau et patientez quelques minutes jusqu’à ce que le serveur DHCP attribue une adresse IP à l’appareil. Ensuite, imprimez le Rapport de configuration réseau, comme expliqué ci-dessus. Si le rapport indique que l’adresse IP a changé, l’attribution est réussie. Vous verrez la nouvelle adresse IP sur le rapport. • Attribution d’adresse IP statique : utilisez le programme SetIP pour changer l’adresse IP depuis votre ordinateur. Dans un environnement professionnel, nous vous recommandons de contacter un administrateur réseau pour définir cette adresse. Configuration IPv4 Définition d’adresse IPv4 à l’aide du programme SetIP (Windows) Ce programme permet de configurer manuellement l’adresse réseau IP de votre appareil à l’aide de son adresse MAC pour communiquer avec l’appareil. Une adresse MAC est le numéro de série matériel de l’interface réseau et peut être trouvé sur le Rapport de configuration réseau. Pour utiliser le programme SetIP, désactivez le pare-feu de l’ordinateur avant de poursuivre, en procédant comme suit : 1. Ouvrez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration. 2. Double-cliquez sur Centre de sécurité. 3. Cliquez sur Pare-feu. 4. Désactivez le pare-feu. Installation du programme 1. Insérez le CD-ROM du logiciel de l’imprimante fourni avec votre appareil. Fermez la fenêtre d’exécution automatique du CD. 2. Lancez l’Explorateur Windows et ouvrez le lecteur X (X représentant votre lecteur de CD-ROM). 3. Double-cliquez sur Application > SetIP. 4. Double-cliquez sur Setup.exe pour installer ce programme. 5. Sélectionnez une langue, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 6. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. Démarrage du programme 1. Connectez l’appareil au réseau avec un câble réseau. 2. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 3. À partir du menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4. Cliquez sur l’icône (la troisième en partant de la gauche) dans la fenêtre SetIP pour ouvrir la fenêtre de configuration TCP/IP. 5. Saisissez les nouvelles informations de l’appareil dans la fenêtre de configuration, de la manière suivante. Dans un intranet d’entreprise, ces informations peuvent devoir être affectées par un gestionnaire du réseau avant de poursuivre. • Adresse MAC : recherchez l’adresse MAC de l’appareil dans le Rapport de configuration réseau et saisissez-la sans les deux-points (:). Par exemple, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 devient 0015992951A8. • Adresse IP : saisissez une nouvelle adresse IP pour votre imprimante. Par exemple, si l’adresse IP de votre ordinateur est 192.168.1.150, saisissez 192.168.1.X (X étant un chiffre compris entre 1 et 254 différent de l’adresse de l’ordinateur). • Masque de sous-réseau : saisissez un masque de sous-réseau. • Passerelle par défaut : saisissez une passerelle par défaut. 6. Cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK. L’appareil imprimera automatiquement le Rapport de configuration réseau. Vérifiez que tous les paramètres sont corrects. 7. Cliquez sur Quitter pour fermer le programme SetIP. 8. Au besoin, redémarrez le pare-feu de l’ordinateur. Définition d’adresse IPv4 à l’aide du programme SetIP (Macintosh) Pour utiliser le programme SetIP, désactivez le pare-feu de l’ordinateur avant de poursuivre, en procédant comme suit : Le chemin d’accès et les interfaces utilisateur peuvent varier en fonction de la version du système d’exploitation Mac OS utilisée. Reportez-vous au manuel de Mac OS. 1. Ouvrez Préférences Système. 2. Cliquez sur Sécurité. 3. Cliquez sur le menu Coupe-feu. 4. Désactivez le pare-feu. Les instructions suivantes peuvent varier selon le modèle.Configuration du réseau (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 39 1. Connectez l’appareil au réseau avec un câble réseau. 2. Insérez le CD d’installation, et ouvrez la fenêtre du disque, puis sélectionnez MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html. 3. Double-cliquez sur le fichier et Safari s’ouvre automatiquement, puis sélectionnez Se fier. Le navigateur ouvrira la page SetIPApplet.html indiquant le nom et l’adresse IP de l’imprimante. 4. Cliquez sur l’icône (la troisième en partant de la gauche) dans la fenêtre SetIP pour ouvrir la fenêtre de configuration TCP/IP. 5. Saisissez les nouvelles informations de l’appareil dans la fenêtre de configuration, de la manière suivante. Dans un intranet d’entreprise, ces informations peuvent devoir être affectées par un gestionnaire du réseau avant de poursuivre. • Adresse MAC : recherchez l’adresse MAC de l’appareil dans le Rapport de configuration réseau et saisissez-la sans les deux-points (:). Par exemple, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 devient 0015992951A8. • Adresse IP : saisissez une nouvelle adresse IP pour votre imprimante. Par exemple, si l’adresse IP de votre ordinateur est 192.168.1.150, saisissez 192.168.1.X (X étant un chiffre compris entre 1 et 254 différent de l’adresse de l’ordinateur). • Masque de sous-réseau : saisissez un masque de sous-réseau. • Passerelle par défaut : saisissez une passerelle par défaut. 6. Sélectionnez Appliquer, puis OK et une nouvelle fois OK. L’imprimante imprimera automatiquement le rapport de configuration. Vérifiez que tous les paramètres sont corrects. Quittez Safari. Vous pouvez fermer et éjecter le CD-ROM d’installation. Au besoin, redémarrez le pare-feu de l’ordinateur. Vous avez à ce stade modifié l’adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau et la passerelle. Définition d’adresse IPv4 à l’aide du programme SetIP (Linux) Le programme SetIP devrait être automatiquement installé lors de l’installation du pilote d’impression. Le chemin d’accès et les interfaces peuvent varier selon la version Linux. Reportez-vous au manuel du système d’exploitation Linux pour désactiver le pare-feu. 1. Imprimez le rapport de configuration réseau de l’appareil pour trouver l’adresse MAC de votre appareil. 2. Ouvrez /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/. 3. Double-cliquez sur le fichier SetIPApplet.html. 4. Cliquez pour ouvrir la fenêtre de configuration TCP/IP. 5. Saisissez l’adresse MAC de votre carte d’imprimante réseau, l’adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau, la passerelle par défaut, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Saisissez l’adresse MAC sans les deux-points (:). 6. L’appareil imprime le rapport de configuration réseau. Vérifiez que tous les paramètres sont corrects. 7. Fermez le programme SetIP. Configuration IPv6 TCP/IPv6 n’est correctement pris en charge que sur Windows Vista ou ultérieur. Si le réseau IPv6 ne semble pas fonctionner correctement, réinitialisez tous les paramètres réseau par défaut et réessayez (voir « Restauration des paramètres par défaut définis en usine à l’aide du SyncThru™ Web Service » à la page 40). Pour utiliser l’environnement réseau IPV6, suivez la procédure ci-après pour utiliser l’adresse IPV6. L’appareil est fourni avec la fonction IPV6 activée. 1. Connectez l’appareil au réseau avec un câble réseau. 2. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. 3. Depuis le panneau de commande de l’appareil, imprimez un Rapport de configuration réseau permettant de contrôler les adresses IPV6. 4. Sélectionnez Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes > Ajouter une imprimante. 5. Cliquez sur Ajouter une imprimante locale dans la fenêtre Ajouter une imprimante. 6. Suivez les instructions affichées dans la fenêtre. Si l’appareil ne fonctionne pas dans l’environnement réseau, activez IPv6. Reportez-vous à la section suivante. Impression d’un rapport de configuration réseau Vous pouvez imprimer un Journal de configuration réseau avec les paramètres réseau actuels de l’appareil à partir du panneau de configuration. Cela vous aidera à configurer un réseau et à résoudre les problèmes. Pour imprimer le journal : En mode prêt, maintenez le (bouton Annuler) enfoncé pendant environ 5 secondes. Vous pouvez retrouver l’adresse MAC et l’adresse IP de votre appareil. Par exemple : • Adresse MAC : 00:15:99:41:A2:78 • Adresse IP : 192.0.0.192 Paramétrage des adresses IPV6 L’appareil prend en charge les adresses IPV6 suivantes pour l’impression et la gestion réseau. • Link-local Address : adresse IPV6 locale configurée automatiquement (l’adresse commence par FE80). • Stateless Address : adresse IPV6 configurée automatiquement par un routeur réseau. • Stateful Address : adresse IPV6 configurée par un serveur DHCPv6. • Manual Address : adresse IPV6 configurée manuellement par un utilisateur. Configuration manuelle de l’adresse 1. Ouvrez un navigateur Web qui prend en charge l’adressage IPv6 comme URL, par exemple Internet Explorer (voir « SyncThru™ Web Service » à la page 37). Pour IPv4, saisissez l’adresse IPv4 (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) dans le champ d’adresse, puis appuyez sur la touche Entrée ou cliquez sur Atteindre. 2. Lorsque la fenêtre SyncThru™ Web Service s’ouvre, cliquez sur Config. réseau. 3. Cliquez sur TCP/IPv6. 4. Activez l’option Adresse manuelle dans la section TCP/IPv6.Configuration du réseau (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 40 5. Sélectionnez Adresse/Préfixe et cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter ; le préfixe du routeur est alors saisi automatiquement dans le champ d’adresse. Saisissez le reste de l’adresse (ex. : 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. « A » est le chiffre hexadécimal 0 à 9, A à F.) 6. Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer. Installation du pilote d’impression L’installation du pilote pour l’imprimante réseau dans un environnement réseau IPv6 est identique à TCP/IPv4 (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau » à la page 40). Sélectionnez le port TCP/IP puis, lorsque la liste des appareils s’affiche, il vous suffit de sélectionner l’adresse IPV6 de votre appareil. Utilisation du SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Ouvrez un navigateur Web qui prend en charge l’adressage IPV6 comme URL, par exemple Internet Explorer. 2. Sélectionnez une des adresses IPV6 (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) à partir du Rapport de configuration réseau. 3. Saisissez les adresses IPV6 (ex. : http:// [FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]). L’adresse doit être placée entre crochets « [] ». Restauration des paramètres par défaut définis en usine à l’aide du SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Démarrez un navigateur Web, comme Internet Explorer, Safari ou Firefox et saisissez la nouvelle adresse IP de votre appareil dans la fenêtre du navigateur. Par exemple : 2. Cliquez sur Atteindre pour accéder à SyncThru™ Web Service. 3. Cliquez sur Ouverture de session en haut à droite du site Web Service Web SyncThru™. Une page de connexion s’affiche. 4. Saisissez l’ID et le Mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Ouverture de session. S’il s’agit de votre première connexion à SyncThru™ Web Service, saisissez l’ID et le mot de passe par défaut suivants. • ID : admin • Mot de passe : sec00000 5. Lorsque la fenêtre SyncThru™ Web Service s’ouvre, cliquez sur Paramètres > Config. réseau > Rétablir les paramètres par défaut. 6. Cliquez sur Supprimer pour le réseau. 7. Éteignez puis rallumez l’appareil pour appliquer les paramètres. Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau Vous devez installer le logiciel du pilote d’imprimante pour procéder à l’impression. Ce logiciel comprend des pilotes, des applications ainsi que d’autres programmes conviviaux. Assurez-vous que la configuration réseau de votre appareil a bien été effectuée. Avant de commencer l’installation, fermez toutes les applications sur votre ordinateur. Windows Il s’agit de la procédure recommandée pour la plupart des utilisateurs. Tous les composants nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés. Procédez comme suit : 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté au réseau et qu’il est sous tension. 2. Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur. • Le CD du logiciel s’exécute automatiquement et la fenêtre d’accueil s’affiche à l’écran. • Si la fenêtre d’installation ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur Démarrer puis sur Exécuter. Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre qui représente votre lecteur de CD. Cliquez sur OK. • Si vous utilisez Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, cliquez sur Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Accessoires > Exécuter. Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre représentant le lecteur, puis cliquez sur OK. • Si la fenêtre Exécution automatique s’affiche sous Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 2008 Server R2, cliquez sur Exécuter Setup.exe dans le champ Installer or exécuter un programme et cliquez sur Continuer ou Oui dans la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur. 3. Sélectionnez Installer maintenant. Au besoin, sélectionnez une langue dans la liste déroulante. • Vous pouvez accéder à la fenêtre d’installation de CLP-325W(K) via le menu Configuration et installation sans fil. Configuration et installation sans fil vous permet d’installer un réseau sans fil pour connecter l’appareil à l’aide d’un câble USB (voir « Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble USB » à la page 46). • L’Installation avancée dispose de deux options, Installation personnalisée et Installer uniquement les logiciels. L’Installation personnalisée vous permet de sélectionner la connexion de l’appareil et de choisir les composants individuels à installer. Installer uniquement les logiciels vous permet d’installer les logiciels fournis, tels que Smart Panel. Suivez le mode d’emploi affiché dans la fenêtre.Configuration du réseau (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 41 4. Lisez le Contrat de licence et sélectionnez J’accepte les dispositions du contrat de licence. Ensuite, cliquez sur Suivant. Le programme recherche l’appareil. Si l’appareil n’est pas détecté dans le réseau ou localement, la fenêtre suivante s’affiche à l’écran. • Vérifiez si vous voulez installer le logiciel sans connecter l’imprimante. - Cochez cette option pour installer le programme sans qu’un appareil soit connecté. La fenêtre « Imprimer une page de test » est alors ignorée et l’installation terminée. • Chercher à nouveau Lorsque vous appuyez sur ce bouton, la fenêtre d’avertissement concernant le pare-feu s’affiche. - Désactivez le pare-feu et cliquez sur Chercher à nouveau. Pour le système d’exploitation Windows, cliquez sur Démarrer > Panneau de configuration > Pare-feu Windows et désactivez cette option. Pour les autres systèmes d’exploitation, reportez-vous au guide en ligne correspondant. - Désactivez le pare-feu du programme tiers en plus du système d’exploitation. Reportez-vous au manuel fourni avec le programme correspondant. • Saisie directe La Saisie directe vous permet de rechercher un appareil spécifique sur le réseau. - Rechercher par adresse IP : saisissez l’adresse IP ou le nom d’hôte. Cliquez sur Suivant. Pour vérifier l’adresse IP de l’appareil, imprimez un rapport de configuration réseau (voir « Impression d’un journal de l’appareil » à la page 80). - Rechercher par chemin réseau : pour rechercher un appareil partagé (chemin d’accès UNC), saisissez le nom de partage manuellement ou recherchez une imprimante partagée en cliquant sur le bouton Parcourir. Cliquez sur Suivant. • Aide Si l’appareil n’est pas connecté à l’ordinateur ou au réseau, ce bouton d’aide vous fournira des procédures de connexion détaillées. 5. Les appareils détectés s’afficheront à l’écran. Sélectionnez celui que vous souhaitez utiliser, puis cliquez sur Suivant. Si le pilote n’a trouvé qu’un seul appareil, la fenêtre de confirmation s’affiche. 6. Une fois l’installation terminée, une fenêtre vous demandant d’imprimer une page de test apparaît. Si vous souhaitez imprimer un page de test, cliquez sur Imprimer une page de test. Sinon, contentez-vous de cliquer sur Suivant et passez à l’étape 8. 7. Si la page s’imprime correctement, cliquez sur Oui. Sinon, cliquez sur Non pour relancer l’impression. 8. Si vous voulez enregistrer votre appareil sur le site Web de Samsung, cliquez sur Inscription en ligne. Si l’imprimante n’est pas déjà connectée à l’ordinateur, cliquez sur Comment procéder à la connexion ?. Comment procéder à la connexion ? donne des informations détaillées concernant le branchement de l’appareil. Suivez les instructions affichées dans la fenêtre. 9. Cliquez sur Terminer. • Une fois le pilote installé, vous pouvez activer le pare-feu. • Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement, procédez comme suit pour le réparer ou le réinstaller. a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. b) Dans le menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes ou Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > le nom de votre pilote d’impression > Maintenance. c) Sélectionnez l’option souhaitée, puis suivez les instructions qui s’affichent dans la fenêtre. Macintosh 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre réseau et qu’il est sous tension. L’adresse IP de votre appareil doit également avoir été définie. 2. Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur. 3. Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh. 4. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer. 5. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X. 6. Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK.Configuration du réseau (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 42 7. La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continuer. 8. Lisez le contrat de licence et cliquez sur Continuer. 9. Cliquez sur Accepter pour accepter les termes du contrat de licence. 10. Sélectionnez Installation standard et cliquez sur Programme d’installation => Installer (10.4). L’option Installation standard est recommandée pour la plupart des utilisateurs. Tous les composants nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés. • Lorsque vous choisissez Installation personnalisée, vous pouvez installer les composants de votre choix. 11. Le message avertissant de la fermeture de toutes les applications en cours d’exécution sur votre ordinateur apparaît. Cliquez sur Continuer. 12. Sélectionnez le type d’installation que vous souhaitez, puis cliquez sur OK. • Installation standard sur imprimante locale: Installe les composants par défaut d’un périphérique directement connecté à l’appareil de l’utilisateur. • Installation standard sur imprimante réseau: Installe le logiciel d’un périphérique situé sur le réseau. Le programme Set IP s’exécute automatiquement. Si l’appareil dispose déjà d’informations réseau configurées, fermez le programme SetIP. Passez à l’étape suivante. • Configuration et installation sans fil : Vous pouvez accéder à la fenêtre d’installation du CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W via le menu Configuration et installation sans fil. Le menu Configuration et installation sans fil vous permet d’installer un réseau sans fil pour connecter l’appareil à l’aide d’un câble USB (voir « Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble USB » à la page 46). 13. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter ou sur Redémarrer. 14. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Utilitaires > Configuration d’imprimante. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax. 15. Cliquez sur Ajouter dans la Liste des imprimantes. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, cliquez sur l’icône « + » ; une fenêtre d’affichage apparaît. 16. Sous Mac OS X 10.3, sélectionnez l’onglet Impression via IP. • Sous Mac OS X 10,4, cliquez sur Imprimante IP. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, cliquez sur IP. 17. Sélectionnez Socket/HP Jet Direct dans Type (pour Mac OS X 10.4, 10.5 Protocole). Lors de l’impression d’un document contenant de nombreuses pages, vous pouvez améliorer le niveau de performance d’impression en choisissant Socket pour l’option Type. 18. Saisissez l’adresse IP de l’appareil dans le champ Adresse de l’imprimante. 19. Saisissez le nom de la file d’attente dans le champ File d’attente. Si vous n’arrivez pas à déterminer le nom de la file d’attente du serveur de votre appareil, commencez par essayer d’utiliser la file d’attente par défaut. 20. Sous Mac OS X 10.3, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Samsung dans Modèle de l’imprimante et votre nom d’appareil dans Nom de modèle. • Sous Mac OS X 10.4, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Samsung dans Imprimer via et votre nom d’appareil dans Modèle. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, si la sélection automatique ne fonctionne pas correctement, sélectionnez Sélectionner un gestionnaire à utiliser..., puis le nom de votre imprimante dans Imprimer via. Votre appareil apparaît dans la Liste des imprimantes et est défini comme imprimante par défaut. 21. Cliquez sur Ajouter. Si le pilote d’impression ne fonctionne pas correctement, désinstallez-le et réinstallez-le. Pour Mac OS, procédez comme suit pour désinstaller le pilote. a) Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre ordinateur et qu’il est sous tension. b) Insérez le CD du logiciel dans le lecteur. c) Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh. d) Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer. e) Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X. f) Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. g) La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continuer. h) Lisez le contrat de licence et cliquez sur Continuer. i) Cliquez sur Accepter pour accepter les termes du contrat de licence. j) Sélectionnez Désinstaller et cliquez sur Désinstaller. k) Lorsqu’un message avertissant de la fermeture de toutes les applications en cours d’exécution sur votre ordinateur apparaît, cliquez sur Continuer. l) Une fois la désinstallation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter. Linux Vous devez télécharger les packages de logiciels Linux du site Web de Samsung pour installer le logiciel de l’imprimante. Pour installer un autre logiciel : • Voir « Installation de Smart Panel » à la page 34. • Voir « Installation de Printer Settings Utility » à la page 35. Installation du Unified Linux Driver 1. Assurez-vous que l’appareil est connecté à votre réseau et qu’il est sous tension. L’adresse IP de votre appareil doit également avoir été définie. 2. Depuis le site Web de Samsung, téléchargez le package Unified Linux Driver sur votre ordinateur. 3. Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur le package Unified Linux Driver et extrayez-le. 4. Double-cliquez sur cdroot > autorun. 5. La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continue. 6. La fenêtre de l’assistant d’ajout d’imprimante s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Next. 7. Sélectionnez imprimante réseau et cliquez sur le bouton Search. 8. L’adresse IP et le nom de modèle de l’imprimante apparaissent dans le champ de liste. 9. Sélectionnez l’appareil, puis cliquez sur Next. 10. Entrez la description de l’imprimante et cliquez sur Next. 11. Une fois l’ajout d’imprimante terminé, cliquez sur Finish. 12. Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Finish.Configuration du réseau (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 43 Ajout d’une imprimante réseau 1. Double-cliquez sur Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Cliquez sur Add Printer… 3. La fenêtre Add printer wizard s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Next. 4. Sélectionnez Network printer et cliquez sur le bouton Search. 5. L’adresse IP et le nom de modèle de l’imprimante apparaissent dans le champ de liste. 6. Sélectionnez l’appareil, puis cliquez sur Next. 7. Entrez la description de l’imprimante et cliquez sur Next. 8. Une fois l’ajout d’imprimante terminé, cliquez sur Finish.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 44 4.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) Ce chapitre vous guide pas-à-pas dans la procédure de paramétrage de l’appareil connecté à un réseau sans fil et du logiciel. Il contient les sections suivantes : • Instructions de démarrage • Choix du type d’installation réseau sans fil • Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS • Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil à partir de l’ordinateur • Fin de l’installation • Activation/désactivation du réseau Wi-Fi • Dépannage Pour plus d’informations sur l’environnement réseau, les programmes réseau et l’installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté à un réseau, reportez-vous aux chapitres suivants : • Voir « Environnement réseau » à la page 37. • Voir « Présentation des programmes réseau utiles » à la page 37. • Voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau » à la page 40. Instructions de démarrage Choisir votre connexion réseau En règle générale, vous ne pouvez avoir qu’une connexion à la fois entre votre ordinateur et l’appareil. Il y a deux types de connexions réseau à envisager : • Réseau sans fil sans point d’accès (mode Ad-Hoc) • Réseau sans fil avec un point d’accès (mode Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure Il s’agit d’un environnement généralement utilisé pour les particuliers, les bureaux à domicile et les petites entreprises. Ce mode utilise un point d’accès pour communiquer avec l’appareil sans fil. • Voir « Installation de l’appareil sur un réseau sans fil avec un point d’accès (Windows) » à la page 46. • Voir « Installation de l’appareil sur un réseau sans fil avec un point d’accès (Macintosh) » à la page 49. Mode Ad-Hoc Ce mode n’utilise pas de point d’accès. L’ordinateur sans fil et l’appareil sans fil communiquent directement. • Voir « Installation de l’appareil sur un réseau sans fil Ad-Hoc (Windows) » à la page 47. • Voir « Installation de l’appareil sur un réseau sans fil Ad-Hoc (Macintosh) » à la page 50. Après avoir choisi votre configuration, suivez les indications simples correspondant au système d’exploitation de votre ordinateur, mais localisez d’abord le CD de logiciels fourni avec l’appareil avant de continuer. Nom du réseau sans fil et clé réseau Les réseaux sans fil exigent une sécurité plus élevée et c’est pourquoi, lors de la création d’un point d’accès, on crée un nom de réseau (SSID), le type de sécurité utilisé, et une clé réseau pour le réseau. Recherchez ces informations avant de commencer l’installation de l’appareil. Choix du type d’installation réseau sans fil Il existe diverses manières d’installer le réseau sans fil pour la connexion à l’appareil. Vous pouvez installer un réseau sans fil depuis le panneau de commande de l’appareil ou depuis l’ordinateur. Pour la plupart des utilisateurs, nous recommandons d’utiliser le bouton WPS ( ) pour configurer les paramètres de réseau sans fil. À partir du panneau de commande • WPS ( ) : si votre appareil et un point d’accès (ou un routeur sans fil) prennent en charge la configuration WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™), vous pouvez facilement configurer les paramètres du réseau sans fil en appuyant sur le bouton WPS ( ) du panneau de commande. (voir « Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS » à la page 45). Depuis l’ordinateur À partir de l’ordinateur, nous recommandons l’utilisation d’un câble USB avec le programme fourni sur le CD du logiciel. • Avec un câble USB : vous pouvez configurer aisément un réseau sans fil en utilisant le programme fourni dans le CD de logiciels. Seuls les systèmes d’exploitation Windows et Macintosh sont pris en charge (voir « Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble USB » à la page 46). Vous pouvez également installer un réseau sans fil dans Utilitaire de paramétrage d’imprimante avec un câble USB après installation du pilote (les systèmes d’exploitation Windows et Macintosh sont pris en charge). • Avec un câble réseau : vous pouvez configurer un réseau sans fil en utilisant le programme SyncThru™ Web Service (voir « Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble réseau » à la page 51).Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 45 Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS Vous pouvez installer un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS ( ). Une fois connecté au réseau sans fil, vous devez installer le pilote d’un appareil afin de procéder à l’impression depuis une application (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau » à la page 40). Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil avec le bouton WPS Si votre appareil et un point d’accès (ou un routeur sans fil) prennent en charge la configuration WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™), vous pouvez facilement configurer les paramètres du réseau sans fil en appuyant sur le bouton WPS ( ) du panneau de commande. Si vous souhaitez utiliser le réseau sans fil en mode Infrastructure, assurez-vous que le câble réseau est déconnecté de l’appareil. L’utilisation du bouton WPS (PBC) ou la saisie du numéro PIN depuis l’ordinateur pour vous connecter au point d’accès dépend du point d’accès (ou du routeur sans fil) que vous utilisez. Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi du point d’accès (ou du routeur sans fil) que vous utilisez. Éléments à préparer Vous devez vous assurer que les éléments suivants sont prêts à l’emploi : • Vérifiez si le point d’accès (ou le routeur sans fil) prend en charge le WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™). • Vérifiez si votre appareil prend en charge le WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™). • Ordinateur en réseau (mode PIN uniquement). Choisir votre connexion réseau Il existe deux méthodes permettant de connecter votre appareil à un réseau sans fil à l’aide du bouton WPS ( ) du panneau de commande. La méthode PBC (Push Button Configuration) vous permet de connecter votre appareil à un réseau sans fil en appuyant respectivement sur le bouton WPS ( ) du panneau de commande de votre appareil et sur le bouton WPS (PBC) d’un point d’accès (ou routeur sans fil) compatible WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™). La méthode par numéro d’identification personnelle (PIN) vous permet de connecter votre appareil à un réseau sans fil en saisissant les informations du PIN fourni sur un point d’accès (ou un routeur sans fil) compatible avec WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™). PBC est le mode utilisé par défaut sur votre appareil ; il s’agit du mode recommandé pour un environnement de réseau sans fil typique. Se connecter à un réseau sans fil en mode PBC Pour connecter votre appareil au réseau sans fil en mode PBC, procédez comme suit : Vous devez vérifier l’état du voyant sans fil. 1. Maintenez le bouton WPS ( ) du panneau de commande enfoncé pendant environ deux à quatre secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état clignote rapidement. • : Le voyant Sans fil clignote lentement. L’appareil essaie de se connecter au réseau sans fil. Le voyant clignote lentement pendant deux minutes jusqu’à ce que vous appuyiez sur le bouton PBC du point d’accès (ou du routeur sans fil). 2. : Appuyez sur le bouton WPS (PBC) du point d’accès (ou du routeur sans fil). Le voyant Sans fil clignote dans l’ordre affiché ci-dessous : a) : Le voyant Sans fil clignote rapidement. L’appareil se connecte au point d’accès (ou au routeur sans fil). b) : Lorsque l’appareil est connecté au réseau sans fil, le voyant Sans fil reste allumé. Se connecter au réseau sans fil en mode PIN Pour connecter votre appareil au réseau sans fil, suivez les instructions ci-dessous : Vous devez vérifier l’état du voyant sans fil. 1. Le rapport de configuration du réseau incluant le numéro PIN doit être imprimé. En mode prêt, appuyez sur le bouton Annuler ( ) du panneau de commande et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant environ 5 secondes. Vous pouvez accéder au numéro PIN de votre appareil. 2. Maintenez le bouton WPS ( ) du panneau de commande enfoncé pendant plus de quatre secondes jusqu’à ce que le voyant d’état s’allume. • : Le voyant Sans fil clignote lentement. L’appareil commence à se connecter au point d’accès (ou au routeur sans fil). 3. Vous devez saisir le numéro à huit caractères du PIN dans les deux minutes sur l’ordinateur qui est connecté au point d’accès (ou au routeur sans fil). Le voyant clignote lentement pendant deux minutes maximum jusqu’à ce que vous saisissiez le numéro à huit caractères du PIN. Le voyant Sans fil clignote dans l’ordre affiché ci-dessous : a) : Le voyant Sans fil clignote rapidement. L’appareil se connecte au point d’accès (ou au routeur sans fil). b) : Lorsque l’appareil est connecté au réseau sans fil, le voyant Sans fil reste allumé. Reconnexion au réseau sans fil Lorsque la fonction sans fil est désactivée, l’appareil essaie automatiquement de se reconnecter au point d’accès (ou au routeur sans fil) avec les paramètres et l’adresse de connexion sans fil utilisés précédemment. Dans les cas suivants, l’appareil se reconnecte automatiquement au réseau sans fil : • L’appareil est à nouveau éteint puis rallumé. • Le point d’accès (ou le routeur sans fil) est à nouveau éteint puis rallumé. Annulation d’un processus de connexion à un réseau sans fil Pour annuler la fonction de connexion à un réseau sans fil lorsque l’appareil se connecte au réseau sans fil, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton Annuler ( ) sur le panneau de commande. Vous devez attendre deux minutes avant de vous reconnecter au réseau sans fil.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 46 Déconnexion d’un réseau sans fil Pour annuler la connexion au réseau sans fil, appuyez sur le bouton WPS ( ) du panneau de commande pendant plus de deux secondes. • Quand le réseau Wi-Fi est en mode veille : l’appareil est immédiatement déconnecté du réseau sans fil et le voyant sans fil est éteint. • Quand le réseau Wi-Fi est en cours d’utilisation : pendant que l’appareil attend que la tâche actuelle se termine, le voyant Sans fil clignote rapidement. Ensuite, la connexion au réseau sans fil est automatiquement interrompue. Le voyant Sans fil est éteint. Lorsque le réseau Wi-Fi est déconnecté, appuyez sur le bouton WPS ( ) du panneau de commande. Le réseau Wi-Fi est activé et le paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil commence. Paramétrage d’un réseau sans fil à partir de l’ordinateur Vous pouvez installer un réseau sans fil avec un câble USB ou avec un câble réseau à partir de l’ordinateur. Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble USB Consultez votre administrateur réseau ou la personne ayant configuré votre réseau sans fil pour plus d’informations concernant votre configuration réseau. Installation de l’appareil sur un réseau sans fil avec un point d’accès (Windows) Éléments à préparer Assurez-vous que vous disposez des éléments suivants. • Point d’accès • Ordinateur connecté au réseau • CD de logiciels fourni avec votre appareil • L’appareil installé avec une interface réseau sans fil • Câble USB Création du réseau d’infrastructure dans Windows Lorsque les éléments sont prêts, procédez comme suit : 1. Vérifiez si le câble USB est correctement raccordé à l’appareil. 2. Mettez votre ordinateur, votre point d’accès et votre appareil sous tension. 3. Insérez le CD de logiciels dans le lecteur. • Le CD de logiciels s’exécute automatiquement et une fenêtre d’installation s’affiche. • Si la fenêtre d’installation ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur Démarrer, puis sur Exécuter. Tapez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre qui représente votre lecteur. Cliquez sur OK. • Si vous utilisez Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, cliquez sur Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Accessoires > Exécuter. Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre représentant le lecteur, puis cliquez sur OK. • Si la fenêtre Exécution automatique s’affiche sous Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 2008 Server R2, cliquez sur Exécuter Setup.exe dans le champ Installer or exécuter un programme et cliquez sur Continuer ou Oui dans la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur. 4. Sélectionnez l’option Configuration et installation sans fil. • Installer maintenant : si vous avez défini le réseau sans fil, cliquez sur ce bouton pour installer le pilote de l’appareil et utiliser l’appareil réseau sans fil. Si vous n’avez pas défini le réseau sans fil, cliquez sur le bouton Configuration et installation sans fil pour définir le réseau sans fil avant de cliquer sur ce bouton. • Configuration et installation sans fil : configurez les paramètres de réseau sans fil de votre appareil avec un câble USB, puis installez le pilote de l’appareil. Cette opération est uniquement destinée aux utilisateurs qui n’ont pas encore configuré la connexion sans fil. 5. Lisez le Contrat de licence et sélectionnez J’accepte les dispositions du contrat de licence. Cliquez sur Suivant. 6. Le logiciel recherche le réseau sans fil. Si la recherche a échoué, vous pouvez vérifier si le câble USB est correctement raccordé entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil et suivre les instructions affichées dans la fenêtre. 7. Lorsque la recherche est terminée, la fenêtre affiche les périphériques connectés au réseau sans fil. Sélectionnez le nom (SSID) du point d’accès que vous utilisez et cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous ne pouvez pas trouver le nom du réseau que vous voulez sélectionner, ou si vous voulez définir manuellement la configuration sans fil, cliquez sur Réglage avancé. • Entrez le nom du réseau sans fil : saisissez le SSID du point d’accès souhaité (le SSID est sensible à la casse). • Mode de fonctionnement : sélectionnez Infrastructure. • Authentification : sélectionnez un type d’authentification. Sys. ouvert : Ll’authentification n’est pas utilisée et le cryptage peut l’être ou non, en fonction de l’enjeu de sécurité des données. Clé part. : L’authentification est utilisée. Un appareil disposant de la bonne clé WEP peut accéder au réseau. WPA Personal ou WPA2 Personal: sélectionnez cette option pour authentifier le serveur d’impression à partir d’une clé pré-partagée WPA. Cela active une clé secrète partagée (généralement appelée clé secrète pré-partagée) qui est configurée manuellement sur le point d’accès et sur chacun de ses clients. • Cryptage : sélectionnez le cryptage (Aucun, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES). • Clé réseau : saisissez la valeur de clé de cryptage réseau. • Confirmez la clé réseau : confirmez la valeur de la clé de cryptage réseau.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 47 • Indice de clé WEP : si vous utilisez le cryptage WEP, sélectionnez l’Indice de clé WEP approprié. La fenêtre de la sécurité du réseau sans fil s’affiche lorsque des paramètres de sécurité sont définis pour le point d’accès. La fenêtre de la sécurité du réseau sans fil s’affiche. La fenêtre peut varier en fonction de son mode de sécurité, WEP ou WPA. • Dans le cas du mode WEP Sélectionnez Sys. ouvert ou Clé part. pour l’authentification et saisissez la clé de sécurité WEP. Cliquez sur Suivant. Le WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) est un protocole de sécurité destiné à empêcher tout accès non autorisé à votre réseau sans fil. Ce protocole chiffre les données de chaque paquet échangé sur un réseau sans fil à l’aide d’une clé de cryptage WEP 64 ou 128 bits. • Dans le cas du mode WPA Saisissez la clé WPA partagée et cliquez sur Suivant. Le WPA identifie et octroie une autorisation aux utilisateurs au moyen d’une clé secrète qui se renouvelle automatiquement à intervalles réguliers. Le WPA utilise également les normes TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) et AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) pour crypter les données. 8. La fenêtre affiche les paramètres du réseau sans fil ; l’exactitude des paramètres est vérifiée. Cliquez sur Suivant. • Dans le cas de la méthode DHCP Si la méthode d’allocation d’adresses IP est DHCP, vérifiez si la fenêtre affiche DHCP. Toutefois, si la fenêtre affiche Statique, cliquez sur Modifier TCP/IP pour modifier la méthode d’attribution en DHCP. • Dans le cas de la méthode statique Si la méthode utilisée pour l’affectation de l’adresse IP est la méthode Statique, vérifiez que Statique apparaît bien dans la fenêtre. Toutefois, si elle affiche DHCP, cliquez sur Modifier TCP/IP pour saisir l’adresse IP et d’autres valeurs de configuration réseau pour l’appareil. Avant de saisir l’adresse IP de l’appareil, vous devez disposer des informations de configuration réseau de l’ordinateur. Si l’ordinateur est défini sur DHCP, vous devez contacter l’administrateur réseau pour obtenir l’adresse IP statique. Par exemple : Si les informations réseau de l’ordinateur sont les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133.42 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 Les informations réseau de l’appareil doivent être les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133. 43 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 (Utilisez le masque de sous-réseau de l’ordinateur). - Passerelle : 169.254.133.1 9. Lorsque le paramétrage du réseau sans fil est terminé, débranchez le câble USB entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil. Cliquez sur Suivant. 10. La fenêtre Configuration du réseau sans fil terminée s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui si vous acceptez les paramètres actuels et souhaitez poursuivre la procédure de configuration. Sélectionnez Non pour revenir à l’écran de départ. Cliquez sur Suivant. 11. Cliquez sur Suivant lorsque la fenêtre Confirmer la connexion de l’imprimante s’affiche. 12. Sélectionnez les composants à installer. Cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les composants sélectionnés, vous pouvez aussi modifier le nom de l’appareil, définir l’appareil à partager sur le réseau, définir l’appareil en tant qu’appareil par défaut et modifier le nom de port de chaque appareil. Cliquez sur Suivant. 13. Une fois l’installation terminée, une fenêtre vous demandant d’imprimer une page de test apparaît. Si vous souhaitez imprimer une page de test, cliquez sur Imprimer une page de test. Sinon, contentez-vous de cliquer sur Suivant et passez à l’étape 15. 14. Si la page de test s’imprime correctement, cliquez sur Oui. Sinon, cliquez sur Non pour relancer l’impression. 15. Pour vous inscrire en tant qu’utilisateur de l’appareil et recevoir des informations de Samsung, cliquez sur Inscription en ligne. 16. Cliquez sur Terminer. Installation de l’appareil sur un réseau sans fil Ad-Hoc (Windows) Si vous ne possédez pas de point d’accès (AP), vous pouvez toujours connecter l’appareil sans fil à votre ordinateur en configurant un réseau sans fil Ad-hoc en suivant les étapes simples ci-dessous. Éléments à préparer Assurez-vous que vous disposez des éléments suivants : • Ordinateur connecté au réseau • CD de logiciels fourni avec votre appareil • Appareil installé avec une interface réseau sans fil • Câble USB Création du réseau Ad-Hoc sous Windows Lorsque les éléments sont prêts, procédez comme suit : 1. Vérifiez si le câble USB est correctement raccordé à l’appareil. 2. Mettez l’ordinateur et l’appareil réseau sans fil sous tension. 3. Insérez le CD de logiciels dans le lecteur. • Le CD de logiciels s’exécute automatiquement et une fenêtre d’installation s’affiche à l’écran. • Si la fenêtre d’installation ne s’affiche pas, cliquez sur Démarrer, puis sur Exécuter. Tapez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre qui représente votre lecteur. Cliquez sur OK. • Si vous utilisez Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, cliquez sur Démarrer > Les programmes > Accessoires > Exécuter. Entrez X:\Setup.exe, en remplaçant « X » par la lettre représentant votre lecteur, puis cliquez sur OK. • Si la fenêtre Exécution automatique s’affiche sous Windows Vista, Windows 7 et Windows 2008 Server R2, cliquez sur Exécuter Setup.exe dans le champ Installer or exécuter un programme et cliquez sur Continuer ou Oui dans la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d’utilisateur.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 48 4. Sélectionnez l’option Configuration et installation sans fil. • Installer maintenant : si vous avez défini le réseau sans fil, cliquez sur ce bouton pour installer le pilote de l’appareil et utiliser l’appareil réseau sans fil. Si vous n’avez pas défini le réseau sans fil, cliquez sur le bouton Configuration et installation sans fil pour définir le réseau sans fil avant de cliquer sur ce bouton. • Configuration et installation sans fil : configurez les paramètres de réseau sans fil de votre appareil avec un câble USB, puis installez le pilote de l’appareil. Cette opération est uniquement destinée aux utilisateurs qui n’ont pas encore configuré la connexion sans fil. 5. Lisez le Contrat de licence et sélectionnez J’accepte les dispositions du contrat de licence. Cliquez sur Suivant. 6. Le logiciel recherche le réseau sans fil. Si la recherche de réseau par le logiciel a échoué, vérifiez si le câble USB est correctement raccordé entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil et suivez les instructions affichées dans la fenêtre. 7. Une fois la recherche des réseaux sans fil terminée, la liste des réseaux sans fil détectés par votre appareil s’affiche. Si vous souhaitez utiliser le paramètre Ad-Hoc Samsung par défaut, sélectionnez le dernier réseau sans fil de la liste, dont le Nom du réseau (SSID) est portthru et le Signal est Réseau auto impr. Cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous souhaitez utiliser d’autres paramètres ad-hoc, sélectionnez un autre réseau sans fil dans la liste. Si vous souhaitez modifier les paramètres ad-hoc, cliquez sur le bouton Réglage avancé. • Entrez le nom du réseau sans fil : saisissez le nom de SSID souhaité (le SSID respecte la casse). • Mode de fonctionnement : sélectionnez Ad-Hoc. • Canal : sélectionnez le canal (Régl. auto ou 2 412 MHz à 2 467 MHz). • Authentification : sélectionnez un type d’authentification. Sys. ouvert : l’authentification n’est pas utilisée et le cryptage peut l’être ou non, en fonction de l’enjeu de sécurité des données. Clé part. : l’authentification est utilisée. Un appareil disposant de la bonne clé WEP peut accéder au réseau. • Cryptage : sélectionnez le cryptage (Aucun, WEP64, WEP128). • Clé réseau : saisissez la valeur de clé de cryptage réseau. • Confirmez la clé réseau : confirmez la valeur de la clé de cryptage réseau. • Indice de clé WEP : si vous utilisez le cryptage WEP, sélectionnez l’Indice de clé WEP approprié. La fenêtre de la sécurité du réseau sans fil s’affiche lorsque des paramètres de sécurité ont été définis pour le réseau ad-hoc. La fenêtre de la sécurité du réseau sans fil s’affiche. Sélectionnez Sys. ouvert ou Clé part. pour l’authentification et cliquez sur Suivant. • Le WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) est un protocole de sécurité destiné à empêcher tout accès non autorisé à votre réseau sans fil. Ce protocole chiffre les données de chaque paquet échangé sur un réseau sans fil à l’aide d’une clé de cryptage WEP 64 ou 128 bits. 8. La fenêtre regroupant les paramètres du réseau sans fil s’affiche. Vérifiez les paramètres et cliquez sur Suivant. Avant de saisir l’adresse IP de l’appareil, vous devez disposer des informations de configuration réseau de l’ordinateur. Si la configuration réseau de l’ordinateur est définie sur DHCP, les paramètres du réseau doivent également l’être. De même, si la configuration réseau de l’ordinateur est définie sur Statique, les paramètres du réseau doivent également l’être. Si votre ordinateur est défini sur DHCP et que vous souhaitez utiliser le paramètre Statique pour le réseau sans fil, vous devez contacter l’administrateur réseau pour obtenir l’adresse IP statique. • Dans le cas de la méthode DHCP Si la méthode d’affectation d’adresses IP est DHCP, vérifiez que DHCP apparaît bien dans la fenêtre Confirmation de la configuration d’un réseau sans fil. Toutefois, si la fenêtre affiche Statique, cliquez sur Modifier TCP/IP pour modifier la méthode d’attribution en Recevoir automatiquement l’adresse IP (DHCP). • Dans le cas de la méthode statique Si la méthode d’affectation d’adresses IP est Statique, vérifiez que Statique apparaît bien dans la fenêtre Confirmation de la configuration d’un réseau sans fil. Toutefois, si elle affiche DHCP, cliquez sur Modifier TCP/ IP pour saisir l’adresse IP et d’autres valeurs de configuration réseau pour l’appareil. Par exemple : Si les informations réseau de l’ordinateur sont les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133.42 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 Les informations réseau de l’appareil doivent être les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133. 43 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 (utilisez le masque de sous-réseau de l’ordinateur). - Passerelle : 169.254.133.1 9. Lorsque le paramétrage du réseau sans fil est terminé, débranchez le câble USB entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil. Cliquez sur Suivant. Si la fenêtre Modifier les paramètres réseau du PC s’affiche, suivez les étapes indiquées dans la fenêtre. Cliquez sur Suivant une fois que vous avez terminé de définir les paramètres de réseau sans fil de l’ordinateur. Si vous définissez le réseau sans fil de l’ordinateur sur DHCP, il faudra plusieurs minutes pour recevoir l’adresse IP.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 49 10. La fenêtre Configuration du réseau sans fil terminée s’affiche. Sélectionnez Oui si vous acceptez les paramètres actuels et souhaitez poursuivre la procédure de configuration. Sélectionnez Non pour revenir à l’écran de départ. Cliquez sur Suivant. 11. Cliquez sur Suivant lorsque la fenêtre Confirmer la connexion de l’imprimante s’affiche. 12. Sélectionnez les composants à installer. Cliquez sur Suivant. Une fois les composants sélectionnés, vous pouvez aussi modifier le nom de l’appareil, définir l’appareil à partager sur le réseau, définir l’appareil en tant qu’appareil par défaut et modifier le nom de port de chaque appareil. Cliquez sur Suivant. 13. Une fois l’installation terminée, une fenêtre vous demandant d’imprimer une page de test apparaît. Si vous souhaitez imprimer une page de test, cliquez sur Imprimer une page de test. Sinon, contentez-vous de cliquer sur Suivant et passez à l’étape 15. 14. Si la page de test s’imprime correctement, cliquez sur Oui. Sinon, cliquez sur Non pour relancer l’impression. 15. Pour vous inscrire en tant qu’utilisateur de l’appareil et recevoir des informations de Samsung, cliquez sur Inscription en ligne. 16. Cliquez sur Terminer. Installation de l’appareil sur un réseau sans fil avec un point d’accès (Macintosh) Éléments à préparer Assurez-vous que vous disposez des éléments suivants : • Point d’accès • Ordinateur connecté au réseau • CD de logiciels fourni avec votre appareil • Appareil installé avec une interface réseau sans fil • Câble USB Création de l’infrastructure sous Macintosh Lorsque les éléments sont prêts, procédez comme suit : 1. Vérifiez si le câble USB est correctement raccordé à l’appareil. 2. Mettez votre ordinateur, votre point d’accès et votre appareil sous tension. 3. Insérez le CD de logiciels dans le lecteur. 4. Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh. 5. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer. 6. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X. 7. Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. 8. La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continuer. 9. Lisez le contrat de licence et cliquez sur Continuer. 10. Cliquez sur Accepter pour accepter les dispositions du contrat de licence. 11. La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continuer. 12. Sélectionnez Installation standard et cliquez sur Installer. L’option Installation standard est recommandée pour la plupart des utilisateurs. Tous les composants nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés. Si vous sélectionnez Installation personnalisée, vous pouvez choisir les composants individuels à installer. 13. Sélectionnez l’option Configuration et installation sans fil. 14. Le logiciel recherche le réseau sans fil. Si la recherche a échoué, vous pouvez vérifier si le câble USB est correctement raccordé entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil et suivre les instructions affichées dans la fenêtre. 15. Lorsque la recherche est terminée, la fenêtre affiche les périphériques connectés au réseau sans fil. Sélectionnez le nom (SSID) du point d’accès que vous utilisez et cliquez sur Suivant. Lorsque vous définissez manuellement la configuration de réseau sans fil, cliquez sur Réglage avancé. • Entrez le nom du réseau sans fil : saisissez le SSID du point d’accès souhaité (le SSID est sensible à la casse). • Mode de fonctionnement : sélectionnez Infrastructure. • Authentification : sélectionnez un type d’authentification. Sys. ouvert : l’authentification n’est pas utilisée et le cryptage peut l’être ou non, en fonction de l’enjeu de sécurité des données. Clé part.: l’authentification est utilisée. Un appareil disposant de la bonne clé WEP peut accéder au réseau. WPA Personal ou WPA2 Personal : sélectionnez cette option pour authentifier le serveur d’impression à partir d’une clé pré-partagée WPA. Cela active une clé secrète partagée (généralement appelée clé secrète pré-partagée) qui est configurée manuellement sur le point d’accès et sur chacun de ses clients. • Cryptage : sélectionnez le cryptage. (Aucun, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES) • Clé réseau : saisissez la valeur de clé de cryptage réseau. • Confirmez la clé réseau : confirmez la valeur de la clé de cryptage réseau. • Indice de clé WEP : si vous utilisez le cryptage WEP, sélectionnez l’Indice de clé WEP approprié. La fenêtre de la sécurité du réseau sans fil s’affiche lorsque des paramètres de sécurité sont définis pour le point d’accès. La fenêtre de la sécurité du réseau sans fil s’affiche. La fenêtre peut varier suivant son mode de sécurité : WEP ou WPA. • Dans le cas du mode WEP Sélectionnez Sys. ouvert ou Clé part. pour l’authentification et saisissez la clé de sécurité WEP. Cliquez sur Suivant. Le WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) est un protocole de sécurité destiné à empêcher tout accès non autorisé à votre réseau sans fil. Ce protocole chiffre les données de chaque paquet échangé sur un réseau sans fil à l’aide d’une clé de cryptage WEP 64 ou 128 bits. • Dans le cas du mode WPA Saisissez la clé WPA partagée et cliquez sur Suivant. Le WPA identifie et octroie une autorisation aux utilisateurs au moyen d’une clé secrète qui se renouvelle automatiquement à intervalles réguliers. Le WPA utilise également les normes TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) et AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) pour crypter les données. 16. La fenêtre affiche le paramétrage du réseau sans fil ; vérifiez si les paramètres sont corrects. Cliquez sur Suivant. • Dans le cas de la méthode DHCP Si la méthode d’attribution de l’adresse IP est DHCP, vérifiez si la fenêtre affiche DHCP. Toutefois, si la fenêtre affiche Statique, cliquez sur Modifier TCP/IP pour modifier la méthode d’attribution en DHCP.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 50 • Dans le cas de la méthode statique Si la méthode utilisée pour l’affectation de l’adresse IP est la méthode Statique, vérifiez que Statique apparaît bien dans la fenêtre. Toutefois, si la fenêtre affiche DHCP, cliquez sur Modifier TCP/IP pour saisir l’adresse IP et d’autres valeurs de configuration réseau pour l’appareil. Avant de saisir l’adresse IP de l’appareil, vous devez disposer des informations de configuration réseau de l’ordinateur. Si l’ordinateur est défini sur DHCP, vous devez contacter l’administrateur réseau pour obtenir l’adresse IP statique. Par exemple : Si les informations réseau de l’ordinateur sont les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133.42 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 Les informations réseau de l’appareil doivent être les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133. 43 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 (utilisez le masque de sous-réseau de l’ordinateur). - Passerelle : 169.254.133.1 17. La connexion au réseau sans fil s’effectue en fonction de la configuration réseau. 18. Lorsque le paramétrage du réseau sans fil est terminé, débranchez le câble USB entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil. 19. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter ou sur Redémarrer. Installation de l’appareil sur un réseau sans fil Ad-Hoc (Macintosh) Si vous ne possédez pas de point d’accès (AP), vous pouvez toujours connecter l’appareil sans fil à votre ordinateur en configurant un réseau sans fil Ad-Hoc en suivant les indications simples suivantes. Éléments à préparer Assurez-vous que vous disposez des éléments suivants : • Ordinateur connecté au réseau • CD de logiciels fourni avec votre appareil • Appareil installé avec une interface réseau sans fil • Câble USB Création du réseau Ad-Hoc sous Macintosh Une fois les éléments prêts, procédez comme suit : 1. Vérifiez si le câble USB est correctement raccordé à l’appareil. 2. Mettez l’ordinateur et l’appareil sous tension. 3. Insérez le CD de logiciels dans le lecteur. 4. Double-cliquez sur l’icône CD-ROM qui apparaît sur le bureau du Macintosh. 5. Double-cliquez sur le dossier MAC_Installer. 6. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Installer OS X. 7. Saisissez le mot de passe et cliquez sur OK. 8. La fenêtre du programme d’installation Samsung s’ouvre. Cliquez sur Continuer. 9. Lisez le contrat de licence et cliquez sur Continuer. 10. Cliquez sur Accepter pour accepter les dispositions du contrat de licence. 11. Sélectionnez Installation standard et cliquez sur Installer. L’option Installation standard est recommandée pour la plupart des utilisateurs. Tous les composants nécessaires aux opérations de l’appareil seront installés. Si vous sélectionnez Installation personnalisée, vous pouvez choisir les composants individuels à installer. 12. Cliquez sur Configuration et installation sans fil. 13. Le logiciel recherche les périphériques connectés au réseau sans fil. Si la recherche a échoué, vous pouvez vérifier si le câble USB est correctement raccordé entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil et suivre les instructions affichées dans la fenêtre. 14. Une fois la recherche des réseaux sans fil terminée, la liste des réseaux sans fil détectés par votre appareil s’affiche. Si vous souhaitez utiliser le paramètre ad-hoc Samsung par défaut, sélectionnez le dernier réseau sans fil de la liste, dont le Nom du réseau (SSID) est portthru et le Signal est Réseau auto impr.. Cliquez sur Suivant. Si vous souhaitez utiliser d’autres paramètres ad-hoc, sélectionnez un autre réseau sans fil dans la liste. Si vous souhaitez modifier les paramètres ad-hoc, cliquez sur le bouton Réglage avancé. • Entrez le nom du réseau sans fil : saisissez le nom de SSID souhaité (le SSID est sensible à la casse). • Mode de fonctionnement : sélectionnez Ad-hoc. • Canal : sélectionnez le canal (Régl. auto ou 2412 MHz à 2467 MHz). • Authentification : sélectionnez un type d’authentification. Sys. ouvert: l’authentification n’est pas utilisée et le cryptage peut l’être ou non, en fonction de l’enjeu de sécurité des données. Clé part.: l’authentification est utilisée. Un appareil disposant de la bonne clé WEP peut accéder au réseau. • Cryptage : sélectionnez le cryptage (Aucun, WEP64, WEP128). • Clé réseau : saisissez la valeur de clé de cryptage réseau. • Confirmez la clé réseau : confirmez la valeur de la clé de cryptage réseau. • Indice de clé WEP : si vous utilisez le cryptage WEP, sélectionnez l’Indice de clé WEP approprié. La fenêtre de la sécurité du réseau sans fil s’affiche lorsque des paramètres de sécurité ont été définis pour le réseau ad-hoc. La fenêtre de la sécurité du réseau sans fil s’affiche. Sélectionnez Sys. ouvert ou Clé part. pour l’authentification et cliquez sur Suivant. • Le WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) est un protocole de sécurité destiné à empêcher tout accès non autorisé à votre réseau sans fil. Ce protocole chiffre les données de chaque paquet échangé sur un réseau sans fil à l’aide d’une clé de cryptage WEP 64 ou 128 bits. 15. La fenêtre regroupant les paramètres du réseau sans fil s’affiche. Vérifiez les paramètres et cliquez sur Suivant. Avant de saisir l’adresse IP de l’appareil, vous devez disposer des informations de configuration réseau de l’ordinateur. Si la configuration réseau de l’ordinateur est définie sur DHCP, les paramètres du réseau doivent également l’être. De même, si la configuration réseau de l’ordinateur est définie sur Statique, les Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 51 paramètres du réseau doivent également l’être. Si votre ordinateur est défini sur DHCP et que vous souhaitez utiliser le paramètre Statique pour le réseau sans fil, vous devez contacter l’administrateur réseau pour obtenir l’adresse IP statique. • Dans le cas de la méthode DHCP Si la méthode d’allocation d’adresses IP est DHCP, vérifiez que DHCP apparaît bien dans la fenêtre Confirmation de la configuration d’un réseau sans fil. Toutefois, si la fenêtre affiche Statique, cliquez sur Modifier TCP/IP pour modifier la méthode d’attribution en Recevoir automatiquement l’adresse IP (DHCP). • Dans le cas de la méthode statique Si la méthode d’affectation d’adresses IP est Statique, vérifiez que Statique apparaît bien dans la fenêtre Confirmation de la configuration d’un réseau sans fil. Toutefois, si elle affiche DHCP, cliquez sur Modifier TCP/ IP pour saisir l’adresse IP et d’autres valeurs de configuration réseau pour l’appareil. Par exemple : Si les informations réseau de l’ordinateur sont les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133.42 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 Les informations réseau de l’appareil doivent être les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133. 43 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 (utilisez le masque de sous-réseau de l’ordinateur). - Passerelle : 169.254.133.1 16. La connexion au réseau sans fil s’effectue en fonction de la configuration réseau. 17. Lorsque le paramétrage du réseau sans fil est terminé, débranchez le câble USB entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil. 18. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. Une fois l’installation terminée, cliquez sur Quitter ou sur Redémarrer. Configuration d’un réseau sans fil avec un câble réseau Votre appareil est compatible réseau. Quelques procédures de configuration sont néanmoins nécessaires pour qu’il puisse fonctionner avec votre réseau. • Une fois connecté au réseau sans fil, vous devez installer le pilote d’un appareil afin de procéder à l’impression depuis une application (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau » à la page 40). • Consultez votre administrateur réseau ou la personne ayant configuré votre réseau sans fil pour plus d’informations concernant votre configuration réseau. Préparation des éléments Assurez-vous que vous disposez des éléments suivants : • Point d’accès • Ordinateur connecté au réseau • CD de logiciels fourni avec votre appareil • L’appareil installé avec une interface réseau sans fil • Câble réseau Création d’une adresse IP Commencez par créer une adresse IP pour l’impression et la gestion réseau. Dans la plupart des cas, une nouvelle adresse IP est attribuée automatiquement par un serveur DHCP (serveur de protocole DHCP) situé sur le réseau. Dans quelques cas, l’adresse IP doit être créée manuellement. Cette adresse est appelée IP statique et elle est souvent requise dans les Intranets d’entreprise pour des raisons de sécurité. • Affectation d’adresse IP par DHCP : connectez votre appareil au réseau et patientez quelques minutes jusqu’à ce que le serveur DHCP attribue une adresse IP à l’appareil. Ensuite, imprimez le Journal de configuration réseau, comme expliqué ci-dessus. Si le journal indique que l’adresse IP a changé, l’attribution est réussie. La nouvelle adresse IP apparaît sur le journal. • Attribution d’adresse IP statique : utilisez le programme SetIP pour changer l’adresse IP depuis votre ordinateur. Dans un environnement professionnel, nous vous recommandons de contacter un administrateur réseau pour définir cette adresse. Impression d’un rapport de configuration réseau Vous pouvez identifier les paramètres réseau de votre appareil en imprimant un rapport de configuration réseau. Pour imprimer le journal : En mode prêt, appuyez sur le bouton Annuler ( ) et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant environ 5 secondes. Vous pouvez retrouver l’adresse MAC et l’adresse IP de votre appareil. Par exemple : • Adresse MAC : 00:15:99:41:A2:78 • Adresse IP : 192.0.0.192 Définition d’adresse IP à l’aide du programme SetIP (Windows) Ce programme permet de configurer manuellement l’adresse réseau IP de votre appareil à l’aide de son adresse MAC pour communiquer avec l’appareil. Une adresse MAC est un numéro de série matériel de l’interface réseau qui figure dans le Journal de configuration réseau. Pour utiliser le programme SetIP, désactivez le pare-feu de l’ordinateur avant de poursuivre, en procédant comme suit : 1. Ouvrez Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Panneau de configuration. 2. Double-cliquez sur Centre de sécurité. 3. Cliquez sur Pare-feu Windows. 4. Désactivez le pare-feu. Installation du programme 1. Insérez le CD-ROM du logiciel de l’imprimante fourni avec votre appareil. Fermez la fenêtre d’exécution automatique du CD. 2. Lancez l’Explorateur Windows et ouvrez le lecteur X (X représentant votre lecteur de CD-ROM). 3. Double-cliquez sur Application > SetIP. 4. Double-cliquez sur Setup.exe pour installer ce programme. 5. Sélectionnez une langue, puis cliquez sur Suivant. 6. Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour terminer l’installation. Démarrage du programme 1. Connectez l’appareil au réseau avec un câble réseau. 2. Mettez l’appareil sous tension.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 52 3. À partir du menu Démarrer de Windows, sélectionnez Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4. Cliquez sur l’icône (la troisième en partant de la gauche) dans la fenêtre SetIP pour ouvrir la fenêtre de configuration TCP/IP. 5. Saisissez les nouvelles informations de l’appareil dans la fenêtre de configuration, de la manière suivante. Dans un intranet d’entreprise, ces informations peuvent devoir être affectées par un gestionnaire du réseau avant de poursuivre. • Adresse MAC : recherchez l’adresse MAC de l’appareil dans le Journal de configuration réseau et saisissez-la sans les deux-points (:). Par exemple, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 devient 0015992951A8. • Adresse IP : saisissez une nouvelle adresse IP pour votre imprimante. Par exemple, si l’adresse IP de votre ordinateur est 192.168.1.150, saisissez 192.168.1.X (X étant un chiffre compris entre 1 et 254 différent de l’adresse de l’ordinateur). • Masque de sous-réseau : saisissez le masque de sous-réseau. • Passerelle par défaut : saisissez la passerelle par défaut. 6. Cliquez sur Appliquer, puis sur OK. L’appareil imprimera automatiquement le Journal de configuration réseau. Vérifiez que tous les paramètres sont corrects. 7. Cliquez sur Quitter pour quitter le programme SetIP. 8. Au besoin, redémarrez le pare-feu de l’ordinateur. Définition d’adresse IP à l’aide du programme SetIP (Macintosh) Pour utiliser le programme SetIP, désactivez le pare-feu de l’ordinateur avant de poursuivre, en procédant comme suit : Le chemin d’accès et les interfaces utilisateur peuvent varier en fonction de la version du système d’exploitation Mac OS utilisée. Reportez-vous au manuel de Mac OS. 1. Ouvrez Préférences Système. 2. Cliquez sur Sécurité. 3. Cliquez sur le menu Coupe-feu. 4. Désactivez le coupe-feu. Les instructions suivantes peuvent varier selon le modèle. 1. Connectez l’appareil au réseau avec un câble réseau. 2. Insérez le CD d’installation, et ouvrez la fenêtre du disque, puis sélectionnez MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPApplet.html. 3. Double-cliquez sur le fichier ; Safari s’ouvre alors automatiquement. Sélectionnez ensuite Se fier. Le navigateur ouvrira la page SetIPApplet.html indiquant le nom et l’adresse IP de l’imprimante. 4. Cliquez sur l’icône (la troisième en partant de la gauche) dans la fenêtre SetIP pour ouvrir la fenêtre de configuration TCP/IP. 5. Saisissez les nouvelles informations de l’appareil dans la fenêtre de configuration, de la manière suivante. Dans un intranet d’entreprise, ces informations peuvent devoir être affectées par un gestionnaire du réseau avant de poursuivre. • Adresse MAC : recherchez l’adresse MAC de l’appareil dans le Journal de configuration réseau et saisissez-la sans les deux-points (:). Par exemple, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 devient 0015992951A8. • Adresse IP : saisissez une nouvelle adresse IP pour votre imprimante. Par exemple, si l’adresse IP de votre ordinateur est 192.168.1.150, saisissez 192.168.1.X (X étant un chiffre compris entre 1 et 254 différent de l’adresse de l’ordinateur). • Masque de sous-réseau : saisissez le masque de sous-réseau. • Passerelle par défaut : saisissez la passerelle par défaut. 6. Sélectionnez Appliquer, puis OK et OK de nouveau. L’imprimante imprimera automatiquement le journal de configuration. Vérifiez que tous les paramètres sont corrects. Quittez Safari. Vous pouvez fermer et éjecter le CD-ROM d’installation. Au besoin, redémarrez le pare-feu de l’ordinateur. Vous avez à ce stade modifié l’adresse IP, le masque de sous-réseau et la passerelle. Configuration du réseau sans fil de l’appareil Avant de démarrer, vous devez connaître le nom réseau (SSID) de votre réseau sans fil et la clé réseau, le cas échéant. Ces informations ont été définies lors de l’installation du point d’accès (ou du routeur sans fil). Si vous ne connaissez pas votre environnement sans fil, consultez la personne qui a configuré votre réseau. Pour configurer les paramètres sans fil, vous pouvez utiliser SyncThru™ Web Service. Utilisation du SyncThru™ Web Service Avant de procéder à la configuration sans fil des paramètres, vérifiez l’état de connexion du câble. 1. Vérifiez si le câble réseau est connecté à l’appareil. Si ce n’est pas le cas, connectez l’appareil avec un câble réseau standard. 2. Démarrez un navigateur Web comme Internet Explorer, Safari ou Firefox et saisissez la nouvelle adresse IP de votre appareil dans la fenêtre du navigateur. Par exemple : 3. Cliquez sur Ouverture de session en haut à droite du site Web SyncThru™ Web Service. Une page de connexion s’affiche. 4. Saisissez l’ID et le Mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Ouverture de session. S’il s’agit de votre première connexion à SyncThru™ Web Service, saisissez l’ID et le mot de passe par défaut suivants. • ID : admin • Mot de passe : sec00000 5. Lorsque la fenêtre SyncThru™ Web Service s’ouvre, cliquez sur Config. réseau. 6. Cliquez sur Sans fil > Assistant.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 53 Assistant vous aidera à configurer le réseau sans fil. Cependant, si vous souhaitez configurer directement le réseau sans fil, sélectionnez Perso. 7. Sélectionnez Nom du réseau (SSID) dans la liste. • SSID : l’identificateur SSID (Service Set Identifier) est un nom qui identifie un réseau sans fil. Les points d’accès et les périphériques sans fil qui essaient de se connecter à un réseau sans fil spécifique doivent utiliser le même SSID. Le SSID fait la distinction entre les majuscules et les minuscules. • Mode de fonctionnement : le Mode de fonctionnement se rapporte au type de connexion sans fil (voir « Nom du réseau sans fil et clé réseau » à la page 44). - Ad-hoc : permet à des périphériques sans fil de communiquer directement entre eux dans un environnement peer-to-peer (poste à poste). - Infrastructure : permet aux périphériques sans fil de communiquer entre eux via un point d’accès. Si le Mode de fonctionnement de votre réseau est Infrastructure, sélectionnez le SSID du point d’accès. Si le Mode de fonctionnement est Ad-hoc, sélectionnez le SSID de l’appareil. Notez que « portthru » est le SSID par défaut de votre appareil. 8. Cliquez sur Suivant. Si une fenêtre de paramètre de sécurité sans fil s’affiche, saisissez le mot de passe enregistré (clé réseau) et cliquez sur Suivant. 9. Dans la fenêtre de confirmation qui s’affiche, vérifiez votre configuration sans fil. Si la configuration est correcte, cliquez sur Appliquer. Déconnectez le câble réseau (standard ou réseau). Votre appareil doit ensuite commencer à communiquer sans fil avec le réseau. Dans le cas du mode Ad-hoc, vous pouvez utiliser simultanément un LAN sans fil et un LAN câblé. Fin de l’installation Une fois votre imprimante réseau sans fil Samsung installée, imprimez une autre copie du journal de configuration réseau et conservez-le à des fins de référence future. Vous êtes maintenant prêt à utiliser votre nouvelle imprimante sans fil Samsung sur votre réseau. Si le réseau sans fil ne semble pas fonctionner correctement, réinitialisez tous les paramètres réseau par défaut et réessayez (voir « Restauration des paramètres par défaut définis en usine à l’aide du SyncThru™ Web Service » à la page 40). Activation/désactivation du réseau Wi-Fi Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver le réseau Wi-Fi via SyncThru™ Web Service. Par défaut, le réseau est activé. Pour modifier le mode par défaut, procédez comme suit : 1. Vérifiez si le câble réseau est correctement raccordé à l’appareil. Si ce n’est pas le cas, connectez l’appareil avec un câble réseau standard. 2. Démarrez un navigateur Web, comme Internet Explorer, Safari ou Firefox et saisissez la nouvelle adresse IP de votre appareil dans la fenêtre du navigateur. Par exemple : 3. Cliquez sur Ouverture de session en haut à droite du site Web SyncThru™ Web Service. Une page de connexion s’affiche. 4. Saisissez l’ID et le Mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Ouverture de session. S’il s’agit de votre première connexion à SyncThru™ Web Service, saisissez l’ID et le mot de passe par défaut suivants. • ID : admin • Mot de passe : sec00000 5. Lorsque la fenêtre SyncThru™ Web Service s’ouvre, cliquez sur Config. réseau. 6. Cliquez sur Sans fil > Perso. Vous pouvez également activer ou désactiver le réseau Wi-Fi. Dépannage Résolution des problèmes pouvant survenir lors de la configuration des paramètres sans fil et de l’installation du pilote de l’appareil Imprimantes introuvables • Votre appareil n’est peut-être pas allumé. Mettez l’ordinateur et l’appareil sous tension. • Le câble USB n’est pas raccordé entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil. Raccordez votre appareil à votre ordinateur à l’aide du câble USB. • L’appareil ne prend pas en charge le réseau sans fil. Consultez le mode d’emploi du CD de logiciels fourni avec votre appareil et préparez un appareil réseau sans fil. Échec de la connexion - Nom de réseau sans fil introuvable • L’appareil ne parvient pas à trouver le nom du réseau (SSID) que vous avez sélectionné ou saisi. Vérifiez le nom de réseau (SSID) sur votre point d’accès et essayez de vous connecter à nouveau. • Le point d’accès n’est pas allumé. Mettez le point d’accès sous tension. Échec de la connexion - Sécurité incorrecte • Vous avez configuré la sécurité de manière incorrecte. Vérifiez la sécurité configurée au niveau de votre point d’accès et de votre appareil. Échec de la connexion - Erreur de connexion générale • L’ordinateur ne reçoit pas de signal de l’appareil. Vérifiez le câble USB et l’alimentation de l’appareil. Échec de la connexion - Réseau câblé connecté • L’appareil est raccordé avec un câble de réseau câblé. Déconnectez le câble de réseau câblé de votre appareil. Erreur de connexion à l’ordinateur • L’adresse réseau configurée ne permet pas d’établir la connexion entre l’ordinateur et l’appareil. - Dans le cas d’un environnement réseau DHCP L’imprimante reçoit automatiquement l’adresse IP (DHCP) lorsque l’ordinateur est configuré sur DHCP. - Dans le cas d’un environnement réseau statique L’appareil utilise l’adresse statique lorsque l’ordinateur est configuré sur adresse statique.Configuration du réseau sans fil (CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)_ 54 Par exemple : Si les informations réseau de l’ordinateur sont les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133.42 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 Les informations réseau de l’appareil doivent être les suivantes : - Adresse IP : 169.254.133. 43 - Masque de sous-réseau : 255.255.0.0 (utilisez le masque de sous-réseau de l’ordinateur). - Passerelle : 169.254.133.1 Résolution d’autres problèmes Si des problèmes surviennent alors que vous utilisez l’appareil sur un réseau, vérifiez les éléments suivants : Pour obtenir des informations sur le point d’accès (ou le routeur sans fil), consultez son propre mode d’emploi. • Il est possible que votre ordinateur, votre point d’accès (ou routeur sans fil) ou votre appareil ne soit pas sous tension. • Vérifiez la réception sans fil autour de l’appareil. Si la réception est éloignée de l’appareil ou s’il y a un obstacle, vous pourriez avoir des difficultés à recevoir le signal. • Éteignez, puis rallumez le point d’accès (ou le routeur sans fil), l’appareil et l’ordinateur. Cela peut parfois permettre de récupérer la communication réseau. • Vérifiez si le pare-feu logiciel (V3 ou Norton) bloque la communication. Si l’ordinateur et l’appareil raccordés sur un même réseau ne peuvent pas se trouver, un pare-feu peut bloquer la communication. Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi du pare-feu pour le désactiver, puis relancez la recherche de l’appareil. • Vérifiez si l’adresse IP de l’appareil est correctement affectée. Vous pouvez vérifier l’adresse IP en imprimant le rapport de configuration réseau. • Vérifiez si le point d’accès (ou le routeur sans fil) possède une sécurité configurée (mot de passe). S’il possède un mot de passe, consultez l’administrateur du point d’accès (ou du routeur sans fil). • Vérifiez l’adresse IP de votre appareil. Réinstallez le pilote de l’appareil et modifiez les paramètres pour connecter l’appareil au réseau. En raison des caractéristiques du DHCP, l’adresse IP allouée pourrait changée si l’appareil reste inutilisé pendant une longue période ou si le point d’accès a été réinitialisé. • Vérifiez l’environnement sans fil. Vous pourriez ne pas être en mesure de vous connecter au réseau dans l’environnement d’infrastructure, au sein duquel vous devez saisir les informations d’un utilisateur avant de vous connecter au point d’accès (ou au routeur sans fil). • Cet appareil prend uniquement en charge IEEE 802.11 b/g/n et Wi-Fi. Les autres types de communication sans fil (Bluetooth) ne sont pas pris en charge. • Lorsque vous utilisez le mode Ad-Hoc, pour les systèmes d’exploitation tels que Windows Vista, vous pourriez avoir à définir les paramètres de connexion réseau à chaque fois que vous utilisez l’appareil sans fil. • Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser simultanément le mode Infrastructure et le mode Ad-hoc pour un appareil réseau sans fil Samsung. • Le réseau sans fil se trouve à portée de l’appareil. • L’appareil est situé loin de tout obstacle qui pourrait bloquer le signal sans fil. Retirez tout objet métallique large situé entre le point d’accès (ou le routeur sans fil) et l’appareil. Assurez-vous que l’appareil et le point d’accès sans fil (ou le routeur sans fil) ne sont pas séparés par des poteaux, des parois ou des colonnes de support contenant du métal ou du béton. • L’appareil est situé loin de tout appareil électronique qui pourrait interférer avec le signal sans fil. De nombreux appareils peuvent provoquer des interférences avec le signal sans fil, notamment des fours à micro-ondes et certains périphériques Bluetooth.Configuration de base_ 55 5.Configuration de base Une fois l’installation terminée, vous devez définir les paramètres par défaut de l’appareil. Consultez la section suivante si vous souhaitez définir ou modifier des valeurs. Ce chapitre vous guide pas-à-pas dans la procédure de paramétrage de l’appareil. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Réglage de l’altitude • Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut • Utilisation de la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie • Modification des paramètres de police (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/ CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) • Réglage du mode humidity Réglage de l’altitude La qualité d’impression est affectée par la pression atmosphérique, celle-ci étant déterminée par la position de l’appareil par rapport au niveau de la mer. Les informations suivantes traitent du paramétrage de l’appareil de façon à obtenir une qualité d’impression optimale. Avant de définir les paramètres d’altitude, déterminez l’altitude à laquelle vous vous trouvez. 0 4,000 m (13,123 ft) 3,000 m (9,842 ft) 2,000 m (6,561 ft) 1,000 m (3,280 ft) 4 3 2 1 1 Élevé 1 2 Élevé 2 3 Élevé 3 4 Normale Vous pouvez régler l’altitude dans l’Utilitaire de paramétrage d’imprimante. 1. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Smart Panel sur la barre de tâche Windows (ou de la Notification Area de Linux). Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Smart Panel de la barre d’état de Mac OS X (voir « Utilisation du programme Smart Panel » à la page 76). Ou, si vous utilisez Windows, vous pouvez le lancer à partir du menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes ou Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > le nom de votre pilote d’imprimante > Smart Panel. 2. Cliquez sur Paramètres d’imprimante. 3. Sélectionnez les options nécessaires dans la liste déroulante Ajustement altitude. 4. Cliquez sur le bouton Appliquer. Si votre appareil est connecté à un réseau, l’écran SyncThru™ Web Service apparaît automatiquement. Vous pouvez également régler l’altitude via SyncThru™ Web Service. Réglage du bac et du papier par défaut Vous pouvez sélectionner le bac et le papier à utiliser par défaut pour les tâches d’impression. A partir de votre ordinateur Windows 1. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 2. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. • Sous Windows 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Périphériques et imprimantes. • Sous Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes. 3. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur votre appareil. 4. Sous Windows XP/2003/Server 2008/Vista, appuyez sur Options d’impression. Sous Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, dans les menus contextuels, sélectionnez les Options d’impression. Si la marque ► accompagne l’élément Options d’impression, vous pouvez sélectionner les autres pilotes d’impression reliés à l’imprimante sélectionnée. 5. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier. 6. Sélectionnez les options telles que le nombre de copies, le format de papier ou le type de papier. 7. Appuyez sur OK. Si vous souhaitez utiliser du papier de format spécial comme du papier à facture, sélectionnez Modifier... dans l’onglet Papier des Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). Macintosh Macintosh ne prend pas en charge cette fonction. Les utilisateurs de Macintosh doivent changer manuellement le réglage par défaut chaque fois qu’ils veulent utiliser d’autres réglages. 1. Ouvrez une application Macintosh, puis sélectionnez le fichier à imprimer. 2. Ouvrez le menu Fichier et cliquez sur Imprimer.Configuration de base_ 56 3. Sélectionnez le volet Alimentation. 4. Définissez le bac approprié duquel vous souhaitez imprimer. 5. Sélectionnez le volet Papier. 6. Réglez le type de papier pour faire correspondre le papier inséré dans le bac avec celui voulu pour l’impression. 7. Cliquez sur Imprimer pour imprimer. Linux 1. Ouvrez le programme Terminal Program. 2. Lorsque l’écran Terminal apparaît, tapez : [root@localhost root]# lpr 3. Sélectionnez Printer et cliquez sur Properties… 4. Cliquez sur l’onglet Advanced. 5. Sélectionnez le bac (source) et ses options, telles que le format et le type de papier. 6. Appuyez sur OK. Utilisation de la fonctionnalité d’économie d’énergie Lorsque vous n’utilisez pas l’appareil pendant un moment, vous pouvez utiliser cette fonctionnalité pour économiser de l’énergie. Vous pouvez modifier les paramètres d’économie d’énergie dans l’Utilitaire de paramétrage d’imprimante. 1. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Smart Panel sur la barre de tâche Windows (ou de la Notification Area de Linux). Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Smart Panel de la barre d’état de Mac OS X (voir « Utilisation du programme Smart Panel » à la page 76). Ou, si vous utilisez Windows, vous pouvez le lancer à partir du menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes ou Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > le nom de votre pilote d’imprimante > Smart Panel. 2. Cliquez sur Paramètres d’imprimante. 3. Cliquez sur Paramètres > Économie d’énergie. Sélectionnez la valeur adéquate dans la liste déroulante, puis cliquez sur Appliquer. Modification des paramètres de police (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/ CLP-326W uniquement) Votre appareil vous est fourni avec un réglage de police préétabli pour votre région ou votre pays. Pour modifier la police ou la régler d’une manière particulière, pour l’environnement DOS, par exemple, suivez la procédure suivante : 1. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Smart Panel sur la barre de tâche Windows (ou de la Notification Area de Linux). Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Smart Panel de la barre d’état de Mac OS X (voir « Utilisation du programme Smart Panel » à la page 76). Ou, si vous utilisez Windows, vous pouvez le lancer à partir du menu Démarrer, sélectionnez Programmes ou Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > le nom de votre pilote d’imprimante > Smart Panel. 2. Cliquez sur Paramètres d’imprimante. 3. Cliquez sur Émulation. 4. Confirmez le fait que PCL est sélectionné dans l’onglet Paramètres d’émulation. 5. Cliquez sur Paramètres. 6. Choisissez votre police préférée dans la liste Jeu de symboles. 7. Cliquez sur Appliquer. Les informations suivantes concernent la liste correcte des polices pour les langues correspondantes. • Russe : CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic • Grec : ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek • Arabe et farsi : HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic Réglage du mode humidity La qualité d’impression est influencée par le niveau d’humidité. Si vous vous trouvez dans une région humide, le papier peut s’humidifier. Dans ce cas, définissez le mode d’humidité. 1. Vérifiez que vous avez bien installé le pilote d’impression inclus dans le CD du logiciel d’imprimante fourni. 2. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Smart Panel de la barre des tâches de Windows (ou de la zone de notification de Linux). Vous pouvez également cliquer sur Smart Panel dans la barre d’état de Mac OS X. 3. Cliquez sur Paramètres d’imprimante. Si votre appareil est connecté au réseau, vous pouvez définir le mode d’humidité via SyncThru™ Web Service. 4. Cliquez sur Paramètres > Humidité. Sélectionnez la valeur adéquate dans la liste déroulante, puis cliquez sur Appliquer.Supports et bacs_ 57 6.Supports et bacs Ce chapitre traite de l’installation des originaux et des supports d’impression dans votre appareil. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Sélection du support d’impression • Modification du format du bac • Chargement de papier dans le bac • Impression sur supports spéciaux • Réglage du type et du format de papier • Utilisation du support de sortie papier Sélection du support d’impression Vous pouvez imprimer sur différents supports, par exemple du papier ordinaire, des enveloppes, des étiquettes ou encore des transparents. N’utilisez que des supports d’impression compatibles avec l’appareil et dans le bac approprié. Recommandations pour sélectionner le support d’impression L’utilisation d’un support d’impression non conforme aux spécifications décrites dans le présent mode d’emploi peut provoquer des problèmes, notamment : • Qualité d’impression médiocre. • Des bourrages papier répétés. • Une usure prématurée de l’appareil. • Détérioration permanente de l’unité de chauffe, non couverte par la garantie. Certaines caractéristiques, comme le grammage, la composition, le grain et la teneur en humidité, constituent des facteurs importants qui ont une incidence sur les performances de l’imprimante et sur la qualité d’impression. Lorsque vous choisissez un support d’impression, tenez compte des points suivants : • Le type, le format et le grammage des supports d’impression pour votre appareil sont décrits plus loin dans cette section. • Résultat recherché : choisissez un support d’impression adapté à votre travail. • Luminosité : plus le support d’impression est blanc, plus les couleurs paraissent éclatantes. • Satinage : le satinage du papier améliore la netteté de l’impression. • Il arrive que certains supports d’impression répondant aux critères décrits dans cette section ne fournissent cependant pas des résultats satisfaisants. Cela peut être dû aux caractéristiques du papier, à une manipulation inadéquate, à des niveaux de température et d’hygrométrie excessifs ou à d’autres facteurs sur lesquels aucun contrôle ne peut être exercé. • Avant de faire l’acquisition de supports d’impression en grande quantité, vérifiez qu’ils répondent aux spécifications indiquées dans le présent document et à vos obligations de sortie. • L’utilisation d’un support d’impression non conforme aux spécifications peut provoquer des problèmes de fonctionnement de l’imprimante, allant jusqu’à nécessiter l’intervention d’un technicien. De telles réparations ne sont pas couvertes par les accords de garantie ou de service de Samsung. • Veillez à ne pas utiliser du papier photo pour jet d’encre avec cet appareil. Vous risqueriez d’endommager l’appareil. • L’utilisation d’un support d’impression inflammable peut provoquer un incendie. • Utilisez les supports d’impression mentionnés (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). L’utilisation de supports d’impression ou de matières étrangères inflammables qui restent dans l’imprimante peut entraîner une surchauffe de l’appareil et, dans de rares cas, provoquer un incendie. Formats de support pris en charge dans chaque mode Mode Format Type Alimentation Impression recto Pour plus d’informations sur le format de papier, reportez-vous à la section « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103. Pour plus d’informations sur le type de papier, reportez-vous à la section « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103. Bac Impression recto verso (manuelle) a a.75 à 90 g/m² uniquement Letter, Legal, Oficio, US Folio, A4, ISO B5, JIS B5, Executive, A5, A6 Ordinaire, papier épais, papier en coton, papier couleur, pré-imprimé, papier recyclé, cartonné, papier archive. BacSupports et bacs_ 58 Modification du format du bac Pour charger des formats de papier plus longs, comme des feuilles au format Legal, vous devez régler les guides du papier de façon à accroître la taille du bac d’alimentation. Pour changer la taille du papier pour une autre taille, vous devez correctement régler les guides de longueur et de largeur du papier. 3 2 1 4 1 Levier d’agrandissement du papier 2 Couvercle papier 3 Guide-papier 4 Guide de largeur du papier 1. Tirez le bac hors de l’imprimante. Ouvrez le couvercle papier et retirez le papier du bac, si nécessaire. 2. Appuyez pour débloquer le verrouillage du guide situé dans le bac, tirez sur le bac pour le sortir manuellement. 1 3. Insérez le papier face à imprimer vers le haut. 4. Faites glisser le guide de longueur du papier jusqu’à ce qu’il touche légèrement l’extrémité de la pile de papier. Appuyez sur le guide de largeur du papier et faites-le glisser vers le bord de la pile de papier, en évitant qu’il se courbe. Si le format de votre papier est plus petit que Letter, replacez les guides de papier vers leurs positions d’origine et réglez ensuite les guides de longueur et de largeur du papier. Si le papier sur lequel vous souhaitez imprimer est plus court que 222 mm (8,74 pouces), appuyez et déverrouillez le blocage de guide dans le bac et poussez le bac manuellement. Ajustez les guides de longueur et de largeur du papier. 1 2 • Évitez de trop pousser les guides de largeur du papier. Vous risqueriez de froisser les feuilles. • Si vous n’ajustez pas les guides de largeur du papier, vous risquez de provoquer des bourrages papier.Supports et bacs_ 59 • N’utilisez pas de papier dont l’ondulation dépasse 6 mm (0,24 pouces). 5. Fermez le couvercle papier. 6. Remettez le bac en place, en le glissant jusqu’à entendre un cliquètement. 7. Définissez le type et le format de papier pour le bac (« Réglage du type et du format de papier » à la page 64). Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec l’alimentation papier, vérifiez que le papier correspond aux spécifications de support d’impression. Ensuite, essayez de placer une feuille à la fois dans le bac (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103 ou « Impression sur supports spéciaux » à la page 62). Selon le pays, le bac est réglé par défaut sur le format Lettre ou A4. Pour passer du format par défaut à un format A4 ou Letter, ajustez en conséquence le levier et le guide de largeur du papier. 1. Tirez le bac hors de l’imprimante. Ouvrez le couvercle papier et retirez le papier du bac, si nécessaire. 2. Pour passer à un format Letter, maintenez le levier au dos du bac et faites-le tourner dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. LTR A4 3. Saisissez le guide de largeur du papier et faites-le glisser jusqu’à ce qu’il entre en contact avec le levier. LTR A4 Pour passer à un format A4, commencez par déplacer le guide de largeur du papier vers la gauche et faites tourner le levier dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre. Si vous forcez le levier, cela pourrait endommager le bac. Chargement de papier dans le bac Dans le bac 1. Retirez le bac d’alimentation papier. Réglez le format du bac en fonction du support chargé (voir « Modification du format du bac » à la page 58). 2. Courbez ou déramez la pile de papier afin de séparer les feuilles avant de charger avec du papier. 3. Insérez le papier face à imprimer vers le haut. 4. Appuyez sur les guides de papier de l’alimentation manuelle et ajustez-les à la largeur du papier. Ne forcez pas trop, sous peine de plier le papier et de provoquer un bourrage papier ou une impression oblique.Supports et bacs_ 60 5. Fermez le couvercle papier. 6. Remettez le bac en place dans l’appareil. 7. Pour imprimer dans une application, ouvrez-la et démarrez le menu d’impression. 8. Ouvrez Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 9. Appuyez sur l’onglet Papier dans Options d’impression, et sélectionnez le type, le format et la source de papier appropriés. 10. Appuyez sur OK. 11. Lancez l’impression depuis l’application. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec l’alimentation papier, vérifiez que le papier corresponde aux spécifications de support d’impression. Ensuite, essayez de placer une feuille à la fois dans le bac (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). Selon le pays, le bac est réglé par défaut sur le format Letter ou A4. Pour passer du format par défaut à un format A4 ou Letter, ajustez en conséquence le levier et le guide de largeur du papier. 1. Tirez le bac hors de l’imprimante. Ouvrez le couvercle papier et retirez le papier du bac, si nécessaire. 2. Pour passer à un format Letter, maintenez le levier au dos du bac et faites-le tourner dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. LTR A4 3. Saisissez le guide de largeur du papier et faites-le glisser jusqu’à ce qu’il entre en contact avec le levier. LTR A4 Pour passer à un format A4, commencez par déplacer le guide de largeur du papier vers la gauche et faites tourner le levier dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre. Si vous forcez le levier, cela pourrait endommager le bac. Alimentation manuelle dans le bac Pour charger différents formats de papier, par exemple du papier au format enveloppe, transparent ou personnalisé, vous devez régler les guides du papier pour l’alimentation manuelle dans le bac. Pour effectuer une alimentation manuelle dans le bac, vous devez correctement régler les guides de longueur/largeur du papier. Conseils d’utilisation pour le chargement manuel Conseils pour l’alimentation manuelle dans le bac • Si vous sélectionnez Chargeur manuel comme Alimentation à partir de l’application logicielle, vous devez appuyer sur le bouton Annuler ( ) chaque fois que vous imprimez une page. Chargez uniquement des supports d’impression de même type, de même format et de même poids dans le bac. • Pour éviter les bourrages papier, n’ajoutez pas de support d’impression alors qu’une impression est en cours. Cela s’applique également aux autres types de support. • Les supports doivent être chargés face vers le haut, le bord supérieur inséré en premier dans le bac, et être placés au centre du bac. • Utilisez uniquement les supports d’impression recommandés pour éviter les bourrages papier ou les problèmes de qualité d’impression (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Aplatissez les plis éventuels des cartes postales, enveloppes et étiquettes avant de les charger dans le bac.Supports et bacs_ 61 1. Tirez le bac hors de l’imprimante. Ouvrez le couvercle papier et retirez le papier du bac, si nécessaire. 2. Insérez le papier face à imprimer vers le haut. 3. Appuyez sur le guide de largeur du papier et ajustez-le à la largeur du papier jusqu’à ce qu’il touche légèrement l’extrémité de la pile de papier. Ne forcez pas trop, au risque de plier le papier et de provoquer un bourrage papier ou une impression oblique. Si le format de votre papier est plus petit que Lettre, replacez les guides de papier dans leurs positions d’origine et réglez ensuite les guides de longueur et de largeur du papier. Si le papier sur lequel vous souhaitez imprimer est plus court que 222 mm, appuyez et déverrouillez le blocage de guide dans le bac et poussez le bac manuellement. Ajustez les guides de longueur et de largeur du papier. 1 2 • Evitez de trop pousser les guides de largeur du papier. Vous risqueriez de froisser les feuilles. • Si vous n’ajustez pas les guides de largeur du papier, vous risquez de provoquer des bourrages papier. • N’utilisez pas de papier dont l’ondulation dépasse 6 mm. 4. Fermez le couvercle papier. 5. Remettez le bac en place, en le glissant jusqu’à entendre un cliquètement. 6. Pour imprimer dans une application, ouvrez-la et démarrez le menu d’impression. 7. Ouvrez Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 8. Appuyez sur l’onglet Papier dans Options d’impression, et sélectionnez un type de papier approprié. Par exemple, si vous souhaitez utiliser une étiquette, définissez le type de papier sur Étiquettes. 9. Sélectionnez Chargeur manuel comme alimentation papier, puis appuyez sur OK. 10. Lancez l’impression depuis l’application. Si vous imprimez plusieurs pages, insérez la feuille suivante une fois la première page imprimée, puis appuyez sur le bouton Annuler ( ). Répétez cette opération pour chaque page à imprimer.Supports et bacs_ 62 Impression sur supports spéciaux Le tableau ci-dessous montre les supports spéciaux disponibles pour chaque bac. Lors de l’utilisation d’un support spécial, nous vous recommandons d’alimenter une feuille à la fois. Vérifiez le nombre maximum de feuilles à alimenter pour chaque bac (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). Types Bac Alimentation manuelle dans le bac Papier ordinaire ● ● Papier épais ● ● Papier fin ● ● Papier en coton ● ● Couleur ● ● Pré-imprimé ● ● Papier recyclé ● ● Enveloppe ● Transparent ● Étiquettes ● Papier cartonné ● Papier de luxe ● Papier archive ● Photo papier brillant ● Photo mat ● ( ●: pris en charge, vierge : non pris en charge) Les types de support suivants sont affichés dans Options d’impression. Cette option de type de papier vous permet de définir le type du papier chargé dans le bac. Choisir le support approprié vous permettra d’obtenir une qualité d’impression optimale. Choisir un support inapproprié peut entraîner une mauvaise qualité d’impression. • Papier ordinaire : papier ordinaire normal. Choisissez ce type si vous imprimez sur du papier de 70 à 90 g/m2 . • Papier épais : papier épais de 90 à 105 g/m2 . • Papier fin : papier fin de 60 à 70 g/m2 . • Papier en coton : papier en fibre de coton de 75 à 90 g/m2 . • Papier couleur : papier de couleur de 75 à 90 g/m2 . • Pré-imprimé : papier à en-tête/préimprimé de 75 à 90 g/m2 . • Papier recyclé : papier recyclé de 75 à 90 g/m2 . Lorsque vous utilisez du papier recyclé, il se peut que les impressions soient froissées et/ou qu’un bourrage se produise à cause d’une ondulation excessive. • Enveloppe : enveloppe de 75 à 90 g/m2 . • Transparence : transparents 0,104 à 0,124 mm. • Étiquettes : étiquette de 120 à 150 g/m2 . • Papier cartonné : papier cartonné de 105 à 163 g/m2 . • Papier de luxe : papier à lettre de 105 à 120 g/m2 . • Papier archive : de 70 à 90 g/m2 . Si vous devez conserver des imprimés pendant une longue période, comme des archives par exemple. • Photo papier brillant: papier photo brillant 111 à 220 g/m2 . • Photo mat: papier photo mat 111 à 220 g/m2 . Enveloppes La qualité d’impression sur les enveloppes dépend de la qualité des enveloppes. Pour imprimer une enveloppe, placez-la avec le rabat tourné vers le bas avec la zone d’oblitération sur le côté supérieur gauche. • Lorsque vous choisissez des enveloppes, tenez compte des facteurs suivants : - Grammage : le grammage du papier de l’enveloppe ne doit pas dépasser 90 g/m2 sinon un bourrage risque de se produire. - Qualité de fabrication : avant impression, les enveloppes doivent reposer à plat, avec moins de 6 mm d’ondulation. Elles ne doivent pas contenir d’air. - État : les enveloppes ne doivent pas être froissées, éraflées ni endommagées. - Temperature : utilisez des enveloppes résistant à la température de fusion et à la pression de l’appareil durant le fonctionnement. • Utilisez uniquement des enveloppes de bonne qualité, dotées de rabats bien découpés et bien pliés. • N’utilisez pas d’enveloppes affranchies. • N’utilisez pas d’enveloppes à fermoir, à soufflet, à fenêtre, préencollées, adhésives, ou comportant d’autres matériaux synthétiques. • Évitez d’utiliser des enveloppes endommagées ou non conformes. • Vérifiez que la bande collée aux deux extrémités de l’enveloppe se termine bien aux coins de l’enveloppe. 1 2 1 Acceptable 2 Inacceptable • Les enveloppes avec une bande adhésive ou avec plusieurs rabats se superposant doivent utiliser des adhésifs compatibles avec la température de fusion (environ 170 °C) pendant 0,1 seconde. Les rabats et les bandes risquent de se plier, de se froisser, de provoquer des bourrages ou même d’endommager le four. • Pour une meilleure qualité d’impression, laissez une marge d’au moins 15 mm à partir du bord de l’enveloppe. • Évitez d’imprimer sur les pliures de l’enveloppe. Transparents Pour ne pas endommager l’appareil, utilisez uniquement des transparents conçus pour les imprimantes laser.Supports et bacs_ 63 Dans le cas d’une impression couleur sur transparents, la qualité de l’image sera inférieure à une impression monochrome une fois ceux-ci projetés sur le rétro-projecteur. • Les transparents utilisés doivent pouvoir supporter la température de fusion de l’appareil. • Placez les transparents sur une surface plane après les avoir retirés de l’appareil. • Ne laissez pas les transparents inutilisés trop longtemps dans le bac d’alimentation papier. Il se peut que de la poussière s’accumule sur les transparents et provoque des taches sur les impressions. • Pour éviter les taches dues aux traces de doigts, manipulez les transparents délicatement. • Pour que les transparents imprimés ne se décolorent pas, évitez de les exposer trop longtemps à la lumière du soleil. • Assurez-vous que les transparents ne sont pas froissés ou ondulés et qu’ils ne sont pas déchirés sur les bords. • N’utilisez pas de transparents qui se séparent de la feuille de support. • Pour éviter que les transparents se collent les uns aux autres, retirez au fur et à mesure du bac de sortie les feuilles imprimées. • Supports recommandés: Xerox 3R91331 (A4), Xerox 3R2780 (Letter) Les transparents de type base (ex., Xerox 3R91331) donne une meilleure qualité d’image et de gestion du papier que ceux sur support en papier (ex., Xerox 3R3028) ou à bandes retirables (3R3108). • Avec l’électricité statique, un transparent peut entraîner des problèmes de qualité d’image. • En fonction du choix ou des conditions de stockage du transparent, un bourrage ou une image rayée peut survenir. Étiquettes Pour éviter d’endommager l’appareil, n’utilisez que des étiquettes conçues pour les appareils laser. • Lorsque vous choisissez des étiquettes, tenez compte des facteurs suivants : - Substance adhésive : le revêtement adhésif doit rester stable à la température de fusion (environ 170 °C) de l’appareil. - Disposition : n’utilisez pas de planches partiellement décollées où le fond de la planche est visible. Les étiquettes pourraient se décoller et provoquer des bourrages importants. - Plissement : avant impression, les étiquettes doivent être stockées à plat, avec moins de 13 mm de plissement. - État : n’utilisez pas d’étiquettes froissées, présentant des bulles d’air ou d’autres signes de décollement. • Vérifiez que la substance adhésive ne dépasse pas des étiquettes. Les zones exposées risqueraient de provoquer le détachement des étiquettes durant l’impression, entraînant des bourrages papier. De plus, la substance adhésive pourrait endommager certains composants de l’appareil. • N’utilisez pas plusieurs fois la même planche d’étiquettes. Le revêtement adhésif n’est prévu que pour un seul passage dans l’imprimante. • N’utilisez pas d’étiquettes se décollant de la planche ou encore froissées, gondolées ou abîmées. Papiers cartonnés ou de format personnalisé • N’utilisez pas de supports de largeur inférieure à 76 mm (3,00 pouces) et d’une longueur inférieure à 152,4 mm (6,00 pouces). • Dans les applications, définissez des marges d’au moins 6,4 mm par rapport aux bords du support. Papier à en-tête/papier pré-imprimé Une seule face Recto/verso Face imprimée vers le haut AAAAA Face imprimée vers le bas AAAAA • Les encres utilisées sur les formulaires pré-imprimés doivent être thermostables ; elles ne doivent ni fondre, ni s’évaporer, ni émettre de substances toxiques lorsqu’elles sont soumises à la température de fusion de l’appareil un dixième de seconde. Vérifiez les spécifications de votre appareil pour connaître la température de fusion (environ 170 °C). • Ces encres ne doivent pas être inflammables ni endommager les rouleaux de l’appareil. • Les formulaires et papiers à en-tête doivent être conservés dans un emballage résistant à l’humidité pour éviter toute altération pendant la période de stockage. • Avant d’insérer du papier préimprimé ou du papier à en-tête dans l’imprimante, vérifiez que l’encre est bien sèche. Durant le processus de fusion, une encre encore humide risquerait de s’effacer du support pré-imprimé, diminuant ainsi la qualité de l’impression. Papier recyclé Lors du chargement de papier recyclé, la face imprimée doit être face vers le haut et le côté introduit en premier doit être parfaitement plat. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes d’alimentation papier, insérez les feuilles dans l’autre sens. Nous ne garantissons pas la qualité d’impression.Supports et bacs_ 64 • Les encres utilisées sur le papier recyclé doivent être thermostables ; elles ne doivent ni fondre, ni s’évaporer, ni émettre de substances toxiques lorsqu’elles sont soumises à la température de fusion pendant un dixième de seconde. Vérifiez les spécifications de votre appareil pour connaître la température de fusion (environ 170 °C). • Ces encres ne doivent pas être inflammables ni endommager les rouleaux de l’appareil. • Avant de charger le papier recyclé, assurez-vous que l’encre sur le papier est sèche. Durant le processus de fusion, une encre encore humide risquerait de s’effacer du support recyclé, diminuant ainsi la qualité de l’impression. Photo brillante Chargez une feuille à la fois dans le bac, face brillante orientée vers le haut. • Supports recommandés : papier brillant (Lettre) pour cet appareil HP Brochure Paper (produit : Q6611A). • Supports recommandés : papier brillant (A4) pour cet appareil HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (produit : Q6616A). Photo mate Chargez une feuille à la fois dans le bac, la face devant être imprimée orientée vers le haut. Réglage du type et du format de papier Après avoir inséré du papier dans le bac papier, vous devez paramétrer l’appareil en fonction du format et du type de papier utilisé à l’aide du pilote d’imprimante. Pour rendre les modifications permanentes, suivez les étapes suivantes. La procédure suivante se rapporte à Windows XP. Pour les autres systèmes d’exploitation Windows, reportez-vous au mode d’emploi Windows correspondant ou à l’aide en ligne. 1. Cliquez sur le bouton Démarrer sur l’ordinateur. 2. Sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. 3. Cliquez à l’aide du bouton droit de la souris sur l’icône d’imprimante et sélectionnez Options d’impression. 4. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier et modifiez les paramètres des Options de papier. 5. Cliquez sur OK. Utilisation du support de sortie papier Les pages imprimées s’empilent sur le bac de sortie, et le support de sortie permet d’aligner les pages imprimées. 1 Support de sortie papier Si vous imprimez à la suite un nombre de pages important, la surface du bac de sortie peut devenir chaude. Veillez à ne pas toucher cette surface et à en tenir les enfants éloignés.Impression_ 65 7.Impression Ce chapitre décrit les tâches d’impression courantes. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Présentation d’un programme utile • Fonctions des pilotes d’impression • Impression de base • Ouverture des préférences d’impression • Utilisation de l’aide • Utilisation des fonctions d’impression spéciales • Modification des réglages d’impression par défaut • Définition de votre appareil comme appareil par défaut • Impression dans un fichier (PRN) • Impression Macintosh • Impression Linux Les procédures de ce chapitre sont principalement basées sur Windows XP. Présentation d’un programme utile Samsung AnyWeb Print Cet utilitaire vous aide à effectuer une capture d’écran, prévisualiser, supprimer et imprimer l’écran de Windows Internet Explorer plus facilement que lorsque vous utilisez le programme habituel. Cliquez sur Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print > Téléchargez la dernière version pour accéder au site Web où se trouve l’utilitaire en téléchargement. Cet utilitaire n’est disponible que pour les systèmes d’exploitation Windows. Samsung Easy Color Manager Ce programme aide les utilisateurs à ajuster les couleurs d’impression comme ils le souhaitent. Les utilisateurs peuvent régler les couleurs d’impression comme ils les voient sur le moniteur. Ces couleurs réglées peuvent être stockées sur le pilote d’impression et appliquées aux impressions. Cliquez sur Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > Samsung Easy Color Manager > Téléchargez la dernière version pour accéder au site Web où se trouve l’utilitaire en téléchargement. Cet utilitaire n’est disponible que pour les systèmes d’exploitation Windows et Macintosh. (http://solution.samsungprinter.com/ personal/colormanager) Fonctions des pilotes d’impression Les pilotes d’impression de votre imprimante sont dotés des fonctionnalités standard suivantes : • Sélection de l’orientation du papier, du format, de la source et du type de support. • Nombre d’exemplaires. Vous pouvez également utiliser diverses fonctions d’impression spéciales. Le tableau ci-dessous récapitule les différentes fonctions prises en charges par les pilotes d’impression. Certains modèles ou systèmes d’exploitation peuvent ne pas prendre en charge une ou plusieurs fonctionnalité(s) du tableau suivant. Pilote d’impression Fonction Windows Option de qualité d’impression ● Impression d’affiche ● Plusieurs pages par face ● Impression de brochures (manuelle) ● Ajustement à la page ● Réduction/agrandissement ● Filigrane ● Surimpression ● Impression recto verso (manuelle) ● ( ●: pris en charge, vierge : non pris en charge) Impression de base Votre appareil vous permet d’imprimer à partir de diverses applications Windows, Macintosh ou Linux. La procédure exacte peut légèrement varier d’une application à l’autre. • La fenêtre Options d’impression peut être différente de celle présentée dans ce mode d’emploi selon l’appareil utilisé. Cependant, la composition de la fenêtre Options d’impression est similaire. Vérifiez quels systèmes d’exploitation sont compatibles avec l’appareil. Dans les spécifications de l’imprimante, reportez-vous à la section relative à la compatibilité des systèmes d’exploitation (voir « Configuration requise » à la page 31). • Lorsque vous sélectionnez une option dans Options d’impression, vous pouvez voir une marque d’avertissement, ou . Un point d’exclamation ( ) signifie que vous pouvez sélectionner cette option, mais qu’elle n’est pas recommandée, et une croix ( ) signifie que vous ne pouvez pas sélectionner cette option à cause de la configuration ou de l’environnement de votre machine.Impression_ 66 La procédure ci-dessous décrit les étapes à suivre pour effectuer des impressions à partir de diverses applications Windows. Impression de base Macintosh (voir « Impression Macintosh » à la page 72). Impression de base Linux (voir « Impression Linux » à la page 73). La fenêtre Options d’impression suivante s’applique au Bloc-notes sous Windows XP. Votre fenêtre Options d’impression peut varier suivant votre système d’exploitation ou l’application utilisée. 1. Ouvrez le document à imprimer. 2. Sélectionnez l’option Imprimer dans le menu Fichier. La fenêtre Imprimer s’ouvre. 3. Sélectionnez votre appareil dans la liste Sélection de l’imprimante. Vous pouvez sélectionner les paramètres d’impression, y compris le nombre de copies et les pages à imprimer depuis la fenêtre Imprimer. Pour exploiter pleinement les fonctions de votre pilote d’impression, cliquez sur Propriétés ou Préférences dans la fenêtre Imprimer de l’application pour changer les paramètres d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 4. Pour démarrer l’impression, cliquez sur OK ou sur Imprimer dans la fenêtre Imprimer. Si vous utilisez Windows Internet Explorer, l’utilitaire Samsung AnyWeb Print vous permet de gagner du temps pour les images de capture d’écran ou pour imprimer l’image. Cliquez sur Démarrer > Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > Samsung AnyWeb Print pour accéder au site Web où se trouve l’utilitaire en téléchargement. Annulation d’une impression Si la tâche d’impression est en attente dans une liste ou une file d’attente d’impression, annulez-la comme suit : 1. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 2. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. • Sous Windows 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Périphériques et imprimantes. • Sous Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes. 3. Pour Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003, Vista et Server 2008, double-cliquez sur votre appareil. Sous Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, cliquez avec le bouton droit sur l’icône de votre imprimante > menus contextuels > Afficher les tâches d’impression en cours. Si l’élément Afficher les tâches d’impression en cours présente un symbole ►, vous pouvez sélectionner d’autre pilotes d’impression connectés à l’imprimante sélectionnée. 4. Dans le menu Document, sélectionnez Annuler. Vous pouvez également accéder à cette fenêtre en double-cliquant simplement sur l’icône de l’appareil ( ) dans la barre des tâches de Windows. Vous pouvez également annuler la tâche en cours en appuyant sur le bouton Annuler ( ) sur le panneau de configuration. Ouverture des préférences d’impression Vous pouvez prévisualiser les paramètres sélectionnés en haut à droite de la fenêtre Options d’impression. 1. Ouvrez le document à imprimer. 2. Sélectionnez l’option Imprimer dans le menu Fichier. La fenêtre Imprimer s’ouvre. 3. Sélectionnez votre appareil dans la liste Sélection de l’imprimante. 4. Cliquez sur Propriétés ou sur Préférences. Utilisation d’un réglage favori L’option Préréglages, visible sur chacun des onglets de préférence à l’exception de l’onglet Samsung, vous permet d’enregistrer vos préférences de réglages actuels en vue d’une utilisation future. Pour enregistrer des réglages Préréglages :Impression_ 67 1. Dans chaque onglet, modifiez les paramètres selon vos préférences. 2. Entrez un nom dans la zone de saisie Préréglages. 3. Cliquez sur Ajouter. Lorsque vous enregistrez des réglages Préréglages, tous les paramètres actuels du pilote sont enregistrés. Si vous cliquez sur Ajouter, le bouton Ajouter se change en bouton Mettre à jour. Sélectionnez d’autres options et cliquez sur Mettre à jour ; les paramètres seront ajoutés aux Préréglages que vous avez effectués. Pour utiliser un paramétrage enregistré, sélectionnez le nom correspondant dans la liste déroulante Préréglages. L’appareil est à présent prêt à imprimer en fonction de votre sélection. Pour supprimer un paramétrage enregistré, sélectionnez le nom correspondant dans la liste déroulante Préréglages, et cliquez sur Supprimer. Vous pouvez également restaurer les réglages par défaut du pilote d’impression en sélectionnant Préréglage par défaut dans la liste déroulante Préréglages. Utilisation de l’aide Cliquez sur le point d’interrogation en haut à droite de la fenêtre, puis sur le sujet pour lequel vous souhaitez obtenir des informations. Une fenêtre contextuelle apparaît alors, comportant des informations à propos des fonctionnalités de cette option du pilote. Si vous souhaitez effectuer une recherche par mots-clés, cliquez sur l’onglet Samsung dans la fenêtre Options d’impression, et saisissez un mot-clé dans le champ de l’option Aide. Pour plus d’informations à propos des consommables, mises à jour de pilote, inscriptions, etc., cliquez sur les boutons appropriés. Utilisation des fonctions d’impression spéciales Les fonctionnalités spéciales d’impression comprennent : • « Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille » à la page 67. • « Impression d’affiches » à la page 67. • « Impression de brochures (manuelle) » à la page 68. • « Impression recto verso (manuelle) » à la page 68. • « Modification des proportions de votre document » à la page 68. • « Impression d’un document sur un format de papier donné » à la page 68. • « Impression de filigranes » à la page 69. • « Utilisation de la surimpression » à la page 69. • « Options de l’onglet Graphiques » à la page 70. Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille Vous pouvez sélectionner le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une même feuille. Si vous choisissez d’imprimer plusieurs pages par feuille, les pages sont réduites et organisées dans l’ordre indiqué. Vous pouvez imprimer jusqu’à 16 pages par feuille. 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet De base, sélectionnez Plusieurs pages par face dans la liste déroulante Type. 3. Sélectionnez le nombre de pages à imprimer par feuille (2, 4, 6, 9 ou 16) dans la liste déroulante Pages par face. 4. Sélectionnez l’ordre des pages dans la liste déroulante Ordre des pages, si nécessaire. 5. Cochez la case Bordures pour qu’une bordure encadre chaque page imprimée sur la feuille. 6. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier, sélectionnez le Taille, la Alimentation, et le Type. 7. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. Impression d’affiches Cette fonction vous permet d’imprimer un document d’une seule page sur 4, 9 ou 16 pages que vous pouvez coller ensemble pour former un poster. 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet De base, sélectionnez Affiche dans la liste déroulante Type. 3. Sélectionnez la mise en page de votre choix. Mises en page disponibles : • Affiche <2x2> : le document sera agrandi et divisé en 4 pages. • Affiche <3x3> : le document sera agrandi et divisé en 9 pages. • Affiche <4x4> : le document sera agrandi et divisé en 16 pages. 4. Sélectionnez la valeur Chevauchement. Spécifiez Chevauchement en millimètres ou pouces en sélectionnant la case d’option en haut à droite de l’onglet De base pour faciliter le collage des feuilles ensemble. 5. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier, sélectionnez le Format, Alimentation, et Type. 6. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. 7. Vous pouvez reconstituer l’affiche en collant les feuilles ensemble.Impression_ 68 Impression de brochures (manuelle) Cette fonction imprime votre document en recto verso et permet d’organiser les pages imprimées afin de pouvoir les relier en les pliant par leur milieu. Si vous souhaitez réaliser une brochure, vous devez imprimer sur un support au format Letter, Legal, A4, Folio ou Oficio. 8 9 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à la fenêtre Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet De base, sélectionnez Impression brochure dans la liste déroulante Type. 3. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier, sélectionnez le Format, Alimentation, et Type. L’option Impression brochure n’est pas disponible pour tous les formats papier. Pour trouver le format de papier disponible pour cette fonctionnalité, sélectionnez le format de papier disponible dans l’option Format de l’onglet Papier. Si vous sélectionnez un format de papier non disponible, cette option peut être automatiquement annulée. Sélectionnez uniquement du papier disponible (du papier sans la marque ou ). 4. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. 5. Une fois le document imprimé, pliez, puis agrafez les pages. Impression recto verso (manuelle) Vous pouvez imprimer sur les deux faces d’une feuille de papier (recto/ verso). Avant d’imprimer, décidez de l’orientation de vos documents. Vous pouvez utiliser cette fonctionnalité avec du papier au format Letter, Legal, A4, Folio ou Oficio (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). Nous vous recommandons de ne pas imprimer sur les deux faces d’un support spécial, comme les étiquettes, les enveloppes ou du papier épais. Cela peut provoquer un bourrage ou endommager l’appareil. 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Avancé. 3. Dans la section Impression recto-verso (manuelle), sélectionnez l’option de reliure souhaitée. • Aucun • Bord long : cette option est la mise en page traditionnelle utilisée pour la reliure des livres. • Bord court : cette option est la mise en page traditionnelle utilisée pour les calendriers. 4. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier, sélectionnez le Format, Alimentation, et Type. 5. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. Si votre appareil ne dispose pas d’un module recto verso, vous devez terminer le travail d’impression manuellement. L’appareil imprime d’abord toutes les autres pages du document. Ensuite, un message apparait sur votre ordinateur. Suivez les instructions à l’écran pour terminer la tâche d’impression. Modification des proportions de votre document Vous pouvez modifier la taille d’un document pour l’agrandir ou le réduire à l’impression, en donnant le pourcentage souhaité. 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier. 3. Entrez le taux de mise à l’échelle dans la zone de saisie Pourcentage. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur les flèches haut et bas pour sélectionner l’échelle. 4. Sélectionnez Format, Alimentation, et Type dans Options du papier. 5. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. Impression d’un document sur un format de papier donné Cette fonction vous permet d’adapter votre tâche d’impression à n’importe quel format de papier, quelle que soit la taille du document. Elle peut s’avérer utile pour vérifier les détails d’un petit document. A 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Papier. 3. Sélectionnez le format de papier souhaité dans Ajuster à la page. 4. Sélectionnez le Taille, la Source et le Type dans Options du papier. Impression_ 69 5. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. Impression de filigranes L’option Filigrane vous permet d’imprimer du texte sur un document existant. Par exemple, vous l’utilisez lorsque vous souhaitez imprimer le texte « BROUILLON » ou « CONFIDENTIEL » en diagonale sur la première page ou sur toutes les pages d’un document. Plusieurs filigranes prédéfinis sont fournis avec l’appareil. Vous pouvez les modifier ou en ajouter des nouveaux à la liste. Utilisation d’un filigrane existant 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Avancé, et sélectionnez le filigrane souhaité dans la liste déroulante Filigrane. Le filigrane sélectionné apparaît dans l’image d’aperçu. 3. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre d’impression. Création d’un filigrane 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Dans sur l’onglet Avancé, sélectionnez Modifier... dans la liste déroulante Filigrane. La fenêtre Modifier filigranes s’ouvre. 3. Saisissez le texte dans le champ Texte du filigrane. Vous pouvez entrer jusqu’à 256 caractères. Le texte s’affiche dans la fenêtre d’aperçu. Si la case Première page seulement est cochée, le filigrane est uniquement imprimé sur la première page. 4. Définissez les options du filigrane. Vous pouvez choisir la police, le style, la taille ou l’ombrage du filigrane dans la zone Attributs de police et son angle dans la zone Angle du texte. 5. Cliquez sur Ajouter pour ajouter un nouveau filigrane à la liste Filigranes actuels. 6. Lorsque vous avez terminé, cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. Pour ne pas imprimer de filigrane, sélectionnez Aucun dans la liste déroulante Filigrane. Modification d’un filigrane 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Avancé, sélectionnez Modifier... dans la liste déroulante Filigrane. La fenêtre Modifier filigranes s’ouvre. 3. Sélectionnez le filigrane à modifier dans la liste Filigranes actuels, puis modifiez le message et les options du filigrane. 4. Cliquez sur Mettre à jour pour enregistrer les modifications. 5. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. Suppression d’un filigrane 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Avancé, sélectionnez Modifier... dans la liste déroulante Filigrane. La fenêtre Modifier filigranes s’ouvre. 3. Sélectionnez le filigrane à supprimer dans la liste Filigranes actuels, puis cliquez sur Supprimer. 4. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. Utilisation de la surimpression Une surimpression consiste en du contenu enregistré sur le disque dur et que vous pouvez superposer sur n’importe quel document que vous imprimez. Une surimpression remplace souvent les papiers à en-tête. Plutôt que d’avoir recours à un en-tête pré-imprimé, vous pouvez créer une surimpression comportant les mêmes informations que cet en-tête. Vous n’avez donc plus à charger votre papier à en-tête habituel pour imprimer une lettre à l’en-tête de votre entreprise ; à la place, faites simplement apparaître l’en-tête en surimpression sur le document. Création d’une surimpression de page Pour utiliser une surimpression de page, vous devez préalablement la créer dans un fichier comprenant votre contenu. 1. Créez ou ouvrez un document comprenant le contenu que vous souhaitez utiliser comme nouvelle surimpression de page. Positionnez les éléments à l’endroit exact où vous souhaitez qu’ils apparaissent une fois ajoutés à l’original. 2. Pour enregistrer le document en tant que surimpression, accédez à la fenêtre Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 3. Cliquez sur l’onglet Avancé, sélectionnez Modifier... dans la liste déroulante Texte. La fenêtre Modifier les surimpressions s’affiche. 4. Dans la fenêtre Modifier les surimpressions, cliquez sur Créer. 5. Dans la fenêtre Enregistrer sous, saisissez un nom comportant jusqu’à huit caractères dans la case Nom du fichier. Sélectionnez le chemin de destination, si nécessaire (Le chemin par défaut est C:\FormOver.) 6. Cliquez sur Enregistrer. Le nom apparaît sur la Liste des surimpressions. 7. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. 8. Le fichier n’est pas imprimé. Il est enregistré sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur. La taille du document de surimpression doit correspondre à celle du document que vous imprimez. Vous ne pouvez pas créer de surimpression comportant un filigrane.Impression_ 70 Utilisation d’une surimpression de page Une fois la surimpression créée, vous pouvez l’imprimer en l’appliquant à votre document. Pour imprimer une surimpression avec un document : 1. Créez ou ouvrez le document à imprimer. 2. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 3. Cliquez sur l’onglet Avancé. 4. Sélectionnez la surimpression souhaitée dans la liste déroulante Texte. 5. Si le fichier de surimpression souhaité n’apparaît pas dans la liste déroulante Texte, sélectionnez Modifier... dans la liste et cliquez sur Charger. Sélectionnez le fichier de surimpression que vous souhaitez utiliser. Si vous avez enregistré le fichier de surimpression à utiliser dans une source externe, vous pouvez le charger à partir de la fenêtre Ouvrir. Après avoir sélectionné le fichier, cliquez sur Ouvrir. Le fichier apparaît dans la zone Liste des surimpressions. Vous pouvez donc l’imprimer. Sélectionnez la surimpression dans la zone Liste des surimpressions. 6. Si nécessaire, cochez la case Confirmer la surimpression. Si cette case est cochée, à chaque fois que vous lancez une impression, un message vous invite à confirmer que vous souhaitez imprimer une surimpression sur votre document. Si cette case n’est pas cochée et qu’une surimpression est sélectionnée, cette dernière est automatiquement imprimée avec le document. 7. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. La surimpression sélectionnée s’imprime sur votre document. La résolution du document de surimpression doit correspondre à celle de la tâche d’impression d’origine. Effacer une surimpression Vous pouvez supprimer les surimpressions de page dont vous ne vous servez plus. 1. Dans la fenêtre Options d’impression, cliquez sur l’onglet Avancé. 2. Sélectionnez Modifier... dans la liste déroulante Surimpression. 3. Sélectionnez la surimpression à supprimer dans la boîte Liste des surimpressions. 4. Cliquez sur Supprimer. 5. Lorsque le message de confirmation apparaît, cliquez sur Oui. 6. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. Options de l’onglet Graphiques Les options de l’onglet Graphiques permettent de régler la qualité d’impression en fonction de vos besoins. • Les options que vous pouvez sélectionner varient d’un modèle d’imprimante à un autre. • Si l’option est grisée ou n’est pas affichée, elle n’est pas applicable avec le langage imprimante utilisé. Pour modifier la langue de l’imprimante : 1. Cliquez sur le menu Windows Démarrer. 2. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes. - Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. - Sous Windows Server 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes. - Pour Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Périphériques et imprimantes. - Pour Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes. 3. Sélectionnez le pilote de votre appareil et cliquez avec le bouton droit pour ouvrir Propriétés. 4. Dans les propriétés du pilote d’impression, sélectionnez Options du périphérique. 5. Sélectionnez les options nécessaires dans la liste déroulante Langage imprim. Réglage de la couleur Si vous percevez la différence de couleur entre l’impression et le moniteur, vous pouvez changer le paramétrage des couleurs, comme le contraste des couleurs ou le niveau de couleur. Le pilote d’impression propose des options graphiques pour régler la qualité d’impression en fonction de vos besoins. 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Graphiques. Reportez-vous à l’aide en ligne pour les informations de chaque option fournies pas les Options d’impression. • Mode Couleur : vous pouvez choisir les options de couleur entre Couleur et Échelle de gris. L’option Couleur offre généralement la meilleure qualité d’impression qui soit pour un document couleur. Pour imprimer un document couleur en échelle de gris, sélectionnez Échelle de gris. Optimisation du noir vous permet d’imprimer dans un noir de haute qualité. Si vous utilisez cette option, l’impression peut être plus longue. Pour ajuster manuellement les couleurs, sélectionnez Avancé dans Mode Couleur. Faites simplement glisser le curseur d’équilibre de couleur de l’onglet Niveaux pour ajuster les couleurs, ou sélectionnez l’onglet Contretypage pour une correction de couleur assurée par le pilote en vue d’un traitement général de l’image. • Avancé : vous pouvez définir des paramètres avancés en cliquant sur le bouton Avancé. (Pilote PCL uniquement.) • Police/Texte : sélectionnez Texte foncé pour imprimer un texte plus sombre que sur un document normal. Utilisez Tout le texte en noir pour imprimer en noir, sans se soucier de la couleur qui apparaît sur l’écran. • Compression des données tramées : cette option détermine le niveau de compression des images pour transférer les données d’un ordinateur vers une imprimante. Si vous définissez cette option sur Maximum, la vitesse d’impression sera élevée, mais la qualité d’impression sera faible. (Pilote PCL uniquement.) • Contrôleur graphique : il vous permet d’accentuer les contours des textes et des lignes fines pour améliorer la lisibilité et aligner chaque cadrage de couleur en mode d’impression couleur.Impression_ 71 - Amélioration des niveaux de gris : il permet aux utilisateurs de préserver les détails des photos naturelles, ainsi que d’améliorer le contraste et la lisibilité des couleurs en niveaux de gris lors de l’impression de documents couleur en échelle de gris. (Pilote PCL uniquement) - Bord fin : il vous permet d’accentuer les bords des textes et des lignes fines afin d’améliorer la lisibilité. • Économie de toner : en sélectionnant cette option, vous augmentez la durée de vie de la cartouche de toner et réduisez le coût par page, en ne réduisant que faiblement la qualité d’impression. - Vous pouvez déplacer le curseur de Aucun enregistr. à Enregistrement max pour réduire la consommation de toner. 3. Cliquez sur OK ou Imprimer jusqu’à ce que vous quittiez la fenêtre Imprimer. Réglage de la netteté et de la régularité Options d’écran Cette option influence la résolution et la clarté de votre impression couleur. Les trois options d’écran sont Normale, Améliorée et Détaillée. 1. Pour changer les paramètres d’impression à partir de votre application, accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). 2. Cliquez sur l’onglet Graphiques, puis sélectionnez Avancé dans Mode Couleur. 3. Sélectionnez l’onglet Contretypage. 4. Sélectionnez les options nécessaires dans l’Trame. • Imprimante par défautv: suit la valeur du mode Trame définie depuis l’imprimante. • Normale : ce mode produira des impressions avec une teinte régulière sur toute la page. • Améliorée : ce mode produira des impressions avec des textes intenses et des graphismes/photos régulières sur la page. • Détaillée : ce mode produira des impressions avec des détails nets sur toute la page. 5. Sélectionnez OK. Modification des réglages d’impression par défaut Généralement, les paramètres définis au niveau des applications Windows écrasent ceux spécifiés via le pilote d’impression. Commencez donc par modifier les paramètres d’impression proposés dans l’application, puis les paramètres restants dans le pilote d’impression. 1. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 2. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. • Sous Windows 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Périphériques et imprimantes. • Sous Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes. 3. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur votre appareil. 4. Sous Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, appuyez sur Options d’impression. Sous Windows 7 et Windows Server 2008 R2, dans les menus contextuels, sélectionnez les Options d’impression. Si la marque ► accompagne l’élément Options d’impression, vous pouvez sélectionner les autres pilotes d’impression reliés à l’imprimante sélectionnée. 5. Dans chaque onglet, modifiez les paramètres. 6. Cliquez sur OK. Si vous souhaitez modifier les réglages pour chaque tâche d’impression, changez les dans les Options d’impression. Définition de votre appareil comme appareil par défaut 1. Cliquez sur le menu Démarrer de Windows. 2. Sous Windows 2000, sélectionnez Paramètres > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows XP/Server 2003, sélectionnez Imprimantes et télécopieurs. • Sous Windows 2008/Vista, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel et audio > Imprimantes. • Sous Windows 7, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Périphériques et imprimantes. • Sous Windows Server 2008 R2, sélectionnez Panneau de configuration > Matériel > Périphériques et imprimantes. 3. Sélectionnez votre appareil. 4. Cliquez avec le bouton droit sur votre appareil et sélectionnez Définir comme imprimante par défaut. Pour Windows 7 ou Windows Server 2008 R2, si la marque ► accompagne l’élément Définir comme imprimante par défaut, vous pouvez choisir d’autres pilotes d’impression connectés à l’imprimante sélectionnée. Impression dans un fichier (PRN) Vous devrez parfois sauvegarder les données d’impression en tant que fichier. Vous pouvez imprimer le document vers un fichier au lieu de l’envoyer directement vers une imprimante. Le document est enregistré avec le formatage de l’imprimante, notamment la police et les couleurs choisies, dans un fichier .prn qui peut être imprimé sur une autre imprimante. Pour sauvegarder une tâche d’impression en tant que fichier :Impression_ 72 1. Dans la fenêtre Imprimer, cochez la case Imprimer dans un fichier. 2. Cliquez sur Imprimer. 3. Saisissez le chemin d’accès et le nom du fichier de destination, et cliquez ensuite sur OK. Par exemple c:\Temp\nom de fichier. Si vous ne saisissez que le nom de fichier, le fichier est automatiquement enregistré dans Documents and Settings ou Utilisateurs. Le dossier enregistré peut varier suivant votre système d’exploitation ou l’application utilisée. Impression Macintosh Cette section présente l’impression avec un Macintosh. Vous devez définir l’environnement d’impression avant d’imprimer. • Connexion USB, voir « Macintosh » à la page 33. • Connexion réseau, voir « Macintosh » à la page 41. Impression d’un document Lorsque vous imprimez à partir d’un Macintosh, vous devez vérifier la configuration du pilote d’impression dans chaque application utilisée. Pour imprimer à partir d’un Macintosh, procédez comme suit : 1. Ouvrez une application, puis sélectionnez le fichier à imprimer. 2. Ouvrez le menu Fichier et cliquez sur Format d’impression ou Mise en page du document dans certaines applications. 3. Choisissez votre format papier, l’orientation, la mise à l’échelle, les autres options, et assurez-vous que votre appareil est sélectionné. Cliquez sur OK. 4. Ouvrez le menu Fichier et cliquez sur Imprimer. 5. Sélectionnez le nombre de copies et indiquez les numéros des pages à imprimer. 6. Cliquez sur Imprimer. Modification des paramètres de l’imprimante Lorsque vous imprimez, vous pouvez utiliser des options d’impression avancées. Ouvrez une application et sélectionnez Imprimer dans le menu Fichier. Le nom d’appareil qui apparaît dans la fenêtre des propriétés de l’imprimante peut varier en fonction de l’appareil utilisé. Le reste des éléments de la fenêtre des propriétés de l’imprimante est toujours identique aux éléments suivants. • Les options de configuration peuvent varier en fonction des modèles et des versions de SE Macintosh utilisées. • Les fenêtres suivantes peuvent varier suivant votre système d’exploitation ou l’application utilisée. Mise en page La boîte de dialogue Mise en page propose des options qui permettent de régler la présentation du document sur la page imprimée. Vous pouvez imprimer plusieurs pages par feuille. Sélectionnez Mise en page dans la liste déroulante sous Orientation pour accéder aux options suivantes. • Page(s) par feuille : cette option détermine le nombre de pages à imprimer sur une feuille (voir « Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille » à la page 73). • Orientation : cette option permet de choisir le sens de l’impression sur une page similaire aux exemples montrés. • Bordure : cette option vous permet d’imprimer une bordure autour de chaque page imprimée sur la feuille. • Inverser l’orientation de la page : cette option vous permet de faire pivoter la page de 180 degrés. Graphiques L’onglet Graphiques propose des options permettant de sélectionner Qualité et Mode Couleur. Sélectionnez Graphiques dans la liste déroulante sous Orientation pour accéder aux options graphiques. • Qualité : cette option vous permet de sélectionner la résolution d’impression. Plus la valeur est élevée, plus les caractères et les graphiques imprimés sont nets. Une résolution élevée peut également augmenter le temps d’impression d’un document. • Mode Couleur : vous pouvez configurer les options de couleur. L’option Couleur offre généralement la meilleure qualité d’impression qui soit pour les documents couleur. Pour imprimer un document couleur en échelle de gris, sélectionnez Echelle de gris.Impression_ 73 Fonctions d’imprimante Configurez Type de papier pour faire correspondre le papier inséré dans le bac avec celui voulu pour l’impression. Vous obtiendrez ainsi une qualité d’impression optimale. Si vous utilisez un support différent, sélectionnez le type correspondant. Configuration de l’imprimante Configurez l'option Économie de toner pour augmenter la durée de vie de la cartouche de toner et réduire le coût par page, tout en ne réduisant que faiblement la qualité d’impression. • Configuration imprimante: si vous sélectionnez cette option, cette fonction est déterminée par le paramètre défini sur l’appareil. • ACTIVE: sélectionnez cette option pour permettre à l’imprimante d’utiliser moins de toner sur chaque page. • DESACTIVE: sélectionnez cette option si vous ne souhaitez pas économiser le toner. Pour accéder à la fonction ci-dessus : 1. Ouvrez le dossier Applications > Utilitaires > Configuration d’imprimante. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, ouvrez le dossier Applications > Préférences Système et cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax. 2. Sélectionnez votre imprimante, puis cliquez sur le bouton Afficher les informations. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, sélectionnez votre imprimante et cliquez sur le bouton Options et consommables. 3. Cliquez sur le menu Options installables dans la liste déroulante de la fenêtre des informations de l’imprimante. • Sous Mac OS X 10.5 à 10.6, accédez à l'onglet Pilote. Impression de plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille Vous pouvez imprimer plus d’une page sur une seule feuille de papier. Cette option vous permet d’imprimer les brouillons en mode économique. 1. Ouvrez une application et sélectionnez Imprimer dans le menu Fichier. 2. Sélectionnez Mise en page dans la liste déroulante Orientation. Dans la liste déroulante Page(s) par feuille, sélectionnez le nombre de pages que vous souhaitez imprimer sur une feuille de papier. 3. Sélectionnez les autres options que vous souhaitez utiliser. 4. Cliquez sur Imprimer, puis l’appareil imprime le nombre de pages que vous souhaitez imprimer sur une feuille de papier. Impression Linux Certaines fonctions peuvent ne pas être disponibles selon le modèle ou les options. Ceci signifie que les fonctions ne sont pas prises en charge. Impression à partir d’applications Vous pouvez réaliser des impressions à partir de nombreuses applications Linux, à l’aide du système CUPS (Common UNIX Printing System). Vous pouvez imprimer en utilisant une de ces applications. 1. Ouvrez une application et sélectionnez Print dans le menu File. 2. Sélectionnez Print directement à l’aide de la fonction LPR. 3. A partir de la fenêtre LPR GUI, sélectionnez le nom de modèle de votre appareil dans la liste des imprimantes, puis cliquez sur Propriétés. 4. Modifiez les propriétés de la tâche d’impression en utilisant les quatre onglets suivants affichés en haut de la fenêtre. • General : cette option vous permet de changer le format de papier, le type de papier et l’orientation des documents. Elle ajoute des bannières de début et de fin et change le nombre de pages par feuille. • Text : cette option permet de définir les marges de la page et les options du texte, telles que l’espacement et les colonnes.Impression_ 74 • Graphics : cette option permet de déterminer les options d’image appliquées lors de l’impression des images/fichiers, telles que les couleurs, la taille ou la position de l’image. • Advanced : cette option permet de définir la résolution d’impression, la source d’alimentation papier et les options d’impression spéciales. Si une option est grisée, cela signifie qu’elle n’est pas prise en charge par votre appareil. L'impression recto verso automatique/manuelle peut ne pas être disponible selon le modèle. Vous pouvez également utiliser le système d'impression « lpr » ou d'autres applications pour l'impression des pages paires-impaires. 5. Cliquez sur Apply pour appliquer les modifications et fermer la fenêtre Properties. 6. Pour lancer l’impression, cliquez sur OK dans la fenêtre LPR GUI. 7. La fenêtre d’impression s’ouvre : elle vous permet de surveiller l’état de la tâche d’impression. Pour annuler la tâche actuelle, cliquez sur Cancel. Impression de fichiers Vous pouvez imprimer de nombreux types de fichier différents sur l’appareil à l’aide de CUPS (de la manière habituelle, c’est-à-dire directement à partir de l’interface de ligne de commande). Pour ce faire, vous pouvez utiliser l’utilitaire CUPS LPR. Toutefois, le package du pilote remplace l’outil LPR classique par un programme graphique LPR beaucoup plus convivial. Pour imprimer un fichier : 1. Saisissez lpr dans la ligne de commande Linux et appuyez sur Entrée. La fenêtre LPR GUI s’ouvre. Lorsque vous tapez uniquement lpr et que vous appuyez sur Enter, la fenêtre Select file(s) to print, s’affiche d’abord. Sélectionnez les fichiers à imprimer, puis cliquez sur Open. 2. A partir de la fenêtre LPR GUI, sélectionnez l’appareil dans la liste, puis modifiez les propriétés de la tâche d’impression. 3. Cliquez sur OK pour démarrer l’impression. Configuration des propriétés de l’imprimante La fenêtre Printer Properties associée à l’option Printers configuration permet de modifier les propriétés de votre imprimante. 1. Ouvrez Unified Driver Configurator. Si nécessaire, passez à Printers configuration. 2. Dans la liste des imprimantes disponibles, sélectionnez l’appareil voulu, puis cliquez sur Properties. 3. La fenêtre Printer Properties s’ouvre. Les cinq onglets suivants apparaissent en haut de la fenêtre : • General : cette option permet de modifier l’emplacement et le nom de l’imprimante. Le nom entré dans cet onglet s’affiche dans la liste des imprimantes de Printers configuration. • Connection : cette option permet d’afficher ou de sélectionner un autre port. Si vous changez le port de l’appareil (passage d’un port USB à un port parallèle et réciproquement) en cours d’utilisation, vous devez reconfigurer le port de l’appareil dans cet onglet. • Driver : permet d’afficher ou de sélectionner un autre pilote d’impression. Cliquez sur Options pour définir les options par défaut du périphérique. • Jobs : cette option affiche la liste des tâches d’impression. Cliquez sur Cancel job pour annuler la tâche sélectionnée et cochez la case Show completed jobs pour afficher les tâches précédentes dans la liste des tâches. • Classes : cette option affiche la catégorie dans laquelle figure votre appareil. Cliquez sur Add to Class pour ajouter l’appareil à une catégorie précise ou sur Remove from Class pour supprimer l’appareil de la catégorie sélectionnée. 4. Cliquez sur OK pour appliquer les modifications et fermer la fenêtre Printer Properties.Outils de gestion_ 75 8.Outils de gestion Ce chapitre présente les outils de gestion fournis pour vous aider à tirer pleinement parti de votre appareil. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Présentation des outils de gestion utiles • Utilisation de l’alerte SyncThru™ Web Service • Utilisation du programme Smart Panel • Utilisation du configurateur de pilote unifié Linux Présentation des outils de gestion utiles Les programmes ci-dessous facilitent l’utilisation de votre appareil. • « Utilisation de l’alerte SyncThru™ Web Service » à la page 75. • « Utilisation du programme Smart Panel » à la page 76. • « Utilisation du configurateur de pilote unifié Linux » à la page 78. Utilisation de l’alerte SyncThru™ Web Service Internet Explorer 6.0 ou version supérieure est l’exigence minimale pour SyncThru™ Web Service. Si vous avez connecté votre appareil à un réseau et que les paramètres réseau TCP/IP sont corrects, vous pouvez administrer votre appareil par l’intermédiaire de SyncThru™ Web Service, un serveur Web intégré. Utilisez SyncThru™ Web Service pour : • Voir les informations concernant l’appareil et vérifier son état actuel. • Modifier les paramètres TCP/IP et définir d’autres paramètres réseau. • Modifier les préférences de l’imprimante. • Paramétrer les notifications par e-mail pour informant de l’état de l’appareil. • Obtenir de l’aide pour l’utilisation de l’appareil. Pour accéder à SyncThru™ Web Service 1. Lancez un navigateur Web, comme Internet Explorer, depuis Windows. Entrez l’adresse IP de l’appareil (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) dans la zone d’adresse et appuyez sur la touche Entrée ou cliquez sur Atteindre. 2. Le site Web intégré de votre appareil s’ouvre. Connexion à SyncThru™ Web Service Avant de configurer des options dans SyncThru™ Web Service, vous devez vous connecter comme administrateur. Vous pouvez quand même utiliser SyncThru™ Web Service sans vous connecter, mais vous n’aurez pas accès à l’onglet Paramètres et à l’onglet Sécurité. 1. Cliquez sur Ouverture de session en haut à droite du site Web SyncThru™ Web Service. Une page de connexion s’affiche. 2. Saisissez l’ID et le Mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Ouverture de session. S’il s’agit de votre première connexion à SyncThru™ Web Service, saisissez l’ID et le mot de passe par défaut suivants. • ID : admin • Mot de passe : sec00000 Présentation de SyncThru™ Web Service Certains onglets peuvent ne pas apparaître en fonction du modèle utilisé. Onglet Informations cet onglet vous donne des informations générales concernant votre appareil. Vous pouvez vérifier certaines paramètres, telles que la quantité restante de toner. Vous pouvez également imprimer des rapports comme un rapport d’erreur et d’autres. • Alertes actives : cet élément vous permet de vérifier les alertes qui se sont produites dans l’appareil et leur gravité. • Consommables : cette option vous permet de vérifier le nombre de pages imprimées et la quantité de toner restant dans la cartouche. • Compteurs d’utilisation : cet élément vous permet de vérifier le compteur d’utilisation par type d’impression : recto, recto verso. • Paramètres actuels : cet élément vous permet de vérifier les informations de l’appareil et du réseau. • Imprimer informations : cet élément vous permet d’imprimer des rapports, par exemple des rapports relatifs au système, des rapports d’adresses de messagerie et de polices. Onglet Paramètres Cet onglet vous permet de définir les configurations prévues dans votre appareil et votre réseau. Vous devez vous connecter comme administrateur pour afficher cet onglet. • Onglet Config. appareil : cet onglet vous permet de définir les options prévues sur votre appareil. - Système : vous pouvez définir des paramètres relatifs à votre appareil. - Imprimante : vous pouvez définir des paramètres relatifs aux tâches d’impression. - Notification par e-mail : vous pouvez définir la fonctionnalité de notification par courrier électronique et l’adresse de messagerie des destinataires qui recevront la notification. • Onglet Config. réseau : cet onglet vous permet d’afficher et de modifier l’environnement réseau. Vous pouvez définir des paramètres comme TCP/IP, les protocoles réseau, etc. - SNMP : vous pouvez échanger des informations de gestion entre les périphériques réseau à l’aide de SNMP. - Serveur de messagerie pour courrier sortant (SMTP): vous pouvez définir le serveur de messagerie sortant. - Rétablir les paramètres par défaut : vous pouvez restaurer les paramètres réseau par défaut.Outils de gestion_ 76 Onglet Sécurité Cet onglet vous permet de définir des informations de sécurité du système et du réseau. Vous devez vous connecter comme administrateur pour afficher cet onglet. • Sécurité du système : vous pouvez définir les informations d’administrateur système, ainsi qu’activer ou désactiver des fonctionnalités de l’appareil. • Sécurité réseau: vous pouvez définir les paramètres pour HTTPS, IPsec, filtrage IPv4/IPv6, 802.1x, les serveurs d’authentification. Onglet Maintenance Cet onglet vous permet de garder votre appareil à jour en mettant à niveau les microprogrammes et en paramétrant les informations de contact pour l’envoi de courriers électroniques. Vous pouvez également vous connecter au site Web Samsung ou télécharger des pilotes en sélectionnant le menu Lien. • Mise à niveau du microprogramme: vous pouvez mettre à niveau le microprogramme de votre appareil. • Coordonnées : vous pouvez afficher les informations de contact. • Lien : vous pouvez afficher les liens vers des sites utiles où vous pouvez télécharger ou vérifier des informations. Configuration des notifications par e-mail Vous pouvez recevoir des messages électroniques concernant l’état de l’appareil en paramétrant cette option. En définissant des informations comme l’adresse IP, le nom d’hôte, l’adresse électronique et les informations de serveur SMTP, l’état de l’appareil (fin de cartouche de toner ou erreur appareil) seront envoyées automatiquement à l’adresse électronique d’une certaine personne. Cette option peut être utilisée plus fréquemment par un administrateur de l’appareil. 1. Lancez un navigateur Web, comme Internet Explorer, depuis Windows. Saisissez l’adresse IP de votre appareil (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) dans le champ d’adresses et appuyez sur la touche Entrée ou cliquez sur Atteindre. 2. Le site Web intégré de votre appareil s’ouvre. 3. Cliquez sur Ouverture de session en haut à droite du site Web SyncThru™ Web Service. Une page de connexion s’affiche. 4. Saisissez l’ID et le Mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Ouverture de session. S’il s’agit de votre première connexion à SyncThru™ Web Service, saisissez l’ID et le mot de passe par défaut suivants. • ID: admin • Mot de passe: sec00000 5. Dans l’onglet Paramètres, sélectionnez Config. appareil > Notification par e-mail. Si vous n’avez pas configuré d’environnement de serveur sortant, allez dans Paramètres > Config. réseau > Serveur de messagerie pour courrier sortant (SMTP) pour configurer l’environnement réseau avant de paramétrer la notification par courrier électronique. 6. Cliquez sur le bouton Ajouter pour ajouter un utilisateur de notification par courrier électronique. Définissez le nom du destinataire et la ou les adresse(s) de messagerie avec les éléments de notification pour lesquels vous souhaitez recevoir une alerte. 7. Cliquez sur Appliquer. Un pare-feu activé peut empêcher l’envoi correct du courrier électronique. Dans ce cas, contactez l’administrateur réseau. Définition des informations pour l’administrateur système Définissez les informations de l’administrateur système. Ce paramètre est nécessaire pour utiliser l’option de notification par courrier électronique. 1. Lancez un navigateur Web, comme Internet Explorer, depuis Windows. Entrez l’adresse IP de l’appareil (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) dans la zone d’adresse et appuyez sur la touche Entrée ou cliquez sur Atteindre. 2. Le site Web intégré de votre appareil s’ouvre. 3. Cliquez sur Ouverture de session en haut à droite du site Web SyncThru™ Web Service. Une page de connexion s’affiche. 4. Saisissez l’ID et le Mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Ouverture de session. S’il s’agit de votre première connexion à SyncThru™ Web Service, saisissez l’ID et le mot de passe par défaut suivants. • ID: admin • Mot de passe: sec00000 5. Dans l’onglet Sécurité, sélectionnez Sécurité du système > Administrateur système. 6. Saisissez le nom de l’administrateur, son numéro de téléphone, son emplacement et son adresse électronique. 7. Cliquez sur Appliquer. Utilisation du programme Smart Panel Smart Panel est un programme qui surveille l’état de l’appareil et vous en informe, et vous permet de personnaliser ses paramètres. Sous les systèmes d’exploitation Windows et Mac OS, Smart Panel est installé automatiquement lorsque vous installez le logiciel de l’appareil. Sous Linux, vous pouvez télécharger Smart Panel depuis le site Web de Samsung et procéder à l’installation (voir « Installation de Smart Panel » à la page 34). Pour utiliser ce programme, votre ordinateur doit avoir la configuration minimale suivante : • Windows. Vérifiez que l’UC, la mémoire vive et le disque dur de votre ordinateur sont de performances égales voire supérieures à celles requises (voir « Configuration requise » à la page 31). • Mac OS X 10.3 ou supérieur. Vérifiez que l’UC, la mémoire vive et le disque dur de votre ordinateur sont de performances égales voire supérieures à celles requises (voir « Configuration requise » à la page 31). • Linux. Vérifiez que l’UC, la mémoire vive et le disque dur de votre ordinateur sont de performances égales voire supérieures à celles requises (voir « Configuration requise » à la page 31). • Internet Explorer version 5.0 ou supérieure pour les animations Flash de l’aide HTML. Si vous avez besoin de connaître le numéro de modèle exact de votre appareil, reportez-vous au CD du logiciel inclus avec l’appareil. Présentation de Smart Panel Si une erreur survient lors de l’impression, vous pouvez contrôler les erreurs à partir du Smart Panel. Vous pouvez également lancer manuellement Smart Panel. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Smart Panel de la barre des tâches (sous Windows) ou de la Notification Area (sous Linux).Windows Sous Windows, double-cliquez sur cette icône. Linux Sous Linux, cliquez sur cette icône. Outils de gestion_ 77 Ou, si vous utilisez Windows, vous pouvez le lancer à partir du menu Démarrer, sélectionner Programmes ou Tous les programmes > Samsung Printers > le nom de votre pilote d’impression > Smart Panel. • Si vous avez déjà installé plusieurs appareils Samsung, sélectionnez tout d’abord le modèle d’appareil voulu afin d’utiliser le programme Smart Panel correspondant. Dans Windows ou Linux, cliquez à droite sur l'icône Smart Panel, puis sélectionnez votre appareil. • La fenêtre Smart Panel et son contenu présentés dans ce mode d’emploi du logiciel peuvent être différents selon l’appareil et le système d’exploitation que vous utilisez. Sous Mac OS 10.3 1. Cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax dans Préférences Système. 2. Cliquez sur Configurer les imprimantes.... 3. Sélectionnez l’imprimante dans la liste et double-cliquez dessus. 4. Cliquez sur Utilitaire. Sous Mac OS 10.4 1. Cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax dans Préférences Système. 2. Sélectionnez l’imprimante dans la liste et cliquez sur Liste d’attente d'impression.... 3. Cliquez sur Utilitaire. Sous Mac OS 10.5 1. Cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax dans Préférences Système. 2. Sélectionnez l’imprimante dans la liste et cliquez sur Ouvrir la liste d’attente d'impression.... 3. Cliquez sur Utilitaire. Sous Mac OS 10.6 1. Cliquez sur Imprimantes et fax dans Préférences Système. 2. Sélectionnez l’imprimante dans la liste et cliquez sur Ouvrir la liste d’attente d'impression.... 3. Cliquez sur Config. imprim.. 4. Cliquez sur l’onglet Utilitaire. 5. Cliquez sur Ouvrir l’utilitaire de l’imprimante. Le programme Smart Panel affiche l’état actuel de l’appareil, le niveau estimé de toner restant dans les cartouches de toner et divers autres types d’informations. Vous pouvez également modifier les paramètres. 1 Niveau de toner Permet de connaître le niveau des cartouches de toner. L’appareil et le nombre de cartouches de toner indiqués dans la fenêtre ci-dessus peuvent différer selon l’appareil que vous utilisez. Cette caractéristique n’est pas présente sur toutes les imprimantes. 2 Acheter maintenant Commander en ligne des cartouches de toner de remplacement. 3 Mode d’emploi Afficher le User’s Guide. Ce bouton se transforme en Guide de dépannage en cas d’erreur. Vous pouvez ouvrir directement la section dépannage du mode d’emploi. 4 Paramètres d’imprimante Configurez divers paramètres de l’appareil dans la fenêtre Utilitaire de paramétrage d’imprimante. Cette caractéristique n’est pas présente sur toutes les imprimantes. Si vous connectez votre appareil sur un réseau, la fenêtre SyncThru™ Web Service apparaît à la place de la fenêtre Utilitaire de paramétrage d’imprimante. 5 Paramétrage du pilote Définissez toutes les options de l’appareil dont vous avez besoin dans la fenêtre Options d’impression. Cette fonctionnalité n’est disponible que sous Windows (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). Modification des paramètres du programme Smart Panel Dans Windows ou Linux, cliquez à droite sur l'icône Smart Panel, puis sélectionnez Options. Sélectionnez les paramètres de votre choix dans la fenêtre Options. Outils de gestion_ 78 Utilisation du configurateur de pilote unifié Linux Unified Driver Configurator est un outil principalement conçu pour configurer les périphériques de l’appareil. Vous devez installer Unified Linux Driver pour pouvoir utiliser Unified Driver Configurator (Voir « Installation du Unified Linux Driver » à la page 34). Après installation du pilote sur votre système Linux, l’icône Unified Driver Configurator est automatiquement créée sur le bureau. Ouverture d’Unified Driver Configurator 1. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Unified Driver Configurator du bureau. Vous pouvez également cliquer sur l’icône Startup et sélectionner Samsung Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Cliquez sur les différents boutons sur la gauche pour ouvrir la fenêtre de configuration correspondante. 1 Printers configuration 2 Ports configuration Pour utiliser l’aide à l’écran, cliquez sur Help. 3. Une fois les configurations modifiées, cliquez sur Exit pour fermer le configurateur de pilote unifié. Fenêtre Printers configuration Printers configuration propose les deux onglets : Printers et Classes. Onglet Printers Affichez la configuration de l’imprimante du système actuel en cliquant sur l’icône représentant l’imprimante, à gauche de la fenêtre Unified Driver Configurator. 1 Passe en mode Printers configuration. 2 Affiche tous les appareils installés. 3 Affiche l’état, le nom du modèle et l’URI de votre appareil. Les boutons de commande d’imprimante sont comme suit : • Refresh : actualise la liste des appareils disponibles. • Add Printer : permet d’ajouter un nouvel appareil. • Remove Printer : supprime l’appareil sélectionné. • Set as Default : définit l’appareil sélectionné comme appareil par défaut. • Stop/Start : arrête/démarre l’appareil. • Test : permet d’imprimer une page de test afin de s’assurer du bon fonctionnement de l’appareil. • Properties : permet d’afficher et de modifier les propriétés de l’imprimante. Outils de gestion_ 79 Onglet Classes L’onglet Classes affiche la liste des catégories d’appareils disponibles. 1 Affiche toutes les options classes d’appareil. 2 Affiche l’état de la catégorie et le nombre d’appareils dans cette catégorie. • Refresh : actualise la liste des catégories. • Add Class : permet d’ajouter un nouvel appareil. • Remove Class : supprime la classe d’appareil sélectionnée. Ports configuration Cette fenêtre permet d’afficher la liste des ports disponibles, de vérifier l’état de chaque port et de libérer un port qui reste occupé lorsque le processus propriétaire a été interrompu pour une raison quelconque. 1 Passe en mode Ports configuration. 2 Affiche tous les ports disponibles. 3 Affiche le type de port, le périphérique connecté au port et l’état. • Refresh : actualise la liste des ports disponibles. • Release port : libère le port sélectionné.Maintenance_ 80 9.Maintenance Le présent chapitre fournit des informations sur la maintenance de votre appareil et de la cartouche de toner. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Impression d’un journal de l’appareil • Nettoyage d’un appareil • Stockage de la cartouche de toner • Conseils pour déplacer et ranger l’appareil Impression d’un journal de l’appareil Vous pouvez imprimer une page de configuration pour visualiser les paramètres actuels de l’imprimante ou pour vous aider à résoudre les problèmes d’imprimante. En mode prêt, maintenez le bouton Annuler ( ) enfoncé pendant environ 5 secondes, puis relâchez-le. Une page de configuration est imprimée. Nettoyage d’un appareil Si des problèmes de qualité d’impression surviennent, ou si vous utilisez votre appareil dans un environnement poussiéreux, vous devez nettoyer votre appareil régulièrement afin de préserver une qualité d’impression optimale. • Le nettoyage du boîtier de l’appareil avec des produits d’entretien contenant une forte teneur en alcool, solvant ou autre substance puissante peut décolorer ou endommager le boîtier. • Si votre appareil ou son environnement proche est sali par le toner, nous vous recommandons d’utiliser un tissu ou un chiffon humidifié avec de l’eau pour le nettoyer. Si vous utilisez un aspirateur, le toner sera éparpillé dans l’air, ce qui peut représenter un risque en cas d’inhalation. Nettoyage de l’extérieur Nettoyez le boîtier de l’imprimante avec un chiffon doux non pelucheux. Humidifiez légèrement le chiffon avec de l’eau, mais faites attention à ne pas laisser couler de liquide sur l’appareil ou à l’intérieur. Nettoyage de l’intérieur Lors de l’impression, des particules de poussière, de toner et de papier peuvent s’accumuler à l’intérieur de l’appareil. Cette accumulation risque d’entraîner des problèmes de qualité d’impression, tels que la présence de taches ou de traînées de toner. Le fait de nettoyer l’intérieur de l’appareil permet de supprimer ou de diminuer ce genre de problèmes. 1. Mettez l’appareil hors tension et débranchez le cordon d’alimentation. Attendez que l’appareil refroidisse. 2. Utilisez le bouton de dégagement pour ouvrir complètement le capot avant. 3. Saisissez la cartouche de toner par ses poignées et tirez-la pour l’extraire de l’appareil. 4. Tirez le récupérateur de toner usagé de l’imprimante à l’aide de sa poignée.Maintenance_ 81 5. Retirez l’unité d’imagerie de l’appareil à l’aide de la rainure située à l’avant de l’unité. • Ne touchez pas la surface verte du tambour situé dans l’unité d’imagerie. Utilisez la poignée de l’unité d’imagerie pour éviter de toucher la zone en question. • Veuillez à ne pas rayer la surface de l’unité d’imagerie. • Si vous ouvrez le capot avant trop longtemps, l’unité d’imagerie risque d’être exposée à la lumière. Cela risque d’endommager l’unité d’imagerie. Refermez le capot avant si vous devez interrompre l’installation pour une raison quelconque. 6. Avec un chiffon sec et non pelucheux, essuyez la poussière et les particules de toner accumulées autour des cartouches de toner. Après nettoyage, laissez sécher complètement l’appareil. • Si vous recevez du toner sur vos vêtements, essuyez-les avec un chiffon sec et lavez-les à l’eau froide. L’eau chaude fixe le toner sur le tissu. • Si votre appareil ou son environnement comporte un excès de toner, il est conseillé d’utiliser un chiffon humide pour le nettoyage. Avec un aspirateur, vous risquez de faire voler le toner et d’être incommodé par le nuage ainsi formé. 7. En tenant la rainure à l’avant de l’unité d’imagerie, poussez l’unité dans l’appareil. 8. Insérez le récupérateur de toner usagé dans son emplacement et poussez-le pour vous assurer qu’il est fermement en place. 9. Remettez la cartouche de toner dans l’appareil. 10. Réinstallez tous les compartiments à l’intérieur de l’appareil, puis fermez le capot avant. Si le capot avant n’est pas complètement fermé, l’appareil ne fonctionne pas. 11. Branchez le cordon d’alimentation et mettez l’appareil sous tension.Maintenance_ 82 Stockage de la cartouche de toner Stockage de la cartouche de toner Les cartouches de toner contiennent des composants sensibles à la lumière, à la température et à l’humidité. Samsung conseille aux utilisateurs de suivre les recommandations afin d’optimiser les performances, la qualité et la durée de vie de votre nouvelle cartouche de toner Samsung. Stockez cette cartouche dans le même environnement que celui dans lequel l’imprimante sera utilisée, à savoir dans des conditions de température et d’humidité de bureau contrôlées. La cartouche de toner doit rester dans son emballage d’origine, non ouvert, jusqu’à son installation – si vous ne disposez pas de l’emballage d’origine, couvrez l’ouverture supérieure de la cartouche avec du papier et stockez-la dans un meuble. Ouvrir l’emballage de la cartouche avant son utilisation réduit de façon considérable sa durée de conservation et de fonctionnement. Ne stockez pas la cartouche à même le sol. Si vous retirez la cartouche de toner de l’imprimante, stockez-la toujours en respectant les instructions suivantes : • A l’intérieur du sachet de protection de l’emballage original. • A plat (et non verticalement sur une extrémité), dans le même sens que si elle était installée dans l’appareil. • Ne stockez pas un consommable dans les conditions suivantes : - à une température supérieure à 40 °C ; - dans une plage d’humidité inférieure à 20 % et supérieure à 80 % ; - dans un environnement soumis à des variations importantes en termes d’humidité ou de température ; - exposé directement au rayonnement solaire ou à l’éclairage de la pièce ; - dans des endroits poussiéreux ; - dans une voiture sur une trop longue période ; - dans un environnement comportant des gaz corrosifs ; - dans un environnement iodé. Instructions de manipulation • Ne touchez pas la surface du tambour photoconducteur dans la cartouche. • N’exposez pas la cartouche à des vibrations ou chocs inutiles. • Ne faites jamais tourner manuellement le tambour, notamment dans le sens inverse ; cela pourrait provoquer des dommages internes et une fuite de toner. Utilisation de cartouches de toner d’une autre marque que Samsung et rechargées Samsung Electronics ne recommande ni n’approuve l’utilisation de cartouches de toner non-Samsung dans votre imprimante, y compris les cartouches génériques, de marque de distributeur, rechargées ou réusinées. La garantie de l’imprimante Samsung ne couvre pas les dommages causés à l’appareil par l’utilisation d’une cartouche de toner rechargée, réusinée ou non-Samsung. Durée de vie estimée d’une cartouche La durée de vie (l’autonomie) estimée d’une cartouche dépend de la quantité de toner utilisée pour chaque travail d’impression. La durée de vie réelle peut varier selon la densité des pages imprimées, l’environnement de travail, les intervalles entre les impressions, le type et/ou le format du support d’impression. Par exemple, si vous imprimez beaucoup de graphiques, la consommation de toner sera élevée et la cartouche se videra plus rapidement. Conseils pour déplacer et ranger l’appareil • Assurez-vous de ne pas incliner ni renverser l’appareil lorsque vous le déplacez. Dans le cas contraire, l’intérieur de l’appareil peut être contaminé par du toner, ce qui peut endommager l’appareil ou réduire la qualité d’impression. • Lors du déplacement de l’appareil, assurez-vous qu’au moins deux personnes le tiennent fermement.Dépannage_ 83 10.Dépannage Ce chapitre fournit des informations utiles en cas de dysfonctionnement. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Redistribution du toner • Astuces pour éviter les bourrages papier • Résolution des bourrages papier • Résolution d’autres problèmes Redistribution du toner Si le niveau de l’une des cartouches de toner est faible, il est possible que le rendu des couleurs des impressions en couleur d’images colorées soit incorrect en raison d’un mélange défectueux des couleurs de toner. Vous pouvez améliorer provisoirement la qualité d’impression en secouant la cartouche afin de répartir le toner résiduel. La fenêtre du programme Smart Panel apparaît sur l’écran de l’ordinateur pour vous signaler le niveau bas d’une cartouche de toner de couleur (voir « Utilisation du programme Smart Panel » à la page 76). 1. Utilisez le bouton de dégagement pour ouvrir complètement le capot avant. 2. Saisissez la cartouche de toner par ses poignées et tirez-la pour l’extraire de l’appareil. 3. Saisissez les deux poignées de la cartouche de toner et remuez celle-ci énergiquement afin de répartir le toner de façon uniforme à l’intérieur. Si vous recevez du toner sur vos vêtements, essuyez-les avec un chiffon sec et lavez-les à l’eau froide. L’eau chaude fixe le toner sur le tissu. 4. Remettez la cartouche de toner dans l’appareil. 5. Fermez le capot avant. Assurez-vous qu’il est bien fermé. Si le capot avant n’est pas complètement fermé, l’appareil ne fonctionne pas. Astuces pour éviter les bourrages papier La plupart des bourrages papier peuvent être évités en sélectionnant des types de support adaptés. Lorsqu’un bourrage papier survient, suivez les instructions suivantes (voir « Résolution des bourrages papier » à la page 84). • Suivez les instructions de la section « Modification du format du bac » à la page 58. Assurez-vous que les guides papier sont correctement positionnés.Dépannage_ 84 • Ne remplissez pas trop le bac d’alimentation. Vérifiez que le niveau de papier ne dépasse pas le trait indiquant la capacité de papier à l’intérieur du bac. • Évitez de retirer le papier du bac pendant une impression. • Courbez le papier, déramez-le puis remettez-le bien à plat avant de le charger dans le bac. • N’utilisez pas de papier froissé, humide ou ondulé. • Ne mélangez pas différents types de papier dans le bac. • Utilisez uniquement les supports d’impression recommandés (« Réglage du type et du format de papier » à la page 64). • Chargez toujours le support d’impression dans le bac d’alimentation la face imprimable vers le haut. Résolution des bourrages papier Pour éviter que le papier ne se déchire, tirez dessus lentement et avec précaution. Suivez les instructions des sections suivantes pour supprimer le bourrage. Si un bourrage papier se produit, le voyant du panneau de contrôle passe à l’orange. Retirez la feuille coincée. Si du papier est bloqué dans la zone d’alimentation papier, suivez les étapes suivantes pour libérer le papier bloqué. Dans le bac Cliquez sur ce lien pour ouvrir une animation concernant la suppression d’un bourrage. 1. Ouvrez, puis refermez le capot avant. Le papier bloqué est éjecté automatiquement de l’appareil. Si le papier ne sort pas, passez à l’étape suivante. 2. Retirez le bac. 3. Retirez le papier coincé en tirant dessus avec précaution. Si le papier ne bouge pas quand vous tirez ou si vous ne voyez aucun papier à cet endroit, contrôlez l’unité de chauffe autour de la cartouche de toner (voir « À l’intérieur de l’appareil » à la page 84). 4. Réinsérez le bac dans l’appareil jusqu’à ce qu’un déclic indique qu’il est bien en place. L’impression reprend automatiquement. À l’intérieur de l’appareil Cliquez sur ce lien pour ouvrir une animation concernant la suppression d’un bourrage. La zone de fusion est extrêmement chaude. Faites attention lorsque vous retirez du papier de cette zone afin d’éviter de vous brûler les doigts. 1. Ouvrez, puis refermez le capot avant. Le papier bloqué est éjecté automatiquement de l’appareil. Si le papier ne sort pas, passez à l’étape suivante. 2. Pour retirer le papier coincé, ouvrez le capot arrière.Dépannage_ 85 3. Retirez délicatement la feuille coincée en tirant dans la direction indiquée ci-après. Cette étape permet le plus souvent de retirer le papier coincé. Ne touchez pas l’unité de fusion située sous le capot interne. Elle est chaude et vous risquez de vous brûler. Faites attention lorsque vous retirez du papier de cette zone afin d’éviter de vous brûler les doigts. Si le papier ne bouge pas quand vous tirez ou si vous ne voyez aucun papier à cet endroit, contrôlez le bac de sortie papier (voir « Dans la zone du bac de sortie » à la page 85). 4. Fermez le capot arrière. Assurez-vous qu’il est bien fermé. L’impression reprend automatiquement. Dans la zone du bac de sortie Cliquez sur ce lien pour ouvrir une animation concernant la suppression d’un bourrage. La zone de fusion est extrêmement chaude. Faites attention lorsque vous retirez du papier de cette zone afin d’éviter de vous brûler les doigts. 1. Sortez le papier du plateau de sortie en tirant dessus avec précaution. Si vous ne voyez pas le papier bloqué ou si vous rencontrez une résistance quand vous tirez, arrêtez et passez à l’étape suivante. 2. Pour retirer le papier coincé, ouvrez le capot arrière. 3. Retirez délicatement la feuille en tirant dans la direction indiquée ci-après. Cette étape permet le plus souvent de retirer le papier coincé. Si vous ne trouvez pas la feuille coincée ou si vous rencontrez de la résistance pour retirer le papier, cessez de tirer et passez l’étape suivante. Si le papier se déchire, assurez-vous que tous les fragments de papier ont bien été retirés de l’imprimante. 4. Poussez les leviers du four vers le haut. La zone de fusion est extrêmement chaude. Procédez avec prudence lorsque vous retirez le papier bloqué dans l’appareil.Dépannage_ 86 5. Ouvrez les capots supérieur et intérieur. 2 1 6. Tout en maintenant le capot intérieur ouvert, extrayez soigneusement la feuille coincée de l’imprimante. Le capot interne se refermera automatiquement. Ne touchez pas l’unité de fusion située sous le capot interne. Elle est chaude et vous risquez de vous brûler. Faites attention lorsque vous retirez du papier de cette zone afin d’éviter de vous brûler les doigts. 7. Fermez le capot supérieur. Assurez-vous qu’il est bien fermé. 8. Poussez les leviers du four vers le bas. 9. Ouvrez et refermez le capot arrière ou le capot avant pour reprendre l’impression.Dépannage_ 87 Résolution d’autres problèmes Le tableau suivant dresse la liste des problèmes que vous pouvez rencontrer et des solutions recommandées correspondantes. Appliquez les solutions proposées jusqu’à ce que le problème soit résolu. Si le problème persiste, contactez un technicien de maintenance. Pour les autres problèmes : • Voir « Problèmes liés au système » à la page 87. • Voir « Problèmes d’alimentation » à la page 87. • Voir « Problèmes d’alimentation papier » à la page 88. • Voir « Problèmes d’impression » à la page 88. • Voir « Problèmes de qualité d’impression » à la page 90. • Voir « Problèmes Windows courants » à la page 93. • Voir « Problèmes Linux courants » à la page 94. • Voir « Problèmes Macintosh courants » à la page 95. Problèmes liés au système État Solutions proposées Le témoin d’erreur rouge est allumé. Mettez l’appareil sous/hors tension. Si le problème persiste, contactez un technicien de maintenance (voir « Contact SAMSUNG worldwide » à la page 104). L’imprimante rencontre des problèmes nécessitant une opération de maintenance, comme une erreur LSU ou une erreur de fusion. Problèmes d’alimentation Cliquez sur ce lien pour ouvrir une animation concernant les problèmes d’alimentation. État Solutions possibles L’appareil n’est pas alimenté ou le câble de connexion qui relie l’ordinateur à l’imprimante n’est pas correctement raccordé. • Branchez le cordon d’alimentation et appuyez sur la touche Alimentation ( ) du panneau de commande. • Déconnectez le câble de l’appareil, puis reconnectez-le. - Pour l’impression en mode local - Configuration réseau (CLP-320N(K)/ CLP-321N/CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement)Dépannage_ 88 Problèmes d’alimentation papier État Solutions possibles Bourrages papier en cours d’impression. Supprimez le bourrage papier (voir « Résolution des bourrages papier » à la page 84). Plusieurs feuilles sont collées les unes aux autres. • Vérifiez la capacité papier maximale du bac (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Vérifiez que vous utilisez un type de papier adéquat (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Retirez le papier du bac d’alimentation, courbez-le ou déramez-le. • Dans un environnement humide, les feuilles risquent de se coller les unes aux autres, remplacez-les par des nouvelles. Impossible d’insérer plusieurs feuilles de papier. Il se peut que différents types de papier soient empilés dans le bac d’alimentation. Chargez des feuilles d’un type, d’un format et d’un grammage identiques. Le papier n’est pas entraîné dans l’appareil. • Retirez tout ce qui fait obstruction à l’intérieur de l’appareil. • Le papier n’a pas été chargé correctement. Retirez le papier du bac d’alimentation et rechargez-le correctement. • Il y a trop de papier dans le bac d’alimentation. Enlevez le surplus de papier. • Le papier est trop épais. Utilisez uniquement du papier conforme aux caractéristiques de l’appareil (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). Le papier ne cesse de se bloquer. • Il y a trop de papier dans le bac d’alimentation. Enlevez le surplus de papier. • Le type de papier utilisé n’est pas correct. Utilisez uniquement du papier conforme aux caractéristiques de l’appareil (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Des particules se sont accumulées dans l’appareil. Ouvrez le capot supérieur de l’imprimante et les débris éventuels. Les transparents se collent les uns aux autres au niveau de la sortie papier. Utilisez uniquement des transparents adaptés aux imprimantes laser. Retirez les transparents au fur et à mesure qu’ils sortent de l’appareil. Les enveloppes s’impriment de travers ou ne sont pas entraînées correctement. Assurez-vous que les guides papier reposent des deux côtés des enveloppes. Problèmes d’impression État Cause possible Solutions possibles L’appareil n’imprime pas. L’appareil n’est pas sous tension. Vérifiez que le cordon d’alimentation est branché correctement. Vous n’avez pas défini votre appareil en tant qu’appareil par défaut. Réglez votre appareil comme appareil par défaut pour Windows. Vérifiez les éléments ci-après sur l’appareil : • Le capot avant n’est pas fermé. Fermez le capot avant. • Du papier est bloqué. Supprimez le bourrage papier (voir « Résolution des bourrages papier » à la page 84). • Il n’y a pas de papier dans le bac. Chargez du papier (voir « Chargement de papier dans le bac » à la page 59). • La cartouche de toner n’est pas installée. Installez la cartouche de toner. Si une erreur système se produit, contactez un technicien de maintenance. Le câble de connexion qui relie l’ordinateur à l’imprimante n’est pas raccordé correctement. Déconnectez le câble de l’appareil, puis reconnectez-le. Le câble de connexion qui relie l’ordinateur à l’imprimante est défectueux. Si possible, raccordez le câble à un autre ordinateur en état de marche et imprimez un document. Vous pouvez également utiliser un autre câble d’appareil. La configuration du port n’est pas correcte. Vérifiez les paramètres de l’imprimante dans Windows pour voir si la tâche d’impression est envoyée au port approprié. Si l’ordinateur comporte plusieurs ports, assurez-vous que l’appareil est raccordé au port adéquat. L’appareil est peut-être mal configuré. Vérifiez les Options d’impression pour voir si tous les réglages d’impression sont corrects (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). Le pilote d’impression est peut-être mal installé. Réparez le logiciel de l’appareil (voir « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté via USB » à la page 32, « Installation du pilote d’un appareil connecté au réseau » à la page 40). L’appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement. • Vérifiez les voyants d’état sur le panneau de commande pour déterminer s’il s’agit d’une erreur système. Si vous ne parvenez pas à éliminer l’erreur, veuillez contacter un technicien de maintenance. • Vous pouvez également vérifier un message d’erreur depuis le programme Smart Panel de votre ordinateur (voir « Utilisation du programme Smart Panel » à la page 76).Dépannage_ 89 Le document est si volumineux que l’espace disponible sur le disque dur n’est pas suffisant pour accéder à la tâche d’impression. Attribuez plus d’espace disque dur sur votre ordinateur pour la mise en file d’attente et essayez d’imprimer. Le bac à papier est plein. Il peut contenir jusqu’à 80 feuilles de papier ordinaire (80 g/m2 ). Une fois que vous avez vidé le bac de sortie, l’impression reprend. Si l’appareil est utilisé de manière continue pendant une longue période, la vitesse d’impression pourrait être ralentie ou l’appareil pourrait s’arrêter pour refroidir. Attendez que l’appareil refroidisse. L’impression reprend automatiquement une fois l’appareil refroidi. L’appareil n’utilise pas la bonne source d’alimentation papier. L’option papier sélectionnée dans les Options d’impression n’est peut-être pas correcte. Pour la plupart des logiciels d’application, pour sélectionner la source d’alimentation du papier il faut aller sur l’onglet Papier dans Options d’impression. Sélectionnez la source d’alimentation papier adéquate. (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). Une tâche d’impression est très lente. L’impression est peut-être très complexe. Simplifiez la page ou modifiez les paramètres de qualité d’impression. La moitié de la page est blanche. L’orientation de la page n’est peut-être pas correcte. Changez l’orientation de la page dans votre application. Consultez l’aide du pilote d’impression. Le format du papier et les paramètres de format ne correspondent pas. Assurez-vous que le format de papier défini dans les paramètres du pilote d’impression correspond au format du papier se trouvant dans le bac d’alimentation. Vérifiez également que le format de papier défini dans les paramètres du pilote d’impression correspond au format de papier sélectionné dans les paramètres de l’application. État Cause possible Solutions possibles L’appareil imprime, mais le texte est erroné, tronqué ou incomplet. Le câble de l’appareil est mal raccordé ou défectueux. Déconnectez le câble de l’appareil, puis reconnectez-le. Essayez d’imprimer un document ayant déjà été imprimé correctement. Si possible, reliez le câble et l’appareil à un autre ordinateur ayant déjà été correctement imprimé, et lancez l’impression d’un document. Si ces solutions n’aboutissent pas, remplacez le câble de l’appareil. Vous avez sélectionné le mauvais pilote d’impression. Vérifiez que votre appareil est sélectionné dans le menu de sélection de l’imprimante de l’application. L’application ne fonctionne pas correctement. Essayez d’imprimer un document à partir d’une autre application. Le système d’exploitation ne fonctionne pas correctement. Quittez Windows, puis redémarrez l’ordinateur. Mettez l’appareil hors tension, puis sous tension. Si vous utilisez un environnement DOS, il se peut que les paramètres de police pour votre appareil ne soient pas correctement configurés. Voir « Modification des paramètres de police (CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N/ CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement) » à la page 56. Les pages s’impriment, mais elles sont vierges. La cartouche de toner est défectueuse ou vide. Répartissez le toner dans la cartouche, si nécessaire. Le cas échéant, remplacez la cartouche. Le fichier contient peut-être des pages blanches. Vérifiez que le fichier ne contient pas de pages blanches. Certains éléments, comme le contrôleur ou la carte, sont peut-être défectueux. Contactez le service de maintenance. L’imprimante n’imprime pas correctement le fichier PDF. Des graphiques, du texte ou des illustrations manquent. Incompatibilité entre le fichier PDF et les produits Acrobat. L’impression du fichier PDF en tant qu’image peut permettre l’impression du fichier. Activez l’option Print As Image dans les options d’impression Acrobat. L’impression d’un fichier PDF en tant qu’image demande plus de temps qu’une impression ordinaire. État Cause possible Solutions possiblesDépannage_ 90 Problèmes de qualité d’impression Si l’intérieur de l’appareil est encrassé ou si le papier a été mal chargé, vous constaterez probablement une baisse de la qualité d’impression. Reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous pour résoudre le problème. La qualité d’impression des photos n’est pas bonne. Des images ne sont pas supprimées. La résolution des photos est très faible. Réduisez la taille de la photo. Plus vous augmentez la taille des photos dans le programme, plus la résolution diminuera. Avant l’impression, la machine émet de la vapeur près du bac de sortie. L’utilisation de papier humide peut provoquer la formation de vapeur pendant l’impression. Ce n’est pas un problème. Continuez l’impression. L’appareil n’imprime pas sur du papier de format spécial comme le papier à factures. Le format du papier et les paramètres de format ne correspondent pas. Réglez le format de papier correct dans Modifier... dans l’onglet Papier des Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). Le papier à factures imprimé est ondulé. Les paramètres de format de papier ne correspondent pas. Modifiez l’option d’impression et réessayez. Allez dans Options d’impression, cliquez sur l’onglet Papier, et définissez le type sur Papier épais (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). Le papier imprimé est ondulé. L’ondulation du papier peut être due à différents facteurs, tels que la température, l’humidité, le type de papier, une couverture d’impression élevée, etc. Utilisez l’option Réduct. ondulation papier. Accédez à Options d’impression (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66), cliquez sur l’onglet Avancé, puis cochez la case Réduct. ondulation papier. Cette option optimisera les facteurs environnementaux pour réduire le niveau d’ondulation du papier. État Cause possible Solutions possibles État Solutions proposées Impression claire ou floue • Si une strie blanche verticale ou une zone floue apparaît sur la page, le niveau du toner est bas. Essayez de secouer la cartouche pour redistribuer le reste du toner et prolonger son utilisation (voir « Redistribution du toner » à la page 83). Si la qualité ne s’améliore pas, remplacez la cartouche. • Le papier n’est pas conforme aux spécifications, par exemple le papier est humide ou rugueux (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Si toute la page est claire, la résolution d’impression choisie est trop basse. Réglez la résolution. Consultez l’aide du pilote d’impression. • La présence simultanée de zones floues et de traînées de toner peut indiquer la nécessité de nettoyer la cartouche (voir « Nettoyage de l’intérieur » à la page 80). • La surface du module de numérisation laser du côté intérieur à l’appareil peut être sale. Nettoyez le module de numérisation laser en ouvrant et en fermant plusieurs fois le capot avant. Si le problème persiste, contactez un technicien. L’impression est plus claire dans la partie supérieure du papier Il se peut que l’encre n’adhère pas correctement à ce type de papier. • Modifiez l’option d’impression et réessayez. Allez dans Options d’impression, cliquez sur l’onglet Papier et définissez le type sur Papier recyclé. Taches de toner • Le papier n’est peut-être pas conforme aux spécifications (papier humide ou rugueux, par exemple) (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Le circuit d’entraînement du papier a besoin d’être nettoyé (voir « Nettoyage de l’intérieur » à la page 80).Dépannage_ 91 Zones vides Si des zones vides, généralement au niveau des arrondis des caractères, apparaissent sur la page. • Il se peut qu’une feuille de papier soit de mauvaise qualité. Essayez de réimprimer la page. • Le taux d’humidité du papier n’est pas homogène ou certaines zones du papier sont humides. Changez de marque de papier (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • La rame de papier est de mauvaise qualité. Le processus de fabrication du papier est à l’origine du problème et empêche le toner de se fixer sur certaines zones. Changez de marque ou de type de papier. • Modifiez l’option d’impression et réessayez. Allez dans les propriétés de l’imprimante, cliquez sur l’onglet Papier et réglez le type sur Papier épais (voir « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66). • Si le problème persiste, contactez le service de maintenance. Taches blanches Des taches blanches apparaissent sur la page. • Le papier est trop rugueux et une quantité importante de poussière provenant du papier se dépose à l’intérieur de l’appareil, salissant probablement la courroie de transfert. Nettoyez l’intérieur de l’appareil. Contactez le service de maintenance. • Le circuit d’entraînement du papier a besoin d’être nettoyé. Contactez le service de maintenance. Lignes verticales Si des stries verticales noires apparaissent sur la page : • L’unité d’imagerie est probablement rayée. Retirez l’unité d’imagerie puis installez-en une nouvelle (voir « Remplacement de l’unité d’imagerie » à la page 98). Si des stries verticales blanches apparaissent sur la page : • La surface du module de numérisation laser du côté intérieur à l’appareil peut être sale. Nettoyez le module de numérisation laser en ouvrant et en fermant plusieurs fois le capot avant. Si le problème persiste, contactez un technicien. État Solutions proposées Fond couleur ou noir Si la quantité de toner déposée sur la page crée un fond grisé inacceptable : • Choisissez du papier de grammage inférieur (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Vérifiez l’environnement de l’imprimante : un air trop sec (faible degré d’hygrométrie) ou trop humide (plus de 80 % d’humidité relative) peut avoir une incidence sur l’ombrage du fond. • Retirez l’ancienne cartouche et installez-en une nouvelle (voir « Remplacement de la cartouche de toner » à la page 97). Traînées de toner • Nettoyez l’intérieur de l’appareil. Voir « Nettoyage de l’intérieur » à la page 80. • Vérifiez le type et la qualité du papier. Voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103. • Retirez la cartouche de toner, puis installez-en une nouvelle. Voir « Remplacement de la cartouche de toner » à la page 97. Défauts verticaux répétitifs Si des marques apparaissent plusieurs fois sur une page, à intervalles réguliers : • La cartouche de toner est peut-être défectueuse. Si une marque se répète sur la page, imprimez plusieurs pages de nettoyage afin de nettoyer la cartouche. Si le problème persiste après cette impression, remplacez la cartouche (voir « Remplacement de la cartouche de toner » à la page 97). • Certaines pièces de l’appareil comportent peut-être des dépôts de toner. Si le défaut apparaît au dos de la page, le problème se résoudra sans doute de lui-même au bout de quelques pages. • L’unité de fusion est peut-être endommagée. Contactez le service de maintenance. Fond moucheté A Les fonds mouchetés apparaissent lorsque des particules de toner se déposent aléatoirement sur la page. • Le papier peut être trop humide. Essayez d’imprimer en utilisant une nouvelle rame de papier. N’ouvrez les rames qu’au dernier moment afin d’éviter que le papier n’absorbe l’humidité de l’air. • Si le fond moucheté apparaît sur une enveloppe, changez la mise en page pour éviter l’impression sur des zones de pliure. L’impression sur une zone de pliure peut causer des problèmes. • Si le fond moucheté recouvre la totalité de la page, réglez la résolution à partir de l’application ou des propriétés de l’imprimante. État Solutions proposéesDépannage_ 92 Des particules d’encre entourent les caractères gras ou les images Il se peut que l’encre n’adhère pas correctement à ce type de papier. • Modifiez l’option d’impression et réessayez. Allez dans Options d’impression, cliquez sur l’onglet Papier et définissez le type sur Papier recyclé. Caractères mal formés • Si des caractères sont mal formés et semblent creusés par endroits, le papier est peut-être trop lisse. Changez de type de papier (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). Impression oblique • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé. • Vérifiez le type et la qualité du papier (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Assurez-vous que le papier ou tout autre support est correctement chargé, et que les guides ne sont ni trop proches ni trop éloignés des bords du papier. Pages gondolées • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé. • Vérifiez le type et la qualité du papier. Une température ou une humidité trop élevée peut engendrer une ondulation du papier (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d’alimentation. Essayez également de changer le sens du papier (rotation à 180 degrés) dans le bac. État Solutions proposées Pages pliées ou froissées • Assurez-vous que le papier est correctement chargé. • Vérifiez le type et la qualité du papier (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d’alimentation. Essayez également de changer le sens du papier (rotation à 180 degrés) dans le bac. Dos de la page taché • Vérifiez que le toner ne coule pas. Nettoyez l’intérieur de l’appareil (voir « Nettoyage de l’intérieur » à la page 80). Pages entièrement noires ou de couleur A • La cartouche de toner n’est sans doute pas installée correctement. Enlevez-la, puis réinstallez-la. • La cartouche de toner est peut-être défectueuse et doit être remplacée. Retirez la cartouche de toner, puis installez-en une nouvelle (voir « Remplacement de la cartouche de toner » à la page 97). • L’appareil a peut-être besoin d’une révision. Contactez le service de maintenance. Toner non fixé • Nettoyez l’intérieur de l’appareil (voir « Nettoyage de l’intérieur » à la page 80). • Vérifiez le type et la qualité du papier (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Retirez la cartouche de toner, puis installez-en une nouvelle (voir « Remplacement de la cartouche de toner » à la page 97). • Si le problème persiste, il se peut que l’appareil ait besoin d’une révision. Contactez le service de maintenance. État Solutions proposéesDépannage_ 93 Problèmes Windows courants État Solutions possibles Le message « Fichier utilisé » s’affiche durant l’installation. Fermez tous les programmes ouverts. Effacez tous les programmes du groupe Démarrage, puis redémarrez Windows. Réinstallez le pilote d’impression. Le message « Erreur de protection générale », « Exception OE », « Spool 32 » ou « Opération non conforme » apparaît. Fermez toutes les applications, redémarrez Windows et recommencez l’impression. Les messages « Échec d’impression » et « Erreur de temporisation de l’imprimante » s’affichent. Ces messages sont susceptibles d’apparaître en cours d’impression. Attendez simplement que l’appareil ait terminé l’impression. Si le message apparaît en mode prêt ou une fois l’impression achevée, vérifiez le branchement et/ou l’existence d’une erreur éventuelle. Pour plus d’informations sur les messages d’erreur Windows, reportez-vous au Guide de l’utilisateur de Microsoft Windows fourni avec votre ordinateur. Caractères tachés de blanc A Un caractère devant être noir contient des taches blanches : • Si vous utilisez des transparents, choisissez-en d’un autre type. Étant donné la matière dont sont constitués les transparents, il est normal de constater des taches blanches dans les caractères. • Il se peut que vous imprimiez du mauvais côté du papier. Retirez le papier et retournez-le. • Le papier n’est peut-être pas conforme aux caractéristiques de l’appareil (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). Stries horizontales Des stries noires horizontales ou des traînées de toner apparaissent : • La cartouche de toner est peut-être mal installée. Enlevez-la, puis réinstallez-la. • La cartouche de toner est peut-être défectueuse. Retirez la cartouche de toner, puis installez-en une nouvelle (voir « Spécifications des supports d’impression » à la page 103). • Si le problème persiste, il se peut que l’appareil ait besoin d’une révision. Contactez le service de maintenance. Plissement Si le papier imprimé est ondulé ou s’il n’est pas entraîné dans l’appareil : • Retournez la pile de papier dans le bac d’alimentation. Essayez également de changer le sens du papier (rotation à 180 degrés) dans le bac. • Modifiez l’option d’impression et réessayez. Ouvrez les Propriétés de l’imprimante, cliquez sur l’onglet Papier, et configurez le type de papier sur Papier épais. Reportez-vous à la section « Ouverture des préférences d’impression » à la page 66 pour plus de renseignements. Image inconnue apparaissant de manière répétitive sur plusieurs pages qui se suivent, toner non fixé sur le papier, document très pâle ou problème de contamination. Vous utilisez probablement l’appareil à une altitude de 1 000 m ou plus. Une altitude élevée peut altérer la qualité d’impression : le toner ne se fixe pas correctement sur le papier ou le document est très pâle. Vous pouvez régler cette option via Utilitaire de paramétrage d’imprimante (voir « Réglage de l’altitude » à la page 55). État Solutions proposéesDépannage_ 94 Problèmes Linux courants État Solutions possibles L’appareil n’imprime pas. • Vérifiez que le pilote d’impression est installé. Ouvrez le Unified Driver Configurator et passez dans l’onglet Printers de la fenêtre Printers configuration pour voir la liste des imprimantes disponibles. Vérifiez que votre imprimante figure dans la liste. Si ce n’est pas le cas, ouvrez Add new printer wizard pour paramétrer l’imprimante. • Vérifiez que l’appareil est sous tension. Ouvrez Printers configuration et sélectionnez votre imprimante dans la liste. Vérifiez la description indiquée dans le volet Selected printer. Si l’état contient la chaîne Stopped, appuyez sur la touche Start. Une fois que vous avez effectué ces étapes, l’appareil devrait reprendre son fonctionnement normal. L’état « stopped » peut apparaître en cas de problèmes d’impression. Il peut être généré, par exemple, si vous tentez d’imprimer un document alors que le port est utilisé par une application de numérisation. • Assurez-vous que le port est disponible. Étant donné que les composants de l’appareil (imprimante et scanner) partagent la même interface d’E/S (port), plusieurs applications utilisateur sollicitant l’appareil risquent d’accéder au port au même moment. Pour éviter tout conflit, une seule application est autorisée à accéder au périphérique. Un message « device busy » (« périphérique occupé ») est envoyé à l’autre utilisateur. Ouvrez la boîte de dialogue Configuration des ports et sélectionnez le port attribué à l’appareil. Vérifiez si le port est occupé par une autre application dans le volet Selected port. Si tel est le cas, attendez la fin de la tâche ou appuyez sur la touche Release port si l’application utilisant le port ne fonctionne pas correctement. • Vérifiez si votre application comporte une option d’impression spéciale de type « -oraw ». Si « -oraw » figure dans le paramètre de ligne de commande, supprimez-le pour imprimer correctement. Dans le cas du terminal Gimp, sélectionnez « print » -> « Setup printer » et modifiez le paramètre de ligne de commande dans l’élément de commande. • La version du système CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) intégrée à SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-1.1.21) n’est pas compatible avec l’impression IPP (Internet Printing Protocol). Utilisez l’impression par port au lieu de l’impression IPP ou installez une version supérieure de CUPS (cups-1.1.22 ou version supérieure). Certaines images en couleur sortent tout en noir. Il s’agit d’un bogue connu dans Ghostscript (jusqu’à la version 7.05 de GNU Ghostscript) lorsque l’espace colorimétrique de base du document est l’espace colorimétrique indexé et qu’il est converti par le biais de l’espace colorimétrique CIE. Étant donné que Postscript utilise la zone couleur CIE en tant que système de contretypage des couleurs, vous devez mettre à jour Ghostscript sur votre système, au moins pour les versions 7.06 et suivantes de GNU Ghostscript. La dernière version de Ghostscript est disponible sur www.ghostscript.com. Certaines images en couleur sont imprimées dans une couleur inattendue. Il s’agit d’un bogue connu dans Ghostscript (jusqu’à la version 7.xx de GNU Ghostscript) lorsque l’espace colorimétrique de base du document est l’espace colorimétrique indexé RVB et qu’il est converti par le biais de l’espace colorimétrique CIE. Étant donné que Postscript utilise la zone couleur CIE en tant que système de contretypage des couleurs, vous devez mettre à jour Ghostscript sur votre système, et utiliser les versions 8.xx et suivantes de GNU Ghostscript. La dernière version de Ghostscript est disponible sur www.ghostscript.com. L’appareil n’imprime pas des pages entières et seule une moitié de page apparaît sur la sortie. Il s’agit d’un problème connu qui se produit lorsqu’un appareil couleur est utilisé sur la version 8.51 ou une version antérieure de Ghostscript, le système d’exploitation 64 bits de Linux. Il est signalé sur bugs.ghostscript.com sous l’intitulé Ghostscript Bug 688252. Le problème est résolu dans AFPL Ghostscript 8.52 ou une version supérieure. Téléchargez la dernière version de AFPL Ghostscript à l’adresse http://sourceforge.net/ projects/ghostscript/ et installez-la pour résoudre ce problème. Je rencontre l’erreur « Cannot open port device file » lors de l’impression d’un document. Il est déconseillé de modifier les paramètres de la tâche d’impression (via l’utilitaire LPR, par exemple) pendant l’impression d’une tâche. Les versions connues du serveur CUPS interrompent la tâche d’impression si les options d’impression sont modifiées, puis tentent de relancer la tâche depuis le début. Comme Unified Linux Driver verrouille le port lors de l’impression, la terminaison brutale du pilote laisse le port verrouillé et indisponible pour les tâches d’impression suivantes. Si cette situation se produit, essayez de libérer le port MFP en sélectionnant Release port dans la fenêtre Port configuration. Reportez-vous au guide de l’utilisateur Linux fourni avec votre ordinateur pour plus de renseignements sur les messages d’erreur Linux. État Solutions possiblesDépannage_ 95 Problèmes Macintosh courants État Solutions possibles L’imprimante n’imprime pas correctement les fichiers PDF. Une partie des graphiques, du texte ou des illustrations manque. L’impression du fichier PDF en tant qu’image peut permettre l’impression du fichier. Activez l’option Print As Image dans les options d’impression Acrobat. L’impression d’un fichier PDF en tant qu’image demande plus de temps qu’une impression ordinaire. Le document a été imprimé, mais la tâche d’impression n’a pas disparu de la file d’attente sous Mac OS X 10.3.2. Mettez à jour votre système d’exploitation et passez au système Mac OS X 10.3.3 ou ultérieur. Certaines lettres ne sont pas affichées correctement lors de l’impression de la couverture. Le système d’exploitation Mac OS ne peut pas créer la police lors de l’impression de la couverture. L’alphabet anglais et les numéros sont affichés correctement sur la page de couverture. Lors de l’impression d’un document Acrobat Reader 6.0 ou version supérieure sur Macintosh, les couleurs ne s’impriment pas correctement. Vérifiez que la résolution définie dans le pilote de l’appareil correspond à celle d’Acrobat Reader. Reportez-vous au mode d’emploi Macintosh fourni avec votre ordinateur pour plus de renseignements sur les messages d’erreur Macintosh.Fournitures_ 96 11.Fournitures Ce chapitre fournit des informations sur l’achat des consommables et des pièces de rechange disponibles pour votre appareil. Ce chapitre contient les sections suivantes : • Comment commander • Consommables disponibles • Pièces de rechange • Remplacement de la cartouche de toner • Remplacement de l’unité d’imagerie • Remplacement du récupérateur de toner usagé Les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier d’un pays à l’autre. Contactez votre représentant commercial pour obtenir la liste des accessoires disponibles. Comment commander Pour commander des accessoires, consommables et pièces de rechange agréées par Samsung, contactez le distributeur ou revendeur Samsung auprès duquel vous avez acheté l’appareil. Vous pouvez également visiter le site www.samsung.com/supplies. Sélectionnez votre pays/région, pour trouver le numéro à appeler pour bénéficier de nos services. Consommables disponibles Lorsque le toner est épuisé, vous pouvez commander les types suivants de consommables pour votre appareil : Type Nombre de pages (moyenne) a a.Capacité moyenne d’une cartouche conformément à la norme ISO/ IEC 19798. Cartouche de toner capacité standard • Rendement moyen continu d’une cartouche noir : 1 500 pages standard (Noir) • Rendement moyen continu d’une cartouche couleur : 1 000 pages standard (Jaune/ Magenta/Cyan) K407(CLT-K407S) : Noir C407(CLT-C407S) : Cyan M407(CLT-M407S) : Magenta Y407(CLT-Y407S) : Jaune Région A b b.Région A : Albanie, Autriche, Belgique, Bosnie, Bulgarie, Croatie, Chypre, République Tchèque, Danemark, Estonie, Finlande, France, Allemagne, Grèce, Hongrie, Italie, Lettonie, Lituanie, Macédoine, Pays-Bas, Norvège, Pologne, Portugal, Roumanie, Serbie, Slovaquie, Slovénie, Espagne, Suède, Suisse et Royaume-Uni K4072(CLT-K4072S) : Noir C4072(CLT-C4072S) : Cyan M4072(CLT-M4072S) : Magenta Y4072(CLT-Y4072S) : Jaune Région B c c. Région B : Bangladesh, Chine, Inde et Népal K4073(CLT-K4073S) : Noir C4073(CLT-C4073S) : Cyan M4073(CLT-M4073S) : Magenta Y4073(CLT-Y4073S) : Jaune Unité d’imagerie Environ 24 000 images d d.Nombre d’images basé sur une couleur par page. Si vous imprimez des documents en couleurs pleines (cyan, magenta, jaune, noir), la durée de vie de cet élément se voit réduite de 25 %. CLT-R407 Récupérateur de toner usagé Environ 10 000 images d CLT-W409 Pour remplacer une cartouche de toner, voir « Remplacement de la cartouche de toner » à la page 97. La durée de vie de la cartouche peut varier selon les options et le pourcentage de couverture d’image utilisés. Vous devez acheter les consommables, notamment les cartouches de toner, dans le même pays que celui où vous avez acheté votre appareil. Dans le cas contraire, les consommables seront incompatibles avec votre appareil, car la configuration du système varie d’un pays à l’autre. Samsung ne recommande pas l’utilisation de cartouches de toner non-Samsung, telles que les cartouches rechargées ou réusinées. Samsung ne peut garantir la qualité des cartouches de toner non-Samsung. Tout entretien ou réparation requis suite à l’utilisation de cartouches de toner non-Samsung ne sera pas couvert par la garantie de l’appareil. Pièces de rechange Pour acheter des pièces de rechange, contactez la source où vous avez acheté l’appareil. Il est recommandé de faire effectuer ces opérations de maintenance par un fournisseur agréé, un distributeur ou le revendeur auprès duquel vous avez acquis l’appareil. La garantie ne couvre pas le remplacement des pièces d’entretien une fois qu’elles ont atteint leur « capacité moyenne ». Pour éviter des problèmes de qualité d’impression et d’alimentation papier causés par des pièces usagées, les pièces de rechange sont remplacées à intervalles spécifiques, reportez-vous au tableau ci-dessous. L’objectif est de maintenir votre appareil dans un excellent état de fonctionnement. Les pièces de rechange ci-dessous doivent être remplacées quand la durée de vie de chaque élément touche à sa fin. Nom de pièce Pièces Nombre de pages (moyenne) a Four Environ 50 000 pages (en noir et blanc) / 12 500 pages (en couleur)Fournitures_ 97 Remplacement de la cartouche de toner Cliquez sur ce lien pour ouvrir une animation concernant le remplacement d’une cartouche de toner. L’appareil utilise quatre couleurs et une cartouche différente pour chaque couleur : jaune (J), magenta (M), cyan (C) et noir (N). Une cartouche de toner a atteint son autonomie estimée. L’impression cesse. En outre, la fenêtre du programme Smart Panel s’affiche sur l’écran de l’ordinateur pour vous avertir qu’il faut remplacer la cartouche (voir « Utilisation du programme Smart Panel » à la page 76). Vous devez alors remplacer la cartouche de toner. Vérifiez le numéro de modèle de la cartouche de toner utilisée pour votre appareil (voir « Consommables disponibles » à la page 96). Samsung ne recommande pas l’utilisation de cartouches de toner non-Samsung, telles que les cartouches rechargées ou réusinées. Samsung ne peut pas garantir les cartouche de toner non-Samsung, ni estimer les dommages qu’elles peuvent causer à la machine. Tout entretien ou service de réparation requis suite à l’utilisation de cartouches de toner non-Samsung ne sera pas couvert par la garantie de l’appareil. 1. Mettez l’appareil hors tension, puis attendez quelques minutes qu’il ait refroidi. 2. Utilisez le bouton de dégagement pour ouvrir complètement le capot avant. 3. Saisissez la cartouche de toner par ses poignées et tirez-la pour l’extraire de l’appareil. 4. Sortez une nouvelle cartouche de son emballage. 5. Retirez la plaque de la trémie de la nouvelle cartouche de toner. 6. Saisissez les deux poignées de la cartouche de toner et remuez celle-ci énergiquement afin de répartir le toner de façon uniforme à l’intérieur. 7. Posez la cartouche d’encre sur une surface plane, comme illustré, puis retirez l’enveloppe de protection. Si vous recevez du toner sur vos vêtements, essuyez-les avec un chiffon sec et lavez-les à l’eau froide. L’eau chaude fixe le toner sur le tissu. Rouleau de transfert Environ 50 000 pages (en noir et blanc)/12 500 pages (en couleur) Courroie de transfert (ITB) Environ 50 000 pages (en noir et blanc)/12 500 pages (en couleur) Rouleau d’alimentation papier Environ 50 000 pages a.Peut varier en fonction du système d’exploitation utilisé, du fonctionnement de votre ordinateur, du logiciel d’application, de la méthode de connexion, du type et du format du support et de la complexité du travail. Pièces Nombre de pages (moyenne) aFournitures_ 98 8. Vérifiez que la couleur de la cartouche de toner correspond bien à la couleur de l’emplacement puis saisissez les poignées de la cartouche. Insérez la cartouche jusqu’à entendre un déclic. 9. Fermez le capot avant. Vérifiez que le capot est bien fermé, puis remettez l’appareil sous tension. Si le capot avant n’est pas complètement fermé, l’appareil ne fonctionne pas. Remplacement de l’unité d’imagerie A l’expiration de la durée de vie de l’unité d’imagerie, la fenêtre du programme Smart Panel s’affiche sur l’écran de votre ordinateur pour vous signaler qu’il est nécessaire de remplacer l’unité d’imagerie. Dans le cas contraire, l’impression est interrompue. 1. Mettez l’appareil hors tension, puis attendez quelques minutes qu’il ait refroidi. 2. Utilisez le bouton de dégagement pour ouvrir complètement le capot avant. 3. Saisissez la cartouche de toner par ses poignées et tirez-la pour l’extraire de l’appareil. 4. Retirez le récupérateur de toner usagé de l’appareil en le saisissant par sa poignée. 5. Retirez l’unité d’imagerie de l’appareil à l’aide de la rainure située à l’avant de l’unité. 6. Sortez une nouvelle unité d’imagerie de son emballage. • N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus comme un couteau ou des ciseaux, pour ouvrir l’emballage de l’unité d’imagerie. Vous risqueriez d’en abîmer la surface. • Veuillez à ne pas rayer la surface de l’unité d’imagerie. • Pour éviter tout dommage éventuel, évitez d’exposer l’unité d’imagerie à la lumière plus de 2 ou 3 minutes. Couvrez-la avec une feuille de papier pour la protéger, si nécessaire. 7. En tenant la rainure à l’avant de l’unité d’imagerie, poussez l’unité dans l’appareil.Fournitures_ 99 8. Insérez le récupérateur de toner usagé dans son emplacement et poussez-le pour vous assurer qu’il est fermement en place. 9. Remettez la cartouche de toner dans l’appareil. 10. Fermez soigneusement le capot avant. Si le capot avant n’est pas complètement fermé, l’appareil ne fonctionne pas. Assurez-vous que toutes les cartouches de toner sont correctement installées. Si une cartouche de toner est installée de manière incorrecte, le capot avant ne se ferme pas. 11. Mettez l’appareil sous tension. Chaque voyant rouge clignote selon un ordre répété. Attendez environ 1 minute 30 que l’appareil soit prêt. Remplacement du récupérateur de toner usagé A l’expiration de la durée de vie du conteneur de toner usagé, la fenêtre du programme Smart Panel s’affiche sur l’écran de votre ordinateur pour vous signaler qu’il est nécessaire de remplacer le conteneur de toner usagé. Dans le cas contraire, l’impression est interrompue. 1. Mettez l’appareil hors tension, puis attendez quelques minutes qu’il ait refroidi. 2. Ouvrez le capot avant. 3. Retirez le récupérateur de toner usagé de l’appareil en le saisissant par sa poignée. Assurez-vous que le récupérateur de toner usagé repose sur une surface plane de sorte que le toner ne se renverse pas. 4. Retirez le couvercle du conteneur (voir illustration ci-dessous) et utilisez-le pour boucher l’ouverture du récupérateur de toner usagé. 2 1 Ne pas incliner ni renverser le conteneur. 5. Sortez un nouveau récupérateur de toner usagé de son emballage.Fournitures_ 100 6. Insérez le nouveau conteneur dans son emplacement et poussez-le pour vous assurer qu’il est fermement en place. 7. Fermez soigneusement le capot avant. Si le capot avant n’est pas complètement fermé, l’appareil ne fonctionne pas. Assurez-vous que toutes les cartouches de toner sont correctement installées. Si une cartouche de toner est installée de manière incorrecte, le capot avant ne se ferme pas. 8. Mettez l’appareil sous tension.Caractéristiques techniques_ 101 12.Caractéristiques techniques Ce chapitre traite des spécifications principales de l’appareil. Il contient les sections suivantes : • Caractéristiques techniques du matériel • Caractéristiques techniques environnementales • Caractéristiques techniques électriques • Spécifications des supports d’impression Les valeurs des spécifications sont listées ci-dessous : les spécifications sont susceptibles d’être modifiées sans préavis : Voir le site www.samsung.com/ printer pour les informations à jour. Caractéristiques techniques du matériel Élément Description Dimension Hauteur 243 mm (9,57 pouces) Profondeur 313 mm (12,32 pouces) Largeur 388 mm (15,28 pouces) Poids Appareil avec consommables 11 Kg Poids de l’emballage Papier 1,50 Kg Plastique 0,45 Kg Sans fil a a.CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W uniquement. Module CLX-NWA20L Caractéristiques techniques environnementales Élément Description Niveau sonore a a.Pression sonore, ISO 7779. Configuration testée : installation de base de l’appareil, papier A4, impression simple face. Mode prêt Niveau sonore d’arrière-plan Mode impression Inférieur à 45 dBA (impression en couleur) Inférieur à 47 dBA (impression en noir et blanc) Temperature Fonctionnement de 10 à 32 °C Stockage (emballé) de 0 à 40 °C Humidité Opération 20 à 80 % HR Stockage (emballé) 10 à 90 % HRCaractéristiques techniques_ 102 Caractéristiques techniques électriques La configuration électrique est basée sur le pays/la région où est vendu l’appareil. Ne convertissez pas les tensions de fonctionnement. Vous risqueriez en effet d’endommager l’appareil et d’annuler la garantie du produit. Élément Description Alimentation a a.Pour plus d’informations sur la puissance, la fréquence (Hertz) et le type de courant appropriés pour l’appareil, reportez-vous à l’étiquette de spécifications sur l’appareil. Modèles 110 volts CA 110 - 127 V Modèles 220 volts CA 220 - 240 V Consommation électrique Mode de fonctionnement moyen Inférieure à 350 W Mode prêt Inférieure à 60 W Mode économie d’énergie • CLP-320(K)/CLP-321/CLP-325(K)/CLP-326: Inférieure à 5 W • CLP-320N(K)/CLP-321N: Inférieure à 6 W • CLP-325W(K)/CLP-326W: Inférieure à 7 W Mode hors tension Inférieure à 0,45 WCaractéristiques techniques_ 103 Spécifications des supports d’impression Type Format Dimensions Grammage a a.Si le grammage du support est supérieur à 120 g/m2 , chargez les feuilles une par une dans le bac. Papier ordinaire Lettre 216 × 279 mm de 70 à 90 g/m2 . 130 feuilles de papier de 80 g/m2 Légal 216 × 356 mm pour le bac d’alimentation. Folio 216 × 330 mm A4 210 x 297 mm Oficio 216 × 343 mm JIS B5 182 × 257 mm ISO B5 176 × 250 mm Exécutif 184 x 267 mm A5 148 × 210 mm A6 105 × 148 mm Enveloppe Monarch 98 × 191 mm 75 à 90 g/m2 pour l’alimentation manuelle dans le bac. 5 feuilles pour l’alimentation manuelle dans le bac. No. 10 105 × 241 mm DL 110 × 220 mm C5 162 × 229 mm C6 114 × 162 mm No. 9 98 x 225 mm 6 3/4 92 x 165 mm Papier épais Reportez-vous à la section Papier ordinaire Reportez-vous à la section Papier ordinaire 90 à 105 g/m2 pour l’alimentation manuelle dans le bac. 5 feuilles pour alimentation manuelle dans le bac. Papier fin Reportez-vous à la section Papier ordinaire Reportez-vous à la section Papier ordinaire 60 à 70 g/m2 pour l’alimentation manuelle dans le bac. Étiquettes c c. Satinage : 100 à 250 (méthode Sheffield). Cela équivaut au niveau numérique de satinage. Letter, A4 Reportez-vous à la section Papier ordinaire 120 à 150 g/m2 pour alimentation manuelle dans le bac. Papier cartonné Carte postale 101,60 x 152,4 mm 105 à 163 g/m2 pour l’alimentation manuelle dans le bac. e f Transparent d d.Supports recommandés : transparent pour imprimante couleur laser de Xerox 3R91331 (A4), Xerox 3R2780 (Letter). e.Supports recommandés : transparents 0,104 à 0,124 mm. f. Dans le cas d’une impression couleur sur transparents, la qualité de l’image sera inférieure à une impression monochrome une fois ceux-ci projetés sur le rétro-projecteur. Lettre, A4, Reportez-vous à la section Papier ordinaire - 1 feuille pour alimentation manuelle dans le bac. Photo papier brillant g g.Supports recommandés : papier brillant (Letter) pour cet appareil HP Brochure Paper (produit : Q6611A). papier brillant (A4) pour cet appareil HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (produit : Q6616A). Letter, A4 Reportez-vous à la section Papier ordinaire 111 à 220 g/m2 pour l’alimentation manuelle dans le bac. Photo mat Lettre, A4, carte postale 4 x 6 Reportez-vous à la section Papier ordinaire 111 à 220 g/m2 pour l’alimentation manuelle dans le bac. Format minimal (personnalisé) 76 x 152,4 mm 60 à 163 g/m2 . Format maximal (personnalisé) 216 × 356 mm Capacité b b.La capacité des bacs peut varier en fonction du grammage et de l’épaisseur des supports, ainsi que de l’environnement d’utilisation. Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 104 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center. Country/ Region Customer Care Center Web Site ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com ARMENIA 0-800-05-555 AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864, € 0.07/min) www.samsung.com AZERBAIJAN 088-55-55-555 BAHRAIN 8000-4726 BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru BELGIUM 02-201-24-18 www.samsung.com/be (Dutch) www.samsung.com/be_fr (French) BRAZIL 0800-124-421 4004-0000 www.samsung.com CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com CHINA 400-810-5858 010-6475 1880 www.samsung.com COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com CZECH REPUBLIC 800-SAMSUNG (800-726786) www.samsung.com Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc, Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8 DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www.samsung.com ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com EGYPT 0800-726786 EIRE 0818 717100 www.samsung.com EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500 FINLAND 030-6227 515 www.samsung.com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www.samsung.com GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG (726-7864 € 0,14/min) www.samsung.com GEORGIA 8-800-555-555 GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com HONDURAS 800-7919267 www.samsung.com HONG KONG (852) 3698-4698 www.samsung.com/hk www.samsung.com/hk_en/ HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com INDIA 3030 8282 1800 110011 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 www.samsung.com INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 021-5699-7777 www.samsung.com ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com JORDAN 800-22273 KSA 9200-21230 www.samsung.com BAHRAIN 8000-4726 LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www.samsung.com MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG (0900-7267864) (€ 0,10/ min) www.samsung.com NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726 786) www.samsung.com NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com NORWAY 815-56 480 www.samsung.com PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com Country/ Region Customer Care Center Web SiteContact SAMSUNG worldwide_ 105 PHILIPPINES 1800-10-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 1-800-3-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 1-800-8-SAMSUNG (726-7864) 02-5805777 www.samsung.com POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG (172678) 022-607-93-33 www.samsung.com PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com QATAR 800-2255 REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com SPAIN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172 678) www.samsung.com SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864, CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com SYRIA 1825-22-73 TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 TAIWAN 0800-329-999 www.samsung.com THAILAND 1800-29-3232 02-689-3232 www.samsung.com TRINIDAD & TOBAGO 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com U.K 0845 SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com UKRAINE 8-800-502-000 www.samsung.ua www.samsung.com/ua_ru Country/ Region Customer Care Center Web Site UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com Country/ Region Customer Care Center Web SiteGlossaire_ 106 Glossaire Le glossaire suivant vous permet de vous familiariser avec le produit grâce à une définition des termes courants de l’impression ainsi que des termes mentionnés dans le présent guide de l’utilisateur. 802.11 802.11 est un ensemble de normes pour les communications par réseau local sans fil (WLAN), développé par le comité de normes IEEE LAN/ MAN (IEEE 802). 802.11b/g/n 802.11b/g/n peut partager le même matériel et utiliser la bande 2,4 GHz. 802.11b prend en charge une bande passante jusqu’à 11 Mbit/s, 802.11n prend en charge une bande passante jusqu’à 150 Mbits/s. Les périphériques 802.11b/g/n peuvent parfois souffrir d’interférences provenant de fours à micro-ondes, des téléphones sans-fil et des périphériques Bluetooth. Point d’accès Un point d’accès ou point d’accès sans fil (AP ou WAP) est un périphérique qui relie les périphériques de communication sans fil ensemble sur des réseaux locaux sans fil (WLAN), et fait office d’émetteur et récepteur central des signaux radio du WLAN. ADF Un chargeur automatique de documents (ADF) est un module de numérisation pouvant charger automatiquement un document original afin de numériser une pile de documents en une seule tâche. AppleTalk Suite de protocoles réseau propriétaires développée par Apple, Inc. Cette suite de protocoles, intégrée aux premiers produits Macintosh (1984), est désormais tombée en désuétude au profit de la pile de protocoles réseau TCP/IP. Profondeur de bit Terme d’infographie désignant le nombre de bits représentant la couleur d’un pixel dans une image matricielle. Une profondeur de bit (ou de couleur) plus élevée permet d’obtenir une gamme de couleurs plus large. Plus le nombre de bits est élevé, plus le nombre de couleurs possibles est grand. Une couleur codée sur 1 bit est communément qualifiée de monochrome ou noir et blanc. BMP Format d’images matricielles utilisé par le sous-système graphique de Microsoft Windows (GDI) et, communément, comme format de fichiers image sur cette plate-forme. BOOTP Protocole d’amorçage. Protocole réseau permettant d’attribuer automatiquement une adresse IP à un client du réseau. Ceci s’effectue généralement dans le processus bootstrap d’ordinateurs ou de systèmes d’exploitation les exécutant. Les serveurs BOOTP attribuent l’adresse IP à chaque client à partir d’un ensemble d’adresses. Le protocole BOOTP permet aux postes de travail qui ne disposent pas de disque dur d’obtenir une adresse IP avant d’amorcer un système d’exploitation. CCD Le capteur à transfert de charge (CCD) est un élément matériel permettant de numériser un document. Un dispositif de verrouillage des capteurs CCD est également utilisé pour maintenir le module CCD afin d’empêcher tout dommage pendant le transport. Assemblage Méthode d’impression de documents comportant plusieurs exemplaires en différents jeux de tirages. Lorsque le tri est sélectionné, le périphérique imprime un jeu dans son intégralité avant d’imprimer d’autres exemplaires. Panneau de commande Le panneau de commande est une zone plane, généralement verticale, sur laquelle s’affichent les outils de commande et de surveillance. Il se trouve généralement à l’avant de l’appareil. Couverture Terme d’impression correspondant à une mesure de l’utilisation du toner. Par exemple, une couverture de 5 % signifie qu’une feuille de papier au format A4 comporte environ 5 % d’image ou de texte. Si le papier ou l’original comporte des images complexes ou une grande quantité de texte, la couverture sera supérieure à 5 % et l’utilisation du toner sera équivalente à cette couverture. CSV Valeurs séparées par des virgules (CSV). Format de fichier utilisé pour échanger des données entre des applications différentes. Ce format de fichier, utilisable sous Microsoft Excel, est devenu une norme de facto, même sous les environnements autres que Microsoft. DADF Un chargeur automatique de documents recto-verso (DADF) est un module de numérisation pouvant charger automatiquement un document original puis le retourner, afin de numériser des documents recto-verso. Par défaut Valeur ou paramètre appliqué en sortie d’usine ou lorsque l’appareil a été réinitialisé. DHCP Un protocole de configuration dynamique de l’hôte (DHCP) est un protocole réseau client-serveur. Un serveur DHCP fournit des paramètres de configuration spécifiques à l’hôte client DHCP Glossaire_ 107 demandant, généralement, des informations requises par l’hôte client pour participer à un réseau IP. Le protocole DHCP permet également l’attribution d’adresses IP aux hôtes client. DIMM Le module mémoire double en ligne (DIMM) est une carte électronique qui contient de la mémoire. Une carte DIMM stocke toutes les données de l’appareil, par exemple les données d’impression ou les données de télécopie reçues. DLNA Le Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) est une norme qui permet aux appareils d’un réseau domestique de partager des informations entre eux à travers tout le réseau. DMPr L’imprimante multimédia numérique (DMPr) est un périphérique qui permet d’imprimer sur un réseau domestique DLNA. L’imprimante multimédia numérique (DMPr) imprime une page en combinant les images avec un modèle XHTML (Extensible HyperText Markup Language). DNS Le serveur de nom de domaine (DNS) est un système qui stocke des informations associées au nom de domaine dans une base de données répartie sur des réseaux, comme Internet. Imprimante matricielle Type d’imprimante dont la tête d’impression balaie la page de part et d’autre, puis transfère l’encre en frappant un ruban encreur ; ce principe de fonctionnement est analogue à celui d’une machine à écrire. DPI Unité de mesure de la résolution de numérisation et d’impression. De manière générale, une forte valeur de PPP se traduit par une plus grande résolution, des détails d’image plus fins et un volume de fichier plus élevé. DRPD Détection sélective de tonalité d’appel. Le service téléphonique de sonnerie distincte permet à un utilisateur de se servir d’une seule ligne téléphonique pour répondre à différents numéros de téléphone. Recto/Verso Fonctionnalité permettant un retournement automatique d’une feuille de papier afin d’imprimer (ou de numériser) sur les deux faces du papier. Une imprimante équipée d’un module Recto/Verso peut imprimer sur les deux côtés du papier en un seul cycle d’impression. Capacité de traitement Quantité de pages n’affectant pas les performances de l’imprimante sur un mois. Généralement, l’imprimante a une durée de vie limitée par exemple au nombre de pages par an. Cette durée de vie correspond à la capacité moyenne d’impression, qui couvre généralement la période de garantie. Par exemple, si la capacité de traitement est 48 000 pages par mois en supposant 20 jours de travail, une imprimante est limitée à 2 400 pages par jour. ECM Le mode de correction d’erreur (ECM) est un mode de transmission facultatif intégré aux télécopieurs de classe 1 ou aux modems de télécopie. Ce mode détecte et corrige automatiquement toute erreur de transmission de télécopie provoquée par du bruit sur la ligne téléphonique. Emulation Procédé permettant de reproduire le fonctionnement d’un appareil sur un autre. Un émulateur réplique les fonctions d’un système sur un système différent de telle façon que le second fonctionne exactement comme le premier. L’émulation consiste à reproduire rigoureusement le comportement externe, ce qui la différencie de la simulation, qui renvoie à la simulation du modèle abstrait d’un système en prenant en considération le fonctionnement interne. Ethernet Technologie de réseau informatique reposant sur des trames, pour des réseaux locaux (LAN). Il définit le câblage et la transmission de signaux de la couche physique, et les formats de trame et les protocoles pour la couche de contrôle d’accès au support (MAC)/couche liaison de données du modèle OSI. Ethernet est principalement standardisé en IEEE 802.3. C’est devenu la technologie de réseau local la plus répandue depuis les années 1990 jusqu’aujourd’hui. EtherTalk Suite de protocoles réseau développée par Apple Computer. Cette suite de protocoles, intégrée aux premiers produits Macintosh (1984), est désormais tombée en désuétude au profit de la pile de protocoles réseau TCP/IP. FDI L’interface pour périphérique étranger (FDI) est une carte installée à l’intérieur de l’appareil afin de permettre l’installation d’un périphérique tiers comme un monnayeur ou un lecteur de cartes. Vous pourrez ainsi activer un service d’impression payant sur votre appareil. FTP Un protocole de transfert de fichiers (FTP) est un protocole très répandu d’échange de fichiers sur tout réseau prenant en charge les protocoles TCP/IP (Internet ou Intranet). Unité de chauffe Pièce de l’imprimante laser qui fixe le toner sur le support d’impression. Cette unité est constituée d’un rouleau thermique et d’un rouleau presseur. Une fois le toner transféré sur le papier, l’unité de chauffe applique la chaleur et la pression requises pour que le toner adhère de manière permanente sur le papier ; c’est la raison pour laquelle le papier est chaud en sortant de l’imprimante laser. Passerelle Connexion entre des réseaux informatiques ou entre un réseau informatique et une ligne téléphonique. Celle-ci est très répandue, Glossaire_ 108 puisqu’il s’agit d’un ordinateur ou d’un réseau qui autorise l’accès à un autre ordinateur ou réseau. Niveaux de gris Nuances de gris représentant les parties claires et foncées d’une image lorsque les images couleur sont converties en niveau de gris ; les couleurs sont représentées par différents niveaux de gris. Demi-teinte Type d’image simulant des niveaux de gris en variant le nombre de points. Les zones très riches en couleur se composent d’un grand nombre de points, tandis que les zones plus claires se composent d’un moins grand nombre de points. HDD Périphérique de stockage non volatil qui enregistre des données codées numériquement sur des plateaux en rotation recouverts d’une surface magnétique. IEEE L’IEEE (IEEE) est une organisation professionnelle internationale à but non lucratif dédiée à l’avancée des technologies liées à l’électricité. IEEE 1284 Norme relative au port parallèle 1284, mise au point par l’IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers). Le terme « 1284-B » renvoie à un type de fiche spécifique pour câbles parallèles se connectant au périphérique (par exemple, une imprimante). Intranet Réseau privé qui utilise des protocoles Internet, une connectivité réseau et éventuellement le système public de télécommunications pour partager de manière sécurisée une partie des informations ou opérations d’une organisation avec ses employés. Parfois, le terme désigne seulement le service le plus visible, le site Web interne. Adresse IP Une adresse de protocole Internet (adresse IP) est un nombre unique permettant d’identifier les périphériques d’un réseau IP afin qu’ils échangent des données. IPM Unité de mesure de la vitesse d’une imprimante. Le nombre d’images par minute indique le nombre de feuilles recto que l’imprimante peut terminer en une minute. IPP Le protocole d’impression Internet (IPP) est un protocole normalisé permettant l’impression ainsi que la gestion notamment des tâches d’impression, des formats de supports ou encore de la résolution. Le protocole IPP peut être utilisé en local ou via Internet pour des centaines d’imprimantes et prend en charge le contrôle d’accès et l’authentification, ce qui en fait une technologie d’impression plus fiable et plus sécurisée que ses prédécesseurs. IPX/SPX IPX/SPX est l’acronyme de Internet protocole d’échange de paquets entre réseaux/protocole d’échange de paquets séquentiels. Ce sont des protocoles réseaux utilisés par les systèmes d’exploitation Novell NetWare. Les protocoles IPX et SPX offrent des services de connexion similaires à TCP/IP. Le protocole IPX est comparable au protocole IP; et SPX, au protocole TCP. IPX/SPX ont été conçus initialement pour les réseaux locaux (LAN). À ce titre, ils sont des protocoles très performants pour cet usage (généralement, les performances dépassent celles des protocoles TCP/IP sur un réseau local). ISO L’organisme international de normalisation (ISO) est composé de représentants d’institutions de normalisation nationales. Il définit des normes commerciales et industrielles à l’échelle mondiale. ITU-T L’union internationale des télécommunications est un organisme international de normalisation et de régulation des télécommunications et des transmissions hertziennes internationales. Ses missions principales incluent la normalisation et l’attribution de bandes de fréquences hertziennes, et la gestion de l’interconnexion entre les différents pays afin de permettre les appels internationaux. Le -t de ITU-T renvoie à télécommunication. Mire ITU-T N° 1 Mire de test normalisée, publiée par l’ITU-T, pour les transmissions de télécopies. JBIG Norme de compression d’image sans pertes de précision ou de qualité, développée pour la compression des images binaires, notamment des télécopies, mais aussi pour d’autres images. JPEG Le groupe mixte d’experts en photographie (JPEG) est un format de compression avec pertes utilisée pour les photographies. Ce format est utilisé pour le stockage et la transmission de photographies sur Internet. LDAP Le protocole d’accès à l’annuaire léger (LDAP) est un protocole réseau d’interrogation et de modification des services d’annuaire sur TCP/IP. Voyant Semi-conducteur qui indique l’état de l’appareil. Adresse MAC Le contrôle d’accès au support (MAC) est un identifiant unique associé à une carte réseau. Une adresse MAC est un identifiant unique codé sur 48 bits, généralement représenté par 12 caractères hexadécimaux groupés par paires (par exemple, 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). Cette adresse est généralement programmée dans la mémoire morte de la carte réseau par le constructeur et facilite la détection des machines locales par les routeurs sur des réseaux de grandes dimensions.Glossaire_ 109 MFP Le périphérique multifonction (MFP) est un équipement bureautique doté des fonctionnalités suivantes : impression, télécopie, scanner, etc. MH MH (Modified Huffman) est une méthode de compression pour diminuer la quantité de données à transmettre entre les télécopieurs pour transférer l’image recommandée par l’ITU-T T.4. MH est un schéma de codage de longueur d’exécution basé sur un livre de codes, optimisé pour compresser efficacement l’espace blanc. Dans la mesure où la plupart des télécopies sont constituées d’espaces blancs, ce procédé réduit les temps de transmission de la plupart des télécopies. MMR Le Modified Modified READ est un algorithme de compression recommandé par l’ITU-T T.6. Modem Appareil permettant de moduler le signal d’une porteuse afin d’encoder des données numériques et de démoduler un tel signal afin de décoder des données transmises. MR Le MR (Modified Read) est un algorithme de compression recommandé par l’ITU-T T.4. MR code la première ligne numérisée à l’aide de MH. La ligne suivante est comparée à la première ; ensuite, les différences sont établies puis encodées et transmises. NetWare Système d’exploitation réseau développé par Novell, Inc. À l’origine, il utilisait le multitâche coopératif pour exécuter plusieurs services sur un micro-ordinateur et les protocoles réseau reposaient sur la pile XNS de Xerox. Aujourd’hui, NetWare prend en charge aussi bien TCP/IP que IPX/SPX. OPC Dispositif créant une image virtuelle pour l’impression à l’aide d’un faisceau laser émis par l’imprimante laser; il est généralement de couleur verte ou rouille et de forme cylindrique. Avec le temps, une unité d’imagerie comprenant un tambour use la surface de ce dernier lorsqu’elle est utilisée dans l’imprimante et elle doit être remplacée de manière appropriée puisqu’elle est usée suite au contact avec la brosse de développement de la cartouche, le dispositif de nettoyage et le papier. Originaux Premier exemplaire d’un document comme une photographie ou du texte, qui est copié, reproduit ou traduit afin de produire d’autres exemplaires, mais qui n’est pas issu d’un autre document. OSI L’interconnexion de systèmes ouverts (OSI) est un modèle de transmission des données développé par l’Organisation internationale de normalisation (ISO). Le modèle OSI définit une méthode standard et modulaire de conception des réseaux qui divise l’ensemble des fonctions complexes nécessaires en des couches fonctionnelles, autonomes et administrables. Les couches sont, de haut en bas, les suivantes : application, présentation, session, transport, réseau, liaison de données et physique. Autocommutateur Équipement de commutation téléphonique automatique destiné aux entreprises privées. PCL Le langage de commande d’imprimante (PCL) est un langage de description de page (LDP), devenu une norme de l’industrie, développé par HP comme protocole d’impression. Développé à l’origine pour les imprimantes à jet d’encre, PCL a été appliqué aux imprimantes thermiques, matricielles et aux imprimantes laser. PDF Le format PDF (PDF) est un format de fichier propriétaire développé par Adobe Systems pour représenter les documents bidimensionnels dans un format indépendant du périphérique ou de la résolution. PostScript PostScript (PS) est un langage de description de page et un langage de programmation utilisés principalement dans les domaines de la publication électronique et assistée par ordinateur. Il est exécuté dans un interpréteur pour générer une image. Pilote d’impression Programme utilisé pour transmettre des commandes et des données de l’ordinateur vers l’imprimante. Support d’impression Support tel qu’une feuille, une enveloppe, une étiquette et un transparent pouvant être utilisé dans une imprimante, un scanner, un télécopieur ou un copieur. PPM Unité de mesure permettant de déterminer la cadence d’une imprimante, c’est-à-dire le nombre de pages pouvant être produites par l’imprimante en une minute. Fichier PRN Interface du pilote d’un périphérique permettant au logiciel d’interagir avec le pilote du périphérique en utilisant des appels de système d’entrée/sortie standard, simplifiant ainsi de nombreuses tâches. Protocole Convention ou norme qui contrôle ou permet la connexion, la communication, et le transfert de données entre deux points terminaux de calcul. PS Voir PostScript.Glossaire_ 110 PSTN Réseau des réseaux téléphoniques à commutation de circuits internationaux généralement acheminé, sur les sites industriels, via le standard téléphonique. RADIUS RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service) est un protocole d’authentification et de comptabilité pour un utilisateur distant. RADIUS permet une gestion centralisée des données d’authentification comme les noms d’utilisateur et les mots de passe à l’aide d’un concept AAA (authentification, autorisation, et comptabilité) pour gérer l’accès au réseau. Résolution Précision d’une image, mesurée en points par pouce. Plus le nombre de ppp est élevé, plus la résolution est élevée. SMB Le bloc de message serveur (SMB) est un protocole réseau dédié principalement au partage de fichiers, aux imprimantes, aux ports série et à divers échanges entre les nœuds d’un réseau. Ce protocole permet également un système de communication interprocessus authentifié. SMTP Le protocole simple de transfert de courrier (SMTP) est une norme de transmission de messages sur Internet. Le protocole SMTP, reposant sur du texte, est relativement simple. Un ou plusieurs destinataires du message sont définis, puis le texte du message est transféré. Il s’agit d’un protocole client-serveur permettant à un client de transmettre des messages électroniques au serveur. SSID L’identifiant d’ensemble de services (SSID) est un nom d’un réseau local sans fil (WLAN). Tous les périphériques sans fil d’un WLAN utilisent le même SSID pour communiquer les uns avec les autres. Les SSID respectent la casse et ont une longueur maximale de 32 caractères. Masque de sous-réseau? Code utilisé conjointement à l’adresse réseau permettant de déterminer la partie de l’adresse correspondant à l’adresse réseau et la partie de l’adresse correspondant à l’adresse de l’hôte. TCP/IP Le protocole de contrôle de transmission (TCP) et le protocole Internet (IP) sont un ensemble de protocoles de communication implémentant la pile de protocoles sur laquelle fonctionnent Internet et la plupart des réseaux commerciaux. TCR Le rapport de confirmation de transmission (TCR) est un journal fournissant des informations sur chaque transmission, telles que l’état de la tâche, le résultat de la transmission et le nombre de pages envoyées. L’impression de ce journal peut être paramétrée pour être effectuée après chaque tâche ou bien après chaque échec de transmission. TIFF Format d’image matricielle à résolution variable. De manière générale, le format TIFF correspond aux données image provenant d’un scanner. Les images TIFF utilisent des balises et des mots-clés définissant les caractéristiques de l’image incluse au fichier. Ce format flexible et multi-plateforme peut être utilisé pour des images créées sous différentes applications de traitement d’images. Cartouche de toner Sorte de bouteille ou de récipient se trouvant dans un appareil comme une imprimante et contenant du toner. Le toner est une poudre utilisée dans les imprimantes laser et les photocopieurs qui forme le texte et les images sur le papier imprimé. Le toner est fondu en utilisant la combinaison chaleur/pression de l’unité de chauffe et se fixe dans les fibres du papier. TWAIN Norme de l’industrie relative aux scanners et aux logiciels. En utilisant un scanner compatible TWAIN avec un programme compatible TWAIN, une tâche de numérisation peut être lancée depuis ce programme. C’est une capture d’image API pour systèmes d’exploitation Microsoft Windows et Apple Macintosh. Chemin UNC La convention de nommage uniforme (UNC) est une méthode standard permettant d’accéder à des ressources partagées sous Windows NT ainsi que sous d’autres produits Microsoft. Le format d’un chemin UNC est : \\\\ URL Le localisateur uniforme de ressource (URL) est l’adresse globale des documents et des ressources sur Internet. La première partie de l’adresse indique le protocole utilisé, la seconde partie spécifie l’adresse IP ou le nom de domaine correspondant à l’emplacement de la ressource. USB Le bus série universel (USB) est une norme développée par USB Implementers Forum, Inc. pour connecter les ordinateurs et les périphériques. Contrairement au port parallèle, le port USB est conçu pour permettre de connecter un seul ordinateur à plusieurs périphériques. Filigrane Image reconnaissable ou motif plus clair sur le papier, visible par transparence. Les filigranes ont été initialement introduits à Bologne, en Italie, en 1282. Ils ont été utilisés par les fabricants de papier afin d’identifier leurs produits, sur les timbres, les billets de banque et autres documents officiels afin d’empêcher la contrefaçon. WEP WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) est un protocole de sécurité spécifié dans l’IEEE 802.11 pour fournir le même niveau de sécurité que celui d’un réseau local câblé. WEP procure la sécurité en chiffrant les données hertziennes afin de les protéger lorsqu’elles sont transmises d’un point final à un autre.Glossaire_ 111 WIA Architecture graphique lancée initialement sous Windows Me et Windows XP. Une tâche de numérisation peut être lancée à partir de ces systèmes d’exploitation à l’aide d’un scanner compatible WIA. WPA L’accès protégé Wi-Fi (WPA) est une classe de systèmes pour sécuriser les réseaux d’ordinateurs sans fil (Wi-Fi), qui a été créée pour améliorer les fonctionnalités de sécurité de WEP. WPA-PSK L’accès protégé Wi-Fi avec clé pré-partagée (WPA Pre-Shared Key) est un mode spécial de WPA pour les petites entreprises ou les utilisateurs personnels. Une clé partagée, ou un mot de passe, est configuré dans le point d’accès sans fil (WAP) et n’importe quels portables ou périphériques de bureau sans fil. WPA-PSK génère une clé unique pour chaque session entre un client sans fil et le WAP associé pour une sécurité plus évoluée. WPS Le paramétrage protégé Wi-Fi (WPS) est un standard permettant de créer un réseau local sans fil. Si votre point d’accès sans fil prend en charge le WPS, vous pouvez configurer la connexion du réseau sans fil facilement sans avoir à utiliser un ordinateur. XPS La spécification papier XML (XPS) est une spécification de langage de description de page (PDL) et un nouveau format de document, développé par Microsoft, qui présente les avantages du document portable et du document électronique. Il s’agit d’un format de document vectoriel indépendant du périphérique, basé sur XML et sur un nouveau chemin d’impression.Index_ 112 Index A affiche 67 B bac réglage de la largeur et de la longueur 58 bac manuel utilisation de support spécial 62 bourrage astuces pour éviter les bourrages papier 83 brochures 68 C câble USB installation du pilote 32 caractéristiques techniques général 101 support dimpression 103 cartouche de toner autonomie estimée 82 enregistrement 82 instructions de manipulation 82 nonSamsung et rechargées 82 remplacement de la cartouche de toner 97 chargement support spécial 62 convention 21 curled 93 D définition de la résolution dimpression Linux 74 distribution de toner 83 E économie dénergie utilisation du mode déconomie dénergie 56 F filigrane création 69 impression 69 modification 69 supprimer 69 fonctions 23 caractéristiques de lappareil 101 fonctionnalité déconomie dénergie 56 logiciel fourni 30 fournitures autonomie estimée de la cartouche de toner 82 commande 96 consommables disponibles 96 remplacement de la cartouche de toner 97 G glossaire 106 I impression impression dans un fichier 71 impression dun document Windows 65 impression dun document sur un format de papier donné 68 Linux 73 Macintosh 72 modification des réglages dimpression par défaut 71 plusieurs pages sur une seule feuille Macintosh 73 Windows 67 poster 67 impression brochure 68 impression de filigranes dans les fenêtres 69 impression de surimpression création 69 impression 70 supprimer 70 impression dun document Linux 73 Macintosh 72 impression dun journal de lappareil 80 Impression dune page de démonstration 30 impression N pages sur 1 Macintosh 73 Windows 67 impression recto verso manuelle pilote dimpression 68 Informations légales 12 L Linux configurateur de pilote unifié 78 configuration requise 32 impression 73 installation du pilote pour une connexion réseau 42 logiciels fournis 31 problèmes Linux courants 94 propriétés de limprimante 74 M Macintosh configuration requise 31 impression 72 installation du pilote pour une connexion réseau 41 partage local dun appareil 36 problèmes Macintosh courants 95 utilisation de SetIP 38, 52 mise en marche de lappareil 29 mise en place dun appareil espacement 30 réglage de laltitude 55 modification des proportions de votre document 68 N nettoyage extérieur 80 intérieur 80 nettoyage dun appareil 80 P panneau de commande 27, 28Index_ 113 bouton Annuler 29 papier modification du format 58 paramètre de police 56 pilote dimpression fonctions 65 problème résolution qualité dimpression 90 problèmes problèmes dalimentation papier 88 problèmes de qualité dimpression résolution 90 programme SetIP 38, 51, 52 propriétés de limprimante Linux 74 R réglage format du bac 55 réglages favoris pour limpression 66 réseau Configuration IPv4 38 environnement dinstallation 37 installation du pilote Linux 42 Macintosh 41 Windows 40 présentation des programmes réseau 37 programme SetIP 38, 51, 52 utilisation dun réseau câblé 37 сonfiguration IPv6 39 réseau sans fil câble réseau 51 câble USB 46 wps PIN 45 résolution dimpression définition Macintosh 72 S sans fil Bouton WPS 45 sécurité informations 7 symboles 7 service contact numbers 104 Smart Panel informations générales 76 paramètre de police 56 support dimpression enveloppe 62 étiquettes 63 papier brillant 64 papier cartonné 63 support de sortie papier 103 support spécial 62 transparent 62 SyncThru Web Service informations générales 75 T touches alimentation 29 annulation 29 Impr Écran 29 impression démo 29 wps 29 type de papier définition 64 U utilisation de la surimpression dans les fenêtres 69 utilisation de laide 67 V Voyant étattoner 28 sans fil 28 vue avant 25 W Windows exigences système 31 impression 65 installation du pilote pour une connexion réseau 40 partage local dun appareil 35 problèmes Windows courants 93 utilisation de SetIP 38, 51 GT-I9000 user manual2 Using this manual Using this manual Thank you for purchasing this Samsung mobile phone. This device will provide you with high quality mobile communication and entertainment based on Samsung’s exceptional technology and high standards. This user manual has been specially designed to guide you through the functions and features of your device. Read me first • Please read all safety precautions and this manual carefully before using your device to ensure safe and proper use. • The descriptions in this manual are based on the default settings of your device. • Images and screenshots used in this user manual may differ in appearance from the actual product. • Content in this user manual may differ from the product, or from software provided by service providers or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. Refer to www.samsung.com for the latest version of the user manual. • Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service provider. • Formatting and delivery of this user manual is based on Google Android operating systems and may vary depending on the user’s operating system. • Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications. Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by third-party applications. • Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by user editing of registry settings. • You may upgrade your mobile device’s software by accessing www.samsung.com.Using this manual 3 Note—notes, usage tips, or additional information ► Refer to—pages with related information; for example: ► p.12 (represents “see page 12”) → Followed by—the order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: In Idle mode, open the application list and select Messaging → New message (represents Messaging, followed by New message) [ ] Square brackets—device keys; for example: [ ] (represents the Power/Lock key) • Sound sources, wallpapers, and images provided in this device are licenced for limited use between Samsung and their respective owners. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Samsung is not liable for such copyright infringement by the user. • Please keep this manual for future reference. Instructional icons Before you start, familiarise yourself with the icons you will see in this manual: Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or others Caution—situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment4 Using this manual Trademarks • SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. • The Android logo, Google Search™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Android Market™, and Google Talk™ are trademarks of Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. • Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/ or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. • Windows Media Player® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. • and are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under licence from SRS Labs, Inc. Copyright Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics This user manual is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this user manual may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics.Using this manual 5 ABOUT DIVX VIDEO DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration. • Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. • DivX®, DivX Certified®, and associated logos are registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under licence. • All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.6 Contents Contents Assembling ........................................... 10 Unpack ................................................................ 10 Install the SIM or USIM card and battery .... 10 Charge the battery ........................................... 12 Insert a memory card (optional) ................... 15 Attach a hand strap (optional) ...................... 17 Getting started ..................................... 18 Turn your device on and off ........................... 18 Get to know your device ................................. 18 Use the touch screen ........................................ 21 Lock or unlock the touch screen and keys .. 23 Get to know the idle screen ........................... 23 Access applications .......................................... 25 Customise your device .................................... 27 Enter text ............................................................ 31 Download applications from Android Market ................................................................. 35 Download files from the web ........................ 36 Synchronise data .............................................. 36Contents 7 Personal information .......................... 72 Contacts .............................................................. 72 Calendar .............................................................. 76 Memo ................................................................... 77 Voice Recorder ................................................... 78 Web ........................................................ 79 Internet ............................................................... 79 Maps .................................................................... 82 Latitude ............................................................... 84 Places ................................................................... 85 Navigation .......................................................... 85 Google Search ................................................... 86 Communication ................................... 38 Calling .................................................................. 38 Messaging .......................................................... 44 Google Mail ........................................................ 46 Email .................................................................... 48 Talk ....................................................................... 50 Social Hub ........................................................... 51 Entertainment ...................................... 52 Camera ................................................................ 52 Videos .................................................................. 63 Gallery ................................................................. 64 Music .................................................................... 65 FM Radio ............................................................. 698 Contents PC connections ............................................... 100 VPN connections ............................................ 102 Tools ..................................................... 105 Clock ................................................................. 105 Calculator ......................................................... 107 Aldiko eBook ................................................... 107 Downloads ...................................................... 109 Mini Diary ........................................................ 110 My Files ............................................................. 110 Task manager ................................................. 111 ThinkFree Office ............................................. 112 Voice Dialer ..................................................... 113 YouTube .............................................................. 86 Synchronise ........................................................ 87 Samsung Apps .................................................. 88 Daily Briefing ..................................................... 89 Press Reader ....................................................... 90 Market ................................................................. 91 Connectivity ......................................... 92 Bluetooth ............................................................ 92 Wi-Fi ..................................................................... 94 AllShare ............................................................... 96 Mobile network sharing .................................. 98 TV connections (TV out mode) ...................... 99Contents 9 SD card and phone storage ......................... 123 Locale and text ............................................... 123 Voice input and output ................................ 125 Accessibility ..................................................... 127 Date and time ................................................. 127 About phone ................................................... 127 Troubleshooting ................................ 128 Safety precautions ............................. 134 Index .................................................... 143 Voice Search .................................................... 114 Write and go .................................................... 114 Settings ................................................ 115 Access the Settings menu ............................ 115 Wireless and network ................................... 115 Call settings ..................................................... 117 Sound ............................................................... 118 Display .............................................................. 119 Location and security ................................... 120 Applications .................................................... 122 Accounts and sync ......................................... 123 Privacy .............................................................. 12310 Assembling Assembling Unpack Check your product box for the following items: • Mobile device • Battery • Travel adapter (charger) • Quick start guide Use only Samsung-approved software. Pirated or illegal software may cause damage or malfunctions that are not covered by your manufacturer's warranty. • The items supplied with your device may vary depending on the software and accessories available in your region or offered by your service provider. • You can obtain additional accessories from your local Samsung dealer. • The supplied accessories perform best for your device. • Accessories other than the supplied ones may not be compatible with your device. Install the SIM or USIM card and battery When you subscribe to a cellular service, you will receive a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card, with subscription details, such as your personal identification number (PIN) and optional services. To use UMTS or HSDPA services, you can purchase a Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) card.Assembling 11 3 Insert the SIM or USIM card. • Place the SIM or USIM card into the device with the gold-coloured contacts facing down. • If you do not insert a SIM or USIM card, you can only use your device’s non-network services and some menus. • Do not insert a memory card into the SIM card slot. To install the SIM or USIM card and battery, 1 If the device is on, press and hold [ ] and select Power off to turn it off. 2 Remove the back cover. Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover.12 Assembling Charge the battery Before using the device for the first time, you must charge the battery. You can charge the device with the provided travel adapter or by connecting the device to a PC with a PC data cable. Use only Samsung-approved chargers and cables. Unauthorised chargers or cables can cause batteries to explode or damage your device. When your battery is low, the device will emit a warning tone and display a low battery message. The battery icon will also be empty and turn red. If the battery level becomes too low, the device will automatically power off. Recharge your battery to continue using your device. 4 Insert the battery. 5 Replace the back cover.Assembling 13 3 Plug the large end of the travel adapter into a power outlet. • You can use the device while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. • While the device is charging, the touch screen may not function due to an unstable power supply. If this happens, unplug the travel adapter from the device. • While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. • If your device is not charging properly, bring your device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. › Charge with the travel adapter 1 Open the cover to the multifunction jack on the top of the device. 2 Plug the small end of the travel adapter into the multifunction jack. Improperly connecting the travel adapter can cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.14 Assembling › Charge with the PC data cable Before charging, ensure that your PC is turned on. 1 Open the cover to the multifunction jack on the top of the device. 2 Plug one end (micro-USB) of the PC data cable into the multifunction jack. 3 Plug the other end of the PC data cable into a USB port on a PC. Depending on the type of PC data cable you are using, it may take some time before charging begins. 4 When the battery is fully charged (the battery icon is no longer moving), unplug the PC data cable from the device and then from the PC. 4 When the battery is fully charged (the battery icon is no longer moving), unplug the travel adapter from the device and then from the power outlet. Do not remove the battery before removing the travel adapter. Doing this may cause damage to the device. To save energy, unplug the travel adapter when not in use. The travel adapter does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the travel adapter from the outlet to interrupt the power supply. The travel adapter should remain close to the socket when in use.Assembling 15 • Your device supports only the FAT file structure for memory cards. If you insert a card formatted with a different file structure, your device will ask you to reformat the memory card. • Frequent writing and erasing of data will shorten the lifespan of memory cards. • When you insert a memory card in your device, the file directory of the memory card will appear in the /mnt/sdcard/external_sd folder under the internal memory (moviNAND™). Insert a memory card (optional) To store additional multimedia files, you must insert a memory card. Your device accepts microSD™ or microSDHC™ memory cards with maximum capacities of 32 GB (depending on memory card manufacturer and type). Samsung uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with your device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage your device or the memory card and can corrupt data stored on the card.16 Assembling › Remove the memory card Before removing a memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. 1 In Idle mode, select Applications→ Settings→ SD card and phone storage→ Unmount SD card. 2 Remove the back cover. 3 Push the memory card gently until it disengages from the device. 4 Pull the memory card out of the memory card slot. 5 Remove the memory card. 6 Replace the back cover. Do not remove a memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information, as this could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card or device. 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing down. 3 Push the memory card in the memory card slot until it locks in place. 4 Replace the back cover.Assembling 17 Attach a hand strap (optional) 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Slide a hand strap through the slot and hook it over the small projection. 3 Replace the back cover. › Format the memory card Formatting your memory card on a PC may cause incompatibilities with your device. Format the memory card only on the device. In Idle mode, select Applications→ Settings→ SD card and phone storage→ Unmount SD card→ Format SD card → Format SD card → Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored on your device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions.18 Getting started Getting started Turn your device on and off To turn on your device, 1 Press and hold [ ]. 2 If you turn on your device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device. To turn off your device, press and hold [ ] and then select Power off. • Follow all posted warnings and directions from official personnel when in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. • To use your device's non-network services only, switch to Flight mode. Press and hold [ ] and select Flight mode. Get to know your device › Device layout Earpiece Front camera lens Touch screen Back key Proximity sensor Home key Volume key Light sensor Menu key MouthpieceGetting started 19 › Keys Key Function Power/ Lock Turn on the device (press and hold); Access the quick menus (press and hold); Lock the touch screen. Menu Open a list of options available on the current screen. Home Return to the idle screen; Open the list of recent applications (press and hold). Back Return to the previous screen. Volume Adjust the device’s volume. Multifunction jack Back cover Headset jack Power/Lock key Internal antenna Speaker Rear camera lens20 Getting started Icon Definition GPS activated Voice call in progress Call on hold Speakerphone activated Missed call Synchronised with the web Uploading data Downloading data Call diverting activated Connected to PC USB tethering activated › Indicator icons Icons shown on the display may vary depending on your region or service provider. Icon Definition No signal Signal strength GPRS network connected EDGE network connected UMTS network connected Open WLANs available WLAN connected Bluetooth activated Bluetooth headset connectedGetting started 21 Icon Definition Music playback in progress Music playback paused FM radio turned on in the background Error occurred or caution required Battery power level 10:00 AM Current time Use the touch screen Your device’s touch screen lets you easily select items or perform functions. Learn basic actions to use the touch screen. Icon Definition Mobile AP activated No SIM or USIM card New text or multimedia message New email message New voice mail message Alarm activated Event notification Roaming (outside of normal service area) Silent mode activated Vibration mode activated Flight mode activated22 Getting started Control your touch screen with the following actions: • Tap: Touch once with your finger to select or launch a menu, option, or application. • Tap and hold: Tap an item and hold it for more than 2 seconds to open a pop-up option list. • Drag: Tap and drag your finger up, down, left, or right to move to items on lists. • Drag and drop: Tap and hold your finger on an item, and then drag your finger to move the item. • Double-tap: Tap twice quickly with your finger to zoom in or out while viewing photos or web pages. • Your device turns off the touch screen when you do not use the device for a specified period. To turn on the screen, press [ ] or the Home key. • You can also adjust the backlight time. In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Display→ Screen timeout. • To avoid scratching the touch screen, do not use sharp tools. • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. • Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with water. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. • For optimal use of the touch screen, remove the screen protection film before using your device. • Your touch screen has a layer that detects small electrical charges emitted by the human body. For best performance, tap the touch screen with your fingertip. The touch screen will not react to touches of sharp tools, such as a stylus or pen. Getting started 23 › Add items to the idle screen You can customise the idle screen by adding shortcuts to applications or items in applications, widgets, or folders. To add items to the idle screen, 1 Press [ ] → Add or tap and hold the empty area on the idle screen. 2 Select the item category → an item: • Widgets: Add widgets to the idle screen. • Shortcuts: Add shortcuts to items, such as applications, bookmarks, and contacts. • Folders: Create a new folder or add folders for your contacts. • Wallpapers: Set a background image. Available items may vary depending on the current idle screen mode. Lock or unlock the touch screen and keys You can lock the touch screen and keys to prevent any unwanted device operations. To lock, press [ ]. To unlock, turn on the screen by pressing [ ] or the Home key, and then flick the grey window with your finger. Get to know the idle screen When the device is in Idle mode, you will see the idle screen. From the idle screen, you can view your device’s status and access applications. The idle screen has multiple panels. Scroll left or right to a panel of the idle screen. You can also select a dot on the top of the screen to move to the corresponding panel of the idle screen directly.24 Getting started › Use the shortcuts panel In Idle mode or while using an application, tap the indicator icons area and drag your finger down to open the shortcuts panel. You can activate or deactivate wireless connection features and access a list of notifications, such as messages, calls, events or processing status. To hide the list, drag the bottom of the list up. From the shortcuts panel, you can use the following options: • Wi-Fi: Activate or deactivate the WLAN connection feature. ► p. 94 • Bluetooth: Activate or deactivate the Bluetooth wireless connection feature. ► p. 92 • GPS: Activate or deactivate the GPS feature. • Sound: Activate or deactivate the silent mode. • Auto rotation: Activate or deactivate the auto rotation. Available options may vary depending on your region or service provider. › Move items on the idle screen 1 Tap and hold an item to move until the item appears grey. 2 Drag the item to the location you want. › Remove items from the idle screen 1 Tap and hold an item to remove. The trash bin appears at the bottom of the idle screen. 2 Drag the item to the trash bin. 3 When the item turns red, release the item.Getting started 25 Access applications To access your device’s applications, 1 In Idle mode, select Applications to access the application list. 2 Scroll left or right to another application screen. You can also select a dot on the top of the screen to move to the corresponding main menu screen directly. 3 Select an application. • When you use applications provided by Google, you must have a Google account. If you do not have a Google account, sign up for a Google account. • You can add a shortcut to an application by tapping and holding the application icon from the application list. You can move the icon to the location you want on the idle screen. › Add or remove panels to the idle screen You can add or remove panels of the idle screen to organise widgets according to your preferences and needs. 1 In Idle mode, press [ ] → Edit. You can also place your two fingers on the screen and pinch to switch to Edit mode. 2 Add or remove panels by using the following features: • To remove a panel, tap and hold the thumbnail of a panel and drag it to the trash bin at the bottom of the screen. • To add a new panel, select . • To change the order of the panels, tap and hold the thumbnail of a panel and drag it to the location you want. 3 When you are finished, press [ ].26 Getting started 3 Drag the application icon to the location you want. You can move an application icon to another main menu screen. You can also move most-used applications next to Home. 4 Press [ ] → Save. To change the order of the main menu screens, 1 In the application list, place your two fingers on the screen and pinch. 2 Tap and hold the thumbnail of a screen and drag it to the location you want. › Access recent applications 1 Press and hold the Home key to open the list of applications you have accessed recently. 2 Select an application to access. 4 Press [ ] to return to the previous screen; Press the Home key to return to the idle screen. Your device has a built-in motion sensor that detects its orientation. If you rotate the device while using some features, the interface will automatically switch to landscape view. To set the interface to keep the orientation when you rotate the device, select Settings→ Display→ Auto-rotate screen. › Organise applications You can reorganise the applications in the application list by changing their order or grouping them into categories to suit your preferences and needs. 1 In the application list, press [ ] → Edit. 2 Tap and hold an application.Getting started 27 Customise your device Get more from your device by customising it to match your preferences. › Set the current time and date 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Date and time. 2 Set the time and date and change other options. › Turn on or off the touch tone In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Sound→ Audible selection. › Adjust the volume of the ringtones Press the Volume key up or down to adjust the ringtone volume. › Use the task manager Your device is a multitasking device. It can run more than one application at the same time. However, multitasking may cause hang-ups, freezing, memory problems, or additional power consumption. To avoid these problems, end unnecessary programs using the task manager. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Task manager→ Active applications. The list of all the applications currently running on your device appears. 2 To close an application, select Exit. To close all active applications, select Exit all.28 Getting started › Activate animation for switching windows In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Display→ Animation → Some animations or All animations. › Select a wallpaper for the idle screen 1 In Idle mode, press [ ] → Wallpaper → an option. 2 Select an image. 3 Select Save or Set wallpaper. Samsung is not responsible for any use of default images or wallpapers provided on your device. › Switch to the silent mode To mute or unmute your device, do one of the following: • In Idle mode, open the application list and select Phone → Keypad and tap and hold #. • Press and hold [ ] and select Silent mode. You can set the device to alert you to various events in Silent mode. In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Sound→ Vibrate→ Always or Only in silent mode. When you switch to Silent mode, will appear in place of . › Change your ringtone 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Sound→ Phone ringtone. 2 Select a ringtone from the list and select OK.Getting started 29 • Once you set a screen lock, your device will require an unlock code each time you turn it on or unlock the touch screen. • If you forget your PIN or password, bring your device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. • Samsung is not responsible for any loss of security codes or private information or other damages caused by illegal software. Set an unlock pattern 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Location and security→ Set screen lock → Pattern. 2 See the on-screen instructions and example patterns and select Next (if necessary). 3 Draw a pattern by dragging your finger to connect at least 4 dots. 4 Select Continue. › Adjust the brightness of the display You can quickly adjust the display brightness by scrolling left or right on the indicator line of the screen. To adjust the brightness in the setting menu, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Display→ Brightness. 2 Clear the check box next to Automatic brightness. 3 Drag the slider to adjust the level of brightness. 4 Select OK. The brightness level of the display will affect how quickly the device consumes battery power. › Set a screen lock You can lock the touch screen with an unlock pattern or password to prevent unauthorised people from using the device without your permission.30 Getting started › Lock your SIM or USIM card You can lock your device by activating the PIN supplied with your SIM or USIM card. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Location and security→ Set up SIM card lock→ Lock SIM card. 2 Enter your PIN and select OK. Once the PIN lock is enabled, you must enter the PIN each time you turn on the device. • If you enter an incorrect PIN too many times, your SIM or USIM card will be blocked. You must enter a PIN unlock key (PUK) to unblock the SIM or USIM card. • If you block your SIM or USIM card by entering an incorrect PUK, bring the card to your service provider to unblock it. 5 Draw a pattern again to confirm. 6 Select Confirm. Set an unlock PIN code 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Location and security→ Set screen lock → PIN. 2 Enter a new PIN (numeric) and select Continue. 3 Enter the PIN again and select OK. Set an unlock password 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Location and security→ Set screen lock → Password. 2 Enter a new password (alphanumeric) and select Continue. 3 Enter the password again and select OK.Getting started 31 6 Enter a phone number including a country code (with +). 7 Enter a sender’s name. 8 Enter the text message to be sent to the recipients. 9 Select Save. You can control the lost device via the web. Visit www.samsungdive.com to see the detailed information for this feature. Enter text You can enter text by selecting characters on the virtual keypad or by inputting handwriting on the screen. You cannot enter text in some languages. To enter text, you should change the writing language to one of the supported languages. ► p. 123 › Activate the mobile tracker When someone inserts a new SIM or USIM card in your device, the mobile tracker feature will automatically send the contact number to specified recipients to help you locate and recover your device. To use this feature, you need a Samsung account for controlling the device from the web remotely. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Location and security → Set mobile tracker. 2 Enter your password and select OK. 3 Select OK to continue. 4 Enter your email address and password for your Samsung account and select Sign in. To create a Samsung account, select Sign up. 5 Read the terms and conditions and select Accept.32 Getting started 3 Release the finger on the last character. 4 When the word displays correctly, select to insert a space. If the correct word does not display, select an alternative word from the list that appears. 5 Repeat steps 1-4 to complete your text. • You can also tap the keys to enter text. • You can tap and hold a key to enter characters on the upper half of the key. When you tap and hold a key until the character list appears, you can enter special characters and symbols. › Change the keyboard type You can change the keyboard type. Tap and hold the text input field and select Input method→ a keyboard type (Swype or Samsung keypad). › Enter text using the Swype keyboard 1 Select the first character of a word and drag your finger to the second character without releasing the finger from the screen. 2 Continue until you have finished the word.Getting started 33 Number Function 6 Enter text by voice. This feature may be unavailable depending on the selected input language. 7 Insert a space. › Enter text using the Samsung keypad 1 Select → Portrait keypad types and select a text input method. You can select one of key input methods (QWERTY or traditional keypad) or handwriting input methods. 2 Enter text by selecting alphanumeric keys or writing on the screen. You can also use the following keys: 7 5 6 1 3 2 4 Number Function 1 Change case. 2 Access the swype tip screen; Open the help information (tap and hold). 3 Switch between Symbol mode and ABC/ Number mode. 4 Delete characters. 5 Start a new line.34 Getting started You can also use the following keys: 5 6 4 7 1 2 3 Number Function 1 Change case. 2 Switch between Number/Symbol mode and ABC mode. 3 Enter text by voice; This icon is available only when you activate the voice input feature for the Samsung keypad. This feature may be unavailable depending on the selected input language. Number Function 4 Clear your input. 5 Start a new line. 6 Access the keypad settings; Change the text input method (tap and hold). 7 Insert a space; Insert a full stop (double-tap); Change the input language (tap and hold, and then scroll left or right). Functions of this key may vary depending on your service provider. › Copy and paste text While you are entering text, you can use the copy and paste feature to use text in other applications. 1 Place the cursor where you want to start. 2 Select or tap and hold the text input field.Getting started 35 • This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. • Your device will save user files from downloaded applications to the internal moviNAND™ memory. To save the files to the memory card, connect your device to a PC and copy them from moviNAND to memory card. › Install an application 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Market. 2 Select Accept when the terms and conditions appear. 3 Search for a file or application and download it. › Uninstall an application 1 From the Android Market home screen, select My apps. 3 Select Select word from the option list. 4 Select Copy to copy, or Cut to cut the text onto the clipboard. 5 In another application, tap and hold the text input field. 6 Select Paste to insert the text from the clipboard into the text field. Download applications from Android Market Based on the Android platform, your device’s functionality can be extended by installing additional applications. Android Market provides you an easy and quick way to shop for games and mobile applications.36 Getting started 2 Search for a file or application and download it. To install applications downloaded from websites other than Android Market, you must select Settings→ Applications→ Unknown sources. Synchronise data You can synchronise data with various web servers and back up or restore your data. Once the synchronisation is completed, your device stays connected to the web. If any change is made on the web, the updated information will appear on your device and will automatically begin synchronisation, and vice versa. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 2 Select the item you want to delete. 3 Select Uninstall→ OK. Download files from the web When you download files or web applications from the web, your device saves them in a memory card. Files you download from the web can include viruses that will damage your device. To lessen your risk, only download files from sources you trust. Some media files include Digital Rights Management to protect copyrights. This protection may prevent you from downloading, copying, modifying, or transferring some files. To download files from the web, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet.Getting started 37 4 Select the applications you want to synchronise. To exclude applications from automatic synchronisation, clear the check boxes next to the applications you want. › Synchronise data manually 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Accounts and sync. 2 Select an account. 3 Press [ ] → Sync now. Your device will start synchronising the data you set for synchronisation. › Set up a server account 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Accounts and sync. 2 Select Add account→ an account type. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. For online community services, such as Facebook or MySpace, enter your user name and password and select Log in. › Activate automatic sync 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Accounts and sync. 2 Select Auto-sync. 3 Select an account.38 Communication Communication Calling Learn to use calling functions, such as making and answering calls, using options available during a call or customising and using call-related features. › Make and answer a call You can use the buttons or the touch screen when you make, accept, end or reject calls. Make a call 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Phone → Keypad, and enter an area code and a phone number. 2 Select to make a voice call. For a video call, select . When you hold the device near your face, your device automatically turns off the touch screen to prevent accidental inputs. 3 To end the call, select End call. • Use the phonebook to save numbers you dial frequently. ► p. 72 • To quickly access the call log to redial the numbers you dialled recently, select Phone → Logs. • Use the voice command feature to dial by voice. ► p. 113Communication 39 Call an international number 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Phone → Keypad, and tap and hold 0 to insert the + character. 2 Enter the complete number you want to dial (country code, area code and phone number), and then select to dial the number. › Use the headset By plugging a headset into the device, you can answer and control calls hands-free: • To answer a call, press the headset button. • To reject a call, press and hold the headset button. • To place a call on hold or retrieve a held call during a call, press and hold the headset button. • To end a call, press the headset button. Answer a call 1 When a call comes in, drag right until it reaches the dot. When the device is ringing, press the Volume key to mute the ringtone. 2 To end the call, select End call. Reject a call When a call comes in, drag left until it reaches the dot. To send a message when you reject incoming calls, select Reject call with message. To change the message, select Settings→ Call settings→ All calls→ Reject call with message.40 Communication • To activate the speakerphone feature, select Speaker. In noisy environments, you may have difficulty hearing some calls while using the speakerphone feature. For better audio performance, use the normal phone mode. • To turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you, select Mute. • To listen and talk to the other party via a Bluetooth headset, select Headset. • To open the phonebook, press [ ] → Contacts. • To add a memo, press [ ] → Memo. • To switch between the two calls, select Swap. • To make a multiparty call (conference call), make or answer a second call and select Merge when connected to the second party. Repeat to add more parties. You must subscribe to the multiparty call service to use this feature. › Use options during a voice call You can use the following options while a voice call is in progress: • To adjust the voice volume, press the Volume key up or down. • To place a call on hold, select . To retrieve a held call, select . • To dial a second call, select Add call and then dial a new number. • To answer a second call, drag right until it reaches the dot when a call waiting tone sounds. The device asks whether to end or hold the first call. You must subscribe to the call waiting service to use this feature. • To open the dialling screen, select Dialpad.Communication 41 • To use the other party's image, tap and hold the other party's image. You can capture an image of the screen or record the video call. • To use my image, tap and hold your image. You can adjust the brightness, zoom in or out on the image via the rear camera lens, or apply the blur effect to your image via the front camera lens. › View and dial missed calls Your device will display calls you have missed on the display. To dial the number of a missed call, open the shortcuts panel and select the missed call. › Use additional features You can use various other call-related features, such as auto rejection, Fixed Dialling Number (FDN) mode, or call diverting or barring. › Use options during a video call You can use the following options while a video call is in progress: • To activate the speakerphone feature, select Speaker. • To turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you, select Mute. • To hide your image from the other party, press [ ] → Hide me. • To select an alternative image to be shown to the other party, press [ ] → Outgoing image. • To open the dialling screen, press [ ] → Dialpad. • To listen and talk to the other party via a Bluetooth headset, press [ ] → Switch to headset. • To switch between the front and rear camera lens, press [ ] → Switch camera. • To customise the video call settings, press [ ] → Settings.42 Communication Use Fixed Dialling Number (FDN) mode In FDN mode, your device will restrict outgoing calls, except for the numbers stored in the FDN list. To activate FDN mode, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Call settings → Fixed Dialing Numbers → Enable FDN. 2 Enter the PIN2 supplied with your SIM or USIM card and select OK. 3 Select FDN list and add contacts to be used in FDN mode. Set call forwarding Call diverting is a network feature to send incoming calls to another number that you specify. You can set this feature separately for several conditions when you are not able to answer calls, such as when you are already on the phone or when you are outside of the service area. Set auto rejection Use auto rejection to reject calls from certain numbers automatically. To activate auto rejection and set up the reject list, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Call settings → All calls → Auto reject. 2 Select Enable auto reject to activate auto rejection. 3 Select Auto reject list. 4 Press [ ] → Create. 5 Enter a number to reject and select Save. 6 To add more numbers, repeat steps 4-5.Communication 43 3 Enter a number to which calls will be forwarded and select Enable. Your setting will be sent to the network. Set call barring Call barring is a network feature to restrict certain types of calling or to prevent others from making calls with your device. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Call settings → Voice call → Call barring. For a video call, select Settings→ Call settings→ Video call→ Video call barring. 2 Select a call type to restrict. 3 Enter a call barring password and select OK. Your setting will be sent to the network. To set call forwarding for voice calls, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Call settings → Voice call → Call forwarding. 2 Select a condition. 3 Enter a number to which calls will be forwarded and select Enable. Your setting will be sent to the network. To set call forwarding for video calls, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Call settings → Video call → Video call forwarding. 2 Select a condition.44 Communication 3 Select a log to view its details. From the detail view, you can dial the number, send a message to the number or add the number to the phonebook or reject list. Messaging Learn to create and send text (SMS) or multimedia (MMS) messages, and view or manage messages you have sent or received. You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages while outside your home service area. For details, contact your service provider. Set call waiting Call waiting is a network feature to alert you of an incoming call while you are on a previous call. In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Call settings → Voice call → Call waiting. Your setting will be sent to the network. This feature is available only for voice calls. › View call logs You can view logs of your calls filtered by their types. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Phone→ Logs. 2 Press [ ] → View by→ an option to sort the call logs. From the call logs, you can make a call or send a message directly to a contact by quickly flicking the contact to the left or right.Communication 45 › Send a multimedia message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Messaging→ New message. 2 Select Contacts. You can enter a number manually or select one from the logs or contact groups by selecting another button. 3 Select the check boxes next to contacts and select Add. When you enter an email address, the device will convert the message as a multimedia message. 4 Select Type to compose and enter your message text. To insert emoticons, press [ ] → Insert smiley. 5 Press [ ] → Attach→ an option and add an item. You can select a file from the file list or create a new photo, video, or sound. › Send a text message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Messaging→ New message. 2 Select Contacts. You can enter a number manually or select one from the logs or contact groups by selecting another button. 3 Select the check boxes next to contacts and select Add. 4 Select Type to compose and enter your message text. To insert emoticons, press [ ] → Insert smiley. 5 Select Send to send the message.46 Communication 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Phone → Keypad and then tap and hold 1. 2 Follow the instructions from the voice mail server. You must save the voice mail server number before accessing the server. Your service provider can give you the number. Google Mail You can retrieve new email messages from Google Mail™ to your Inbox. When you access this application, the Inbox screen appears. The total number of unread messages displays in the title bar and unread messages display in bold. If you have labelled a message, its label appears in a coloured rectangle on the message. • This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. • This Google Mail menu may be labelled differently depending on your service provider. 6 Press [ ] → Add subject and add a subject for the message. 7 Select Send to send the message. › View a text or multimedia message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Messaging. Your messages are grouped into message threads by contact, like a messenger. 2 Select a contact. 3 For a multimedia message, select a message to view the details. › Listen to voice mail messages If you have set missed calls to be diverted to the voice mail server, callers may leave voice messages when you do not answer incoming calls. To access your voice mail inbox and listen to voice mail messages,Communication 47 From the message view, use the following options: • To reply to the message, select . • To reply to the message including all recipients, select → Reply all. • To forward the message to other people, select → Forward. • To view an attachment, select Preview. To save it to your device, select Download. • To archive the message, select Archive. • To delete the message, select Delete. • To move to the previous or next message, select or . › Organise email by labels You can organise your email by labelling your messages or adding stars to mark important messages. You can sort messages by label filter. › Send an email message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Google Mail. 2 Press [ ] → Compose. 3 Enter a name or address in the recipient field. 4 Enter a subject and message. 5 To attach an image file, press [ ] → Attach→ a file. 6 Select to send the message. › View email messages 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Google Mail. 2 Select an email message.48 Communication Email Learn to send or view email messages via your personal or company email account. › Set up an email account 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Email. 2 Enter your email address and password. 3 Select Next (for general email accounts, such as Google Mail and Yahoo) or Manual setup (for other company email accounts). 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. When you are finished setting up the email account, the email messages are downloaded to your device. If you have created more than two accounts, you can switch between email accounts; Press [ ] → Accounts and select one you want to retrieve messages from. Add a label to a message 1 From the Inbox screen, tap and hold a message. 2 Select Change labels. 3 Select a label to add and select OK. Add a star to a message 1 From the Inbox screen, tap and hold a message. 2 Select Add star. The star icon next to the message is activated. Filter messages 1 From the Inbox screen, press [ ] → Go to labels. 2 Select the label of the messages you want to view.Communication 49 8 Select Attach and attach a file. You cannot attach Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected files. 9 Select Send to send the message. If you are offline or outside your service area, the message will be held in the message thread list until you are online and in your service area. › View an email message When you open an email account, you can view previously retrieved emails offline or connect to the email server to view new messages. After retrieving email messages, you can view them offline. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Email → an email account. 2 Press [ ] → Refresh to update the message list. 3 Select an email message. › Send an email message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Email → an email account. 2 Press [ ] → Compose. 3 Select Contacts. You can enter an email address manually or select one from the recent recipients or groups by selecting another button. 4 Select the check boxes next to contacts and select Add. 5 Select the Cc/Bcc field to add more recipients. 6 Select the subject field to enter a subject. 7 Select the text input field to enter your email text.50 Communication › Add friends to your friend list 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Talk. The friend list shows all of your Google Talk contacts at a glance. 2 Press [ ] → Add friend. 3 Enter an email address of the friend and select Send invitation. When your friend accepts the invitation, the friend is added to your friend list. › Start a chat 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Talk. 2 Select a friend from the friend list. The chat screen opens. From the message view, use the following options: • To reply to the message, press [ ] → Reply. • To forward the message to other people, press [ ] → Forward. • To delete the message, press [ ] → Delete. • To view an attachment, drag the screen down and select the attachment. To save it to your device, select . Talk Learn to chat with friends and family via Google Talk™. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider.Communication 51 3 Enter your message and select Send. To insert emoticons, press [ ] → More→ Insert smiley. 4 To switch between active chats, press [ ] → Switch chats. 5 To end the chat, press [ ] → End chat. Social Hub Learn to access Social Hub™, the integrated communication application for email, messages, instant messages, contacts or calendar information. Visit socialhub.samsungmobile.com for more details. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Social Hub. 2 Check and use contents delivered from Social Hub.52 Entertainment Entertainment Camera Learn how to capture and view photos and videos. You can take photos at resolutions up to 2560 x 1920 pixels (5 megapixels) and videos at resolutions up to 1280 x 720 pixels. › Capture a photo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. • The camera interface appears only in the landscape orientation. • The camera automatically turns off when you do not use it for a specified period. • The memory capacity may differ depending on the shooting scene or shooting conditions. 3 Aim the lens at the subject and make any necessary adjustments. 8 9 10 2 3 5 6 1 7 4 Entertainment 53 Number Function 8 Switch to the camcorder. 9 Capture a photo. 10 Open the image viewer to view photos you captured. 4 Press the Volume key to zoom in or out. You can also tap the screen with two fingers and spread them apart (move your fingers closer together to zoom out). 5 Tap where you want to focus on the preview screen. The focus frame moves to the place you tap and changes to green when the subject is in focus. 6 Select to take a photo. The photo is saved automatically. Number Function 1 Check the camera status and settings. • : Resolution • : Exposure metre type • : GPS activated • : Number of photos you can take (according to available memory) • : Default storage location 2 Switch between the front and rear camera lenses. 3 Change the shooting mode. 4 Change the scene mode. 5 Adjust the exposure value. 6 Change the camera settings. 7 Hide or display icons in the viewfinder.54 Entertainment 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select → a scene → . 4 Make any necessary adjustments. 5 Select to take a photo. › Capture a beauty photo You can hide facial imperfections using Beauty mode. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select → Beauty. 4 Make any necessary adjustments. 5 Select to take a photo. After taking photos, select the image viewer icon to view the taken photos. • To view more photos, scroll left or right. • To zoom in or out, select or . You can also double tap the screen to zoom in or out. • To send a photo to others, select Share. • To set a photo as wallpaper or a caller ID image for a contact, select Set as. • To delete a photo, select Delete. › Capture a photo by using preset options for various scenes Your camera provides you with predefined settings for various scenes. You can simply select the proper mode for your shooting conditions and subjects. For example, when you take photos at night, select the night mode that uses an extended exposure. Entertainment 55 › Capture a series of photos You can easily take a series of photos of moving subjects. This is useful when you are photographing children at play or a sporting event. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select → Continuous. 4 Make any necessary adjustments. 5 Tap and hold . The camera will continue to take photos until you release the camera shutter. › Capture a photo in Smile shot mode Your camera can recognise people’s faces and help you take photos of their smiling faces. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select → Smile shot. 4 Make any necessary adjustments. 5 Select . 6 Aim the camera lens at your subject. Your device recognises people in an image and detects their smiles. When the subject smiles, the device automatically takes a photo.56 Entertainment › Capture a vintage photo You can take photos with a vintage look and feel by applying colour filters. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select → Vintage. 4 Select to select a colour filter. 5 Make any necessary adjustments. 6 Select to take a photo. › Capture a panoramic photo You can take wide panoramic photos using Panorama shooting mode. This mode is convenient for photographing landscapes. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select → Panorama. 4 Make any necessary adjustments. 5 Select to take the first photo. 6 Slowly move the device in any direction and align the green frame with the viewfinder. When you have aligned the green frame and viewfinder, the camera will automatically take the next photo. 7 Repeat step 6 to complete the panoramic photo.Entertainment 57 6 Select to take the first photo. The half of the first photo appears as a transparent guide for the next photo. 7 Make any necessary adjustments with the aid of the guide. 8 Select to take the second photo. The device will automatically combine the half of the first photo and the other half of the second photo into one photo. › Capture a photo of action You can capture shots of a moving subject and then combine them into a single photo that shows the action. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. › Capture a combined photo You can take two photos with the same background and then combine the left and right halves of each photo into one photo. This feature is helpful when you want to take a photo with a friend but there is no one available to take the photo for you. The preview image appears enlarged in this mode, but files are saved and maintained at normal image quality. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select → Add me. 4 Make any necessary adjustments. 5 Tap the left or right side where you want to take the first photo.58 Entertainment 4 Make any necessary adjustments. 5 Select to take a photo. › Capture a photo in Self shot mode You can take photos of yourself conveniently using the front camera lens. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select . 4 Make any necessary adjustments. 5 Select to take a photo. 3 Select → Action shot. 4 Make any necessary adjustments. 5 Select to capture the first photo. 6 Move the device to follow the moving subject. The device automatically captures the next photos. 7 Continue to follow the subject until the device has captured all the shots necessary for the action photo. › Capture a photo in Cartoon mode You can take photos with cartoon effects. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select → Cartoon.Entertainment 59 Option Function ISO Adjust the sensitivity of the camera imaging sensor. Metering Select a type of exposure metre. Anti-Shake Reduce blur caused by the device's vibration or movement. Auto contrast Automatically adjust contrast between your subject and background. Blink detection Set the camera to alert you when people close their eyes. Image quality Set the quality level for your photos. Adjust Adjust contrast, saturation, and sharpness. › Customise camera settings Before taking a photo, select → to access the following options: Option Function Outdoor visibility Activate Outdoor visibility to select an appropriate lighting condition. Focus mode Take close-up photos or set the camera to focus on the subject or focus on human faces automatically. Timer Select the length of the delay before the camera takes a photo. Resolution Change the resolution option. White balance Adjust the colour balance according to lighting conditions. Effects Apply a special effect, such as sepia or black and white tones.60 Entertainment › Record a video 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera. 2 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 3 Select to switch to the camcorder. 4 Aim the lens at the subject and make any necessary adjustments. 7 9 8 2 1 4 5 6 3 Before taking a photo, select → to access the following settings: Setting Function Guidelines Display the guidelines on the preview screen. Review Set the camera to display the taken image. Shutter sound Set the camera shutter to make a sound when capturing a photo. Storage Select a memory location for storing captured photos. Reset Reset menus and shooting options.Entertainment 61 Number Function 9 Open the image viewer to view videos you recorded. 5 Press the Volume key to zoom in or out. 6 Select to start recording. 7 Select to stop recording. The video is saved automatically. The camera may not be able to properly record videos to a memory card with a slow transfer speed. After recording videos, select the image viewer icon to view the recorded videos. • To view more videos, scroll left or right. • To send a video to others, select Share. • To play a video, select Play. • To delete a video, select Delete. Number Function 1 Check the camcorder status. • : Length of video that can be recorded (according to available memory) • : Default storage location 2 Change the recording mode (for attaching to a multimedia message or for saving normally). 3 Adjust the exposure value. 4 Change the resolution option. 5 Change the camcorder settings. 6 Hide or display icons in the viewfinder. 7 Switch to the camera. 8 Record a video. 62 Entertainment Before recording a video, select → to access the following settings: Setting Function Guidelines Display the guidelines on the preview screen. Audio recording Turn the audio on or off. Review Set the camera to display the recorded video. Storage Select a memory location for storing recorded videos. Reset Reset menus and shooting options. › Customise camcorder settings Before recording a video, select → to access the following options: Option Function Outdoor visibility Activate Outdoor visibility to select an appropriate lighting condition. Timer Select the length of the delay before the camera starts recording a video. White balance Adjust the colour balance according to lighting conditions. Effects Apply a special effect, such as sepia or black and white tones. Video quality Set the quality level for your videos. Adjust Adjust contrast, saturation, and sharpness.Entertainment 63 4 Control playback with the following icons: Icon Function Change a ratio of the video screen. Skip backward; Scan backward in a file (tap and hold). Pause playback; Select to resume playback. Skip forward; Scan forward in a file (tap and hold). Activate the 5.1 channel surround sound system when a headset is connected. Adjust the volume. Stop playback and return to the playlist. Videos Learn to use the video player to play various kinds of videos. The video player supports the following file formats: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, mkv (Codec: MPEG4, H.263, Sorenson H.263, H.264, VC-1, DivX/XviD). • Some file formats are not supported depending on the software of the device. • If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Videos. 2 Select a video to play. 3 Rotate the device to landscape view.64 Entertainment • Avoid locking the device’s screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand. Each time you lock the screen while playing a DivX Video-On-Demand, one of your available rental counts will be decremented. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the software of the device. • If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files. › View a photo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Gallery. 2 Select a folder. 3 To change the view mode, select or at the top right of the screen. 4 Select a photo (with no icon) to view. Gallery Learn to view photos and play videos saved in your device's memory and memory card. If your device displays that the memory is full when you access Gallery, delete some of the files by using My Files or other file management applications and try again. › Supported file formats Type Format Image Extension: bmp, gif, jpg, png Video • Extension: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, mkv • Codec: MPEG4, H.263, Sorenson H.263, H.264, VC-1, DivX/XviDEntertainment 65 › Share images or videos 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Gallery. 2 Select a folder. 3 Select an image or video. 4 Select Menu→ Share → a sharing option. Music Learn to listen to your favourite music while on the go with the music player. The music player supports the following file formats: mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, wma, ogg, oga, aac, flac. While viewing a photo, use the following options: • To view more photos, scroll left or right. • To zoom in or out, select or . You can also tap the screen with two fingers and spread them apart (move your fingers closer together to zoom out). • To start a slideshow images in the selected folder, select Slideshow. Tap the screen to stop the slideshow. › Play a video 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Gallery. 2 Select a video (with the icon) to play. 3 Rotate the device to landscape view. 4 Control playback with the virtual keys. ► p. 6366 Entertainment • You can also play music files in the following formats if you open them from My Files, multimedia messages, or on the web browser: mid, midi, xmf, rtttl, smf, imy, rtx, ota, amr, awb, wav. • Some file formats are not supported depending on the software of the device. • If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files. › Add music files to your device Start by transferring files to your device or memory card: • Download from the wireless web. ► p. 79 • Download from a PC with the optional Samsung Kies. ► p. 100 • Receive via Bluetooth. ► p. 93 • Copy to your memory card. ► p. 102 • Synchronise with Windows Media Player 11. ► p. 101 › Play music After transferring music files to your device or memory card, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Music. 2 Scroll left or right to a music category. 3 Select a music file. 4 Control playback with the following icons: Icon Function Adjust the volume. Activate the 5.1 channel surround sound system when a headset is connected. Activate Shuffle mode. Change the repeat mode (off, repeating a file, or repeating all files). 1 1Entertainment 67 › Switch to disc view 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Music. 2 Press [ ] → Go to disc view. 3 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view. 4 Scroll left or right to a disc. 5 Select a disc to begin playback. 6 Select or to pause or resume the current playback. 7 Select to switch to circle view. 8 Drag around the circle to select a track. To switch to another category, select All→ a category. 9 Select to switch back to disc view. Icon Function Skip backwards; Scan backward in a file (tap and hold). Pause playback; Select to resume playback. Skip forward; Scan forward in a file (tap and hold). 1. These icons are shown when you tap the player screen. • SRS CS Headphone™ delivers a 5.1 surround sound experience over standard headphones or earbuds when listening to multichannel content, such as DVD movies. • WOW HD™ significantly improves the playback quality of audio, delivering a dynamic 3D entertainment experience with deep, rich bass and high frequency clarity for crisp detail.68 Entertainment › Create a playlist 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Music. 2 Select Playlists. 3 Press [ ] → Create. 4 Enter a title for your new playlist and select Save. 5 Select Add music. 6 Select the files you want to include and select Add. During playback, you can add files to a playlist by pressing [ ] → More→ Add to playlist. › Add songs to the quick list You can add songs to the quick list and save them as a playlist. During playback, press [ ] → Add to quick list to add the current song to the quick list. To go to the quick list, from the music player main screen, select Playlists→ Quick list. To save the quick list as a playlist, press [ ] → Save as playlist. › Customise music player settings 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Music. 2 Press [ ] → Settings. 3 Adjust the following settings to customise your music player: Option Function Equaliser Select a default equaliser type. Effect Select a sound effect. Music menu Select music categories to display on the music library screen. Visualisation Display an animated visualisation during playback.Entertainment 69 4 Control the FM radio with the following keys: 1 3 5 6 3 7 8 4 4 2 Number Function 1 Adjust the volume. 2 Turn off the FM radio; Select to turn on the FM radio. 3 Search for an available radio station. 4 Change the frequency by 0.1 MHz. FM Radio Learn to listen to music and news on the FM radio. To listen to the FM radio, you must connect a headset, which serves as the radio antenna. › Listen to the FM radio 1 Plug a headset into the device. 2 In Idle mode, open the application list and select FM Radio. 3 Select to turn on the FM radio (if necessary). The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically. The first time you turn on the FM radio, you will be prompted to start automatic tuning.70 Entertainment 3 Select Scan→ a scanning option. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically. 4 Select the radio station you want from the all station list and press [ ] to return to the FM radio screen. › Add a radio station to the favourites list 1 Plug a headset into the device. 2 In Idle mode, open the application list and select FM Radio. 3 Select to turn on the FM radio. 4 Scroll to the radio station you want. 5 Select + to add to the favourites list. Number Function 5 Add the current radio station to the favourites list. 6 Change the sound output (headset or device's speaker). 7 Change the frequency by scrolling left or right on the scale bar. 8 Set the FM radio to automatically retune frequencies for stations when the current signal is weak. › Save a radio station automatically 1 Plug a headset into the device. 2 In Idle mode, open the application list and select FM Radio.Entertainment 71 Option Function Show Station ID Set whether or not to show the station ID on the FM radio screen; Station IDs are available only from radio stations that provide this information. Alternative frequency Set whether or not the FM radio attempts to retune a radio station when the signal is weak. FM auto off Set the FM radio to automatically turn off after a specified length of time. › Customise FM radio settings 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select FM Radio. 2 Press [ ] → Settings. 3 Adjust the following settings to customise your FM radio: Option Function Region Select your region. Background playing Set whether or not to run the FM radio in the background while using other applications. If this feature is on, you can control the FM radio from the shortcuts panel.72 Personal information Personal information Contacts Learn to create and manage a list of your personal or business contacts. You can save names, mobile phone numbers, home phone numbers, email addresses, birthdays and more for your contacts. › Create a contact 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts. 2 Select . 3 Select a memory location. If you have more than one account, select an account to which you want to add the contact. 4 Enter contact information. 5 Select Save to add the contact to memory. You can also create a contact from the dialling screen. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Phone→ Keypad. 2 Enter a phone number. 3 Select Add to Contacts→ . 4 Select a memory location. If you have more than one account, select an account to which you want to add the contact. 5 Enter contact information. 6 Select Save to add the contact to memory.Personal information 73 3 Select a location number → a contact. You can quickly dial this number by touching and holding the location number from the dialling screen. › Create your namecard 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts. 2 Press [ ] → My profile. 3 Enter your own personal details. 4 Select Save. You can send your namecard by attaching it to a message or email or transferring it via the Bluetooth wireless feature. › Find a contact 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts. 2 Scroll up or down on the contact list. 3 Select a contact’s name. Once you find a contact, you can: • make a voice call by selecting the phone number. • make a video call by selecting Video call. • send a message by selecting Message. • edit the contact information by pressing [ ] → Edit. › Set a speed dial number 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts. 2 Press [ ] → More→ Speed dial.74 Personal information 2 Press [ ] → Create. 3 Enter a name and select a ringtone for the group. 4 Select Save. › Copy contacts You can copy contacts to and from the SIM or USIM card. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts. 2 Press [ ] → Import/Export→ Import from SIM card or Export to SIM card. 3 Select contacts to copy and select Import or Export. 4 For exporting contacts, select OK to confirm. › Retrieve contacts from your community accounts You can view the list of community website accounts and select an account to add a contact from the website to your phone contacts. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts. 2 Press [ ] → Get friends. 3 Select an account. › Create a group of contacts By creating groups of contacts, you can manage multiple contacts and send messages or email to an entire group. Start by creating a group. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts→ Groups.Personal information 75 To export contacts from your device to a memory card, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts. 2 Press [ ] → Import/Export→ Export to SD card. 3 Select OK to confirm. › View the communication log You can view the communication log of calls, messages, email or SNS threads. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts→ History. 2 Select an item you want to view. › Import or export contacts To import contact files (in vcf format) from a memory card to your device, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts. 2 Press [ ] → Import/Export→ Import from SD card. 3 Select a memory location. If you have more than one account, select an account to which you want to add the contact. 4 Select an option for importing a single contact file, multiple contact files, or all contact files, and select OK. 5 Select contact files to import and select OK.76 Personal information 3 Enter the details of the event as required. 4 Select Save. › View events To change the calendar view, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Calendar. 2 Select a view mode from the top of the calendar. To view events of a specific date, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Calendar. 2 Select a date on the calendar. In month view, days with scheduled events are indicated by a small triangle. To move to a specific day by entering a date manually, press [ ] → Go to, enter the date by selecting + or -, and select Set. To select today's date, press [ ] → Today. › View the social network activities You can view the recent activities of contacts in social network services, such as Facebook, MySpace, and Twitter. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Contacts→ Activities. 2 Select an item you want to view. Calendar Learn to create and manage daily, weekly or monthly events, and set alarms to remind yourself of important events. › Create an event 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Calendar. 2 Select Tap to create or press [ ] → Create.Personal information 77 › Create a memo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Memo. 2 Select Create memo or press [ ] → Create to create a memo. 3 Enter your memo text. 4 Press [ ] to hide the keypad. 5 Select a colour to change a background colour. 6 Select Save. › View memos 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Memo. 2 Press [ ] → Search or press and hold [ ] to search for a memo (if necessary). 3 Select an event to view its details. You can send the event to others by pressing [ ] → Send via→ an option. › Stop an event alarm If you set an alarm for a calendar event, the event alarm icon will appear at the specified time. 1 Open the shortcuts panel from the top of the screen. 2 Select a reminder to view more details about the event. 3 To snooze or dismiss the reminder, select Snooze all or Dismiss all. Memo Learn to record important information to save and view at a later date. 78 Personal information 4 When you are finished, select Stop. 5 To record more voice memos, select Record again. › Play a voice memo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Voice Recorder. 2 Select List. 3 In a playlist, select a voice memo to play. You can send the voice memo to others by tapping and holding a voice memo and selecting Share. 3 Select a memo to view its details. To edit the memo, select . You can send the memo to others by tapping and holding the memo and selecting Send via→ an option. Voice Recorder Learn to operate your phone’s voice recorder. › Record a voice memo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Voice Recorder. 2 Select Record to start recording. 3 Speak into the microphone.Web 79 Web Web services require a data connection. Contact your operator to choose the best data plan. Internet Learn to access and bookmark your favourite web pages. • You may incur additional charges for accessing the web and downloading media. For details, contact your service provider. • Available icons may vary depending on your region or service provider. › Browse web pages 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet to launch a specified homepage. To access a specific web page, select the URL input field, enter the web address (URL) of the web page, and select . 2 Navigate web pages with the following keys: 1 2 80 Web • To reload the current web page, press [ ] → Refresh. • To go to a next page in history, press [ ] → Forward. • To bookmark the current web page, press [ ] → More → Add bookmark. • To add a shortcut to the current web page to the idle screen, press [ ] → More → Add shortcut to Home. • To add the RSS feed, press [ ] → More→ Add RSS feeds. You can read RSS feeds using Google Reader. • To search for text on the web page, press [ ] → More → Find on page. • To view the web page details, press [ ] → More → Page info. • To send the web address (URL) of the web page to others, press [ ] → More → Share page. Number Function 1 Enter the web address of a web page to access. 2 Open a list of saved bookmarks, frequently visited pages and recent internet history. While browsing the web page, use the following options: • To zoom in or out, double-tap the screen. You can also use the two finger zoom; Place your two fingers on the screen and slowly pinch or spread apart. • To open a new window, press [ ] → New window. • To view the currently active windows, press [ ] → Windows. You can open multiple pages and switch back and forth between them. • To adjust the brightness of the screen, press [ ] → Brightness setting. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region.Web 81 From the bookmark list, tap and hold a bookmark and use the following options: • To open the web page in the current window, select Open. • To open the web page in a new window, select Open in new window. • To edit the bookmark details, select Edit bookmark. • To add the bookmark shortcut to the idle screen, select Add shortcut to Home. • To send the web address (URL) of the web page to others, select Share link. • To copy the web address (URL) of the web page, select Copy link URL. • To delete the bookmark, select Delete bookmark. • To use the web page as your homepage of the browser, select Set as homepage. • To view the download history, press [ ] → More → Downloads. • To customise the browser settings, press [ ] → More → Settings. › Bookmark your favourite web pages If you know the web address of the web page, you can manually add a bookmark. To add a bookmark, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet. 2 Select → Bookmarks. 3 Select Add or press [ ] → Bookmark last-viewed page. To bookmark the web page you were viewing, skip to step 5. 4 Enter a page title and a web address (URL). 5 Select OK.82 Web 3 Select a web page to access. You can add a web page to the bookmark list by selecting the star icon on the right. Maps Learn to use Google Maps™ to find your location, search the online map for streets, cities, or countries, and get directions. • This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. • Do not touch the internal antenna area or cover this area with your hands or other objects while using the GPS functions. • To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the following conditions: – between buildings, in tunnels or underground passages, or inside buildings – in poor weather – around high voltage or electromagnetic fields › Add an RSS feed address 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet. 2 Move to a web page that has an RSS feed. 3 Select in the URL input field. 4 Select an RSS feed to add. 5 Subscribe to the RSS feed. When the subscribed feed is updated, you are notified of the update. › Access the frequently visited pages or the recent history 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet. 2 Select → Most visited or History.Web 83 › Search for a specific location 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Maps. The map will display your current location. 2 Press [ ] → Search. 3 Enter a keyword for the location and select . • To search for a location by voice, select . • To zoom in or out, select or . • To search for a place around you, select . • To add layers to the map, select . • To view your current location, select . › Activate location services to use with Google Maps You must activate location services to find your location and search the map. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Location and security. 2 Adjust the following settings to activate location services: Option Function Use wireless networks Set to use WLAN and/or mobile networks for finding your location. Use GPS satellites Set to use the GPS satellite for finding your location. Use sensor aiding Use sensors to enhance pedestrian positioning when the GPS signal is obstructed. There may be variations between the sensor estimates and your actual location.84 Web Latitude Learn to share your location with your friends and view friends’ locations via Google Latitude™. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Latitude. The device automatically joins Latitude. 2 Press [ ] → Add friends → Select from Contacts or Add via email address. 3 Select friends you want to add or enter an email address, and select Add friends → Yes. When your friend accepts your invitation, you can share locations. 4 Press [ ] → See map. Your friends' locations are marked with their photos on the map. › Get directions to a specific destination 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Maps. 2 Press [ ] → Directions. 3 Enter the addresses of the starting location and the ending location. To select an address from your contact list or starred places, or point the location on the map, select → Contacts, Point on map, or Starred places. 4 Select a travel method (car, bus, or walk) and select Go. 5 Select a travel route to view details of your trip (if necessary). 6 Select . 7 When you are finished, press [ ] → Clear Map.Web 85 Navigation Learn to use the GPS navigation system to find and show your destination with voice guidance. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Navigation. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, select Accept. 3 Enter your destination by using one of the following methods: • Speak Destination: Speak your destination such as "Navigate to destination." • Type Destination: Enter your destination with the virtual keypad. Places Learn to search for a place around you. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Places. 2 Select a category. Your device searches for places around your current location that are related to the category. 3 Select a place name to view its details. 4 To view the place on the map, select . To view the route to the place, select . To view the phone number of the place, select . 86 Web YouTube YouTube is a free online video streaming service. Learn to view and share videos via YouTube. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. › Watch videos 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select YouTube. 2 Select a video from the list. 3 Rotate the device to landscape view. 4 Control playback with the icons on the screen. • Contacts: Select your destination from addresses of your contacts. • Starred Places: Select your destination from the list of your starred places. 4 Select Install to use voice-guided navigation. 5 To end the navigation, press [ ] → Exit Navigation. Google Search You can search for applications in your device and specific data on the web. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Google Search. 2 Enter a letter or a word of the data to search. 3 Select the item's name you want to access.Web 87 4 Aim the lens at the subject and make any adjustments. 5 Select to start recording. 6 Select to stop recording. 7 Select Save to upload the video that you have recorded. 8 Enter your user name and password and select Sign in (if necessary). 9 Enter details of the upload and select Upload. Synchronise Learn to synchronise contacts, calendar events, and memos with the web server you have specified. › Share videos This feature is available only in portrait view. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select YouTube. 2 Select a video. 3 Select More→ Share→ an option. › Upload videos 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select YouTube. 2 Press [ ] → Upload and select a video. Skip to 8. If you want to upload new videos, select to turn on the camera. 3 Rotate the device anti-clockwise to landscape view.88 Web › Start synchronisation 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ Synchronise. 2 Select a synchronisation profile. 3 Select Start sync to start synchronisation. Samsung Apps Samsung Apps allows you to simply and easily download an abundance of applications directly to your device. Featuring a wealth of games, news, reference, social networking, navigation, health related applications and more, Samsung Apps gives you instant access to a huge choice of mobile experience. Your device gets smarter with fully optimised applications from Samsung Apps. Explore amazing applications and make your mobile life even better. › Set up a synchronisation profile 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ Synchronise. 2 Select Create new profile and specify the following profile options: Option Function Profile name Enter a name for the profile. Sync category Select types of data to be synchronised. Sync type Set how to synchronise the device and the server. Sync server Enter the web address of the server to be synchronised. 3 When you are finished, select Save.Web 89 › Customise daily briefing settings 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Daily Briefing. 2 Press [ ] → Settings→ a briefing service. 3 Adjust the following settings to customise the daily briefing screens: Option Function Select city Add cities for weather forecast. Select stock Add companies for stock information. Auto refresh Set the daily briefing screens to be automatically updated with latest information. • The feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. • For details, please visit www.samsungapps.com. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Samsung Apps. 2 Search for and download applications as desired. Daily Briefing Learn to get weather, stock information, news, and schedule information for today. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider.90 Web Press Reader Use Press Reader to read online newspapers while you are on the move. › Download news articles 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Press Reader. 2 Select Online Store. The online store opens. 3 Select a newspaper to download. 4 Select a date and select OK. 5 Select Confirm to confirm the charge. Option Function Widget auto scroll Set the daily briefing widget to automatically show more information. Unit Select a temperature unit to use for weather forecast. 4 When you are finished, select the check boxes next to the briefing services to display on the screen. › View daily briefing 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Daily Briefing. 2 Select to update information. 3 Scroll left or right to view information.Web 91 › Read news articles 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Press Reader. 2 Select My Library. 3 Select a newspaper. Market You can download games, ringtones, or other applications from the Android Market. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Market. 2 Search for a file and download it to the device. ► p. 3592 Connectivity Connectivity Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications technology capable of exchanging information over a distance of about 10 m without requiring a physical connection. You do not need to line up the devices to beam information with Bluetooth. If the devices are within range of one another, you can exchange information between them even if they are located in different rooms. • Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth wireless feature. • Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. • Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. › Turn on the Bluetooth wireless feature 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network → Bluetooth settings. 2 Select Bluetooth to turn on the Bluetooth wireless feature. Connectivity 93 › Send data using the Bluetooth wireless feature 1 Select a file or item, such as a contact, calendar event, memo, or media file, from an appropriate application or My Files. 2 Press [ ] → Share or Send via→ Bluetooth. 3 Search for and pair with a Bluetooth-enabled device. › Receive data using the Bluetooth wireless feature 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ Bluetooth settings→ Discoverable. Your device is visible to other Bluetooth devices for 120 seconds. › Find and pair with other Bluetoothenabled devices 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ Bluetooth settings→ Scan devices. 2 Select a device. 3 Enter a PIN for the Bluetooth wireless feature or the other device’s Bluetooth PIN, if it has one, and select OK. Alternatively, select Accept to match the PIN between your device and the device. When the owner of the other device enters the same PIN or accepts the connection, pairing is complete. If the pairing is successful, the device will automatically search for available services. Some devices, especially headsets or hands-free car kits, may have a fixed Bluetooth PIN, such as 0000. If the other device has a PIN, you must enter it.94 Connectivity Your device uses non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all European countries. The WLAN can be operated in the EU without restriction indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors in France. › Activate the WLAN feature In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and network → Wi-Fi settings → Wi-Fi. An active WLAN running in the background will consume battery power. To preserve battery power, activate the WLAN only when needed. › Find and connect to a WLAN 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network → Wi-Fi settings. The device will automatically search for available WLANs. 2 When prompted, enter the PIN for the Bluetooth wireless feature and select OK (if necessary). 3 Select Accept to confirm that you are willing to receive data from the device (if necessary). Received data is saved to an appropriate application or folder according to its type. For example, a music or sound clip is saved to the sound folder and a contact to the phonebook. Wi-Fi Learn to use your device’s wireless networking capabilities to activate and connect to any wireless local area network (WLAN) compatible with the IEEE 802.11 b/g/n standards. You can connect to the internet or other network devices anywhere an access point or wireless hotspot is available.Connectivity 95 › Connect to a WLAN using a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Using WPS, you can connect to a secured network. To connect to a WLAN with a WPS button, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network → Wi-Fi settings. 2 Select WPS button connection. 3 Press a WPS button on the access point within 2 minutes. To connect to a WLAN with a WPS PIN, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network → Wi-Fi settings. 2 Select a network indicated by the WPS icon and select WPS PIN. 3 On the access point, enter the PIN and press the start button. 2 Select a network under Wi-Fi networks. 3 Enter a password for the network (if necessary). 4 Select Connect. › Add a WLAN manually 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network → Wi-Fi settings → Add Wi-Fi network. 2 Enter the SSID for the network and select the security type. 3 Set the security settings depending on the selected security type. 4 Select Save.96 Connectivity 3 Adjust the following settings to customise the DLNA feature: Option Function Media server name Enter a name for your device as a media server. Share media Turn on video sharing, image sharing or music sharing with other DLNA-enabled devices. Access point network Select a connection profile to use for DLNA connections. Upload from other devices Set whether or not to accept the upload from other devices. Default memory Select the default memory location for saving downloaded media files. AllShare Learn to use the Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) service that enables you to share media files between DLNA-enabled devices in your home over a WLAN. You must first activate the WLAN feature and add a WLAN profile. ► p. 94 › Customise DLNA settings for sharing media files To allow other DLNA-enabled devices to access media files on your device, you must activate media sharing. Some files may not play on the DLNA-enabled devices depending on the devices. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select AllShare. 2 Select Settings.Connectivity 97 › Play others' files on your device 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select AllShare. 2 Select Play file from server on my phone. Your device automatically searches for DLNA-enabled devices. 3 Select a device as the media server—the one that contains media files. 4 Select a media category and a file. 5 Select Add to playlist. 6 Control playback using icons of your device. › Play your files on another DLNAenabled device 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select AllShare. 2 Select Play file from my phone on another player. 3 Select a media category → a file. 4 Select Add to playlist. 5 Select a player—the one that will play the media file. Playback begins at the selected player. 6 Control playback using icons of your device. Playback may be buffered, depending on the network connection and the connected server.98 Connectivity Mobile network sharing Learn to set your device as a wireless modem or wireless access point for PCs or other devices, and share your device's mobile network connection. › Share your device’s mobile network via WLAN 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ Tethering. 2 Select Mobile AP to activate the mobile AP feature. 3 Select Mobile AP settings→ Configure Mobile AP to customise the mobile AP feature: Option Function Network SSID View and edit the device name that will be shown to external devices. Security Select the security type. › Play files of one device on the other device 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select AllShare. 2 Select Play file from server on another player via my phone. Your device automatically searches for DLNA-enabled devices. 3 Select a device as the media server—the one that contains media files. 4 Select a media category and a file. 5 Select Add to playlist. 6 Select a player—the one that will play the media file. Playback begins at the selected player. 7 Control playback using icons of your device.Connectivity 99 3 Select USB tethering to activate the USB tethering feature. Your device shares the mobile network connection on your PC. To stop sharing the network connection, clear the check box next to USB tethering. The sharing method for the network connection may differ depending on the PC’s operating system. TV connections (TV out mode) Learn to connect your device to a TV and view the device’s interface on the TV screen. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Display→ TV out. 2 Select TV out to activate TV out mode. 4 When you are finished, select Save. 5 From another device, locate your device’s name in the available connection list and connect to the network. Your device shares the mobile network connection on another device. › Share your device's mobile network via USB 1 Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC. 2 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ Tethering.100 Connectivity 6 Switch the TV to External input mode. The device interface appears on the TV screen. Your files may not display correctly due to differences in video systems or quality of the TV display. PC connections Learn to connect your device to a PC with an optional PC data cable in various USB connection modes. By connecting the device to a PC, you can synchronise files with Windows Media Player, transfer data to and from your device directly, and use the Samsung Kies program. › Connect with Samsung Kies Ensure that Samsung Kies is installed on your PC. You can download the program from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com). 3 Select TV system. 4 Select a video encoding system according to your region. Option Region PAL Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, England, Finland, Germany, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, Netherlands, New Zealand, Norway, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand NTSC Canada, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Taiwan, USA 5 Ensure that the TV is on and connect your device to the TV with a TV out cable. Match the colours at the ends of the TV out cable with those on the TV's A/V ports.Connectivity 101 2 Press the Home key to return to Idle mode. 3 Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC with Windows Media Player installed. When connected, a pop-up window will appear on the PC. 4 Open Windows Media Player to synchronise music files. 5 Edit or enter your device’s name in the pop-up window (if necessary). 6 Select and drag the music files you want to the sync list. 7 Start synchronisation. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ USB settings→ Samsung Kies. 2 Press the Home key to return to Idle mode. 3 Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC. 4 Run Samsung Kies and use wireless connections or copy data and files. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. › Synchronise with Windows Media Player Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ USB settings→ Media player.102 Connectivity 5 When connected, select Turn on USB storage. 6 Open the folder to view files. 7 Copy files from the PC to the memory card. 8 When you are finished, select Turn off USB storage. To disconnect the device to the PC, click the USB device icon on the Windows task bar and click the option to safely remove the mass storage device. Then remove the PC data cable from the PC. Otherwise, you may lose data stored on the memory card or damage the memory card. VPN connections You can create virtual private networks (VPN) and connect to your private network securely through a public network, such as the internet. › Connect as a mass storage device You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the device, you can also access the file directory of the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader. The file directory of the memory card will appear as a removable disk, separate from the internal memory. 1 If you want to transfer files from or to a memory card, insert a memory card into the device. 2 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ USB settings→ Mass storage. 3 Press the Home key to return to Idle mode. 4 Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC.Connectivity 103 Option Function Set VPN server Enter the IP address of the VPN server. Enable Encryption Set to encrypt the VPN server. Set IPSec preshared key Enter a pre-shared key. Enable L2TP secret Set to use the L2TP secret password. Set L2TP secret Enter the L2TP secret password. Set user certificate Select a user certificate that the VPN server uses to identify you. You can import certificates from the VPN server or download from the web. Your device should already be configured with internet access. If you have trouble accessing the internet, you need to edit connections. If you are not sure about the connection information to enter, ask your service provider. › Set up VPN connections 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ VPN settings → Add VPN. 2 Select a VPN type. 3 Customise the connection information. Available options may vary depending on the VPN type. Option Function VPN name Enter a name of the VPN server.104 Connectivity Option Function Set CA certificate Select a certificate authority (CA) certificate that the VPN server uses to identify you. You can import certificates from the VPN server or download from the web. DNS search domains Enter the domain name server (DNS) address. › Connect to a private network 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and network→ VPN settings. 2 Select a private network to connect. 3 Enter the user name and password and select Connect.Tools 105 Tools Clock Learn to set and control alarms, and world clocks. You can also use the stopwatch and count-down timer. › Set a new alarm 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Clock → Alarm. 2 Select Create alarm or press [ ] → Create. 3 Set alarm details. Select Smart alarm to activate simulated nature sounds with the alarm screen prior to the main alarm. 4 When you are finished, select Save. › Stop an alarm When the alarm sounds, • To stop the alarm, drag right until it reaches the dot. • To repeat the alarm after a specified length of time, drag left until it reaches the dot. › Delete an alarm 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Clock → Alarm. 2 Press [ ] → Delete. 3 Select alarms to delete. 4 Select Delete.106 Tools 3 Select Lap to record lap times. 4 When you are finished, select Stop. 5 Select Reset to clear recorded times. › Use the count-down timer 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Clock → Timer. 2 Set the length of time to count down. 3 Select Start to begin the countdown. You can now use other functions with the timer counting down in the background. Press the Home key or [ ] and access another application. 4 When the timer expires, drag right until it reaches the dot. › Create a world clock 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Clock → World clock. 2 Select Add city or press [ ] → Add. 3 Enter a city name or select one from the city list. To select a city in the world map view, select . 4 To add more world clocks, repeat steps 2-3. To apply the summer time to the clocks, tap and hold a clock and select DST settings. › Use the stopwatch 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Clock → Stopwatch. 2 Select Start to begin the stopwatch.Tools 107 3 Select to close the calculator keypad. The calculation history appears. 4 To clear the history, press [ ] → Clear history. Aldiko eBook Learn to download and read book files. › Read a book file 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Aldiko eBook. 2 Read the end user licence agreement and select Agree. 3 Press [ ] → Search to search for a book title (if necessary). 4 Select a book from the bookshelf. Calculator Learn to perform mathematical calculations directly on your device like a typical hand-held or desktop calculator. › Perform the calculation 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Calculator. 2 Use the keys that correspond to the calculator display to perform basic mathematical operations. Rotate the device to landscape view to use the scientific calculator. If you deactivate the auto rotation, press [ ] → Scientific calculator. › View the calculation history 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Calculator. 2 Perform the calculation.108 Tools Number Function 1 View the book details. 2 Move to a page by dragging the bar. 3 Search for text in the book. 4 Bookmark the current page. 5 View the table of contents. 6 View the list of bookmarked pages. 7 Change the display settings. 8 Change the text attributes. 9 Change the display mode. 5 Tap the screen to start reading a book. 6 To move pages, drag your finger left or right or tap near the left or right margin of a page. 7 While reading a book, use the following keys. 6 5 9 8 7 1 4 3 2 Tools 109 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Aldiko eBook. 2 Press [ ] → Import. 3 Select Import→ OK. The device searches for book files in the memory card. Downloads Learn to open and manage files you have downloaded from the web and email. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Downloads. 2 Select a download folder. 3 To open a file, select the file. To delete a file, select the check box and then select Delete. › Download book files from the online book store 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Aldiko eBook. 2 Press [ ] → Get more books. The online book store appears. 3 Select a book catalogue → a book. › Import book files You can import book files (in epub format) from the memory card. • Book files must be saved to the /eBooks/import/ folder in your memory card. • DRM-protected book files are not supported.110 Tools 6 Select Tap to create memo, and enter text and select Done. 7 Select Save. › View a Mini diary 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Mini Diary. 2 Select a diary. To upload a mini diary to your community website, press [ ] → Publish. My Files Learn to quickly and easily access all of your images, videos, music, sound clips, and other types of files stored in your device and memory card. Mini Diary Learn to keep a photo diary. › Create a Mini diary 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Mini Diary. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, select Add to set a city for weather forecast. 3 If there is a diary saved, select Create diary to create a new entry. 4 Change the today's date and set the weather (if necessary). 5 Select Tap to add photo and add an image or capture a photo.Tools 111 Task manager With the task manager, you can view currently running applications and memory information. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Task manager. 2 Use the following options: • Active applications: View the list of all the applications currently running on your device. • Downloaded: View the total amount of memory used for applications installed on your device. • RAM: Check and manage the RAM memory for your device. • Storage: View the used and available memory on your device and memory card. • Help: View help information about extending battery life. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select My Files. 2 Select a folder → a file. In a folder, press [ ] to use the following options: • To send a file to others via multimedia message, email or the Bluetooth wireless feature, select Share. • To create a new folder, select Create folder. • To delete files or folders, select Delete. • To change the view mode, select View by. • To sort files or folders, select List by. • To use additional features using a file, such as moving, copying or renaming option, select More.112 Tools 6 Enter a name for the document and select OK. 7 Enter contents in the document by using the tools at the bottom of the screen. 8 When you are finished editing, select on the toolbar or press [ ] → File → Save. › View and edit a document on your device 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select ThinkFree Office. 2 Select My Docs→ a document. 3 View and edit the document as desired. • To zoom in or out, use the two finger zoom; Place your two fingers on the screen and slowly pinch or spread apart. ThinkFree Office Learn to create and view document files on your device. If you have an account with the ThinkFree web service, you can manage documents online. This application supports the following file formats: txt, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, pdf. › Create a new document 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select ThinkFree Office. 2 Select Accept to confirm, if you are launching this application for the first time. 3 Select Activate now→ Close to activate ThinkFree Office. 4 Select My Docs. 5 Press [ ] → New→ a document type.Tools 113 Voice Dialer Learn to dial a number or open an application by voice. • This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. • Your device can recognise only American English commands. • Recognised languages may vary depending on your region. › Call a contact by voice dialling You can call numbers directly by saying the contact’s name or number. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Voice Dialer. 2 Say “Call” or “Dial” and then a name or a phone number. Alternatively, say "Redial" to the last dialled number. The device dials the selected number. • To open the toolbar to edit the document (word, text, or excel file), press [ ] → Edit. • To search for text in the document, press [ ] → Find. 4 When you are finished editing, save the document. › Manage documents online 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select ThinkFree Office. 2 Select Online. 3 Enter your user name and password to access your account, and then select Sign in. 4 View and manage your documents on the server as desired.114 Tools Write and go Learn to enter text and send it as a message, upload it to a community website, or save it as a memo or calendar event. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Write and go. 2 Enter text using the text input panel. 3 When you are finished, select one of the options. • To send a text message with the text, select Send message or Send. • To upload the text to a community website, select Update status. • To save the text as a memo or calendar event, select Save. 4 Send a message, log in to a community service to upload the text, or create a memo or event according to the selected option. › Open an application 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Voice Dialer. 2 Say “Open” and then an application. The device opens the corresponding application. Voice Search Learn to search for information on the web by voice. This feature be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Voice Search. 2 Say a keyword into the microphone. The device searches for information and web pages related to the keyword.Settings 115 Settings Access the Settings menu 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings. 2 Select a setting category and select an option. Wireless and network Change the settings for wireless network connections. › Flight mode Disable all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services. › Wi-Fi settings • Wi-Fi: Turn the WLAN feature on or off. ► p. 94 • Network notification: Set the device to notify you when an open network is available. • WPS button connection: Connect to a WLAN using a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button. • Add Wi-Fi network: Add WLAN APs manually. › Bluetooth settings • Bluetooth: Turn the Bluetooth wireless feature on or off. ► p. 92 • Device name: Set a Bluetooth name for your device. • Discoverable: Set your device to be visible to other Bluetooth devices. • Scan devices: Search for available Bluetooth devices.116 Settings › VPN settings Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). ► p. 102 › Mobile networks • Use packet data: Set to allow packet switched data networks for network services. • Data roaming: Set the device to connect another network when you are roaming or your home network is not available. • Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs). • Network Mode: Select a network type. • Network operators: Search for available networks and select a network for roaming. › Synchronise Set up synchronisation profiles and synchronise your device with the web server you have specified. › USB settings Activate various USB connection modes when you connect your device to a PC. ► p. 100 › Tethering • USB tethering: Activate the USB tethering feature to share your device's mobile network connection with PCs via USB. When connected to a PC, your device is used as a wireless modem for a PC. ► p. 99 • Mobile AP: Activate the mobile AP feature to share your device’s mobile network connection with PCs or other devices through the WLAN feature. ► p. 98 • Mobile AP settings: Change the settings to customise the mobile AP feature.Settings 117 • Call status tones: Activate or deactivate call connection tone, minute minder tone, or call disconnect tone. • Outgoing call vibration: Set the device to vibrate when the other party answers a call. • Alerts on call: Activate or deactivate an alert for events during a call. › Voice call • Call forwarding: Divert incoming calls to another number. • Call barring: Block incoming or outgoing calls. • Call waiting: Specify options for handling an incoming call when you are already on a call. • Auto redial: Activate auto redial for automatically redialling a call that was not connected or cut off during a call. Call settings Customise the settings for calling features. › All calls • Show my number: Show your mobile phone number to recipients (You must insert the SIM or USIM card to use this feature). • Auto reject: Enable or disable the auto reject feature and specify a list of callers to automatically reject. • Answering call: Set the device to answer calls by pressing the Home key or to answer automatically after a specified period (available only when a headset is connected). • Prefix dialling: Activate prefix dialling and set up prefix dialling numbers. • Reject call with message: Select a message to be sent to a caller when you reject a call.118 Settings • Change PIN2: Change the PIN2, which is used to protect the primary PIN. If the SIM or USIM card is locked, this menu changes to Unblock PIN2. • FDN list: Set up a list of contacts for fixed dialling. › Voicemail • Voicemail service: Select your service provider or set another provider to receive voice mails. • Voicemail: Enter the number to access the voice mail service. You can obtain this number from your service provider. Sound Change the settings for various sounds on your device. • Silent mode: Activate the silent mode to mute all sounds except media sounds and alarm ringtones. › Video call • Preset image: Select an image to be shown to the other party. • Own video in received call: Set whether to show your live image or preset image to the other party. • Use call fail options: Select whether or not to retry a voice call when a video call fails to connect. • Video call forwarding: Divert incoming calls to another number. • Video call barring: Block calls from specified numbers. › Fixed Dialing Numbers • Enable FDN: Activate or deactivate FDN mode to restrict calls to numbers in the FDN list. You must enter the PIN2 supplied with your SIM or USIM card and reboot the device.Settings 119 • Haptic feedback: Set the device to vibrate when you touch the keys. • Vibration intensity: Adjust the vibration intensity of the haptic feedback. Display Change the settings for the display. • Wallpapers: - Home screen wallpaper: Select a background image for the idle screen. - Lock screen wallpaper: Select a background image for the screen lock. • Font style: Change the font type for the display text. You can download fonts from Android Market by selecting Get fonts online. • Vibrate: Set when the device will vibrate for various events. • Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, phone system sound, and notification ringtones. • Phone ringtone: Select a ringtone to alert you to incoming calls. • Notification ringtone: Select a ringtone to alert you to events, such as incoming messages, missed calls, and alarms. • Audible touch tones: Set the device to sound when you touch the keys on the dialling screen. • Audible selection: Set the device to sound when you select an application or option on the touch screen. • Screen lock sounds: Set the device to sound when you lock or unlock the touch screen.120 Settings Location and security Change the settings for securing your device and the SIM or USIM card, and GPS functionality. • Use wireless networks: Set to use WLAN and/or mobile networks for finding your location. • Use GPS satellites: Set to use the GPS satellite for finding your location. • Use sensor aiding: Set to use sensors to enhance pedestrian positioning when the GPS signal is obstructed. There may be variations between the sensor estimates and your actual location. • Set screen lock: Set the unlock security code. When you have set your security code, this option changes to Change screen lock. - None: Disable the screen lock. - Pattern: Set an unlock pattern to unlock the screen. • Brightness: Set the brightness of the display. • Auto-rotate screen: Set whether or not to rotate the content automatically when the device is rotated. • Animation: Set the device to display animation when you switch between windows. • Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display's backlight. • Power saving mode: Activate Power saving mode. In Power saving mode, the device saves power by adjusting the white balance on the display and the brightness level. • TV out: Select a video encoding system of your TV for proper TV connections. ► p. 99 • Horizontal calibration: Calibrate the accelerometer to adjust the horizontal axis of the device for better motion recognition.Settings 121 - Samsung account: Set up your Samsung web account to control your lost device remotely. - Change password: Change the password for the mobile tracker feature. - Help: Access help information for the mobile tracker feature. • Visible passwords: By default, the device displays your password as · for security. Set the device to display your password as you enter. • Select device administrators: View device administrators installed on your device. You can activate device administrators to apply new policies to your device. • Use secure credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various applications. • Install encrypted certificates from SD card: Install encrypted certificates that are stored on a memory card. - PIN: Set a PIN (numeric) to unlock the screen. - Password: Set a password (alphanumeric) to unlock the screen. • Set up SIM card lock: - Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before using the device. - Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data. • Mobile tracker: Activate or deactivate the mobile tracker feature which helps you locate your device when it is lost or stolen. ► p. 31 • Set mobile tracker: When you activate the mobile tracker, you can customise the following settings. The setting options may differ depending on your region or service provider. - Set recipient: Set up recipients to receive a tracking message from your lost device.122 Settings • Memory usage: View available memory and the memory used by applications on your device and memory card. • Battery use: View the amount of power consumed by open applications. • Development: - USB debugging: Select to connect your device to a PC by using a PC data cable. This is for application development. - Allow mock locations: Allow mock locations and service information to be sent to a Location Manager service for testing. This is for application development. • Samsung Apps: Select a network connection (Wi-Fi or packet switched data network) to get notifications for new applications from Samsung Apps. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. • Set password: Create and confirm a password for accessing credentials. • Clear storage: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password. Applications Change the settings for managing installed applications. • Unknown sources: Select to download applications from any source. If you do not select this option, you can download applications only from Android Market. • Manage applications: Access the list of the applications installed on the device and check the application information. • Running services: View the services you are using and access them to manage.Settings 123 • Factory data reset: Reset your settings to the factory default values and delete all your data. SD card and phone storage Check memory information of memory cards and your device, and format the external or internal memory. Locale and text Change the settings for text input. › Select locale Select a display language for all menus and applications. Accounts and sync Change the settings for the auto sync feature or manage accounts for synchronisation. • Background data: Select this setting to use the auto sync feature. The auto sync will run in the background without opening applications and synchronise data. • Auto-sync: Set the device to synchronise contact, calendar, and email data automatically. Privacy Change the settings for managing your settings and data. • Back up my data: Back up your device’s settings to the Google server. • Automatic restore: Set the device to restore applications' data you backed up when they are installed in your device.124 Settings • Enable tip indicator: Set to alert you to quick help by blinking the tip indicator. • Auto-spacing: Set the device to automatically insert a space between words. • Auto-capitalization: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first letter after a final punctuation mark, such as a period, question mark, or exclamation mark. • Show complete trace: Set to display the trace of your dragging on the keyboard. • Word choice window: Set how often the word list will display. • Speed vs. accuracy: Set the balance for the speed and accuracy. • Swype help: Access help information for using the Swype keyboard. • Tutorial: Learn how to enter text faster with the Swype keyboard. • Version: View version information. › Select input method Select a default keyboard type for text input. › Swype • Language: Select a language for text input. You cannot enter text in some languages. To enter text, you should change the writing language to one of the supported languages. • Word prediction: Set the device to predict words according to your input and display word suggestions. • Audio feedback: Set to alert you when there are no alternative words for your input if you double-tap a word. • Vibrate on keypress: Set the device to vibrate when you touch a key.Settings 125 • Auto-capitalization: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first letter after a final punctuation mark, such as a period, question mark, or exclamation mark. • Handwriting settings: Customise the recognition time in Handwriting mode. • Voice input: Activate the voice input feature to enter text by voice on the Samsung keypad. • Auto-full stop: Set the device to insert a period when you double-tap the space bar. • Tutorial: Learn how to enter text with the Samsung keypad. Voice input and output Change the settings for the voice recogniser and the textto-speech feature. › Samsung keypad • Portrait keypad types: Select the default input method, such as the QWERTY keyboard, traditional keypad, or handwriting screen. • Input languages: Select languages for text input. You cannot enter text in some languages. To enter text, you should change the writing language to one of the supported languages. • XT9: Activate XT9 mode to enter text using Predictive input mode. • XT9 advanced settings: Activate the advanced features of XT9 mode, such as auto completion, auto correction, or auto substitution, and set up your own word list. • Keypad sweeping: Enable or disable the keypad sweeping feature for the text input mode. You can switch between input modes by scrolling left or right on the keypad.126 Settings • Always use my settings: Set the device to use the settings you specify in applications rather than the default settings. • Default engine: Set the speech synthesis engine to be used for spoken text. • Install voice data: Download and install voice data for the text-to-speech feature. • Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. • Language: Select a language for the text-to-speech feature. • Engines: View the text-to-speech engines downloaded from Android Market. › Voice recognition settings • Language: Select a language for the Google voice recognition. • SafeSearch: Set the device to filter explicit text and/or images from voice search results. • Block offensive words: Hide offensive words your device recognised from voice search results. › Text-to-speech settings • Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. Install voice data for using the text-to-speech feature. • Driving mode: Activate Driving mode to set the device to read verbally notifications for incoming calls or messages, or event details.Settings 127 • Set time: Set the current time manually. • Use 24-hour format: Set to the time to be displayed in 24-hour format. • Select date format: Select a date format. About phone Access information about your device, check the device’s status, and learn how to use your device. Accessibility Change the settings for accessibility features. • Accessibility: Activate an accessibility application you have downloaded, such as Talkback or Kickback, which provide voice, melody, or vibration feedback. • The power key ends calls: Set the device to end a call when you press [ ]. Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how time and date are displayed on your device: • Automatic: Automatically update the time when you move across time zones. • Set date: Set the current date manually. • Select time zone: Set your home time zone.128 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: Code Try this to solve the problem: Password When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. PIN When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using the Lock SIM card menu. Code Try this to solve the problem: PUK Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. PIN2 When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For details, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. • You cannot access some options without a subscription. Contact your service provider for more details.Troubleshooting 129 Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close programs or reset the device to regain functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold [ ] for 8-10 seconds. The device will reboot automatically. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Privacy→ Factory data reset→ Reset phone → Erase everything. Calls are being dropped When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose your connection to the network. Move to another area and try again. The touch screen responds slowly or improperly If your device has a touch screen and the touch screen is not responding properly, try the following: • Remove any protective covers from the touch screen. Protective covers may prevent the device from recognising your inputs and are not recommended for touch screen devices. • Ensure that your hands are clean and dry when tapping the touch screen. • Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. • Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. • If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, take it to your local Samsung Service Centre. 130 Troubleshooting Audio quality is poor • Ensure that you are not blocking the device's internal antenna. • When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. When dialling from contacts, the call is not connected • Ensure that the correct number is stored in the contact list. • Re-enter and save the number, if necessary. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the contact's phone number. The device beeps and the battery icon flashes Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery to continue using the device. Outgoing calls are not connected • Ensure that you have pressed the Dial key. • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. Incoming calls are not connected • Ensure that your device is turned on. • Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. • Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call • Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. • Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. • If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected.Troubleshooting 131 Error messages appear when launching the camera Your Samsung mobile device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera application. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: • Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged. • Free some memory by transferring files to a PC or deleting files from your device. • Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera application after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre. The battery does not charge properly or the device turns off • The battery terminals may be dirty. Wipe both goldcoloured contacts with a clean, soft cloth and try charging the battery again. • If the battery will no longer charge completely, dispose of the old battery properly and replace it with a new battery (refer to your local ordinances for proper disposal instructions). Your device is hot to the touch When you use applications that require more power or use applications on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device's lifespan or performance.132 Troubleshooting Error messages appear when opening music files Some music files may not play on your Samsung mobile device for a variety of reasons. If you receive error messages when opening music files on your device, try the following: • Free some memory by transferring files to a PC or deleting files from your device. • Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRMprotected, ensure that you have the appropriate license or key to play the file. • Ensure that your device supports the file type. Error messages appear when launching the FM radio The FM radio application on your Samsung mobile device uses the headset cable as an antenna. Without a headset connected, the FM radio will be unable to receive radio stations. To use the FM radio, first ensure that the headset is properly connected. Next, scan for and save the available radio stations. If you still cannot use the FM radio after performing these steps, try accessing your desired station with another radio receiver. If you can hear the station with another receiver, your device may require service. Contact a Samsung Service Centre.Troubleshooting 133 Another Bluetooth device is not located • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. • Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to, if necessary. • Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a PC • Ensure that the PC data cable you are using is compatible with your device. • Ensure that you have the proper drivers installed and updated on your PC.134 Safety precautions Safety precautions To prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your device, read all of the following information before using your device. Warning: Prevent electric shock, fire, and explosion Do not use damaged power cords or plugs, or loose electrical sockets Do not touch the power cord with wet hands, or disconnect the charger by pulling on the cord Do not bend or damage the power cord Do not use your device while charging or touch your device with wet hands Do not short-circuit the charger or the battery Do not drop or cause an impact to the charger or the battery Do not charge the battery with chargers that are not approved by the manufacturer Do not use your device during a thunderstorm Your device may malfunction and your risk of electric shock is increased. Do not handle a damaged or leaking Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery For safe disposal of your Li-Ion batteries, contact your nearest authorised service centre. Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Use only Samsung-approved batteries and chargers specifically designed for your device. Incompatible batteries and chargers can cause serious injuries or damage to your device. • Never dispose of batteries or devices in a fire. Follow all local regulations when disposing of used batteries or devices. • Never place batteries or devices on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when overheated. • Never crush or puncture the battery. Avoid exposing the battery to high external pressure, which can lead to an internal short circuit and overheating.Safety precautions 135 Do not use your device near a pacemaker • Avoid using your device within a 15 cm range of a pacemaker if possible, as your device can interfere with the pacemaker. • If you must use your device, keep at least 15 cm away from the pacemaker. • To minimise the possible interference with a pacemaker, use your device on the opposite side of your body from the pacemaker. Do not use your device in a hospital or near medical equipment that can be interfered with by radio frequency If you personally use any medical equipment, contact the manufacturer of the equipment to ensure the safety of your equipment from radio frequency. If you are using a hearing aid, contact the manufacturer for information about radio interference Some hearing aids may be interfered with by the radio frequency of your device. Contact the manufacturer to ensure the safety of your hearing aid. Turn off the device in potentially explosive environments • Turn off your device in potentially explosive environments instead of removing the battery. • Always comply with regulations, instructions and signs in potentially explosive environments. Protect the device, batteries, and chargers from damage • Avoid exposing your device and batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Extreme temperatures can cause the deformation of the device and reduce the charging capacity and life of your device and batteries. • Prevent batteries from contacting metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your batteries and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage. • Never use a damaged charger or battery. Caution: Follow all safety warnings and regulations when using your device in restricted areas Turn off your device where prohibited Comply with all regulations that restrict the use of a mobile device in a particular area. Do not use your device near other electronic devices Most electronic devices use radio frequency signals. Your device may interfere with other electronic devices.136 Safety precautions • Get to know your device and its convenience features, such as speed dial and redial. These features help you reduce the time needed to place or receive calls on your mobile device. • Position your device within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless device without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, let your voice mail answer it for you. • Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving. Suspend calls in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and heavy traffic can be hazardous. • Do not take notes or look up phone numbers. Jotting down a “to do” list or flipping through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibility of driving safely. • Dial sensibly and assess the traffic. Place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. • Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations that have the potential to divert your attention from the road. • Use your device to call for help. Dial a local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident, or medical emergencies. • Do not use your device at refuelling points (service stations), near fuels or chemicals, and at blasting areas. • Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or accessories. Turn off your device when in an aircraft Using your device in an aircraft is illegal. Your device may interfere with the electronic navigation instruments of the aircraft. Electronic devices in a motor vehicle may malfunction due to the radio frequency of your device Electronic devices in your car may malfunction due to radio frequency of your device. Contact the manufacturer for more information. Comply with all safety warnings and regulations regarding mobile device usage while operating a vehicle While driving, safely operating the vehicle is your first responsibility. Never use your mobile device while driving, if it is prohibited by law. For your safety and the safety of others, practice good common sense and remember the following tips: • Use a hands-free device.Safety precautions 137 Do not store your device on slopes If your device falls, it can be damaged. Do not store your device in hot or cold areas. Use your device at -20 °C to 50 °C • Your device can explode if left inside a closed vehicle, as the inside temperature can reach up to 80 °C. • Do not expose your device to direct sunlight for extended periods of time (such as on the dashboard of a car). • Store the battery at 0 °C to 40 °C. Do not store your device with such metal objects as coins, keys and necklaces • Your device may become deformed or malfunction. • If the battery terminals are in contact with metal objects, it may cause a fire. Do not store your device near magnetic fields • Your device may malfunction or the battery may discharge from exposure to magnetic fields. • Magnetic stripe cards, including credit cards, phone cards, passbooks, and boarding passes, may be damaged by magnetic fields. • Use your device to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, a crime in progress, or a serious emergency where lives are in danger, call a local emergency number. • Call roadside assistance or a special, non-emergency assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or another special, non-emergency number. Proper care and use of your mobile device Keep your device dry • Humidity and all types of liquids may damage device parts or electronic circuits. • When wet, remove the battery without turning on your device. Dry your device with a towel and take it to a service centre. • Liquids will change the colour of the label that indicates water damage inside the device. Water damage to your device can void your manufacturer’s warranty. Do not use or store your device in dusty, dirty areas Dust can cause your device to malfunction.138 Safety precautions • Disconnect chargers from power sources when not in use. • Use batteries only for their intended purposes. Use manufacturer-approved batteries, chargers, accessories and supplies • Using generic batteries or chargers may shorten the life of your device or cause the device to malfunction. • Samsung cannot be responsible for the user’s safety when using accessories or supplies that are not approved by Samsung. Do not bite or suck on the device or the battery • Doing so may damage the device or cause explosion. • If children use the device, make sure that they use the device properly. When speaking on the device: • Hold the device upright, as you would with a traditional phone. • Speak directly into the mouthpiece. • Avoid contact with your device’s internal antenna. Touching the antenna may reduce the call quality or cause the device to transmit more radio frequency than necessary. • Hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, use special features that reduce the number of keys you have to press (such as templates and predictive text), and take frequent breaks. • Do not use carrying cases or accessories with magnetic closures or allow your device to come in contact with magnetic fields for extended periods of time. Do not store your device near or in heaters, microwaves, hot cooking equipment, or high pressure containers • The battery may leak. • Your device may overheat and cause a fire. Do not drop your device or cause impacts to your device • The screen of your device may be damaged. • If bent or deformed, your device may be damaged or parts may malfunction. Do not use a flash close to the eyes of people or animals Using a flash close to the eyes may cause temporary loss of vision or damage to the eyes. Ensure maximum battery and charger life • Avoid charging batteries for more than a week, as overcharging may shorten battery life. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use.Safety precautions 139 • Do not disassemble or puncture the battery, as this can cause explosion or fire. Do not paint or put stickers on your device Paint and stickers can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. If you are allergic to paint or metal parts of the product, you may experience itching, eczema, or swelling of the skin. When this happens, stop using the product and consult your physician. When cleaning your device: • Wipe your device or charger with a towel or a rubber. • Clean the terminals of the battery with a cotton ball or a towel. • Do not use chemicals or detergents. Do not use the device if the screen is cracked or broken Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to have it repaired. Do not use the device for anything other than its intended use Avoid disturbing others when using the device in public Protect your hearing • Excessive exposure to loud sounds can cause hearing damage. • Exposure to loud sounds while driving may distract your attention and cause an accident. • Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source and use only the minimum volume setting necessary to hear your conversation or music. Use caution when using the device while walking or moving Always be aware of your surroundings to avoid injury to yourself or others. Do not carry your device in your back pockets or around your waist You can be injured or damage the device if you fall. Do not disassemble, modify, or repair your device • Any changes or modifications to your device can void your manufacturer’s warranty. For service, take your device to a Samsung Service Centre.140 Safety precautions Ensure access to emergency services Emergency calls from your device may not be possible in some areas or circumstances. Before travelling in remote or undeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of contacting emergency services personnel. Be sure to back up important data Samsung is not responsible for data loss. Do not distribute copyright-protected material Do not distribute copyright-protected material that you have recorded to others without the permission of the content owners. Doing this may violate copyright laws. The manufacturer is not liable for any legal issues caused by the user’s illegal use of copyrighted material. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) certification information Your device conforms to European Union (EU) standards that limit human exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy emitted by radio and telecommunications equipment. These standards prevent the sale of mobile devices that exceed a maximum exposure level (known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR) of 2.0 W/kg. During testing, the maximum SAR recorded for this model was 0.268 W/kg. In normal use, the actual SAR is likely to be much lower, as Do not allow children to use your device Your device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt themselves and others, damage the device, or make calls that increase your charges. Install mobile devices and equipment with caution • Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted. • Avoid placing your device and accessories near or in an air bag deployment area. Improperly installed wireless equipment can cause serious injury when air bags inflate rapidly. Allow only qualified personnel to service your device Allowing unqualified personnel to service your device may result in damage to your device and will void your manufacturer’s warranty. Handle SIM cards or memory cards with care • Do not remove a card while the device is transferring or accessing information, as this could result in loss of data and/or damage to the card or device. • Protect cards from strong shocks, static electricity, and electrical noise from other devices. • Do not touch gold-coloured contacts or terminals with your fingers or metal objects. If dirty, wipe the card with a soft cloth.Safety precautions 141 Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. This EEE is compliant with RoHS. Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. the device has been designed to emit only the RF energy necessary to transmit a signal to the nearest base station. By automatically emitting lower levels when possible, your device reduces your overall exposure to RF energy. The Declaration of Conformity statement at the back of this manual demonstrates your device’s compliance with the European Radio & Terminal Telecommunications Equipment (R&TTE) directive. For more information about the SAR and related EU standards, visit the Samsung website. Correct disposal of this product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.142 Safety precautions CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.” Third party services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any interruption or suspension of any content or service made available through this device. Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. Disclaimer Some content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorised by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorised by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device. “THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT CONTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND UNDER NO Index 143 Index access codes 128 alarms creating 105 deactivating 105 stopping 105 AllShare 96 auto rejection 42 battery charging 12 installing 10 Bluetooth activating 92 finding and pairing with devices 93 receiving data 93 sending data 93 brightness, display 29 calculator 107 calendar creating events 76 viewing events 76 call barring 43 call forwarding 42 call log 44 calls answering 39 barring 43 forwarding 42 international numbers 39 making 38 multiparty 40 rejecting 39 using headset 39 using options during voice 40 viewing missed 41 waiting 44 call waiting 44 camera capturing photos 52 customising camcorder 62 customising camera 59 recording videos 60 connections Bluetooth 92 DLNA 96 PC 100 WLAN 94144 Index gallery file formats 64 playing videos 65 viewing photos 64 Google Mail 46 Google Maps 82 Google Search 86 Google Talk 50 idle screen adding items 23 adding panels 25 internet see web browser language 123 downloads applications 35 files 36 ebook downloading 109 importing 109 reading 107 email sending 49 setting accounts 48 viewing 49 file manager 110 fixed dialling number mode 42 flight mode 18 FM radio listening to 69 saving stations 70 contacts copying 74 creating 72 finding 73 importing or exporting 75 setting speed dial 73 daily briefing 89 device customising 27 indicator icons 20 keys 19 layout 18 settings 115 shortcuts panel 24 turning on or off 18 DLNA see AllShareIndex 145 photos capturing 52 capturing action 57 capturing a series 55 capturing by scene 54 capturing combined photos 56 capturing in beauty mode 54 capturing in cartoon mode 58 capturing in smile shot 55 capturing panoramic 56 capturing with vintage colour 56 capturing yourself 58 viewing 64 PIN lock 30 press reader 90 Samsung Apps 88 Samsung Kies 100 multimedia messages sending 45 viewing 46 music player adding files 66 creating playlists 68 playing music 66 PC connections mass storage 102 Samsung Kies 100 Windows Media Player 101 phonebook creating contacts 72 creating groups 74 creating your namecard 73 finding contacts 73 memory card formatting 17 inserting 15 removing 16 memos creating 77 viewing 77 menu screen accessing 25 organising applications 26 messages accessing voice mail 46 sending email 49 sending multimedia 45 sending text 45 setting email accounts 48 mini diary 110 mobile tracker 31146 Index unpack 10 USIM card installing 10 locking 30 video calls answering 39 making 38 using options 41 video player 63, 65 videos playing 63, 65 recording 60 voice calls answering 39 making 38 using options 40 stopwatch 106 synchronisation with a web server 87 with web accounts 36 with Windows Media Player 101 text input 31 text memos 77 text messages sending 45 viewing 46 ThinkFree Office 112 time and date, set 27 timer 106 touch screen locking 23 using 21 settings about phone 127 accessibility 127 accounts and sync 123 applications 122 call settings 117 date and time 127 display 119 locale and text 123 location and security 120 privacy 123 SD card and phone storage 123 sound 118 voice input and output 125 wireless and network 115 silent mode 28 SIM card installing 10 locking 30Index 147 world clock 106 Write and Go 114 YouTube uploading videos 87 watching videos 86 voice mail 46 voice memos playing 78 recording 78 voice recorder 78 VPN connections connecting to 104 creating 103 web browser adding bookmarks 81 browsing web pages 79 Windows Media Player 101 WLAN activating 94 finding and connecting to networks 94 using WPS 95The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 and detailed in Annex[IV] of Directive 1999/5/EC has been followed with the involvement of the following Notified Body(ies): BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK* Identification mark: 0168 The technical documentation kept at : Samsung Electronics QA Lab. which will be made available upon request. (Representative in the EU) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK* 2010.10.29 Joong-Hoon Choi / Lab Manager (place and date of issue) (name and signature of authorised person) * It is not the address of Samsung Service Centre. For the address or the phone number of Samsung Service Centre, see the warranty card or contact the retailer where you purchased your product. Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE) We, Samsung Electronics declare under our sole responsibility that the product GSM WCDMA Wi-Fi Mobile Phone : GT-I9000 to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative documents. SAFETY EN 60950-1 : 2006 +A11:2009 EN 50332-1 : 2000 EN 50332-2 : 2003 SAR EN 50360 : 2001 EN 62209-1 : 2006 EMC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008) EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005) EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009) EN 301 489-19 V1.2.1 (11-2002) EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007) RADIO EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 (05-2007) EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 (05-2007) We hereby declare that [all essential radio test suites have been carried out and that] the above named product is in conformity to all the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your device depending on the software of the device or your service provider. www.samsung.com English (EU). 04/2011. Rev. 1.0 To install Kies (PC Sync) 1. Download the latest version of Kies from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com) and install it on your PC. 2. In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and network→ USB settings→ Samsung Kies. 3. Using a PC data cable, connect your device to your PC. Refer to the Kies help for more information. I9000 Mode d'emploi2 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Merci d’avoir choisi ce téléphone mobile Samsung. Ce téléphone vous permettra de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et sur la technologie exceptionnelle de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et caractéristiques de votre téléphone. À lire avant toute utilisation • Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi et toutes les précautions qui y sont indiquées avant d’utiliser votre téléphone, afin de l'utiliser en toute sécurité. • Les instructions et descriptions mentionnées dans ce mode d’emploi sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre téléphone. • Les illustrations utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer en fonction du produit et de la version logicielle fournie par votre opérateur et peut faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur www.samsung.com. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier en fonction du téléphone, de la version logicielle ou de l’opérateur. • La mise en forme et la distribution de ce mode d’emploi sont basées sur les systèmes d’exploitation Google Android et peuvent varier en fonction du système d’exploitation de l’utilisateur. • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung n’est pas responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des tiers.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 3 Icônes Avant de mettre votre téléphone en service, familiarisez-vous avec les icônes que vous allez trouver dans ce mode d’emploi. Avertissement: situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Attention : situations pouvant endommager votre téléphone ou d’autres équipements Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations supplémentaires • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou de compatibilité causés par la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. • Vous pouvez améliorer la version logicielle de votre appareil mobile en vous connectant le site www.samsung.com. • Les sons, les fonds d’écran et les images fourni(e)s avec ce téléphone sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est restreint à une utilisation entre Samsung et leurs propriétaires respectifs. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ce matériel à des fins commerciales ou autres constitue une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Samsung n’est pas responsable des infractions sur les droits d’auteur commises par l’utilisateur. • Veuillez conserver ce mode d’emploi afin de pouvoir le consulter ultérieurement.4 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. ► Référence : pages contenant plus d’informations. Exemple : ► p.12 (signifie « voir page 12 ») → Suivi de : séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour effectuer une étape. Exemple : Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Messages → Nv message (signifie que vous devez d'abord appuyer sur Messages, puis sur Nv message) [ ] Crochets : touches du téléphone. Exemple : [ ] (représente la touche Marche/Arrêt/ Verrouillage)Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 5 • Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • DivX®, DivX Certified®, ainsi que les logos associés sont des marques de DivX, Inc. et sont utilisées sous licence. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Les logos Android, Google Search™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Android Market™ et Google Talk™ sont des marques de Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées de Oracle et/ ou de ses filiales. Les autres marques sont déposées et demeurent la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. • Windows Media Player® est une marque déposée de Microsoft Corporation. • et sont des marques de SRS Labs, Inc. Les technologies CS Headphone et WOW HD sont fournies sous licence de SRS Labs, Inc.6 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS DIVX DivX® est un format de vidéo numérique créé par DivX, Inc. Cet appareil bénéficie d'une certification officielle de DivX (DivX Certified®) et permet de lire le format vidéo DivX. Rendez-vous sur le site www.divx.com pour obtenir plus d’informations et télécharger des logiciels pour convertir vos fichiers au format vidéo DivX. Les appareils DivX Certified® peuvent lire des vidéos DivX® d'une résolution HD allant jusqu’à 720 pixels, ainsi que du contenu Premium. À PROPOS DE DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND (Vidéo à la carte) Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré pour pouvoir lire des films DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD). Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, repérez la section DivX VOD dans le menu de configuration de votre appareil. Rendezvous sur vod.divx.com pour plus d’informations sur les modalités d’enregistrement.Table des matières 7 Assemblage ............................................. 11 Contenu du coffret ................................................ 11 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie .... 12 Recharger la batterie ............................................ 13 Insérer une carte mémoire (en option) ............ 16 Fixer une dragonne (en option) ......................... 18 Démarrage ............................................... 19 Allumer/éteindre le téléphone .......................... 19 Présentation du téléphone ................................. 20 Utiliser l’écran tactile ............................................ 23 Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches .............................................................. 25 Présentation de l’écran d’accueil ....................... 25 Accéder aux applications .................................... 27 Personnaliser le téléphone ................................. 29 Saisir du texte ......................................................... 34 Télécharger des applications à partir d’Android Market .................................................. 37 Télécharger des fichiers sur le Web ................... 38 Synchroniser des données .................................. 39 Table des matières8 Table des matières Informations personnelles .................... 77 Contacts ................................................................... 77 Calendrier ................................................................ 81 Mémo texte ............................................................ 82 Mémo vocal ............................................................ 83 Web ........................................................... 84 Navigateur .............................................................. 84 Maps ......................................................................... 87 Latitude ................................................................... 89 Adresses .................................................................. 90 Navigation .............................................................. 90 Recherche ............................................................... 91 YouTube ................................................................... 91 Communication ...................................... 41 Appels ...................................................................... 41 Messagerie .............................................................. 47 Google Mail ............................................................ 49 E-mail ....................................................................... 51 Talk ............................................................................ 53 Social Hub ............................................................... 54 Divertissements ...................................... 56 Appareil photo ....................................................... 56 Vidéos ...................................................................... 67 Galerie ...................................................................... 68 Musique ................................................................... 70 Radio FM .................................................................. 74Table des matières 9 Outils ....................................................... 110 Horloge .................................................................. 110 Calculatrice ........................................................... 112 Aldiko eBook ........................................................ 112 Téléchargements ................................................. 114 Mini journal .......................................................... 115 Mes fichiers ........................................................... 115 Gestionnaire de tâches ...................................... 116 ThinkFree Office .................................................. 116 Reconnaissance vocale ...................................... 118 Recherche vocale ................................................ 119 Write and go ......................................................... 119 Synchroniser ........................................................... 93 Samsung Apps ....................................................... 94 Mon Quotidien ....................................................... 94 Press Reader ........................................................... 95 Android Market ..................................................... 96 Connectivité ............................................ 97 Bluetooth ................................................................ 97 Wi-Fi .......................................................................... 99 AllShare ................................................................. 101 Partager une connexion réseau mobile ........ 103 Connexions TV (mode de sortie TV) ............... 105 Connexions PC ..................................................... 105 Connexions VPN .................................................. 10810 Table des matières Paramètres ............................................. 120 Accéder au menu Paramètres .......................... 120 Sans fil et réseaux ................................................ 120 Appel ...................................................................... 122 Son .......................................................................... 124 Affichage ............................................................... 124 Localisation et sécurité ...................................... 125 Applications .......................................................... 127 Comptes et synchro. ........................................... 128 Confidentialité ..................................................... 128 Carte SD et mémoire .......................................... 128 Paramètres de langue ........................................ 128 Entrée et sortie voix ............................................ 131 Accessibilité .......................................................... 132 Date & heure ......................................................... 132 A propos du téléphone ...................................... 132 Dépannage ............................................ 133 Consignes de sécurité .......................... 139 Index ....................................................... 149Assemblage 11 Assemblage Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents: • Téléphone portable • Batterie • Chargeur • Guide de prise en main rapide Utilisez exclusivement des logiciels homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de logiciels piratés ou illégaux peut occasionner des dommages ou des dysfonctionnements qui ne sont pas couverts par la garantie du fabricant. • Les éléments fournis avec votre téléphone peuvent varier en fonction des logiciels et accessoires disponibles dans votre région ou proposés par votre opérateur. • Vous pouvez acquérir d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. • Les accessoires fournis sont spécialement conçus pour votre téléphone. • Il est possible que certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, ne soient pas compatibles avec votre téléphone.12 Assemblage 2 Retirez le cache batterie. Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le cache batterie. 3 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM. Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Lorsque vous vous abonnez à un service de téléphonie mobile, une carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) vous est remise. Elle permet de vous identifier et contient tous les détails de votre abonnement (code PIN, services en option, etc.). Pour bénéficier des services 3G ou 3G+, vous devez vous procurer une carte USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module). Pour installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie : 1 Si le téléphone est allumé, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée et appuyez sur Éteindre pour l’éteindre.Assemblage 13 5 Remettez le cache batterie en place. Recharger la batterie Vous devez recharger la batterie avant d’utiliser le téléphone pour la première fois. Vous pouvez recharger le téléphone à l’aide du chargeur fourni ou en le branchant sur un ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble de connexion PC. • Installez la carte SIM ou USIM dans le téléphone, puce orientée vers le bas. • Lorsque l’appareil ne contient pas de carte SIM ou USIM, vous pouvez utiliser les services hors-réseau de votre appareil, c'est-à-dire les fonctions autres que GSM et Bluetooth, ainsi que certains menus. • N’introduisez pas de carte mémoire dans le compartiment prévu pour la carte SIM. 4 Insérez la batterie.14 Assemblage 2 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du chargeur sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples du téléphone. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager le téléphone. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’explosion de la batterie ou endommager votre téléphone. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, le téléphone émet un signal sonore et affiche un message d’avertissement. L’icône de batterie est alors vide et clignote. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est vraiment insuffisant, le téléphone s’éteint automatiquement. Rechargez la batterie pour remettre le téléphone en marche. › Recharger la batterie avec un chargeur 1 Ouvrez le cache du connecteur à fonctions multiples situé en haut du téléphone.Assemblage 15 4 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas, l’icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le chargeur du téléphone, puis de la prise de courant. Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d’avoir débranché le chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager le téléphone. Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’est pas équipé d’un bouton Marche/Arrêt. Par conséquent, vous devez le débrancher de la prise pour couper l’alimentation. En cours d’utilisation, le chargeur doit rester à proximité de la prise. › Charger avec un câble de connexion PC Avant de recharger le téléphone, assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est allumé. 1 Ouvrez le cache du connecteur à fonctions multiples situé en haut du téléphone. 2 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples du téléphone. 3 Branchez l’autre extrémité du chargeur sur une prise de courant. • Vous pouvez utiliser le téléphone lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Dans ce cas, il est possible que le rechargement complet de la batterie prenne plus de temps. • Lorsque le téléphone est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur du téléphone. • Il est possible que le téléphone chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de rechargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances du téléphone. • Si le téléphone ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung.16 Assemblage Samsung utilise des normes industrielles standardisées pour les cartes mémoire. Néanmoins, il est possible que certaines marques de cartes mémoire ne soient pas entièrement compatibles avec votre téléphone. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager votre téléphone ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Seule la structure de fichiers FAT est compatible avec les cartes mémoire de votre téléphone. Lorsque vous insérez une carte formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, votre téléphone vous invite à la reformater entièrement. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans votre appareil, le répertoire des fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît dans le dossier /mnt/sdcard/ external_sd du menu Mes fichiers. 3 Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble de connexion PC sur un port USB de l’ordinateur. En fonction du type de câble de connexion PC que vous utilisez, il est possible que le rechargement tarde à démarrer. 4 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas, l’icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le câble de connexion PC du téléphone, puis de l’ordinateur. Insérer une carte mémoire (en option) Pour stocker des fichiers multimédia supplémentaires, vous devez utiliser une carte mémoire. Le téléphone est compatible avec les cartes mémoire microSD™ ou microSDHC™ d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 32 Go (en fonction du fabricant et du modèle de carte mémoire).Assemblage 17 › Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer une carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable l’éjecter pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applications→ Paramètres→ Carte SD et mémoire→ Démonter la carte SD. 2 Retirez le cache de la batterie. 3 Poussez la carte avec précaution jusqu’à la faire sortir du téléphone. 4 Retirez la carte de son emplacement. 5 Retirez la carte mémoire. 6 Remettez le cache batterie en place. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque le téléphone y enregistre ou lit des informations. Vous risqueriez de perdre des données et d’endommager la carte mémoire ou le téléphone. 1 Retirez le cache de la batterie. 2 Insérez la carte en orientant la puce vers le bas. 3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son emplacement jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille. 4 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place.18 Assemblage Fixer une dragonne (en option) 1 Retirez le cache batterie. 2 Faites passer une dragonne à travers la fente et accrochez-la au point d’attache. 3 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place. › Formater une carte mémoire Formater une carte mémoire sur un ordinateur peut entraîner des problèmes de compatibilité avec votre téléphone. Formatez la carte mémoire uniquement dans le téléphone. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applications→ Paramètres→ Carte SD et mémoire→ Démonter la carte SD→ Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes stockées dans le téléphone. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur.Démarrage 19 Démarrage Allumer/éteindre le téléphone Pour allumer le téléphone : 1 Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée. 2 Si vous allumez le téléphone pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour configurer celui-ci. Pour l’éteindre, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation de téléphones portables est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. • Pour utiliser uniquement les services hors-réseau sur votre téléphone, c'est-à-dire les fonctions autres que GSM et Bluetooth, activez le mode Horsligne. Appuyez sur la touche [ ] et maintenez-la enfoncée, puis sur Mode Hors-ligne. 20 Démarrage Écouteur Objectif photo avant Écran tactile Touche Retour Capteur de proximité Touche Accueil Touche de volume Capteur de luminosité Touche Menu Microphone Présentation du téléphone › Aspect du téléphone Connecteur à fonctions multiples Cache de la batterie Prise audio 3,5 mm Marche/Arrêt/ Verrouillage Antenne interne Haut-parleur Objectif photo arrièreDémarrage 21 › Icônes d’informations Les icônes qui peuvent apparaître à l’écran peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Icône Description Aucun signal Puissance du signal Réseau GPRS connecté Réseau EDGE connecté Réseau 3G connecté Ouvrir les connexions Wi-Fi disponibles Wi-Fi connecté Bluetooth activé › Touches Touche Fonction Marche/ Arrêt/ Verrouillage Allumer le téléphone (maintenir la touche enfoncée), accéder aux menus rapides (maintenir la touche enfoncée) et verrouiller l’écran tactile. Menu Afficher à l’écran la liste des options disponibles. Accueil Revenir à l’écran d’accueil, ouvrir la liste des applications récentes (maintenir la touche enfoncée). Retour Revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume Régler le volume du téléphone.22 Démarrage Icône Description Renvoi d’appel activé Connecté à un ordinateur Modem USB activé Point d’accès mobile activé Pas de carte SIM/USIM Nouveau SMS ou MMS Nouvel e-mail Nouveau message vocal Alarme activée Notification d’événement Icône Description Kit piéton Bluetooth connecté GPS activé Appel vocal en cours Appel en attente Haut-parleur activé Appel manqué Synchronisation avec le Web Chargement de données Téléchargement de donnéesDémarrage 23 Utiliser l’écran tactile L’écran tactile de votre téléphone vous permet de sélectionner des éléments et des fonctions en toute facilité. Découvrez les manipulations de base relatives à l’utilisation de l’écran tactile. • N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus afin de ne pas rayer l’écran. • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Icône Description Itinérance (hors de la zone de service locale) Mode Discret activé Vibreur activé en mode Discret Mode Hors-ligne activé Lecture audio en cours Lecture audio en pause Radio FM activée en arrière-plan Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie 10:00 AM Heure actuelle24 Démarrage • Faire glisser : posez votre doigt et faites-le glisser vers le bas, le haut, la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre les éléments des différentes listes. • Glisser/déposer : maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément, puis faites-le glisser pour déplacer l’élément. • Appuyer deux fois: appuyez brièvement à deux reprises sur l’écran tactile pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière sur les photos ou les pages Web que vous visionnez. • Passé un certain délai d’inactivité, votre téléphone désactive l’écran tactile automatiquement. Pour réactiver l’écran tactile, appuyez sur [ ] ou sur la touche Accueil. • Vous pouvez également régler la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Affichage→ Mise en veille de l’écran. • Pour une utilisation optimale de l’écran tactile, retirez le film de protection avant d’utiliser le téléphone. • L’écran tactile comporte une couche qui détecte les petites charges électriques émises par le corps humain. Pour de meilleures performances, appuyez sur l’écran tactile du bout du doigt. L’écran tactile ne réagit pas si vous utilisez des objets pointus, tels qu’un stylet ou un stylo. Contrôlez le fonctionnement de l’écran tactile à l’aide des manipulations suivantes: • Appuyer : appuyez une seule fois sur l’écran tactile pour sélectionner ou lancer un menu, une option ou une application. • Maintenir : pour ouvrir une fenêtre d’options contextuelles, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément pendant plus de 2 secondes.Démarrage 25 › Ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil Vous pouvez personnaliser l’écran d’accueil en lui ajoutant des raccourcis pour accéder à des applications, des widgets ou des dossiers. Pour ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil : 1 Appuyez sur [ ] → Ajouter ou maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil. 2 Sélectionnez la catégorie d’éléments → un élément : • Widgets : ajouter des widgets à l’écran d'accueil. • Raccourcis : ajouter des raccourcis pour accéder aux applications, aux favoris et aux contacts. • Dossiers : créer un nouveau dossier. • Fonds d’écran : définir une image d’arrière-plan de votre appareil. La disponibilité de certains éléments dépend du mode d’écran d’accueil en cours. Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle du téléphone. Pour verrouiller l’écran et les touches, appuyez sur [ ]. Pour déverrouiller, allumez l’écran en appuyant sur [ ] ou sur la touche Accueil, puis faites glisser votre doigt sur l'écran. Présentation de l’écran d’accueil Lorsque le téléphone est en mode veille, l’écran d’accueil apparaît. Dans l’écran d’accueil, vous pouvez afficher l’état de votre appareil et accéder à ses applications. L’écran d’accueil comprend 7 volets. Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre l’un des volets de l’écran d’accueil. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur un point en haut de l’écran pour accéder directement au volet correspondant de l’écran d’accueil.26 Démarrage Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil, accéder aux informations de réseau et à la liste des notifications (messages reçus, appels manqués, événements etc.). Pour masquer la liste, refermez le volet des raccourcis en faisant glisser votre doigt de bas en haut. Dans le volet des raccourcis, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: • Wi-Fi : activer ou désactiver la fonction de connexion Wi-Fi. ► p. 99 • Bluetooth : activer ou désactiver la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ► p. 97 • GPS : activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS. • Son : activer ou désactiver le son du téléphone. • Rotation auto : activez ou désactiver la rotation automatique de l'écran. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de votre zone géographique et de votre opérateur. › Déplacer les éléments sur l’écran d’accueil 1 Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément jusqu’à ce qu’il se grise. 2 Faites glisser l’élément jusqu’à l’emplacement désiré. › Supprimer des éléments de l’écran d’accueil 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer. La corbeille apparaît au bas de l’écran d’accueil. 2 Faites glisser l’élément jusqu’à la corbeille. 3 Lorsque l’élément apparaît en rouge, relâchez-le. › Utiliser le volet des raccourcis En mode d’écran d’accueil ou lorsque vous utilisez une application, appuyez sur la zone des icônes d’information et faites glisser votre doigt vers le bas pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis. Démarrage 27 Accéder aux applications Pour accéder aux applications de votre téléphone : 1 Sur l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Applications pour accéder à la liste des applications. 2 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre un écran de menus. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur un point en haut de l’écran pour accéder directement à l’écran de menu correspondant. 3 Sélectionnez une application. • Lorsque vous utilisez des applications fournies par Google, vous devez disposer d’un compte Google. Si vous ne disposez pas de compte Google, créez-en un. • Vous pouvez ajouter un raccourci vers une application en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur l’icône de l’application dans la liste des applications. Vous pouvez déplacer l’icône vers l’emplacement de votre choix dans l’écran d’accueil. › Ajouter ou supprimer des volets d'écran d’accueil Vous pouvez ajouter de nouveaux volets à l’écran d’accueil ou bien en supprimer de façon à organiser les widgets selon vos préférences et vos besoins. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] → Modifier. Vous pouvez également placer deux doigts sur l’écran, puis les resserrer pour passer en mode Modification. 2 Ajoutez ou supprimez des volets en effectuant les opérations suivantes: • Pour supprimer un volet, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une miniature et faites-la glisser dans la corbeille en bas de l’écran. • Pour ajouter un nouveau volet, appuyez sur . • Pour changer l’ordre des volets, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une miniature, puis faites-la glisser à l’endroit désiré. 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ].28 Démarrage 3 Faites glisser l’icône de l’application vers l’emplacement souhaité. Vous pouvez déplacer l’icône d’une application vers un autre écran du menu principal. Vous pouvez aussi déplacer les applications les plus utilisées près de l'icône Accueil. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] → Enregistrer. Pour changer l’ordre des écrans du menu principal : 1 Dans la liste des applications, placez deux doigts sur l’écran, puis resserrez-les. 2 Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur la miniature d’un écran, puis faites-la glisser à l’endroit désiré. › Accéder aux applications récentes 1 Maintenez la touche Accueil enfoncée pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées. 2 Sélectionnez l’application désirée. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Appuyez sur la touche Accueil pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. Le téléphone est équipé d’un capteur de mouvements intégré qui détecte son orientation. Si vous faites pivoter le téléphone alors que vous utilisez des fonctions, l’interface bascule automatiquement en mode Paysage. Pour paramétrer l’interface afin de conserver l’orientation initiale lorsque vous faites pivoter le téléphone, appuyez sur Paramètres→ Affichage→ Mise en veille de l’écran. › Organiser les applications En mode Menu, vous pouvez réorganiser les applications dans la liste des applications en modifiant leur ordre ou en les regroupant par catégories, selon vos préférences et vos besoins. 1 Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur [ ] → Modifier. 2 Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une application.Démarrage 29 Personnaliser le téléphone Tirez le meilleur de votre téléphone en le personnalisant pour qu’il réponde à vos envies et vos préférences. › Régler la date et l’heure 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Date & heure. 2 Réglez la date et l’heure et modifiez d’autres options. › Activer ou désactiver la tonalité des touches Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Son→ Sélection sonore. › Régler le volume de la sonnerie Appuyez vers le haut ou le bas sur la touche Volume pour régler le niveau de la sonnerie. › Utiliser le gestionnaire de tâches Votre téléphone est un appareil multitâche. Il peut exécuter plusieurs applications à la fois. Toutefois, le mode multitâche peut provoquer des blocages, des problèmes de mémoire ou entraîner une consommation supplémentaire d’énergie. Pour éviter ces problèmes, arrêtez les applications inutiles en utilisant le gestionnaire de tâches. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Gestionnaire de tâches→ Applications actives. La liste de toutes les applications actuellement utilisées sur votre téléphone s’affiche. 2 Pour fermer une application, appuyez sur Quitter près de l'application souhaitée. Pour fermer toutes les applications actives, appuyez sur Quitter tout près du nombre total d'applications actives.30 Démarrage › Changer de sonnerie 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Son→ Sonnerie du téléphone. 2 Choisissez une sonnerie dans la liste, puis appuyez sur OK. › Activer une animation en basculant d’une fenêtre à une autre Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Affichage→ Animation → Certaines animations ou Toutes les animations. › Sélectionner un fond d’écran d’accueil 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] → Fond d’écran → une option. 2 Sélectionnez une image. › Activer le profil discret Pour activer ou désactiver le profil Discret de votre téléphone, procédez à l’une des opérations suivantes: • Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→ Clavier, puis maintenez la touche # enfoncée. • Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Profil Discret. Vous pouvez configurer le téléphone afin qu’il vous notifie différents éléments en mode Discret. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Son→ Vibreur → Toujours ou Uniquement en mode Discret. Lorsque le mode Discret est activé, remplace .Démarrage 31 › Définir un verrouillage d'écran Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile avec un modèle de déverrouillage ou un mot de passe pour éviter tout accès non autorisé. • Lorsque vous avez défini un verrouillage d’écran, vous devez saisir un code de déverrouillage chaque fois que vous activez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. • Si vous oubliez votre code PIN de déverrouillage d'écran ou votre mot de passe, apportez votre téléphone dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de codes de sécurité, d’informations confidentielles ou d’autres dommages résultant de l’utilisation de logiciels illégaux. 3 Appuyez sur Sauveg., Définir le fond d’écran ou Sélectionner. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de l’utilisation des images ou des fonds d’écran fourni(e)s par défaut avec votre téléphone. › Régler la luminosité de l’écran Pour régler la luminosité dans le menu des paramètres: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Affichage→ Luminosité. 2 Décochez la case située à côté de Luminosité automatique. 3 Pour régler la luminosité, faites glisser le curseur. 4 Appuyez sur OK. Le niveau de luminosité de l’écran influe sur la vitesse de déchargement de la batterie.32 Démarrage 2 Saisissez un nouveau code PIN de déverrouillage d'écran (numérique) et appuyez sur Continuer. 3 Confirmez le code PIN, puis appuyez sur OK. Définir un mot de passe de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité→ Définir verrouillage → Mot de passe. 2 Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe (alphanumérique) et appuyez sur Continuer. 3 Saisissez de nouveau le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK. › Verrouiller la carte SIM ou USIM Vous pouvez verrouiller votre téléphone en activant le code PIN fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité→ Configurer blocage SIM→ Verrouiller carte SIM. 2 Saisissez votre code PIN et appuyez sur OK. Définir un modèle de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité→ Définir verrouillage → Modèle. 2 Prenez connaissance des instructions affichées et des exemples de modèles, puis appuyez sur Suivant (si nécessaire). 3 Dessinez un modèle en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran pour relier au moins 4 points. 4 Appuyez sur Continuer. 5 Dessinez à nouveau le modèle pour confirmer. 6 Appuyez sur Confirmer. Définir un code PIN de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité→ Définir verrouillage → Code PIN.Démarrage 33 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité → Définir le traçage du mobile. 2 Saisissez votre mot de passe et appuyez sur OK. 3 Appuyez sur OK pour continuer. 4 Saisissez l’adresse e-mail et le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung, puis appuyez sur Ouvrir une session. Pour créer un compte Samsung, appuyez sur Se connecter. 5 Lisez les conditions d’utilisation et appuyez sur Accepter. 6 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone précédé de l’indicatif du pays (avec +). 7 Saisissez le nom d’un destinataire. 8 Rédigez le message à envoyer aux destinataires. 9 Appuyez sur Enreg. Pour pouvoir accéder à la fonction de Traçage du mobile, vous devez posséder un compte Samsung. Lorsque le verrouillage PIN est activé, vous devez saisir votre code PIN chaque fois que vous allumez votre téléphone. • Si vous saisissez un code PIN erroné à plusieurs reprises, votre carte SIM ou USIM se bloque. Vous devez alors saisir le code PIN de déverrouillage (PUK) afin de débloquer la carte SIM ou USIM. • Si vous bloquez votre carte SIM ou USIM en saisissant un code PUK erroné, apportez-la chez votre revendeur pour la faire débloquer. › Activer le traçage du mobile Lorsque quelqu’un introduit une autre carte SIM/USIM que la vôtre dans votre téléphone, la fonction de traçage envoie automatiquement le nouveau numéro de téléphone aux destinataires spécifiés, afin de vous aider à le localiser et à le récupérer. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez créer un compte Samsung.34 Démarrage 2 Continuez ainsi jusqu’à la fin du mot. 3 Relâchez votre doigt après le dernier caractère. 4 Lorsque le mot souhaité apparaît correctement, appuyez sur pour insérer un espace. Si le mot souhaité ne s’affiche pas, choisissez un autre mot dans la liste affichée. 5 Répétez les étapes 1 à 4 pour rédiger tout votre texte. Saisir du texte Vous pouvez saisir du texte en utilisant les caractères du clavier virtuel ou en utilisant l’option d’écriture manuscrite. Vous ne pouvez pas saisir du texte dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez utiliser une langue prise en charge. ► p. 128 › Modifier le type de clavier Vous pouvez modifier le type de clavier. Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur le champ de saisie, puis appuyez sur Mode de saisie→ un type de clavier (Swype ou Samsung). › Saisir du texte avec le clavier Swype 1 Appuyez sur le premier caractère d’un mot et faites glisser votre doigt, en le maintenant sur l’écran, vers le second caractère. Démarrage 35 • Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les touches pour saisir du texte. • Vous pouvez maintenir une touche enfoncée pour saisir les caractères de la moitié supérieure de la touche. Lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche jusqu’à ce que la liste de caractères apparaisse, vous pouvez saisir des caractères spéciaux et des symboles. Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes: 6 4 5 7 1 3 2 Numéro Fonction 1 Modifier la casse. 2 Accéder à l’écran TIP SWIPE et ouvrir les informations d’aide (appuyer et maintenir enfoncé). 3 Basculer entre les modes Symbole et ABC/ Numérique. 4 Supprimer des caractères. 5 Effectuer un retour à la ligne. 6 Saisir du texte oralement. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible selon la langue de saisie sélectionnée. 7 Insérer un espace.36 Démarrage Numéro Fonction 1 Changer la casse. 2 Basculer entre les modes Numérique/ Symbole et ABC. 3 Saisir du texte oralement. Cette icône est disponible uniquement lorsque vous activez la fonction de reconnaissance vocale pour le clavier Samsung. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible selon la langue de saisie sélectionnée. 4 Effacer la saisie. 5 Effectuer un retour à la ligne. 6 Accéder aux paramètres du clavier. Modifier le mode de saisie de texte (maintenir enfoncée). › Saisir du texte avec le clavier Samsung 1 Appuyez sur → Types de clavier Portrait, puis choisissez un mode de saisie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l’un des modes de saisie à touches (AZERTY ou clavier traditionnel) ou l’écriture manuscrite. 2 Saisissez le texte en appuyant sur les touches alphanumériques ou en écrivant sur l’écran. Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes: 5 6 4 7 1 2 3 Démarrage 37 3 Appuyez sur Sélectionner texte dans la liste des options. 4 Appuyez sur Copier pour copier ou Couper pour couper le texte vers le presse-papier. 5 Dans une autre application, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur le champ de saisie. 6 Appuyez sur Coller pour insérer le texte du presse-papier dans le champ de saisie. Télécharger des applications à partir d’Android Market La plate-forme Android qui équipe votre téléphone permet d’enrichir ses fonctions en installant des applications supplémentaires. Android Market vous permet d’acheter facilement et rapidement des applications et des jeux pour mobiles. Numéro Fonction 7 Insérer un espace. Insérer un point (double appui). Changer de langue de saisie (maintenir enfoncé, puis faire défiler à gauche ou à droite). Les fonctions de cette touche peuvent varier en fonction de votre opérateur. › Copier et coller du texte Lorsque vous saisissez du texte, vous pouvez exploiter la fonction copier-coller pour utiliser le même texte dans d’autres applications. 1 Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez démarrer. 2 Appuyez sur ou maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur le champ de saisie de texte.38 Démarrage › Désinstaller une application 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil d’Android Market, appuyez sur Mes applications. 2 Sélectionnez l’élément à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur Désinstaller→ OK. Télécharger des fichiers sur le Web Lorsque vous téléchargez des fichiers ou des applications sur le Web, votre téléphone les enregistre dans la carte mémoire. Les fichiers téléchargés sur le Web peuvent contenir des virus potentiellement dangereux pour le téléphone. Pour réduire les risques, téléchargez uniquement des fichiers provenant de sources fiables. Certains fichiers multimédia intègrent le système de Gestion des droits numériques (DRM) visant à protéger les droits d’auteur. Cette protection peut empêcher le téléchargement, la copie, la modification ou le transfert de certains fichiers. • En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. • Votre appareil enregistrera les fichiers utilisateur des applications téléchargées dans la mémoire interne moviNAND™. Pour enregistrer les fichiers sur la carte mémoire, branchez votre téléphone sur un PC et copiez les fichiers à partir de moviNAND vers la carte mémoire. • Vous devez posséder un compte Google pour accéder à Android Market. Si vous ne possédez pas de compte Google, inscrivez-vous au service. › Installer une application 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Android Market. 2 Appuyez sur Accepter dans la fenêtre des conditions d’utilisation. 3 Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le téléchargement.Démarrage 39 › Paramétrer un compte 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Comptes et synchro. 2 Appuyez sur Ajouter un compte→ un type de compte. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer la configuration du compte. Pour les services communautaires en ligne, tels que Facebook ou MySpace, saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe et appuyez sur Se connecter. › Activer la synchronisation automatique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Comptes et synchro. 2 Appuyez sur Synchronisation auto. 3 Sélectionnez un compte. 4 Sélectionnez les applications à synchroniser. Pour exclure des applications de la synchronisation automatique, décochez les cases situées à côté des applications concernées. Pour télécharger des fichiers sur le Web : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Navigateur. 2 Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le téléchargement. Pour installer des applications téléchargées à partir de sites Web autres qu’Android Market, appuyez sur Paramètres→ Applications→ Sources inconnues. Synchroniser des données Vous pouvez synchroniser des données avec différents serveurs Web et les sauvegarder ou les restaurer. Une fois la synchronisation terminée, le téléphone reste connecté au Web. Si une modification est apportée sur le Web, les informations mises à jour s’affichent sur votre téléphone et la synchronisation débute automatiquement, et inversement. En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible.40 Démarrage › Synchroniser des données manuellement 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Comptes et synchro. 2 Sélectionnez un compte. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] → Synchroniser maintenant. Votre téléphone commence à synchroniser les données que vous avez sélectionnées.Communication 41 Communication Appels Découvrez comment utiliser les fonctions d’appel de votre téléphone : passer un appel, répondre à un appel, utiliser les options disponibles en cours d’appel ou personnaliser les autres fonctions. › Passer un appel et répondre Vous pouvez utiliser les touches physiques du téléphone ou celles de l’écran tactile pour passer, accepter, refuser ou terminer un appel. Passer un appel 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone → Clavier, puis saisissez le numéro de téléphone à appeler précédé de son indicatif régional. 2 Pour effectuer un appel vocal, appuyez sur . Pour effectuer un appel visio, appuyez sur . Lorsque vous tenez le téléphone à proximité de votre visage, celui-ci verrouille automatiquement l’écran tactile pour éviter toute saisie accidentelle. 3 Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin. • Utilisez le répertoire pour enregistrer les numéros que vous composez fréquemment. ► p. 77 • Pour accéder rapidement au journal d'appels et composer les numéros récemment utilisés, appuyez sur Téléphone → Journaux. • Utilisez la fonction de commande vocale pour composer un numéro oralement. ► p. 11842 Communication Appeler un numéro à l’étranger 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone → Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 0 enfoncée pour insérer le caractère +. 2 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone que vous souhaitez composer en entier (indicatif du pays, indicatif régional et numéro de téléphone), puis appuyez sur pour appeler ce numéro. › Utiliser un kit piéton En branchant un kit piéton sur le téléphone, vous pouvez répondre aux appels et les contrôler en mains libres: • Appuyez sur la touche du kit piéton pour répondre à un appel. • Pour rejeter un appel, maintenez la touche du kit piéton enfoncée. • Pour placer un appel en attente ou le récupérer un appel mis en attente, maintenez la touche du kit piéton enfoncée. • Pour raccrocher, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche du kit piéton. Répondre à un appel 1 Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser l'icône vers la droite. Pour désactiver la sonnerie lorsque le téléphone sonne, appuyez sur la touche de volume. 2 Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin. Rejeter un appel Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser l'icône vers la gauche. Pour envoyer un message lorsque vous rejetez des appels entrants, appuyez sur Refus avec message. Pour créer un message de rejet, appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel→ Tous les appels→ Rejeter l’appel avec message.Communication 43 Dans un environnement bruyant, il vous sera difficile d’entendre clairement votre correspondant avec la fonction haut-parleur. Utilisez le mode combiné classique pour une meilleure qualité sonore. • Pour désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne vous entende pas, appuyez sur Muet. • Pour discuter avec votre correspondant via un kit piéton Bluetooth, appuyez sur Casque. • Pour ouvrir le répertoire, appuyez sur [ ] → Contacts. • Pour ajouter un mémo, appuyez sur [ ] → Mémo. • Pour passer d'un appel à l'autre, appuyez sur Permuter. • Pour lancer une conférence téléphonique, composez un second numéro ou répondez à un autre appel, puis appuyez sur Fusionner lorsque vous êtes en communication avec le deuxième correspondant. Répétez cette même procédure pour ajouter d’autres correspondants. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez d’abord souscrire au service de conférence téléphonique. › Utiliser des options au cours d’un appel vocal Au cours d’un appel vocal, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: • Pour régler le niveau sonore de l’appel, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas. • Pour placer un appel en attente, appuyez sur . Pour récupérer un appel en attente, appuyez sur . • Pour passer un appel alors qu’un autre est déjà en cours, appuyez sur Ajouter et composez le nouveau numéro. • Pour répondre à un second appel, faites glisser l'icône vers la droite lorsqu’un signal d’appel retentit. Le téléphone vous demande alors si vous souhaitez mettre fin au premier appel ou le mettre en attente. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez d’abord souscrire au service de mise en attente des appels. • Pour ouvrir l’écran d’appel, appuyez sur Clavier. • Pour activer le haut-parleur, appuyez sur HP.44 Communication • Pour utiliser l’image de votre correspondant, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son image. Vous pouvez capturer l’image à l’écran ou enregistrer l’appel visio. • Pour utiliser votre image, maintenez le doigt sur celle-ci. Vous pouvez régler la luminosité, faire un zoom avant ou arrière via l’objectif arrière, ou flouter votre image via l’objectif avant. › Afficher les appels manqués et rappeler les numéros correspondants Votre téléphone affiche les appels manqués à l’écran. Pour composer le numéro correspondant à un appel manqué, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et sélectionnez l’appel manqué. › Utiliser des fonctions supplémentaires Vous pouvez utiliser diverses autres fonctions d’appel comme le rejet automatique, le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN), le renvoi ou l’interdiction d’appel. › Utiliser des options pendant un appel visio Au cours d’un appel visio, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: • Pour activer le haut-parleur, appuyez sur HP. • Pour désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne vous entende pas, appuyez sur Muet. • Pour que votre correspondant ne voit plus votre image, appuyez sur [ ] → Masquer. • Pour changer l’image à afficher à votre correspondant, appuyez sur [ ] → Image sortante. • Pour ouvrir l’écran de numérotation, appuyez sur [ ] → Clavier. • Pour discuter avec l'objectif arrière correspondant via un kit piéton Bluetooth, appuyez sur [ ] → Casque. • Pour passer de l’objectif avant à l’objectif arrière, et viceversa, appuyez sur [ ] → Changer d'objectif. • Pour personnaliser les paramètres des appels visio, appuyez sur [ ] → Paramètres.Communication 45 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Numérotation fixe → Activer FDN. 2 Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM et appuyez sur OK. 3 Appuyez sur Liste FDN et ajoutez les contacts à utiliser en mode FDN. Configurer le transfert d'appel Le transfert d’appel est une fonction réseau qui permet de transférer les appels entrants vers un autre numéro prédéfini. Vous pouvez configurer le transfert d’appel en fonction de différentes situations, lorsque vous ne pouvez pas répondre aux appels, par exemple, lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne ou lorsque vous n’êtes pas dans une zone couverte par le réseau. Pour définir le transfert d’appel pour les appels vocaux : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Appel vocal → Transfert d’appel. Définir le rejet automatique Pour rejeter automatiquement certains appels, utilisez l’option de rejet automatique. Pour activer le rejet automatique et définir la liste des numéros à rejeter : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Tous les appels → Rejet automatique. 2 Appuyez sur Activer le rejet automatique pour activer cette fonction. 3 Appuyez sur Liste de rejet automatique. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] → Créer. 5 Saisissez un numéro à rejeter et appuyez sur Enregistrer. 6 Pour ajouter d’autres numéros, répétez les étapes 4-5. Utiliser le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN) En mode FDN, votre téléphone restreint l’émission d’appels qui n’est alors possible que pour les numéros enregistrés dans la liste FDN. Pour activer le mode FDN : 46 Communication 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Appel vocal → Restriction d'appel. Pour un appel visio, Paramètres→ Appel→ Appel visio → Appels visio interdits. 2 Sélectionnez un type d’appels à restreindre. 3 Saisissez votre mot de passe d’interdiction d’appel, puis appuyez sur OK. Votre paramètre est envoyé au réseau. Configurer le signal d’appel Le signal d’appel est une fonction réseau qui vous permet d’être averti de l’arrivée d’un second appel lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Appel vocal → Signal d’appel. Votre paramètre est envoyé au réseau. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour les appels vocaux. 2 Sélectionnez une condition. 3 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone vers lequel vos appels doivent être transférés et appuyez sur Activer. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau. Pour définir le transfert d’appel pour les appels visio : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Appel visio → Transfert d’appel visio. 2 Sélectionnez une condition. 3 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone vers lequel vos appels doivent être transférés et appuyez sur Activer. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau. Configurer la restriction d’appel La restriction d’appel est une fonction réseau qui interdit certains types d’appel ou qui empêche d’autres personnes de passer des appels avec votre téléphone.Communication 47 Messagerie Découvrez comment créer et envoyer des messages texte (SMS), multimédia (MMS) et comment afficher ou gérer les messages envoyés ou reçus. L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut occasionner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre souscrite auprès de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. › Envoyer un SMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Messages→ Nv message. 2 Appuyez sur Contacts. Vous pouvez saisir un numéro manuellement ou le sélectionner à partir du journal d'appels, du répertoire ou d'un groupe. 3 Cochez les cases accolées aux contacts, puis appuyez sur Ajouter. › Afficher les journaux d’appels Vous pouvez afficher le journal d'appels en effectuant un tri par catégorie. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→ Journaux. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Afficher par→ une option pour trier les journaux d’appels. À partir du journal d'appels, vous pouvez appeler un contact ou lui envoyer un message directement en faisant glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur son nom. 3 Sélectionnez l’un des journaux pour en afficher les détails. À partir des détails de l’appel, vous pouvez rappeler ce correspondant, lui envoyer un message ou l’ajouter au répertoire ou à la liste des appels à rejeter.48 Communication 5 Appuyez sur [ ] → Joindre→ une option, puis ajoutez un élément. Vous pouvez sélectionner un fichier à partir de la liste des fichiers ou capturer une photo, une vidéo ou un enregistrement audio. 6 Appuyez sur [ ] → Ajouter un objet et ajoutez l’objet du message. 7 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. › Afficher un SMS ou un MMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Messages. Vos messages sont regroupés sous forme de fils de discussion par contact, comme pour une messagerie instantanée. 2 Sélectionnez un contact. 3 Sélectionnez un SMS ou un MMS dans le fil de messages. 4 Appuyez sur Entrer le message ici et saisissez votre SMS. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] → Insérer smiley. 5 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. › Envoyer un MMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Messages→ Nv message. 2 Appuyez sur Contacts. Vous pouvez saisir un numéro ou une adresse e-mail manuellement ou le/la sélectionner à partir du journal d'appels, du répertoire ou d'un groupe. 3 Cochez les cases accolées aux contacts, puis appuyez sur Ajouter. Lorsque vous saisissez une adresse e-mail, le téléphone convertit le message en MMS. 4 Appuyez sur Entrer le message ici et saisissez votre SMS. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] → Insérer smiley.Communication 49 Google Mail Vous pouvez récupérer les nouveaux e-mails directement dans votre boîte de réception à partir de Google Mail™. Lorsque vous accédez à cette application, l’écran Boîte de réception s’affiche. Le nombre total de messages non lus s’affiche dans la barre de titre et les messages non lus apparaissent en gras. Si vous avez affecté un libellé à un message, celui-ci apparaît dans un rectangle de couleur. • En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. • Le menu Gmail peut s’intituler différemment en fonction de votre opérateur téléphonique. › Envoyer un e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Google Mail. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Nouveau message. 3 Saisissez un nom ou une adresse dans le champ du destinataire. › Écouter la messagerie vocale Si vous avez configuré le téléphone pour que les appels auxquels vous ne pouvez pas répondre soient dirigés vers la boîte vocale, vos correspondants pourront vous laisser un message vocal. Pour accéder à votre messagerie vocale et écouter vos messages vocaux : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone → Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 1 enfoncée. 2 Suivez les instructions du serveur de messagerie vocale. Pour pouvoir accéder au serveur de messagerie vocale, vous devez d’abord enregistrer son numéro. Contactez votre opérateur qui vous fournira ce numéro.50 Communication • Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur Suppr. • Pour passer au message précédent ou suivant, appuyez sur ou . › Organiser les e-mails par libellé Vous pouvez organiser votre messagerie en affectant un libellé à vos messages ou en leur ajoutant une étoile pour faire ressortir les messages importants. Vous pouvez ainsi trier les messages en fonction du libellé. Ajouter un libellé à un message 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un message. 2 Appuyez sur Changer de libellés. 3 Choisissez le libellé à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Ajouter une étoile à un message 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un message. 2 Appuyez sur Activer le suivi. Une étoile apparaît près du message. 4 Saisissez l’objet, ainsi que le contenu du message. 5 Pour joindre un fichier image, appuyez sur [ ] → Pièce jointe→ un fichier. 6 Appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail. › Consulter les e-mails 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Google Mail. 2 Sélectionnez un e-mail. En mode affichage d’un e-mail, utilisez les options suivantes: • Pour répondre à l’e-mail, appuyez sur . • Pour répondre à tous les destinataires, appuyez sur → Rép. à tous. • Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Transférer. • Pour afficher une pièce jointe, appuyez sur Aperçu. Pour l’enregistrer sur votre téléphone, appuyez sur Télécharger. • Pour archiver le message, appuyez sur Archiver.Communication 51 Une fois le compte de messagerie créé, les e-mails sont téléchargés sur votre téléphone. Si vous avez créé plusieurs comptes, vous pouvez passer d'un compte e-mail à l'autre. Pour ce faire, appuyez sur [ ] → Comptes, puis sélectionnez celui à partir duquel vous voulez récupérer les messages. › Envoyer un e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur E-mail→ un compte e-mail. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Rédiger. 3 Appuyez sur Contacts. Vous pouvez saisir une adresse e-mail manuellement ou la sélectionner à partir du journal d'appels, du répertoire ou d'un groupe. 4 Cochez les cases accolées aux contacts, puis appuyez sur Ajouter. Filtrer les messages 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, appuyez sur [ ] → Ouvrir les libellés. 2 Sélectionnez le libellé des messages à afficher. E-mail Découvrez comment envoyer ou consulter des e-mails via votre compte de messagerie électronique personnel ou professionnel. › Créer un compte e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur E-mail. 2 Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. 3 Appuyez sur Suivant (pour des comptes e-mail classiques comme Gmail ou Yahoo) ou Config. manuelle (pour vos comptes e-mail professionnels). 4 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran.52 Communication › Afficher un e-mail Lorsque vous ouvrez un compte e-mail, vous pouvez afficher hors connexion les e-mails précédemment récupérés ou vous connecter au serveur de messagerie pour consulter vos nouveaux messages. Une fois les messages récupérés, vous pouvez les lire hors connexion. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur E-mail→ un compte e-mail. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Actualiser pour mettre à jour la liste des messages. 3 Sélectionnez un e-mail. En mode affichage d’un e-mail, utilisez les options suivantes: • Pour répondre au message, appuyez sur [ ] → Répondre. • Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur [ ] → Transf. 5 Appuyez sur le champ Cc/Cci pour ajouter d’autres destinataires. 6 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’objet et indiquez un objet. 7 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie du texte et rédigez votre e-mail. 8 Appuyez sur Joindre et joignez un fichier. Vous ne pouvez pas joindre les fichiers protégés par le système de Gestion des droits numériques (DRM). 9 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. Si vous êtes hors connexion ou en dehors de votre zone de couverture, le message est conservé dans le fil des messages jusqu’à votre prochaine connexion ou jusqu’à ce que vous vous trouviez de nouveau dans une zone couverte par votre opérateur.Communication 53 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Ajouter un ami. 3 Saisissez l’adresse e-mail d’un contact et appuyez sur Envoyer une invitation. Lorsque votre ami accepte l’invitation, ce dernier est ajouté à votre liste d’amis. › Démarrer une session de discussion 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Talk. 2 Sélectionnez un nom dans la liste de vos amis. L’écran de discussion s’ouvre. 3 Saisissez votre message et appuyez sur Envoyer. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus→ Insérer une émoticône. 4 Pour basculer d’une discussion à une autre, appuyez sur [ ] → Changer de chat. 5 Pour clôturer une session de discussion, appuyez sur [ ] → Arrêter le chat. • Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur [ ] → Supprimer. • Pour consulter une pièce jointe, faites glisser l’écran vers le bas et sélectionnez la pièce jointe. Pour l’enregistrer sur votre téléphone, appuyez sur . Talk Découvrez comment discuter avec votre famille ou vos amis par l’intermédiaire de Google Talk™. En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. › Ajouter des amis à votre liste d’amis 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Talk. La liste des amis vous permet de voir tous vos contacts Google Talk en un seul coup d’œil.54 Communication › Bienvenue dans le Social Hub™ Les 3 avantages de votre Social Hub™ 1 Tous vos contacts : Synchronisez vos répertoires en ligne (mails et réseaux sociaux) avec votre téléphone. 2 Boîte de réception Social Hub™: Gérez vos messages et conversations en une seule application. 3 Calendrier unifié : Synchronisez l'ensemble de vos calendriers en ligne et consultez votre emploi du temps d'un seul coup d'oeil. Social Hub Social Hub™ est un service de messagerie unique qui rassemble tous vos comptes (e-mails et réseaux sociaux) au sein d’une solution unifiée et intégrée au répertoire. • Certains services Social HubTM pourraient ne pas être disponibles en fonction de votre opérateur et/ ou de la version logicielle de votre téléphone. • L'accès aux services Social HubTM peut entraîner des coûts de connexion supplémentaires en fonction de l'offre souscrite auprès de votre opérateur. Pour plus d'informations, renseignez-vous auprès de votre opérateur.Communication 55 Gérer votre calendrier unifié Le calendrier unifié de Social Hub™ vous permet de gérer votre agenda en y intégrant vos évènements communautaires. Les évènements associés à un de vos comptes seront synchronisés, que vous les modifiiez en ligne ou sur votre mobile. 1 En mode Menu, appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Affichez/modifiez les évènements qui ont été synchronisés à partir de vos différents comptes. 3 Créez de nouveaux évènements et synchronisez-les avec votre compte favori. Communiquer avec vos contacts Grâce à Social Hub™ retrouvez toutes les informations de vos contacts pour une meilleure communication. 1 Accédez à votre répertoire à partir de l'écran d'accueil. 2 Retrouvez en un clin d'oeil vos contacts ainsi que leur statut de connexion. 3 Sélectionnez un contact et choisissez le moyen de communication souhaité : SMS, MMS, e-mail, messagerie instantannée. Consulter vos messages Avec Social Hub™, gérez vos messages et vos conversations en toute simplicité grâce à un système de notifications intégré. 1 En mode Menu, appuyez sur Social Hub. 2 Vous n'avez qu'une seule boîte de réception pour tous vos SMS/MMS, e-mails et actualités communautaires. 3 Appuyez sur l'enveloppe pour consulter vos messages ou sur la bulle pour lancer une discussion instantanée.56 Divertissements Divertissements Appareil photo Découvrez comment capturer et visionner des photos et des vidéos. Vous pouvez prendre des photos d'une résolution allant jusqu’à 2560 x 1920 pixels (5 mégapixels) et enregistrer des vidéos d'une résolution allant jusqu’à 1280 x 720 pixels. › Capturer une photo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. • L’interface de l’appareil photo s’affiche uniquement en mode paysage. • L’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. • Il est possible que les capacités de la mémoire diffèrent en fonction de la scène photographiée ou des conditions de prise de vue. 3 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 8 9 10 2 3 5 6 1 7 4 Divertissements 57 Numéro Fonction 6 Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. 7 Afficher ou masquer les icônes sur l’objectif. 8 Basculer en mode Caméscope. 9 Capturer une photo. 10 Ouvrir la fenêtre de visualisation des photos pour afficher les dernières photos capturées. 4 Appuyez sur la touche de volume pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis les écarter (rapprochez vos doigts pour faire un zoom arrière). Numéro Fonction 1 Barre d'état et de paramètres : • : résolution • : type de mesure d’exposition • : GPS activé • : nombre de photos que vous pouvez prendre (en fonction de la mémoire disponible) • : emplacement de stockage par défaut 2 Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. 3 Modifier le mode de prise de vue. 4 Modifier le mode de scène. 5 Régler la valeur d’exposition.58 Divertissements › Capturer une photo à l’aide des options prédéfinies Votre appareil photo propose des paramètres prédéfinis pour différents types de scènes. Il vous suffit de sélectionner le mode approprié aux conditions et aux sujets de vos prises de vue. Par exemple, si vous prenez des photos la nuit, sélectionnez le mode Nuit dont l’exposition sera supérieure à une photo prise de jour. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → une scène → . 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. 5 Appuyez à l’endroit où vous souhaitez effectuer la mise au point. Le cadre de l’image se déplace à l’endroit où vous appuyez et devient vert lorsque la mise au point du sujet est terminée. 6 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. La photo est enregistrée automatiquement. Après avoir pris des photos, appuyez sur l’icône de visualisation des photos pour les visionner. • Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher toutes les photos. • Appuyez sur ou pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière, vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur l’écran. • Pour envoyer une photo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager. • Pour définir la photo en tant que fond d’écran ou l’attribuer à un correspondant, appuyez sur Définir comme. • Pour supprimer une photo, appuyez sur Supprimer.Divertissements 59 3 Appuyez sur → Sourire. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur . 6 Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo vers le sujet. Votre appareil reconnaît les visages sur une photo et détecte leur sourire. Lorsque le sujet sourit, l’appareil prend automatiquement une photo. › Capturer une série de photos Vous pouvez facilement capturer une série de photos de sujets en mouvement. Ceci est utile lorsque vous réalisez des photos d’enfants en train de jouer ou d’évènements sportifs par exemple. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Continu. › Capturer une photo en mode Beauté Vous pouvez masquer les imperfections des visages en utilisant le mode Beauté. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Beauté. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. › Capturer une photo en mode Sourire Votre appareil photo peut reconnaître les visages et vous aider à prendre des photos lorsque vos sujets sourient. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage.60 Divertissements 6 Déplacez doucement le téléphone dans une direction et alignez le cadre vert avec l’objectif. Lorsque le cadre vert est aligné avec l’objectif, l’appareil photo prend automatiquement la photo suivante. 7 Répétez l’étape 6 pour terminer la photo panoramique. › Capturer une photo en mode Vintage Vous pouvez capturer des photos et leur donner un aspect et une impression vintage en appliquant des filtres de couleur. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Vintage. 4 Appuyez sur pour choisir un filtre de couleur. 5 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 6 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Maintenez la touche enfoncée. L’appareil photo multiplie les prises de vue jusqu’à ce que vous relâchiez le déclencheur. › Capturer une photo en mode Panorama Vous pouvez prendre de larges photos panoramiques en utilisant le mode Panorama. Ce mode est conseillé pour photographier les paysages. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Panorama. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre la première photo.Divertissements 61 6 Appuyez sur pour prendre la première photo. La moitié de la première photo s’affiche sous forme de calque transparent pour la photo suivante. 7 Procédez à tous les réglages nécessaires à l’aide du guide. 8 Appuyez sur pour prendre la seconde photo. Le téléphone assemble automatiquement la moitié de la première photo et la moitié de la seconde photo pour ne former qu’un seul cliché. › Capturer une photo en mode Action Vous pouvez capturer des photos d’un sujet en mouvement et les assembler en une seule photo pour illustrer l’action. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Action. › Capturer une photo assemblée Vous pouvez capturer deux photos avec le même arrièreplan, puis assembler les moitiés gauche et droite de chaque photo pour ne former qu’un seul cliché. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous voulez prendre une photo de vousmême avec un ami, mais que personne d’autre n’est là pour effectuer la prise de vue à votre place. Dans ce mode, l’image prévisualisée apparaît agrandie, mais les fichiers sont sauvegardés et maintenus à un niveau de qualité normal. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Ajoutez-moi. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez à droite ou à gauche, à l’endroit où vous souhaitez prendre la première photo.62 Divertissements 3 Appuyez sur → Dessin animé. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. › Capturer une photo en mode Autoportrait Vous pouvez prendre facilement des photos de vous-même en utilisant l’objectif avant. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur . 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour capturer la première photo. 6 Déplacez le téléphone afin de suivre le sujet en mouvement. L’appareil capture automatiquement les clichés suivants. 7 Continuez de suivre le sujet jusqu’à ce que l’appareil ait capturé tous les clichés nécessaires pour composer la photo d’action. › Capturer une photo en mode Dessin animé Vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des effets de dessin animé. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage.Divertissements 63 Option Fonction Effets Appliquer des effets spéciaux, par exemple des tons sépia ou noir et blanc. ISO Régler la sensibilité du capteur d’images. Mesure Sélectionner un type d’indice d’exposition. Stabilisateur Réduire les flous dus aux vibrations ou aux mouvements de l’appareil. Contraste auto Ajuster automatiquement les contrastes entre votre sujet et l’arrière-plan. Détection clignements Régler l’appareil photo pour qu’il vous alerte lorsqu’il détecte des yeux fermés. Qualité d’image Définir le niveau de qualité des photos. Ajuster Régler le contraste, la saturation et la netteté. › Personnaliser les paramètres de l’appareil photo Avant de prendre une photo, appuyez sur → pour accéder aux options suivantes: Option Fonction Visibilité extérieure Activer ou désactiver la visibilité extérieure pour sélectionner des conditions de luminosité appropriées. Mode mise au point Prendre des photos en gros plan ou bien paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il effectue automatiquement une mise au point sur des sujets ou des visages. Retardateur Sélectionner le délai à l'issue duquel l’appareil doit prendre une photo. Résolution Modifier l’option de résolution. Balance des blancs Régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction des conditions d’éclairage.64 Divertissements Paramètre Fonction Son de l’obturateur Régler l’obturateur pour qu’il émette un son lors de la prise d’une photo. Stockage Sélectionner un emplacement de stockage par défaut où enregistrer les photos prises. Réinitialiser Réinitialiser les options des menus et des prises de vue. › Enregistrer une vidéo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur pour basculer en mode Caméscope. Avant de prendre une photo, appuyez sur → pour définir les paramètres suivants: Paramètre Fonction Guide Afficher des lignes directrices sur l'écran d'aperçu. Compte-rendu Régler l’appareil photo pour qu’il affiche la photo que vous venez de prendre. GPS Régler l'appareil pour qu'il ajoute des informations de localisation à vos photos. Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises.Divertissements 65 Numéro Fonction 2 Changer le mode d’enregistrement (pour joindre la vidéo à un MMS ou pour l’enregistrer au format standard). 3 Régler la valeur d’exposition. 4 Modifier l’option de résolution. 5 Modifier les paramètres du caméscope. 6 Afficher ou masquer les icônes sur l’objectif. 7 Basculer en mode Appareil photo. 8 Enregistrer une vidéo. 9 Ouvrir la fenêtre de visualisation pour afficher les dernières vidéos enregistrées. 5 Appuyez sur la touche Volume pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. 6 Appuyez sur pour commencer à enregistrer. 4 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 7 9 8 2 1 4 5 6 3 Numéro Fonction 1 Barre d'état et de paramètres : • : durée des vidéos que vous pouvez enregistrer (en fonction de la mémoire disponible) • : emplacement de stockage par défaut66 Divertissements › Personnaliser les paramètres du caméscope Avant de commencer à enregistrer une vidéo, appuyez sur → pour accéder aux options suivantes: Option Fonction Visibilité extérieure Activer ou désactiver la visibilité extérieure pour sélectionner des conditions de luminosité appropriées. Retardateur Définir le délai à l'issue duquel l’appareil photo doit commencer à filmer. Balance des blancs Régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. Effets Appliquer des effets spéciaux, par exemple des tons sépia ou noir et blanc. Qualité vidéo Définir le niveau de qualité des vidéos. Ajuster Ajuster le contraste, la saturation et la netteté. 7 Appuyez sur pour arrêter l’enregistrement. La vidéo est enregistrée automatiquement. Il est possible que le caméscope ne puisse pas enregistrer les vidéos correctement sur une carte mémoire dont le taux de transfert est lent. Après avoir enregistré des vidéos, appuyez sur l’icône de visualisation pour les visionner. • Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher toutes les vidéos. • Pour envoyer une vidéo, appuyez sur Partager. • Pour lire une vidéo, appuyez sur Lire. • Pour supprimer une vidéo, appuyez sur Supprimer.Divertissements 67 Vidéos Découvrez comment utiliser le lecteur vidéo pour visionner toutes sortes de vidéos. Le lecteur vidéo est compatible avec les formats de fichiers suivants: 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, mkv (Codec : MPEG4, H.263, Sorenson H.263, H.264, VC-1, DivX/ XviD). • En fonction de la version logicielle de votre téléphone, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. • Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la quantité de mémoire disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Vidéos. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo à lire. 3 Faites pivoter l'appareil pour passer en mode paysage. Avant de commencer à enregistrer une vidéo, appuyez sur → pour accéder aux paramètres suivants: Paramètre Fonction Guide Afficher des lignes directrices sur l'écran d'aperçu. Enreg. audio Activer ou désactiver l’enregistrement du son. Compte-rendu Régler le caméscope pour qu’il affiche la vidéo que vous venez de filmer. Stockage Sélectionner un emplacement de stockage où stocker les vidéos enregistrées. Réinitialiser Réinitialiser les options des menus et des prises de vue.68 Divertissements Galerie Découvrez comment visionner les photos et regarder les vidéos enregistrées dans la mémoire du téléphone et sur une carte mémoire. Si, lorsque vous accédez à Galerie, l’appareil vous signale que la mémoire est saturée, supprimez certains fichiers via le menu Mes fichiers ou une autre application de gestion des fichiers, puis recommencez. › Formats de fichiers compatibles Type Format Image Extension : bmp, gif, jpg, png Vidéo • Extension : 3gp, mp4, avi, wmv, flv, mkv • Codec : MPEG4, H.263, Sorenson H.263, H.264, VC-1, DivX/XviD 4 Les icônes suivantes permettent de contrôler la lecture : Icône Fonction Changer le format de l'écran vidéo. Revenir au fichier précédent; Reculer dans le fichier (maintenir la touche enfoncée). Interrompre la lecture. Pour la reprendre, appuyez sur . Passer au fichier suivant; Avancer dans le fichier (maintenir la touche enfoncée). Activer le son Surround 5.1 lorsqu’un casque est branché. Régler le volume. Arrêter la lecture et revenir à la liste de lecture.Divertissements 69 3 Pour modifier le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur ou en haut à droite de l’écran. 4 Sélectionnez une photo (sans icône de lecture) à afficher. En mode affichage, les options suivantes sont disponibles: • Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher plus de photos. • Appuyez sur ou pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis les écarter (rapprochez vos doigts pour faire un zoom arrière). • Pour démarrer un diaporama des photos présentes dans le dossier sélectionné, appuyez sur Diaporama. Pour arrêter le diaporama, appuyez sur l’écran. • Évitez de verrouiller l’écran de l’appareil lorsque vous visionnez une vidéo DivX à la demande. Chaque fois que vous verrouillez l’écran pendant la lecture d’une vidéo DivX à la demande, le nombre de locations disponibles diminue. • En fonction de la version logicielle de votre téléphone, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. • Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la quantité de mémoire disponible. › Afficher une photo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Choisissez un dossier.70 Divertissements › Lire une vidéo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo (avec l’icône ) à lire. 3 Faites pivoter l'appareil pour passer en mode paysage. 4 Pour contrôler la lecture, servez-vous des touches virtuelles. ► p. 67 › Partager des photos ou des vidéos 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Sélectionnez un dossier. 3 Sélectionnez une image ou une vidéo. 4 Appuyez sur Menu→ Partager → une option de partage. Musique Découvrez comment écouter vos morceaux de musique favoris à tout moment grâce au lecteur MP3. Le lecteur MP3 est compatible avec les formats de fichiers suivants: mp3, m4a, mp4, 3gp, 3ga, wma, ogg, oga, aac, flac. • Si vous ouvrez des fichiers audio à partir de Mes fichiers, de MMS ou du navigateur Web, vous pouvez les écouter dans les formats suivants: mid, midi, xmf, rtttl, smf, imy, rtx, ota, amr, awb, wav. • En fonction de la version logicielle de votre téléphone, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. • Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la quantité de mémoire disponible. › Ajouter des fichiers audio dans le téléphone Commencez par transférer des fichiers dans votre téléphone ou dans sur carte mémoire :Divertissements 71 4 Les icônes suivantes permettent de contrôler la lecture : Icône Fonction Régler le volume. Activer le son Surround 5.1 lorsqu’un casque est branché. Activer le mode Aléatoire. Modifier le mode de répétition (désactivé, répéter la lecture d’un seul ou de tous les fichiers). Revenir au fichier précédent. Reculer dans le fichier (maintenir la touche enfoncée). Interrompre la lecture. Pour la reprendre, appuyez sur . Passer au fichier suivant. Avancer dans le fichier (maintenir la touche enfoncée). 1. Ces icônes s’affichent uniquement lorsque vous appuyez sur l’écran du lecteur. 1 1 • Téléchargez sur le Web. ► p. 84 • Téléchargez depuis un ordinateur à l’aide du logiciel Samsung Kies. ► p. 106 • Recevez des fichiers via Bluetooth. ► p. 98 • Copiez des fichiers sur une carte mémoire. ► p. 107 • Synchronisez l’appareil avec Windows Media. ► p. 106 › Écouter de la musique Après avoir transféré des fichiers audio dans votre téléphone ou sur une carte mémoire : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Musique. 2 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour choisir une catégorie de musique. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier audio.72 Divertissements • Le casque SRS CS Headphone™ offre une qualité d’écoute Surround 5.1, bien meilleure que celle des oreillettes ou des casques standard, notamment lorsque vous écoutez du contenu multicanal, tel que des films en DVD. • La technologie WOW HD™ améliore significativement la qualité audio de la lecture en offrant des divertissements 3D dynamiques et une profondeur de son saisissante, alternant entre basses et hautes fréquences, pour une fidélité encore plus réaliste. › Affichage sous forme de disque 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Musique. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Accéder à la vue Disque. 3 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 4 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour sélectionner un disque. 5 Sélectionnez un disque pour commencer la lecture. 6 Pour interrompre ou reprendre la lecture, appuyez sur ou . 7 Pour basculer en affichage sous forme de cercle, appuyez sur . 8 Faites glisser votre doigt autour du cercle pour sélectionner une piste. Pour changer de catégorie, appuyez sur Tout→ une catégorie. 9 Appuyez sur pour revenir à l’affichage sous forme de disque. › Créer une liste de lecture 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Musique. 2 Appuyez sur Listes lecture.Divertissements 73 › Personnaliser les paramètres du lecteur MP3 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Musique. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Paramètres. 3 Pour personnaliser votre lecteur MP3, définisse les paramètres suivants: Option Fonction Egaliseur Sélectionner un type d’égaliseur par défaut. Effet Changer un effet sonore. Menu musique Sélectionner les catégories de musique à afficher sur l’écran de la bibliothèque. Affichage Sélectionner une animation à afficher pendant la lecture. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] → Créer. 4 Saisissez le titre de votre nouvelle liste de lecture, puis appuyez sur Enregistrer. 5 Appuyez sur Ajouter des pistes. 6 Sélectionnez les fichiers que vous souhaitez ajouter et appuyez sur Ajouter. En cours de lecture, vous pouvez ajouter des fichiers à une liste de lecture en appuyant sur [ ] → Plus→ Ajouter à liste de lecture. › Ajouter des morceaux à la liste rapide Vous pouvez ajouter des morceaux à la liste rapide et les enregistrer en tant que liste de lecture. En cours de lecture, appuyez sur [ ] → Ajout liste rap. pour ajouter le morceau en cours de lecture à la liste rapide. Pour accéder à la liste rapide, depuis l’écran principal du lecteur, appuyez sur Listes lecture→ Liste rapide. Pour enregistrer la liste rapide sous forme de liste de lecture, appuyez sur [ ] → Enreg. liste.74 Divertissements 4 Les touches suivantes permettent de contrôler la radio FM : 1 3 5 6 3 7 8 4 4 2 Numéro Fonction 1 Régler le volume. 2 Éteindre la radio FM. Pour allumer la radio FM, appuyez sur . 3 Rechercher une station de radio disponible. Radio FM Découvrez comment écouter de la musique et les actualités en utilisant la radio FM. Pour écouter la radio FM, vous devez brancher un casque ou des écouteurs qui font office d'antenne radio. › Écouter la radio FM 1 Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur le téléphone. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 3 Pour allumer la radio FM, appuyez sur (si nécessaire). La radio FM recherche et mémorise automatiquement les stations disponibles. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio FM pour la première fois, le téléphone vous invite à démarrer une recherche automatique des stations.Divertissements 75 › Enregistrer automatiquement une station de radio 1 Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur le téléphone. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 3 Appuyez sur Analyser→ une option d’analyse. La radio FM recherche et mémorise automatiquement les stations disponibles. 4 Sélectionnez la station de radio désirée dans la liste, puis appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran de la radio FM. › Ajouter une station de radio à la liste des favoris 1 Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur le téléphone. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 3 Pour allumer la radio FM, appuyez sur . Numéro Fonction 4 Augmenter ou diminuer la fréquence de 0,1 MHz. 5 Ajouter la station de radio en cours d’écoute à la liste des favoris. 6 Modifier la sortie audio (casque/écouteurs ou haut-parleur du téléphone). 7 Modifier la fréquence en faisant défiler vers la gauche ou la droite sur la barre d’échelle. 8 Régler la radio FM pour renouveler automatiquement les fréquences des stations lorsque le signal s’affaiblit.76 Divertissements Option Fonction Nom de la station Indiquer si le nom de la station doit s’afficher sur l’écran de la radio FM. Ces noms ne sont disponibles que pour les stations de radio qui les fournissent. Fréquence alternative Indiquer si la radio FM doit tenter de changer de fréquence lorsque le signal d’une station est faible. Désactiv. auto radio Régler la radio FM pour qu’elle s’éteigne automatiquement passé un certain délai. 4 Faites défiler l’écran jusqu’à la station de radio désirée. 5 Appuyez sur + pour ajouter la station à la liste des favoris. › Personnaliser les paramètres de la radio FM 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Paramètres. 3 Pour personnaliser votre radio FM, définissez les paramètres suivants: Option Fonction Région Sélectionner votre région. Lecture en arrière-plan Indiquer si vous souhaitez écouter la radio FM en arrière-plan lorsque vous utilisez d’autres applications. Si cette fonction est active, vous pouvez contrôler la radio FM depuis le volet des raccourcis.Informations personnelles 77 Informations personnelles Contacts Découvrez comment créer et gérer la liste de vos contacts personnels ou professionnels. Pour tous vos contacts, vous pouvez enregistrer des noms, des numéros de téléphone mobile ou fixe, des adresses e-mail, des dates d’anniversaire et plus encore. › Ajouter un nouveau contact 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Sélectionnez un emplacement de mémoire. Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 4 Saisissez les coordonnées du contact. 5 Appuyez sur Sauveg. pour ajouter ce contact dans la mémoire. Vous pouvez également créer un contact à partir de l’écran de numérotation. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→ Clavier. 2 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone. 3 Appuyez sur Ajouter aux contacts→ . 4 Sélectionnez un emplacement de mémoire. Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 5 Saisissez les coordonnées du contact. 6 Appuyez sur Sauveg. pour ajouter ce contact dans la mémoire.78 Informations personnelles › Définir un numéro d’appel abrégé 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Plus→ Numérotation rapide. 3 Sélectionnez un numéro d’emplacement → un contact. Depuis l’écran de numérotation, vous pouvez composer rapidement ce numéro en maintenant votre doigt appuyé sur le chiffre associé. › Créer une carte de visite 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Mon profil. 3 Saisissez vos coordonnées personnelles. 4 Appuyez sur Sauveg. Vous pouvez envoyer votre carte de visite en la joignant à un message ou à un e-mail, ou en la transférant à l’aide de la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. › Rechercher un contact 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Faites défiler la liste de contacts le haut ou le bas. 3 Sélectionnez un contact. Une fois le contact localisé, vous pouvez : • effectuer un appel vocal en appuyant sur le numéro de téléphone ; • effectuer un appel visio en appuyant sur Visio ; • lui envoyer un message en appuyant sur Message ; • modifier ses coordonnées en appuyant sur [ ] → Modifier.Informations personnelles 79 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Créer. 3 Saisissez le nom du groupe, puis sélectionnez la sonnerie associée. 4 Appuyez sur Sauveg. › Copier des contacts Vous pouvez copier des contacts depuis et vers la carte SIM ou USIM. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Import/Export→ Importer depuis la carte SIM ou Exporter vers la carte SIM. 3 Sélectionnez les contacts à copier et appuyez sur Importer ou Exporter. 4 Pour exporter les contacts, appuyez sur OK pour confirmer. › Récupérer des contacts à partir de vos comptes communautaires Vous pouvez afficher la liste des comptes de sites Web communautaires et sélectionner un compte pour ajouter un contact du site Web au répertoire de votre téléphone. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Lier à mes comptes. 3 Sélectionnez un compte. › Créer un groupe de contacts En créant des groupes de contacts, vous pouvez gérer plusieurs contacts simultanément et envoyer des messages ou des e-mails à tous les membres d'un groupe. Commencez par créer un groupe. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts→ Groupes.80 Informations personnelles 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Import/Export→ Exporter vers la carte SD. 3 Appuyez sur OK pour confirmer. › Consulter le journal des communications Vous pouvez afficher le journal des communications pour consulter les appels, les messages, les e-mails ou les fils de discussion des sites de réseaux sociaux. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts→ Historique. 2 Sélectionnez l’élément à afficher. › Consulter les activités du réseau social Vous pouvez consulter les dernières activités de vos contacts sur les sites de réseau social tels que Facebook, MySpace et Twitter. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts→ Activités. 2 Sélectionnez l’élément à afficher. › Importer ou exporter des contacts Pour importer des contacts (au format vcf) sur votre téléphone à partir d’une carte mémoire : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Import/Export→ Importer depuis la carte SD. 3 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire. Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 4 Choisissez entre importer un seul contact, plusieurs contacts ou l’ensemble des contacts, puis appuyez sur OK. 5 Sélectionnez les contacts à importer, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour exporter des contacts de votre téléphone vers une carte mémoire : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Contacts.Informations personnelles 81 Pour afficher les événements d’une date spécifique : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Sélectionnez une date dans le calendrier. En affichage mensuel, les dates comportant des événements programmés sont représentées par un petit triangle. Pour passer directement à une certaine date en la saisissant manuellement, appuyez sur [ ] → Aller à, saisissez la date en appuyant sur + ou -, puis appuyez sur Définir. Pour sélectionner la date du jour, appuyez sur [ ] → Aujourd’hui. 3 Sélectionnez un événement pour en afficher les détails. Vous pouvez envoyer l’évènement à d’autres personnes en appuyant sur [ ] → Envoyer via→ une option. Calendrier Découvrez comment créer et gérer les événements quotidiens, hebdomadaires ou mensuels et définir des alarmes pour vous souvenir des événements importants. › Créer des événements 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Appuyez sur Appuyez pour créer ou sur [ ] → Créer. 3 Saisissez les détails de l’événement comme indiqué. 4 Appuyez sur Sauveg. › Afficher des événements Pour changer l’affichage du calendrier : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Sélectionnez un mode d’affichage en haut du calendrier.82 Informations personnelles 3 Saisissez votre mémo. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour masquer le clavier. 5 Sélectionnez une couleur pour modifier l’arrière-plan. 6 Appuyez sur Enregistrer. › Afficher des mémos 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo. 2 Pour rechercher un mémo, appuyez sur [ ] → Recherche ou maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée (si nécessaire). 3 Sélectionnez un mémo pour en afficher les détails. Pour modifier le mémo, appuyez sur . Vous pouvez envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes en y maintenant votre doigt appuyé et en sélectionnant Envoyer via→ une option. › Arrêter l’alarme d’un événement Si vous définissez une alarme pour un événement, l’icône de l’alarme s’affichera à l’heure spécifiée. 1 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis situé en haut de l’écran. 2 Sélectionnez un rappel pour afficher plus de détails sur l’événement. 3 Pour répéter ou annuler le rappel, appuyez sur Répéter tout ou Ignorer tout. Mémo texte Découvrez comment enregistrer une information importante pour la consulter ultérieurement. › Créer un mémo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo. 2 Appuyez sur Nouveau mémo ou sur [ ] → Créer pour créer un mémo.Informations personnelles 83 › Écouter un mémo vocal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo vocal. 2 Appuyez sur Liste. 3 Sélectionnez le mémo vocal à écouter dans une liste de lecture. Vous pouvez envoyer le mémo vocal à d’autres personnes. Pour ce faire, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur le mémo, puis appuyez sur Partager. Mémo vocal Découvrez comment utiliser le dictaphone de votre téléphone. › Enregistrer un mémo vocal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo vocal. 2 Appuyez sur Enreg. pour commencer à enregistrer. 3 Parlez dans le microphone. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Arrêt. 5 Pour enregistrer d’autres mémos vocaux, appuyez de nouveau sur Enreg.84 Web Web Les services Web nécessitent une connexion de données. Pour choisir le meilleur forfait de connexion, contactez votre opérateur. Navigateur Découvrez comment accéder à des pages Web et enregistrer des favoris. • L’accès au Web et le téléchargement de contenu multimédia peuvent entraîner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction de l'offre que vous avez souscrite auprès de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. • La disponibilité de certaines icônes dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. › Surfer sur le Web 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Navigateur pour ouvrir la page d’accueil spécifiée. Pour accéder à une page Web spécifique, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’adresse (URL), saisissez l’adresse de la page Web, puis appuyez sur . 2 Utilisez les touches suivantes pour naviguer dans les pages Web : 1 2 Web 85 • Pour régler la luminosité de l’écran, appuyez sur [ ] → Luminosité. Selon votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. • Pour recharger une page Web, appuyez sur [ ] → Actualiser. • Pour aller à la page suivante de l’historique, appuyez sur [ ] → Page suivante. • Pour ajouter la page Web aux favoris, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus → Ajouter un favori. • Pour ajouter un raccourci sur l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus → Ajout raccourci à accueil. • Pour ajouter un flux RSS, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus → Ajouter des flux RSS. Vous pouvez lire les flux RSS par le biais de Google Reader. • Pour rechercher du texte sur une page Web, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus→ Rech. sur page. • Pour afficher les détails de la page Web, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus → Info page. • Pour envoyer l’adresse de la page Web à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus → Partager page. Numéro Fonction 1 Saisir l’adresse de la page Web à afficher. 2 Ouvrir la liste des favoris enregistrés, des pages fréquemment visitées, ainsi que l’historique Internet récent. En cours de navigation sur une page Web, utilisez les options suivantes: • Pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Vous pouvez également zoomer avec deux doigts. Placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les ou rapprochez-les doucement. • Pour ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre, appuyez sur [ ] → Nvlle fenêtre. • Pour afficher les fenêtres actives, appuyez sur [ ] → Fenêtres. Vous pouvez ouvrir plusieurs pages et passer de l’une à l’autre.86 Web Dans la liste des favoris, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un favori et utilisez les options suivantes: • Pour ouvrir la page Web dans la fenêtre affichée, appuyez sur Ouvrir. • Pour ouvrir la page Web dans une nouvelle fenêtre, appuyez sur Ouvrir nvlle fenêtre. • Pour modifier les détails du favori, appuyez sur Modifier le favori. • Pour ajouter le raccourci du favori sur l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur Ajout raccourci à accueil. • Pour envoyer l’adresse de la page Web à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager lien. • Pour copier l’adresse de la page Web, appuyez sur Copier URL lien. • Pour supprimer le favori, appuyez sur Supprimer favori. • Pour utiliser la page Web en tant que page d’accueil du navigateur, appuyez sur Définir comme page d’accueil. • Pour afficher l’historique de téléchargement, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus → Gestionnaire de téléchargements. • Pour personnaliser les paramètres du navigateur, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus → Paramètres. › Créer des favoris de pages Web Vous pouvez ajouter un favori manuellement si vous connaissez l’adresse de sa page Web. Pour ajouter un favori : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Navigateur. 2 Appuyez sur → Favoris. 3 Appuyez sur Ajouter ou [ ] → Dernière page favorite consultée. Pour ajouter la page Web que vous étiez en train de consulter aux favoris, passez à l’étape 5. 4 Saisissez le titre d’une page Web et son adresse (URL). 5 Appuyez sur OK.Web 87 Maps Découvrez comment utiliser Google Maps™ pour rechercher votre position, parcourir la carte en ligne pour afficher une rue, une ville ou un pays et calculer un itinéraire. • En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. • Lorsque vous utilisez les fonctions GPS, ne touchez pas l’antenne interne et ne la couvrez pas avec vos mains ou tout autre objet. • Pour améliorer la qualité de réception GPS, évitez d’utiliser votre téléphone dans les conditions suivantes: – entre des immeubles, dans des tunnels ou des passages souterrains ou à l’intérieur des bâtiments; – en cas de mauvaises conditions météorologiques; – à proximité de champs magnétiques ou de lignes à haute tension. › Ajouter une adresse de flux RSS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Navigateur. 2 Accédez à une page Web comprenant un flux RSS. 3 Appuyez sur dans le champ de saisie de l’adresse Web. 4 Sélectionnez le flux RSS à ajouter. 5 Abonnez-vous au flux RSS. Lorsque le flux auquel vous vous êtes abonné est mis à jour, vous en êtes prévenu. › Accéder aux pages régulièrement consultées ou à l’historique récent 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Navigateur. 2 Appuyez sur → Les plus visités ou Historique. 3 Sélectionnez une page Web à ouvrir. Vous pouvez ajouter une page Web à la liste des favoris en appuyant sur l’icône en forme d'étoile à droite de l’écran.88 Web Option Fonction Utiliser la fonction Aide à la localisation Utiliser les capteurs afin d’améliorer le positionnement à pied lorsque le signal GPS ne passe pas. Il peut y avoir des écarts entre les estimations du capteur et votre emplacement réel. › Rechercher un lieu spécifique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Maps. La carte affiche votre position actuelle. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Rechercher. 3 Saisissez un mot-clé pour la localisation, puis appuyez sur . • Pour effectuer une recherche de localisation vocale, appuyez sur . • Appuyez sur ou pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. › Activer des services de localisation avec Google Maps Pour trouver votre position et effectuer une recherche sur la carte, vous devez activer les services de localisation. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité. 2 Pour activer les services de localisation, définissez les paramètres suivants: Option Fonction Utiliser réseaux sans fil Paramétrer le téléphone afin d’utiliser les réseaux Wi-Fi et/ou mobiles pour localiser votre position. Utiliser les satellites GPS Paramétrer le téléphone afin d’utiliser le satellite GPS pour localiser votre position. Web 89 5 Sélectionnez un trajet pour afficher les détails de votre voyage (si nécessaire). 6 Appuyez sur . 7 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] → Effacer les résultats. Latitude Découvrez comment partager votre position avec vos amis et afficher leur position à l’aide de Google Latitude™. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Latitude. Le téléphone se connecte automatiquement à Google Latitude. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Ajouter des amis → Sélectionner dans mes contacts ou Ajouter en indiquant l’adresse e-mail. • Pour localiser un endroit à proximité, appuyez sur . • Pour ajouter des données à la carte, appuyez sur . • Pour afficher votre position actuelle, appuyez sur . › Calculer un itinéraire vers une destination spécifique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Maps. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Itinéraire. 3 Saisissez les adresses du lieu de départ et du lieu d’arrivée. Pour sélectionner une adresse à partir de votre liste de contacts ou de vos lieux favoris ou à partir d'un point sur la carte, appuyez sur → Contacts, Point sur la carte ou Adresses enregistrés. 4 Sélectionnez un mode de déplacement (voiture, bus ou à pied) et appuyez sur OK.90 Web 2 Choisissez une catégorie. Votre téléphone recherche des lieux à proximité de votre position actuelle en fonction de la catégorie choisie. 3 Sélectionnez le nom d’un lieu pour en afficher les détails. 4 Pour afficher le lieu sur une carte, appuyez sur . Pour afficher l’itinéraire jusqu’à la destination, appuyez sur . Pour afficher le numéro de téléphone correspondant à l'adresse, appuyez sur . Navigation Découvrez comment utiliser le système de navigation GPS pour rechercher et afficher votre destination avec des indications vocales. En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 3 Sélectionnez les amis à ajouter ou saisissez leur adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur Ajouter des amis → Oui. Lorsque votre ami accepte votre invitation, vous pouvez partager vos positions. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] → Plan. La position de vos amis, accompagnée de leur photo, est indiquée sur la carte. Adresses Découvrez comment rechercher un lieu à proximité de votre position. En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Adresses.Web 91 Recherche Vous pouvez rechercher des applications sur votre téléphone et des données spécifiques sur le Web. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Recherche. 2 Saisissez un mot ou quelques lettres du mot à rechercher. 3 Sélectionnez les données auxquelles vous souhaitez accéder. YouTube YouTube est un service gratuit de diffusion de vidéos sur le Web. Découvrez comment visionner et partager des vidéos via YouTube. En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Navigation. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur Accepter. 3 Saisissez votre destination en utilisant l’une des méthodes suivantes: • Énoncer destination : prononcer le nom de votre destination en disant par exemple « Naviguer vers destination ». • Saisir destination : saisir la destination à l’aide du clavier virtuel. • Contacts : sélectionner votre destination à partir des adresses de vos contacts. • Adresses enregistrées : sélectionner votre destination à partir de la liste de vos lieux favoris. 4 Appuyez sur Installer pour utiliser la navigation audio. 5 Pour arrêter la navigation, appuyez sur [ ] → Quitter la navigation.92 Web › Mettre des vidéos en ligne 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur YouTube. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Ajouter et sélectionnez une vidéo. Passez à l’étape 8. Si vous souhaitez mettre en ligne de nouvelles vidéos, appuyez sur pour allumer l’appareil photo. 3 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 4 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour commencer à enregistrer. 6 Appuyez sur pour arrêter l’enregistrement. 7 Appuyez sur Enreg. pour mettre en ligne la vidéo que vous venez d’enregistrer. › Visionner des vidéos 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur YouTube. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo dans la liste. 3 Faites pivoter l'appareil pour passer en mode paysage. 4 Contrôlez la lecture à l’aide des icônes affichées à l’écran. › Partager des vidéos Cette fonction n'est disponible qu'en mode Paysage. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur YouTube. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo. 3 Appuyez sur Plus→ Partager→ une option. Web 93 Option Fonction Nom de profil Saisir le nom du profil. Catégorie de synchro. Sélectionner les types de données à synchroniser. Type de synchro. Définir le mode de synchronisation entre votre téléphone et le serveur. Serveur de synchro. Saisir l’adresse Web du serveur à synchroniser. 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Enreg. › Démarrer la synchronisation 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Synchroniser. 2 Sélectionnez un profil de synchronisation. 3 Appuyez sur Démarrer synchro. pour lancer la synchronisation. 8 Saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe et appuyez sur Connexion (si nécessaire). 9 Saisissez les détails du chargement et appuyez sur Envoyer. Synchroniser Découvrez comment synchroniser vos contacts, vos événements, vos tâches et vos mémos avec le serveur Web que vous avez spécifié. › Définir un profil de synchronisation 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Synchroniser. 2 Appuyez sur Nouveau profil de synchro. et spécifiez les options suivantes pour le profil :94 Web 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Samsung Apps. 2 Recherchez et téléchargez des applications en fonction de vos besoins. Mon Quotidien Apprenez à récupérer des informations sur la météo, la bourse, l’actualité et le planning de la journée. En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. › Personnaliser les paramètres d’informations quotidiennes 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mon Quotidien. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Paramètres→ un service d’informations. Samsung Apps Samsung Apps vous permet de télécharger facilement et rapidement une quantité incroyable d’applications directement dans votre téléphone. Avec un nombre considérable de jeux et d’innombrables applications diverses et variées (actualités, références, réseaux sociaux, navigation, santé, etc.), Samsung Apps vous offre un accès instantané à un choix pléthorique d’applications. Grâce aux applications parfaitement optimisées de Samsung Apps, votre téléphone devient plus intelligent. Découvrez des applications époustouflantes et profitez pleinement de la vie avec un mobile. • En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. • Pour plus d’informations, rendez-vous sur le site www.samsungapps.com.Web 95 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, sélectionnez les cases à cocher en regard des services d’informations quotidiennes pour permettre un affichage à l’écran. › Afficher les informations quotidiennes 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mon Quotidien. 2 Appuyez sur pour mettre à jour les informations. 3 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher les informations. Press Reader Utilisez Press Reader pour lire la presse en ligne lorsque vous êtes en déplacement. › Télécharger des articles de presse 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Press Reader. 3 Pour personnaliser les écrans d’informations, définissez les paramètres suivants: Option Fonction Sélectionner une ville Ajouter des villes pour les prévisions météo. Sélectionner action Ajouter des sociétés pour des informations sur les actions. Actualisation automatique Paramétrer les écrans d’informations quotidiennes pour qu’ils soient automatiquement mis à jour avec les toutes dernières informations. Défilement auto widget Configurer les widgets des informations quotidiennes pour afficher automatiquement davantage d’informations. Unité Sélectionner une unité de température à utiliser pour les prévisions météo.96 Web Android Market Vous pouvez télécharger des jeux, des sonneries ou d’autres applications à partir de Android Market. En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Android Market. 2 Localisez un fichier et téléchargez-le sur le téléphone. ► p. 37 2 Appuyez sur Boutique en ligne. La boutique en ligne s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez le journal à télécharger. 4 Sélectionnez une date, puis appuyez sur OK. 5 Appuyez sur Confirmer pour confirmer le téléchargement. › Lire les articles de presse 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Press Reader. 2 Appuyez sur Ma Bibliothèque. 3 Sélectionnez un journal.Connectivité 97 Connectivité Bluetooth Bluetooth est une technologie de communication sans fil à courte portée, capable d’échanger des informations dans un rayon de 10 mètres sans nécessiter de connexion matérielle. Il est inutile d’aligner les appareils pour envoyer des données via Bluetooth. Si les appareils sont à portée l’un de l’autre, vous pouvez échanger des informations, même si les deux appareils ne sont pas dans la même pièce. • Samsung n’est pas responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. • Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. • Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains autres, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. › Activer la fonction sans fil Bluetooth 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Bluetooth. 2 Pour activer la fonction sans fil Bluetooth, appuyez sur Bluetooth. 98 Connectivité › Envoyer des données par Bluetooth 1 Sélectionnez un fichier ou un élément, par exemple un contact, un événement, un mémo ou un fichier multimédia à partir d’une application ou à partir de Mes fichiers. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Partager ou Envoyer via→ Bluetooth. 3 Recherchez un appareil Bluetooth à associer au vôtre. › Recevoir des données par Bluetooth 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres Bluetooth→ Identifiable. Votre appareil est visible par les autres appareils Bluetooth pendant 2 minutes. 2 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, saisissez le code PIN Bluetooth et appuyez sur OK (si nécessaire). › Rechercher d’autres appareils Bluetooth et s’y connecter 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Bluetooth→ Rechercher des périphériques. 2 Sélectionnez un appareil. 3 Saisissez le code PIN Bluetooth de l’appareil ou celui de l’autre appareil si celui-ci en possède un, puis appuyez sur OK. Sinon, appuyez sur Accepter pour que votre code PIN corresponde à celui de l’autre appareil. Lorsque l’utilisateur de l’autre appareil saisit le même code PIN ou accepte la connexion, la connexion entre les deux appareils est effective. Lorsque la connexion est établie avec succès, l’appareil recherche automatiquement les services disponibles. Certains casques, notamment les kits piéton ou les kits mains-libres pour voiture, possèdent un code PIN Bluetooth fixe, tel que 0000. Si l’autre appareil possède un code PIN, vous devez le saisir.Connectivité 99 Votre téléphone utilise une fréquence non harmonisée. Il est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur en France. › Activer la fonction Wi-Fi Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi. Le réseau Wi-Fi activé et fonctionnant en arrièreplan consomme de l’énergie. Pour économiser votre batterie, activez la fonction Wi-Fi seulement lorsque vous en avez besoin. › Rechercher un réseau Wi-Fi et s’y connecter 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Wi-Fi. 3 Appuyez sur Accepter pour confirmer que vous autorisez la réception des données provenant de l’autre appareil (si nécessaire). Les données reçues sont enregistrées dans l’application ou le dossier approprié selon leurs différents types. Par exemple, un fichier audio est enregistré dans le dossier Son et un contact dans le répertoire. Wi-Fi Découvrez comment exploiter les capacités de réseau sans fil de votre appareil pour vous connecter à tout réseau local sans fil (Wi-Fi ou WLAN) compatible avec la norme IEEE 802.11 b/g/n. Vous pouvez vous connecter à Internet ou à d’autres appareils réseau dès qu’un point d’accès sans fil est disponible.100 Connectivité › Se connecter à un réseau Wi-Fi avec la Configuration Protégée Wi-Fi (WPS) Grâce à WPS, vous pouvez vous connecter à un réseau sécurisé. Pour vous connecter à un réseau Wi-Fi avec une touche WPS : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Wi-Fi. 2 Appuyez sur Connexion bouton WPS. 3 Appuyez sur un bouton WPS au niveau du point d’accès dans un délai de 2 minutes. Pour vous connecter à un réseau Wi-Fi avec un code PIN WPS : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau comportant l’icône WPS, puis appuyez sur PIN WPS. 3 Au niveau du point d’accès, entrez le code PIN, puis appuyez sur le bouton de démarrage. Le téléphone recherche automatiquement les réseaux Wi-Fi disponibles. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau sous Réseaux Wi-Fi. 3 Saisissez un mot de passe pour vous connecter au réseau (si nécessaire). 4 Appuyez sur Connexion. › Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi manuellement 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Wi-Fi→ Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi. 2 Saisissez le SSID du réseau et choisissez le type de sécurité. 3 Définissez les paramètres de sécurité en fonction du type de sécurité choisi. 4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer.Connectivité 101 3 Pour personnaliser la fonction DLNA, définissez les paramètres suivants: Option Fonction Nom du serveur de médias Saisir un nom pour désigner votre appareil en tant que serveur de médias. Partager un média Activer le partage de vidéos, d’images ou de musique avec d’autres appareils compatibles DLNA. Point d’accès réseau Sélectionner le profil à utiliser pour les connexions DLNA. Charger depuis d’autres périphériques Autoriser le téléchargement à partir d’autres appareils. Mémoire par défaut Sélectionner l’emplacement de la mémoire par défaut pour enregistrer vos fichiers multimédia téléchargés. AllShare Découvrez comment utiliser le service DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) pour partager des fichiers multimédia entre des appareils compatibles DLNA en utilisant un réseau Wi-Fi. Vous devez d’abord activer la fonction Wi-Fi et ajouter un profil Wi-Fi. ► p. 99 › Personnaliser les paramètres DLNA pour partager des fichiers multimédia Vous devez activer le partage multimédia pour autoriser d’autres appareils compatibles DLNA à accéder à vos fichiers multimédia. Certains fichiers peuvent ne pas être lus sur les appareils compatibles DLNA, selon le modèle. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur AllShare. 2 Appuyez sur Paramètres.102 Connectivité › Lire des fichiers provenant d’autres appareils sur votre appareil 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur AllShare. 2 Appuyez sur Lire le fichier du serveur sur mon téléphone. Votre appareil recherche automatiquement les autres appareils compatibles DLNA. 3 Sélectionnez un appareil et définissez-le en tant que serveur multimédia : celui qui contient les fichiers multimédia. 4 Sélectionnez une catégorie de fichiers multimédia et un fichier. 5 Appuyez sur Ajouter à liste de lecture. 6 Pour contrôler la lecture, utilisez les icônes de votre appareil. › Lire vos fichiers sur un autre appareil compatible DLNA 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur AllShare. 2 Appuyez sur Lire le fichier du téléphone sur un autre lecteur. 3 Sélectionnez une catégorie de fichiers multimédia → un fichier. 4 Appuyez sur Ajouter à liste de lecture. 5 Sélectionnez un lecteur : celui qui lira les fichiers multimédia. La lecture démarre sur le lecteur sélectionné. 6 Pour contrôler la lecture, utilisez les icônes de votre appareil. En fonction du réseau et du serveur auxquels vous êtes connecté, il est possible que les fichiers soient mis en mémoire tampon lors de la lecture.Connectivité 103 6 Sélectionnez un lecteur : celui qui lira les fichiers multimédia. La lecture démarre sur le lecteur sélectionné. 7 Pour contrôler la lecture, utilisez les icônes de votre appareil. Partager une connexion réseau mobile Découvrez comment définir votre appareil en tant que modem ou point d’accès sans fil et comment partager sa connexion réseau mobile sur des PC ou d’autres appareils. › Partager le réseau mobile de votre téléphone via une connexion Wi-Fi 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Fonction modem. › Effectuer une lecture de fichiers d’un appareil à un autre 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur AllShare. 2 Appuyez sur Lire le fichier du serveur sur un autre lecteur via mon téléphone. Votre appareil recherche automatiquement les autres appareils compatibles DLNA. 3 Sélectionnez un appareil et définissez-le en tant que serveur multimédia : celui qui contient les fichiers multimédia. 4 Sélectionnez une catégorie de fichiers multimédia et un fichier. 5 Appuyez sur Ajouter à liste de lecture.104 Connectivité › Partager le réseau mobile de votre téléphone via un branchement USB 1 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un ordinateur. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Fonction modem. 3 Appuyez sur Modem USB pour activer la fonction modem USB. Votre téléphone partage la connexion réseau mobile avec votre ordinateur. Pour cesser de partager la connexion réseau, décochez la case située à côté de Modem USB. La méthode de partage de la connexion réseau peut différer en fonction du système d’exploitation du PC. 2 Appuyez sur Point d’accès mobile pour activer cette fonction. 3 Pour personnaliser le point d’accès mobile, appuyez sur Paramètres Point d’accès → Config. point d'accès mobile : Option Region SSID du réseau Afficher et modifier le nom de votre téléphone indiqué aux périphériques externes. Sécurité Sélectionner le type de sécurité. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Enregistrer. 5 À partir d’un autre appareil, recherchez le nom de votre téléphone dans la liste des connexions disponibles et connectez-vous au réseau. Votre téléphone partage la connexion réseau mobile avec un autre appareil.Connectivité 105 5 Vérifiez que le téléviseur est allumé et branchez-y votre téléphone à l’aide d’un câble de sortie TV. Reliez les fiches du câble de sortie TV aux ports A/V du téléviseur en respectant les couleurs. 6 Réglez votre téléviseur en mode d’entrée externe. L’interface du téléphone s’affiche sur l’écran du téléviseur. Il est possible que vos fichiers ne s’affichent pas correctement en raison de différences dans les systèmes vidéo ou de la qualité de l’écran de votre téléviseur. Connexions PC Découvrez comment connecter votre téléphone à un ordinateur à l’aide d'un câble de connexion PC, et cela dans divers modes USB. En connectant votre téléphone à un PC, vous pouvez synchroniser des fichiers avec le lecteur Windows Media, transférer directement des données de et vers votre téléphone et utiliser le logiciel Samsung Kies. Connexions TV (mode de sortie TV) Découvrez comment relier votre appareil à un téléviseur et y afficher son interface. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Affichage→ Sortie TV. 2 Appuyez sur Sortie TV pour activer ce mode. 3 Appuyez sur Système TV. 4 Sélectionnez le système d’encodage vidéo correspondant à votre zone géographique. Option Région PAL Australie, Autriche, Belgique, Chine, Danemark, Angleterre, Finlande, Allemagne, Italie, Koweït, Malaisie, Pays-Bas, Nouvelle-Zélande, Norvège, Singapour, Espagne, Suède, Suisse, Thaïlande NTSC Canada, Japon, Corée, Mexique, Taiwan, États-unis106 Connectivité › Synchroniser avec le lecteur Windows Media Assurez-vous que le lecteur Windows Media est bien installé sur votre PC. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres USB→ Lecteur média. 2 Pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur la touche Accueil. 3 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un PC sur lequel le Lecteur Windows Media est installé. Une fois la connexion établie, une fenêtre s’ouvre sur l’écran de l’ordinateur. 4 Ouvrez le lecteur Windows Media pour synchroniser les fichiers audio. 5 Modifiez ou saisissez le nom de votre téléphone dans la fenêtre qui s’affiche (si nécessaire). › Se connecter avec Samsung Kies Assurez-vous que le logiciel Samsung Kies est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez le télécharger à partir du site Web de Samsung (www.samsung.com). 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres USB→ Samsung Kies. 2 Pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur la touche Accueil. 3 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un ordinateur. 4 Lancez Samsung Kies et utilisez les connexions sans fil ou copiez des données et des fichiers. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies.Connectivité 107 3 Pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur la touche Accueil. 4 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre téléphone et reliez-le à un ordinateur. 5 Lorsque vous êtes connecté, appuyez sur Activer la mémoire de stockage USB. 6 Ouvrez le dossier pour afficher les fichiers. 7 Copiez les fichiers de l’ordinateur vers la carte mémoire. 8 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Désactiver la mémoire de stockage USB. Pour déconnecter le téléphone d’un ordinateur, cliquez sur l’icône de périphérique USB dans la barre des tâches Windows, puis sur l’option Retirer le périphérique en toute sécurité. Débranchez ensuite le câble de connexion PC. Si vous n’effectuez pas cette manipulation, vous risquez de perdre les données stockées sur la carte mémoire ou de l’endommager. 6 Sélectionnez et faites glisser les fichiers audio de votre choix dans la liste de synchronisation. 7 Démarrez la synchronisation. › Connecter le téléphone en tant que périphérique de stockage de masse Vous pouvez connecter votre téléphone à un ordinateur en tant que disque amovible et accéder à son répertoire de fichiers. Si vous insérez une carte mémoire, vous pouvez également accéder à son répertoire de fichiers en utilisant le téléphone en tant que lecteur de carte mémoire. Le répertoire de fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît en tant que disque amovible, indépendamment de la mémoire interne. 1 Si vous souhaitez transférer des fichiers vers ou à partir d’une carte mémoire, insérez la carte dans le téléphone. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres USB→ Stockage de masse.108 Connectivité Option Fonction Nom VPN Saisir un nom pour le serveur VPN. Définir le serveur VPN Saisir l’adresse IP du serveur VPN. Activer Cryptage Paramétrer le téléphone pour crypter le serveur VPN. Définir la clé pré-partagée IPsec Définir la touche prépartagée. Activer Secret L2TP Paramétrer le téléphone pour utiliser le mot de passe secret L2TP. Définir le secret L2TP Saisir le mot de passe secret L2TP. Définir le certificat utilisateur Sélectionner un certificat utilisateur utilisé par le serveur VPN pour vous identifier. Vous pouvez importer des certificats à partir du serveur VPN ou en télécharger à partir du Web. Connexions VPN Vous pouvez créer des réseaux virtuels privés (VPN) et vous y connecter de façon sécurisée via un réseau public, par exemple Internet. Votre téléphone doit déjà être configuré avec un accès Internet. Vous devez modifier les connexions si vous rencontrez des problèmes d’accès à Internet. Si vous n’êtes pas certain des informations de connexion à saisir, consultez votre opérateur. › Paramétrer les connexions VPN 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres VPN → Ajouter VPN. 2 Sélectionnez un type de VPN. 3 Personnalisez le profil de connexion. La disponibilité des options dépend du type de VPN.Connectivité 109 Option Fonction Définir le certificat AC Sélectionner une autorité de certification (CA) utilisée par le serveur VPN pour vous identifier. Vous pouvez importer des certificats à partir du serveur VPN ou en télécharger à partir du Web. Domaines de recherche DNS Saisir l’adresse du serveur de nom de domaine (DNS). › Se connecter à un réseau privé 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres VPN. 2 Sélectionnez le réseau privé pour vous y connecter. 3 Saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe, puis appuyez Connexion.110 Outils Outils Horloge Découvrez comment régler et contrôler les alarmes et les horloges mondiales. Vous pouvez également utiliser le chronomètre et le minuteur. › Créer une nouvelle alarme 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→ Alarme. 2 Appuyez sur Créer ou sur [ ] → Créer. 3 Définissez les détails de l’alarme. Appuyez sur Alarme intelligente pour activer des sons naturels simulés avec l’écran d’alarme avant le déclenchement de l’alarme principale. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Sauveg. › Arrêter une alarme Lorsque l’alarme sonne : • Pour arrêter l’alarme, faites glisser l'icône vers la droite. • Pour répéter l’alarme après une durée spécifiée, faites glisser l'icône vers la gauche. › Supprimer une alarme 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→ Alarme. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Suppr. 3 Sélectionnez les alarmes à supprimer. 4 Appuyez sur Supprimer.Outils 111 2 Appuyez sur Début pour commencer à chronométrer. 3 Appuyez sur Tour pour enregistrer des temps intermédiaires. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Arrêter. 5 Appuyez sur Réinit. pour effacer les temps enregistrés. › Utiliser le minuteur 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→ Minuteur. 2 Définissez la durée du minuteur. 3 Appuyez sur Début pour lancer le minuteur. Vous pouvez utiliser d'autres fonctions pendant que le minuteur fonctionne en arrière-plan. Appuyez sur la touche Accueil ou sur [ ] et ouvrez une autre application. 4 Une fois le minuteur terminé, faites glisser l'icône vers la droite. › Créer une horloge mondiale 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→ Horloge. 2 Appuyez sur Ajouter une ville ou sur [ ] → Ajouter. 3 Saisissez le nom d’une ville ou sélectionnez-en une dans la liste. Pour choisir une ville sur la carte du monde, appuyez sur . 4 Pour ajouter d’autres horloges mondiales, répétez les étapes 2-3. Pour appliquer l’heure d’été, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une horloge, puis appuyez sur Heure d’été. › Utiliser le chronomètre 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge→ Chrono.112 Outils 3 Appuyez sur pour fermer le clavier de la calculatrice. L’historique du calcul s’affiche. 4 Pour effacer l’historique, appuyez sur [ ] → Effacer l’historique. Aldiko eBook Découvrez comment télécharger et lire des livres électroniques. › Lire un livre électronique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Aldiko eBook. 2 Lisez le contrat de licence de l’utilisateur final, puis appuyez sur Accepter. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] → Rechercher pour rechercher le titre d’un livre (si nécessaire). 4 Choisissez un livre sur l’étagère. Calculatrice Découvrez comment effectuer des calculs mathématiques sur votre téléphone, comme avec une calculatrice portable ou de bureau. › Effectuer des calculs 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calculatrice. 2 Utilisez les touches de la calculatrice affichées à l’écran pour réaliser des opérations mathématiques de base. Faites pivoter l’appareil à l’horizontale pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique.Si vous avez désactivé la fonction de rotation automatique, appuyez sur [ ] → Calculatrice scientifique. › Afficher l’historique du calcul 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calculatrice. 2 Effectuez des calculs.Outils 113 Numéro Fonction 1 Afficher les détails du livre. 2 Atteindre une page en faisant glisser la barre. 3 Rechercher du texte dans le livre. 4 Ajouter la page affichée à vos favoris. 5 Afficher la table des matières. 6 Voir la liste des pages favorites. 7 Modifier les paramètres d’affichage. 8 Modifier les attributs du texte. 9 Modifier le mode d’affichage. 5 Appuyez sur l’écran pour commencer à lire un livre. 6 Pour tourner les pages, faites glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou vers la droite ou appuyez près de la marge gauche ou droite d’une page. 7 Utilisez les touches suivantes lorsque vous lisez un livre. 6 5 9 8 7 1 4 3 2 114 Outils 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Importer. 3 Appuyez sur Importer→ OK. Le téléphone recherche des livres électroniques dans la carte mémoire. Téléchargements Découvrez comment ouvrir et gérer les fichiers téléchargés depuis un site Web ou un e-mail. En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l'écran d'accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléchargements. 2 Sélectionnez un dossier de téléchargement. 3 Pour ouvrir un fichier, appuyez dessus. Pour le supprimer, cochez la case, puis appuyez sur Supprimer. › Télécharger des livres à partir d’une librairie en ligne 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Aldiko eBook. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Obtenir plus de livres. La librairie en ligne s’affiche. 3 Sélectionnez un catalogue de livres → un livre. › Importer des livres Vous pouvez importer des livres électroniques (au format epub) à partir de la carte mémoire. • Les livres électroniques doivent être enregistrés dans le dossier /eBooks/import/ sur votre carte mémoire. • Les livres protégés par le système de Gestion des droits numériques ne sont pas compatibles. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Aldiko eBook.Outils 115 › Afficher un mini journal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mini journal. 2 Sélectionnez un journal. Pour publier un mini journal sur vos sites Web communautaires, appuyez sur [ ] → Publier. Mes fichiers Découvrez comment accéder rapidement et facilement à vos photos, vos vidéos, votre musique, vos mémos vocaux et autres types de fichiers stockés dans l'appareil ou sur une carte mémoire. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mes fichiers. 2 Sélectionnez un dossier → un fichier. Dans un dossier, appuyez sur [ ] pour utiliser les options suivantes: • Pour envoyer un fichier par MMS, e-mail ou Bluetooth, appuyez sur Partager. Mini journal Découvrez comment constituer un journal de bord. › Créer un mini journal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mini journal. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur Ajouter pour choisir une ville pour les prévisions météo. 3 Si vous avez déjà enregistré un mini journal, appuyez sur Créer journal pour ajouter une nouvelle entrée. 4 Modifiez la date et définissez la météo (si nécessaire). 5 Appuyez sur Ajouter photo et ajoutez une image ou prenez une photo. 6 Appuyez sur Appuyer pour créer un mémo, puis rédigez votre texte et appuyez sur OK. 7 Appuyez sur Sauveg.116 Outils • Téléchargé(e) : afficher la quantité de mémoire totale utilisée par les applications installées sur le téléphone. • RAM : vérifier et gérer la mémoire vive de votre téléphone. • Stockage : afficher la quantité de mémoire disponible et utilisée sur votre téléphone et sur la carte mémoire. • Aide : afficher des informations d’aide sur la prolongation de la durée de vie de la batterie. ThinkFree Office Découvrez comment créer et visualiser des documents sur votre téléphone. Si vous disposez d’un compte auprès du service Web ThinkFree, vous pouvez gérer vos documents en ligne. Cette application est compatible avec les formats de fichiers suivants: txt, doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, pptx, pdf. › Créer un nouveau document 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur ThinkFree Office. • Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur Créer dossier. • Pour supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers, appuyez sur Supprimer. • Pour modifier le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur Aff. par. • Pour trier des fichiers ou des dossiers, appuyez sur Trier par. • Pour utiliser d’autres fonctions avec un fichier, par exemple les options de déplacement, de copie ou de changement de nom, appuyez sur Plus. Gestionnaire de tâches Grâce au gestionnaire de tâches, vous pouvez visualiser les applications en cours d’exécution ainsi que les informations relatives à la mémoire. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Gestionnaire de tâches. 2 Vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: • Applications actives : afficher la liste des applications en cours d’exécution sur le téléphone.Outils 117 3 Affichez et modifiez le document en fonction de vos besoins. • Pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les ou rapprochez-les doucement. • Pour ouvrir la barre d’outils et modifier le document (fichier texte, Word ou Excel), appuyez sur [ ] → Modifier. • Pour rechercher du texte dans le document, appuyez sur [ ] → Rechercher. 4 Lorsque vos modifications sont terminées, enregistrez le document. › Gérer des documents en ligne 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur ThinkFree Office. 2 Appuyez sur En ligne. 2 Appuyez sur Accepter pour confirmer, si vous utilisez cette application pour la première fois. 3 Appuyez sur Activer maintenant→ Fermer pour activer ThinkFree Office. 4 Appuyez sur Mes documents. 5 Appuyez sur [ ] → Nouveau→ un type de document. 6 Saisissez le nom du document, puis appuyez sur OK. 7 Pour ajouter du contenu au document, servez-vous des outils situés au bas de l’écran. 8 Lorsque vos modifications sont terminées, appuyez sur dans la barre d’outils ou appuyez sur [ ] → Fichier → Enregistrer. › Afficher et modifier un document sur votre téléphone 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur ThinkFree Office. 2 Appuyez sur Mes documents→ un document.118 Outils › Appeler un contact par commande vocale Vous pouvez appeler directement des numéros en prononçant le nom du contact. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Reconnaissance vocale. 2 Prononcez « Appeler » ou « Composer », puis un nom ou un numéro de téléphone. Vous pouvez également prononcer « Composer à nouveau » pour rappeler le dernier numéro composé. Le téléphone compose le numéro sélectionné. › Ouvrir une application 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Reconnaissance vocale. 2 Dites « Ouvrir », puis le nom d’une application. L’appareil ouvre l’application correspondante. 3 Saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe pour accéder à votre compte, puis appuyez sur Se connecter. 4 Affichez et gérez vos documents sur le serveur en fonction de vos besoins. Reconnaissance vocale Découvrez comment composer un numéro ou bien ouvrir une application en utilisant la commande vocale. • Selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. • Votre téléphone ne reconnaît que les commandes vocales en anglais américain. • Les langues reconnues peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique.Outils 119 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Write and go. 2 Pour saisir du texte, utilisez le panneau de saisie. 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, sélectionnez l’une des options suivantes : • Pour envoyer un SMS avec ce texte, appuyez sur Envoyer message ou Envoyer. • Pour télécharger le texte vers un site Web communautaire, appuyez sur Mise à jour. • Pour enregistrer le texte sous forme de mémo ou d’événement du calendrier, appuyez sur Enregistrer. 4 Envoyez un message, connectez-vous à un service communautaire pour télécharger le texte ou créez un mémo ou un événement en fonction de l’option sélectionnée. Recherche vocale Découvrez comment effectuer une recherche d’informations vocale sur le Web. En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez Recherche vocale. 2 Prononcez un mot clé dans le microphone. Le téléphone recherche les informations et les pages Web concernant ce mot clé s’affichent. Write and go Découvrez comment saisir du texte et l’envoyer sous forme de message, le télécharger vers un site Web communautaire ou l’enregistrer sous forme de mémo ou d’événement du calendrier.120 Paramètres Paramètres Accéder au menu Paramètres 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres. 2 Sélectionnez une catégorie de paramètres, puis une option. Sans fil et réseaux Modifiez les paramètres de connexion au réseau sans fil. › Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de votre téléphone. Vous pouvez alors uniquement utiliser les services qui ne nécessitent pas de connexion radio, c'est-à-dire les fonctions autres que GSM et Bluetooth. › Paramètres Wi-Fi • Wi-Fi : activez ou désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. ► p. 99 • Notification réseau : configurez le téléphone pour qu’il vous avertisse lorsqu’un réseau ouvert est disponible. • Connexion bouton WPS : connectez-vous à un réseau Wi- Fi en utilisant un bouton de Configuration Protégée Wi-Fi. • Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi : ajoutez des points d’accès Wi-Fi manuellement. › Paramètres Bluetooth • Bluetooth : activez ou désactivez la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ► p. 97 • Nom de l’appareil : définissez un nom Bluetooth pour le téléphone. • Identifiable : paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il soit visible par d’autres appareils Bluetooth. • Rechercher des périphériques : recherchez les appareils Bluetooth disponibles.Paramètres 121 › Paramètres VPN Paramétrez et gérez les réseaux privés virtuels (VPN). ► p. 108 › Réseaux mobiles • Autoriser connexions données : autorisez les connexions de données. • Itinérance : paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il se connecte à un autre réseau lorsque vous changez de zone de couverture ou que votre réseau d’origine n’est pas disponible. • Nom des points d’accès : définissez des noms de point d’accès (APN). • Mode réseau : sélectionnez un type de réseau. • Opérateurs réseau : recherchez les réseaux disponibles et sélectionner un réseau d’itinérance. › Paramètres USB Activez divers modes de connexion USB lorsque vous branchez votre appareil sur un ordinateur. ► p. 105 › Fonction modem • Modem USB : activez la fonction modem USB pour partager la connexion de réseau mobile du téléphone avec les ordinateurs via USB. Lorsqu’il est connecté à un ordinateur, votre téléphone sert de modem sans fil pour celui-ci. ► p. 104 • Point d’accès mobile : activez le point d’accès mobile pour partager la connexion réseau mobile de l’appareil avec des ordinateurs ou d’autres équipements via la fonction Wi-Fi. ► p. 103 • Paramètres Point d’accès : modifiez les paramètres pour personnaliser le point d’accès mobile.122 Paramètres • Numérotation du préfixe : activez la numérotation du préfixe et définissez des chiffres de numérotation de préfixe. • Rejeter l’appel avec message : sélectionnez un message à envoyer au correspondant dont l’appel est rejeté. • Tonalités état d’appel : activez ou désactivez les tonalités de connexion d’appel, des bips de durée d’appel ou de déconnexion. • Vibreur en cas d’appel sortant: réglez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre lorsque votre correspondant répond à un appel. • Signal d’appel : activez ou désactivez les alertes d’événement qui arrivent pendant que vous êtes en ligne. › Appel vocal • Transfert d’appel : transférez les appels entrants vers un autre numéro. • Restriction d’appel : bloquez les appels entrants ou sortants. › Synchroniser Configurez des profils de synchronisation et synchronisez votre appareil avec le serveur Web spécifié. Appel Personnalisez les paramètres des fonctions d’appel. › Tous les appels • Afficher mon n° : présentez votre numéro de téléphone portable à vos destinataires (vous devez insérer la carte SIM/USIM pour utiliser cette fonction). • Rejet automatique : activez ou désactivez la fonction de rejet automatique et définir la liste des correspondants à rejeter automatiquement. • Réponse à l’appel : réglez le téléphone pour répondre aux appels en appuyant sur la touche Accueil ou pour qu’il réponde automatiquement après une période déterminée (disponible uniquement lorsqu’un casque est branché).Paramètres 123 › Numérotation fixe • Activer FDN : activez ou désactivez le mode de numérotation fixe pour limiter les appels aux numéros de la liste de numérotation fixe. Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM/USIM et redémarrez le téléphone. • Changer PIN2 : modifiez le code PIN2 utilisé pour protéger le code PIN principal. Si la carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée, ce menu devient Déverrouiller le code PIN2. • Liste FDN : définissez la liste des contacts activés pour la numérotation fixe. › Messagerie vocale • Service de messagerie : sélectionnez votre opérateur ou un autre fournisseur pour recevoir vos messages vocaux. • N° de messagerie : saisissez le numéro d’accès au service de messagerie vocale. Contactez votre opérateur pour obtenir ce numéro. • Signal d’appel : définissez les options de gestion des appels entrants lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne. • Rappel automatique : activez la fonction de recomposition automatique pour recomposer automatiquement un appel qui n’a pas abouti ou qui a été interrompu. › Appel visio • Images préenregistrées : sélectionnez l’image à présenter au correspondant. • Vidéo lors d’un appel reçu : indiquez si votre image en direct ou une image prédéfinie doit être présentée ou non à votre correspondant. • Options d’échec d’appel : indiquez si le téléphone doit essayer de passer un appel vocal lorsqu’un appel visio échoue. • Transfert d’appel visio : transférez les appels entrants vers un autre numéro. • Appels visio interdits : bloquez les appels provenant de numéros spécifiques.124 Paramètres • Sélection sonore : paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. • Son verrouillage écran : paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. • Retour tactile : paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il vibre lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche. • Intensité des vibrations : réglez l’intensité de vibration du retour tactile. Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage. • Fonds d’écran : - Fond écran d’accueil : sélectionnez l’image d’arrièreplan de l’écran d’accueil. - Fond écran verrouil. : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran de verrouillage. Son Modifiez les paramètres de différents sons sur votre téléphone. • Profil Discret: activez le mode discret afin de couper tous les sons à l’exception des sons multimédias et de la sonnerie d’alarme. • Vibreur: réglez le téléphone pour qu’il vibre afin de signaler différents événements. • Volume : réglez le niveau sonore des sonneries d’appel, ou de notifications ainsi que celui des fichiers audio/vidéo et des sons du téléphone. • Sonnerie du téléphone : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les appels entrants. • Sonnerie de notification : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les événements, tels que les messages entrants, les appels manqués et les alarmes. • Son du clavier: paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur les touches du clavier de l’écran de numérotation.Paramètres 125 Localisation et sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de votre téléphone, de la carte SIM/USIM et de la fonction GPS. • Utiliser réseaux sans fil : paramétrez le téléphone afin d’utiliser les réseaux Wi-Fi et/ou mobiles pour localiser votre position. • Utiliser les satellites GPS : paramétrez le téléphone afin d’utiliser le satellite GPS pour localiser votre position. • Utiliser la fonction Aide à la localisation : définissez cette option pour utiliser les capteurs afin d’améliorer le positionnement à pied lorsque le signal GPS ne passe pas. Il peut y avoir des écarts entre les estimations du capteur et votre emplacement réel. • Définir verrouillage : définissez un code de sécurité pour déverrouiller l'écran. Lorsque vous avez défini votre code de déverrouillage, cette option devient Modif. verrouillage écran. - Aucun : désactivez verrouillage de l’écran. - Modèle : définissez un modèle de déverrouillage pour déverrouiller l’écran. • Police : modifiez le type de police pour le texte affiché sur l’écran. Vous pouvez télécharger des polices à partir d’Android Market en appuyant sur Obtenir des polices en ligne. • Luminosité : réglez la luminosité de l’écran. • Rotation auto. écran : indiquez si le contenu doit automatiquement pivoter en même temps que le téléphone. • Animation : paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il affiche une animation lorsque vous changez de fenêtre. • Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai de désactivation automatique du rétroéclairage. • Mode économie d’énergie : activez le mode économie d’énergie. En mode économie d’énergie, le téléphone économise de l’énergie en réglant la balance des blancs et la luminosité de l’écran. • Sortie TV : sélectionnez le système d’encodage vidéo approprié pour la connexion à votre téléviseur. ► p. 105 • Calibrage horizontal : procédez au calibrage pour ajuster l'axe horizontal de l'appareil en vue d'une meilleure reconnaissance des mouvements.126 Paramètres - Définir destinataire : configurez les destinataires qui recevront votre message de traçage depuis votre téléphone perdu. - Compte Samsung : configurez votre compte Samsung en ligne pour contrôler à distance votre téléphone perdu. - Modifier mot de passe : modifiez le mot de passe de la fonction de traçage du mobile. - Aide : accédez à l’aide de la fonction de traçage du mobile. • Mots de passe visibles : pour des raisons de sécurité, le téléphone masque par défaut vos mots de passe sous forme de ·. Paramétrez le téléphone pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. • Sélect. admin. de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs de périphérique installés sur votre téléphone. Vous pouvez activer les administrateurs de périphérique afin d’appliquer de nouvelles règles à votre téléphone. • Utiliser des informations d’identification sécurisées : utilisez les certificats et les identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation des diverses applications. - Code PIN : définissez un code PIN (numérique) pour déverrouiller l’écran. - Mot de passe : définissez un mot de passe (alphanumérique) pour déverrouiller l’écran. • Configurer blocage SIM : - Verrouiller carte SIM : activez ou désactivez la fonction de verrouillage PIN du téléphone pour qu’un mot de passe PIN soit demandé lors du démarrage. - Modifier code PIN SIM : modifiez le code PIN utilisé pour accéder aux données de la carte SIM ou USIM. • Traçage du mobile : activez ou désactivez la fonction de traçage du mobile qui vous aide à localiser votre téléphone s’il est perdu ou volé. ► p. 33 • Définir le traçage du mobile : lorsque vous activez la fonction de traçage, vous pouvez personnaliser les paramètres suivants. Les options disponibles peuvent varier selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur.Paramètres 127 • Services en cours d’exécution : visualisez les services en cours d’utilisation et y accéder afin de les gérer. • Utilisation de la mémoire : affichez la quantité de mémoire disponible et utilisée par les applications sur votre téléphone et sur la carte mémoire. • Utilisation de la batterie : affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par les applications ouvertes. • Développement: - Débogage USB : sélectionnez cette option pour connecter votre téléphone à un PC à l’aide du câble de connexion PC. Cette option est utilisée pour le développement d’applications. - Positions fictives : autorisez l’envoi de fausses informations de service et de localisation à un service de Gestionnaire de localisation à des fins de test. Cette option est utilisée pour le développement d’applications. • Samsung Apps : sélectionnez une connexion réseau (Wi-Fi ou PSN) pour être averti(e) de la sortie de nouvelles applications sur Samsung Apps. Selon votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. • Installer les certificats cryptés depuis la carte SD : installez les certificats cryptés qui sont stockés dans une carte mémoire. • Définir un mot de passe : créez et confirmez un mot de passe pour accéder aux identifiants de sécurité. • Supprimer le stockage : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans le téléphone et réinitialiser le mot de passe. Applications Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des applications installées. • Sources inconnues : sélectionnez cette option pour télécharger des applications à partir de n’importe quelle source. Si vous ne sélectionnez pas cette option, vous pouvez uniquement télécharger des applications à partir d’Android Market. • Gérer les applications : accédez à la liste des applications installées dans le téléphone et consultez les informations relatives aux applications.128 Paramètres • Restaurer automatiquement: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il restaure les données des applications sauvegardées lorsque ces applications sont déjà installées. • Rétablir param. par défaut: réinitialisez les paramètres par défaut. Carte SD et mémoire Consultez les informations à propos de la mémoire des cartes et de votre appareil, puis formatez la mémoire externe ou interne. Paramètres de langue Modifiez les paramètres de saisie de texte. › Langue et région Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage pour tous les menus et applications. Comptes et synchro. Modifiez les paramètres de la fonction de synchronisation automatique ou gérez les comptes de synchronisation. • Données en arrière-plan : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour utiliser la fonction de synchronisation automatique. La synchronisation automatique fonctionne alors en arrière plan sans ouvrir les applications et synchronise les données. • Synchronisation auto : configurez l’appareil afin de synchroniser automatiquement les contacts, le calendrier et les messages. Confidentialité Modifiez les paramètres pour gérer vos propres paramètres et données. • Sauvegarder mes données : sauvegardez les paramètres de votre téléphone sur le serveur Google.Paramètres 129 • Indicateur d'astuces : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vous avertisse de la disponibilité d’astuces en affichant l’icône d’aide rapide. • Espacement auto. : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. • Majuscules auto. : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il mette automatiquement en majuscule la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final : le point, le point d’interrogation et le point d’exclamation. • Afficher la trace comp. : définissez la durée d’affichage de la trajectoire de votre déplacement sur l’écran tactile. • Fenêtre de choix du mot: définissez la fréquence d’affichage de la liste des mots. • Vitesse/précision : définissez l’équilibre entre la vitesse et la précision. • Aide de Swype : accédez aux informations d’aide sur l’utilisation du clavier Swype. • Tutoriel : découvrez comment saisir du texte plus rapidement avec le clavier Swype. • Version : affichez les informations de version. › Sélectionner mode de saisie Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. › Clavier Swype • Langue : sélectionnez la langue de saisie. Vous ne pouvez pas saisir du texte dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez changer de langue de saisie pour utiliser une langue prise en charge. • Reconnaissance mots : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des propositions de mots au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. • Aide sonore : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vous avertisse si aucun mot alternatif n’existe pour votre saisie si vous appuyez deux fois sur un mot. • Retour tactile : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vibre lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche.130 Paramètres • Modification du clavier: activez ou désactivez la fonction de modification du clavier pour le mode de saisie du texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner différents modes de saisie en faisant défiler le clavier vers la gauche ou vers la droite. • Mise en majuscules automatique : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il mette automatiquement en majuscule la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final : le point, le point d’interrogation et le point d’exclamation. • Paramètres de saisie manuscrite : personnalisez la durée de la reconnaissance en mode manuscrit. • Entrée voix : pour saisir du texte oralement avec le clavier Samsung, activez la fonction d’entrée de voix. • Point automatique : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. • Didacticiel : découvrez comment saisir du texte avec le clavier Samsung. › Clavier Samsung • Types de clavier Portrait: sélectionnez le mode de saisie par défaut, par exemple le clavier AZERTY, le clavier traditionnel ou l’écriture manuscrite. • Langues de saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. Vous ne pouvez pas saisir du texte dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez changer de langue de saisie pour utiliser une langue prise en charge. • XT9 : activez le mode XT9 pour rédiger du texte avec la saisie prédictive. • Paramètres XT9 avancés : activez les fonctions avancées du mode XT9, par exemple la saisie automatique, la correction ou la substitution automatique, et définissez votre propre liste de mots.Paramètres 131 • Profil Voiture : activez le Profil Voiture pour que l’appareil vous signale verbalement les messages, les appels entrants ou les détails d’un événement. • Toujours utiliser mes paramètres : configurez l’appareil afin qu’il utilise les paramètres que vous avez spécifiés et non ceux par défaut. • Moteur par défaut: configurez le moteur de synthèse vocale à utiliser pour le texte parlé. • Installer les données vocales : téléchargez et installez des données vocales pour la fonction de synthèse vocale. • Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de la fonction de synthèse vocale. • Langue : sélectionnez la langue pour la fonction de synthèse vocale. • Moteurs : affichez les moteurs de synthèse vocale téléchargés depuis Android Market. Entrée et sortie voix Modifiez les paramètres de la fonction de reconnaissance de voix et de synthèse vocale. › Param. reconnaissance vocale • Langue : sélectionnez la langue pour la reconnaissance de voix Google. • SafeSearch : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il filtre les images ou les textes au contenu explicite dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. • Bloquer les termes choquants : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il reconnaisse et bloque les termes choquants dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. › Paramètres de synthèse vocale • Ecouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. Installez des données vocales pour l’utilisation de la fonction de synthèse vocale.132 Paramètres • Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : définissez votre fuseau horaire local. • Définir l'heure : réglez l’heure manuellement. • Format 24 heures : définissez l’affichage de l’heure sur le format 24 heures. • Format de date : sélectionnez un format de date. A propos du téléphone Accédez à des informations concernant votre appareil, vérifiez son état et découvrez comment l'utiliser. Accessibilité Modifiez les paramètres des fonctions d’accessibilité. • Accessibilité : activez une application d’accessibilité téléchargée, par exemple Talkback ou Kickback, qui émet un retour vocal, une mélodie ou une vibration. • Tche Marche pr fin appels : paramétrez l’appareil pour mettre fin à un appel en appuyant sur la touche [ ]. Date & heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour gérer la façon dont l’heure et la date s’affichent sur l’appareil : • Automatique : actualisez automatiquement l’heure du téléphone lors des changements de fuseau horaire. • Définir la date : définissez manuellement la date du jour.Dépannage 133 Dépannage Lorsque vous allumez ou utilisez votre téléphone, un message vous invite à saisir l'un des codes suivants : Code Solution possible : Mot de passe Lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour le téléphone. PIN Lorsque vous utilisez le téléphone pour la première fois ou lorsque la demande de code PIN est activée, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Cette fonction peut être désactivée dans le menu Paramètres → Localisation et sécurité → Configurer blocage SIM → Verrouiller carte SIM. Code Solution possible : PUK Si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, votre carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur. PIN2 Lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant la saisie du code PIN2, vous devez saisir ce code, fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur liés au réseau ou au service • Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. • Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Contactez votre opérateur pour obtenir des informations complémentaires.134 Dépannage Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil se bloque ou ralentit, vous devez peut-être fermer des programmes ou réinitialiser l'appareil pour que celui-ci retrouve un fonctionnement normal. Si votre appareil se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez simultanément le doigt sur [ ] et sur la touche Accueil pendant au moins 8-10 secondes. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre ce problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis l'écran d'accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres → Confidentialité → Rétablir param. par défaut → Réinitialiser le téléphone → Supprimer tout. Interruption inopinée des appels Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l'écran tactile Si votre téléphone dispose d'un écran tactile et que cet écran réagit de manière erronée, tentez les manipulations suivantes: • Retirez les éventuelles protections de l'écran tactile. Les films de protection peuvent empêcher le téléphone de reconnaître vos saisies et ne sont pas recommandés pour les écrans tactiles. • Vos mains doivent être propres et sèches lorsque vous touchez l'écran tactile. • Redémarrez votre téléphone afin de mettre fin à d'éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. • Assurez-vous que le logiciel de votre téléphone est mis à jour avec la dernière version. • Si l'écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, confiez votre téléphone à un centre de service après-vente Samsung.Dépannage 135 • Si vous utilisez un kit mains-libres ou un casque, vérifiez qu'il est correctement branché. Mauvaise qualité d'écoute • Assurez-vous que rien n'entrave l'antenne intégrée au téléphone. • Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Impossible d'appeler des contacts enregistrés • Vérifiez que le bon numéro a été enregistré dans la liste de contacts. • Si nécessaire, saisissez et enregistrez le numéro à nouveau. • Vérifiez que vous n'avez pas activé la fonction d'interdiction d'appels pour ce numéro de téléphone. Impossible d'appeler • Assurez-vous d'avoir appuyé sur la touche d'appel. • Assurez-vous d'être connecté(e) au réseau cellulaire approprié. • Vérifiez que vous n'avez pas activé la fonction d'interdiction d'appels pour ce numéro de téléphone. Impossible de recevoir des appels • Vérifiez que votre téléphone est bien allumé. • Assurez-vous d'être connecté(e) au réseau cellulaire approprié. • Vérifiez que vous n'avez pas activé la fonction d'interdiction d'appels pour ce numéro de téléphone entrant. Problèmes d'écoute de vos interlocuteurs • Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n'est pas recouvert. • Le microphone doit être placé suffisamment près de votre bouche.136 Dépannage Messages d'erreur à l'ouverture de l'appareil photo Pour utiliser l'appareil photo, votre appareil doit avoir suffisamment de mémoire disponible et sa batterie doit être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d'erreur lors de l'ouverture de l'appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la par une autre entièrement chargée. • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un PC ou en supprimant des éléments de votre appareil. • Redémarrez l'appareil. Si les problèmes persistent, contactez votre Centre de service après-vente Samsung. Tonalités inopinées et clignotements de l'icône de la batterie Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Rechargez la batterie ou remplacez-la pour continuer à utiliser le téléphone. Problèmes pour recharger la batterie et désactivation du téléphone • Les fiches de la batterie sont peut-être sales. Nettoyez les fiches dorées à l'aide d'un chiffon doux et propre, puis réessayez de recharger la batterie. • Si la batterie ne se recharge plus complètement, remplacez-la par une neuve et recyclez l'ancienne conformément à la législation en vigueur dans votre pays. L’appareil est chaud au toucher Lorsque vous utilisez plusieurs applications en même temps ou sur une période prolongée, votre téléphone peut sembler chaud au toucher. Ce phénomène est normal et n'affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances du téléphone.Dépannage 137 Messages d'erreur à l'ouverture de la radio FM L'application Radio FM de votre téléphone mobile Samsung utilise le casque ou les écouteurs comme antenne radio. Si le casque n'est pas branché, la radio FM sera dans l'incapacité de capter les stations. Pour utiliser la radio FM, commencez par vérifier que le casque est branché correctement. Ensuite, recherchez et enregistrez les fréquences des stations disponibles. Si les problèmes persistent après ces manipulations, tentez d'accéder à la station désirée avec un autre récepteur radio. Si vous captez la station avec un autre récepteur, votre téléphone a peut-être besoin d'être réparé. Contactez votre Centre de service après-vente Samsung. Messages d'erreur à l'ouverture de fichiers audio Certains fichiers audio risquent de ne pas fonctionner sur votre appareil mobile Samsung pour plusieurs raisons. Si vous obtenez des messages d'erreur lors de l'ouverture de fichiers audio, tentez les manipulations suivantes : • Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers sur un PC ou en supprimant des éléments de votre appareil. • Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n'est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d'auteur). Si c'est le cas, vous devez posséder une licence appropriée ou une clé pour lire le fichier. • Vérifiez que votre appareil prend en charge le type du fichier audio.138 Dépannage Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth • Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée sur votre téléphone. • Vérifiez que la fonction Bluetooth est activée également sur l'autre appareil, si nécessaire. • Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth sont bien à l'intérieur du rayon d'action Bluetooth (10 mètres maximum). Si le problème persiste après ces manipulations, contactez votre Centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un PC • Assurez-vous que le câble de connexion PC que vous utilisez est compatible avec votre téléphone. • Vérifiez que les pilotes nécessaires sont bien installés sur votre PC et mis à jour.Consignes de sécurité 139 Consignes de sécurité Afin d'éviter de blesser votre entourage ou vous-même, ou bien d'endommager votre téléphone, veuillez lire toutes les informations suivantes avant d'utiliser votre téléphone. Avertissement : Évitez les chocs électriques, le feu et les explosions N'utilisez pas de prises et de cordons d'alimentation endommagé(e)s ou de prises électriques mal fixées Ne touchez pas le cordon d'alimentation lorsque vos mains sont mouillées et ne tirez pas sur le chargeur pour le débrancher Ne tordez pas ou n'endommagez pas le cordon d'alimentation N'utilisez et ne touchez pas votre téléphone avec les mains mouillées lorsque celui-ci est en cours de chargement Ne provoquez pas de court-circuit avec le chargeur ou la batterie Ne laissez pas tomber le chargeur ou la batterie et ne les exposez pas aux chocs Ne rechargez pas la batterie en utilisant un chargeur non homologué par Samsung N'utilisez pas votre téléphone pendant un orage Le téléphone peut mal fonctionner et les risques de choc électrique peuvent augmenter. Ne manipulez pas la batterie Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) lorsque celle-ci coule ou est endommagée Contactez le centre de traitement agréé le plus proche de chez vous afin de vous séparer de vos batteries Li-Ion en toute sécurité. Manipulez et jetez les batteries et les chargeurs avec précaution • N'utilisez que les batteries et les chargeurs homologués par Samsung et spécialement conçus pour votre téléphone. L'utilisation de batteries et de chargeurs incompatibles peut provoquer des blessures graves ou endommager votre téléphone. • Ne jetez jamais une batterie ou un téléphone au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur dans votre pays concernant l'élimination des batteries et des téléphone usagé(e)s. • Ne posez jamais une batterie ou un téléphone à l'intérieur ou au-dessus d'appareils chauffants, tels que des fours à micro-ondes, des cuisinières ou des radiateurs. En cas de surchauffe, la batterie peut exploser. • N'écrasez ou ne perforez jamais la batterie. Évitez d'exposer la batterie à une pression externe élevée qui risquerait d'entraîner un court-circuit interne et une surchauffe.140 Consignes de sécurité N'utilisez pas votre téléphone à proximité d'un stimulateur cardiaque • Maintenez une distance minimale de 15 cm entre votre téléphone et le stimulateur cardiaque pour éviter toute interférence. • Il est fortement conseillé, lors d'un appel, de positionner le téléphone sur le côté opposé à l'implant. • Si vous pensez que votre téléphone vient perturber le fonctionnement d'un stimulateur cardiaque ou d'un appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur ou de l'appareil médical. N'utilisez pas votre téléphone dans un hôpital ou à proximité d'équipements médicaux en raison des interférences qu'il pourrait produire Si vous utilisez vous-même des équipements médicaux, contactez votre fabriquant afin d'éviter toute interférence de radiofréquence. Si vous utilisez un appareil auditif, contactez votre fabriquant afin d'obtenir plus d'informations sur les interférences Il est possible que certains appareils auditifs subissent des interférences causées par la radiofréquence de votre téléphone. Afin de vous assurer d'une utilisation de votre appareil auditif en toute sécurité, contactez votre fabriquant. Protégez le téléphone, la batterie et le chargeur contre toute détérioration • Évitez d'exposer votre téléphone et la batterie à des températures très basses ou très élevées. • Des températures extrêmes peuvent déformer le téléphone et réduire la capacité de chargement, ainsi que sa durée de vie et celle de la batterie. • Évitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risquerait de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et – de la batterie et de l'endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente. • N'utilisez jamais une batterie ou un chargeur endommagé(e). Attention : Respectez tous les avertissements de sécurité et les réglementations en vigueur lorsque vous utilisez votre téléphone dans un endroit où son utilisation est réglementée Éteignez votre téléphone lorsque son utilisation est interdite Respectez toutes les réglementations interdisant l'utilisation des téléphones mobiles dans certaines zones spécifiques. N'utilisez pas votre téléphone à proximité d'autres appareils électroniques La plupart des appareils électroniques utilisent des signaux de radiofréquence radiofréquence. Il est possible que votre téléphone cause des interférences avec d'autres appareils électroniques.Consignes de sécurité 141 Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et réglementations relatives à l'utilisation de votre téléphone lorsque vous vous trouvez au volant d'un véhicule Votre responsabilité principale est avant tout de conduire votre véhicule sans prendre de risques. N'utilisez jamais votre téléphone au volant, si cela est interdit par la loi. Pour votre sécurité et celle des autres, faites preuve de bon sens et gardez à l'esprit les conseils suivants : • Utilisez un kit mains-libres. • Apprenez à connaître les fonctions pratiques de votre téléphone, comme par exemple la numérotation rapide et la fonction de rappel automatique. Ces fonctions vous permettent de gagner du temps et de rester concentré lorsque vous passez ou recevez des appels sur votre téléphone. • Gardez votre téléphone à portée de main. Soyez en mesure d'atteindre votre téléphone mobile sans quitter la route des yeux. Si vous recevez un appel entrant à un moment inopportun, laissez votre messagerie vocale répondre à votre place. • Informez votre interlocuteur que vous êtes au volant. Interrompez tout appel en cas d'embouteillages ou de conditions météorologiques dangereuses. La pluie, la neige, le verglas et une circulation dense sont des facteurs dangereux. Éteignez le téléphone dans les lieux présentant des risques d'explosion • Éteignez le téléphone dans les lieux présentant des risques d'explosion. • Respectez toujours les consignes, les instructions et la signalétique d'utilisation dans un environnement explosif. • N'utilisez pas votre téléphone dans une station-service, dans les zones potentiellement explosives ou à proximité de produits combustibles ou chimiques. • Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même habitacle que le téléphone, ses composants ou ses accessoires. Éteignez votre téléphone lorsque vous voyagez en avion Les téléphones portables peuvent engendrer des interférences avec les équipements aéronautiques. Conformez-vous aux réglementations en vigueur et éteignez votre téléphone. Il est possible que les appareils électroniques se trouvant à bord d'un véhicule motorisé subissent des dysfonctionnements provoqués par la radiofréquence de votre propre téléphone142 Consignes de sécurité Pour entretenir et bien utiliser votre téléphone Conservez votre téléphone au sec • L'humidité et tous types de liquides peuvent endommager les pièces ou les circuits éléctroniques de votre téléphone. • En cas de contact avec un liquide, retirez la batterie sans allumer votre téléphone. Séchez votre téléphone avec un chiffon et confiez-le à un service de réparation. • Les liquides modifient la couleur de l'étiquette indiquant que l'intérieur du téléphone a été endommagé. L'eau peut endommager votre téléphone et entraîner l'annulation de la garantie du fabricant. N'utilisez pas ou ne rangez pas votre téléphone dans des endroits poussiéreux ou sales La poussière peut causer des dysfonctionnements de votre téléphone. Ne posez pas votre téléphone sur des surfaces inclinées Si votre téléphone tombe, il peut être endommagé. Ne conservez pas votre téléphone dans des endroits chauds ou froids. Utilisez votre téléphone à des températures comprises entre -20°C et 50°C • Votre téléphone peut exploser si vous le laissez dans un véhicule fermé, la température intérieure pouvant monter jusqu'à 80°C. • Ne prenez pas de notes ou ne recherchez pas de numéros de téléphone. Noter une liste de tâches à effectuer ou parcourir votre répertoire détourne votre attention de votre responsabilité principale qui consiste à conduire sans prendre de risques. • Composez des numéros de manière raisonnable et évaluez l'état de la circulation. Passez vos appels lorsque vous êtes immobile ou avant de vous insérer dans la circulation. Essayez de passer vos appels de préférence lorsque votre véhicule est stationné. Si vous devez absolument passer un appel, composez les chiffres un à un, regardez la route et dans vos rétroviseurs, puis reprenez la numérotation. • Ne poursuivez pas de conversations stressantes ou émotionnelles qui pourraient vous distraire. Informez vos interlocuteurs que vous êtes au volant et interrompez toute conversation susceptible d'altérer votre attention sur la route. • Utilisez votre téléphone pour demander de l'aide. En cas d'incendie, d'accident de la route ou d'urgence médicale, composez le numéro d'urgence local. • Utilisez votre téléphone pour aider d'autres personnes en situation d'urgence. Si vous êtes témoin d'un accident, d'une agression ou de toute autre situation d'urgence mettant des vies en jeu, contactez les services d'urgence locaux. • Appelez un service d'assistance dépannage ou un service spécial d'assistance, si cela s'avère nécessaire. Si vous croisez un véhicule endommagé ne présentant pas de danger immédiat, si vous constatez un feu rouge cassé, un accident de la route sans gravité où personne ne semble blessé ou encore un véhicule que vous savez volé, appelez un service d'assistance dépannage ou un service spécial d'assistance autre que les services d'urgence.Consignes de sécurité 143 Ne conservez pas votre téléphone à proximité ou à l'intérieur de radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d'équipements de cuisine chauffants ou de conteneurs à haute pression • La batterie peut couler. • Votre téléphone peut surchauffer et causer un incendie. Ne laissez pas tomber votre téléphone et ne l'exposez pas aux chocs • L'écran de votre téléphone pourrait être endommagé. • Votre téléphone peut être endommagé ou certaines pièces peuvent subir des dysfonctionnements si vous le tordez ou le déformez. N'utilisez pas le flash de l'appareil photo trop près des yeux de personnes ou d'animaux Utiliser un flash à proximité des yeux peut causer des lésions oculaires ou une perte temporaire de la vue. Préservez la durée de vie de la batterie et du chargeur • Ne laissez pas la batterie en charge pendant plus d'une semaine, car une surcharge risque de réduire sa durée de vie. • Lorsqu'elle n'est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit être rechargée avant utilisation. • Lorsque le chargeur n'est pas utilisé, ne le laissez pas branché à une prise de courant. • Utilisez la batterie pour votre téléphone uniquement. • N'exposez pas votre téléphone à la lumière directe du soleil de manière prolongée (comme par exemple sur le tableau de bord d'une voiture). • Conservez la batterie à des températures allant de 0°C à 40°C. Ne conservez pas votre téléphone à proximité d'objets métalliques, comme par exemple des pièces, des clés ou des colliers • Votre téléphone pourrait être déformé ou subir des dysfonctionnements. • Les bornes de la batterie peuvent causer des incendies si elles sont mises en contact avec des objets métalliques. Ne conservez pas votre téléphone à proximité de champs magnétiques • Lorsqu'il est exposé à des champs magnétiques, votre téléphone peut subir des dysfonctionnements ou la batterie peut se décharger. • Les cartes à piste, comme par exemple les cartes de crédit, les cartes de téléphone et les cartes d'embarquement peuvent être endommagées par des champs magnétiques. • N'utilisez pas de housses ou d'accessoires équipés de fermetures aimantées et évitez toute exposition prolongée de votre téléphone à des champs magnétiques.144 Consignes de sécurité Restez prudent lorsque vous utilisez votre téléphone en marchant ou en bougeant Restez toujours conscient de votre environnement afin d'éviter de vous blesser ou de blesser d'autres personnes. Ne placez pas votre téléphone dans vos poches arrières ou à votre ceinture Vous pouvez être blessé ou endommager votre téléphone si vous tombez. Ne démontez pas, ne modifiez pas ou ne réparez pas vousmême votre téléphone • Toute modification ou tout changement effectué(e) sur votre téléphone peut entraîner l'annulation de la garantie du fabricant. Pour tout besoin de service, confiez votre téléphone à un service après-vente Samsung. • Ne démontez pas ou ne perforez pas la batterie, car ceci peut causer une explosion ou un incendie. Ne peignez jamais votre téléphone et n'y apposez jamais d'autocollants La peinture et les autocollants risquent de bloquer les pièces mobiles du téléphone et perturber son fonctionnement. Si vous êtes allergique à la peinture ou aux pièces métalliques du téléphone, vous pouvez souffrir de démangeaisons, d'eczéma ou de boursouflures de la peau. Si ces symptômes apparaissent, cessez immédiatement d'utiliser le téléphone et consultez un médecin. N'utilisez que des batteries, chargeurs, accessoires et fournitures homologué(e)s par Samsung • Utiliser des batteries ou des chargeurs génériques peut réduire la durée de vie de votre téléphone ou provoquer des dysfonctionnements. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la sécurité de l'utilisateur si celui-ci utilise des accessoires ou des éléments non homologués par Samsung. Ne mordez et ne portez pas à votre bouche le téléphone ou la batterie • Mordre ou porter le téléphone ou la batterie à votre bouche pourrait endommager votre téléphone ou provoquer une explosion. • Assurez-vous que les enfants manipulent le téléphone de façon appropriée s'ils doivent l'utiliser. Pour parler dans le téléphone : • Tenez le téléphone droit, comme vous le feriez avec un téléphone traditionnel. • Parlez directement dans le microphone. • Évitez tout contact avec l'antenne interne de votre téléphone. Toucher l'antenne peut réduire la qualité d'écoute ou provoquer une émission de radiofréquence plus élevée que nécessaire. • Lorsque vous utilisez votre téléphone, tenez-le de manière détendue, appuyez légèrement sur les touches, utilisez les fonctions spéciales de saisie (telles que les modèles et la saisie intuitive) pour réduire le nombre de touches à manipuler et faites des pauses régulières.Consignes de sécurité 145 • Évitez de placer votre téléphone ou ses accessoires à proximité de la zone d'ouverture des airbags. Si l'équipement mobile n'est pas installé correctement, le déclenchement de l'airbag risque de provoquer des blessures graves. Toute réparation doit être réalisée par un technicien agréé Le recours aux services d'un technicien non agréé risque d'entraîner des dégâts sur le téléphone et d'annuler la garantie du fabricant. Manipulez les cartes SIM et les cartes mémoire avec soin • Ne retirez pas une carte lorsque le téléphone y enregistre ou y lit des informations, car vous risqueriez de perdre des données et/ou d'endommager la carte ou le téléphone lui-même. • Protégez les cartes contre les chocs violents, les décharges électrostatiques et les interférences émises par d'autres appareils. • Ne touchez pas les contacts dorés de la carte avec vos doigts ou avec des objets métalliques. Si la carte est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux. Assurez l'accès aux services d'urgence Dans certaines zones ou dans certaines circonstances, il peut être impossible de joindre les numéros d'urgence avec votre téléphone. Avant de vous rendre dans des régions isolées ou non couvertes, prévoyez un autre moyen pour contacter les services d'urgence. Veillez à sauvegarder les données importantes Samsung ne sera en aucun cas tenu responsable en cas de perte de données. Lors du nettoyage de votre téléphone : • Essuyez votre téléphone ou le chargeur avec un chiffon ou une gomme. • Nettoyez les bornes de la batterie avec un morceau de coton ou un chiffon. • N'utilisez pas de produits chimiques ou de détergents. N'utilisez pas le téléphone si son écran est fissuré ou cassé Le verre ou l’acrylique brisé risque de vous blesser à la main ou au visage. Confiez votre téléphone à un service après-vente Samsung afin de le faire réparer. Utilisez votre téléphone uniquement pour vous servir des fonctions auxquelles il est destiné Évitez de déranger votre entourage lorsque vous utilisez votre téléphone dans un lieu public Ne laissez pas les enfants utiliser votre téléphone Votre téléphone n'est pas un jouet. Ne laissez pas les enfants jouer avec le téléphone, car ils pourraient se blesser ou blesser d'autre personnes, endommager le téléphone ou passer des appels susceptibles d'augmenter vos frais de communication. Installez le téléphone et ses accessoires avec précaution • Veillez à la bonne fixation de votre téléphone mobile et de ses accessoires dans votre véhicule. 146 Consignes de sécurité Cependant, si certains s’inquiètent des risques potentiels liés à une durée d’utilisation excessive du téléphone, nous leur conseillons d’utiliser le kit piéton afin de tenir le téléphone portable éloigné de la tête et du corps. La Déclaration de conformité figurant au dos de ce mode d'emploi prouve que votre téléphone est conforme à la directive européenne relative aux équipements terminaux de télécommunications et aux équipements radio. Pour plus d'informations sur le DAS et les normes européennes correspondantes, veuillez consulter le site Web de Samsung mobile. Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d'équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays de l'Union Européenne et dans d'autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble USB, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d'un développement durable. Ne transmettez pas d'éléments protégés par des droits d'auteur Ne transmettez pas d'éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur que vous avez enregistrés sans la permission des détenteurs de ces droits. Dans le cas contraire, vous seriez en infraction avec la législation sur les droits d’auteur. Le fabricant n’est en aucun cas responsable de l'utilisation frauduleuse des éléments protégés par les droits d’auteur. Informations sur la certification DAS Votre téléphone a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d'exposition aux radiofréquences (RF) émises recommandées par le Conseil de l'Union européenne. Ces normes empêchent la vente de téléphones mobiles qui dépassent le niveau d'exposition maximal (également connu sous le nom de DAS ou Débit d'absorption spécifique) de 2 W/kg. Lors des tests, la valeur DAS maximum enregistrée pour ce modèle était de 0,268 W/kg. En condition normale d'utilisation, la valeur DAS réelle sera généralement beaucoup plus faible, car le téléphone n'émet que l'énergie RF nécessaire à la transmission du signal vers la station de base la plus proche. Le téléphone minimise ainsi votre exposition globale à l'énergie RF en émettant automatiquement à des niveaux plus faibles dès que cela est possible. Par ailleurs, il est également recommandé d'utiliser autant que possible le kit piéton. Cependant, on veillera dans ce cas à éloigner le téléphone du ventre des femmes enceintes et du bas ventre des enfants et des adolescents. Les informations scientifiques actuelles n’indiquent en rien que l’utilisation des téléphones portables exige de prendre de quelconques précautions. Consignes de sécurité 147 Limitation de responsabilité Les contenus et les services accessibles par l’intermédiaire de ce téléphone appartiennent dans leur intégralité à des tiers et sont protégés par les lois sur les droits d’auteur, les brevets, les marques et/ou d’autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services sont fournis uniquement pour votre usage personnel et non pour une utilisation commerciale. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ces contenus ou services d’une manière qui n’a pas été autorisée par le propriétaire des contenus ou le fournisseur des services. Sans que cela ne limite ce qui précède, sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire de contenus ou du fournisseur de services concerné, il vous est interdit de modifier, de copier, de republier, de transférer, de diffuser, de transmettre, de traduire, de vendre, d’exploiter ou de distribuer, d’une quelconque manière et sur quelque support que ce soit, des contenus ou des services affichés par l’intermédiaire de ce téléphone, ou d’en créer des dérivés. LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES DE TIERS SONT FOURNIS " EN L'ÉTAT ". DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI LOCALE, SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS LES CONTENUS OU LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS, EXPRESSÉMENT OU IMPLICITEMENT, À QUELQUE FIN QUE CE SOIT. SAMSUNG EXCLUT EXPRESSÉMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS QUE CELA SOIT LIMITATIF, LES GARANTIES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D'ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER. SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS L'EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITÉ, L'ACTUALITÉ, LA LÉGALITÉ OU L'EXHAUSTIVITÉ DES CONTENUS OU DES SERVICES FOURNIS PAR L'INTERMÉDIAIRE DE CET APPAREIL, ET SAMSUNG NE SERA RESPONSABLE EN AUCUN CAS, Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE, QUE CE SOIT AU TITRE DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE OU DÉLICTUELLE, Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux. Élimination de la batterie de ce produit (Applicable aux pays de l'Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis en place) Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l'emballage indique que la batterie de ce produit ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L'indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si la batterie n'est pas correctement éliminée, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l'environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d'encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer la batterie des autres types de déchets et à la recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des piles et batteries.148 Consignes de sécurité DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCESSOIRES, SPÉCIAUX OU CONSÉCUTIFS, DES HONORAIRES D'AVOCAT, DES FRAIS OU DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE DÉCOULANT DE L'UTILISATION DE TOUT CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MÊME OU PAR UN TIERS (OU DE TOUTE INFORMATION FIGURANT DANS LEDIT CONTENU OU SERVICE), MÊME SI SAMSUNG A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE L'ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. DANS LA MESURE OÙ CERTAINS PAYS N'AUTORISENT PAS L'EXCLUSION DES GARANTIES IMPLICITES OU LA LIMITATION DES DROITS LÉGAUX DU CONSOMMATEUR, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CES EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS NE VOUS SOIENT PAS APPLICABLES. Les services tiers peuvent être suspendus ou interrompus à tout moment, et Samsung ne garantit pas qu'un contenu ou un service restera disponible pendant une certaine période. Les contenus et les services sont transmis par des tiers au moyen de réseaux et d'équipements de transmission qui échappent au contrôle de Samsung. Sans que cela ne limite le caractère général du présent avis, Samsung décline expressément toute responsabilité en cas d'interruption ou de suspension de tout contenu ou service fourni par l'intermédiaire de cet appareil. Samsung n'est pas responsable du service client lié aux contenus et aux services. Toute question ou demande de service portant sur les contenus ou les services doit être adressée directement aux fournisseurs de contenus et de services concernés.Index 149 répondre 42 utiliser des options 44 appels vocaux passer 41 répondre 42 utiliser des options 43 batterie installer 12 recharger 13 Bluetooth activer 97 envoyer des données 98 recevoir des données 98 rechercher d’autres appareils et s’y connecter 98 calculatrice 112 paramètres de l’appareil photo 63 paramètres de le caméscope 66 appels afficher les appels manqués 44 conférence 43 kit piéton 42 numéros à l’étranger 42 options au cours d’un appel vocal 43 passer 41 rejeter 42 répondre 42 restriction 46 signal d’appel 46 transfert 45 appels visio passer 41 alarmes arrêter 110 créer 110 désactiver 110 AllShare 101 appareil allumer ou éteindre 19 aspect 20 icônes d’informations 21 paramètres 120, 132 personnaliser 29 touches 21 volet des raccourcis 26 appareil photo capturer une photo 56 enregistrement une vidéo 64 Index150 Index écran Menu accéder 27 organiser les applications 28 écran tactile utiliser 23 verrouiller 25 e-mail afficher 52 créer un compte 51 envoyer 51 galerie afficher des photos 69 formats de fichier 68 lire des vidéos 70 gestionnaire de fichiers 115 Google Mail 49 Google Maps 87 Google Talk 53 horloge mondiale 111 Samsung Kies 106 stockage de masse 107 connexions VPN créer 108 se connecter à 109 contacts copier 79 créer 77 importer ou exporter 80 numéro d’appel abrégé 78 rechercher 78 contenu du coffret 11 date et heure 29 dépannage 133 DLNA voir AllShare écran d’accueil ajouter des éléments 25 ajouter des volets 27 calendrier afficher des événements 81 créer des événements 81 carte mémoire formater 18 insérer 16 retirer 17 carte SIM/USIM installer 12 verrouiller 32 chronomètre 111 configurer le transfert d'appel 45 connexions Bluetooth 97 DLNA 101 PC 105 Wi-Fi 99 connexions PC lecteur Windows Media 106Index 151 numérotation fixe 45 paramètres accessibilité 132 affichage 124 appel 122 applications 127 à propos du téléphone 132 carte SD et stockage 128 comptes et synchro. 128 confidentialité 128 date & heure 132 entrée et sortie voix 131 localisation et sécurité 125 paramètres de langue 128 sans fil et réseaux 120 son 124 photos afficher 69 capturer 56 capturer des photos assemblées 60 mémo vocal écouter 83 enregistrer 83 messagerie vocale 49 messages accéder à la messagerie vocale 49 créer un compte e-mail 51 envoyer un e-mail 51 envoyer un MMS 48 envoyer un SMS 47 mini journal 115 minuteur 111 MMS afficher 48 envoyer 48 mode Discret 30 mode Hors-ligne 19 navigateur Internet ajouter des favoris 86 surfer sur le Web 84 informations quotidiennes 94 Internet voir navigateur internet journal d’appels 47 langue 128 lecteur MP3 ajouter des fichiers 70 créer une liste de lecture 72 écouter de la musique 71 lecteur vidéo 67, 70 lecteur Windows Media 106 livre électronique importer 114 lecture 112 télécharger 114 luminosité de l'écran 31 mémo texte afficher 82 créer 82152 Index ThinkFree Office 116 traçage du mobile 33 verrouiller à l’aide du code PIN 32 vidéos enregistrer 64 lire 67, 70 Wi-Fi activer 99 avec WPS 100 rechercher des réseaux et s’y connecter 99 Write and Go 119 YouTube mettre des vidéos en ligne 92 visionner des vidéos 92 créer votre carte de visite 78 rechercher des contacts 78 restriction d’appel 46 saisir du texte 34 Samsung Apps 94 Samsung Kies 106 signal d’appel 46 SMS afficher 48 envoyer 47 synchronisation avec des comptes Web 39 avec le Lecteur Windows Média 106 avec un serveur Web 93 téléchargements applications 37 fichiers 38 capturer des photos en rafale 59 capturer par scène 58 mode Action 61 mode Autoportrait 62 mode Beauté 59 mode Dessin animé 62 mode Panorama 60 mode Sourire 59 mode Vintage 60 press reader 95 radio FM écouter 74 enregistrer des stations 75 recherche Google 91 rejet automatique 45 répertoire créer des contacts 77 créer des groupes 79La procédure de déclaration de conformité, définie dans l'article 10, puis reprise à l'alinéa [IV] de la directive 1999/5/EC a été conduite sous contrôle de l'organisme suivant : BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK* Numéro d'identification : 0168 Documentation technique détenue par : Samsung Electronics QA Lab. disponible sur simple demande. (Représentant pour l'union européenne) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK* 2010.10.29 Joong-Hoon Choi / Lab Manager (lieu et date de parution) (nom et signature du responsable dûment habilité) * Il ne s'agit pas de l'adresse du service après-vente de Samsung. Pour obtenir l'adresse ou le numéro de téléphone du service après-vente de Samsung, reportez-vous au certificat de garantie ou contactez le revendeur auprès duquel vous avez acheté ce produit. Déclaration de conformité (R&TTE) Nous, Samsung Electronics déclarons sous notre seule responsabilité que le produit Téléphone mobile : GT-I9000 en relation avec cette déclaration est en conformité avec les normes suivantes et/ou d'autres documents normatifs. Sécurité EN 60950-1 : 2006 +A11:2009 EN 50332-1 : 2000 EN 50332-2 : 2003 DAS EN 50360 : 2001 EN 62209-1 : 2006 CEM EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008) EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005) EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009) EN 301 489-19 V1.2.1 (11-2002) EN 301 489-24 V1.4.1 (09-2007) Radio EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) EN 301 908-1 V3.2.1 (05-2007) EN 301 908-2 V3.2.1 (05-2007) Ce téléphone a été testé et s'est avéré conforme aux normes relatives à l'émission de fréquences radio. En outre, nous déclarons que cet appareil répond à la directive 1999/5/EC.En fonction de la version logicielle de votre appareil ou de votre opérateur, certaines descriptions de ce mode d’emploi peuvent ne pas correspondre fidèlement à votre appareil. www.samsung.com French. 06/2011. Rev. 1.1 Protégez votre acuité auditive • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé peut endommager votre audition. • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé lorsque vous êtes au volant peut détourner votre attention et provoquer un accident. • Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter des écouteurs à une source audio et réglez le volume minimum nécessaire vous permettant d'entendre votre conversation ou la musique. Pour installer Samsung Kies 1. Téléchargez la dernière version de Kies sur le site web de Samsung (www.samsung.com) et installez le logiciel sur votre PC. 2. Depuis l'écran d'accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres USB → Samsung Kies. 3. Utilisez un câble de connexion PC pour connecter votre appareil et référez-vous à l'aide Kies pour plus d'informations. I9000 Mode d'emploi2 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Merci d’avoir choisi ce téléphone mobile Samsung. Ce téléphone vous permettra de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et sur la technologie exceptionnelle de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et caractéristiques de votre téléphone. À lire avant toute utilisation • Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi et toutes les précautions qui y sont indiquées avant d’utiliser votre téléphone, afin de l'utiliser en toute sécurité. • Les instructions et descriptions mentionnées dans ce mode d’emploi sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre téléphone. • Les illustrations utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. • Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer en fonction du produit et de la version logicielle fournie par votre opérateur et peut faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur www.samsung.com. • Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier en fonction du téléphone ou de la version logicielle. • La mise en forme et la distribution de ce mode d’emploi sont basées sur les systèmes d’exploitation Google Android et peuvent varier en fonction du système d’exploitation de l’utilisateur. • Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung n’est pas responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des tiers.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 3 Icônes Avant de mettre votre téléphone en service, familiarisez-vous avec les icônes que vous allez trouver dans ce mode d’emploi. Avertissement: situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Attention : situations pouvant endommager votre téléphone ou d’autres équipements Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations supplémentaires • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou de compatibilité causés par la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. • Vous pouvez améliorer la version logicielle de votre appareil mobile en vous connectant le site www.samsung.com. • Les sons, les fonds d’écran et les images fourni(e)s avec ce téléphone sont concédé(e)s sous licence et leur usage est restreint à une utilisation entre Samsung et leurs propriétaires respectifs. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ce matériel à des fins commerciales ou autres constitue une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteur. Samsung n’est pas responsable des infractions sur les droits d’auteur commises par l’utilisateur. • Veuillez conserver ce mode d’emploi afin de pouvoir le consulter ultérieurement.4 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2011 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics. ► Référence : pages contenant plus d’informations. Exemple : ► p.12 (signifie « voir page 12 ») → Suivi de : séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour effectuer une étape. Exemple : Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Messages → Nv message (signifie que vous devez d'abord appuyer sur Messages, puis sur Nv message) [ ] Crochets : touches du téléphone. Exemple : [ ] (représente la touche Marche/Arrêt/ Verrouillage)Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 5 • Wi-Fi®, le logo Wi-Fi CERTIFIED et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. • DivX®, DivX Certified® et les logos associés sont des marques déposées de DivX, Inc. et sont utilisées sous licence. • Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs. Marques • SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. • Les logos Android, Google Search™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Android Market™ et Google Talk™ sont des marques de Google, Inc. • Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées de Oracle et/ ou de ses filiales. Les autres marques sont déposées et demeurent la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. • Windows Media Player® est une marque déposée de Microsoft Corporation. • et sont des marques de SRS Labs, Inc. Les technologies CS Headphone et WOW HD sont fournies sous licence de SRS Labs, Inc.6 Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi À PROPOS DES VIDÉOS DIVX DivX® est un format de vidéo numérique créé par DivX, Inc. Cet appareil bénéficie d'une certification officielle de DivX (DivX Certified®) et permet de lire le format vidéo DivX. Rendez-vous sur le site www.divx.com pour obtenir plus d’informations et télécharger des logiciels pour convertir vos fichiers au format vidéo DivX. Les appareils DivX Certified® peuvent lire des vidéos DivX® d'une résolution HD allant jusqu’à 720 pixels, ainsi que du contenu Premium. À PROPOS DE DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND (Vidéo à la carte) Cet appareil DivX Certified® doit être enregistré pour pouvoir lire des films DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD). Pour obtenir votre code d’enregistrement, repérez la section DivX VOD dans le menu de configuration de votre appareil. Rendezvous sur vod.divx.com pour plus d’informations sur les modalités d’enregistrement.Table des matières 7 Assemblage ............................................. 11 Contenu du coffret ................................................ 11 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie .... 12 Recharger la batterie ............................................ 14 Insérer une carte mémoire (en option) ............ 16 Fixer une dragonne (en option) ......................... 18 Démarrage ............................................... 19 Allumer/éteindre le téléphone .......................... 19 Présentation du téléphone ................................. 20 Utiliser l’écran tactile ............................................ 23 Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches .............................................................. 25 Présentation de l’écran d’accueil ....................... 25 Accéder aux applications .................................... 27 Personnaliser le téléphone ................................. 29 Saisir du texte ......................................................... 34 Télécharger des applications à partir d’Android Market .................................................. 37 Télécharger des fichiers sur le Web ................... 38 Synchroniser des données .................................. 39 Communication ...................................... 41 Appels ...................................................................... 41 Messagerie .............................................................. 47 Google Mail ............................................................ 49 Table des matières8 Table des matières Informations personnelles .................... 77 Contacts ................................................................... 77 Calendrier ................................................................ 81 Mémo texte ............................................................ 82 Mémo vocal ............................................................ 83 Web ........................................................... 84 Navigateur .............................................................. 84 Maps ......................................................................... 87 Latitude ................................................................... 89 Adresses .................................................................. 90 Navigation .............................................................. 90 Recherche ............................................................... 91 Email ......................................................................... 51 Mail ........................................................................... 53 Talk ............................................................................ 53 Social Hub ............................................................... 54 Divertissements ...................................... 56 Appareil photo ....................................................... 56 Vidéos ...................................................................... 67 Galerie ...................................................................... 68 Musique ................................................................... 70 Radio FM .................................................................. 73Table des matières 9 AllShare ................................................................... 99 Partager une connexion réseau mobile ........ 102 Connexions TV (mode de sortie TV) ............... 104 Connexions PC ..................................................... 104 Connexions VPN .................................................. 107 Outils ....................................................... 109 Horloge .................................................................. 109 Calculatrice ........................................................... 111 Téléchargements ................................................. 111 Mini journal .......................................................... 112 Mes fichiers ........................................................... 112 Gestionnaire de tâches ...................................... 113 ThinkFree Office .................................................. 114 YouTube ................................................................... 91 Synchroniser ........................................................... 93 Android Market ..................................................... 94 App Shop ................................................................. 94 Jeux ........................................................................... 94 Orange Maps .......................................................... 94 Météo ....................................................................... 95 Photo ........................................................................ 95 Sonneries ................................................................ 95 Connectivité ............................................ 96 Bluetooth ................................................................ 96 Wi-Fi .......................................................................... 9810 Table des matières Recherche vocale ................................................ 115 Write and go ......................................................... 115 Paramètres ............................................. 117 Accéder au menu Paramètres .......................... 117 Sans fil et réseaux ................................................ 117 Appel ...................................................................... 119 Son .......................................................................... 121 Affichage ............................................................... 121 Localisation et sécurité ...................................... 122 Applications .......................................................... 124 Comptes et synchro. ........................................... 125 Confidentialité ..................................................... 125 Carte SD et mémoire .......................................... 125 Paramètres de langue ........................................ 125 Entrée et sortie voix ............................................ 128 Accessibilité .......................................................... 129 Date & heure ......................................................... 129 A propos du téléphone ...................................... 129 Dépannage ............................................ 130 Consignes de sécurité .......................... 136 Index ....................................................... 146Assemblage 11 Assemblage Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents: • Téléphone portable • Batterie • Chargeur • Guide de prise en main rapide Utilisez exclusivement des logiciels homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de logiciels piratés ou illégaux peut occasionner des dommages ou des dysfonctionnements qui ne sont pas couverts par la garantie du fabricant. • Les éléments fournis avec votre téléphone peuvent varier en fonction des logiciels et accessoires disponibles dans votre région. • Vous pouvez acquérir d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. • Les accessoires fournis sont spécialement conçus pour votre téléphone. • Il est possible que certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, ne soient pas compatibles avec votre téléphone.12 Assemblage 2 Retirez le cache batterie. Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le cache batterie. Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Lorsque vous vous abonnez à un service de téléphonie mobile, une carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) vous est remise. Elle permet de vous identifier et contient tous les détails de votre abonnement (code PIN, services en option, etc.). Pour bénéficier des services 3G ou 3G+, vous devez vous procurer une carte USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module). Pour installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie : 1 Si le téléphone est allumé, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée et appuyez sur Éteindre pour l’éteindre.Assemblage 13 4 Insérez la batterie. 5 Remettez le cache batterie en place. 3 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM. • Installez la carte SIM ou USIM dans le téléphone, puce orientée vers le bas. • Lorsque l’appareil ne contient pas de carte SIM ou USIM, vous pouvez utiliser les services hors-réseau de votre appareil, c'est-à-dire les fonctions autres que GSM et Bluetooth, ainsi que certains menus. • N’introduisez pas de carte mémoire dans le compartiment prévu pour la carte SIM.14 Assemblage › Recharger la batterie avec un chargeur 1 Ouvrez le cache du connecteur à fonctions multiples situé en haut du téléphone. 2 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du chargeur sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples du téléphone. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager le téléphone. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie. Recharger la batterie Vous devez recharger la batterie avant d’utiliser le téléphone pour la première fois. Vous pouvez recharger le téléphone à l’aide du chargeur fourni ou en le branchant sur un ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble de connexion PC. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs et des câbles homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles non homologués peut provoquer l’explosion de la batterie ou endommager votre téléphone. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, le téléphone émet un signal sonore et affiche un message d’avertissement. L’icône de batterie est alors vide et clignote. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est vraiment insuffisant, le téléphone s’éteint automatiquement. Rechargez la batterie pour remettre le téléphone en marche.Assemblage 15 4 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas, l’icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le chargeur du téléphone, puis de la prise de courant. Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d’avoir débranché le chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager le téléphone. Pour économiser l’énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas. Le chargeur n’est pas équipé d’un bouton Marche/Arrêt. Par conséquent, vous devez le débrancher de la prise pour couper l’alimentation. En cours d’utilisation, le chargeur doit rester à proximité de la prise. › Charger avec un câble de connexion PC Avant de recharger le téléphone, assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est allumé. 1 Ouvrez le cache du connecteur à fonctions multiples situé en haut du téléphone. 2 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples du téléphone. 3 Branchez l’autre extrémité du chargeur sur une prise de courant. • Vous pouvez utiliser le téléphone lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Dans ce cas, il est possible que le rechargement complet de la batterie prenne plus de temps. • Lorsque le téléphone est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur du téléphone. • Il est possible que le téléphone chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de rechargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances du téléphone. • Si le téléphone ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung.16 Assemblage Samsung utilise des normes industrielles standardisées pour les cartes mémoire. Néanmoins, il est possible que certaines marques de cartes mémoire ne soient pas entièrement compatibles avec votre téléphone. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager votre téléphone ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. • Seule la structure de fichiers FAT est compatible avec les cartes mémoire de votre téléphone. Lorsque vous insérez une carte formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, votre téléphone vous invite à la reformater entièrement. • Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. • Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans votre appareil, le répertoire des fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît dans le dossier /mnt/sdcard/ external_sd du menu Mes fichiers. 3 Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble de connexion PC sur un port USB de l’ordinateur. En fonction du type de câble de connexion PC que vous utilisez, il est possible que le rechargement tarde à démarrer. 4 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée (dans ce cas, l’icône ne clignote plus), débranchez le câble de connexion PC du téléphone, puis de l’ordinateur. Insérer une carte mémoire (en option) Pour stocker des fichiers multimédia supplémentaires, vous devez utiliser une carte mémoire. Le téléphone est compatible avec les cartes mémoire microSD™ ou microSDHC™ d’une capacité allant jusqu’à 32 Go (en fonction du fabricant et du modèle de carte mémoire).Assemblage 17 › Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer une carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable l’éjecter pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur ou sur Menu→ Paramètres→ Carte SD et mémoire → Démonter la carte SD. 2 Retirez le cache de la batterie. 3 Poussez la carte avec précaution jusqu’à la faire sortir du téléphone. 4 Retirez la carte de son emplacement. 5 Retirez la carte mémoire. 6 Remettez le cache batterie en place. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque le téléphone y enregistre ou lit des informations. Vous risqueriez de perdre des données et d’endommager la carte mémoire ou le téléphone. 1 Retirez le cache de la batterie. 2 Insérez la carte en orientant la puce vers le bas. 3 Enfoncez la carte mémoire dans son emplacement jusqu’à ce qu’elle se verrouille. 4 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place.18 Assemblage Fixer une dragonne (en option) 1 Retirez le cache batterie. 2 Faites passer une dragonne à travers la fente et accrochez-la au point d’attache. 3 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place. › Formater une carte mémoire Formater une carte mémoire sur un ordinateur peut entraîner des problèmes de compatibilité avec votre téléphone. Formatez la carte mémoire uniquement dans le téléphone. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur ou sur Menu→ Paramètres→ Carte SD et mémoire→ Démonter la carte SD→ Formater la carte SD → Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes stockées dans le téléphone. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur.Démarrage 19 Démarrage Allumer/éteindre le téléphone Pour allumer le téléphone : 1 Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée. 2 Si vous allumez le téléphone pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour configurer celui-ci. Pour l’éteindre, maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre. • Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation de téléphones portables est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. • Pour utiliser uniquement les services hors-réseau sur votre téléphone, c'est-à-dire les fonctions autres que GSM et Bluetooth, activez le mode Horsligne. Appuyez sur la touche [ ] et maintenez-la enfoncée, puis sur Mode Hors-ligne. 20 Démarrage Écouteur Objectif photo avant Écran tactile Touche Retour Capteur de proximité Touche Accueil Touche de volume Capteur de luminosité Touche Menu Microphone Présentation du téléphone › Aspect du téléphone Connecteur à fonctions multiples Cache de la batterie Prise audio 3,5 mm Marche/Arrêt/ Verrouillage Antenne interne Haut-parleur Objectif photo arrièreDémarrage 21 › Icônes d’informations Les icônes qui peuvent apparaître à l’écran peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique. Icône Description Aucun signal Puissance du signal Réseau GPRS connecté Réseau EDGE connecté Réseau 3G connecté Ouvrir les connexions Wi-Fi disponibles Wi-Fi connecté Bluetooth activé Kit piéton Bluetooth connecté › Touches Touche Fonction Marche/ Arrêt/ Verrouillage Allumer le téléphone (maintenir la touche enfoncée), accéder aux menus rapides (maintenir la touche enfoncée) et verrouiller l’écran tactile. Menu Afficher à l’écran la liste des options disponibles. Accueil Revenir à l’écran d’accueil, ouvrir la liste des applications récentes (maintenir la touche enfoncée). Retour Revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume Régler le volume du téléphone.22 Démarrage Icône Description Connecté à un ordinateur Modem USB activé Point d’accès mobile activé Pas de carte SIM/USIM Nouveau SMS ou MMS Nouvel e-mail Nouveau message vocal Alarme activée Notification d’événement Itinérance (hors de la zone de service locale) Icône Description GPS activé Appel vocal en cours Appel en attente Haut-parleur activé Appel manqué Synchronisation avec le Web Chargement de données Téléchargement de données Renvoi d’appel activéDémarrage 23 Utiliser l’écran tactile L’écran tactile de votre téléphone vous permet de sélectionner des éléments et des fonctions en toute facilité. Découvrez les manipulations de base relatives à l’utilisation de l’écran tactile. • N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus afin de ne pas rayer l’écran. • Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. • Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. Icône Description Mode Discret activé Vibreur activé en mode Discret Mode Hors-ligne activé Lecture audio en cours Lecture audio en pause Radio FM activée en arrière-plan Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie 10:00 AM Heure actuelle24 Démarrage • Faire glisser : posez votre doigt et faites-le glisser vers le bas, le haut, la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre les éléments des différentes listes. • Glisser/déposer : maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément, puis faites-le glisser pour déplacer l’élément. • Appuyer deux fois: appuyez brièvement à deux reprises sur l’écran tactile pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière sur les photos ou les pages Web que vous visionnez. • Passé un certain délai d’inactivité, votre téléphone désactive l’écran tactile automatiquement. Pour réactiver l’écran tactile, appuyez sur [ ] ou sur la touche Accueil. • Vous pouvez également régler la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur ou sur Menu et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Affichage→ Mise en veille de l’écran. • Pour une utilisation optimale de l’écran tactile, retirez le film de protection avant d’utiliser le téléphone. • L’écran tactile comporte une couche qui détecte les petites charges électriques émises par le corps humain. Pour de meilleures performances, appuyez sur l’écran tactile du bout du doigt. L’écran tactile ne réagit pas si vous utilisez des objets pointus, tels qu’un stylet ou un stylo. Contrôlez le fonctionnement de l’écran tactile à l’aide des manipulations suivantes: • Appuyer : appuyez une seule fois sur l’écran tactile pour sélectionner ou lancer un menu, une option ou une application. • Maintenir : pour ouvrir une fenêtre d’options contextuelles, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément pendant plus de 2 secondes.Démarrage 25 › Changer le mode d'écran d'accueil 1 Depuis l'écran d'accueil, appuyez sur → Sélecteur p. accueil ou appuyez sur Menu→ Sélecteur p. accueil. 2 Faites défiler vers la gauche ou vers la droite pour sélectionner un écran d'accueil (Ecran d’accueil Orange ou Samsung). 3 Appuyez sur Définir. › Ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil Vous pouvez personnaliser l’écran d’accueil en lui ajoutant des raccourcis pour accéder à des applications, des widgets ou des dossiers. Pour ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil : 1 Appuyez sur [ ] → Ajouter à la page d'accueil ou Ajouter ou maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil. 2 Sélectionnez la catégorie d’éléments → un élément : • Widgets/Orange Widgets/Widgets Android: ajouter des widgets à l’écran d'accueil. Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle du téléphone. Pour verrouiller l’écran et les touches, appuyez sur [ ]. Pour déverrouiller, allumez l’écran en appuyant sur [ ] ou sur la touche Accueil, puis faites glisser votre doigt sur l'écran. Présentation de l’écran d’accueil Lorsque le téléphone est en mode veille, l’écran d’accueil apparaît. Dans l’écran d’accueil, vous pouvez afficher l’état de votre appareil et accéder à ses applications. L’écran d’accueil comprend 7 volets. Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre l’un des volets de l’écran d’accueil. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur un point en haut de l’écran pour accéder directement au volet correspondant de l’écran d’accueil.26 Démarrage › Utiliser le volet des raccourcis En mode d’écran d’accueil ou lorsque vous utilisez une application, appuyez sur la zone des icônes d’information et faites glisser votre doigt vers le bas pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil, accéder aux informations de réseau et à la liste des notifications (messages reçus, appels manqués, événements etc.). Pour masquer la liste, refermez le volet des raccourcis en faisant glisser votre doigt de bas en haut. Dans le volet des raccourcis, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: • Wi-Fi : activer ou désactiver la fonction de connexion Wi-Fi. ► p. 98 • Bluetooth : activer ou désactiver la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ► p. 96 • GPS : activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS. • Données : activer ou désactiver les connexions de données sans fil. • Raccourcis : ajouter des raccourcis pour accéder aux applications, aux favoris et aux contacts. • Dossiers : créer un nouveau dossier. • Fonds d’écran : définir une image d’arrière-plan de votre appareil. La disponibilité de certains éléments dépend du mode d’écran d’accueil en cours. › Déplacer les éléments sur l’écran d’accueil 1 Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur un élément jusqu’à ce qu’il se grise. 2 Faites glisser l’élément jusqu’à l’emplacement désiré. › Supprimer des éléments de l’écran d’accueil 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur l’élément à supprimer. La corbeille apparaît au bas de l’écran d’accueil. 2 Faites glisser l’élément jusqu’à la corbeille. 3 Lorsque l’élément apparaît en rouge, relâchez-le.Démarrage 27 • Pour ajouter un nouveau volet, appuyez sur . • Pour changer l’ordre des volets, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une miniature, puis faites-la glisser à l’endroit désiré. 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ]. Accéder aux applications Pour accéder aux applications de votre téléphone : 1 Sur l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur ou sur Menu pour accéder à la liste des applications. 2 En mode d'écran d'accueil Samsung, faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre un écran de menus. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur un point en haut de l’écran pour accéder directement à l’écran de menu correspondant. 3 Sélectionnez une application. • Rotation auto : activer ou désactiver la rotation automatique de l'écran. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de votre zone géographique. › Ajouter ou supprimer des volets d'écran d’accueil En mode d'écran d'accueil Samsung, vous pouvez ajouter ou supprimer des volets dans l'écran d'accueil pour organiser vos widgets selon vos préférences et vos besoins. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] → Modifier. Vous pouvez également placer deux doigts sur l’écran, puis les resserrer pour passer en mode Modification. 2 Ajoutez ou supprimez des volets en effectuant les opérations suivantes: • Pour supprimer un volet, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une miniature et faites-la glisser dans la corbeille en bas de l’écran.28 Démarrage › Organiser les applications En mode d'écran d'accueil Samsung, vous pouvez réorganiser les applications dans la liste des applications en modifiant leur ordre ou en les regroupant par catégories, selon vos préférences et vos besoins. 1 Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur [ ] → Modifier. 2 Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur une application. 3 Faites glisser l’icône de l’application vers l’emplacement souhaité. Vous pouvez déplacer l’icône d’une application vers un autre écran du menu principal. Vous pouvez aussi déplacer les applications les plus utilisées près de l'icône Accueil. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] → Enregistrer. • Lorsque vous utilisez des applications fournies par Google, vous devez disposer d’un compte Google. Si vous ne disposez pas de compte Google, créez-en un. • Vous pouvez ajouter un raccourci vers une application en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur l’icône de l’application dans la liste des applications. Vous pouvez déplacer l’icône vers l’emplacement de votre choix dans l’écran d’accueil. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran précédent. Appuyez sur la touche Accueil pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. Le téléphone est équipé d’un capteur de mouvements intégré qui détecte son orientation. Si vous faites pivoter le téléphone alors que vous utilisez des fonctions, l’interface bascule automatiquement en mode Paysage. Pour paramétrer l’interface afin de conserver l’orientation initiale lorsque vous faites pivoter le téléphone, appuyez sur Paramètres→ Affichage→ Mise en veille de l’écran.Démarrage 29 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Gestionnaire de tâches→ Applications actives. La liste de toutes les applications actuellement utilisées sur votre téléphone s’affiche. 2 Pour fermer une application, appuyez sur Quitter près de l'application souhaitée. Pour fermer toutes les applications actives, appuyez sur Quitter tout près du nombre total d'applications actives. Personnaliser le téléphone Tirez le meilleur de votre téléphone en le personnalisant pour qu’il réponde à vos envies et vos préférences. › Régler la date et l’heure 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Date & heure. 2 Réglez la date et l’heure et modifiez d’autres options. Pour changer l’ordre des écrans du menu principal : 1 Dans la liste des applications, placez deux doigts sur l’écran, puis resserrez-les. 2 Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur la miniature d’un écran, puis faites-la glisser à l’endroit désiré. › Accéder aux applications récentes 1 Maintenez la touche Accueil enfoncée pour ouvrir la liste des applications récemment utilisées. 2 Sélectionnez l’application désirée. › Utiliser le gestionnaire de tâches Votre téléphone est un appareil multitâche. Il peut exécuter plusieurs applications à la fois. Toutefois, le mode multitâche peut provoquer des blocages, des problèmes de mémoire ou entraîner une consommation supplémentaire d’énergie. Pour éviter ces problèmes, arrêtez les applications inutiles en utilisant le gestionnaire de tâches.30 Démarrage Vous pouvez configurer le téléphone afin qu’il vous notifie différents éléments en mode Discret. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Son→ Vibreur → Toujours ou Uniquement en mode Discret. Lorsque le mode Discret est activé, remplace . › Changer de sonnerie 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Son→ Sonnerie du téléphone. 2 Choisissez une sonnerie dans la liste, puis appuyez sur OK. › Activer une animation en basculant d’une fenêtre à une autre Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Affichage→ Animation → Certaines animations ou Toutes les animations. › Activer ou désactiver la tonalité des touches Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Son→ Sélection sonore. › Régler le volume de la sonnerie Appuyez vers le haut ou le bas sur la touche de volume pour régler le niveau de la sonnerie. › Activer le profil discret Pour activer ou désactiver le profil Discret de votre téléphone, procédez à l’une des opérations suivantes: • Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→ Clavier, puis maintenez la touche # enfoncée. • Maintenez la touche [ ] enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Profil Discret.Démarrage 31 3 Pour régler la luminosité, faites glisser le curseur. 4 Appuyez sur OK. Le niveau de luminosité de l’écran influe sur la vitesse de déchargement de la batterie. › Définir un verrouillage d'écran Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile avec un modèle de déverrouillage ou un mot de passe pour éviter tout accès non autorisé. • Lorsque vous avez défini un verrouillage d’écran, vous devez saisir un code de déverrouillage chaque fois que vous activez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. • Si vous oubliez votre code PIN de déverrouillage d'écran ou votre mot de passe, apportez votre téléphone dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de codes de sécurité, d’informations confidentielles ou d’autres dommages résultant de l’utilisation de logiciels illégaux. › Sélectionner un fond d’écran d’accueil 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] → Fond d’écran → une option. 2 Sélectionnez une image. 3 Appuyez sur Sauveg., Définir le fond d’écran ou Sélectionner. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de l’utilisation des images ou des fonds d’écran fourni(e)s par défaut avec votre téléphone. › Régler la luminosité de l’écran Pour régler la luminosité dans le menu des paramètres: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Affichage→ Luminosité. 2 Décochez la case située à côté de Luminosité automatique.32 Démarrage 2 Saisissez un nouveau code PIN de déverrouillage d'écran (numérique) et appuyez sur Continuer. 3 Confirmez le code PIN, puis appuyez sur OK. Définir un mot de passe de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité→ Définir verrouillage → Mot de passe. 2 Saisissez un nouveau mot de passe (alphanumérique) et appuyez sur Continuer. 3 Saisissez de nouveau le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK. › Verrouiller la carte SIM ou USIM Vous pouvez verrouiller votre téléphone en activant le code PIN fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité→ Configurer blocage SIM→ Verrouiller carte SIM. 2 Saisissez votre code PIN et appuyez sur OK. Définir un modèle de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité→ Définir verrouillage → Modèle. 2 Prenez connaissance des instructions affichées et des exemples de modèles, puis appuyez sur Suivant (si nécessaire). 3 Dessinez un modèle en faisant glisser votre doigt sur l’écran pour relier au moins 4 points. 4 Appuyez sur Continuer. 5 Dessinez à nouveau le modèle pour confirmer. 6 Appuyez sur Confirmer. Définir un code PIN de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité→ Définir verrouillage → Code PIN.Démarrage 33 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Localisation et sécurité → Définir le traçage du mobile. 2 Saisissez votre mot de passe et appuyez sur OK. 3 Appuyez sur OK pour continuer. 4 Saisissez l’adresse e-mail et le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung, puis appuyez sur Ouvrir une session. Pour créer un compte Samsung, appuyez sur Se connecter. 5 Lisez les conditions d’utilisation et appuyez sur Accepter. 6 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone précédé de l’indicatif du pays (avec +). 7 Saisissez le nom d’un destinataire. 8 Rédigez le message à envoyer aux destinataires. 9 Appuyez sur Enreg. Pour pouvoir accéder à la fonction de Traçage du mobile, vous devez posséder un compte Samsung. Lorsque le verrouillage PIN est activé, vous devez saisir votre code PIN chaque fois que vous allumez votre téléphone. • Si vous saisissez un code PIN erroné à plusieurs reprises, votre carte SIM ou USIM se bloque. Vous devez alors saisir le code PIN de déverrouillage (PUK) afin de débloquer la carte SIM ou USIM. • Si vous bloquez votre carte SIM ou USIM en saisissant un code PUK erroné, apportez-la chez votre revendeur pour la faire débloquer. › Activer le traçage du mobile Lorsque quelqu’un introduit une autre carte SIM/USIM que la vôtre dans votre téléphone, la fonction de traçage envoie automatiquement le nouveau numéro de téléphone aux destinataires spécifiés, afin de vous aider à le localiser et à le récupérer. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez créer un compte Samsung.34 Démarrage 2 Continuez ainsi jusqu’à la fin du mot. 3 Relâchez votre doigt après le dernier caractère. 4 Lorsque le mot souhaité apparaît correctement, appuyez sur pour insérer un espace. Si le mot souhaité ne s’affiche pas, choisissez un autre mot dans la liste affichée. 5 Répétez les étapes 1 à 4 pour rédiger tout votre texte. Saisir du texte Vous pouvez saisir du texte en utilisant les caractères du clavier virtuel ou en utilisant l’option d’écriture manuscrite. Vous ne pouvez pas saisir du texte dans certaines langues. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez utiliser une langue prise en charge. ► p. 125 › Modifier le type de clavier Vous pouvez modifier le type de clavier. Maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur le champ de saisie, puis appuyez sur Mode de saisie→ un type de clavier (Swype ou Samsung). › Saisir du texte avec le clavier Swype 1 Appuyez sur le premier caractère d’un mot et faites glisser votre doigt, en le maintenant sur l’écran, vers le second caractère. Démarrage 35 • Vous pouvez aussi utiliser les touches pour saisir du texte. • Vous pouvez maintenir une touche enfoncée pour saisir les caractères de la moitié supérieure de la touche. Lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche jusqu’à ce que la liste de caractères apparaisse, vous pouvez saisir des caractères spéciaux et des symboles. Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes: 6 4 5 7 1 3 2 Numéro Fonction 1 Modifier la casse. 2 Accéder à l’écran TIP SWIPE et ouvrir les informations d’aide (appuyer et maintenir enfoncé). 3 Basculer entre les modes Symbole et ABC/ Numérique. 4 Supprimer des caractères. 5 Effectuer un retour à la ligne. 6 Saisir du texte oralement. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible selon la langue de saisie sélectionnée. 7 Insérer un espace.36 Démarrage Numéro Fonction 1 Changer la casse. 2 Basculer entre les modes Numérique/ Symbole et ABC. 3 Saisir du texte oralement. Cette icône est disponible uniquement lorsque vous activez la fonction de reconnaissance vocale pour le clavier Samsung. Il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible selon la langue de saisie sélectionnée. 4 Effacer la saisie. 5 Effectuer un retour à la ligne. 6 Accéder aux paramètres du clavier. Modifier le mode de saisie de texte (maintenir enfoncée). › Saisir du texte avec le clavier Samsung 1 Appuyez sur → Types de clavier Portrait, puis choisissez un mode de saisie. Vous pouvez sélectionner l’un des modes de saisie à touches (AZERTY ou clavier traditionnel) ou l’écriture manuscrite. 2 Saisissez le texte en appuyant sur les touches alphanumériques ou en écrivant sur l’écran. Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes: 5 6 4 7 1 2 3 Démarrage 37 3 Appuyez sur Sélectionner texte dans la liste des options. 4 Appuyez sur Copier pour copier ou Couper pour couper le texte vers le presse-papier. 5 Dans une autre application, maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur le champ de saisie. 6 Appuyez sur Coller pour insérer le texte du presse-papier dans le champ de saisie. Télécharger des applications à partir d’Android Market La plate-forme Android qui équipe votre téléphone permet d’enrichir ses fonctions en installant des applications supplémentaires. Android Market vous permet d’acheter facilement et rapidement des applications et des jeux pour mobiles. Numéro Fonction 7 Insérer un espace. Insérer un point (double appui). Changer de langue de saisie (maintenir enfoncé, puis faire défiler à gauche ou à droite). Les fonctions de cette touche peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique. › Copier et coller du texte Lorsque vous saisissez du texte, vous pouvez exploiter la fonction copier-coller pour utiliser le même texte dans d’autres applications. 1 Placez le curseur à l'endroit où vous voulez démarrer. 2 Appuyez sur ou maintenez votre doigt appuyé sur le champ de saisie de texte.38 Démarrage › Désinstaller une application 1 Dans l’écran d’accueil d’Android Market, appuyez sur Mes applications. 2 Sélectionnez l’élément à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur Désinstaller→ OK. Télécharger des fichiers sur le Web Lorsque vous téléchargez des fichiers ou des applications sur le Web, votre téléphone les enregistre dans la carte mémoire. Les fichiers téléchargés sur le Web peuvent contenir des virus potentiellement dangereux pour le téléphone. Pour réduire les risques, téléchargez uniquement des fichiers provenant de sources fiables. Certains fichiers multimédia intègrent le système de Gestion des droits numériques (DRM) visant à protéger les droits d’auteur. Cette protection peut empêcher le téléchargement, la copie, la modification ou le transfert de certains fichiers. • En fonction de votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. • Votre appareil enregistrera les fichiers utilisateur des applications téléchargées dans la mémoire interne moviNAND™. Pour enregistrer les fichiers sur la carte mémoire, branchez votre téléphone sur un PC et copiez les fichiers à partir de moviNAND vers la carte mémoire. • Vous devez posséder un compte Google pour accéder à Android Market. Si vous ne possédez pas de compte Google, inscrivez-vous au service. › Installer une application 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Android Market. 2 Appuyez sur Accepter dans la fenêtre des conditions d’utilisation. 3 Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le téléchargement.Démarrage 39 › Paramétrer un compte 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Comptes et synchro. 2 Appuyez sur Ajouter un compte→ un type de compte. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer la configuration du compte. Pour les services communautaires en ligne, tels que Facebook ou MySpace, saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe et appuyez sur Se connecter. › Activer la synchronisation automatique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Comptes et synchro. 2 Appuyez sur Synchronisation auto. 3 Sélectionnez un compte. 4 Sélectionnez les applications à synchroniser. Pour exclure des applications de la synchronisation automatique, décochez les cases situées à côté des applications concernées. Pour télécharger des fichiers sur le Web : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Navigateur. 2 Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le téléchargement. Pour installer des applications téléchargées à partir de sites Web autres qu’Android Market, appuyez sur Paramètres→ Applications→ Sources inconnues. Synchroniser des données Vous pouvez synchroniser des données avec différents serveurs Web et les sauvegarder ou les restaurer. Une fois la synchronisation terminée, le téléphone reste connecté au Web. Si une modification est apportée sur le Web, les informations mises à jour s’affichent sur votre téléphone et la synchronisation débute automatiquement, et inversement. En fonction de votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible.40 Démarrage › Synchroniser des données manuellement 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Comptes et synchro. 2 Sélectionnez un compte. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] → Synchroniser maintenant. Votre téléphone commence à synchroniser les données que vous avez sélectionnées.Communication 41 Communication Appels Découvrez comment utiliser les fonctions d’appel de votre téléphone : passer un appel, répondre à un appel, utiliser les options disponibles en cours d’appel ou personnaliser les autres fonctions. › Passer un appel et répondre Vous pouvez utiliser les touches physiques du téléphone ou celles de l’écran tactile pour passer, accepter, refuser ou terminer un appel. Passer un appel 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone → Clavier, puis saisissez le numéro de téléphone à appeler précédé de son indicatif régional. 2 Pour effectuer un appel vocal, appuyez sur . Pour effectuer un appel visio, appuyez sur . Lorsque vous tenez le téléphone à proximité de votre visage, celui-ci verrouille automatiquement l’écran tactile pour éviter toute saisie accidentelle. 3 Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin. • Utilisez le répertoire pour enregistrer les numéros que vous composez fréquemment. ► p. 77 • Pour accéder rapidement au journal d'appels et composer les numéros récemment utilisés, appuyez sur Téléphone → Journaux. Répondre à un appel 1 Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser l'icône vers la droite. Pour désactiver la sonnerie lorsque le téléphone sonne, appuyez sur la touche de volume. 2 Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin.42 Communication › Utiliser un kit piéton En branchant un kit piéton sur le téléphone, vous pouvez répondre aux appels et les contrôler en mains libres: • Appuyez sur la touche du kit piéton pour répondre à un appel. • Pour rejeter un appel, maintenez la touche du kit piéton enfoncée. • Pour placer un appel en attente ou le récupérer un appel mis en attente, maintenez la touche du kit piéton enfoncée. • Pour raccrocher, appuyez de nouveau sur la touche du kit piéton. › Utiliser des options au cours d’un appel vocal Au cours d’un appel vocal, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: • Pour régler le niveau sonore de l’appel, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas. • Pour placer un appel en attente, appuyez sur . Pour récupérer un appel en attente, appuyez sur . Rejeter un appel Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser l'icône vers la gauche. Pour envoyer un message lorsque vous rejetez des appels entrants, appuyez sur Refus avec message. Pour créer un message de rejet, appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel→ Tous les appels→ Rejeter l’appel avec message. Appeler un numéro à l’étranger 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone → Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 0 enfoncée pour insérer le caractère +. 2 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone que vous souhaitez composer en entier (indicatif du pays, indicatif régional et numéro de téléphone), puis appuyez sur pour appeler ce numéro.Communication 43 • Pour passer d'un appel à l'autre, appuyez sur Permuter. • Pour lancer une conférence téléphonique, composez un second numéro ou répondez à un autre appel, puis appuyez sur Fusionner lorsque vous êtes en communication avec le deuxième correspondant. Répétez cette même procédure pour ajouter d’autres correspondants. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez d’abord souscrire au service de conférence téléphonique. › Utiliser des options pendant un appel visio Au cours d’un appel visio, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: • Pour activer le haut-parleur, appuyez sur HP. • Pour désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne vous entende pas, appuyez sur Muet. • Pour que votre correspondant ne voit plus votre image, appuyez sur [ ] → Masquer. • Pour changer l’image à afficher à votre correspondant, appuyez sur [ ] → Image sortante. • Pour passer un appel alors qu’un autre est déjà en cours, appuyez sur Ajouter et composez le nouveau numéro. • Pour répondre à un second appel, faites glisser l'icône vers la droite lorsqu’un signal d’appel retentit. Le téléphone vous demande alors si vous souhaitez mettre fin au premier appel ou le mettre en attente. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez d’abord souscrire au service de mise en attente des appels. • Pour ouvrir l’écran d’appel, appuyez sur Clavier. • Pour activer le haut-parleur, appuyez sur HP. Dans un environnement bruyant, il vous sera difficile d’entendre clairement votre correspondant avec la fonction haut-parleur. Utilisez le mode combiné classique pour une meilleure qualité sonore. • Pour désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne vous entende pas, appuyez sur Muet. • Pour discuter avec votre correspondant via un kit piéton Bluetooth, appuyez sur Casque. • Pour ouvrir le répertoire, appuyez sur [ ] → Contacts. • Pour ajouter un mémo, appuyez sur [ ] → Mémo.44 Communication › Afficher les appels manqués et rappeler les numéros correspondants Votre téléphone affiche les appels manqués à l’écran. Pour composer le numéro correspondant à un appel manqué, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et sélectionnez l’appel manqué. › Utiliser des fonctions supplémentaires Vous pouvez utiliser diverses autres fonctions d’appel comme le rejet automatique, le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN), le renvoi ou l’interdiction d’appel. Définir le rejet automatique Pour rejeter automatiquement certains appels, utilisez l’option de rejet automatique. Pour activer le rejet automatique et définir la liste des numéros à rejeter : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Tous les appels → Rejet automatique. 2 Appuyez sur Activer le rejet automatique pour activer cette fonction. • Pour ouvrir l’écran de numérotation, appuyez sur [ ] → Clavier. • Pour discuter avec l'objectif arrière correspondant via un kit piéton Bluetooth, appuyez sur [ ] → Basculer sur le casque. • Pour passer de l’objectif avant à l’objectif arrière, et viceversa, appuyez sur [ ] → Passer en mode appareil. • Pour personnaliser les paramètres des appels visio, appuyez sur [ ] → Paramètres. • Pour utiliser l’image de votre correspondant, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur son image. Vous pouvez capturer l’image à l’écran ou enregistrer l’appel visio. • Pour utiliser votre image, maintenez le doigt sur celle-ci. Vous pouvez régler la luminosité, faire un zoom avant ou arrière via l’objectif arrière, ou flouter votre image via l’objectif avant.Communication 45 Configurer le transfert d'appel Le transfert d’appel est une fonction réseau qui permet de transférer les appels entrants vers un autre numéro prédéfini. Vous pouvez configurer le transfert d’appel en fonction de différentes situations, lorsque vous ne pouvez pas répondre aux appels, par exemple, lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne ou lorsque vous n’êtes pas dans une zone couverte par le réseau. Pour définir le transfert d’appel pour les appels vocaux : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Appel vocal → Transfert d’appel. 2 Sélectionnez une condition. 3 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone vers lequel vos appels doivent être transférés et appuyez sur Activer. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau. 3 Appuyez sur Liste de rejet automatique. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] → Créer. 5 Saisissez un numéro à rejeter et appuyez sur Enregistrer. 6 Pour ajouter d’autres numéros, répétez les étapes 4-5. Utiliser le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN) En mode FDN, votre téléphone restreint l’émission d’appels qui n’est alors possible que pour les numéros enregistrés dans la liste FDN. Pour activer le mode FDN : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Numérotation fixe → Activer FDN. 2 Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM et appuyez sur OK. 3 Appuyez sur Liste FDN et ajoutez les contacts à utiliser en mode FDN.46 Communication 2 Sélectionnez un type d’appels à restreindre. 3 Saisissez votre mot de passe d’interdiction d’appel, puis appuyez sur OK. Votre paramètre est envoyé au réseau. Configurer le signal d’appel Le signal d’appel est une fonction réseau qui vous permet d’être averti de l’arrivée d’un second appel lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Appel vocal → Signal d’appel. Votre paramètre est envoyé au réseau. Cette fonction n’est disponible que pour les appels vocaux. Pour définir le transfert d’appel pour les appels visio : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Appel visio → Transfert d’appel visio. 2 Sélectionnez une condition. 3 Saisissez le numéro de téléphone vers lequel vos appels doivent être transférés et appuyez sur Activer. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau. Configurer la restriction d’appel La restriction d’appel est une fonction réseau qui interdit certains types d’appel ou qui empêche d’autres personnes de passer des appels avec votre téléphone. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur appuyez sur Paramètres→ Appel → Appel vocal → Restriction d'appel. Pour un appel visio, Paramètres→ Appel→ Appel visio → Appels visio interdits.Communication 47 Messagerie Découvrez comment créer et envoyer des messages texte (SMS), multimédia (MMS) et comment afficher ou gérer les messages envoyés ou reçus. L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut occasionner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre souscrite auprès de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. › Envoyer un SMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Messages→ Nv message. 2 Appuyez sur Contacts. Vous pouvez saisir un numéro manuellement ou le sélectionner à partir du journal d'appels, du répertoire ou d'un groupe. 3 Cochez les cases accolées aux contacts, puis appuyez sur Ajouter. › Afficher les journaux d’appels Vous pouvez afficher le journal d'appels en effectuant un tri par catégorie. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone→ Journaux. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Afficher par→ une option pour trier les journaux d’appels. À partir du journal d'appels, vous pouvez appeler un contact ou lui envoyer un message directement en faisant glisser votre doigt vers la gauche ou la droite sur son nom. 3 Sélectionnez l’un des journaux pour en afficher les détails. À partir des détails de l’appel, vous pouvez rappeler ce correspondant, lui envoyer un message ou l’ajouter au répertoire ou à la liste des appels à rejeter.48 Communication 5 Appuyez sur [ ] → Joindre→ une option, puis ajoutez un élément. Vous pouvez sélectionner un fichier à partir de la liste des fichiers ou capturer une photo, une vidéo ou un enregistrement audio. 6 Appuyez sur [ ] → Ajouter un objet et ajoutez l’objet du message. 7 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. › Afficher un SMS ou un MMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Messages. Vos messages sont regroupés sous forme de fils de discussion par contact, comme pour une messagerie instantanée. 2 Sélectionnez un contact. 3 Sélectionnez un SMS ou un MMS dans le fil de messages. 4 Appuyez sur Entrer le message ici et saisissez votre SMS. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] → Insérer smiley. 5 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. › Envoyer un MMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications, puis appuyez sur Messages→ Nv message. 2 Appuyez sur Contacts. Vous pouvez saisir un numéro ou une adresse e-mail manuellement ou le/la sélectionner à partir du journal d'appels, du répertoire ou d'un groupe. 3 Cochez les cases accolées aux contacts, puis appuyez sur Ajouter. Lorsque vous saisissez une adresse e-mail, le téléphone convertit le message en MMS. 4 Appuyez sur Entrer le message ici et saisissez votre SMS. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] → Insérer smiley.Communication 49 Google Mail Vous pouvez récupérer les nouveaux e-mails directement dans votre boîte de réception à partir de Google Mail™. Lorsque vous accédez à cette application, l’écran Boîte de réception s’affiche. Le nombre total de messages non lus s’affiche dans la barre de titre et les messages non lus apparaissent en gras. Si vous avez affecté un libellé à un message, celui-ci apparaît dans un rectangle de couleur. • En fonction de votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. • Le menu Gmail peut s’intituler différemment en fonction de votre zone géographique. › Envoyer un e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Google Mail. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Nouveau message. 3 Saisissez un nom ou une adresse dans le champ du destinataire. › Écouter la messagerie vocale Si vous avez configuré le téléphone pour que les appels auxquels vous ne pouvez pas répondre soient dirigés vers la boîte vocale, vos correspondants pourront vous laisser un message vocal. Pour accéder à votre messagerie vocale et écouter vos messages vocaux : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Téléphone → Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 1 enfoncée. 2 Suivez les instructions du serveur de messagerie vocale. Pour pouvoir accéder au serveur de messagerie vocale, vous devez d’abord enregistrer son numéro. Contactez votre opérateur qui vous fournira ce numéro.50 Communication • Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur Suppr. • Pour passer au message précédent ou suivant, appuyez sur ou . › Organiser les e-mails par libellé Vous pouvez organiser votre messagerie en affectant un libellé à vos messages ou en leur ajoutant une étoile pour faire ressortir les messages importants. Vous pouvez ainsi trier les messages en fonction du libellé. Ajouter un libellé à un message 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un message. 2 Appuyez sur Changer de libellés. 3 Choisissez le libellé à ajouter, puis appuyez sur OK. Ajouter une étoile à un message 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un message. 2 Appuyez sur Activer le suivi. Une étoile apparaît près du message. 4 Saisissez l’objet, ainsi que le contenu du message. 5 Pour joindre un fichier image, appuyez sur [ ] → Pièce jointe→ un fichier. 6 Appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail. › Consulter les e-mails 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Google Mail. 2 Sélectionnez un e-mail. En mode affichage d’un e-mail, utilisez les options suivantes: • Pour répondre à l’e-mail, appuyez sur . • Pour répondre à tous les destinataires, appuyez sur → Rép. à tous. • Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Transférer. • Pour afficher une pièce jointe, appuyez sur Aperçu. Pour l’enregistrer sur votre téléphone, appuyez sur Télécharger. • Pour archiver le message, appuyez sur Archiver.Communication 51 Une fois le compte de messagerie créé, les e-mails sont téléchargés sur votre téléphone. Si vous avez créé plusieurs comptes, vous pouvez passer d'un compte e-mail à l'autre. Pour ce faire, appuyez sur [ ] → Comptes, puis sélectionnez celui à partir duquel vous voulez récupérer les messages. › Envoyer un e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Email→ un compte e-mail. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Rédiger. 3 Appuyez sur Contacts. Vous pouvez saisir une adresse e-mail manuellement ou la sélectionner à partir du journal d'appels, du répertoire ou d'un groupe. 4 Cochez les cases accolées aux contacts, puis appuyez sur Ajouter. Filtrer les messages 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, appuyez sur [ ] → Ouvrir les libellés. 2 Sélectionnez le libellé des messages à afficher. Email Découvrez comment envoyer ou consulter des e-mails via votre compte de messagerie électronique personnel ou professionnel. › Créer un compte e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Email. 2 Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. 3 Appuyez sur Suivant (pour des comptes e-mail classiques comme Gmail ou Yahoo) ou Config. manuelle (pour vos comptes e-mail professionnels). 4 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran.52 Communication › Afficher un e-mail Lorsque vous ouvrez un compte e-mail, vous pouvez afficher hors connexion les e-mails précédemment récupérés ou vous connecter au serveur de messagerie pour consulter vos nouveaux messages. Une fois les messages récupérés, vous pouvez les lire hors connexion. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Email→ un compte e-mail. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Actualiser pour mettre à jour la liste des messages. 3 Sélectionnez un e-mail. En mode affichage d’un e-mail, utilisez les options suivantes: • Pour répondre au message, appuyez sur [ ] → Répondre. • Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur [ ] → Transf. 5 Appuyez sur le champ Cc/Cci pour ajouter d’autres destinataires. 6 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’objet et indiquez un objet. 7 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie du texte et rédigez votre e-mail. 8 Appuyez sur Joindre et joignez un fichier. Vous ne pouvez pas joindre les fichiers protégés par le système de Gestion des droits numériques (DRM). 9 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. Si vous êtes hors connexion ou en dehors de votre zone de couverture, le message est conservé dans le fil des messages jusqu’à votre prochaine connexion ou jusqu’à ce que vous vous trouviez de nouveau dans une zone couverte par votre opérateur.Communication 53 Talk Découvrez comment discuter avec votre famille ou vos amis par l’intermédiaire de Google Talk™. En fonction de votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. › Ajouter des amis à votre liste d’amis 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Talk. La liste des amis vous permet de voir tous vos contacts Google Talk en un seul coup d’œil. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Ajouter un ami. 3 Saisissez l’adresse e-mail d’un contact et appuyez sur Envoyer une invitation. Lorsque votre ami accepte l’invitation, ce dernier est ajouté à votre liste d’amis. • Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur [ ] → Supprimer. • Pour consulter une pièce jointe, faites glisser l’écran vers le bas et sélectionnez la pièce jointe. Pour l’enregistrer sur votre téléphone, appuyez sur . Mail Vous pouvez envoyer et recevoir des e-mails par l’intermédiaire du compte de messagerie électronique fourni par votre opérateur. Depuis l'écran d'accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mail. En fonction de votre zone géographique, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible.54 Communication • Certains services Social Hub™ pourraient ne pas être disponibles en fonction de la version logicielle de votre téléphone. • L'accès aux services Social Hub™ peut entraîner des coûts de connexion supplémentaires en fonction de l'offre souscrite auprès de votre opérateur. Pour plus d'informations, renseignez-vous auprès de votre opérateur. › Bienvenue dans le Social Hub™ Les 3 avantages de votre Social Hub™ 1 Tous vos contacts : Synchronisez vos répertoires en ligne (mails et réseaux sociaux) avec votre téléphone. 2 Boîte de réception Social Hub™: Gérez vos messages et conversations en une seule application. › Démarrer une session de discussion 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Talk. 2 Sélectionnez un nom dans la liste de vos amis. L’écran de discussion s’ouvre. 3 Saisissez votre message et appuyez sur Envoyer. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus→ Insérer une émoticône. 4 Pour basculer d’une discussion à une autre, appuyez sur [ ] → Changer de chat. 5 Pour clôturer une session de discussion, appuyez sur [ ] → Arrêter le chat. Social Hub Social Hub™ est un service de messagerie unique qui rassemble tous vos comptes (e-mails et réseaux sociaux) au sein d’une solution unifiée et intégrée au répertoire.Communication 55 2 Vous n'avez qu'une seule boîte de réception pour tous vos SMS/MMS, e-mails et actualités communautaires. 3 Appuyez sur l'enveloppe pour consulter vos messages ou sur la bulle pour lancer une discussion instantanée. Gérer votre calendrier unifié Le calendrier unifié de Social Hub™ vous permet de gérer votre agenda en y intégrant vos évènements communautaires. Les évènements associés à un de vos comptes seront synchronisés, que vous les modifiiez en ligne ou sur votre mobile. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Affichez/modifiez les évènements qui ont été synchronisés à partir de vos différents comptes. 3 Créez de nouveaux évènements et synchronisez-les avec votre compte favori. 3 Calendrier unifié : Synchronisez l'ensemble de vos calendriers en ligne et consultez votre emploi du temps d'un seul coup d'oeil. Communiquer avec vos contacts Grâce à Social Hub™ retrouvez toutes les informations de vos contacts pour une meilleure communication. 1 Accédez à votre répertoire à partir de l'écran d'accueil. 2 Retrouvez en un clin d'oeil vos contacts ainsi que leur statut de connexion. 3 Sélectionnez un contact et choisissez le moyen de communication souhaité : SMS, MMS, e-mail, messagerie instantannée. Consulter vos messages Avec Social Hub™, gérez vos messages et vos conversations en toute simplicité grâce à un système de notifications intégré. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Social Hub.56 Divertissements Divertissements Appareil photo Découvrez comment capturer et visionner des photos et des vidéos. Vous pouvez prendre des photos d'une résolution allant jusqu’à 2560 x 1920 pixels (5 mégapixels) et enregistrer des vidéos d'une résolution allant jusqu’à 1280 x 720 pixels. › Capturer une photo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. • L’interface de l’appareil photo s’affiche uniquement en mode paysage. • L’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. • Il est possible que les capacités de la mémoire diffèrent en fonction de la scène photographiée ou des conditions de prise de vue. 3 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 8 9 10 2 3 5 6 1 7 4 Divertissements 57 Numéro Fonction 6 Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. 7 Afficher ou masquer les icônes sur l’objectif. 8 Basculer en mode Caméscope. 9 Capturer une photo. 10 Ouvrir la fenêtre de visualisation des photos pour afficher les dernières photos capturées. 4 Appuyez sur la touche de volume pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Vous pouvez aussi appuyer sur l’écran avec deux doigts, puis les écarter (rapprochez vos doigts pour faire un zoom arrière). Numéro Fonction 1 Barre d'état et de paramètres : • : résolution • : type de mesure d’exposition • : GPS activé • : nombre de photos que vous pouvez prendre (en fonction de la mémoire disponible) • : emplacement de stockage par défaut 2 Basculer entre l’objectif avant et arrière. 3 Modifier le mode de prise de vue. 4 Modifier le mode de scène. 5 Régler la valeur d’exposition.58 Divertissements › Capturer une photo à l’aide des options prédéfinies Votre appareil photo propose des paramètres prédéfinis pour différents types de scènes. Il vous suffit de sélectionner le mode approprié aux conditions et aux sujets de vos prises de vue. Par exemple, si vous prenez des photos la nuit, sélectionnez le mode Nuit dont l’exposition sera supérieure à une photo prise de jour. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → une scène → . 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. 5 Appuyez à l’endroit où vous souhaitez effectuer la mise au point. Le cadre de l’image se déplace à l’endroit où vous appuyez et devient vert lorsque la mise au point du sujet est terminée. 6 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. La photo est enregistrée automatiquement. Après avoir pris des photos, appuyez sur l’icône de visualisation des photos pour les visionner. • Faites défiler vers la gauche ou la droite pour afficher toutes les photos. • Appuyez sur ou pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière, vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur l’écran. • Pour envoyer une photo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager. • Pour définir la photo en tant que fond d’écran ou l’attribuer à un correspondant, appuyez sur Définir comme. • Pour supprimer une photo, appuyez sur Supprimer.Divertissements 59 3 Appuyez sur → Sourire. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur . 6 Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo vers le sujet. Votre appareil reconnaît les visages sur une photo et détecte leur sourire. Lorsque le sujet sourit, l’appareil prend automatiquement une photo. › Capturer une série de photos Vous pouvez facilement capturer une série de photos de sujets en mouvement. Ceci est utile lorsque vous réalisez des photos d’enfants en train de jouer ou d’évènements sportifs par exemple. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Continu. › Capturer une photo en mode Beauté Vous pouvez masquer les imperfections des visages en utilisant le mode Beauté. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Beauté. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. › Capturer une photo en mode Sourire Votre appareil photo peut reconnaître les visages et vous aider à prendre des photos lorsque vos sujets sourient. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage.60 Divertissements 6 Déplacez doucement le téléphone dans une direction et alignez le cadre vert avec l’objectif. Lorsque le cadre vert est aligné avec l’objectif, l’appareil photo prend automatiquement la photo suivante. 7 Répétez l’étape 6 pour terminer la photo panoramique. › Capturer une photo en mode Vintage Vous pouvez capturer des photos et leur donner un aspect et une impression vintage en appliquant des filtres de couleur. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Vintage. 4 Appuyez sur pour choisir un filtre de couleur. 5 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 6 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Maintenez la touche enfoncée. L’appareil photo multiplie les prises de vue jusqu’à ce que vous relâchiez le déclencheur. › Capturer une photo en mode Panorama Vous pouvez prendre de larges photos panoramiques en utilisant le mode Panorama. Ce mode est conseillé pour photographier les paysages. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Panorama. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre la première photo.Divertissements 61 6 Appuyez sur pour prendre la première photo. La moitié de la première photo s’affiche sous forme de calque transparent pour la photo suivante. 7 Procédez à tous les réglages nécessaires à l’aide du guide. 8 Appuyez sur pour prendre la seconde photo. Le téléphone assemble automatiquement la moitié de la première photo et la moitié de la seconde photo pour ne former qu’un seul cliché. › Capturer une photo en mode Action Vous pouvez capturer des photos d’un sujet en mouvement et les assembler en une seule photo pour illustrer l’action. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Action. › Capturer une photo assemblée Vous pouvez capturer deux photos avec le même arrièreplan, puis assembler les moitiés gauche et droite de chaque photo pour ne former qu’un seul cliché. Cette fonction est utile lorsque vous voulez prendre une photo de vousmême avec un ami, mais que personne d’autre n’est là pour effectuer la prise de vue à votre place. Dans ce mode, l’image prévisualisée apparaît agrandie, mais les fichiers sont sauvegardés et maintenus à un niveau de qualité normal. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur → Ajoutez-moi. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez à droite ou à gauche, à l’endroit où vous souhaitez prendre la première photo.62 Divertissements 3 Appuyez sur → Dessin animé. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. › Capturer une photo en mode Autoportrait Vous pouvez prendre facilement des photos de vous-même en utilisant l’objectif avant. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage. 3 Appuyez sur . 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. 4 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 5 Appuyez sur pour capturer la première photo. 6 Déplacez le téléphone afin de suivre le sujet en mouvement. L’appareil capture automatiquement les clichés suivants. 7 Continuez de suivre le sujet jusqu’à ce que l’appareil ait capturé tous les clichés nécessaires pour composer la photo d’action. › Capturer une photo en mode Dessin animé Vous pouvez prendre une photo avec des effets de dessin animé. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo. 2 Faites pivoter le téléphone vers la gauche pour passer en mode paysage.Divertissements 63 Option Fonction Effets Appliquer des effets spéciaux, par exemple des tons sépia ou noir et blanc. ISO Régler la sensibilité du capteur d’images. Mesure Sélectionner un type d’indice d’exposition. Stabilisateur Réduire les flous dus aux vibrations ou aux mouvements de l’appareil. Contraste auto Ajuster automatiquement les contrastes entre votre sujet et l’arrière-plan. Détection clignements Régler l’appareil photo pour qu’il vous alerte lorsqu’il détecte des yeux fermés. Qualité d’image Définir le niveau de qualité des photos. Ajuster Régler le contraste, la saturation et la netteté. › Personnaliser les paramètres de l’appareil photo Avant de prendre une photo, appuyez sur → pour accéder aux options suivantes: Option Fonction Visibilité extérieure Activer ou désactiver la visibilité extérieure pour sélectionner des conditions de luminosité appropriées. Mode mise au point Prendre des photos en gros plan ou bien paramétrer l’appareil pour qu’il effectue automatiquement une mise au point sur des sujets ou des visages. Retardateur Sélectionner le délai à l'issue duquel l’appareil doit prendre une photo. Résolution Modifier l’option de résolution. Balance des blancs Régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction des conditions d’éclairage.64 Divertissements › Enregistrer une vidéo